Updatd

Home EU関連情報

自動車型式認定関係
UN/ECE Regulation定義 用語一覧
数・A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z 記号・ギリシャ文字 【末尾】
情報源(Source) 自動車型式認定関係 UN/ECE Regulation類 一覧 も併せてご参照を

UN/ECE自動車型式認定以外の用語は 環境、省エネ、安全規制関係 用語 一覧 をご参照下さい。
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
1 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First axis (symbol 1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.9. "First axis (symbol 1)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane;		 No.104 2014-03-14
2 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second axis (symbol 2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.12. "Second axis (symbol 2)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90° ＜ β1 ＜ 90° as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.		 No.104 2014-03-14
3 point belt [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 3-point belt strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points;		 No.080 2013-08-24
30 minute power (Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at Direct Current (DC) voltage as set out in paragraph 5.3.2 of Regulation No 85.		 No.083 2015-07-03
30 minute power (Maximum) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average.		 No.085 2006-11-24
30 minute power (Maximum) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1 of this Regulation, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average;		 No.085 2014-11-07
3D H machine [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.014 2007-12-06
3D H machine [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.016 2007-11-30
3D H machine [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.017 2006-12-27
3D H machine [No.017 2010-08-31A3] 　 3-D H machine seats, their anchorages and any head restraints [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
APPENDIX 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL "H" POINT MACHINE (*) (3-D H machine)
1. BACK AND SEAT PANS
2. BODY AND LEG ELEMENTS
Figure 1 3-D H machine elements designation [図]
Figure 2 Dimensions of the 3-D H machine elements and load distribution (Dimensions in millimeters)		 No.017 2010-08-31
3D H machine [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.025 2010-08-14
3D H machine [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three-dimensional H point machine (3-D H machine) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
3D H machine [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ pointsand actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex.		 No.046 2010-07-10
3D H machine [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.080 2010-06-30
3D reference grid [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Three-dimensional reference grid Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Three-dimensional reference grid" means a reference system which consists of a vertical longitudinal plane X-Z, a horizontal plane X-Y and a vertical transverse plane Y-Z (see Annex 4, appendix, figure 6); the grid is used to determine the dimensional relationships between the position of design points on drawings and their positions on the actual vehicle. The procedure for situating the vehicle relative to the grid is specified in Annex 4; all coordinates referred to ground zero shall be based on a vehicle in running order ( 1 ) plus one front-seat passenger, the mass of the passenger being 75 kg ±1 per cent.
2.3.1. Vehicles fitted with suspension enabling their ground clearance to be adjusted shall be tested under the normal conditions of use specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.125 2010-07-31
3D reference system [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.014 2007-12-06
3D reference system [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.016 2007-11-30
3D reference system [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Three dimensional reference system Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.017 2006-12-27
3D reference system [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Three-dimensional reference system head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex;		 No.025 2010-08-14
3D reference system [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three dimensional reference system protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
3D reference system [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.046 2010-07-10
3D reference system [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.080 2010-06-30
3point belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt : A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.		 No.016 2007-11-30
3point belt [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 3-point belt Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points.		 No.080 2010-06-30
80 per cent stop valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 80 per cent stop valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
A (category, Electric regenerative braking system of ) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
a (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 a : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
A Class Headlamp [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2014-08-22
A pillar [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 A-pillar protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "A-pillar" means the foremost and outermost roof support		 No.029 2010-11-20
A pillar [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 A pillar Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "A pillar" means any roof support forward of the vertical transverse plane located 68 mm in front of the V points and includes non-transparent items such as windscreen mouldings and door frames, attached or contiguous to such a support.		 No.125 2010-07-31
A pillar [REG. No 078/2009] 　 A-pillar protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 1. "A-pillar" means the foremost and outermost roof support extending from the chassis to the roof of the vehicle; REG. No 078/2009
A, B and C (speed, engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
A, B and C (speed, engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
ABS [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 ABS (Antilock brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Antilock brake system (ABS)" means a system which senses wheel slip and automatically modulates the pressure producing the braking forces at the wheel(s) to limit the degree of wheel slip.		 No.078 2015-01-30
absorber (Energy) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber : Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.		 No.016 2007-11-30
absorber (Energy) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber
Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
absorber (Energy) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber
Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
absorber (Energy) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Energy absorber Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
absorber (Energy) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Energy absorber Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
absorber (Energy) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Energy absorber Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
acceleration (Lateral) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Lateral acceleration Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lateral acceleration" means the component of the acceleration vector of a point in the vehicle perpendicular to the vehicle x axis (longitudinal) and parallel to the road plane.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
acceleration (Lateral) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Lateral acceleration Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lateral acceleration" means the component of the acceleration vector of a point in the vehicle perpendicular to the vehicle x axis (longitudinal) and parallel to the road plane.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
acceleration (Pre) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Pre-acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pre-acceleration" means application of acceleration control device prior to AA' for the purpose of achieving stable acceleration between AA' and BB'.		 No.051 2007-05-30
acceleration (Reference) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Reference acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference acceleration" means the required acceleration during the acceleration test on the test track.		 No.051 2007-05-30
acceleration (Target) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Target acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Target acceleration" means an acceleration at a partial throttle condition in urban traffic and is derived from statistical investigations.		 No.051 2007-05-30
access [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 access Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"access" means the availability of all emission-related OBD data including all fault codes required for the inspection,
diagnosis, servicing or repair of emissions related parts of the vehicle, via the serial interface of the standard diagnostic connector;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Access [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Access Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access" means the availability of all emission-related OBD data including all fault codes required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of emissions-related parts of the vehicle, via the serial interface for the standard diagnostic connection (pursuant to Appendix 1 to this Annex, paragraph 6.5.3.5).		 No.083 2012-02-15
Access passage [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half-staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1. up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the dual panel.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Access passage [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half- staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to Annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1 up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the test gauge.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Access passage [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half-staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to Annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1 up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the test gauge.		 No.107 2015-06-18
access to information [REG. No 692/2008] 　 access to information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 23. "access to information" means the availability of all vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of the vehicle. REG. No 692/2008
accessory fitted to the container [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Accessories fitted to the container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
accessory fitted to the container [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Accessories fitted to the container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container:
2.5.1. Manual valve;
2.5.2. Pressure sensor/indicator;
2.5.3. Pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
2.5.4. Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
2.5.5. Automatic cylinder valve;
2.5.6. Excess flow valve;
2.5.7. Gas-tight housing.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Accessory fitted to the container or tank [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Accessories fitted to the container or tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2015-06-30
accumulation schedule (Service) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Service accumulation schedule Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.58. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;		 No.049 2013-06-24
accumulation schedule (Service) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Service accumulation schedule Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.75. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Ackerman steer angle [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Ackerman steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackerman steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Ackermann steer angle [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Ackermann steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackermann steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
activated door locking system (Automatically) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatically activated door locking system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Automatically activated door locking system" means a system that locks the doors automatically at a pre-set speed or under any other condition as defined by the manufacturer.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Active driving possible mode [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2.21. "Active driving possible mode" means a vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) will cause the drive train to move the vehicle. No.100 2009-02-14
Active driving possible mode [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Active driving possible mode [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
active DTC [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Confirmed and active DTC Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.10. "Confirmed and active DTC" means a DTC that is stored during the time the NCD system concludes that a malfunction exists.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Actual seat back angle [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Actual seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle formed by the vertical through the ‘H’ point with the torso reference line of the human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.		 No.061 2010-06-30
Actual seat back angle [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Actual seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Actual torso angle [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Actual torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);		 No.014 2007-12-06
Actual torso angle [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Actual torso angle Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design
torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below):		 No.016 2007-11-30
Actual torso angle [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Actual torso angle Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below);		 No.017 2006-12-27
Actual torso angle [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Actual torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.025 2010-08-14
Actual torso angle [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Actual torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.029 2010-11-20
Actual torso angle [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Actual torso angle Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line usingthe back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torsoangle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.046 2010-07-10
Actual torso angle [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Actual torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3 DH machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);		 No.080 2010-06-30
Actuation [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Actuation Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Actuation [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Actuation Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Actuation [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Actuation Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Actuation [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Actuation Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
adaptability (self) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 self adaptability Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "self adaptability" means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant;		 No.049 2008-04-12
adaptability (self) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 self adaptability Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "self adaptability" means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Adaptive front lighting system [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);		 No.048 2011-12-06
Adaptive front lighting system [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped- beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam); No.048 2008-05-23
adaptive front-lighting systems [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems SCOPE
This Regulation applies to adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) for motor vehicles		 No.123 2006-12-27
additional anchorage [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 additional anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
additional anchorage [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 additional anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in Annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Additional lighting unit [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Additional lighting unit headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Additional lighting unit" means the part of a headlamp system that provides the bend lighting. It is independent from the device that provides the principal passing beam, may consist of optical, mechanical and electrical components, and it may be grouped and/or reciprocally incorporated with other lighting or light- signalling devices.		 No.113 2014-06-14
Additional steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Additional steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.2.4. "Additional steering equipment" means a system, independent of the main steering system, by which the steering angle of one or more axle(s) of the steering system can be influenced selectively for manoeuvring purposes. No.079 2008-05-27
Adhesion on wet surface [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Adhesion on wet surfaces Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.1. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT).		 No.117 2011-11-23
Adhesion on wet surfaces [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Adhesion on wet surfaces Tyre noise and wet grip 2.11. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT). No.117 2008-08-29
Adjacent [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Adjacent Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Adjacent", with respect to a symbol identifying a control, tell-tale or indicator, means that the symbol is in close proximity to the control, tell-tale or indicator and no other control, tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol or source of illumination appears between an identification symbol and the control, tell-tale, or indicator which that symbol identifies.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Adjacent [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Adjacent Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Adjacent" means that no control, tell-tale, indicator or other potential source of distraction appears between the identifying symbol and the tell-tale, indicator or control which that symbol identifies.		 No.121 2016-01-08
Adjacent [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Adjacent Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Adjacent" means that no control, tell-tale, indicator, or other potential source of distraction appearsbetween the identifying symbol and the tell-tale, indicator, or control which that symbol identifies.		 No.121 2010-07-10
Adjustable limit speed Vadj [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable limit speed Vadj Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Adjustable limit speed Vadj" means the speed voluntarily set by the driver;		 No.089 2007-06-19
Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF" means a function which allows the driver to set a vehicle speed Vadj, and when activated limits the vehicle automatically to that speed;		 No.089 2007-06-19
adjuster (flow, Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.33. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.		 No.110 2015-06-30
adjuster (flow, Gas) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.18. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.		 No.110 2011-05-07
adjuster (Quick) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Quick adjuster Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement		 No.129 2014-03-29
adjuster mounted directly on child restraint [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System" means an adjuster for the harness belt which is directly mounted on the Child Restraint System, as opposed to being directly supported by the strap that it is designed to adjust.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Adjusting device [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Adjusting device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the belt or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the belt.		 No.129 2014-03-29
adjusting device (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
adjusting device (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device : A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.		 No.016 2007-11-30
adjusting device (Belt) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Adjusting device [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Adjusting device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Adjusting device [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adjusting device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement.
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Adjustment [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Adjustment Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.18. "Adjustment" means the use of the means provided by the system for vertical and/or horizontal aiming of the beam;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Adjustment [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Adjustment Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.18. "Adjustment" means the use of the means provided by the system for vertical and/or horizontal aiming of the beam;		 No.123 2010-08-24
adjustment device for height (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
adjustment device for height (Belt) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Adjustment factor [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Adjustment factors Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.1. "Adjustment factors" mean additive (upward adjustment factor and downward adjustment factor) or multiplicative factors to be considered during the periodic (infrequent) regeneration;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Adjustment system [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Adjustment system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.11.1. Longitudinal displacement;
2.11.2. Vertical displacement;
2.11.3. Angular displacement;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Adjustment system [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Adjustment system strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the seated occupant;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Adjustment system [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Adjustment system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Adjustment system" means the complete device by which the vehicle seat or its parts can be adjusted to suit the physique of the seat's adult occupant; this device may, in particular, permit longitudinal displacement, and/or vertical displacement, and/or angular displacement		 No.129 2014-03-29
adjustment system (inclination, Horizontal) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS (Horizontal inclination adjustment system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Horizontal inclination adjustment system (HIAS)" means a device that adjusts the horizontal inclination of the headlamp towards zero;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Adjustment system [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Adjustment system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.12.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.12.2. vertical displacement;
2.12.3. angular displacement;		 No.014 2007-12-06
adjustment system [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 adjustment system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.11.1. longitudinal displacement,
2.11.2. vertical displacement,
2.11.3. angular displacement;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Adjustment system [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Adjustment system Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.6. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant. This device may, in particular, permit:
2.6.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.6.2. vertical displacement;
2.6.3. angular displacement;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Adjustment system [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Adjustment system seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant. This device may, in particular, permit:
2.6.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.6.2. vertical displacement;
2.6.3. angular displacement;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Adjustment system [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Adjustment system Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant.
This device may, in particular, permit:
2.9.1. longitudinal displacement,
2.9.2. vertical displacement,
2.9.3. angular deplacement;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Adjustment system [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Adjustment system head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant.
This device may, in particular, permit:
2.9.1. longitudinal displacement,
2.9.2. vertical displacement,
2.9.3. angular displacement;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Adjustment system [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Adjustment system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Adjustment system" means the complete device by which the vehicle seat or its parts can be adjusted to suit the physique of the seat's adult occupant; this device may, in particular, permit:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement; and/or
2.21.2. vertical displacement; and/or
2.21.3. angular displacement.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Adjustment system [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adjustment system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Adjustment system" means the complete device by which the vehicle seat or its parts can be adjusted to suit the physique of the seat's adult occupant; this device may, in particular, permit:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement; and/or
2.21.2. vertical displacement; and/or
2.21.3. angular displacement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Adjustment system [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Adjustment system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the seated occupant;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Adjustment system of the seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. Longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. Vertical displacement;
2.21.3. Angular displacement.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Adjustment system of the seat [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. vertical displacement;
2.21.3. angular displacement.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Adjustment system of the seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. vertical displacement;
2.21.3. angular displacement.		 No.016 2011-09-09
ADR [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
Adult safety-belt webbing guide [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Adult safety-belt webbing guide [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Advanced Driver Assistance Steering System [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Advanced Driver Assistance Steering System Steering equipment 2.3.4. "Advanced Driver Assistance Steering System" means a system, additional to the main steering system, that provides assistance to the driver in steering the vehicle but in which the driver remains at all times in primary control of the vehicle. It comprises one or both of the following functions: No.079 2008-05-27
Advanced Emergency Braking System [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
advanced emergency braking system [REG. No 661/2009] 　 advanced emergency braking system safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 5. "advanced emergency braking system" means a system which can automatically detect an emergency situation and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision; REG. No 661/2009
AEBS [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
AEBS (type with regard to its, Vehicle) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) Vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Advanced Emergency Braking System;
(c) The type and design of the Advanced Emergency Braking System.		 No.131 2014-07-19
AECS [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
AECS [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Aerial [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Aerial external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Aerial" means any device used for transmitting and/or receiving electromagnetic signals.		 No.026 2010-08-14
AES [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 AES (Auxiliary Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those conditions exist;		 No.049 2013-06-24
AFS [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);		 No.048 2011-12-06
AFS [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems SCOPE
This Regulation applies to adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) for motor vehicles		 No.123 2006-12-27
AFS [No.123 2006-12-271] 　 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1.; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2006-12-27
AFS [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped- beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2010-08-24
AFS control signal [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 AFS control signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.5. "AFS control signal" (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4. of this Regulation; No.048 2008-05-23
AFS control signal [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 AFS control signal (V, E, W, T) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.5. "AFS control signal" (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation;		 No.048 2011-12-06
after treatment device (Particulate) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Particulate after-treatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
after treatment device (Particulate) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Particulate after-treatment device Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.59. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PM) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
after treatment system (Exhaust) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Exhaust after-treatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation, 3-way or any other), particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter, or any other emission reducing device, that is installed downstream of the engine;		 No.049 2013-06-24
after treatment system (Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust after-treatment system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.33. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst, particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) and turbochargers, which are considered an integral part of the engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
after treatment system family (Engine) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine after-treatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Engine after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
after treatment system family (Engine) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine after treatment system family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.28. "Engine-after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that complies with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into a family of engine families utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
aftertreatment device (particulate) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
aftertreatment device (particulate) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
aftertreatment system (exhaust) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
aftertreatment system (exhaust) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
aftertreatment system family (engine-) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
aftertreatment system family (engine-) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Ageing cycle [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Ageing cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Ageing cycle" means the vehicle or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Ageing cycle [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ageing cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.2. "Ageing cycle" means the machine or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
agricultural tractor [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 agricultural tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. For the purposes of this Regulation "agricultural tractor" means any power-driven vehicle, either wheeled or tracklaying, which has at least two axles, whose function depends essentially on its tractive power, and which is specially designed to pull, push, carry or actuate certain implements, machines or trailers intended for use in agriculture or forestry. Such a tractor may be arranged to carry a load and attendants;		 No.071 2004-03-31
agricultural tractor [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 agricultural tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. For the purposes of this Regulation "agricultural tractor" means any power-driven vehicle, either wheeled or tracklaying, which has at least two axles, whose function depends essentially on its tractive power, and which is specially designed to pull, push, carry or actuate certain implements, machines or trailers intended for use in agriculture or forestry. Such a tractor may be arranged to carry a load and attendants.		 No.071 2010-07-31
agricultural tyre (Type of) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Type of agricultural tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of agricultural tyre" means a category of tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the manufacturer;
2.1.2. tyre-size designation;
2.1.3. category of use:
(a) Tractor - Steering wheel:
(b) Tractor - Drive wheel - standard tread
(c) Tractor - Drive wheel - special tread
(d) Implement - traction:
(e) Implement - trailer;
(f) Implement - mixed applications;
(g) Forestry machines — standard tread;
(h) Forestry machines — special tread.
2.1.4. structure (diagonal (bias-ply), bias-belted, radial-ply);
2.1.5. speed category symbol;
2.1.6. load capacity index;
2.1.7. tyre cross-section;		 No.106 2010-09-30
aid (Starting) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.;		 No.083 2012-02-15
aid (Starting) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.		 No.083 2015-07-03
aid (Starting) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Starting aid CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine starting without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture, e.g. glow plug, changed injection timing, etc.;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Aiming [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Aiming Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.17. "Aiming" means the positioning of the beam or part thereof on an aiming screen according to the relevant criteria;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Aiming [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Aiming Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.17. "Aiming" means the positioning of the beam or part thereof on an aiming screen according to the relevant criteria;		 No.123 2010-08-24
air (Secondary) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Secondary air Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Secondary air" refers to air introduced into the exhaust system by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO contained in the exhaust gas stream		 No.083 2012-02-15
Air bag [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Air-bag protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Air-bag" means a flexible bag that is designed to be filled with a gas under pressure, and is:
2.7.1. Designed to protect the vehicle driver in an impact against the steering control;
2.7.2. Inflated by a device which is actuated in case of vehicle's impact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
air mixer (Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas/air mixer using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.31. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Airbag [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Air-bag Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.7. "Air-bag" means a flexible bag that is designed to be filled with a gas under pressure, and is:
2.7.1. designed to protect the vehicle driver in an impact against the steering control;
2.7.2. inflated by a device which is actuated in case of vehicle's impact;		 No.012 2008-06-26
Airbag [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Airbag Interior fittings 2.17. "Airbag" means a device installed to supplement safety belts and restraint systems in power driven vehicles, i.e. systems which in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploy a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the severity of the contacts of one or more parts of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment. No.021 2008-07-16
Airbag [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Airbag" means a device installed to supplement safety belts and restraint systems in power- driven vehicles, i.e. systems which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle, automatically deploy a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.		 No.094 2012-09-20
airbag (Passenger) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.016 2015-11-20
airbag (Passenger) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver’s in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.094 2012-09-20
airbag (Passenger) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.016 2007-11-30
airbag (Passenger) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver’s in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.016 2011-09-09
airbag (Passenger) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Passenger airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.094 2010-05-28
Airbag [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Airbag" means a device installed to supplement safety belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. systems which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle, automatically deploy a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.		 No.094 2010-05-28
Airbag assembly [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Airbag assembly [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Airbag assembly [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Alarm (Panic) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Panic Alarm alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Panic Alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.		 No.097 2012-05-08
alarm (Panic) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Panic alarm Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.12. "Panic alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.		 No.116 2012-02-16
alarm (Panic) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Panic alarm Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.12. "Panic alarm" means a device that enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Alarm system [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 AS (Alarm system(s)) alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P3] 　 AS (Alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer"s trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.116 2012-02-16P3] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS,
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.116 2010-06-30
alarm system (Vehicle) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 VAS (Vehicle alarm system) alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle;		 No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (Vehicle) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 VAS (Vehicle alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (Vehicle) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Vehicle alarm system (VAS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2010-06-30
alarm system (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below;		 No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.		 No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.		 No.116 2010-06-30
alarm system (vehicle, Type of) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment;		 No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (vehicle, Type of) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of sensor,
(c) the kind of warning device,
(d) the kind of control equipment.		 No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (vehicle, Type of) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Alarm system(s) [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Alarm system(s) (AS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2010-06-30
alert signal (collision, Rear end) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision		 No.048 2011-12-06
All composite container [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 All-composite container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.		 No.067 2008-03-14
All wheel steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 All-wheel steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.3.1. "All-wheel steering equipment" in which all the wheels are steered; No.079 2008-05-27
Alternative fuel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non- mineral oil derived;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Alternative fuel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non-mineral oil derived.		 No.083 2015-07-03
alternative fuel vehicle [REG. No 595/2009] 　 alternative fuel vehicle emissions 14. "alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non-mineral oil derived;u REG. No 595/2009
Amber [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Amber Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] A12,A23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Amber (Night-time Colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Amber (Night-time Colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries [表] A12,A23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Ambinocular vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Ambinocular vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2."Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of the mon ocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below).
Figure 3		 No.046 2014-08-08
Ambinocular vision [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Ambinocular vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.2. "Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of themonocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below). [図]		 No.046 2010-07-10
an even number of lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" includes a single illuminating surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The illuminating surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual illuminating surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual illuminating surfaces.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Anchorage [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Anchorage strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Anchorage" means a part of the floor or of the body of a vehicle to which a seat may be fixed;		 No.080 2013-08-24
anchorage (additional) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 additional anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
anchorage (Belt) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;		 No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (belt) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;		 No.014 2011-04-28
anchorage (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (belt, Effective) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage;
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. Where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (belt, Effective) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Effective belt anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4., the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example,
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (low, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;		 No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (low, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.		 No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix low anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.014 2011-04-28
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (low, ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.		 No.016 2011-09-09
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix low anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
anchorage (Restraint) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Restraint anchorages Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in Annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg.
2.14.2. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;
2.14.3. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
anchorage (Seat) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Seat anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (Seat) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage
The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (Seat) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Seat anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (seat) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 seat anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2011-04-28
anchorage (Seat) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage : The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (Seat) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage
The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
anchorage (seat, Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.129 2014-03-29
anchorage (seat, Vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
anchorage (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
anchorage (tether, top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (tether, top, Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (tether, top. ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
anchorage (top-tether, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Isofix top-tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top-tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Anchorage [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Anchorage Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.5. "Anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Anchorage [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Anchorage seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Anchorage [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Anchorage Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Anchorage" means a part of the floor or of the body of a vehicle to which a seat may be fixed;		 No.080 2010-06-30
anchorage system (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;		 No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage system (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX anchorage system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "ISOFIX anchorage system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX Child Restraint System in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.11.1. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.
2.11.2. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.3. of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX Child Restraint System structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.		 No.129 2014-03-29
anchorages (Belt) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Belt anchorages Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;		 No.014 2007-12-06
anchorages (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages : Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2007-11-30
anchorages (Belt) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2011-09-09
anchorages (Restraint) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Restraint anchorages Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix anchorages system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2007-12-06
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix anchorages system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2011-04-28
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2007-11-30
anchorages system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2011-09-09
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix anchorages system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
angle (Bank) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Bank angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bank angle" means: the angle made with the vertical by the vertical longitudinal median plane of the motorcycle, when the motorcycle is rotated about its longitudinal axis (see drawing in Annex 6);		 No.053 2013-06-18
angle (Entrance) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Entrance angle (symbol β) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol β)" means the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90° but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0° ＜ β ＜ 180°. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, β 1 and β 2 ;		 No.104 2014-03-14
angle (entrance, component of the, First) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180° ＜ β1 ＜ 180°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
angle (entrance, component of the, Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90° ＜ β2 ＜ 90°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
angle (Illumination) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Illumination angle Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Illumination angle" means the angle between the axis of reference and the straight line connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the source of illumination.		 No.003 2011-12-06
angle (Observation ) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation angle (symbol α) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol α)" means the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles;		 No.104 2014-03-14
angle (pitch, CRF) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 CRF pitch angle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "CRF pitch angle" is the angle between the bottom surface of the fixture ISO/F2 (B) as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2, Figure 2) and the horizontal Z plane of the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 14 (Annex 4, Appendix 2), with the fixture installed in the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2).		 No.129 2014-03-29
angle (Rotation) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Rotation angle (symbol ε) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.8. "Rotation angle (symbol ε)" means the angle indicating the orientation of the retro-reflecting material by an appropriate symbol with respect to rotation about the reference axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
angle (Seat back) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Seat back angle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Seat back angle" means the design torso angle as defined in annex 19 of this Regulation.		 No.043 2010-08-31
angle (seat back, Design) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Design seat-back angle safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle between the vertical line through the R point and the torso line defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.043 2014-02-12
angle (Seat-back) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Seat-back angle" means the inclination of the seat back in relation to the vertical.		 No.061 2010-06-30
angle (seat-back, Actual) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Actual seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle formed by the vertical through the ‘H’ point with the torso reference line of the human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.		 No.061 2010-06-30
angle (seat-back, Design) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Design seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle prescribed by the manufacturer which:
1.5.1. determines the seat-back angle for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat by the vehicle manufacturer;
1.5.2. is formed at the ‘R’ point by the vertical and the torso reference line;
1.5.3. corresponds theoretically to the actual seat-back angle.		 No.061 2010-06-30
angle (Side-slip) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
angle (slip, Side) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
angle (steer, Ackerman) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Ackerman steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackerman steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
angle (steer, Ackermann) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Ackermann steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackermann steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
angle (test, HIAS) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS test angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "HIAS test angle" means the angle δ created by the headlamp cut-off line and HH line (in case of an asymmetrical beam headlamp, the horizontal part of the cut-off shall be used), (see drawing in Annex 6).		 No.053 2013-06-18
angle (torso, Actual) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Actual torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);		 No.014 2007-12-06
angle (torso, Actual) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Actual torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.025 2010-08-14
angle (torso, Actual) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Actual torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.029 2010-11-20
angle (torso, Actual) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Actual torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3 DH machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);		 No.080 2010-06-30
angle (torso, Design) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Design torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
angle (torso, Design) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Design torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.025 2010-08-14
angle (torso, Design) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Design torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
angle (torso, Design) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Design torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
angle of a windscreen (Inclination) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Inclination angle of a windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.15.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 ± 1 kg;
2.15.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer.		 No.043 2014-02-12
angle of a windscreen (Inclination) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Inclination angle of a windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.12.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 ± 1 kg;
2.12.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Angle of divergence [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Angle of divergence Retro-reflecting devices 2.5. "Angle of divergence" means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination. No.003 2009-01-31
Angle of divergence [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angle of divergence Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Angle of divergence" means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Angle of geometric visibility [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Angle of geometric visibility [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal.		 No.074 2013-06-18
Angle of geometric visibility [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp is visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 to this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Angle of rotation [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Angle of rotation Retro-reflecting devices 2.7. "Angle of rotation" means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position. No.003 2009-01-31
Angle of rotation (ε) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Angle of rotation (ε) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.12. Angle of rotation ε
Angle through which the sample is turned about its vertical axis from any arbitrarily established position counterclockwise (+ ε) or clockwise (– ε) viewed in the direction of illumination. If retro- reflective materials or devices have a marking (e.g. TOP), this marking governs the starting position. The angle of rotation ε lies in the range – 180° < ε ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Angle of rotation [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angle of rotation Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Angle of rotation" means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Angles of geometric visibility [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Angles of geometric visibility installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. Angles of geometric visibility
"Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of a sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp.
This shall not apply to any obstacles existing at the time when the lamp is approved if approval is required.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
angles of geometric visibility [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 angles of geometric visibility installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10. angles of geometric visibility
means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, there must be a parallel shift in the direction of observation to achieve the same accuracy. No account is taken of obstacles on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility, if they were already present when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof must be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Appendix 1);		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Angles of geometric visibility [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.13. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Angles of geometric visibility [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see explanatory figure below).[図]		 No.086 2010-09-30
Angular diameter of the receiver [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the receiver as seen from the reference centre (β1 = β2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
Angular diameter of the retro reflector sample [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination
or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.003 2009-01-31
Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (η) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (symbol η)", the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.069 2010-07-31
anti lock device [No.078 2004-03-31A4] 　 anti-lock device Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. An "anti-lock device" is a component of a service braking system which automatically controls the degree of slip, in the direction of rotation of the wheel(s) on one or more wheels of the vehicle during braking;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Anti rotation device [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Anti-rotation device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) An anti-rotation device for an i-Size child restraint system consists of either a top tether or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(d) For ISOFIX, i-Size, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Anti rotation device [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether,
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact,
(c) An anti-rotation device for an i-Size child restraint system consists of either a top tether or a support leg, which is intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact,
(d) For ISOFIX, i-Size, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Anti rotation device [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Anti-rotation device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Anti-rotation device" means a device intended to limit the rotation of the Child Restraint System during a vehicle impact and consisting of:
(a) A top-tether strap; or
(b) A support-leg.
Meeting the requirements of this Regulation and fitted to an ISOFIX anchorage system and ISOFIX top tether anchorages or vehicle floor contact surface meeting the requirements of Regulation No. 14.
An "Anti-rotation device" for a "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" Child Restraint System may comprise a top tether, a support-leg or any other means capable of limiting the rotation.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Anti rotation device [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2007-12-06
anti rotation device [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 anti-rotation device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top-tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Anti rotation device [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Anti rotation device [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Anti rotation device [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Anti-rotation device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Anti rotation device [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Anti-rotation device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Anticlockwise [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning of ‘Clockwise’.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Anticlockwise [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered;
2.11.1. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Antilock brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 ABS (Antilock brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Antilock brake system (ABS)" means a system which senses wheel slip and automatically modulates the pressure producing the braking forces at the wheel(s) to limit the degree of wheel slip.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Apparent light emitting area [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Apparent light emitting area Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.10. Apparent light emitting area: area that contains the (apparent) element of visible radiation when observed under a certain viewing axis. The apparent light emitting area is defined in a plane that contains the light centre and that is perpendicular to the corresponding viewing axis.		 No.128 2014-05-29
apparent surface [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 apparent surface installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7. apparent surface
for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of either:
- the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b), or.
- the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see drawings at Appendix 1);		 Directive 2009/067/EC
apparent surface [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.10. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b);
or the light-emitting surface (c-d);
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation).
Only in the case of a light-signalling device producing variable luminous intensities, its apparent surface that may be variable as specified in paragraph 2.7.1.3. shall be considered under all conditions permitted by the variable intensity control, if applicable.		 No.048 2008-05-23
apparent surface [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b),
or the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation);		 No.053 2013-06-18
apparent surface [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b),
or the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation);		 No.074 2013-06-18
apparent surface [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens;
or the light-emitting surface;
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens. Different examples of the application of apparent surface can be found in Annex 3 to this Regulation.
Only in the case of a light-signalling device producing variable luminous intensities, its apparent surface that may be variable as specified in paragraph 2.7.1.3 shall be considered under all conditions permitted by the variable intensity control, if applicable;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Apparent surface [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation, means the orthogonal projection of the light-emitting surface in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation (see Annex 3).		 No.086 2010-09-30
Applicable emission limit [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Applicable emission limit Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.3. "Applicable emission limit" means an emission limit to which an engine is subject;		 No.096 2014-03-22
applications tyre (Mixed) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Mixed applications tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Mixed applications tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to either driven and non-driven axles of implements, agricultural machinery or trailers;		 No.106 2010-09-30
approval (Extension of) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Extension of approval Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extension of approval" means the official process in which a modified vehicle type is approved on the basis of an earlier approved vehicle type, by comparison of structure, potential energy and residual space criteria.		 No.066 2007-12-06
approval (Extension of) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Extension of approval Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Extension of approval" means the official process in which a modified vehicle type is approved on the basis of an earlier approved vehicle type, by comparison of structure, potential energy and residual space criteria.		 No.066 2011-03-30
approval (type) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 type approval reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.023 2014-08-08
approval (Type) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Type approval Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.91. "Type approval" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its emissions measured in accordance with the procedures specified in this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
approval (Vehicle) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle approval external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle approval" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections;		 No.061 2010-06-30
Approval of a device [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Approval of a device Close coupling devices 2.1.2. "Approval of a device" means the approval of a type of close-coupling device conforming to the requirements set out in Section I below; No.102 2008-12-30
Approval of a drive train [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Approval of a drive train [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2006-11-24
Approval of a motor cycle [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Approval of a motor cycle noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.1. "Approval of a motor cycle" means the approval of a motor cycle type with regard to noise;		 No.041 2012-11-14
Approval of a replacement catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).		 No.103 2007-06-19
Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system" means the approval of the whole or part of a silencing system adaptable to one or several specified types of motor vehicles, as regards the limitation of their noise level;		 No.059 2006-11-24
Approval of a seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Approval of a seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a seat" means an approval of a seat type as a component in relation to the protection of the occupants of forward-facing seats with regard to their strength and the design of the seat backs;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Approval of a seat [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Approval of a seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a seat" means an approval of a seat type as a component in relation to the protection of the occupants of forward-facing seats with regard to their strength and the design of the seat backs;		 No.080 2010-06-30
approval of a steering control [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 approval of a steering control Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.3. "approval of a steering control" means the approval of a steering control type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact; No.012 2008-06-26
Approval of a steering control [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Approval of a steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a steering control" means the approval of a steering control type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Approval of a tank [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Approval of a tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.4. "Approval of a tank" means the approval of a type of liquid fuel tank;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Approval of a tractor [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a tractor" means the approval of a tractor type with regard to the field of vision defined in paragraph 2.4;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Approval of a tractor [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Approval of a tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a tractor" means the approval of a tractor type with regard to the field of vision defined in paragraph 2.4.		 No.071 2010-07-31
Approval of a type of battery electric road vehicle [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Approval of a type of battery electric road vehicle Electric vehicle safety 2.3. "Approval of a type of battery electric road vehicle" means the approval of a type of electric vehicle regarding construction and functional safety requirements specific to the use of electric energy. No.100 2009-02-14
Approval of a vehic [No.018 2008-10-15] 　 Approval of a vehic Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.018 2008-10-15
approval of a vehicle [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 approval of a vehicle Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact; No.012 2008-06-26
Approval of a vehicle [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Approval of a vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Approval of a vehicle [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Approval of a vehicle [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Approval of a vehicle safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;		 No.014 2015-08-19
approval of a vehicle [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 approval of a vehicle Interior fittings 2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its interior fittings; No.021 2008-07-16
approval of a vehicle [No.034 2008-07-23] 　 approval of a vehicle Fire risks 7.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the prevention of fire risks; No.034 2008-07-23
Approval of a vehicle [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices; No.048 2008-05-23
Approval of a vehicle [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Approval of a vehicle [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Approval of a vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to driver operated controls, where such controls are fitted and to their identification.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Approval of a vehicle [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.062 2013-03-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2012-05-081] 　 Approval of a vehicle LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions specific to Part I
2.2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete, incomplete or completed vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;		 No.073 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2012-05-083] 　 Approval of a vehicle LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definitions specific to Part III
2.4.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of LPD of a type approved according to Part II of this Regulation, including, if necessary, the completion of a vehicle partially approved according to Part I;		 No.073 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Approval of a vehicle [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle Steering equipment 2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its steering equipment. No.079 2008-05-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Approval of a vehicle strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means an approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the parts of the vehicle structure to which seats are to be secured, and with regard to the installation of seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions (1):
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability
of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C);
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG (Approval D);		 No.083 2008-05-06
Approval of a vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions ( 1 ):
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG/biomethane or biofuels (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C) or which can be fuelled with either diesel fuel and biosuel or biofuel;
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG/biomethane (Approval D);		 No.083 2012-02-15
Approval of a vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions:
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG/biomethane or biofuels (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on- board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C) or which can be fuelled with either diesel fuel and biofuel or biofuel;
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG/ biomethane (Approval D).		 No.083 2015-07-03
Approval of a vehicle [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Approval of a vehicle Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;		 No.095 2015-07-10
Approval of a vehicle [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 17, 18 and 19 below.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Approval of a vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the measurement of energy consumption (fuel or electric energy);		 No.101 2012-05-26
Approval of a vehicle [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Close coupling devices 2.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle with regard to the fitting of an approved close-coupling device; No.102 2008-12-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.8. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG and/or LNG system as original equipment for the use in its propulsion system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.116 2012-02-16P3] 　 Approval of a vehicle Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Approval of a vehicle [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Approval of a vehicle Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the mode of installation, graphical design, legibility and colour, and brightness of controls, tell-tales and indicators.		 No.121 2016-01-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to door latches and door retention components.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;		 No.014 2007-12-06
approval of a vehicle [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 approval of a vehicle safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Approval of a vehicle [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the seats and their anchorages, the design of the rear parts of the seat-backs and the characteristics of their head restraints;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the seats and their anchorages, the design of the rear parts of the seat-backs and the characteristics of their head restraints;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.018 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.024 2006-11-2412] 　 Approval of a vehicle Diesel smoke and power PART II . THE INSTALLATION ON ROAD VEHICLES OF TYPE-APPROVED C.I. ENGINES
12. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
12.1 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of type approved engines for the limitation of visible pollutants from the engine,		 No.024 2006-11-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.024 2006-11-2421] 　 Approval of a vehicle Diesel smoke and power PART III . EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM A MOTOR VEHICLE WHOSE ENGINE HAS NOT BEEN SEPARATELY APPROVED
21. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of Part III of this Regulation:
21.1 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to limitation of the emission of visible pollutants from the engine;		 No.024 2006-11-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Approval of a vehicle External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Approval of a vehicle [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Approval of a vehicle external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections.		 No.026 2010-08-14
approval of a vehicle [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 approval of a vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type pursuant to the requirements of this Regulation, with regard to the protection of the occupants of the cab of a vehicle in the event of head-on impact or of overturning.		 No.029 2010-11-20
approval of a vehicle [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the liquid fuel tanks;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Approval of a vehicle [No.034 2011-04-2812] 　 Approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART IV — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE INSTALLATION OF APPROVED FUEL TANK(S)
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of liquid fuel tank(s) approved pursuant to Part III of this Regulation;		 No.034 2011-04-28
approval of a vehicle [No.034 2011-04-287] 　 approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the prevention of fire risks;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Approval of a vehicle [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation.		 No.039 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation.		 No.039 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;		 No.048 2011-12-06
approval of a vehicle [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;		 No.049 2008-04-12
approval of a vehicle [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to noise;		 No.051 2007-05-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to driver-operated controls, where such controls are fitted and to their identification;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.062 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Approval of a vehicle Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its temporary use spare wheel and tyre unit;		 No.064 2010-11-26
Approval of a vehicle [No.067 2008-03-14p2] 　 Approval of a vehicle LPG equipment [PART II] 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its specific equipment for the use of liquefied petroleum gases in its propulsion system;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;		 No.073 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;		 No.073 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means an approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the parts of the vehicle structure to which seats are to be secured, and with regard to the installation of seats;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.089 2007-06-1922] 　 Approval of a vehicle Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
2.2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to speed limitation.		 No.089 2007-06-19
Approval of a vehicle [No.089 2007-06-1923] 　 Approval of a vehicle Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
2.3.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of an SLD of a type approved in accordance with Part III of this Regulation.		 No.089 2007-06-19
approval of a vehicle [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 approval of a vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.7. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type:
- for Part II of this Regulation — with regard to the installation of an FUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation; or
- for Part III of this Regulation — with regard to its FUP;		 No.093 2002-02-01
Approval of a vehicle [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Approval of a vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.7. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type:
for Part II of this Regulation — with regard to the installation of an FUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation, or
for Part III of this Regulation - with regard to its FUP;		 No.093 2010-07-17
Approval of a vehicle [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Approval of a vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the measurement of energy consumption (fuel or electric energy);		 No.101 2007-06-19
Approval of a vehicle [No.110 2008-03-14P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) PART II
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG system as an original equipment for the use in its propulsion system;		 No.110 2008-03-14
Approval of a vehicle [No.110 2011-05-07p2] 　 Approval of a vehicle using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG system as an original equipment for the use in its propulsion system;		 No.110 2011-05-07
approval of a vehicle [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 approval of a vehicle Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means approval of a vehicle type with regard to rollover stability;		 No.111 2002-02-01
Approval of a vehicle [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Approval of a vehicle Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Approval of a vehicle Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the mode of installation,graphical design, legibility, colour, and brightness of controls, tell-tales, and indicators.		 No.121 2010-07-10
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Alarm systems 2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below; No.097 2008-12-30
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 above with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2. with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2010-09-29
approval of a vehicle Part II [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 approval of a vehicle RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 13.1.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of an RUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation; No.058 2008-08-30
approval of a vehicle Part III [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 approval of a vehicle RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 22.1.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its RUP; No.058 2008-08-30
Approval of a vehicle type [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;		 No.130 2014-06-18
Approval of a vehicle type [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Approval of a vehicle type [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Approval of a vehicle type [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;		 No.125 2010-07-31
Approval of an engine [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Approval of an engine [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Approval of an engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.4. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type or family with regard to the level of emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Approval of an engine [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of an engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
approval of an engine [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
approval of an engine [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Approval of an engine [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of an engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Approval of an engine family [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
Approval of an engine family [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2010-09-30
approval of an FUPD [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 approval of an FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "approval of an FUPD" means the approval of such a type of FUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7;		 No.093 2002-02-01
Approval of an FUPD [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Approval of an FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Approval of an FUPD" means the approval of such a type of FUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7 below;		 No.093 2010-07-17
Approval of an LPD [No.073 2012-05-082] 　 Approval of an LPD LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions specific to Part II
2.3.1. "Approval of an LPD" means the approval of a type of LPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 14;		 No.073 2012-05-08
Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
approval of an RUPD [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 approval of an RUPD RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 4.1.1. "approval of an RUPD" means the approval of such a type of RUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7 below; No.058 2008-08-30
Approval of the motor vehicle [No.028 2010-07-17] 　 Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices II. AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
11. DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this Regulation,
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.		 No.028 2010-07-17
Approval of the motor vehicle [No.028 2011-12-0611] 　 Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices 11. DEFINITIONS
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;		 No.028 2011-12-06
approval test (Type) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Type approval test Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a Child Restraint System type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
approval test (Type) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.044 2007-11-23
approval test (type) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.044 2011-09-09
approved (engine representative of the type to be) [No.024 2006-11-243] 　 engine representative of the type to be approved Diesel smoke and power PART I — EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM C.I. ENGINES
3. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
3.3 "An engine representative of the type to be approved" means the engine which develops the highest net power within the engine type,		 No.024 2006-11-24
approved (Vehicle) [No.122 2010-06-30A9] 　 Vehicles approved Heating systems [ANNEX 9] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
2. Definitions
Vehicles approved as being in compliance with the requirements applicable to EX/III vehicles under this Annex shall be deemed to comply with the requirements applicable to MEMU vehicles.		 No.122 2010-06-30
approved type (retrofit system of an, LPG or CNG, Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).		 No.115 2014-11-07
Aqueous condensation [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Aqueous condensation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.5. "Aqueous condensation" means the precipitation of water-containing constituents from a gas phase to a liquid phase. Aqueous condensation is a function of humidity, pressure, temperature, and concentrations of other constituents such as sulphuric acid. These parameters vary as a function of engine intake-air humidity, dilution-air humidity, engine air-to-fuel ratio, and fuel composition - including the amount of hydrogen and sulphur in the fuel;		 No.096 2014-03-22
area (control) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent
load;		 No.049 2008-04-12
area (control) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent load;		 No.049 2010-08-31
area (Transparent) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Transparent area Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Transparent area" means the whole glazing area, excluding any opaque obscuration and any shade band.		 No.043 2010-08-31
area (Transparent) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Transparent area Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Transparent area" means that area of a vehicle windscreen or other glazed surface whose light transmittance measured at right angles to the surface is not less than 70 per cent. In the case of armoured vehicles the light transmittance factor is not less than 60 per cent.		 No.125 2010-07-31
area of the windscreen (Transparent) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Transparent area of the windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Transparent area of the windscreen" means the glazing area contained within the design glass outline, excluding any allowed opaque obscuration (see Annex 18), but including any shade band.		 No.043 2014-02-12
area of the windscreen wipers (Operating) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2004-03-31
area of the windscreen wipers (Operating) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2010-07-31
Area of vision [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Area of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Area of vision" means that part of the field of vision which is delimited:
2.8.1. in an upward direction by a horizontal plane passing through the reference point,
2.8.2. on the plane of the road by the area, situated outside the semi-circle of vision, which extends the area of the semi-circle of vision, whose chord, 9,5 m in length, is perpendicular to and bisected by the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the driver's seat;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Area of vision [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Area of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Area of vision" means that part of the field of vision which is delimited:
2.8.1. in an upward direction by a horizontal plane passing through the reference point;
2.8.2. on the plane of the road by the area, situated outside the semi-circle of vision, which extends the area of the semi-circle of vision, whose chord, 9,5 m in length, is perpendicular to and bisected by the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the driver’s seat.		 No.071 2010-07-31
area of windscreen (Developed) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Developed area of windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured.		 No.043 2014-02-12
area of windscreen (Developed) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Developed area of windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured;		 No.043 2010-08-31
arm (Rocker) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Rocker arm Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs.		 No.060 2014-10-15
arm (Rocker) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Rocker arm Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
Armoured vehicle [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Armoured vehicle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Armoured vehicle" means a vehicle intended for the protection of conveyed passengers and/or goods and complying with armour plating anti-bullet requirements.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Articulated steering [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Articulated steering Steering equipment 2.5.2.2. "Articulated steering" means equipment in which the steering forces are produced by a change in direction of the towing vehicle and in which the movement of the steered trailer wheels is firmly linked to the relative angle between the longitudinal axis of the towing vehicle and that of the trailer; No.079 2008-05-27
Articulated vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2015-06-18
articulated vehicle (decker, Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2015-06-18
articulated vehicle (Double-decker) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Articulated vehicle [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Articulated vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate to one another, the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Articulated vehicle [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Articulated vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate to one another, the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Articulated vehicle [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Articulated vehicle [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Artificial body section [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Artificial body section [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.		 No.066 2011-03-30
AS [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 AS (Alarm system(s)) alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.097 2012-05-08
AS [No.116 2012-02-16P3] 　 AS (Alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2012-02-16
AS [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Alarm system(s) (AS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2010-06-30
ASLF (speed limitation function, Adjustable) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF" means a function which allows the driver to set a vehicle speed Vadj, and when activated limits the vehicle automatically to that speed;		 No.089 2007-06-19
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means the centuple of the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height (H) by the number expressing the nominal section width (S 1 ), both dimensions expressed in the same units.		 No.075 2011-03-30
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height in millimetres by the number expressing the nominal section width in millimetres;		 No.106 2010-09-30
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Nominal aspect ratio 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal aspect ratio" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.		 No.108 2006-07-04
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Nominal aspect ratio Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal aspect ratio" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Aspherical mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Aspherical mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10."Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which the transition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked. The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined by the radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
y=R−[式]
R: nominal radius in the spherical part
k: constant for the change of curvature
a: constant for the spherical size of the spherical primary calotte		 No.046 2014-08-08
Aspherical mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Aspherical mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10. "Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which thetransition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked.The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined bythe radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
[式] y=		 No.046 2010-07-10
Aspherical surface [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Aspherical surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9."Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Aspherical surface [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Aspherical surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9. "Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.		 No.046 2010-07-10
assembly (Airbag) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.		 No.016 2015-11-20
assembly (sub, Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2012-09-20
assembly (sub-, Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
assessment (safety, electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
assessment (safety, electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
assessment (safety, electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
assessment volume (dimension, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg dimension assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
assessment volume (foot, leg, Support) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Support leg foot assessment volume safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Support leg foot assessment volume" means the volume, as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of Annex 10 to this Regulation, in which the support leg foot of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129 will rest and therefore the vehicle floor has to intersect;		 No.014 2015-08-19
assessment volume (foot, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg foot assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
assessment volume (installation, leg, support, i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Assist System (Brake) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 BAS (Brake Assist System) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver’s brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) Assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) Is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Assist System (Brake) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Brake Assist System (BAS) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver’s brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate, or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
2.34.3. "Category C Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on multiple criteria, one of which must be the rate at which the brake pedal is applied.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Assisted steering equipment [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Assisted steering equipment Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1.2. "Different types of steering equipment"
1.2.1.2. Assisted steering equipment, in which the steering power is provided both by the muscular power of the driver
and by the special equipment defined in point 1.1.4;
Steering equipment where the steering power is normally provided solely by the special equipment defined in
point 1.1.4, but which in the event of failure of the special equipment enables the muscular power of the
driver to be used for steering, shall be considered as ‘assisted steering equipment’.		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Multiple-glazed unit" means an assembly of at least two parallel panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by one or more gap(s).
2.8.1. "Symmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit where all component panes are identical (e.g. all uniform toughened glass).
2.8.2. "Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit other than a symmetrical multiple-glazed unit).		 No.043 2014-02-12
Atmospheric pressure [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Atmospheric pressure Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.6. "Atmospheric pressure" means the wet, absolute, atmospheric static pressure. Note that if the atmospheric pressure is measured in a duct, negligible pressure losses shall be ensured between the atmosphere and the measurement location, and changes in the duct's static pressure resulting from the flow shall be accounted for;		 No.096 2014-03-22
atmospheric pressure meter (Shared) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared atmospheric pressure meter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.76. "Shared atmospheric pressure meter" means an atmospheric pressure meter whose output is used as the atmospheric pressure for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Attachment [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Attachments Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Attachments
Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.		 No.016 2015-11-20
attachment (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX attachment safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, extending from the ISOFIX child restraint system structure and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage;		 No.014 2015-08-19
attachment (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX attachment Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "ISOFIX anchorage system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX Child Restraint System in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.11.1. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.
2.11.2. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.3. of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX Child Restraint System structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.		 No.129 2014-03-29
attachment (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix attachment Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, extending from the Isofix child restraint system structure, and compatible with an Isofix low anchorage.		 No.014 2007-12-06
attachment (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.2 of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX child restraint system structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.		 No.044 2011-09-09
attachment (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether attachment Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
attachment (tether, top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether attachment" is a device to secure the Isofix top tether strap to the Isofix child restraint system.		 No.044 2007-11-23
attachment (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX child restraint system.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Attachment fitting [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Attachment fittings strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Attachment fittings" means bolts or other components used to attach the seat to the vehicle;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Attachment fittings [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Attachment fittings Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Attachment fittings" means bolts or other components used to attach the seat to the vehicle;		 No.080 2010-06-30
attachment strap (child-restraint) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Attachments [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Attachments Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Attachments : Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Attachments [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Attachments Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Attachments
Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Attachments [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Attachments Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Attachments" means parts of the child restraint, including securing components, which
enable the child restraint to be firmly secured to the vehicle structure either directly or
through the vehicle seat;
2.11.1. "support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Attachments [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Attachments Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Attachments" means parts of the child restraint, including securing components, which enable the child restraint to be firmly secured to the vehicle structure either directly or through the vehicle seat;
2.11.1. "Support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.		 No.044 2011-09-09
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.017 2006-12-27
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks inthe three-dimensional reference system.		 No.046 2010-07-10
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.080 2010-06-30
attitude (Vehicle measuring) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.025 2010-08-14
audible signal [No.028 2010-07-17] 　 audible signal (Approval of the motor vehicle) audible warning devices II. AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
11. DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this Regulation,
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.		 No.028 2010-07-17
Audible warning [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Audible warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Audible warning" means a warning by sound signal.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Audible warning [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Audible warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Audible warning" means a warning by sound signal.		 No.016 2011-09-09
audible warning devices [No.028 2005-12-16] 　 audible warning devices (AWD) Audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood
to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than ar equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2005-12-16
audible warning devices [No.028 2010-07-17] 　 audible warning devices (AWD) audible warning devices I. AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2010-07-17
authorised use (un-, Device to prevent) [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes
In the case of a system which locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver's intention.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Auto frettage [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Auto-frettage using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.47. "Auto-frettage" means a pressure application procedure used in manufacturing composite cylinders with metal liners, which strains the liner past its limit of elasticity, sufficiently to cause permanent plastic deformation which results in the liner having compressive stresses and the fibres having tensile stresses at zero internal pressure.		 No.110 2015-06-30
auto frettage [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 auto-frettage Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.2. auto-frettage: A pressure application procedure used in manufacturing composite cylinders with metal liners, which strains the liner past its limit of elasticity, sufficiently to cause permanent plastic deformation which results in the liner having compressive stresses and the fibres having tensile stresses at zero internal pressure.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Auto frettage pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Auto-frettage pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.48. "Auto-frettage pressure" means the pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.		 No.110 2015-06-30
auto frettage pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 auto-frettage pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.3. auto-frettage pressure: The pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Automated connector [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Automated connector Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Automated connector" means a system through which the electric and pneumatic connection, between the towing vehicle and towed vehicle is made automatically without direct intervention of a human operator.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Automatic braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Automatic braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Automatic coupling procedure [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Automatic coupling procedure Close coupling devices 2.1.6. "Automatic coupling procedure": A coupling procedure is automatic if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely and properly and to secure it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the safety devices without any external intervention. No.102 2008-12-30
automatic coupling requirement [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 automatic coupling requirement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.		 No.055 2006-12-27
automatic coupling requirement [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 automatic coupling requirement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Automatic cylinder valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.19. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder that controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Automatic cylinder valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.8. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder which controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Automatic disconnect [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Automatic disconnect protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Automatic disconnect [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Automatic disconnect [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Automatic valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Automatic valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.18. "Automatic valve" means a valve that is not operated manually.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Automatic valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Automatic valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.7. "Automatic valve" mans a valve which is not operated manually.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Automatically activated door locking system [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatically activated door locking system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Automatically activated door locking system" means a system that locks the doors automatically at a pre-set speed or under any other condition as defined by the manufacturer.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Automatically commanded braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Automatically commanded braking [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Automatically commanded braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Automatically commanded braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Automatically commanded steering function [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Automatically commanded steering function Steering equipment 2.3.4.1. "Automatically commanded steering function" means the function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the steering system can result from automatic evaluation of signals initiated on-board the vehicle, possibly in conjunction with passive infrastructure features, to generate continuous control action in order to assist the driver in following a particular path, in low speed manoeuvring or parking operations. No.079 2008-05-27
Automatically locking retractor [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Automatically-locking retractor Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a Child Restraint System. The term covers the following devices:
2.41.1. "Automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented.
2.41.2. "Emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the strap wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.41.2.1. Deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity);
2.41.2.2. A combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.129 2014-03-29
Automatically locking retractor (type 3) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Automatically locking retractor (type 3) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Automatically locking retractor [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Automatically locking retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.		 No.016 2011-09-09
automatically locking retractor [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 an automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic
means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2007-11-23
automatically locking retractor [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer’s physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Automatically operated service door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Automatically operated service door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Automatically operated service-door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Automatically operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Autonomous Steering System [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Autonomous Steering System Steering equipment 2.3.3. "Autonomous Steering System" means a system that incorporates a function within a complex electronic control system that causes the vehicle to follow a defined path or to alter its path in response to signals initiated and transmitted from off-board the vehicle. The driver will not necessarily be in primary control of the vehicle. No.079 2008-05-27
Auxiliary battery [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Auxiliary battery Electric vehicle safety 2.7. "Auxiliary battery" means the battery unit whose reserve of energy is used only for the auxiliary network supply No.100 2009-02-14
Auxiliary door latch [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Auxiliary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Auxiliary door latch" is a latch equipped with a fully latched position with or without a secondary latch position, and fitted to a door or door system equipped with a primary door latch system.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Auxiliary door latch system [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Auxiliary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of an auxiliary door latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
auxiliary emission control strategy [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
auxiliary emission control strategy [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Auxiliary Emission Strategy [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 AES (Auxiliary Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those conditions exist;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Auxiliary network [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Auxiliary network Electric vehicle safety 2.8. "Auxiliary network" means the assembly of auxiliary electric equipment with similar functions to the one used on vehicles equipped with an internal combustion engine. No.100 2009-02-14
Auxiliary seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Auxiliary seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Auxiliary seat" means a seat for the manikin mounted on the trolley to the rear of the seat to be tested. This seat shall be representative of the seat to be used in the vehicle behind the seat to be tested;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Auxiliary seat [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Auxiliary seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Auxiliary seat" means a seat for the manikin mounted on the trolley to the rear of the seat to be tested. This seat shall be representative of the seat to be used in the vehicle behind the seat to be tested.		 No.080 2010-06-30
Auxiliary steering equipment (ASE) [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Auxiliary steering equipment (ASE) Steering equipment 2.5.1.3. "Auxiliary steering equipment (ASE)" means a system in which the wheels on axle(s) of vehicles of categories M and N are steered in addition to the wheels of the main steering equipment in the same or opposite direction to those of the main steering equipment and/or the steering angle of the front and/or the rear wheels may be adjusted relative to vehicle behaviour. No.079 2008-05-27
Av (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Symbols and Av : definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
average specific emissions of CO2 [REG. No 443/2009] 　 average specific emissions of CO2 reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (a) "average specific emissions of CO2" means, in relation to a manufacturer, the average of the specific emissions of CO2 of all new passenger cars of which it is the manufacturer; REG. No 443/2009
AWD [No.028 2005-12-16] 　 audible warning devices (AWD) Audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood
to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than ar equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2005-12-16
AWD [No.028 2010-07-17] 　 audible warning devices (AWD) audible warning devices I. AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2010-07-17
AWD [No.028 2011-12-06] 　 AWD (warning devices) audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3 type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I);
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2011-12-06
axis (First) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First axis (symbol 1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.9. "First axis (symbol 1)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane;		 No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Illumination) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Illumination axis (symbol I) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.2. "Illumination axis (symbol I)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the light source.		 No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Observation) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation axis (symbol O) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.3. "Observation axis (symbol O)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the photometer head;		 No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Reference) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Reference axis (symbol R) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.6. "Reference axis (symbol R)" means a designated line segment originating on the reference centre which is used to describe the angular position of the retro-reflective device;		 No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Reference) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Reference axis Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. Reference axis: an axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the LED light sources are referred;		 No.128 2014-05-29
axis (Reference) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference axis Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Reference axis": an axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the filament lamp are referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
axis (Reference) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Reference axis Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Reference axis": An axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the gas-discharge light source are referred.		 No.099 2010-06-30
axis (reference, System) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 System reference axis Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1. below;		 No.123 2006-12-27
axis (reference, System) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 System reference axis Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1 below;		 No.123 2010-08-24
axis (Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second axis (symbol 2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.12. "Second axis (symbol 2)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90° ＜ β1 ＜ 90° as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.		 No.104 2014-03-14
Axis of reference [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Axis of reference installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. Axis of reference
"Axis of reference" means the characteristic axis of the light signal determined by the manufacturer of the lamp for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the tractor.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
axis of reference [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 axis of reference installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8. axis of reference
means the characteristic axis of the lamp, determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the vehicle;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Axis of reference [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Axis of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.11. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Axis of reference [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Axis of reference or reference axis Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Axis of reference [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Axis of reference (or reference axis) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Axis of reference [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 "Axis of reference" or "reference axis" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Axis of reference [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Axis of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Axis of reference" means the characteristic axis of the light signal determined by the manufacturer of the lamp for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the tractor.		 No.086 2010-09-30
axis on to the LED light source (Viewing) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Viewing axis on to the LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. Viewing axis on to the LED light source: an axis through the light centre at defined polar and azimuthal angle used to characterise photometrical properties of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
axle (mass among the, distribution of) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2016-02-18
axle (mass among the, distribution of) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Axle group [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Axle group Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Axle group" means multiple axles where the axle spread between one axle and its adjacent axle is equal to or less than 2,0 m. Where the axle spread between one axle and its adjacent axle is greater than 2,0 m, each individual axle shall be considered as an independent axle group.		 No.013 2016-02-18
axle load [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
axle load [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
axle load (Maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Maximum axle load Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum axle load" means the maximum value, as indicated by the manufacturer, of the total vertical force between the contact surfaces of the tyres or tracks of one axle and the ground and resulting from the part of the vehicle mass supported by that axle; this load may be higher than the "authorised axle load" laid down by the national administration. The sum of the axle loads may be greater than the value corresponding to the total mass of the vehicle;		 No.064 2010-11-26
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
axle load [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
axle load [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
axle trailer (Centre) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Centre axle trailer Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass.		 No.055 2006-12-27
axle trailer (Centre) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Centre axle trailer mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).		 No.055 2010-08-28
axles (distribution of mass among the) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
axles (mass among the, distribution of) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2010-09-30
axles (mass among the, distribution of) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 the distribution of mass among the axles Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "the distribution of mass among the axles" means the proportion of the maximum permissible mass borne by each axle, as declared by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.111 2002-02-01
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
B (category, Electric regenerative braking system of ) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
B (class, Front fog lamp) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 classes "B" or "F3" (Front fog lamp) Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),		 No.019 2014-08-22
B Class Headlamp [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2014-08-22
back (Camel-) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Camel-back 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
back (Seat-) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat-back Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat-back" means the part of the seat that is almost vertical, designed to support the passenger’s back, shoulders and, possibly, his head;		 No.080 2010-06-30
back angle (Seat) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Seat back angle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Seat back angle" means the design torso angle as defined in annex 19 of this Regulation.		 No.043 2010-08-31
back angle (Seat-) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6 or 2.7.		 No.125 2010-07-31
back angle (seat-, Actual) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Actual seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6.		 No.125 2010-07-31
back angle (seat-, Design) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Design seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.7.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Back door [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Back door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Back door" is a door or door system on the back end of a motor vehicle through which passengers can enter or depart the vehicle or cargo can be loaded or unloaded. It does not include:
(a) a trunk lid; or
(b) a door or window composed entirely of glazing material and whose latches and/or hinge systems are attached directly to the glazing material.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Backplate [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Backplate Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake;
2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Backplate [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Backplate Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
bag (Air) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Air-bag protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Air-bag" means a flexible bag that is designed to be filled with a gas under pressure, and is:
2.7.1. Designed to protect the vehicle driver in an impact against the steering control;
2.7.2. Inflated by a device which is actuated in case of vehicle's impact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Ballast [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Ballast Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.2.1. "Ballast" means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source; No.048 2008-05-23
Ballast [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Ballast Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.2.1. "Ballast" means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Ballast [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Ballast Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Ballast" means the electrical supply of the gas-discharge light source. This ballast may be partly or completely inside or outside the headlamp;		 No.098 2001-06-25
Ballast [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Ballast gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Ballast" means the electrical supply of the gas-discharge light source. This ballast may be partly or completely inside or outside the headlamp;		 No.098 2010-06-30
Ballast [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Ballast Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. "Ballast": Specific electrical supply for the gas-discharge light source.		 No.099 2010-06-30
band (Shade) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Shade band safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Shade band" means any area of the glazing with a reduced light transmittance, excluding any opaque obscuration.		 No.043 2014-02-12
band (Shade) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Shade band Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Shade band" means any area of the glazing with a reduced regular transmittance.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Bank angle [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Bank angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bank angle" means: the angle made with the vertical by the vertical longitudinal median plane of the motorcycle, when the motorcycle is rotated about its longitudinal axis (see drawing in Annex 6);		 No.053 2013-06-18
Barrier [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Barrier Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Barrier" means the part providing protection against direct contact to the live parts from any direction of access.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Barrier [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Barrier Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Barrier" means the part providing protection against direct contact to the live parts from any direction of access.		 No.100 2015-03-31
barrier (deformable, Mobile) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor.		 No.095 2015-07-10
barrier (deformable, Mobile) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor;		 No.095 2007-11-30
barrier (protection, Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical protection barrier protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electrical protection barrier" the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Barrier (Protection, Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical Protection Barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical Protection Barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
barrier (protection, Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical protection barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical protection barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
barrier face (Deformable) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;		 No.094 2012-09-20
barrier face (Deformable) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;		 No.094 2010-05-28
bars (Handle) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Handlebars Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Handlebars" means any part of the bar or bars connected to the head of the forks (steering head) by means of which the vehicle is steered;
2.5.1. "Handlebars: right side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.5.2. "Handlebars: left side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.5.3. "Handlebars: forward" means any part of the handlebars lying on the side farthest from the driver when seated in a driving position;		 No.060 2004-03-31
BAS [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 BAS (Brake Assist System) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver’s brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) Assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) Is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
BAS [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Brake Assist System (BAS) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver’s brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate, or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
2.34.3. "Category C Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on multiple criteria, one of which must be the rate at which the brake pedal is applied.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
base emission control strategy [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2008-04-12
base emission control strategy [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Base Emission Strategy [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 BES (Base Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AES is activated;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Base vehicle [No.105 2005-12-16] 　 Base vehicle Carriage of dangerous goods — construction of vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Base vehicle" (hereinafter referred to as "vehicle") means a chassis-cab vehicle, a tractor for semitrailer, a trailer-chassis or a trailer with a self-supporting body intended for the transport of dangerous goods;		 No.105 2005-12-16
Base vehicle [No.105 2010-08-31] 　 Base vehicle carriage of dangerous goods - constructional features 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Base vehicle" (hereinafter referred to as "vehicle") means a chassis-cab vehicle, a tractor for semi- trailer, a trailer-chassis or a trailer with a self-supporting body intended for the transport of dangerous goods;		 No.105 2010-08-31
Baseline test [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Baseline test Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Baseline test" means a stop or a series of stops carried out in order to confirm the performance of the brake prior to subjecting it to a further test such as the heating procedure or wet brake stop.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Basic tyre function [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Basic tyre function Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Basic tyre function" means the normal capability of an inflated tyre in supporting a given load up to a given speed and transmitting the driving, the steering and the braking forces to the ground on which it runs.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Basic tyre functions [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Basic tyre functions Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.33. "Basic tyre functions" means the normal capability of an inflated tyre in supporting a given load up to a given speed and transmitting the driving, the steering and the braking forces to the ground on which it runs. No.030 2008-07-30
Batch composite cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - composite cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.49. "Batch — composite cylinders" means a "batch" i.e. a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
batch composite cylinders [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - composite cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.4. batch - composite cylinders: A "batch" shall be a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having
the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Batch limit [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch limits using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.52. "Batch limits" means in no case a "batch" shall be permitted to exceed 200 finished cylinders or liners (not including destructive test cylinders or liners), or one shift of successive production, whichever is greater.		 No.110 2015-06-30
batch limits [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch limits Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.7. batch limits: In no case shall a ‘batch’ be permitted to exceed 200 finished cylinders or liners (not including destructive test cylinders or liners), or one shift of successive production, whichever is greater		 No.110 2008-03-14
Batch metal cylinder and liner [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - metal cylinders and liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.50. "Batch — metal cylinders and liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2015-06-30
batch metal cylinders and liners [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - metal cylinders and liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.5. batch - metal cylinders and liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Batch non metallic liner [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch non-metallic liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.51. "Batch non-metallic liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
batch non metallic liners [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch non-metallic liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.6. batch non-metallic liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Batch of containers [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Batch of containers LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.		 No.067 2008-03-14
battery (Traction) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Traction battery Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
battery (Traction) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Traction battery Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
battery (Traction) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Traction battery Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
battery (traction, Open type) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Open type traction battery protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.012 2013-03-27
battery (traction, Open type) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.094 2012-09-20
battery (traction, Open type) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.095 2015-07-10
battery (traction, Open type) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.100 2011-02-14
battery (traction, Open type) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Battery electric road vehicle [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Battery electric road vehicle Electric vehicle safety 2.1. "Battery electric road vehicle" means a vehicle with bodywork intended for road use, powered exclusively by an electric motor whose traction energy is supplied exclusively by a traction battery installed in the vehicle. No.100 2009-02-14
Battery module [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Battery module Electric vehicle safety 2.5. "Battery module" means the smallest single energy storage consisting of one cell or an assembly of cells, electrically connected in serial or in parallel, placed in one container and mechanically associated. No.100 2009-02-14
Battery pack [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Battery pack Electric vehicle safety 2.6. "Battery pack" means a single mechanical assembly comprising battery modules and retaining frames or trays. A vehicle may have one or several, or no battery pack. No.100 2009-02-14
Bay [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Bay Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Bay" means a structural section of the superstructure forming a closed loop between two planes which are perpendicular to the vertical longitudinal central plane of the vehicle. A bay contains one window (or door) pillar on each side of the vehicle as well as side wall elements, a section of the roof structure and a section of the floor and underfloor structure.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Bay [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Bay Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Bay" means a structural section of the superstructure forming a closed loop between two planes which are perpendicular to the vertical longitudinal central plane of the vehicle. A bay contains one window (or door) pillar on each side of the vehicle as well as side wall elements, a section of the roof structure and a section of the floor and underfloor structure.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Bead [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Bead Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Bead [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Bead Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and to hold the tyre on it; No.054 2008-07-11
Bead [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Bead Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Bead [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Bead Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bead" means the part of a tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Bead [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Bead 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Bead [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Bead Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Bead to bead [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Bead to bead Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
beam (Driving, main, headlamp) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
beam (passing, Class of a) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Class of a passing beam Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No 48 ( 1 );		 No.123 2010-08-24
beam (Passing, dipped, headlamp) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;		 No.074 2013-06-18
beam (Principal passing / dipped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;		 No.048 2011-12-06
beam headlamp (Driving / main) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
beam headlamp (Driving, main) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
beam headlamp (Passing / dipped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road- users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
beam headlamp (Passing, dipped) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
beam headlamp unit (Sealed) [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) headlamp unit Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2014-05-29
beam headlamp unit (Sealed) [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 Sealed beam headlamp unit (SB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2001-05-14
beam headlamp unit (sealed-, Halogen) [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1",
when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21",
when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22",
when they emit, at the user's choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2001-06-25
beam unit (Sealed) [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) units Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. SB units are considered to be of different types if they differ in one or more of the following essentials of form or characteristics:
2.4.1. Trade name or mark;
2.4.2. Characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. Inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
2.4.4. The rated voltage (the same approval number may be granted if the only change is of rated voltage);
2.4.5. The rated wattage;
2.4.6. The shape of the filament(s);
2.4.7. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.8. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.4.9. The colour of the light emitted;
2.4.10. The materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.005 2014-05-29
BECS [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2008-04-12
BECS [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Belt [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt" means a child restraint comprising a combination of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Belt [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt" means a child restraint comprising a combination of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Belt [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Belt 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Belt" applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Belt [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Belt Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Belt" applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Belt [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Belt" means a child restraint comprising a combination of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments.		 No.129 2014-03-29
belt (3 point) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 3-point belt strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points;		 No.080 2013-08-24
belt (3-point) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt : A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.		 No.016 2007-11-30
belt (3-point) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 3-point belt Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points.		 No.080 2010-06-30
belt (Diagonal) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Diagonal belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.2. Diagonal belt : A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.		 No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Harness) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Harness belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and a crotch strap.		 No.129 2014-03-29
belt (Harness) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Harness belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.5. Harness belt : A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2007-11-30
belt (harness) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 harness belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
belt (harness) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 harness belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;		 No.044 2011-09-09
belt (Lap) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Lap belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.1. Lap belt : A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.		 No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Safety-) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a "belt assembly", which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
2.1.3. Three-point belt
2.1.4. S-type belt
2.1.5. Harness belt		 No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Safety-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer’s pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
belt (Safety, seat) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
belt (S-type) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 S-type belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.4. S-type belt : A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.		 No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Y shaped) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Y-shaped belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.129 2014-03-29
belt (Y-shaped) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Y-shaped belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
belt (Y-shaped) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Y-shaped belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child’s legs and a strap for each shoulder;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Belt adjusting device [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Belt adjusting device [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device : A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Belt adjusting device [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Belt adjustment device for height [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Belt adjustment device for height [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Belt anchorage [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Belt anchorage [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2015-11-20
belt anchorage (Effective) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage;
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. Where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2015-08-19
belt anchorage (Effective) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Effective belt anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4., the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example,
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2007-12-06
belt anchorage (effective) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer’s side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Belt anchorages [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Belt anchorages Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;		 No.014 2007-12-06
belt anchorages [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Belt anchorages [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages : Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Belt anchorages [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.		 No.016 2011-09-09
belt and restraint system (safety, Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2015-11-20
belt is not fastened (Safety) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety-belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.		 No.016 2015-11-20
belt line [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 belt line Interior fittings 2.6. "belt line" means the line constituted by the transparent lower contour of the side windows of the vehicle; No.021 2008-07-16
belt reminder (Safety) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver's alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.		 No.016 2015-11-20
belt reminder (Safety-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver’s alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Belt type [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. Rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. The material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. The geometry of the belt assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Belt type [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. the geometry of the belt assembly.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Belt type [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. the geometry of the belt assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
belt webbing guide (safety-, Adult) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2007-11-23
belt webbing guide (safety-, Adult) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
belted (Bias) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Bias belted Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
belted (Bias-) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Bias-belted Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;		 No.106 2010-09-30
belted (Bias) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Bias belted 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
belted (Bias) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Bias belted Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
bench (Tilting) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Tilting bench Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tilting bench" means a technical device, an arrangement of tilting platform, ditch and concrete ground surface, used in the rollover testing of a complete vehicle or body sections		 No.066 2007-12-06
bench (Tilting) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Tilting bench Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tilting bench" means a technical device, an arrangement of tilting platform, ditch and concrete ground surface, used in the rollover testing of a complete vehicle or body sections.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Bench Cycle (Diesel, Standard) [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. Introduction
For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.
The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.
During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Bench Cycle (Diesel, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2015-07-03
bench cycle (standard) [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SBC (standard bench cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SBC) described in this Appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Bench Cycle (Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SBC (Standard Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) described in this appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
2. CATALYST TEMPERATURE CONTROL		 No.083 2015-07-03
Bench seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Bench seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Bench seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat
A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Bench seat [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Bench seat burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.108 2015-04-21
bench seat (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle bench seat Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
"Group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons.
"Vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person.
"Vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them.
"Vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.		 No.129 2014-03-29
bench seat (vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 vehicle bench seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Bench seat [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Bench seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.014 2007-12-06
bench seat [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 bench seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Bench seat [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat : A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Bench seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat
A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Bench seat [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Bench seat Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.4. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Bench seat [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Bench seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Bench seat [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Bench seat Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.6. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Bend lighting [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.26. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends. No.048 2008-05-23
Bend lighting [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends		 No.053 2013-06-18
Bend lighting [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Bending mode [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Bending mode Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Bending mode [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Bending mode Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2010-08-24
BES [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 BES (Base Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AES is activated;		 No.049 2013-06-24
BF [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ BF (brake factor) Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. The "brake factor (BF)" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.		 No.013 2016-02-18
BF [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 brake factor (BF) Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.36. The "brake factor (BF )" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.’		 No.013 2010-11-13
bi fuel (vehicle is considered) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 A vehicle is considered bi-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Bi fuel gas vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Bi fuel gas vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol (petrol mode) and also on either LPG, NG/ biomethane, or hydrogen (gas mode).		 No.083 2015-07-03
bi fuel gas vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 bi fuel gas vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 12. "bi fuel gas vehicle" means a bi fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen; REG. No 692/2008
Bi fuel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Bi fuel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount and duration.		 No.083 2015-07-03
bi fuel vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 bi fuel vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 11. "bi fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time; REG. No 692/2008
Bias belted [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Bias belted Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Bias belted [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Bias belted 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Bias belted [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Bias belted Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
bias ply [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
bias ply [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 bias ply 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
bias ply [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Bias-belted [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Bias-belted Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass; No.030 2008-07-30
Bias-belted [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Bias-belted Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;		 No.106 2010-09-30
bias-ply [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 bias-ply Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90 ° to the centre line of the tread; No.030 2008-07-30
Bias-ply [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Bias-ply Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 ° to the centreline of the tread; No.054 2008-07-11
bias-ply [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the bead and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90° to the centreline of the tread;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Bi-fuel vehicle [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that can run part-time on petrol and also part-time on either LPG or NG. No.083 2008-05-06
bight (Seat) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Seat bight Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat-back.		 No.129 2014-03-29
bight (Seat) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Seat bight Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat back.		 No.044 2007-11-23
bight (Seat) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Seat bight Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat back.		 No.044 2011-09-09
binocular vision (Am) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Ambinocular vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2."Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of the mon ocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below).
Figure 3		 No.046 2014-08-08
biodiesel vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
biodiesel vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Biofuel [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Biofuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18.1. "Biofuel" means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport, produced from biomass;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Biofuel [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Biofuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Biofuel" means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport, produced from biomass.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Boarding device [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Boarding device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Boarding device" means a device to facilitate wheelchair access to vehicles, such as lifts, ramps, etc.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Boarding device [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Boarding device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Boarding device" means a device to facilitate wheelchair access to vehicles, such as lifts, ramps, etc.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Boarding device [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Boarding device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Boarding device" means a device to facilitate wheelchair access to vehicles, such as lifts, ramps, etc.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Body member [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Body member door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Body member" is that portion of the hinge normally affixed to the body structure.		 No.011 2010-05-13
body section (Artificial) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.		 No.066 2007-12-06
body section (Artificial) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.		 No.066 2011-03-30
body section (Original) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
body section (Original) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Body section [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Body section" means a structural unit, which represents one part of the superstructure for the purposes of an approval test. A body section contains at least two bays connected by representative connecting elements (side, roof, and underfloor, structures).		 No.066 2007-12-06
Body section [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Body section" means a structural unit, which represents one part of the superstructure for the purposes of an approval test. A body section contains at least two bays connected by representative connecting elements (side, roof, and underfloor, structures).		 No.066 2011-03-30
Body work [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Body work Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Body work" means the complete structure of the vehicle in running order, including all the structural elements which form the passenger compartment, driver’s compartment, baggage compartment and spaces for the mechanical units and components.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Body work [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Body work Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Body work" means the complete structure of the vehicle in running order, including all the structural elements which form the passenger compartment(s), driver’s compartment, baggage compartment and spaces for the mechanical units and components.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Bodywork [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Bodywork Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
bodywork (L category vehicle with, Mirror intended for) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(f) Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork, giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.7 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Bodywork [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Bodywork Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Bodywork [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Bodywork Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Bodywork type [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) Bodywork manufacturer;
(b) Vehicle concept (＞ 22 passengers or ≦ 22 passengers);
(c) Bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor);
(d) Mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent;
(e) Specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Bodywork type [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) chassis manufacturer;
c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
d) bodywork concept (single / double deck, articulated, low-floor).
e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical
unit means a category of bodywork which do not essentially differ in the following aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
c) bodywork concept (single/ double deck, articulated, low-floor).
d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Bodywork type [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) chassis manufacturer;
(c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(d) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(c) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
(e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2010-09-29
bogie [No.111 2002-02-01A4] 　 bogie Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) [ANNEX 4] Lateral stability calculation
2. DEFINITIONS
"bogie" means an axle group with compensatory load distribution, in which zero load is attained on all wheels on a given side simultaneously.		 No.111 2002-02-01
Boil off [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Boil-off using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.44. "Boil-off" means gas created by evaporation of LNG due to ambient heat input.		 No.110 2015-06-30
bolt (Fork-) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fork-bolt door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Fork-bolt" is the part of the latch that engages and retains the striker when in a latched position.		 No.011 2010-05-13
bolt opening direction (Fork-) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fork-bolt opening direction door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Fork-bolt opening direction" is the direction opposite to that in which the striker enters the latch to engage the fork-bolt.		 No.011 2010-05-13
booster cushion (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 booster cushion (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Boss [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Boss Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.10. "Boss" means that part of the steering control, usually at the centre, that:
2.10.1. joins the steering control to the steering shaft,
2.10.2. transmits the torque from the steering control to the steering shaft;€		 No.012 2008-06-26
Boss [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Boss" means that part of the steering control, usually at the centre, that:
2.10.1. Joins the steering control to the steering shaft,
2.10.2. Transmits the torque from the steering control to the steering shaft;		 No.012 2013-03-27
boss (steering control, Centre of the) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Centre of the steering control boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Brake [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Brake Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving in relation to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine);		 No.013 2016-02-18
Brake [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Brake Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine).		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Brake [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Brake" means those parts of the brake system where the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle are developed.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake (Combined) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Combined brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Combined brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control.		 No.060 2014-10-15
brake (Friction) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Friction brake Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.2. "Friction brake" means the part of a braking system in which the forces opposing the movement of a vehicle are developed by friction between a brake lining and a wheel disc or drum moving relatively to each other.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake (Friction) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Friction brake Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Friction brake" means the part of a braking system in which the forces opposing the movement of a vehicle are developed by friction between a brake lining and a wheel disc or drum moving relatively to each other;		 No.090 2010-05-28
brake (service, Combined) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Combined service brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Combined service brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control;		 No.060 2004-03-31
brake (Wet) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Wet brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Wet brake" means a brake or brakes which has or have been treated in accordance with paragraph 1.6 of annex 3 of this Regulation.		 No.078 2004-03-31
Brake [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Brake Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine);		 No.013 2010-09-30
brake [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 brake Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine).		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Brake [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the parts of the braking device in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle are developed; it may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another), an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another), a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another), or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels of the engine);		 No.078 2004-03-31
Brake Assist System [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 BAS (Brake Assist System) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver’s brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) Assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) Is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
brake assist system [REG. No 078/2009] 　 brake assist system protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 2. "brake assist system" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver's brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System;		 REG. No 078/2009
Brake Assist System [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Brake Assist System (BAS) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver’s brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate, or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
2.34.3. "Category C Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on multiple criteria, one of which must be the rate at which the brake pedal is applied.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
brake disc (Equivalent) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Equivalent brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc (Identical) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identical brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc (Interchangeable) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Interchangeable brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc and drum (replacement, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original replacement brake discs and brake drums Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc/drum (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake disc/brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.1. "Original brake disc/brake drum"
2.3.1.1. In the case of motor vehicles, is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type- approval according to Regulation No 13 or 13-H.
2.3.1.2. In the case of trailers:
(a) is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type-approval according to Regulation No 13;
(b) is a brake disc/drum which is part of a brake for which the axle manufacturer owns a test report according to Annex 11 of Regulation No 13.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc/drum (Special) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Special brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.4. "Special brake disc/drum" means a replacement brake disc/drum not covered by paragraphs 2.3.1 to 2.3.3.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc/drum (Type of) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Type of brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.6. "Type of brake disc/drum": brake discs or drums having the same basic design and material group in accordance with the classification criteria pursuant to paragraph 5.3.5.1 or 5.3.5.2 as appropriate.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake drum (Equivalent) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Equivalent brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake drum (Identical) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identical brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake drum (Interchangeable) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Interchangeable brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Brake electric electronic interface [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Brake electric/electronic interface Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Brake electric/electronic interface" means the part of a separable electrical/electronic connection between the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle which is dedicated to the braking system.		 No.013 2016-02-18
brake factor [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ BF (brake factor) Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. The "brake factor (BF)" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.		 No.013 2016-02-18
brake factor [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 brake factor (BF) Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.36. The "brake factor (BF )" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.’		 No.013 2010-11-13
brake force coefficient (Peak) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "pbfc" (Peak brake force coefficient) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.5. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Brake lining [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (Drum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (drum, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (drum, Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation.		 No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining (drum, Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (drum, Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type-approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1.1, Regulation No 13-H, Annex 1, paragraph 7.1 or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1 ( 2 ) or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation;		 No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining assembly (Parking) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Parking) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system		 No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining assembly (Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake;
2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining;
2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake;
2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining;
2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate;
2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining assembly type [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining assembly type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.5. "Brake lining assembly type" means wheel sets of brake lining assemblies which do not differ in brake lining type, dimension or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Brake lining assembly type [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining assembly type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Brake lining assembly type" means wheel sets of brake lining assemblies which do not differ in brake lining type, dimension or functional characteristics;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining type [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining type (Drum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining type (Drum) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining type [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Brake system" means the combination of parts consisting of the control, transmission, and brake, but excluding the engine, whose function it is to progressively reduce the speed of a moving vehicle, bring it to a halt, and keep it stationary when halted.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Antilock) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 ABS (Antilock brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Antilock brake system (ABS)" means a system which senses wheel slip and automatically modulates the pressure producing the braking forces at the wheel(s) to limit the degree of wheel slip.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Combined) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 CBS (Combined brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Combined brake system (CBS)" means:
For vehicle categories L1 and L3:a service brake system where at least two brakes on different wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle categories L2 and L5:a service brake system where the brakes on all wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle category L4:a service brake system where the brakes on at least the front and rear wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control. (If the rear wheel and sidecar wheel are braked by the same brake system, this is regarded as the rear brake.)		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Secondary) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Secondary brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Secondary brake system" means the second service brake system on a vehicle equipped with a combined brake system.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Service) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Service brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Service brake system" means a brake system which is used for slowing the vehicle when in motion.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Single) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Single brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Single brake system" means a brake system which acts on only one axle.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Split service) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 SSBS (Split service brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Split service brake system (SSBS)" means a brake system that operates the brakes on all wheels, consisting of two or more subsystems actuated by a single control designed so that a single failure in any subsystem (such as a leakage type failure of a hydraulic subsystem) does not impair the operation of any other subsystem.		 No.078 2015-01-30
brake temperature (Initial) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Initial brake temperature Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Initial brake temperature" means the temperature of the hottest brake before any brake application.		 No.078 2015-01-30
braking (Automatic) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Automatic) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Automatically commanded) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Automatically commanded) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (commanded, Automatically) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (commanded, Automatically) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Continuous) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Continuous) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (continuous, Semi) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (continuous, Semi-) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Inertia or overrun) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilising the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Inertia or overrun) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilizing the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Phased) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Phased braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Phased) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Phased braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (Phased) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Phased braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Phased) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Phased braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and whether during application or during release of the brakes,
2.10.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control,
2.10.2. the braking force varies proportionally to the action on the control (monotonic function), and,
2.10.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.078 2004-03-31
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Selective) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Selective braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Selective) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Selective braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (Selective) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Selective braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Selective) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Selective braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking coefficient (Peak) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking coefficient (Peak) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)" means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.078 2015-01-30
braking coefficient (Peak) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Peak braking coefficient (PBC) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking device (Component(s) of the) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Component(s) of the braking device Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component(s) of the braking device" means one or more of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking device;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Braking device [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Braking device Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking device" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or to bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2 below. The device consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper;		 No.078 2004-03-31
braking devices (type of, Different) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Different types of braking devices Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking devices" means devices which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics,
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size,
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Braking equipment [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking equipment" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2 below. The equipment consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment (Component of the) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment (Component of the) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking equipment (type of, Different) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment (type of, different) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Braking equipment [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking equipment" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2 below. The equipment consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking equipment with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
braking force (Reference) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking forces (Reference) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking phase (Emergency) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Emergency braking phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency braking phase" means the phase starting when the AEBS emits a braking demand for at least 4 m/s2 deceleration to the service braking system of the vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Braking signal [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph. 5.2.1.30.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Braking signal [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.22 of this Regulation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23 of this Regulation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Braking signal [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.30.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Braking signal [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.22.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking system" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2. The system consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Braking system [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Braking system Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.1. "Braking system" has the meaning assigned in Regulation No 13, paragraph 2.3, or Regulation No 13-H, paragraph 2.3, or Regulation No 78, paragraph 2.5.		 No.090 2012-07-13
braking system (Combined) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Combined braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Combined braking system" means
2.9.1. in the case of vehicles of categories L1 and L3, a system whereby at least two brakes on different wheels are actuated in combination by the operation of a single control. This method of actuation requires a control which is independent of the second braking device which operates on one wheel only;
2.9.2. in the case of vehicles of categories L2 and L5, a braking device which operates on all the wheels;
2.9.3. in the case of vehicles of category L4, a braking device which operates at least on the front and rear wheel. Therefore a braking device which operates simultaneously on the rear wheel and on the sidecar wheel is regarded as a rear brake.		 No.078 2004-03-31
braking system (Component of a) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking system (Component of a) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking system (Component of the) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Components of the braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Components of the braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system.		 No.078 2015-01-30
braking system (Different type of) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Braking System (Emergency, Advanced) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
braking system (Endurance) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device.
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems;
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device;
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking system (Endurance) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking system (Power assisted) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Power-assisted braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Power-assisted braking system" means a brake system in which the energy necessary to produce the braking force is supplied by the physical effort of the rider assisted by one or more energy supplying devices, for example vacuum assisted (with vacuum booster).		 No.078 2015-01-30
braking system (Spring) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 Spring braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.1. "Spring braking systems" are braking systems in which the energy required for braking is supplied by one or more springs acting as an energy storage device (energy accumulator).
1.1.1. The energy necessary to compress the spring in order to release the brake is supplied and controlled by the "control" actuated by the driver (see definition in paragraph 2.4 of this Regulation).		 No.013 2010-09-30
braking system (type of, Different) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking system (type of, Different) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Different types of braking systems Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Different types of braking systems" means devices which differ in such essential respects as: (a) Components having different characteristics; (b) A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size; (c) A different assembly of the components.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking system" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2. The system consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Braking system [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Braking system Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Braking system" has the meaning assigned in Regulation No 13, paragraph 2.3;		 No.090 2010-05-28
braking system with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2016-02-18
braking system with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Brand name [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Brand name Tyre noise and wet grip 2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark. No.117 2008-08-29
Brand name [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Brand name" or "Trade description" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark.		 No.117 2011-11-23
breaker (Protective) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Protective breaker Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Protective breaker" applies to a radial ply tyre and means an optional intermediate ply between the tread and the belt to minimise damage to the belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Breaker [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Breaker 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Breaker" applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Breaker [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Breaker Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Breaker" applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread.		 No.109 2006-07-04
breathing loss (Tank) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,33 );		 No.083 2012-02-15
breathing loss (Tank) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C1H2,33).		 No.083 2015-07-03
Broadband emission [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Broadband emission suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.7. "Broadband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver.ce ante		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Broadband emission [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Broadband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Broadband emission" means an emission, which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) 25, second edition 2002 and Corrigendum 2004).		 No.010 2012-09-20
Broadband emission [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Broadband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Broadband emission" means an emission, which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) 25, second edition).		 No.010 2010-05-08
Buckle [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Buckle Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Buckle
A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Buckle [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Buckle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Buckle [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Buckle Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Buckle : A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Buckle [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Buckle Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Buckle
A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Buckle [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Buckle Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Buckle [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Buckle Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2011-09-09
buckle release button (enclosed / none-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 enclosed / none- buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2011-09-09
buckle release button (Enclosed) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
buckle release button (Enclosed) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
buckle release button (enclosed, Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
buckle release button (enclosed, Non) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Buckle steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Buckle steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.3.2. "Buckle steering equipment" in which the movement of chassis parts relative to each other is directly produced by the steering forces. No.079 2008-05-27
buckle-release button (Enclosed) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button : A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
buckle-release button (Enclosed) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
buckle-release button (Non-enclosed) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button : A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
buckle-release button (Non-enclosed) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Buffing [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Buffing 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Buffing" is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Buffing [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Buffing Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Buffing" is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Bullet proof glazing [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing", means glazing constructed so as to be resistant to firearms.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Bullet resistant glazing [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing", means glazing constructed so as to be resistant to firearms.		 No.043 2014-02-12
bumper [REG. No 078/2009] 　 bumper protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 3. "bumper" means any front, lower, outer structures of a vehicle, including attachments thereto, which are intended to give protection to a vehicle when involved in a low speed frontal collision with another vehicle; it does not include, however, any frontal protection system; REG. No 078/2009
Burning rate [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Burning rate burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Burning rate" means the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to Annex 6 and/or Annex 8 to this Regulation and the time taken to burn this distance. It is expressed in millimetres per minute.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Burning rate [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Burning rate Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Burning rate" means the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to Annex 6 and/orAnnex 8 to this Regulation and the time taken to burn this distance. It is expressed in millimetresper minute.		 No.118 2010-07-10
burst disc [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 burst disc using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.27. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (this device sometimes is referred to as "burst disc")" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive pressure which prevents a pre- determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
bus (High voltage) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on high voltage.		 No.100 2011-02-14
bus (High voltage) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on high voltage. Where electrical circuits, that are galvanically connected to each other, are galvanically connected to the electrical chassis and the maximum voltage between any live part and the electrical chassis or any exposed conductive part is ≦ 30 V AC and ≦ 60 V DC, only the components or parts of the electric circuit that operate on high voltage are classified as a high voltage bus.		 No.100 2015-03-31
bus (Low floor) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Low floor bus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Low floor bus" is a vehicle of class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2006-12-27
bus (Trolley) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Trolleybus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.8. "Trolleybus" means a vehicle, electrically driven by energy from external, overhead contact wires. For the purposes of this Regulation, it also includes such vehicles having an additional internal means of propulsion (dual mode vehicles) or having a means of temporary external guidance (guided trolleybuses).		 No.107 2015-06-18
bus (Trolley-) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Trolleybus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.8. "Trolleybus" means a vehicle, electrically driven by energy from external, overhead contact wires. For the purposes of this Regulation, it also includes such vehicles having an additional internal means of propulsion (dual mode vehicles) or having a means of temporary external guidance (guided trolleybuses).		 No.107 2010-09-29
Bus (Voltage, High) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 High Voltage Bus protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Bus (Voltage, High) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 High Voltage Bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage,		 No.094 2012-09-20
bus (voltage, High) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 High voltage bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on a high voltage.		 No.095 2015-07-10
button (release, buckle, Enclosed) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
button (release, buckle, Enclosed) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
button (release, buckle, enclosed, Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
button (release, buckle, enclosed, Non) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
button (release, enclosed buckle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
button (release, non-enclosed buckle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 non-enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
C (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 C : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
C Rate of n C [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 C Rate of n C Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "C Rate" of "n C" is defined as the constant current of the tested-device, which takes 1/n hours to charge or discharge the tested-device between 0 per cent of the state of charge and 100 per cent of the state of charge.		 No.100 2015-03-31
C.I. [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 C.I. (compression-ignition) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- For positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants,
- For compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particle numbers;		 No.083 2012-02-15
C.I. engine [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 C.I. (Compression ignition) engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.9. "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.096 2014-03-22
C.I. engine [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Compression ignition (C.I.) engine Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.3 "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which operates on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.024 2006-11-24
C/LO [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
C/LO [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
C/LO [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.025 2010-08-14
C/LO [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
C/LO [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupantis specified by the manufacturer;		 No.046 2010-07-10
C/LO [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3 DH machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Cab [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Cab external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Cab" means that part of the bodywork which constitutes the driver and passenger compartment, including the doors;		 No.061 2010-06-30
Cab rear panel [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Cab rear panel external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab rear panel" means the rearmost part of the external surface of the driver and passenger compartment. Where it is not possible to determine the position of the rear cab panel, for the purposes of this Regulation it would be deemed to be the vertical transversal plane situated 50 cm to the rear of the ‘R’ point of the driver seat, with the seat, if adjustable, located at its rearmost driving position (see Annex 3). However, the manufacturer may, with the agreement of the technical services, request an alternative distance if 50 cm can be shown as being inappropriate for a particular vehicle ( 2 );		 No.061 2010-06-30
Cab-over engine vehicle [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Cab-over engine vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab-over engine vehicle" means a vehicle where more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub is in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Calculated load value [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Calculated load value Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. A "Calculated load value" refers to an indication of the current airflow divided by peak airflow, where peak airflow is corrected for altitude, if available. This definition provides a dimensionless number that is not engine specific and provides the service technician with an indication of the proportion of engine capacity that is being used (with wide open throttle as 100 per cent); CLV = [式]		 No.083 2012-02-15
Calibration [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Calibration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.7. "Calibration" means the process of setting a measurement system's response so that its output agrees with a range of reference signals. Contrast with "verification";		 No.096 2014-03-22
calibration (Re-) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Recalibration" means a fine tuning of a natural gas engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;		 No.049 2013-06-24
calibration (re-) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "recalibration" means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;		 No.049 2008-04-12
calibration (re-) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "recalibration" means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Calibration gas [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Calibration gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.8. "Calibration gas" means a purified gas mixture used to calibrate gas analysers. Calibration gases shall meet the specifications of paragraph 9.5.1. of Annex 4B. Note that calibration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analysers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span gases;		 No.096 2014-03-22
calliper (Wheel) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel calliper (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Wheel calliper" is the rotating profile shape, formed by the internal wheel contour (see Annex 10, figure 1).		 No.124 2006-12-27
Camel-back [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Camel-back 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Camel-back [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Camel-back Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back"— pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Camera [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Camera devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.1."Camera" means a device that renders an image of the outside world and then converts this image into a signal (e.g. video signal).		 No.046 2014-08-08
Camera [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Camera Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.1. "Camera" means a device that renders an image of the outside world and then converts this imageinto a signal (e.g. video signal).		 No.046 2010-07-10
Camera monitor device for indirect vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2."Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2 below.		 No.046 2014-08-08
camera monitor recording device (Surveillance) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13."Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Camera-monitor device for indirect vision [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2.		 No.046 2010-07-10
camera-monitor-recording device (surveillance) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 surveillance camera-monitor-recording device Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13. "surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 which can befitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than thosespecified in paragraph 15.2.4 or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Candidate tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Candidate tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.13. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type, that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation. No.117 2008-08-29
Candidate tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Candidate tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.2. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Cantrail [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Cantrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Cantrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork above the side windows including the curved transition to the roof structures. In the rollover test the cantrail hits the ground first.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Cantrail [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Cantrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Cantrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork above the side windows including the curved transition to the roof structures. In the rollover test the cantrail (in the case of a double deck coach, the cantrail of the upper deck) hits the ground first.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Capability to repel fuel or lubricant [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Capability to repel fuel or lubricant burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.8. "Capability to repel fuel or lubricant" means the capability of materials to repel fuel or lubricant when measured according to Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
capacity (Engine) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston;		 No.083 2012-02-15
capacity (Engine) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston.		 No.083 2015-07-03
capacity at various speed (tyre load, Table of) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds" means the table in Annex 8 which shows, by reference to indices of load capacity and of capacity at nominal speed, load variations of a tyre if used at speeds other than that corresponding to the index of its nominal speed category.		 No.075 2011-03-30
capacity index (Load) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Load capacity index Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Load capacity index" means a figure associated with the maximum load a tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to its speed symbol according to the operating conditions specified by the tyre manufacturer. A list of those indices and of the corresponding loads is given in Annex 4 to this Regulation.		 No.075 2011-03-30
capacity index (Load-) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Load-capacity index Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Load-capacity index" means one number which indicates the load the tyre can carry in single formation at the speed corresponding to the associated speed category and when operated in conformity with the requirements governing utilisation specified by the manufacturer. The list of these indices and their corresponding masses is given in annex 4;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Capacity of the fuel tank [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle.		 No.095 2015-07-10
capacity of the fuel tank [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.5. "capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer; and		 No.034 2011-04-28
Capacity of the fuel tank [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.2. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the tank manufacturer;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Capacity of the fuel tank [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.095 2007-11-30
capacity with speed (load, Variation of) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Variation of load capacity with speed Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Table: Variation of load capacity with speed" means the tables in annex 7 showing as a function of the category of use, the type of application, the load capacity index and the nominal speed category symbol, the maximum load rating variations which a tyre can withstand when used at speeds different from that corresponding to its speed category symbol;
2.30.1. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to the "supplementary service description".
2.30.2. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to ‘Improved Flexion’ or "Very High Flexion" tyres.		 No.106 2010-09-30
capping [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 capping Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
carbon (Hydro) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 HC (Hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.39. "Hydrocarbon (HC)" means THC, NMHC as applicable. Hydrocarbon generally means the hydrocarbon group on which the emission standards are based for each type of fuel and engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
carbon (hydro, methane, Non) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NMHC (Non-methane hydrocarbons) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.51. "Non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC)" means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane;		 No.096 2014-03-22
carbon (hydro, Total) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 THC (Total hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.88. "Total hydrocarbon (THC)" means the combined mass of organic compounds measured by the specified procedure for measuring total hydrocarbon, expressed as a hydrocarbon with a hydrogen-to-carbon mass ratio of 1,85:1;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Carcass [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Carcass Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.7. "Carcass" means that part of a pneumatic tyre other than the tread and the rubber side walls which, when inflated, bears the load (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Carcass [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Carcass Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.7. "Carcass" means that part of a pneumatic tyre other than the tread and the rubber sidewalls
which, when inflated, bears the load;		 No.054 2008-07-11
Carcass [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Carcass Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Carcass" means that part of a pneumatic tyre other than the tread and the rubber side walls which, when inflated, bears the load.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Carcass [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Carcass Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Carcass" means that part of a tyre other than the tread and the rubber sidewalls which, when inflated, bears the load;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Carcass [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Carcass 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Carcass" means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost "rubber" of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Carcass [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Carcass Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Carcass" means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost "rubber" of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (International, Agreement concerning the, European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
carrier (Infant) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Infant carrier Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.129 2014-03-29
carrier (infant) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 infant carrier Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2007-11-23
carrier (infant) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 infant carrier Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child’s head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Carry cot [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Carry cot Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision.		 No.129 2014-03-29
carry cot [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 carry cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Carry cot restraint [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Carry-cot restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
carry-cot [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 carry-cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2007-11-23
carry-cot restraint [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 carry-cot restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;		 No.044 2011-09-09
case (Worst) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Worst case Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Worst case" means the vehicle type, among a group of vehicle types, least likely to withstand the requirements of this Regulation in respect of the strength of superstructure. The three parameters which define the worst case are: structural strength, reference energy and the residual space		 No.066 2007-12-06
case (Worst) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Worst case Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Worst case" means the vehicle type, among a group of vehicle types, least likely to withstand the requirements of this Regulation in respect of the strength of superstructure. The three parameters which define the worst case are: structural strength, reference energy and the residual space.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Casing [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Casing 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Casing" is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Casing [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Casing Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Casing" is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material.		 No.109 2006-07-04
catalytic converter (Original equipment) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original equipment catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Original equipment catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters covered by the type approval delivered for the vehicle and whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (Replacement) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters for which approval can be obtained according to this Regulation, other than those defined in paragraph 2.1 above.		 No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (replacement, Approval of a) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).		 No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (replacement, Deteriorated) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter" means a converter that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extend that it fulfils the requirements laid out in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (replacement, Original) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Original replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83, but are offered in the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval.		 No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (Type of) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Type of catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of catalytic converter" means catalytic converters which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(i) number of coated substrates, structure and material
(ii) type of catalytic activity (oxidising, three-way, …)
(iii) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length
(iv) catalyst material content
(v) catalyst material ratio
(vi) cell density
(vii) dimensions and shape
(viii) thermal protection		 No.103 2007-06-19
category [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 category Filament lamps 2. ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS
2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. Definition of "category"
The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised filament lamps. Each		 No.037 2010-11-13
category [No.037 2014-07-18] 　 category Filament lamps 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. Definition of "category"
The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised filament lamps. Each category has a specific designation, as for example: "H4", "P21W", "T4W", "PY21W" or "RR10W".		 No.037 2014-07-18
category [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 category Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardized gas- discharge light sources. Each category has a specific designation, as for example: "D2S".		 No.099 2010-06-30
category [No.099 2014-09-30] 　 category Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised gas-discharge light sources. Each category has a specific designation, as for example: ‘D2S’.		 No.099 2014-09-30
category [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 category Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. Definition of "category"
The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised LED light sources.
Each category has a specific designation as for example: "LW1", "LY2", "LR2".		 No.128 2014-05-29
category (Child restraint system) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 category (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. A "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1, and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 — as being compatible with such a category of child restraint.
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either;
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
category (Speed) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Speed category Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Speed category" means:
2.28.1. The speeds, expressed by the speed category symbol as shown in the table in paragraph 2.28.2.
2.28.2. The speed categories are as shown in the table below: (km/h)
[表] Speed category symbol / Corresponding speed
B / 50
F / 80
- / ---
W / 270
2.28.3. Tyres suitable for maximum speeds in excess of 240 km/h are identified by means of letter codes "V" or "Z" (see paragraph 2.33.3) placed within the tyre size designation in front of the indications of the structure (see paragraph 3.1.3).		 No.075 2011-03-30
category (Speed) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Speed category Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Speed category", the reference speed expressed by the speed category symbol as shown in the table below:
[表] Speed category symbol / Reference speed (km/h)
A2 / 10
A4 / 20
A6 / 30
A8 / 40
B / 50
D / 65		 No.106 2010-09-30
Category 1 / 2 (Bending mode) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Category 1 / 2 (Bending mode) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Category 1,2 bending mode [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Category 1,2 bending mode Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2010-08-24
category A B (Electric regenerative braking system of ) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
category A, B (braking, regenerative, Electric) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
category A, B (Electric regenerative braking system of) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Category L [2012/wp29grrf/GRRF-72-09e__2_.pdf] 　 Category L 　 Category L (light) vehicles
L1e : light two-wheel vehicle
　L1Ae : powered cycle
　L1Be : Moped
L2e : Three-wheel moped
L3e : motorcycle
L4e : motorcycle with side car
L5e : tricycles
　L5Ae : Tricycles
　L5Be : Commercial tricycles
L6e : Light quadricycle
　L6Ae : Light quad
　L6Be : Light mini car
L7e : Heavy quadricycle
　L7Ae : On-road quad
　L7Be : All Terrain Vehicles
　L7Be : Heavy mini car
参考 : http://www2u.biglobe.ne.jp/~standard/ecinf.htm#2013-06-23UNECE		 2012/wp29grrf/GRRF-72-09e__2_.pdf
category L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 (Vehicle of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.4."Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3" means those defined in the Consolida ted Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.2, para. 2).		 No.046 2014-08-08
Category N [No.073 2004-03-31A3] 　 Category N Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
1. Category N: Power-driven vehicles having at least four wheels or having three wheels when the maximum mass exceeds
1/metric/ton, and used for the carriage of goods
1.1. Category N2: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 but not exceeding 12 metric tons.
1.2. Category N3: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 12 metric tons.		 No.073 2004-03-31
Category O [No.073 2004-03-31A3] 　 Category O Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
2. Category O: Trailers (including semi-trailers)
2.1. Category O3: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5, but not exceeding 10 metric tons.
2.2. Category O4: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 10 metric btons.		 No.073 2004-03-31
Category of use [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Category of use 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Category of use [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Category of use Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
CBS [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 CBS (Combined brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Combined brake system (CBS)" means:
For vehicle categories L1 and L3:a service brake system where at least two brakes on different wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle categories L2 and L5:a service brake system where the brakes on all wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle category L4:a service brake system where the brakes on at least the front and rear wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control. (If the rear wheel and sidecar wheel are braked by the same brake system, this is regarded as the rear brake.)		 No.078 2015-01-30
CCD (Close-coupling device) [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Close-coupling device (CCD) Close coupling devices 2.1.1. "Close-coupling device (CCD)" means a device which automatically provides sufficient space between the bodies of towing vehicles and trailers if additional clearance is needed during angular movement between them. Coupling devices having no adjusting effect on lengths and/or angles within the device are not covered by this Regulation; No.102 2008-12-30
Cell [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Cell Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Cell" means a single encased electrochemical unit containing one positive and one negative electrode which exhibits a voltage differential across its two terminals.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Cement [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cement 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Cement" is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Cement [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cement Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Cement" is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Central driving position [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Central driving position safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Central driving position" is defined when Y co-ordinate of the R point is in Y0 position within + or – 60 mm.		 No.043 2014-02-12
central plane (longitudinal,Vertical) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vertical longitudinal central plane (VLCP) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the midpoints of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2007-12-06
centre (Light) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light centre Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. Light centre: a point on the reference axis at a defined distance from the reference plane that represents the nominal origin of the visible radiation emitted.		 No.128 2014-05-29
centre (Reference) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Reference centre Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.1. "Reference centre" means a point on or near a retro-reflective area which is designated to be the centre of the device for the purpose of specifying its performance;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Centre axle trailer [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Centre axle trailer Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Centre axle trailer [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Centre axle trailer mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).		 No.055 2010-08-28
centre length (Light) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light centre length Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. Light centre length: the distance between the reference plane and the light centre		 No.128 2014-05-29
Centre of reference [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Centre of reference installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.8. Centre of reference
"Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface, specified by the manufacturer of the lamp.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Centre of reference [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.12. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp; No.048 2008-05-23
Centre of reference [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Centre of reference [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Centre of reference [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Centre of reference [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface, specified by the manufacturer of the lamp.		 No.086 2010-09-30
centre of reference or reference centre [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 centre of reference or reference centre installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
9. centre of reference or reference centre
means the intersection of the axis of reference with the light-emitting surface, the centre of reference being specified by the lamp manufacturer;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Centre of the mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Centre of the mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Centre of the mirror" means the centroid of the visible area of the reflecting surface;		 No.081 2012-07-13
Centre of the reflecting surface [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Centre of the reflecting surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11."Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Centre of the reflecting surface [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Centre of the reflecting surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11. "Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Centre of the steering control boss [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Centre of the steering control boss Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft; No.012 2008-06-26
Centre of the steering control boss [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Centre of the steering control boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Centre plane of occupant [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Centre plane of occupant [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
centre stand [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 centre stand stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.3. "centre stand" means a stand which, when swung into the open position, supports the vehicle by providing one or several areas of contact between the vehicle and the supporting surface either side of the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 Directive 2009/078/EC
Centreplane of occupant [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Centreplane of occupant [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
Centreplane of occupant [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Centreplane of occupant [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupantis specified by the manufacturer;		 No.046 2010-07-10
Centreplane of occupant [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3 DH machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
certificate of conformity [REG. No 443/2009] 　 certificate of conformity reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (b) "certificate of conformity" means the certificate referred to in Article 18 of Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 443/2009
CFV [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 CFV Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
CFV Critical flow venturi		 No.049 2010-08-31
Chafer [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Chafer 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Chafer" means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Chafer [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Chafer Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Chafer" means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Chair [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the Child Restraint System and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.		 No.129 2014-03-29
chair (Child-safety) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.044 2007-11-23
chair (safety, Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child-safety chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Child-safety chair" means a Child Restraint System incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.129 2014-03-29
chair (safety, Child-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Chair [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Chair [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position;
2.4.1. "carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child’s head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Chair support [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Chair support Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Chair support" means that part of a Child Restraint System by which the chair can be raised.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Chair support [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Chair support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Chair support" means that part of a child restraint by which the chair can be raised.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Chair support [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Chair support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Chair support" means that part of a child restraint by which the chair can be raised.		 No.044 2011-09-09
chamber (compression, Spring) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 Spring compression chamber Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.2. "Spring compression chamber" means the chamber where the pressure variation that induces the compression of the spring is actually produced.		 No.013 2010-09-30
change function (Traffic-) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Traffic-change function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.19. "Traffic-change function" means any front-lighting function or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of these, intended to avoid glare and provide sufficient illumination in case where a vehicle being equipped with a system designed for one traffic direction only is temporarily used in a country with the opposite direction of traffic.		 No.123 2010-08-24
Character of the vehicle [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Character of the vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Character of the vehicle" means a descriptive term for a vehicle — tractor for semi-trailer, truck, bus, semi-trailer, full trailer, centre-axle trailer.		 No.013 2016-02-18
characteristic (Principal) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Principal characteristic safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Principal characteristic" means a characteristic that appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way not without significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The term also covers the trade names or marks as specified by the holder of the approval.		 No.043 2014-02-12
characteristic (Principal) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Principal characteristic Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Principal characteristic" means a characteristic which appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way not without significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The term also covers the trade names or marks as specified by the holder of the approval;		 No.043 2010-08-31
characteristic (Secondary) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary characteristic safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Secondary characteristic" means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way which is of significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty.		 No.043 2014-02-12
characteristic (Secondary) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Secondary characteristic Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Secondary characteristic" means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way which is of significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty.		 No.043 2010-08-31
characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [式 D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [式 Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [式 D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [式 V=]		 No.055 2010-08-28
characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= 式]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= 式]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [式]		 No.055 2006-12-27
charge (Electric state of) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric state of charge Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
charge (Electric state of) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric state of charge Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
charge (Electric state of) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric state of charge Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Charge (State Of) [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 SOC (State Of Charge) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
[Appendix] Electrical energy/power storage device State Of Charge (SOC) profile for OVC HEV Type I Test		 No.083 2012-02-15
Charge (State of) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 SOC (State of Charge) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "State of Charge (SOC)" means the available electrical charge in a tested-device expressed as a percentage of its rated capacity.		 No.100 2015-03-31
charging the rechargeable energy storage system (Coupling system for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
charging the REESS (Coupling system for) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
charging the RESS (Coupling system for) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet,		 No.094 2012-09-20
charging the RESS (Coupling system for) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Coupling system for charging the RESS" means the electrical circuit installed in the vehicle used for charging the RESS.		 No.010 2012-09-20
charging the RESS (Coupling system for) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet;		 No.012 2013-03-27
chassis (Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical chassis protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference;		 No.012 2013-03-27
chassis (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical chassis Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference,		 No.094 2012-09-20
chassis (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical chassis Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference.		 No.095 2015-07-10
chassis (Electrical) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose potential is taken as reference.		 No.100 2011-02-14
chassis (Electrical) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose potential is taken as reference.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Chassis connected to the electric circuit [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Chassis connected to the electric circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Chassis connected to the electric circuit" means AC and DC electric circuits galvanically connected to the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
check (Self) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Self-check Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Self-check" means an integrated function that checks for a system failure on a semi-continuous basis at least while the system is active.		 No.131 2014-07-19
check valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Non-return valve or check valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.20. "Non-return valve or check valve" means an automatic valve that allows gas/fluid to flow in only one direction.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Child restraining strap [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child-restraining strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt (harness) and restrains only the body of the child.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Child restraint [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Child restraint Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Child restraint" means an arrangement of components which may comprise a combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments, and in some cases a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body.		 No.094 2012-09-20
child restraint (adjuster mounted directly on) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2007-11-23
child restraint (adjuster mounted directly on) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child restraint [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Child restraint [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Child restraint [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Child restraint Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Child restraint" means an arrangement of components which may comprise a combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments, and in some cases a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body		 No.094 2010-05-28
child restraint fixture [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 A child restraint fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "A child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, so-called either ISO/F2 (B) or ISO/F2X(B1) which is described in Regulation No 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2), is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Child restraint fixture [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
child restraint fixture [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 child restraint fixture Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "A child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of annex 17 — appendix 2 of Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B) which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
child restraint fixture [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 a child restraint fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "a child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B) which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Child restraint fixture [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Child restraint fixture (CRF) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Child restraint fixture [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Child Restraint System [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 CRS (Child Restraint System) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Child Restraint System" (CRS) means a device capable of accommodating a child occupant in a sitting or supine position. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the child’s body.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint system (category) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 category (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. A "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1, and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 — as being compatible with such a category of child restraint.
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either;
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child restraint system (classe) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 classe (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt.		 No.044 2011-09-09
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system;		 No.014 2015-08-19
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2015-11-20
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix child restraint system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Isofix child restraint system2 means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2011-04-28
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2007-11-30
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2011-09-09
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child Restraint System (ISOFIX, Universal, Integral) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint system (mass group) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 mass group (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6. ISOFIX Child restraint systems fall into 7 ISOFIX size classes described in Regulation No 16 Annex 17, Appendix 2:
A — ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B — ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 — ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C — ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D — ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E — ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F — ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
G — ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
[表]		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child Restraint System (mounted directly on, Adjuster) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System" means an adjuster for the harness belt which is directly mounted on the Child Restraint System, as opposed to being directly supported by the strap that it is designed to adjust.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint system [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child restraint system (restraint) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system (restraint) means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry-cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.
"Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6 Isofix Child restraint systems fall into 7 Isofix size classes described in Regulation No 16 annex 17, appendix 2:
A - ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B - ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C - ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
[表] Mass group /　/ Isofix size category
0 - up to 10 kg / F ISO/L1, G ISO/L2, E ISO/R1
0+ - up to 13 kg / C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2, E ISO/R1
I - 9 to 18 kg / A ISO/F3, B ISO/F2, B1 ISO/F2X, C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Child restraint system [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system ("restraint") means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body.
"ISOFIX" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child restraint type [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child restraint type Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child restraint type" means a Child Restraint System which does not differ in such essential respects as:
The category in which the restraint is type approved;
The design, material and construction of the Child Restraint System.
Convertible or modular Child Restraint Systems shall be considered to not differ in their design, material and construction.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child safety chair [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child-safety chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Child-safety chair" means a Child Restraint System incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child Safety Lock System [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Child Safety Lock System door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Child Safety Lock System" is a locking device which can be engaged and released independently of other locking devices and which, when engaged, prevents operation of the interior door handle or other release device. The lock release/engagement device may be manual or electric and may be located anywhere on or in the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Child support [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child support Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Child support" means that part of a Child Restraint System by which the child can be raised within the Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Child support [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Child support" means that part of a child restraint by which the child can be raised within the child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Child support [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Child support" means that part of a child restraint by which the child can be raised within the child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
child-restraining strap [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 child-restraining strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
child-restraining strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 child-restraining strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;		 No.044 2011-09-09
child-restraint attachment strap [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
child-restraint attachment strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child-restraint type [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child-restraint type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Child-restraint type" means child restraints which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.19.1. the category, and the mass group(s) for which and the position and orientation (as defined in paragraphs 2.15. and 2.16.) in which the restraint is intended to be used;
2.19.2. the geometry of the child restraint;
2.19.3. the dimensions, mass, material and colour of:
- the seat,
- the padding, and
- the impact shield,
2.19.4. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps;
2.19.5. the rigid components (buckle, attachments, etc.).		 No.044 2007-11-23
Child-restraint type [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child-restraint type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Child-restraint type" means child restraints which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.19.1. the category, and the mass group(s) for which and the position and orientation (as defined in paragraphs 2.15 and 2.16) in which the restraint is intended to be used;
2.19.2. the geometry of the child restraint;
2.19.3. the dimensions, mass, material and colour of:
the seat;
the padding; and
the impact shield;
2.19.4. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps;
2.19.5. the rigid components (buckle, attachments, etc.).		 No.044 2011-09-09
Child-safety chair [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Child-safety chair [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Chunking [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Chunking Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.23. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread; No.030 2008-07-30
Chunking [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Chunking Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.23. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread; No.054 2008-07-11
Chunking [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Chunking Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Chunking [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Chunking Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Chunking" means the breaking away of small pieces of rubber from the tread;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Chunking [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Chunking 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Chunking [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Chunking Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.		 No.109 2006-07-04
CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) Retro-reflecting devices 2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation. No.003 2009-01-31
CIL [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.		 No.003 2011-12-06
circle of vision (Semi-) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point
situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc — seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels — is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2);		 No.071 2004-03-31
circle of vision (Semi-) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc – seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels – is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2).		 No.071 2010-07-31
circuit (Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical circuit protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation;		 No.012 2013-03-27
circuit (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical circuit Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation,		 No.094 2012-09-20
circuit (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical circuit Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Circuit closed tell tale [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Circuit closed tell tale [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Circuit-closed tell-tale [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.17. Circuit-closed tell-tale
"Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
circuit-closed telltale [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 circuit-closed telltale installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15. circuit-closed telltale
means a telltale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Circuit-closed tell-tale [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.		 No.086 2010-09-30
circulation (re, gas, Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust-gas recirculation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.34. "Exhaust-gas recirculation" means a technology that reduces emissions by routing exhaust gases that have been exhausted from the combustion chamber(s) back into the engine to be mixed with incoming air before or during combustion. The use of valve timing to increase the amount of residual exhaust gas in the combustion chamber(s) that is mixed with incoming air before or during combustion is not considered exhaust-gas recirculation for the purposes of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Class (CNG components for use in vehicle) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Class (CNG components for use in vehicles) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 : High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 : Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 : Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 : Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 : Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Class (LPG components for use in vehicle) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Class (LPG components for use in vehicles) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
LPG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the maximum operating pressure and function, according to Figure 1.
Class 1 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing liquid LPG at vapour pressure or increased vapour pressure up to 3 000 kPa.
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 450 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 2A Low pressure parts for a limited pressure range including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 120 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 3 Shut-off valves and pressure relief valves, when operating in the liquid phase.
LPG components designed for a maximum operating pressure below 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure are not subjected to this Regulation.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in his own class with regard to maximum operating pressure and function.
[フローチャート] Figure 1 Classification with regard to maximum operating pressure and function		 No.067 2008-03-14
Class [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Class Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No. 48 1/;"		 No.123 2006-12-27
Class 0～4 (CNG components for use in vehicle) [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 CNG components for use in vehicles (Class 0～4) Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Class 0～5 [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 3. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
Class 5 Parts in contact with temperature range extending below – 40℃.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
CNG and/or LNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure, temperature and function, according to Figure 1-1.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Class A / B Headlamp [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2014-08-22
class A M 2 or M 3 vehicle [REG. No 661/2009] 　 class A M 2 or M 3 vehicle safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 3. "class A M 2 or M 3 vehicle" means an M 2 or M 3 vehicle with a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers, in addition to the driver, designed to carry standing passengers and having seats and provision for standing passengers; REG. No 661/2009
Class A, B (Vehicle) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle (Class A, B) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A": vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B": vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Class A, B, C (vehicle) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Class A, B, C (vehicle) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the
driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A": vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B": vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Class A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, S, T [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Class A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, S, T mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.		 No.055 2010-08-28
class B / F3 (Front fog lamp) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 classes "B" or "F3" (Front fog lamp) Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),		 No.019 2014-08-22
class I M 2 or M 3 vehicle [REG. No 661/2009] 　 class I M 2 or M 3 vehicle safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 2. "class I M 2 or M 3 vehicle" means an M 2 or M 3 vehicle with a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver constructed with areas for standing passengers to allow frequent passenger movement; REG. No 661/2009
Class I, II, III (vehicle) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Class I, II, III (vehicle) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement.
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats.
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers.
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Class I～III (Vehicle) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle (Class I～III) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement.
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats.
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers.
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA. (Retro reflecting device) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA. (Retro-reflecting device) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Retro-reflecting devices are divided into three classes according to their photometric characteristics: Class IA or IB, Class IIIA or IIIB, and Class IVA.
2.14. Retro-reflecting devices of Class IB and IIIB are devices combined with other signal lamps which are not watertight according to Annex 8, paragraph 1.1, and which are integrated into the body of a vehicle.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Class of a passing beam [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Class of a passing beam Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No 48 ( 1 );		 No.123 2010-08-24
Class of mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Class of mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(a) Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1 of this Regulation;
(b) Classes II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in para graphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3 of this Regulation;
(c) Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.4 of this Regulation;
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;
(e) Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6 of this Regulation;
(f) Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork, giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.7 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Class of mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Class of mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13. "Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions.They are classified as follows:
- Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1.
- Class II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in paragraphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3.
- Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined inparagraph 15.2.4.4.
- Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined inparagraph 15.2.4.5.
- Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6.
- Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Class of rear view mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Class of rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Class of rear-view mirrors" means all devices having one or several features or functions in common.
The rear-view mirrors mentioned in this Regulation are grouped in Class "L".		 No.081 2012-07-13
Class of rear-view mirror [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Class of rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) 1.4. "Class of rear-view mirror" means all rear-view mirrors having one or more common characteristics or functions. Interior rear-view mirrors are grouped in class I. Exterior rear-view mirrors are grouped in class II. Directive 2009/059/EC
Class Vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Class I, II, III, A, B Vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement;
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats;
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers;
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A":vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B":vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.		 No.107 2015-06-18
classe (Child restraint system) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 classe (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Classe (Headlamp of different) [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D or E) headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different “Classes (A or B or C or D or E)" mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
1.6. However, in the case of a system consisting of two headlamps a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.113 2014-06-14
Classes (A or B or C or D) (lamp of different, Head-) [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D) Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B or C or D)" means headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.113 2005-12-16
Classes (A or B) (lamp of different, Head-) [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B) Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2005-12-16
Classes A, B(Headlamp of different) [No.112 2010-08-31] 　 Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2010-08-31
classification code (Tyre) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tyre classification code Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Tyre classification code" means the optional marking detailed in annex 10 that identifies the category of use and the particular type of tread pattern and application as specified by ISO 4251-4.		 No.106 2010-09-30
CLASSIFICATION CODE (TYRE) [No.106 2010-09-30A10] 　 TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE Tyres (agricultural vehicles) [ANNEX 10] TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE (Optional marking)
[表] Classification code / Nomenclature
F-1 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: single rib tread
F-2 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: multiple rib tread
F-3 / Steering wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
G-1 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): traction service
G-2 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): flotation traction service
G-3 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): maximum flotation service
I-1 / Agricultural implement tyres: multi-rib tread
I-2 / Agricultural implement tyres: moderate traction service
I-3 / Agricultural implement tyres: traction tread
I-4 / Agricultural implement tyres: plough tail wheel service
I-5 / Agricultural implement tyres: steering service
I-6 / Agricultural implement tyres: Smooth tread
LS-1 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: regular tread
LS-2 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: intermediate tread
LS-3 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: deep tread
LS-4 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: shallow tread
R-1 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: regular tread
R-2 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: cane and rice service (deep tread)
R-3 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: flotation service (shallow tread)
R-4 / Drive wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)		 No.106 2010-09-30
CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENT [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 3. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
Class 5 Parts in contact with temperature range extending below – 40℃.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
CNG and/or LNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure, temperature and function, according to Figure 1-1.		 No.110 2015-06-30
CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLE [No.073 2004-03-31A3] 　 CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
1. Category N: Power-driven vehicles having at least four wheels or having three wheels when the maximum mass exceeds
1/metric/ton, and used for the carriage of goods
1.1. Category N2: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 but not exceeding 12 metric tons.
1.2. Category N3: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 12 metric tons.
2. Category O: Trailers (including semi-trailers)
2.1. Category O3: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5, but not exceeding 10 metric tons.
2.2. Category O4: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 10 metric btons.		 No.073 2004-03-31
Classification pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Classification pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
CLD [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 CLD Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
CLD Chemiluminescent detector		 No.049 2010-08-31
cleat (Tread) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread lug (or cleat) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Tread lug (or cleat)" means the solid-block element protruding from the base of the tread pattern;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Clockwise [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Clockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered.		 No.060 2014-10-15
clockwise (Anti) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning of ‘Clockwise’.		 No.060 2014-10-15
clockwise (Anti-) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered;
2.11.1. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Clockwise [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Clockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered;
2.11.1. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Close proximity exterior mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Close-proximity exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
Close-coupling device (CCD) [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Close-coupling device (CCD) Close coupling devices 2.1.1. "Close-coupling device (CCD)" means a device which automatically provides sufficient space between the bodies of towing vehicles and trailers if additional clearance is needed during angular movement between them. Coupling devices having no adjusting effect on lengths and/or angles within the device are not covered by this Regulation; No.102 2008-12-30
closed tell tale (Circuit) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.053 2013-06-18
closed tell tale (Circuit) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Closed-circuit tell-tale [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Closed-circuit tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.19. "Closed-circuit tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether it is operating correctly or not; No.048 2008-05-23
Closed-circuit tell-tale [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Closed-circuit tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Closed-circuit tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether it is operating correctly or not;		 No.048 2011-12-06
closure warning system (Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door closure warning system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Door closure warning system" is a system that will activate a visual signal located where it can be clearly seen by the driver when a door latch system is not in its fully latched position and while the vehicle ignition is activated.		 No.011 2010-05-13
CNG [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.43. "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means natural gas that has been compressed and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
CNG (Container or cylinder) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 CNG-1～4 (Container or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" (or cylinder) means any vessel used for the storage of compressed natural gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal;
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped);
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped);
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).		 No.110 2011-05-07
CNG components for use in vehicle (Class) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Class (CNG components for use in vehicles) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 : High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 : Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 : Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 : Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 : Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.		 No.110 2011-05-07
CNG components for use in vehicle (Class0～4) [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 CNG components for use in vehicles (Class0～4) Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.		 No.110 2008-03-14
CNG Electronic control unit [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.38. "Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG)" means a device that controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.		 No.110 2015-06-30
CNG retrofit system (Approval of an) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
CNG retrofit system (component of) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 components of CNG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. For definitions of the components of CNG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 110.		 No.115 2014-11-07
CNG retrofit system of an approved type (Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).		 No.115 2014-11-07
CNG system [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CNG system using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.10. "CNG system" means an assembly of components (container(s) or cylinder(s), valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (rigid fuel lines, pipes fitting, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using CNG in their propulsion system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
CNG system [No.110 2008-03-14P2] 　 CNG system Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) PART II
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.3. "CNG system" means an assembly of components (container(s) or cylinder(s), valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (rigid fuel lines, pipes fitting, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using CNG in their propulsion system.		 No.110 2008-03-14
CNG system [No.110 2011-05-07p2] 　 CNG system using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.3. "CNG system" means an assembly of components (container(s) or cylinder(s), valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (rigid fuel lines, pipes fitting, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using CNG in their propulsion system.		 No.110 2011-05-07
CNG-1～4 [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.13."Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3A. 4.13.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).		 No.110 2015-06-30
CNG-1～4 [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 CNG-1, -2, -3, -4 Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
1. SCOPE
This annex sets out minimum requirements for light-weight refillable gas cylinders. The cylinders are intended only for the on-board storage of high pressure compressed natural gas as a fuel for automotive vehicles to which the cylinders are to be fixed. Cylinders may be of any steel, aluminium or non-metallic material, design or method of manufacture suitable for the specified service conditions. This annex does not cover metal liners or cylinders of stainless steels or of welded construction. Cylinders covered by this annex are Classified in Class 0, as described in paragraph 2. of this Regulation, and are:
CNG-1 Metal
CNG-2 Metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 Metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 Resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite)
【以下略】		 No.110 2008-03-14
CNG-fuelling (Electronic control unit) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.24. "Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling)" means a device which controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Coating [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 Coating Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.005 2014-05-29
Coating [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Coating Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.019 2014-08-22
Coating [No.057 2014-05-01] 　 Coating Headlamps (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.057 2014-05-01
Coating [No.072 2014-03-14] 　 Coating Headlamps (HS1) (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.072 2014-03-14
Coating [No.098 2014-06-14] 　 Coating gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.098 2014-06-14
Coating [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Coating headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.112 2014-08-22
Coating [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Coating headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.113 2014-06-14
Coating [No.001 2001-05-14] 　 Coating Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of alens;		 No.001 2001-05-14
Coating [No.001 2010-07-10] 　 Coating Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.001 2010-07-10
Coating [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 Coating Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.005 2001-05-14
Coating [No.008 2001-05-14] 　 Coating Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.008 2001-05-14
Coating [No.008 2010-07-10] 　 Coating Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.008 2010-07-10
Coating [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Coating Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.019 2010-07-10
Coating [No.020 2001-06-25] 　 Coating Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.020 2001-06-25
Coating [No.020 2010-07-10] 　 Coating Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.020 2010-07-10
coating [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 coating Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "coating," means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.031 2001-06-25
Coating [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Coating asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.031 2010-07-17
Coating [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Coating Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.098 2001-06-25
Coating [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Coating gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.098 2010-06-30
Coating [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Coating Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.112 2005-12-16
Coating [No.112 2010-08-31] 　 Coating headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.112 2010-08-31
Coating [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Coating Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.113 2005-12-16
Coating [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Coating Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.15. "Coating" means any product(s) applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Coating [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Coating Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.15. "Coating" means any product(s) applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;		 No.123 2010-08-24
CODE (CLASSIFICATION, TYRE) [No.106 2010-09-30A10] 　 TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE Tyres (agricultural vehicles) [ANNEX 10] TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE (Optional marking)
[表] Classification code / Nomenclature
F-1 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: single rib tread
F-2 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: multiple rib tread
F-3 / Steering wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
G-1 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): traction service
G-2 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): flotation traction service
G-3 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): maximum flotation service
I-1 / Agricultural implement tyres: multi-rib tread
I-2 / Agricultural implement tyres: moderate traction service
I-3 / Agricultural implement tyres: traction tread
I-4 / Agricultural implement tyres: plough tail wheel service
I-5 / Agricultural implement tyres: steering service
I-6 / Agricultural implement tyres: Smooth tread
LS-1 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: regular tread
LS-2 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: intermediate tread
LS-3 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: deep tread
LS-4 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: shallow tread
R-1 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: regular tread
R-2 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: cane and rice service (deep tread)
R-3 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: flotation service (shallow tread)
R-4 / Drive wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)		 No.106 2010-09-30
Code (Identification) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Identification Code Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Identification Code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to this regulation. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.		 No.013 2016-02-18
code (Identification) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Identification code Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Identification code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to this regulation. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
code (Identification) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identification code Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.2. "Identification code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to Regulations Nos 13 and 13-H. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.
The vehicle manufacturer shall provide on request of the technical service and/or approval authority the necessary information, which makes the link between the braking system type- approval and the corresponding identification code.		 No.090 2012-07-13
code (Rolling) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Rolling code alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.097 2012-05-08
code (Rolling) [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.6. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2012-02-16
code (Rolling) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2012-02-16
code (Rolling) [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.6. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2010-06-30
code (Rolling) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2010-06-30
code (trouble, Diagnostic) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Diagnostic trouble code" (DTC) means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
code (trouble, Diagnostic) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.20. "Diagnostic trouble code (DTC)" means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a NO x Control Malfunction.		 No.096 2014-03-22
code (Tyre classification) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tyre classification code Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Tyre classification code" means the optional marking detailed in annex 10 that identifies the category of use and the particular type of tread pattern and application as specified by ISO 4251-4.		 No.106 2010-09-30
coefficient (braking, Peak) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
coefficient (braking, Peak) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Peak braking coefficient (PBC) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) Retro-reflecting devices 2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation. No.003 2009-01-31
Coefficient of luminous intensity [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Coefficient of retro reflection [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R') Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R′)" means the quotient of the coefficient of luminous intensity R of a plane retro-reflecting surface and its area A
[式]		 No.104 2014-03-14
cold inflation pressure (Recommended) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec )" means the pressure recommended for each tyre position by the vehicle manufacturer, for the intended service conditions (e.g. speed and load) of the given vehicle, as defined on the vehicle placard and/or the vehicle owner's manual.		 No.064 2010-11-26
cold start [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 cold start Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Cold start [No.083a 2015-07-03] 　 Cold start Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start less than or equal to 35℃ and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Cold start device [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start; No.083 2008-05-06
Cold start device [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Cold start device [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Cold start device [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Cold start device CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device which enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine temporarily, to assist starting;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Cold start device [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Cold start device CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Cold start device" means a device which enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine temporarily, to assist starting;		 No.101 2007-06-19
cold start system or device [REG. No 692/2008] 　 cold start system or device emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 30. "cold start system or device" means a system which temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start; REG. No 692/2008
Cold tyre inflation pressure [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Cold tyre inflation pressure Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Cold tyre inflation pressure" means the tyre pressure at ambient temperature, in the absence of any pressure build-up due to tyre usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Cold-start device [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Cold-start device Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.4 "Cold-start device" means a device which by its operation temporarily increases the amount of fuel supplied to the engine and is intended to facilitate starting of the engine;		 No.024 2006-11-24
collision (Time to) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 TTC (Time to collision) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Time to collision (TTC)" means the value of time obtained by dividing the distance between the subject vehicle and the target by the relative speed of the subject vehicle and the target, at an instant in time.		 No.131 2014-07-19
collision alert signal (Rear end) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision		 No.048 2011-12-06
Collision warning phase [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Collision warning phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Collision warning phase" means the phase directly preceding the emergency braking phase, during which the AEBS warns the driver of a potential forward collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Colour of the fluorescent light of the device [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Colour of the fluorescent light of the device Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Fluorescence
2.5.1. When certain substances are brought near to a source of ultraviolet or blue radiations, they emit radiations which are nearly always of longer wavelength than those producing the effect. This phenomenon is called fluorescence. By day and in twilight, fluorescent colours are brighter than normal colours because they reflect part of the light falling upon them and in addition they emit light. At night, they are not brighter than ordinary coloursEN
2.5.2. "Colour of the fluorescent light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the fluorescent light are given in paragraph 2.32 of Regulation No 48.		 No.069 2010-07-31
colour of the light emitted by the lamp [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 colours of the light emitted by the lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 5. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.15. The colours of the light emitted by the lamps are the following:
Main-beam headlamp: White
Dipped-beam headlamp: White
Front fog lamp: White or selective yellow
Reversing lamp: White
Direction-indicator lamp: Amber
Hazard warning signal: Amber
Stop lamp: Red
Emergency stop signal: Amber or red
Rear-end collision alert signal: Amber
Rear registration plate lamp: White
Front position lamp: White
Rear position lamp: Red
Front fog lamp: White or selective yellow
Rear fog lamp: Red
Parking lamp: White in front, red at the rear, amber if reciprocally incorporated in the side direction-indicator lamps or in the side-marker lamps.
Side-marker lamp: Amber; however the rearmost side- marker lamp can be red if it is grouped or combined or reciprocally incorporated with the rear position lamp, the rear end-outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp or is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear retro-reflector.
End-outline marker lamp: White in front, red at the rear
Daytime running lamp: White
Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular: Red
Rear retro-reflector, triangular: Red
Front retro-reflector, non- triangular: Identical to incident light Side retro-reflector, non-triangular: Amber; however the rearmost side retro-reflector can be red if it is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear position lamp, the rear end outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp, the red rearmost side-marker lamp or the rear retro-reflector, non-triangular.
Cornering lamp: White
Conspicuity marking: White to the front White or yellow to the side; Red or yellow to the rear
Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): White
Exterior courtesy lamp: White		 No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the light emitted from a device [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Colour of the light emitted from a device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, , ,W61
2.29.2. "Selective-yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] SY12,SY23, ,
2.29.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] A12,A23, ,
2.29.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.005 2014-05-29
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval, shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.019 2014-08-22
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation		 No.074 2013-06-18
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.113 2014-06-14
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, givenin Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for typeapproval, shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.019 2010-07-10
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.031 2010-07-17
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Colour of the light emitted from the device" The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.086 2010-09-30
colour of the light reflected (Daytime) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime colour of the light reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, ,
2.31.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] Y12,T23, ,
2.31.3. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the light retro-reflected (Night time) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, ,
2.30.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: Y12,Y23, ,
2.30.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries [表] A12,A23, ,
2.30.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the reflected light of the device [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.5. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 of Regulation No 48.		 No.104 2014-03-14
Colour of the reflected light of the device [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Colour of the reflected light of the device [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.4. "Colour of the reflected light of the device." The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 and 2.31 of Regulation No 48.		 No.069 2010-07-31
COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT [No.119A4 2014-03-25] 　 COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT Cornering lamps [ANNEX 4] COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT (Chromaticity coordinates)
1. For checking the colorimetric characteristics, a source of light at a colour temperature of 2 856 K, corresponding to illuminant A of the international commission (CIE), shall be used. For lamps equipped with non-replaceable light sources (filament lamps and other), or light sources (replaceable or non-replaceable) operated together with an electronic light source control gear, the colorimetric characteristics should be verified with the light sources present in the lamp, in accordance with paragraph 7 of this Regulation.
2. The replaceable light source shall be subjected to the intensity, which produces the same colour as the illuminant A of the CIE.		 No.119 2014-03-25
column (Steering) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering column protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Steering column" means the housing enclosing the steering shaft;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Combination [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Combination Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;		 No.062 2013-03-27
Combination [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Combination Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.4. "Combination" means one of the specifically developed and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Combination [No.018 2008-10-15] 　 Combination Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;		 No.018 2008-10-15
Combination [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Combination protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;		 No.018 2010-05-13
Combination [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Combination Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;		 No.062 2004-03-31
Combination [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Combination Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.4. "Combination" means one of the specifically developed and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system		 No.116 2010-06-30
Combined [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Combined Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.4. "Combined" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, but a common light source and a common lamp body;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Combined [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Combined Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.4. "Combined" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, but a common light source and a common lamp body;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Combined brake [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Combined brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Combined brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Combined brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 CBS (Combined brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Combined brake system (CBS)" means:
For vehicle categories L1 and L3:a service brake system where at least two brakes on different wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle categories L2 and L5:a service brake system where the brakes on all wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle category L4:a service brake system where the brakes on at least the front and rear wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control. (If the rear wheel and sidecar wheel are braked by the same brake system, this is regarded as the rear brake.)		 No.078 2015-01-30
Combined braking system [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Combined braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Combined braking system" means
2.9.1. in the case of vehicles of categories L1 and L3, a system whereby at least two brakes on different wheels are actuated in combination by the operation of a single control. This method of actuation requires a control which is independent of the second braking device which operates on one wheel only;
2.9.2. in the case of vehicles of categories L2 and L5, a braking device which operates on all the wheels;
2.9.3. in the case of vehicles of category L4, a braking device which operates at least on the front and rear wheel. Therefore a braking device which operates simultaneously on the rear wheel and on the sidecar wheel is regarded as a rear brake.		 No.078 2004-03-31
combined deNOx- particulate filter [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2008-04-12
combined deNOx- particulate filter [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Combined endurance braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Combined endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device.
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems;
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device;
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Combined endurance braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Combined endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Combined lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Combined lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.4. Combined lamps
"Combined lamps" means devices having separate lenses but a common light source and a common lamp body.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
combined lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 combined lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.5. combined lamps
means lamps having separate illuminating surfaces but a common light source and a common lamp body;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Combined lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.5. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces (1), but a common light source and a common lamp body; No.048 2008-05-23
Combined lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.5. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ), but a common light source and a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Combined lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.4. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate lenses but a common light source and a common lamp body;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Combined service brake [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Combined service brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Combined service brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control;		 No.060 2004-03-31
combustion engine vehicle (Internal) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
combustion engine vehicle (Internal) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
combustion heater (Type of) [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Type of combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Type of combustion heater" means devices which do not differ in essential respects such as:
- fuel type (e.g. liquid or gaseous),
- transfer medium (e.g. air or water),
- vehicle location (e.g. passenger compartment or load area).		 No.122 2010-06-30
Combustion heater [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Combustion heater" means a device directly using liquid or gaseous fuel and not using the waste heat from the engine used for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.122 2010-06-30
commanded braking (Automatically) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
commanded braking (Automatically) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013 2010-09-30
commanded braking (Automatically) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Commanded stop phase [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Commanded stop phase using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.75. "Commanded stop phase" defines the period of time during which the combustion engine is switched off automatically for fuel saving and is allowed to start again automatically		 No.110 2015-06-30
Common space [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Common space Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Common space [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Common space Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Common space [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Common space Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.121 2016-01-08
Common space [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Common space Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbols) may be displayed, but not simultaneously.		 No.130 2014-06-18
Common space [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Common space Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may be displayed, but not simultaneously.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Common space [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Common space Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Common space [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Common space Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may bedisplayed but not simultaneously.		 No.121 2010-07-10
communication (Data) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.		 No.013 2016-02-18
communication (Data) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.		 No.013 2010-09-30
communication staircase (Inter-) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks		 No.107 2010-09-29
compartment (Driver) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver's exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
compartment (Driver's) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Driver's compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for the driver's exclusive use and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
compartment (Driver's) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Driver's compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for the driver’s exclusive use and containing the driver’s seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
compartment (Driver's) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver's exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
compartment (Driver's) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver’s exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver’s seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
compartment (Engine) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Engine compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.3. "Engine compartment" means the compartment in which the engine is installed and in which a combustion heater may be installed.		 No.108 2015-04-21
compartment (heating, Separate) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Separate heating compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Separate heating compartment" means a compartment for a combustion heater located outside the interior compartment and the engine compartment.		 No.108 2015-04-21
compartment (Interior) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Interior compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.2. "Interior compartment" means any compartment intended for passengers, drivers and/or crew bounded by the interior facing surface(s) of:
(a) the ceiling;
(b) the floor;
(c) the front, rear and side walls,
(d) the doors;
(e) the outside glazing.		 No.108 2015-04-21
compartment (Luggage) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Luggage compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Luggage compartment" means the space in the vehicle for luggage accommodation, bounded by the roof, hood, floor, side walls, as well as by the barrier and enclosure provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with live parts, being separated from the passenger compartment by the front bulkhead or the rear bulkhead.		 No.100 2011-02-14
compartment (Luggage) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Luggage compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Luggage compartment" means the space in the vehicle for luggage accommodation, bounded by the roof, hood, floor, side walls, as well as by the barrier and enclosure provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with live parts, being separated from the passenger compartment by the front bulkhead or the rear bulk head.		 No.100 2015-03-31
compartment (Passenger) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
compartment (Passenger) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
compartment (Passenger) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Passenger compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, window glass, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with live parts		 No.100 2011-02-14
compartment (Passenger) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Passenger compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, window glass, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with live parts.		 No.100 2015-03-31
compartment (Passenger) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.		 No.107 2015-06-18
compartment (passenger) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 passenger compartment Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.3. "passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead, and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear seat back support;		 No.034 2011-04-28
compartment (Passenger) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Passenger compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger compartment" means the space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes or toilets.		 No.066 2007-12-06
compartment (Passenger) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Passenger compartment(s) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Passenger compartment(s)" means the space(s) intended for passengers’ use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes or toilets.		 No.066 2011-03-30
compartment (Passenger) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;		 No.094 2010-05-28
compartment (Passenger) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;		 No.095 2007-11-30
compartment (Passenger) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.		 No.107 2006-12-27
compartment (Passenger) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.		 No.107 2010-09-29
compartment (Passenger) [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.2. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupants’ accommodation including bar, kitchen, toilet, etc.), bounded by:
- the roof,
- the floor,
- the side walls,
- the doors,
- the outside glazing,
- the rear compartment bulkhead, or the plane of the rear seat,
- back support,
- at the driver's side of the longitudinal vertical median plane of the vehicle, the vertical transversal plane through the driver's R-point as defined in Regulation No 17,
- at the opposite side of the longitudinal vertical median plane of the vehicle, the front bulkhead.		 No.118 2010-07-10
compartment (Passenger) [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.7. "Passenger compartment" means the interior part of the vehicle used to accommodate the driver and any passengers.		 No.122 2010-06-30
compartment (passenger, Heating system for the) [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Heating system for the passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Heating system for the passenger compartment" means any type of device designed to increase the temperature of the passenger compartment.		 No.122 2010-06-30
compartment (Separate) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors.		 No.107 2015-06-18
compartment (Separate) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors.		 No.107 2006-12-27
compartment (Separate) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors		 No.107 2010-09-29
compatibility (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 No.010 2012-09-20
compatibility (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic compatibility Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 No.010 2010-05-08
competition (designed for, Tyre) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Tyres designed for competition Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyres designed for competition" means tyres intended to be fitted to vehicles involved in motor sport competition and not intended for non-competitive on-road use.		 No.117 2011-11-23
complete system [No.123 2006-12-27A4] 　 complete system Adaptive Front-lighting Systems [Annex 4] TESTS FOR STABILITY OF PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
(a) "complete system" shall be understood to mean the complete right and left side of a system itself including electronic light source control-gear(s) and/or supply and operating device(s) and those surrounding body parts and lamps which could influence its thermal dissipation. Each installation unit of the system and lamp(s), if any, of the complete system may be tested separately;		 No.123 2006-12-27
complete vehicle (test on a, Rollover) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Component [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Component alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Component" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved independently of a vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Component [No.116 2012-02-16] 　 Component Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.1. "Component" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved independently of a vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing;		 No.116 2012-02-16
COMPONENT (CLASSIFICATION OF) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 3. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
Class 5 Parts in contact with temperature range extending below – 40℃.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
CNG and/or LNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure, temperature and function, according to Figure 1-1.		 No.110 2015-06-30
component (emission related, Critical) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Critical emission-related components Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Critical emission-related components" means the following components which are designed primarily for emission control: any exhaust after-treatment system, the ECU and its associated sensors and actuators, and the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;		 No.049 2013-06-24
component (emission related, Critical) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Critical emission-related components Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.15. "Critical emission-related components" means the components which are designed primarily for emission control, that is, any exhaust after-treatment system, the electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and actuators, and the EGR system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;		 No.096 2014-03-22
component (Multi functional) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Multi-functional component using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.7. "Multi-functional component" means any of the above mentioned specific components combined or fitted together as a component.		 No.110 2015-06-30
component (Specific) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Specific components using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.6. "Specific components" means:
(a) Container (cylinder or tank);
(b) Accessories fitted to the container;
(c) Pressure regulator;
(d) Automatic valve;
(e) Manual valve;
(f) Gas supply device;
(g) Gas flow adjuster;
(h) Flexible fuel line;
(i) Rigid fuel line;
(j) Filling unit or receptacle;
(k) Non-return valve or check valve;
(l) Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) primary and secondary;
(m) Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) Filter;
(o) Pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) Excess flow valve;
(q) Service valve;
(r) Electronic control unit;
(s) Gas-tight housing;
(t) Fitting;
(u) Ventilation hose;
(v) Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered);
(w) Fuel rail;
(x) Heat exchanger/vaporiser;
(y) Natural gas detector;
(z) Fuel pump (for LNG).		 No.110 2015-06-30
component (Specific) [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Specific component Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder),
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder
(c) pressure regulator,
(d) automatic valve,
(e) manual valve,
(f) gas supply device,
(g) gas flow adjuster,
(h) flexible fuel line,
(i) rigid fuel line,
(j) filling unit or receptacle,
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve,
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve),
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered),
(n) filter,
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator,
(p) excess flow valve,
(q) service valve,
(r) electronic control unit,
(s) gas-tight housing,
(t) fitting,
(u) ventilation hose.
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi-functional component".		 No.110 2008-03-14
component (Specific) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Specific component using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder);
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder;
(c) pressure regulator;
(d) automatic valve;
(e) manual valve;
(f) gas supply device;
(g) gas flow adjuster;
(h) flexible fuel line;
(i) rigid fuel line;
(j) filling unit or receptacle;
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve;
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) filter;
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) excess flow valve;
(q) service valve;
(r) electronic control unit;
(s) gas-tight housing;
(t) fitting;
(u) ventilation hose;
(v) pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered).
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi- functional component".		 No.110 2011-05-07
component (Type of a) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Type of a component burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Type of a component" means components which do not differ in such essential respects as:
6.1.1.1. The manufacturer's type designation,
6.1.1.2. The intended use (seat upholstery, roof lining, insulation, etc.),
6.1.1.3. The base material(s) (e.g. wool, plastic, rubber, blended materials),
6.1.1.4. The number of layers in the case of composite materials, and
6.1.1.5. Other characteristics in so far as they have an appreciable effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
component (Type of a) [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Type of a component Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Type of a component" means components which do not differ in such essential respects as:
6.1.1.1. the manufacturer's type designation,
6.1.1.2. the intended use (seat upholstery, roof lining, etc.),
6.1.1.3. the base material(s) (e.g. wool, plastic, rubber, blended materials),
6.1.1.4. the number of layers in the case of composite materials, and
6.1.1.5. other characteristics in so far as they have an appreciable effect on the performance prescribed inthis Regulation.		 No.118 2010-07-10
component (Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of components using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.39. "Type of components" as mentioned in paragraphs 4.17 to 4.38 (above) means components that do not differ in such essential respect as materials, working pressure and operating temperatures.		 No.110 2015-06-30
component (Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of components using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.25. "Type of components" as mentioned in paragraphs 2.6 to 2.23 above means components which do not differ in such essential respect as materials, working pressure and operating temperatures.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Component of a braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Component of a braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Component of an exhaust system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Component of an exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.5. "Component of an exhaust or silencing system" means one of the individual components which together form the exhaust system (such as exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system (air filter) if any.
If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or absorber shall be treated as components having the same importance as the exhaust system.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Component of an silencing system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Component of an exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.5. "Component of an exhaust or silencing system" means one of the individual components which together form the exhaust system (such as exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system (air filter) if any.
If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or absorber shall be treated as components having the same importance as the exhaust system.		 No.041 2012-11-14
component of CNG retrofit system [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 components of CNG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. For definitions of the components of CNG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 110.		 No.115 2014-11-07
component of LPG retrofit system [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 components of LPG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. For definitions of the components of LPG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Component of the braking equipment [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Component of the braking equipment [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Component of the braking system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Components of the braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Components of the braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system.		 No.078 2015-01-30
component of the entrance angle (First) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180° ＜ β1 ＜ 180°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
component of the entrance angle (Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90° ＜ β2 ＜ 90°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Component(s) of the braking device [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Component(s) of the braking device Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component(s) of the braking device" means one or more of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking device;		 No.078 2004-03-31
composite container (All-) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 All-composite container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Composite cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Composite cylinder using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.53. "Composite cylinder" means a cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.		 No.110 2015-06-30
composite cylinder (Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - composite cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.49. "Batch — composite cylinders" means a "batch" i.e. a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
composite cylinder [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 composite cylinder Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.8. composite cylinder: A cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.		 No.110 2008-03-14
composite cylinders (batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - composite cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.4. batch - composite cylinders: A "batch" shall be a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having
the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Composite material [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Composite material burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Composite material" means a material composed of several layers of similar or different materials intimately held together at their surfaces by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), such materials shall not be considered as composite materials.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Composite material [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Composite material Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Composite material" means a material composed of several layers of similar or different materialsintimately held together at their surfaces by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), such materials shall not be considered as composite materials.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Compressed Natural Gas [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.43. "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means natural gas that has been compressed and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
compression chamber (Spring) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 Spring compression chamber Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.2. "Spring compression chamber" means the chamber where the pressure variation that induces the compression of the spring is actually produced.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Compression ignition engine [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Compression ignition (C.I.) engine Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.3 "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which operates on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.024 2006-11-24
Concealable illuminating lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Concealable illuminating lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.6. Concealable illuminating lamp
"Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term ‘retractable’ is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Concealable illuminating lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Concealable illuminating lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.6. "Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Concealable lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Concealable lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.8. "Concealable lamp" means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use.
This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.048 2008-05-23
Concealable lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Concealable lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.8. "Concealable lamp" means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.048 2011-12-06
condensation (Aqueous) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Aqueous condensation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.5. "Aqueous condensation" means the precipitation of water-containing constituents from a gas phase to a liquid phase. Aqueous condensation is a function of humidity, pressure, temperature, and concentrations of other constituents such as sulphuric acid. These parameters vary as a function of engine intake-air humidity, dilution-air humidity, engine air-to-fuel ratio, and fuel composition - including the amount of hydrogen and sulphur in the fuel;		 No.096 2014-03-22
conditioning cycle (pre-) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 preconditioning cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"preconditioning cycle" means the running of at least three consecutive OBD test cycles or emission test cycles for the purpose of achieving stability of the engine operation, the emission control system and OBD monitoring readiness;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Conductive connection [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) is charged.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Conductive connection [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS) is charged.		 No.100 2015-03-31
conductive part (Exposed) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Exposed conductive part protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.012 2013-03-27
conductive part (Exposed) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools,		 No.094 2012-09-20
conductive part (Exposed) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.095 2015-07-10
conductive part (Exposed) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB, and which becomes electrically energized under isolation failure conditions.		 No.100 2011-02-14
conductive part (Exposed) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB, and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Confirmed DTC [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Confirmed and active DTC Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.10. "Confirmed and active DTC" means a DTC that is stored during the time the NCD system concludes that a malfunction exists.		 No.096 2014-03-22
CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 COP (CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 8. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION (COP)
8.1. Every vehicle bearing an approval mark as prescribed under this Regulation shall conform, with regard to components affecting the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine, emissions from the crankcase and evaporative emissions, to the vehicle type approved. The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the 1958 Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/ 505/Rev.2), with the following requirements: [略]		 No.083 2015-07-03
conformity of production testing [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Routine testing (or conformity of production testing) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Routine testing" (or conformity of production testing), means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
connect (dis-, Automatic) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train,		 No.094 2012-09-20
connect (dis, Automatic) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train.		 No.095 2015-07-10
connected to the electric circuit (Chassis) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Chassis connected to the electric circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Chassis connected to the electric circuit" means AC and DC electric circuits galvanically connected to the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
connection (Conductive) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) is charged.		 No.100 2011-02-14
connection (Conductive) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS) is charged.		 No.100 2015-03-31
connector (Automated) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Automated connector Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Automated connector" means a system through which the electric and pneumatic connection, between the towing vehicle and towed vehicle is made automatically without direct intervention of a human operator.		 No.013 2016-02-18
connector (ISOFIX top tether) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2011-09-09
connector (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage;		 No.014 2015-08-19
connector (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
connector (tether, top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether connector Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.014 2007-12-06
connector (tether, top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2007-11-23
connector (top-tether, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top-tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top-tether anchorage.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Conspicuity marking [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Conspicuity marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17. "Conspicuity marking" means a device intended to increase the conspicuity of a vehicle, when viewed from the side or rear, by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;g No.048 2008-05-23
Conspicuity marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Conspicuity marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17. "Conspicuity marking" means a device intended to increase the conspicuity of a vehicle, when viewed from the side or rear (or in the case of trailers, additionally from the front), by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;
2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;
2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;
2.7.17.2. "Line marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Constant speed engine [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Constant-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.11. "Constant-speed engine" means an engine whose type approval or certification is limited to constant-speed operation. Engines whose constant-speed governor function is removed or disabled are no longer constant-speed engines;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Constant speed operation [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Constant-speed operation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.12. "Constant-speed operation" means engine operation with a governor that automatically controls the operator's demand to maintain engine speed, even under changing load. Governors do not always maintain exactly constant speed. Typically, speed can decrease (0,1 to 10) per cent below the speed at zero load, such that the minimum speed occurs near the engine's point of maximum power;		 No.096 2014-03-22
constituent part of the mirror (curvature of the, radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12."The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.046 2014-08-08
constituent parts of the rear view mirror (Radius of curvature of the) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.081 2012-07-13
contact (Direct) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Direct contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
contact (Direct) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Direct contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
contact (Direct) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Direct contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
contact (Direct) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with live parts.		 No.100 2011-02-14
contact (Direct) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with live parts.		 No.100 2015-03-31
contact (direct, In-) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Indirect contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
contact (Indirect) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
contact (Indirect) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
contact (Indirect) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts		 No.100 2011-02-14
contact (Indirect) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.		 No.100 2015-03-31
contact surface (floor, Vehicle) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Vehicle floor contact surface safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle floor contact surface" means the area which results from the intersection of the upper surface of the vehicle floor (incl. trim, carpet, foam, etc.) with the support leg foot assessment volume and is designed to withstand the support leg forces of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129;		 No.014 2015-08-19
contact surface (foot, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg foot contact surface Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Container [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Container" (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.12. "Container" (or cylinder) means any storage system used for compressed natural gas.		 No.110 2015-06-30
container (Accessory fitted to the) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Accessories fitted to the container or tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2015-06-30
container (accessory fitted to the) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Accessories fitted to the container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
container (accessory fitted to the) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Accessories fitted to the container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container:
2.5.1. Manual valve;
2.5.2. Pressure sensor/indicator;
2.5.3. Pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
2.5.4. Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
2.5.5. Automatic cylinder valve;
2.5.6. Excess flow valve;
2.5.7. Gas-tight housing.		 No.110 2011-05-07
container (Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.13."Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3A. 4.13.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).		 No.110 2015-06-30
container (Type of) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Type of container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.4. "Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect to the following characteristics as specified in Annex 10:
(a) the trade name(s) or trade mark(s),
(b) the shape (cylindrical, special shape),
(c) the openings (plate for accessories/metal ring),
(d) the material,
(e) the welding process (in case of metal containers),
(f) the heat treatment (in case of metal containers),
(g) the production line,
(h) the nominal wall thickness,
(i) the diameter
(j) the height (in case of special containers)		 No.067 2008-03-14
container (Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.4. "Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Container [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Container [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Container (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" (or cylinder) means any vessel used for the storage of compressed natural gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal;
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped);
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped);
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).		 No.110 2011-05-07
Continuous braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
continuous braking (Semi) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
continuous braking (Semi-) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Continuous braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Continuous regeneration [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Continuous regeneration [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Continuous regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.13. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either in a sustained manner or at least once over the applicable transient test cycle or ramped-modal cycle; in contrast to periodic (infrequent) regeneration;		 No.096 2014-03-22
continuous regeneration [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust aftertreatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per ETC test. Such a regeneration process will not require a special test procedure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
continuous regeneration [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust aftertreatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per ETC test. Such a regeneration process will not require a special test procedure;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Contour marking [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Contour marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;
2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;
2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;		 No.048 2011-12-06
contrast (Luminance) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Luminance contrast devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.4."Luminance contrast" means the brightness ratio between an object and its immediate background/surrounding that allows the object to be distinguished from its background/surroundings.		 No.046 2014-08-08
contrast (Luminance) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Luminance contrast Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.4. "Luminance contrast" means the brightness ratio between an object and its immediatebackground/surrounding that allows the object to be distinguished from itsbackground/surroundings.		 No.046 2010-07-10
control [Directive 2009/080/EC] 　 control identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators for two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "control" means any part of the vehicle or component directly actuated by the driver which causes a change in the state or operation of the vehicle or one of the parts thereof;		 Directive 2009/080/EC
Control [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Control [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Control Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or a combination of these various kinds of energy.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Control [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Control Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means any part of the vehicle or a device directly actuated by the driver which changes the state or functioning of the vehicle or any part thereof.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Control [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Control Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the rider in order to supply or control the energy required for braking the vehicle to the transmission.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Control [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Control Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Control" means that hand-operated part of a device that enables the driver to bring about a change in the state or functioning of a vehicle or vehicle's subsystem.		 No.121 2016-01-08
control (Coupling force) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.013 2010-09-30
control (Directional) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Directional control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
control (Electric regenerative braking) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking control Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
control (emission, diagnostic system for, on-board) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 on-board diagnostic system for emission control (OBD) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2010-08-31
control (force, Coupling) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.013 2016-02-18
control (Forwar) [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Forward control Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.5. "Forward control" means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub in the forwardquarter of the vehicle length.		 No.046 2010-07-10
control (Forward) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Forward control devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.5."Forward control" means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rear ward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.		 No.046 2014-08-08
control (Roll over) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Roll-over control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
control (System) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 System control (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.4. "System control" means that part(s) of the AFS receiving the AFS control signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;		 No.048 2011-12-06
control (System) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 System control Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.8. "System control" means that part(s) of the system receiving the signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Control [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Control [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Control Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or a combination of these various kinds of energy.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Control [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Control Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means any part of the vehicle or a device directly actuated by the driver which changes the state or functioning of the vehicle or any part thereof;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Control [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Control Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or the energy from another source controlled by the driver, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Control [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Control Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Control" means that hand-operated part of a device that enables the driver to bring about a changein the state or functioning of a vehicle or vehicle's subsystem.		 No.121 2010-07-10
control area [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent
load;		 No.049 2008-04-12
control area [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent load;		 No.049 2010-08-31
control device (Pollution) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions;		 No.083 2012-02-15
control device (Pollution) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions.		 No.083 2015-07-03
control device (pollution, Original) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Original pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Original pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices covered by the type approval granted for the vehicle concerned;		 No.049 2013-06-24
control device (pollution, Replacement) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Replacement pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.56. "Replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices intended to replace an original pollution control device and which can be approved as a separate technical unit;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Control Diagnostic system (NOx) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCD (NOx Control Diagnostic system) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.52. "NO x Control Diagnostic system (NCD)" means a system on-board the engine which has the capability of
(a) Detecting a NO x Control Malfunction;
(b) Identifying the likely cause of NO x control malfunctions by means of information stored in computer memory and/or communicating that information off-board;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Control equipment [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Control equipment Alarm systems 2.4. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices; No.097 2008-12-30
Control equipment [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Control equipment alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.2. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting and/or unsetting of an immobiliser.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Control equipment [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Control equipment alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Control equipment [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.5. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Control equipment [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.2. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting and/or unsetting of an immobiliser		 No.116 2012-02-16
Control equipment [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.5. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Control equipment [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.2. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting and/or unsetting of an immobiliser.		 No.116 2010-06-30
control line (Electric) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric control line Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection between two vehicles which provides the braking control function to a towed vehicle within a combination. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission.		 No.013 2016-02-18
control line (Electric) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric control line Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection between power-driven vehicle and trailer which provides the braking control function to the trailer. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Control Malfunction (NOx) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCM (NOx Control Malfunction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.53. "NO x Control Malfunction (NCM)" means an attempt to tamper with the NO x control system of an engine or a malfunction affecting that system that might be due to tampering, that is considered by this Regulation as requiring the activation of a warning or an inducement system once detected;		 No.096 2014-03-22
control monitoring system (Emission) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NO x control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5;
"Emission control system" means the elements of design and emission strategies developed or calibrated for the purpose of controlling emissions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
control monitoring system (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.		 No.049 2008-04-12
control monitoring system (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.		 No.049 2010-08-31
control signal (AFS) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 AFS control signal (V, E, W, T) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.5. "AFS control signal" (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation;		 No.048 2011-12-06
control strategy (Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission control strategy Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.25. "Emission control strategy" means a combination of an emission control system with one base emission control strategy and with one set of auxiliary emission control strategies, incorporated into the overall design of an engine or non-road mobile machinery into which the engine is installed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
control strategy (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2008-04-12
control strategy (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2010-08-31
control strategy (emission, auxiliary) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
control strategy (emission, auxiliary) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2010-08-31
control strategy (emission, base) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2008-04-12
control strategy (emission, base) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2010-08-31
control system (Emission) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Emission control system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Emission control system" means the electronic engine management controller and any emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative system which supplies an input to or receives an output from this controller.		 No.083 2012-02-15
control system (Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission control system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.24. "Emission control system" means any device, system, or element of design that controls or reduces the emissions of regulated pollutants from an engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
control system (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control system" means the exhaust aftertreatment system, the electronic management controller(s) of the engine system and any emission-related component of the engine system in the exhaust which supplies an input to or receives an output from this(these) controller(s), and when applicable the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other power train or vehicle control unit with respect to emissions management;		 No.049 2008-04-12
control system (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control system" means the exhaust aftertreatment system, the electronic management controller(s) of the engine system and any emission-related component of the engine system in the exhaust which supplies an input to or receives an output from this(these) controller(s), and when applicable the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other power train or vehicle control unit with respect to emissions management;		 No.049 2010-08-31
control system (Remote) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Remote control systems Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.		 No.055 2006-12-27
control system (Remote) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Remote control systems mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Control System (Stability, Electronic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or "ESC System" means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side- slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
control transmission [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ control transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Control transmission [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Control transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Control transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Control transmission Steering equipment 2.3.2.1. "Control transmission" means all components by means of which signals are transmitted for control of the steering equipment. No.079 2008-05-27
Control transmission [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Control transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013 2010-09-30
control transmission [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 control transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission":
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Control tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Control tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.14. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre . see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation. No.117 2008-08-29
Control tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Control tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.3. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre – see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation.		 No.117 2011-11-23
control unit (Electronic) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Electronic control unit Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.23. "Electronic control unit" means an engine's electronic device that uses data from engine sensors to control engine parameters;		 No.096 2014-03-22
control unit (Electronic) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Electronic control unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.12. "Electronic control unit" means a device which controls the LPG demand of the engine and cuts off automatically the power to the shut-off valves of the LPG-system in case of a broken fuel supply pipe caused by an accident, or by stalling of the engine		 No.067 2008-03-14
control unit (electronic, Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.40. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 4.38 means components that do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.		 No.110 2015-06-30
control unit (electronic, Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.26. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 2.24 means components which do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Controlled tension winding [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Controlled tension winding using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.54. "Controlled tension winding" means a process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.		 No.110 2015-06-30
controlled tension winding [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 controlled tension winding Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.9. controlled tension winding: A process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Controller [No.078 2004-03-31A4] 　 Controller Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Controller" means a component designed to evaluate the data transmitted by the sensor(s) and to transmit a signal to the modulator;		 No.078 2004-03-31
conventional number "d" [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 conventional number "d" 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Conversion efficiency of NMC E [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Conversion efficiency of NMC (non-methane cutter) E Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.14. "Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E" means the efficiency of the conversion of a NMC that is used for removing the non-methane hydrocarbons from the sample gas by oxidizing all hydrocarbons except methane. Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 per cent (E CH4 = 0) and for the other hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 per cent (E C2H6 = 100 per cent). For the accurate measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate for methane and ethane. Contrast with "penetration fraction";		 No.096 2014-03-22
conversion system (energy, Electric) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electric energy conversion system protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
conversion system (energy, Electric) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
conversion system (energy, Electric) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2015-03-31
conversion system (energy, Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
conversion system (energy, Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
converter (catalytic, Original equipment) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original equipment catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Original equipment catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters covered by the type approval delivered for the vehicle and whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, Replacement) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters for which approval can be obtained according to this Regulation, other than those defined in paragraph 2.1 above.		 No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, replacement, Approval of a) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).		 No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, replacement, Deteriorated) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter" means a converter that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extend that it fulfils the requirements laid out in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, replacement, Original) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Original replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83, but are offered in the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval.		 No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, Type of) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Type of catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of catalytic converter" means catalytic converters which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(i) number of coated substrates, structure and material
(ii) type of catalytic activity (oxidising, three-way, …)
(iii) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length
(iv) catalyst material content
(v) catalyst material ratio
(vi) cell density
(vii) dimensions and shape
(viii) thermal protection		 No.103 2007-06-19
converter (Electronic) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electronic converter protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
converter (Electronic) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electronic converter Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
converter (Electronic) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electronic converter Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
converter (Electronic) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electric power for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
converter (Electronic) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electric power for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2015-03-31
convertible car [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 convertible car Interior fittings 2.7. "convertible car" means a vehicle where, in certain configurations, there is no rigid part of the vehicle body above the belt line with the exception of the front rof supports and/or the rollover bars and/or the seat belt anchorage points; (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.5 and 2.7); No.021 2008-07-16
COP [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 COP (CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 8. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION (COP)
8.1. Every vehicle bearing an approval mark as prescribed under this Regulation shall conform, with regard to components affecting the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine, emissions from the crankcase and evaporative emissions, to the vehicle type approved. The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the 1958 Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/ 505/Rev.2), with the following requirements: [略]		 No.083 2015-07-03
Cord [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Cord Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic tyre (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Cord [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Cord Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic tyre; No.054 2008-07-11
Cord [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Cord Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Cord [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Cord Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the tyre;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Cord [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cord 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Cord [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cord Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Cord separation [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Cord separation Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.24. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating; No.030 2008-07-30
Cord separation [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Cord separation Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.24. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their coating; No.054 2008-07-11
Cord separation [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Cord separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Cord separation [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Cord separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Cord separation [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cord separation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Cord separation [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cord separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Cornering lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Cornering lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.26. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn; No.048 2008-05-23
Cornering lamp [No.119 2014-03-25] 　 Cornering lamp Cornering lamps [SCOPE]
This Regulation applies to cornering lamps for vehicles of categories M, N and T.
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn.
1.2. "Cornering lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark;
(b) The characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.
1.3. The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.119 2014-03-25
Cornering lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Cornering lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.26. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Corrective steering function [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Corrective steering function Steering equipment 2.3.4.2. "Corrective steering function" means the discontinuous control function within a complex electronic control system whereby, for a limited duration, changes to the steering angle of one or more wheels may result from the automatic evaluation of signals initiated on-board the vehicle, in order to maintain the basic desired path of the vehicle or to influence the vehicle"s dynamic behaviour.
Systems that do not themselves positively actuate the steering system but that, possibly in conjunction with passive infrastructure features, simply warn the driver of a deviation from the ideal path of the vehicle, or of an unseen hazard, by means of a tactile warning transmitted through the steering control, are also considered to be corrective steering.		 No.079 2008-05-27
cot (Carry) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Carry cot Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision.		 No.129 2014-03-29
cot (carry-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 carry-cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2007-11-23
cot (carry) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 carry cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;		 No.044 2011-09-09
cot restraint (Carry) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Carry-cot restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
cot restraint (carry-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 carry-cot restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;		 No.044 2011-09-09
counter (cycle, Ignition) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Ignition cycle counter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Ignition cycle counter" means a counter indicating the number of engine starts a vehicle has experienced;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Coupling (hitch) height [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2.18. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer must be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test. No.117 2008-08-29
Coupling (hitch) height [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.7. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer shall be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test.		 No.117 2011-11-23
coupling (Service) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Service coupling LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Service coupling" means a coupling in the fuel line between the fuel container and the engine. If a mono-fuel vehicle is out of fuel the engine can be operated by means of a service fuel container which can be coupled to the service coupling;		 No.067 2008-03-14
coupling device or component (type of) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 type of coupling device or component Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "type of coupling device or component" means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;
2.10.2. the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.;
2.10.3. the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and
2.10.4. the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling device or component (type of) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 type of coupling device or component mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "type of coupling device or component" means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;
2.10.2. the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6;
2.10.3. the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and
2.10.4. the characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.		 No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical, standard) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer.		 No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "mechanical coupling devices and components means" all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27a] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head - see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye - see annex 5, paragraph 3.:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings - see annex 5, paragraph 4.:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices - see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the loadbearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer - see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 8.:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel - see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes - see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings - see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (mechanical) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "mechanical coupling devices and components means" all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.		 No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical, miscellaneous, non-standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (mechanical, miscellaneous, standard, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6 such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical, standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (standard, mechanical, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (standard, non-mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components are classified according to type (mechanical) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Coupling force control [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Coupling force control [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.013 2010-09-30
coupling requirement (automatic) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 automatic coupling requirement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.		 No.055 2006-12-27
coupling requirement (automatic) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 automatic coupling requirement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Coupling system [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Coupling system Electric vehicle safety 2.10. "Coupling system" means all the parts used to connect the vehicle to an external electric power supply (alternative or direct current supply). No.100 2009-02-14
Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Coupling system for charging the REESS [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Coupling system for charging the REESS [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Coupling system for charging the RESS [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Coupling system for charging the RESS [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Coupling system for charging the RESS" means the electrical circuit installed in the vehicle used for charging the RESS.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Coupling system for charging the RESS [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Coupling system for REESS (charging the) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Courtesy lamp (Exterior) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Exterior Courtesy lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.29. "Exterior Courtesy lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to assist the entry and exit of the vehicle driver and passenger or in loading operations;		 No.048 2011-12-06
crack (Technical) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Technical crack (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Technical crack" is a material separation with a propagation of more than 1 mm occurring during a dynamic test (defects caused by the production process are not to be taken into account).		 No.124 2006-12-27
Crankcase [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Crankcase Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Crankcase" means the spaces in, or external to, an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapours can be emitted;		 No.049 2013-06-24
crankcase [REG. No 595/2009] 　 crankcase emissions 5. "crankcase" means the spaces in, or external to, an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapours can be emitted; REG. No 595/2009
crankcase (Engine) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape;		 No.083 2012-02-15
crankcase (Engine) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape.		 No.083 2015-07-03
crankcase emission (Open) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Open crankcase emissions Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.54. "Open crankcase emissions" means any flow from an engine's crankcase that is emitted directly into the environment;		 No.096 2014-03-22
crew (Member of the) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.		 No.107 2015-06-18
crew (Member of the) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.		 No.107 2006-12-27
crew (Member of the) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.		 No.107 2010-09-29
CRF [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
CRF [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Child restraint fixture (CRF) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
CRF [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2011-09-09
CRF pitch angle [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 CRF pitch angle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "CRF pitch angle" is the angle between the bottom surface of the fixture ISO/F2 (B) as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2, Figure 2) and the horizontal Z plane of the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 14 (Annex 4, Appendix 2), with the fixture installed in the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2).		 No.129 2014-03-29
Criteria (Injury, Head) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "HIC (Head Injury Criteria)" value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Criteria (Injury, Head) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "HIC" (Head Injury Criteria) value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Critical emission related component [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Critical emission-related components Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Critical emission-related components" means the following components which are designed primarily for emission control: any exhaust after-treatment system, the ECU and its associated sensors and actuators, and the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Critical emission related component [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Critical emission-related components Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.15. "Critical emission-related components" means the components which are designed primarily for emission control, that is, any exhaust after-treatment system, the electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and actuators, and the EGR system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Critical emission related maintenance [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Critical emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components		 No.049 2013-06-24
Critical emission related maintenance [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Critical emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.16. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Critical field of vision [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Critical field of vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.10. "Critical field of vision" means the area in which a critical object has to be detected by means ofa device for indirect vision and that is defined by an angle and one or more detection distances.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Critical object [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Critical object devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.6."Critical object" means a cylindrical object with a height of 0,50 m and a diameter of 0,30 m.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Critical object [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Critical object Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.6. "Critical object" means a circular object with a diameter D0 = 0,8 m
(2) A system for indirect vision is intended to detect relevant road users. The relevancy of a road user is defined by his or herposition and (potential) speed. More or less in proportion with the speed of the pedestrian-cyclist- moped driver, thedimensions of these road users increase as well. For detection purposes a moped driver (D = 0,8 m) at 40 m distancewould be equal to a pedestrian (D = 0,5 m) at a distance of 25 m. Considering the speeds, the moped driver would beselected as the criterion for the detection size; for that reason an object with a size of 0,8 m shall be used for determiningthe detection performance.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Critical perception [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Critical perception devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.7."Critical perception" means the level of perception that can just be obtained under critical condi tions via the viewing system used. This corresponds to the situation in which the representative scale of the critical object is multiple times larger than the smallest detail that can be perceived via the viewing system.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Critical perception [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Critical perception Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.7. "Critical perception" means the level of perception that the human eye is generally capable ofachieving under various conditions. For traffic conditions the limiting value for a critical perception is eight arc-minutes of visual angle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Crotch strap [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Crotch strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the Child Restraint System and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact.		 No.129 2014-03-29
crotch strap [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 crotch strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
crotch strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 crotch strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child’s thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;		 No.044 2011-09-09
CRS [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 CRS (Child Restraint System) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Child Restraint System" (CRS) means a device capable of accommodating a child occupant in a sitting or supine position. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the child’s body.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Cryogenic temperature [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Cryogenic temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.69. "Cryogenic temperature" for the purpose of this Regulation means temperatures below - 40℃.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Cumulative luminous flux [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Cumulative luminous flux Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. Cumulative luminous flux: luminous flux emitted by the light source under operating conditions, within a cone enclosing the specified solid angle and centred on the reference axis.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Cure [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cure 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Cure" is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Cure [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cure Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Cure" is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions.		 No.109 2006-07-04
cured (Pre-) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Pre-cured 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
curvature (Radius o) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Radius of curvature external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form of the component under consideration.		 No.061 2010-06-30
curvature (Radius of) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Radius of curvature External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form
of the component under consideration.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Curvature [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Curvature "r" Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Curvature "r"" means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the most curved area.		 No.043 2010-08-31
curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (radii of, Principal) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 ri and r'i (Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (ri) and (r'i)" means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in Annex 6, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface contained in a plane parallel to the greatest dimension of the mirror and passing through its centre and on the arc perpendicular to it;		 No.081 2012-07-13
curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 rp (The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7."The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri′ i.e.:
rp=(ri+ri')/2		 No.046 2014-08-08
curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (Radius of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 rp (Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetic average of the principal radii of curvature ri and r'i, i.e.: rp = [式]		 No.081 2012-07-13
curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (radius of, principal) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2014-08-08
curvature of the constituent part of the mirror (radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12."The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.046 2014-08-08
curvature of the constituent parts of the rear view mirror (Radius of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.081 2012-07-13
Curvature r [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Curvature "r" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Curvature "r" " means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the most curved area.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Curved pane [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Curved pane safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pane" means any single piece of glazing other than a windscreen;
2.17.1. "Curved pane" means a pane with a height of segment "h" greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.17.2. "Flat pane" means a pane with a height of segment equal to or less than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Curved windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Curved windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests.
2.16.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.16.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Curved windscreen [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Curved windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests;
2.13.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre;
2.13.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre.		 No.043 2010-08-31
cushion (booster, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 booster cushion (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
cushion (Seat) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Seat cushion strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat cushion" means the part of the seat which is arranged almost horizontally and designed to support a seated passenger;		 No.080 2013-08-24
cushion (Seat) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat cushion Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat cushion" means the part of the seat which is arranged almost horizontally and designed to support a seated passenger;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Cushion gum [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cushion gum 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Cushion gum" is material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Cushion gum [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cushion gum Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Cushion gum" is a material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.		 No.109 2006-07-04
cut-off [No.123 2010-08-24A8] 　 cut-off Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) [ANNEX 8] PASSING BEAM ‘CUT-OFF’ AND AIMING PROVISIONS
1. CUT-OFF DEFINITION
The "cut-off", when projected on the aiming screen as defined in Annex 9 to this Regulation, shall be sufficiently sharp to permit aiming; it shall comply with the following requirements.
1.1. Shape (see Fig. A.8-1)
1.1.1. The "flat part" shall not deviate vertically by more than
1.1.2. The raised "shoulder part"		 No.123 2010-08-24
cycle (Ageing) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Ageing cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Ageing cycle" means the vehicle or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;		 No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (Ageing) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ageing cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.2. "Ageing cycle" means the machine or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Cycle (Bench, Diesel, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Cycle (Bench, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SBC (Standard Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) described in this appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
2. CATALYST TEMPERATURE CONTROL		 No.083 2015-07-03
cycle (Driving) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Driving cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Driving cycle" means a sequence consisting of an engine start, an operating period (of the vehicle), an engine shut-off, and the time until the next engine start;		 No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (driving) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 driving cycle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. A "driving cycle" consists of engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be detected if present, and engine shut-off.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Cycle (Driving, Transient, Harmonised, World) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (preconditioning) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 preconditioning cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"preconditioning cycle" means the running of at least three consecutive OBD test cycles or emission test cycles for the purpose of achieving stability of the engine operation, the emission control system and OBD monitoring readiness;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Cycle (Road, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION The Standard Road Cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer. The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course.
The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2015-07-03
cycle (Test or duty) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Test (or duty) cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.85. "Test (or duty) cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state or transient operating conditions. Duty cycles are specified in the Annex 5. A single duty cycle may consist of one or more test intervals;		 No.096 2014-03-22
cycle (Test) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.18. "Test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (WHSC) or transient operating conditions (WHTC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (test) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by
the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test);		 No.049 2008-04-12
cycle (test) [No.049 2010-78-31] 　 test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test);		 No.049 2010-08-31
cycle (test, OBD) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 OBD test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"OBD test cycle" means a driving cycle which is a version of the ESC test cycle having the same running-order of the 13 individual modes as described in paragraph 2.7.1. of Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation but where the length of each mode is reduced to 60 seconds;		 No.049 2008-04-12
cycle (test, steady state, modal, Ramped) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ramped modal steady state test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.68. "Ramped modal steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined speed and torque ramps between these modes;		 No.096 2014-03-22
cycle (test, steady state, Ramped) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Ramped steady state test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. "Ramped steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined ramps between these modes (WHSC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (test, Transient) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Transient test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.20. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (WHTC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (test, Transient) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Transient test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.90. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (NRTC);		 No.096 2014-03-22
cycle (warm up) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 warm-up cycle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. A "warm-up cycle" means sufficient vehicle operation such that the coolant temperature has risen by a least 22 K from engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 343 K (70 °C).		 No.083 2012-02-15
cycle (warm-up) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 warm-up cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"warm-up cycle" means sufficient engine operation such that the coolant temperature has risen by at least 22 K from engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 343 K (70℃);		 No.049 2008-04-12
cycle counter (Ignition) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Ignition cycle counter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Ignition cycle counter" means a counter indicating the number of engine starts a vehicle has experienced;		 No.049 2013-06-24
cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Container" (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.12. "Container" (or cylinder) means any storage system used for compressed natural gas.		 No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder (Composite) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Composite cylinder using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.53. "Composite cylinder" means a cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.		 No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder (composite) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 composite cylinder Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.8. composite cylinder: A cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.		 No.110 2008-03-14
cylinder (composite, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - composite cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.49. "Batch — composite cylinders" means a "batch" i.e. a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder (Finished) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Finished cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.56. "Finished cylinders" means completed cylinders that are ready for use, typical of normal production, complete with identification marks and external coating including integral insulation specified by the manufacturer, but free from non-integral insulation or protection.		 No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Container (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" (or cylinder) means any vessel used for the storage of compressed natural gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal;
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped);
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped);
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).		 No.110 2011-05-07
cylinder and liner (metal, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - metal cylinders and liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.50. "Batch — metal cylinders and liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder valve (Automatic) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.19. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder that controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.		 No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder valve (Automatic) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.8. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder which controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.		 No.110 2011-05-07
cylinders (composite, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - composite cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.4. batch - composite cylinders: A "batch" shall be a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having
the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
cylinders (finished) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 finished cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.11. finished cylinders: Completed cylinders which are ready for use, typical of normal production, complete with identification marks and external coating including integral insulation specified by the manufacturer, but free from nonintegral insulation or protection.		 No.110 2008-03-14
cylinders and liners (metal, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - metal cylinders and liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.5. batch - metal cylinders and liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
D (characteristic values) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= 式]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= 式]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [式]		 No.055 2006-12-27
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 d (Nominal rim diameter) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.18. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted; No.054 2008-07-11
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means a conventional number denoting the nominal diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted and corresponding to the diameter of the rim expressed either by size codes (number below 100 — see table for equivalence with millimeters) or in mm (numbers above 100) but not both;
[表]		 No.106 2010-09-30
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.108 2006-07-04
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.109 2006-07-04
D (Outer diameter) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 D (Outer diameter) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.16. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre (1); No.054 2008-07-11
D (Outer diameter) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Outer diameter (D) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new tyre;		 No.106 2010-09-30
D (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 D : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
D [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 D (Outer diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre.
2.16.1. The nominal section width (S1) must be expressed in mm except in the case of types of tyre for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation;
2.16.2. The nominal aspect ratio, except in the case of certain types of tyre, for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation;
2.16.3. A conventional number "d" denoting the nominal diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by code (numbers below 100) or in millimetres’ (numbers above 100).
2.16.3.1. The values in millimetres of the symbol "d" when indicated by a code are as follows: (in mm)
[表] Symbol "d" indicated by one or two figures according to the nominal rim diameter / Value of "d"
4 / 102
5 / 127
-- / ---
23 / 584		 No.075 2011-03-30
d [No.075 2011-03-30]a 　 d (Nominal rim diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.075 2011-03-30
d [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 conventional number "d" 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
2.21.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below: [表]		 No.108 2006-07-04
D, Dc (and S, V, U [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 characteristic values D, Dc , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [式 D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [式 Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [式 D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [式 V=]		 No.055 2010-08-28
Dangerous Goods by Road (Carriage of, International, Agreement concerning the, European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
data (Reference) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Reference data protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship;
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Data communication [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Data communication [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.		 No.013 2010-09-30
datum points (Windscreen) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Windscreen datum points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Windscreen datum points" means points situated at the intersection with the windscreen of lines radiating forward from the V points to the outer surface of the windscreen.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Daylight opening [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Daylight opening Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Daylight opening" means the whole glazing area, excluding any opaque obscuration but including any shade band.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Daytime colour of the fluorescent [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime colour of the fluorescent Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. Daytime colour of the fluorescent a device
2.32.1. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] FR12,FR23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Daytime colour of the light reflected [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime colour of the light reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, ,
2.31.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] Y12,T23, ,
2.31.3. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Daytime running lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.25. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime; No.048 2008-05-23
Daytime running lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.17. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Daytime running lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.25. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Daytime running lamp [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamp Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;
2.2. The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation;		 No.087 2010-06-30
Daytime running lamp of different type [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamps of different types Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Daytime running lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.087 2010-06-30
Dc (characteristic values) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= 式]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= 式]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [式]		 No.055 2006-12-27
Dc (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 DC : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
deceleration (developed, fully, Mean) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "mfdd" (Mean fully developed deceleration) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.		 No.117 2011-11-23
deck [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Floor or deck Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Floor or deck":
2.14.1. "Floor" means that part of the bodywork whose upper surface supports standing passengers, the feet of seated passengers and the driver and any crew member, and may support the seat mountings;
2.14.2. "Deck" means that part of the floor provided only for the passengers.		 No.107 2015-06-18
deck [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Floor or deck Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Floor or deck" means that part of the bodywork whose upper surface supports standing passengers, the feet of seated passengers and the driver and any crew member, and may support the seat mountings;		 No.107 2006-12-27
deck [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Floor or deck Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Floor or deck" means that part of the bodywork whose upper surface supports standing passengers, the feet of seated passengers and the driver and any crew member, and may support the seat mountings;		 No.107 2010-09-29
deck vehicle (Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.6. "Double-deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2015-06-18
deck vehicle (Double) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Double deck vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.066 2011-03-30
deck vehicle (Double) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2010-09-29
decker articulated vehicle (Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Declared maximum power [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 P max (Declared maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Declared maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in ECE kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
declared maximum power [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1"declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;;		 No.049 2008-04-12
declared maximum power [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;		 No.049 2010-08-31
default mode (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission default mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission default mode" means an AECS activated in the case of a malfunction of the ECS detected by the OBD system that results in the MI being activated and that does not require an input from the failed component or system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
default mode (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission default mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission default mode" means an AECS activated in the case of a malfunction of the ECS detected by the OBD system that results in the MI being activated and that does not require an input from the failed component or system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
default mode (emission, Permanent) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Permanent emission default mode Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Permanent emission default mode" refers to a case where the engine management controller permanently switches to a setting that does not require an input from a failed component or system where such a failed component or system would result in an increase in emissions from the vehicle to a level above the limits given in paragraph 3.3.2 of this Annex.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Defeat device [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Defeat device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.16. "Defeat device" means any element of design which senses temperature, vehicle speed, engine rotational
speed, transmission gear, manifold vacuum or any other parameter for the purpose of activating, modulating, delaying or deactivating the operation of any part of the emission control system, that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control system under conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use. Such an element of design may not be considered a defeat device if:
2.16.1. the need for the device is justified in terms of protecting the engine against damage or accident and for safe operation of the vehicle, or
2.16.2. the device does not function beyond the requirements of engine starting, or
2.16.3. conditions are substantially included in the Type I or Type VI test procedures.		 No.083 2008-05-06
Defeat device [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Defeat device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Defeat device" means any element of design which senses temperature, vehicle speed, engine rotational speed, transmission gear, manifold vacuum or any other parameter for the purpose of activating, modulating, delaying or deactivating the operation of any part of the emission control system, that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control system under conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use. Such an element of design may not be considered a defeat device
2.16.1. The need for the device is justified in terms of protecting the engine against damage or accident and for safe operation of the vehicle; or
2.16.2. The device does not function beyond the requirements of engine starting; or
2.16.3. Conditions are substantially included in the Type I or Type VI test procedures;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Defeat device [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Defeat device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Defeat device" means any element of design which senses temperature, vehicle speed, engine rotational speed, transmission gear, manifold vacuum or any other parameter for the purpose of activating, modulating, delaying or deactivating the operation of any part of the emission control system, that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control system under conditions which may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use. Such an element of design may not be considered a defeat device if:
2.16.1. The need for the device is justified in terms of protecting the engine against damage or accident and for safe operation of the vehicle; or
2.16.2. The device does not function beyond the requirements of engine starting; or
2.16.3. Conditions are substantially included in the Type I or Type VI test procedures.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Defeat strategy [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Defeat strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Defeat strategy" means an emission strategy that does not meet the performance requirements for a base and/or auxiliary emission strategy as specified in this annex;		 No.049 2013-06-24
defeat strategy [REG. No 595/2009] 　 defeat strategy emissions 8. "defeat strategy" means an emission control strategy that reduces the effectiveness of the emission controls under ambient or engine operating conditions encountered either during normal vehicle operation or outside the type-approval test procedures; REG. No 595/2009
defeat strategy [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 defeat strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "defeat strategy" means:
(a) an AECS that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control relative to the BECS under conditions that may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use;
(b) a BECS that discriminates between operation on a standardized approval test and other operations and provides a lesser level of emission control under conditions not substantially included in the applicable approval test procedures, or;
(c) an OBD or an emission control monitoring strategy that discriminates between operation on a standardized approval test and other operations and provides a lower level of monitoring capability (timely and accurately) under conditions not substantially included in the applicable approval test procedures;		 No.049 2008-04-12
defeat strategy [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 defeat strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "defeat strategy" means:
(a) an AECS that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control relative to the BECS under conditions that may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use;
(b) a BECS that discriminates between operation on a standardized approval test and other operations and provides a lesser level of emission control under conditions not substantially included in the applicable approval test procedures, or;
(c) an OBD or an emission control monitoring strategy that discriminates between operation on a standardized approval test and other operations and provides a lower level of monitoring capability (timely and accurately) under conditions not substantially included in the applicable approval test procedures;		 No.049 2010-08-31
defect (emissions-related) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emissions-related defect Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emissions-related defect" means a deficiency or deviation from normal production tolerances in design, materials or workmanship in a device, system or assembly that affects any parameter, specification or component belonging to the emission control system. A missing component may be considered to be an "emissions-related defect";		 No.049 2008-04-12
defect (emissions-related) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emissions-related defect Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emissions-related defect" means a deficiency or deviation from normal production tolerances in design, materials or workmanship in a device, system or assembly that affects any parameter, specification or component belonging to the emission control system. A missing component may be considered to be an "emissions-related defect";		 No.049 2010-08-31
Deficiency [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Deficiency Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Deficiency" means, in respect of vehicle OBD systems, that up to two separate components or systems that are monitored contain temporary or permanent operating characteristics that impair the otherwise efficient OBD monitoring of those components or systems or do not meet all of the other detailed requirements for OBD. Vehicles may be type-approved, registered and sold with such deficiencies according to the requirements of paragraph 4 of this Annex.		 No.083 2012-02-15
deficiency [REG. No 692/2008] 　 deficiency emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 24. "deficiency" means, in the context of the OBD system, that up to two separate components or systems which are monitored contain temporary or permanent operating characteristics that impair the otherwise efficient OBD monitoring of those components or systems or do not meet all of the other detailed requirements for OBD; REG. No 692/2008
deficiency [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 deficiency Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"deficiency" means, in respect of engine OBD systems, that up to two separate components or systems that are monitored contain temporary or permanent operating characteristics that impair the otherwise efficient OBD monitoring of those components or systems or do not meet all the other detailed requirements for OBD. Engines or vehicles in respect of their engine may be approved, registered and sold with such deficiencies according to the requirements of paragraph 4.3. of this annex;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Definition of type(s) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Definition of type(s) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) chassis manufacturer;
c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
d) bodywork concept (single / double deck, articulated, low-floor).
e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical
unit means a category of bodywork which do not essentially differ in the following aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
c) bodywork concept (single/ double deck, articulated, low-floor).
d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Deflected section height [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Deflected section height Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.35. "Deflected section height" is the difference between the deflected radius, measured from the centre of the rim to the surface of the drum, and one half the nominal rim diameter as defined in ISO 4000-1. No.030 2008-07-30
deformable barrier (Mobile) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor.		 No.095 2015-07-10
deformable barrier (Mobile) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Deformable barrier face [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;		 No.094 2012-09-20
Deformable barrier face [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;		 No.094 2010-05-28
degree (Protection) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Protection degree Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Protection degree" means the protection provided by a barrier/enclosure related to the contact with live parts by a test probe, such as a test finger (IPXXB) or a test wire (IPXXD), as defined in Annex 3.		 No.100 2011-02-14
degree (Protection) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Protection degree Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Protection degree" means the protection provided by a barrier/enclosure related to the contact with live parts by a test probe, such as a test finger (IPXXB) or a test wire (IPXXD), as defined in Annex 3.		 No.100 2015-03-31
degree IPXXB (Protection) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Protection degree IPXXB Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Protection degree IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a Jointed Test Finger (degree IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 9.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Delay time [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Delay time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. "Delay time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t 10 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. For the gaseous components, this is the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Delay time [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Delay time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.17. "Delay time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t 10 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. For the gaseous components, this is the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector (see Figure 3.1);		 No.096 2014-03-22
delay time [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 delay time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "delay time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t10). For the gaseous components, this is basically the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector. For the delay time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2008-04-12
delay time [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 delay time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "delay time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t10). For the gaseous components, this is basically the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector. For the delay time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2010-08-31
demand (Operator) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Operator demand Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.10. "Operator demand" means an engine operator's input to control engine output. The operator may be a person (i.e., manual), or a governor
(i.e., automatic) that mechanically or electronically signals an input that demands engine output. Input may be from an accelerator pedal or signal, a throttle-control lever or signal, a fuel lever or signal, a speed lever or signal, or a governor setpoint or signal.		 No.049 2013-06-24
demand (Operator) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Operator demand Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.55. "Operator demand" means an engine operator's input to control engine output. The "operator" may be a person (i.e. manual), or a governor (i.e., automatic) that mechanically or electronically signals an input that demands engine output. Input may be from an accelerator pedal or signal, a throttle-control lever or signal, a fuel lever or signal, a speed lever or signal, or a governor setpoint or signal;		 No.096 2014-03-22
demand value (Nominal) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Nominal demand value Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually and when used in combination.
2.28.1. "Nominal value" is defined, for a power-driven vehicle, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.
2.28.2. "Nominal value" is defined, for a trailer, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate to the coupling head signal.
2.28.3. "Nominal demand value" is defined, for coupling force control, as the characteristic which relates the coupling head signal to the braking rate and which can be demonstrated at Type Approval, within the limits of the compatibility bands of Annex 10.		 No.013 2016-02-18
demand value (Nominal) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal demand value Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually and when used in combination.
2.28.1. "Nominal value" is defined, for a power-driven vehicle, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.
2.28.2. "Nominal value" is defined, for a trailer, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate to the coupling head signal.
2.28.3. "Nominal demand value" is defined, for coupling force control, as the characteristic which relates the coupling head signal to the braking rate and which can be demonstrated at Type Approval, within the limits of the compatibility bands of Annex 10.		 No.013 2010-09-30
demountable rim (Wheel with) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel with demountable rim (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Wheel with demountable rim " means a wheel so constructed that the demountable rim is clamped to the wheel disc.		 No.124 2006-12-27
Demountable seat [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Demountable seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Demountable seat" means a seat that can be easily detached from the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Demountable seat [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Demountable seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Demountable seat" means a seat that can be easily detached from the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Demountable seat [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Demountable seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Demountable seat" means a seat that can be easily detached from the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Denominator (General) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 General Denominator Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "General Denominator" means a counter indicating the number of times a vehicle has been operated, taking into account general conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
deNOx- particulate filter (combined) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2008-04-12
deNOx- particulate filter (combined) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2010-08-31
deNOx system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 deNOx system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "deNOx system" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx ) (e.g. passive and active lean NOx catalysts, NOx adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.049 2013-06-24
DeNOx system [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 DeNOx system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.18. "DeNO x system" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NO x ) (e.g. passive and active lean NO x catalysts, NO x adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.096 2014-03-22
deNOx system [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 deNOx system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "deNOx system" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) (e.g. there are presently passive and active lean NOx catalysts, NOx adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.049 2008-04-12
deNOx system [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 deNOx system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "deNOx system" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) (e.g. there are presently passive and active lean NOx catalysts, NOx adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.049 2010-08-31
departure (Rate of) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Rate of departure Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Rate of departure" means the subject vehicle's approach velocity at a right angle to the visible lane marking at the warning issue point;		 No.130 2014-06-18
depth (Tread) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Tread depth Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tread depth" means the depth of the principal grooves		 No.117 2011-11-23
description (Service) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Service description Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Service description" means the association of a load capacity index with a speed category symbol
2.26.1. In case of implement tyres the service description is supplemented with the relevant symbol for the type of application concerned (traction or trailer) as defined in paragraphs 2.23 and 2.24.		 No.106 2010-09-30
description (Service) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Service description 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Service description" means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre.		 No.108 2006-07-04
description (Service) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Service description Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Service description" means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
description (service, Supplementary) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Supplementary service description Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Supplementary service description" means an additional service description, marked within a circle, to identify a special type of service (load rating and speed category) to which the tyre type is also allowed in addition to the applicable load variation with speed (see annex 7).		 No.106 2010-09-30
description (Trade) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Brand name" or "Trade description" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark.		 No.117 2011-11-23
design (Element of) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Element of design Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine:
(a) Any element of the engine system;
(b) Any control system, including: computer software; electronic control systems; and computer logic;
(c) Any control system calibration; or
(d) The results of any interaction of systems;		 No.049 2013-06-24
design (element of) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 element of design Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine,
(a) any control system, including computer software, electronic control systems and computer logic;
(b) any control system calibrations;
(c) the result of systems interaction, or;
(d) any hardware items;		 No.049 2008-04-12
design (element of) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 element of design Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine,
(a) any control system, including computer software, electronic control systems and computer logic;
(b) any control system calibrations;
(c) the result of systems interaction, or;
(d) any hardware items;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Design glass outline [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Design glass outline safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Design glass outline" means the design maximum unobstructed vehicle aperture designated to be glazed, before the glazing is installed or mounted, including all trims, but excluding obscuration bands.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Design seat back angle [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Design seat-back angle safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle between the vertical line through the R point and the torso line defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Design seat-back angle [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Design seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle prescribed by the manufacturer which:
1.5.1. determines the seat-back angle for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat by the vehicle manufacturer;
1.5.2. is formed at the ‘R’ point by the vertical and the torso reference line;
1.5.3. corresponds theoretically to the actual seat-back angle.		 No.061 2010-06-30
Design seat-back angle [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Design seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.7.		 No.125 2010-07-31
design speed (maximum) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 maximum design speed Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.1. "The maximum design speed" as specified in paragraph 16.2 of this Regulation.		 No.081 2012-07-13
design speed (Maximum) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum design speed Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum design speed" means the speed which the vehicle cannot exceed, on the level and without undue external influence, taking into account any special limitations imposed on the design and construction of the vehicle;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Design torso angle [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Design torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Design torso angle [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Design torso angle Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
Design torso angle [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Design torso angle Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "R" point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Design torso angle [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Design torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.025 2010-08-14
Design torso angle [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Design torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Design torso angle [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Design torso angle Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the "R" point and the torso line in aposition which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Design torso angle [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Design torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
designation (size, Tyre) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre size designation Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyre size designation" means a combination of figures that uniquely identify the geometric size of the tyre, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio and the nominal diameter. Precise definitions of these features may be found in Regulation No 30.		 No.064 2010-11-26
designation (size, Tyre) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tyre size designation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.		 No.108 2006-07-04
designation (size, Tyre) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tyre size designation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in case of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
2.21.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below: [表]
Nominal rim diameter code (d) / Value of the "d" symbol expressed in mm
8 / 203～ 30 / 762		 No.109 2006-07-04
designation (size, Tyre) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Tyre size designation (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio and the conventional number that denotes the nominal rim diameter (these terms are further defined in Regulation No. 30).		 No.124 2006-12-27
designation (size, Wheel) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Wheel size designation Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Wheel" means a complete wheel consisting of a rim and a wheel disc;
2.3.1. "Wheel size designation" means a designation comprising at least the nominal rim diameter, the nominal rim width and the rim profile;
2.3.2. "Wheel offset" means the distance from the hub abutment face to the centre line of the rim.		 No.064 2010-11-26
designation (Tyre-size) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Tyre-size designation" is a designation showing:		 No.075 2011-03-30
designation (Tyre-size) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Tyre-size designation" means a designation showing:
2.15.1. the nominal section width (S1). This value must be expressed in mm.
2.15.2. the nominal aspect ratio (Ra).
2.15.3. an indication of the structure, placed in front of the nominal rim diameter marking, as follows:
2.15.3.1. n diagonal (bias-ply) tyres, the symbol "-" or the letter "D2;
2.15.3.2. n radial-ply tyres, the letter "R";
2.15.3.3. n bias-belted tyres, the letter "B".
2.15.4. the conventional number "d" denoting the nominal rim diameter;
2.15.5. optionally, the letters "IMP" after the nominal rim diameter marking in case of Implement tyres;
2.15.6. optionally, the letters "FRONT" after the nominal rim diameter marking in case of Tractor steering wheel tyres;
2.15.7. However for tyres listed in annex 5 the "tyre size designation" is that shown in the first column of those tables.
2.15.8. The letters "IF" before the nominal section width in case of "Improved Flexion Tyre"
The letters "VF" before the nominal section width in case of 2Very High Flexion Tyre".		 No.106 2010-09-30
designed for competition (Tyre) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Tyres designed for competition Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyres designed for competition" means tyres intended to be fitted to vehicles involved in motor sport competition and not intended for non-competitive on-road use.		 No.117 2011-11-23
designed to fulfil specific social need (Vehicle) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M1 which are either:
(a) Special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg (3);
(b) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion of vehicles of category M1G (3);
(c) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Detachable head restraint [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Detachable head restraint Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back.
Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2. or 2.12.3. below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Detachable head restraint [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Detachable head restraint seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back. Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2 or 2.12.3 below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Detection [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Detection devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.3."Detection" means the ability to distinguish an object from its background/surroundings at certain distance.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Detection [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Detection Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.3. "Detection" means the ability to distinguish an object from its background/surroundings at certain distance.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Detection distance [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Detection distance devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.9."Detection distance" means the distance measured from the centre of the lens of the camera to the point at which a critical object can just be perceived (as defined by the critical perception).		 No.046 2014-08-08
Detection distance [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Detection distance Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.9. "Detection distance" means the distance measured at ground level from the viewing referencepoint to the extreme point at which a critical object can just be perceived (the limiting value fora critical perception just barely achieved).		 No.046 2010-07-10
deteriorated component or system (Qualified) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 QDC (Qualified deteriorated component or system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Qualified deteriorated component or system" (QDC) means a component or system that has been intentionally deteriorated such as by accelerated ageing or by having been manipulated in a controlled manner and which has been accepted by the Type Approval Authority according to the provisions set out in paragraph 6.3.2 of Annex 9B and paragraph A.8.2.2 of Appendix 8 to Annex 9B to this Regulation for use when demonstrating the OBD performance of the engine system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
deteriorated component/system [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 deteriorated component/system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"deteriorated component/system" means an engine or exhaust aftertreatment component/system that has been intentionally deteriorated in a controlled manner by the manufacturer for the purpose of conducting a approval test on the OBD system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter" means a converter that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extend that it fulfils the requirements laid out in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
deteriorated replacement pollution control device [REG. No 692/2008] 　 deteriorated replacement pollution control device emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 25. "deteriorated replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device as defined in Article 3(11) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extent that it fulfils the requirements laid out in Section 1 to Appendix 1 to Annex XI of UN/ECE Regulation No 83; REG. No 692/2008
Developed area of windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Developed area of windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Developed area of windscreen [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Developed area of windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured;		 No.043 2010-08-31
developed deceleration (fully, Mean) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "mfdd" (Mean fully developed deceleration) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.		 No.117 2011-11-23
developed pressure (Maximum) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum developed pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.62. "Maximum developed pressure" means the settled pressure developed when gas in a cylinder filled to the working pressure is raised to the maximum service temperature.		 No.110 2015-06-30
developed pressure (maximum) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 maximum developed pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.17. maximum developed pressure: The settled pressure developed when gas in a cylinder filled to the working pressure is raised to the maximum service temperature.		 No.110 2008-03-14
device [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 device installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4. device
means a component or combination of components used in order to perform one or several functions;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Device [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.6. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions; No.048 2008-05-23
Device [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Device" means a component or combination of components used in order to perform one or several functions.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Device [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Device Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Device [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Device" means a component or combination of components used in order to perform one or several functions		 No.074 2013-06-18
Device [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Device Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions.		 No.121 2016-01-08
Device [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions;
2.6.1. "Lighting function" means the light emitted by a device to illuminate the road and objects in the direction of vehicle movement;
2.6.2. "Light-signalling function" means the light emitted or reflected by a device to give to other road users visual information on the presence, identification and/or the change of movement of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Device [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Device Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions		 No.121 2010-07-10
Device for indirect vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Devices for indirect vision" means devices to observe the traffic area adjacent to the vehicle which cannot be observed by direct vision. These can be conventional mirrors, camera-monitors or other devices able to present information about the indirect field of vision to the driver.		 No.046 2014-08-08
device for indirect vision (Other) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Other devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3."Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, where the field of vision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indi rect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
device for indirect vision (Type of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4."Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essential characteristics:
(a) Design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork;
(b) In case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mir ror’s reflecting surface;
(c) In case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Device to prevent unauthorised use [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes
In the case of a system which locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver's intention.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Device to prevent unauthorised use [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes.
In the case of a system that locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver’s intention.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Devices for indirect vision [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Devices for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Devices for indirect vision" means devices to observe the traffic area adjacent to the vehicle which cannot be observed by direct vision. These can be conventional mirrors, camera-monitors or other devices able to present information about the indirect field of vision to the driver.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Dew point [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Dew point Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.19. "Dew point" means a measure of humidity stated as the equilibrium temperature at which water condenses under a given pressure from moist air with a given absolute humidity. Dew point is specified as a temperature in ° C or K, and is valid only for the pressure at which it is measured;		 No.096 2014-03-22
diagnostic (On board) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 OBD (On-board diagnostics) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control which shall have the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Diagnostic (On Board) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Diagnostic system (Control, NOx) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCD (NOx Control Diagnostic system) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.52. "NO x Control Diagnostic system (NCD)" means a system on-board the engine which has the capability of
(a) Detecting a NO x Control Malfunction;
(b) Identifying the likely cause of NO x control malfunctions by means of information stored in computer memory and/or communicating that information off-board;		 No.096 2014-03-22
diagnostic system (On board) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 OBD (On-board diagnostic) system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "On-board diagnostic system" (OBD system) means a system on-board of a vehicle or engine which has the capability of:
(a) Detecting malfunctions, affecting the emission performance of the engine system;
(b) Indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system; and
(c) Identifying the likely area of the malfunction by means of information stored in computer memory and communicating that information off-board;		 No.049 2013-06-24
diagnostic system (on board) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 OBD (on-board diagnostic system) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.083 2012-02-15
diagnostic system (on-board) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 on-board diagnostic system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2008-04-12
diagnostic system for emission control (on-board) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 on-board diagnostic system for emission control (OBD) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Diagnostic trouble code [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Diagnostic trouble code" (DTC) means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Diagnostic trouble code [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.20. "Diagnostic trouble code (DTC)" means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a NO x Control Malfunction.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Diagonal [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Diagonal Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90 ° to the centre line of the tread; No.030 2008-07-30
Diagonal [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Diagonal Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the
beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 ° to the centreline of the tread;		 No.054 2008-07-11
Diagonal [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Diagonal [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the bead and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90° to the centreline of the tread;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Diagonal [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Diagonal 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Diagonal [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Diagonal belt [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Diagonal belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Diagonal belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Diagonal belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.2. Diagonal belt : A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Diagonal belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Diagonal belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.		 No.016 2011-09-09
diameter (d) (rim, Nominal) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.109 2006-07-04
diameter (inside, Maximum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Maximum inside diameter Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.13. "Maximum inside diameter": the maximum inside diameter of the brake drum is the point at which replacement becomes necessary.		 No.090 2012-07-13
diameter (Outer) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 D (Outer diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
diameter (Outer) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Outer diameter (D) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new tyre;		 No.106 2010-09-30
diameter (Outer) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Outer diameter 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Outer diameter" means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre.		 No.108 2006-07-04
diameter (Outer) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Outer diameter Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Outer diameter" means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
diameter of the receiver (Angular) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the receiver as seen from the reference centre (β1 = β2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
diameter of the retro reflecting device (Angular) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.003 2011-12-06
diameter of the retro reflector sample (Angular) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
Diesel Bench Cycle (Standard) [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. Introduction
For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.
The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.
During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Diesel Bench Cycle (Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2015-07-03
diesel engine [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 diesel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "diesel engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle;		 No.049 2008-04-12
diesel engine [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 diesel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "diesel engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Diesel mode [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Diesel mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Diesel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine does not use any gaseous fuel for any engine operating condition;"		 No.049 2013-06-24
Diesel mode [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Diesel mode Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Diesel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine does not use any gaseous fuel for any engine operating condition.		 No.085 2014-11-07
Diesel Particulate Filter (Wall flow) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.65. "Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter" means a Diesel Particulate Filter ("DPF") in which all the exhaust gas is forced to flow through a wall which filters out the solid matter;		 No.049 2013-06-24
diesel vehicle (fuel, bio, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
different type (Front and rear position lamp, stop-lamp and end-outline marker lamp of) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2010-06-12
different type (indicator of, Direction) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 Direction indicators of different types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the category of direction indicator lamps;
(d) the variable intensity control, if any;
(e) the sequential activation of light sources, if any.
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.006 2014-07-18
different type (lamp of, Front and rear position, stop and end outline marker) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
different type (lamp of, Head-) [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.6.1. the trade name or mark;
1.6.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.6.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.6.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.6.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.6.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;		 No.098 2001-06-25
different type (light source of, discharge, Gas) [No.099 2014-09-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. "Gas-discharge light sources of different types" are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which
differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark; that means:
(a) gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types;
(b) gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. Bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results.		 No.099 2014-09-30
different type (Reversing lamp of) [No.023 2010-06-12] 　 Reversing lamps of different types reversing lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Reversing lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2010-06-12
different type (Reversing manoeuvring lamp of) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2014-08-08
Different type of braking devices [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Different types of braking devices Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking devices" means devices which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics,
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size,
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Different type of braking equipment [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
different type of braking equipment [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Different type of braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Different type of braking system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Different types of braking systems Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Different types of braking systems" means devices which differ in such essential respects as: (a) Components having different characteristics; (b) A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size; (c) A different assembly of the components.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Different type of braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;		 No.013 2010-09-30
difficulty (index of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 indices of difficulty safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. The term "indices of difficulty" covers a two-stage grading system applying to the variations observed in practice in each secondary characteristic. A change from index "1" to index "2" indicates the need for additional tests.		 No.043 2014-02-12
difficulty (Indices of) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Indices of difficulty Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. The term "Indices of difficulty" covers a two-stage grading system applying to the variations observed in practice in each secondary characteristic. A change from index "1" to index "2" indicates the need for additional tests;		 No.043 2010-08-31
dilution method (flow, Full) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Full flow dilution method Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total exhaust flow with diluent prior to separating a fraction of the diluted exhaust stream for analysis.		 No.049 2013-06-24
dilution method (flow, Full) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Full flow dilution method Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.35. "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total exhaust flow with dilution air prior to separating a fraction of the diluted exhaust stream for analysis;		 No.096 2014-03-22
dilution method (flow, Partial) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Partial flow dilution method Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.11. "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount of diluent prior to the particulate sampling filter.		 No.049 2013-06-24
dimension (Functional) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Functional dimensions Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.5. "Functional dimensions": all the measurements that are relevant with regard to the fitting and functioning of the components of the braking system (see paragraph 5.3.7.1 and Annex 10).		 No.090 2012-07-13
dimension (Overall) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Overall dimensions Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Overall dimensions" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14 above;
2.15.1. "Overall width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14 above;
2.15.2. "Overall length" means the distance between the two vertical planes perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its front and rear outer edge, disregarding the projection:
(a) of devices for indirect vision;
(b) of end-outline marker lamps;
(c) of coupling devices, in the case of motor vehicles.
For trailers in the "overall length" and in any measurement in length the drawbar shall be included, except when specifically excluded;		 No.048 2011-12-06
dimension assessment volume (Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg dimension assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
dimension of the projection [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 The dimension of the projection External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "The dimension of the projection" of a component mounted on a panel means the dimension determined by the method described in paragraph 2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2005-12-16
dimension of the projection [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 dimension of the projection external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "The dimension of the projection" of a component mounted on a panel means the dimension determined by the method described in paragraph 2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2010-08-14
dipped beam (principal) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
dipped beam (principal) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;		 No.048 2011-12-06
dipped beam headlamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
dipped beam headlamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;		 No.074 2013-06-18
dipped beam headlamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road- users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Dipped-beam headlamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Dipped-beam headlamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.8. Dipped-beam headlamp
"Dipped-beam headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the tractor without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road-users.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
dipped-beam headlamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 dipped-beam headlamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.8. dipped-beam headlamp
means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers or to other road users;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Direct contact [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Direct contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Direct contact [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Direct contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Direct contact [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Direct contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Direct contact [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2.16. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons or livestock with live parts. No.100 2009-02-14
Direct contact [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with live parts.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Direct contact [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with live parts.		 No.100 2015-03-31
direct contact (In-) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Indirect contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
direct contact (In) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Direct extrusion [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Direct extrusion 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Direct extrusion [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Direct extrusion Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back"— pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Direct injection engine [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Direct injection engine Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Direct injection engine" means an engine which can operate in a mode where the fuel is injected into the intake air after the air has been drawn through the inlet valves.		 No.083 2015-07-03
direction (opening, Fork-bolt) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fork-bolt opening direction door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Fork-bolt opening direction" is the direction opposite to that in which the striker enters the latch to engage the fork-bolt.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Direction indicator [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 Direction indicator Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Direction indicator" means a device mounted on a motor vehicle or trailer which, when operated by the driver, signals the latter’s intention to change the direction in which the vehicle is proceeding. The present Regulation applies solely to fixed-position flashing light devices whose flashing is obtained by the intermittent supply of electric current to the lamp.		 No.006 2014-07-18
Direction indicator [No.006 2001-05-14] 　 Direction indicator Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Direction indicator" means a device mounted on a motor vehicle or trailer which, when operated by the driver, signals the latter’s intention to change the direction in which the vehicle is proceeding. The present Regulation applies solely to fixed-position flashing light devices whose flashing is obtained by the intermittent supply of electric current to the lamp.		 No.006 2001-05-14
Direction indicator [No.006 2010-07-10] 　 Direction indicator Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Direction indicator" means a device mounted on a motor vehicle or trailer which, when operated by the driver, signals the latter’s intention to change the direction in which the vehicle is proceeding. The present Regulation applies solely to fixed-position flashing light devices whose flashing is obtained by the intermittent supply of electric current to the lamp.		 No.006 2010-07-10
Direction indicator lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.8. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.		 No.053 2013-06-18
direction indicator lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 direction indicator lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.9. direction indicator lamp
means the lamp used to indicate to other road users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or the left;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Direction indicator lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.10. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.		 No.074 2013-06-18
Direction indicator lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.11. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to the provisions of Regulation No 97;		 No.048 2011-12-06
direction indicator lamp of different type [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
Direction indicator of different type [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 Direction indicators of different types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the category of direction indicator lamps;
(d) the variable intensity control, if any;
(e) the sequential activation of light sources, if any.
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.006 2014-07-18
Direction indicators of different type [No.006 2010-07-10] 　 Direction indicators of different types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category offilament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the category of direction indicator lamps;
(d) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a changeof type.		 No.006 2010-07-10
Direction indicators type [No.006 2001-05-14] 　 Direction indicators types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different "types""
- are different indicators which differ in such essential respects as:
- The trade name or mark, The characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, etc.),
- The category of direction indicators,
- The colour of the filament lamp.		 No.006 2001-05-14
Directional control [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Directional control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Directional control [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 Directional control Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.		 No.013 2010-11-13
Direction-indicator lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Direction-indicator lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.11. Direction-indicator lamp
"Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the leftverse		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Direction-indicator lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.11. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to the provisions of Regulation No 97;		 No.048 2008-05-23
Direction-indicator lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.12. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;		 No.086 2010-09-30
disc (brake, Equivalent) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Equivalent brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (brake, Identical) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identical brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (brake, Interchangeable) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Interchangeable brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (brake, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake disc/brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.1. "Original brake disc/brake drum"
2.3.1.1. In the case of motor vehicles, is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type- approval according to Regulation No 13 or 13-H.
2.3.1.2. In the case of trailers:
(a) is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type-approval according to Regulation No 13;
(b) is a brake disc/drum which is part of a brake for which the axle manufacturer owns a test report according to Annex 11 of Regulation No 13.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (brake, replacement, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original replacement brake discs and brake drums Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (brake, Special) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Special brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.4. "Special brake disc/drum" means a replacement brake disc/drum not covered by paragraphs 2.3.1 to 2.3.3.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (brake, Type of) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Type of brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.6. "Type of brake disc/drum": brake discs or drums having the same basic design and material group in accordance with the classification criteria pursuant to paragraph 5.3.5.1 or 5.3.5.2 as appropriate.		 No.090 2012-07-13
disc (burst) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 burst disc using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.27. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (this device sometimes is referred to as "burst disc")" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive pressure which prevents a pre- determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
disc (Wheel) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel disc (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Wheel disc" means that part of the wheel which is the supporting member between the axle and the rim.		 No.124 2006-12-27
Disc wheel [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Disc wheel (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Disc wheel" means a permanent combination of a rim and wheel disc.		 No.124 2006-12-27
discharge light source (Gas-) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light source Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Gas-discharge light source": light source in which the light is produced by a stabilized discharge arc		 No.099 2010-06-30
discharge light source of different type (Gas) [No.099 2014-09-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. "Gas-discharge light sources of different types" are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which
differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark; that means:
(a) gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types;
(b) gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. Bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results.		 No.099 2014-09-30
discharge light sources of different type (Gas-) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Gas-discharge light sources of different "types" ( 1 ) are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. trade name or mark; that means:
(a) Gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types.
(b) Gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;		 No.099 2010-06-30
discharge valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.23. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
discharge valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
discharge valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.12. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device which prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
disconnect (Automatic) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Automatic disconnect protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train;		 No.012 2013-03-27
disconnect (Automatic) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train,		 No.094 2012-09-20
disconnect (Automatic) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train.		 No.095 2015-07-10
disconnect (Service) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Service disconnect Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Service disconnect" means the device for deactivation of the electrical circuit when conducting checks and services of the RESS, fuel cell stack, etc.		 No.100 2011-02-14
disconnect (Service) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Service disconnect Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Service disconnect" means the device for deactivation of the electrical circuit when conducting checks and services of the REESS, fuel cell stack, etc.		 No.100 2015-03-31
disconnected (Engine) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Engine disconnected Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine disconnected" means when the engine is no longer connected to the driving wheel(s).		 No.078 2015-01-30
Discrete mode [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Discrete-mode Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.21. "Discrete-mode" means relating to a discrete-mode type of steady-state test, as described in paragraph 7.4.1.1. of Annex 4B and in Annex 5;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Displacement system [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Displacement system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced or rotated without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access to the space behind the seat concerned;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Displacement system [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Displacement system strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced laterally or longitudinally without a fixed intermediate position of the seat or one of its parts, to facilitate access by passengers;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Displacement system [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Displacement system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.48. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the adult seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position, to facilitate the entry and exit of passengers and the loading and unloading of objects.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Displacement system [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Displacement system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced or rotated without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access to the space behind the seat concerned;		 No.014 2007-12-06
displacement system [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 displacement system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "displacement system" means a device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced or rotated without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access to the space behind the seat concerned;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Displacement system [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Displacement system Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.7. "Displacement system" means a device by which the seat or one of its parts can be displaced and/or rotated, without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access of occupants to the space behind the seat concerned;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Displacement system [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Displacement system seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Displacement system" means a device by which the seat or one of its parts can be displaced and/or rotated, without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access of occupants to the space behind the seat concerned;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Displacement system [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Displacement system Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Displacement system" means a device by which the seat or one of its parts can be displaced or rotated, without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access to the space behind the seat concerned.		 No.025 2005-12-16
Displacement system [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Displacement system head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Displacement system" means a device by which the seat or one of its parts can be displaced or rotated, without a fixed intermediate position, to permit easy access to the space behind the seat concerned.		 No.025 2010-08-14
Displacement system [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Displacement system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the adult seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position, to facilitate the entry and exit of passengers and the loading and unloading of objects.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Displacement system [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Displacement system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the adult seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position, to facilitate the entry and exit of passengers and the loading and unloading of objects.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Displacement system [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Displacement system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Displacement system" means a device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced laterally or longitudinally without a fixed intermediate position of the seat or one of its parts, to facilitate access by passengers;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Displacement system of the seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Displacement system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. Displacement system of the seat
A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).		 No.016 2015-11-20
Displacement system of the seat [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Displacement system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. Displacement system of the seat
A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).		 No.016 2007-11-30
Displacement system of the seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Displacement system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. Displacement system of the seat
A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).		 No.016 2011-09-09
display (Status) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Status display alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.3. "Status display" means any device intended to indicate the status of the immobiliser (set/unset, change of set to unset and vice versa).		 No.097 2012-05-08
display (Status) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Status display Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.3. "Status display" means any device intended to indicate the status of the immobiliser (set/unset, change of set to unset and vice versa).		 No.116 2012-02-16
display (Status) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Status display Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.3. "Status display" means any device intended to indicate the status of the immobiliser (set/unset, change of set to unset and vice versa).		 No.116 2010-06-30
distance (Detection) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Detection distance devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.9."Detection distance" means the distance measured from the centre of the lens of the camera to the point at which a critical object can just be perceived (as defined by the critical perception).		 No.046 2014-08-08
distance (Detection) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Detection distance Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.9. "Detection distance" means the distance measured at ground level from the viewing referencepoint to the extreme point at which a critical object can just be perceived (the limiting value fora critical perception just barely achieved).		 No.046 2010-07-10
distance (Stopping) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Stopping distance Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Stopping distance" means the distance travelled by the vehicle from the point the rider begins to actuate the brake control to the point at which the vehicle reaches a full stop. For tests where the simultaneous actuation of two controls is specified, the distance travelled is taken from the point the first control is actuated.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Distance between two lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Distance between two lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.14. Distance between two lamps
"Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction, means the distance between the orthogonal projections in a plane perpendicular to the direction in question of the outlines of the two illuminating surfaces as defined according to the case mentioned in point 1.6.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Distance between two lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.17. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined; No.048 2008-05-23
Distance between two lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Distance between two lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Distance between two lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Distance between two lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction, means the distance between the orthogonal projections in a plane perpendicular to the direction in question of the outlines of the two illuminating surfaces as defined according to the case mentioned in paragraph 2.6.		 No.086 2010-09-30
distance between two lamp pointing in the same direction [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 distance between two lamps pointing in the same direction installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
13. distance between two lamps pointing in the same direction
means the distance between the orthogonal projections, in a plane perpendicular to the axes of reference, of the outlines of the two illuminating surfaces as defined, according to the case, in point 6;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Distinctive marking, graphic [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Distinctive markings, graphics Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Distinctive markings, graphics" mean coloured markings, whose coefficient of retro-reflection is as defined in paragraphs 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 below.		 No.104 2014-03-14
distortion (Optical) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Optical distortion safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Optical distortion" means an optical defect in a windscreen that changes the appearance of an object viewed through the windscreen.		 No.043 2014-02-12
distribution of mass among the axle [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2016-02-18
distribution of mass among the axle [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
distribution of mass among the axles [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2010-09-30
distribution of mass among the axles [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
distribution of mass among the axles [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 the distribution of mass among the axles Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "the distribution of mass among the axles" means the proportion of the maximum permissible mass borne by each axle, as declared by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.111 2002-02-01
disturbance (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic disturbance Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Electromagnetic disturbance" means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s), or of any other device, unit of equipment or system operated in vicinity of a vehicle. An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself.		 No.010 2012-09-20
disturbance (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic disturbance Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Electromagnetic disturbance" means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s), or of any other device, unit of equipment or system operated in vicinity of a vehicle. An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself		 No.010 2010-05-08
divergence (Angle of) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angle of divergence Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Angle of divergence" means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination.		 No.003 2011-12-06
door (Back) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Back door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Back door" is a door or door system on the back end of a motor vehicle through which passengers can enter or depart the vehicle or cargo can be loaded or unloaded. It does not include:
(a) a trunk lid; or
(b) a door or window composed entirely of glazing material and whose latches and/or hinge systems are attached directly to the glazing material.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door (Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double door" means a door affording two, or the equivalent of two, access passages.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (Double) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Double door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Double door" is a system of two doors where the front door or wing door opens first and connects to the rear door or bolted door, which opens second.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door (Double) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double door" means a door affording two, or the equivalent of two, access passages;		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (Double) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double door" means a door affording two, or the equivalent of two, access passages;		 No.107 2010-09-29
door (Emergency) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Emergency door" means a door intended for use by passengers as an exit only exceptionally and in particular in an emergency.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (Emergency) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Emergency door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Emergency door" means a door intended for use by passengers as an exit only exceptionally, and in particular in an emergency;		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (Emergency) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Emergency door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Emergency door" means a door intended for use by passengers as an exit only exceptionally, and in particular in an emergency;		 No.107 2010-09-29
door (front, Side) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Side front door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Side front door" is a door that, in a side view, has 50 per cent or more of its opening area forward of the rearmost point on the driver’s seat back, when the seat back is adjusted to its most vertical and rearward position, providing direct access for passengers to enter or depart the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door (rear, Side) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Side rear door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Side rear door" is a door that, in a side view, has 50 per cent or more of its opening area to the rear of the rearmost point on the driver’s seat back, when the driver’s seat is adjusted to its most vertical and rearward position, providing direct access for passengers to enter or depart the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door (Service) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Service door" means a door intended for use by passengers in normal circumstances with the driver seated.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (Service) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Service door" means a door intended for use by passengers in normal circumstances with the driver seated:		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (Service) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Service door" means a door intended for use by passengers in normal circumstances with the driver seated:		 No.107 2010-09-29
door (service-, Automatically operated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Automatically operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2010-09-29
door (service-, Automatically-operated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (service, Driver operated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (service, Driver operated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver		 No.107 2010-09-29
door (service, operated, Automatically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (service, operated, Driver) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (service, Power operated) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (service, Power-operated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (service, Power-operated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2010-09-29
door (Sliding) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Sliding door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Sliding door" means a door which can be opened or closed only by sliding it along one or more rectilinear or approximately rectilinear rails.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door (Sliding) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Sliding door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Sliding door" means a door which can be opened or closed only by sliding it along one or more rectilinear or approximately rectilinear rails.		 No.107 2006-12-27
door (Sliding) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Sliding door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Sliding door" means a door which can be opened or closed only by sliding it along one or more rectilinear or approximately rectilinear rails.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Door closure warning system [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door closure warning system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Door closure warning system" is a system that will activate a visual signal located where it can be clearly seen by the driver when a door latch system is not in its fully latched position and while the vehicle ignition is activated.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Door Hinge System [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door Hinge System door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Door Hinge System" is one or more hinges used to support a door.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door latch (Auxiliary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Auxiliary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Auxiliary door latch" is a latch equipped with a fully latched position with or without a secondary latch position, and fitted to a door or door system equipped with a primary door latch system.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door latch (Primary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Primary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Primary door latch" is a latch equipped with both a fully latched position and a secondary latched position and is designated as a "primary door latch" by the manufacturer. The manufacturer may not thereafter change such designation. Each manufacturer shall, upon request, provide information regarding which latches are "primary door latches" for a particular vehicle or make/ model.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door latch system (Auxiliary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Auxiliary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of an auxiliary door latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door latch system (Primary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Primary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Primary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of a primary door latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Door latch system [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of a latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
door lighting (Service) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Service-door lighting Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Service-door lighting" means a lighting device(s) of the vehicle designed to illuminate the exterior vicinity of service doors and wheels.		 No.107 2015-06-18
door lighting (Service-) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Service-door lighting Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Service-door lighting" means a lighting device(s) of the vehicle designed to illuminate the exterior vicinity of service doors and wheels.		 No.107 2010-09-29
door locking system (activated, Automatically) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatically activated door locking system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Automatically activated door locking system" means a system that locks the doors automatically at a pre-set speed or under any other condition as defined by the manufacturer.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Door member [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door member door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Door member" is that portion of the hinge normally affixed to the door structure and constituting the swinging member.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Door system [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Door system" is the door, latch, striker, hinges, sliding track combinations and other door retention components on a door and its surrounding doorframe. The door system of a double door includes both doors.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Doors [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Doors door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Doors" means hinged or sliding doors which lead directly into a compartment that contains one or more seating positions and which are not folding doors, roll-up doors and doors that are designed to be easily attached to or removed from motor vehicles manufactured for operation without doors.		 No.011 2010-05-13
dosage unit (Gas) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas dosage unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.11. "Gas dosage unit" means a device which meters and/or distributes the gas flow to the engine and can be either combined with the gas injection device or separate.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Double deck vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.6. "Double-deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Double deck vehicle [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Double deck vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Double deck vehicle [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Double deck vehicle [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Double decker articulated vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Double door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double door" means a door affording two, or the equivalent of two, access passages.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Double door [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Double door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Double door" is a system of two doors where the front door or wing door opens first and connects to the rear door or bolted door, which opens second.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Double door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double door" means a door affording two, or the equivalent of two, access passages;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Double door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double door" means a door affording two, or the equivalent of two, access passages;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Double or multiple window [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Double or multiple window [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Double seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Double seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of two seated passengers side by side; two seats side by side and having no interconnection shall be regarded as two individual seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Double seat [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Double seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of two seated passengers side by side; two seats side by side and having no interconnection shall be regarded as two individual seats;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Double window [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Double window safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double window" means an assembly of two panes separately installed within the same opening of the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Double window [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Double window Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double window" means an assembly of two glazing panes separately installed within the same opening of the vehicle;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Double window [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Double-decker articulated vehicle [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Double-decker articulated vehicle [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Double-glazed unit [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Double-glazed unit Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double-glazed unit" means an assembly of two glazing panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by a uniform gap;
2.7.1. "Symmetrical double-glazing" means a double-glazed unit where the two component glazings are of the same type (toughened glass, laminated glass, rigid plastic) and have the same principal and/or secondary characteristics;
2.7.2. "Asymmetrical double-glazing" means a double-glazed unit where the two component glazings are of different type (toughened glass, laminated glass, rigid plastic) or have different principal and/or secondary characteristics;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Drift [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Drift Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.3. "Drift" means the difference between the zero or span responses of the measurement instrument after and before an emissions test.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Drift [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Drift Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.22. "Drift" means the difference between a zero or calibration signal and the respective value reported by a measurement instrument immediately after it was used in an emission test, as long as the instrument was zeroed and spanned just before the test;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Drive direction control unit [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Drive direction control unit Electric vehicle safety 2.15. "Drive direction control unit" means a specific device physically actuated by the driver in order to select the drive direction (forwards or backwards), in which the vehicle will travel if the accelerator is actuated. No.100 2009-02-14
Drive train [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Drive train Electric vehicle safety 2.12. "Drive train" means specific components of power train: traction motors, electronic control of the traction motors, the associated wiring harness and connectors. No.100 2009-02-14
drive train (Approval of a) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
drive train (Approval of a) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2006-11-24
Drive train type [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Drive train type Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Drive train type" means a category of an internal combustion engine or an electric drive train for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annexes 1 or 2 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Drive train type [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Drive train type Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Drive train type" means a category of an internal combustion engine or an electric drive train for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annexes 1 or 2 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2006-11-24
drive wheel tyre (Tractor-) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor-drive wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Driver compartment [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver's exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Driver mass [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Driver mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Driver mass" means the nominal mass of a driver that shall be 75 kg (subdivided into 68 kg occupant mass at the seat and 7 kg luggage mass).		 No.078 2015-01-30
driver ocular point [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 The driver's ocular points devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1."The driver's ocular points" means two points 65 mm apart and 635 mm vertically above point R of the driver's seat as defined in Annex 8. The straight line joining these points runs perpen dicular to the vertical longitudinal median plane of the vehicle. The centre of the segment joining the two ocular points is in a vertical longitudinal plane which shall pass through the centre of the driver’s designated seating position, as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Driver operated service door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Driver operated service door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Driver operated service door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver		 No.107 2010-09-29
driver visibility (requisite for, glazing material, Safety) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
driver visibility (Safety glazing material requisite for) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.18.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver’s R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.18.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver’s R point perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Driver's compartment [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Driver's compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for the driver's exclusive use and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Driver's compartment [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Driver's compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for the driver’s exclusive use and containing the driver’s seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Driver's compartment [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver's exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Driver's compartment [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver’s exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver’s seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
driver's ocular points [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 driver's ocular points Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.1. "The driver's ocular points" means two points 65 mm apart and 635 mm vertically above pointR of the driver’s seat as defined in Annex 8. The straight line joining these points runs perpendicular to the vertical longitudinal median plane of the vehicle. The centre of the segment joining the two ocular points is in a vertical longitudinal plane which must pass through the centreof the driver’s designated seating position, as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Driving beam headlamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Driving beam headlamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Driving beam headlamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Driving cycle [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Driving cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Driving cycle" means a sequence consisting of an engine start, an operating period (of the vehicle), an engine shut-off, and the time until the next engine start;		 No.049 2013-06-24
driving cycle [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 driving cycle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. A "driving cycle" consists of engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be detected if present, and engine shut-off.		 No.083 2012-02-15
driving cycle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 driving cycle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 22. "driving cycle", in respect of vehicle OBD systems, consists of engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be detected if present, and engine shut-off; REG. No 692/2008
Driving Cycle (Transient, Harmonised, World) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
driving position (Central) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Central driving position safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Central driving position" is defined when Y co-ordinate of the R point is in Y0 position within + or – 60 mm.		 No.043 2014-02-12
driving possible mode (Active) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle. No.100 2011-02-14
driving possible mode (Active) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Driving-lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Driving-lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.8. "Driving-lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the tractor;		 No.086 2010-09-30
drum (brake, Equivalent) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Equivalent brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum (brake, Identical) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identical brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum (brake, Interchangeable) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Interchangeable brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum (brake, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake disc/brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.1. "Original brake disc/brake drum"
2.3.1.1. In the case of motor vehicles, is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type- approval according to Regulation No 13 or 13-H.
2.3.1.2. In the case of trailers:
(a) is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type-approval according to Regulation No 13;
(b) is a brake disc/drum which is part of a brake for which the axle manufacturer owns a test report according to Annex 11 of Regulation No 13.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum (brake, replacement, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original replacement brake discs and brake drums Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum (brake, Special) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Special brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.4. "Special brake disc/drum" means a replacement brake disc/drum not covered by paragraphs 2.3.1 to 2.3.3.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum (brake, Type of) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Type of brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.6. "Type of brake disc/drum": brake discs or drums having the same basic design and material group in accordance with the classification criteria pursuant to paragraph 5.3.5.1 or 5.3.5.2 as appropriate.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Drum brake lining [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum brake lining (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum brake lining (Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation.		 No.090 2010-05-28
drum brake lining (Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
drum brake lining (Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2010-05-28
Drum brake lining [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.		 No.090 2010-05-28
Drum brake lining type [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Drum brake lining type [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2010-05-28
DTC [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Diagnostic trouble code" (DTC) means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
DTC [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.20. "Diagnostic trouble code (DTC)" means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a NO x Control Malfunction.		 No.096 2014-03-22
DTC (Confirmed and active) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Confirmed and active DTC Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.10. "Confirmed and active DTC" means a DTC that is stored during the time the NCD system concludes that a malfunction exists.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Dual fuel engine [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system that is designed to simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Dual fuel engine [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel engine Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system type approved according to Regulation No 49 or mounted on a vehicle type approved with regards to its emissions according to Regulation No 49 and that is designed to simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Dual fuel mode [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Dual fuel mode [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel mode Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Dual fuel vehicle [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel engine and that supplies the fuels used by the engine from separate on-board storage systems;"		 No.049 2013-06-24
Dual fuel vehicle [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel vehicle Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel engine and that supplies the fuels used by the engine from separate on-board storage systems;		 No.085 2014-11-07
durability period (Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission durability period Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.26. "Emission durability period" means the number of hours indicated in Annex 8 used to determine the deterioration factors;		 No.096 2014-03-22
duty cycle [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Test (or duty) cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.85. "Test (or duty) cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state or transient operating conditions. Duty cycles are specified in the Annex 5. A single duty cycle may consist of one or more test intervals;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Dynamic radius [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Dynamic radius (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Dynamic radius" means the dynamic loaded radius defined as the theoretical rolling circumference divided by 2R of the largest tyre to be used on the wheel as specified by the wheel manufacturer.		 No.124 2006-12-27
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
e (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 e : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
E points [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 E points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "E points" means points representing the centres of the driver’s eyes and used to assess the extent to which A pillars obscure the field of vision.		 No.125 2010-07-31
EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information [REG. No 692/2008] 　 EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 2. "EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information" means an EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to its tailpipe emissions, crankcase emissions, evaporative emissions, fuel consumption and access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information; REG. No 692/2008
ECRS [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ECRS (enhanced Child Restraint Systems used on board of motor vehicles) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) Regulation No 129 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of enhanced Child Restraint Systems used on board of motor vehicles (ECRS) No.129 2014-03-29
ECS [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2008-04-12
ECS [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2010-08-31
edge (outer, Extreme) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Extreme outer edge", on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching the lateral extremity of the vehicle, disregarding the projection or projections:
2.12.1. of rear-view mirrors,
2.12.2. of direction-indicator lamps,
2.12.3. of front and rear position lamps and retro-reflectors;		 No.053 2013-06-18
edge (outer, Extreme) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Extreme outer edge", on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and tangent to the latter’s lateral outer edge, disregarding rear-view mirrors, direction indicators, position lamps and retro-reflectors;		 No.074 2013-06-18
edge (outer, Extreme) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Extreme outer edge External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extreme outer edge" of the vehicle means, in relation to the sides of the vehicle, the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer lateral edge, and, in relation to the front and rear ends, the perpendicular transverse plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer front and rear edges, account not being taken of the projection
2.7.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and connections for tyre pressure gauges
2.7.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.7.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.7.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
2.7.5. in relation to the front and rear ends, of parts mounted on the bumpers, of towing devices and of exhaust pipes.		 No.026 2005-12-16
edge (outer, Extreme) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Extreme outer edge external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extreme outer edge" of the vehicle means, in relation to the sides of the vehicle, the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer lateral edge, and, in relation to the front and rear ends, the perpendicular transverse plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer front and rear edges, account not being taken of the projection:
2.7.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and connections for tyre pressure gauges;
2.7.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.7.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.7.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
2.7.5. in relation to the front and rear ends, of parts mounted on the bumpers, of towing devices and of exhaust pipes.		 No.026 2010-08-14
edge (outer, Extreme) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the vehicle, means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.14.1. Of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and of connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.14.2. Of any anti-skid devices mounted on the wheels;
2.14.3. Of devices for indirect vision;
2.14.4. Of side direction-indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position lamps, parking lamps, retro-reflectors and side-marker lamps.
2.14.5. Of customs seals affixed to the vehicle, and of devices for securing and protecting such seals.
2.14.6. Of service-door lighting systems on vehicles of categories M 2 and M 3 as specified in paragraph 2.7;		 No.048 2011-12-06
edge (outer, Extreme) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the tractor means the plane parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and coinciding with its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.11.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground and connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.11.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.11.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.11.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps, parking lamps and lateral reflex reflectors;
2.11.5. of customs seals affixed to the tractor and devices for securing and protecting such seals.		 No.086 2010-09-30
effect (Masking) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Masking effect Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Masking effect" means the chords of the sectors of the semi-circle of vision which cannot be seen because of structural components — for instance, the roof pillars, air intakes, exhaust stacks, windscreen frames, protective frame;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Effective belt anchorage [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage;
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. Where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Effective belt anchorage [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Effective belt anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4., the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example,
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2007-12-06
effective belt anchorage [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer’s side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;		 No.014 2011-04-28
effective vehicle mass (Total) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total effective vehicle mass (Mt) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (Mk) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (Mm), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
effective vehicle mass (Total) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mt (Total effective vehicle mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt ) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (M k ) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (M m ), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
electric circuit (connected to the, Chassis) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Chassis connected to the electric circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Chassis connected to the electric circuit" means AC and DC electric circuits galvanically connected to the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electric control line [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric control line Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection between two vehicles which provides the braking control function to a towed vehicle within a combination. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Electric control line [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Electric control line Steering equipment 2.7. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection which provides the steering control function to the trailer. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission. No.079 2008-05-27
Electric control line [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric control line Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection between power-driven vehicle and trailer which provides the braking control function to the trailer. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission.		 No.013 2010-09-30
electric electronic interface (Brake) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Brake electric/electronic interface Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Brake electric/electronic interface" means the part of a separable electrical/electronic connection between the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle which is dedicated to the braking system.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Electric energy conversion system [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electric energy conversion system protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Electric energy conversion system [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Electric energy conversion system [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2015-03-31
electric power supply (External) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2011-02-14
electric power supply (External) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electric power train [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Electric power train Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices, one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Electric power train [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electric power train Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Electric power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may include the RESS, the electric energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Electric power train [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electric power train Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Electric power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may include the REESS, the electric energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the REESS.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electric power train [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices (e.g. a battery, electromechanical flywheel or super capacitor), one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2012-05-26
electric power train (Hybrid) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Hybrid electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/ power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.101 2012-05-26
electric power train (Hybrid) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Hybrid power train" means a power train with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on-board the vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.13.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g.: battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator …)		 No.101 2007-06-19
Electric power train [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices (e.g. a battery, electromechanical flywheel or super capacitor), one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Electric range [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Electric range CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electric range", for vehicles powered by an electric power train only or by a hybrid electric power train with off-vehicle charging, means distance that can be driven electrically on one fully charged battery (or other electric energy storage device) as measured according to the procedure described in Annex 9;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Electric range [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Electric range CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Electric range", for vehicles powered by an electric power train only or by a hybrid electric power train with off-vehicle charging, means distance that can be driven electrically on one fully charged battery (or other electric energy storage device) as measured according to the procedure described in Annex 9.		 No.101 2007-06-19
Electric regenerative braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Electric regenerative braking [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Electric regenerative braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Electric regenerative braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
electric safety assessment (Passenger compartment for) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
electric safety assessment (Passenger compartment for) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
electric safety assessment (Passenger compartment for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electric state of charge [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric state of charge Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Electric state of charge [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric state of charge Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Electric state of charge [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric state of charge Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
electric vehicle (Hybrid) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
(a) a consumable fuel;
(b) an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.083 2012-02-15
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HYBRID) [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 HEV (HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. This Annex defines the specific provisions regarding type-approval of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) as defined in paragraph 2.21.2 of this Regulation.
1.2. As a general principle, for the tests of Type I, II, III, IV, V, VI and OBD, hybrid electric vehicles shall be tested according to Annexes 4a, 5, 6, 7, 9, 8 and 11 respectively, unless modified by this Annex.
1.3. For the Type I test only, OVC vehicles (as categorised in paragraph 2) shall be tested according to condition A and to condition B. The test results under both conditions A and B and the weighted values shall be reported in the communication form.
1.4. The emissions test results shall comply with the limits under all specified test conditions of this Regulation.2. CATEGORIES OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES
[表] Vehicle charging / Off-Vehicle Charging (OVC) / Not Off-Vehicle Charging (NOVC)		 No.083 2012-02-15
Electric Vehicle (Hybrid) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.2. Definition of Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV): "Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle, including vehicles which draw energy from a consumable fuel only for the purpose of recharging the electrical energy/power storage device that for the purpose of mechanical propulsion draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power: (a) A consumable fuel; (b) A battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device.		 No.083 2015-07-03
electric vehicle (Hybrid) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)":
2.6.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.6.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- A consumable fuel;
- An electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);
2.6.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- An internal combustion engine; and
- One (or several) electric drive train(s);		 No.085 2014-11-07
electric vehicle (Hybrid) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
electric vehicle (Hybrid) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
electric vehicle (Hybrid) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
electric vehicle (Hybrid) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;
2.14.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2007-06-19
electric vehicle (Pure) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Pure electric vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Pure electric vehicle" means a vehicle powered by an electric power train only.		 No.083 2015-07-03
electric vehicle (Pure) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Pure electric vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Pure electric vehicle" means vehicle powered by an electric power train only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
electric vehicle (Pure) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Pure electric vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pure electric vehicle" means vehicle powered by an electric power train only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Electrical chassis [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical chassis protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Electrical chassis [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical chassis Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Electrical chassis [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical chassis Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electrical chassis [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2.24. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, and all other conductive parts electrically linked to them, whose potential is taken as a reference. No.100 2009-02-14
Electrical chassis [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose potential is taken as reference.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Electrical chassis [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose potential is taken as reference.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electrical circuit [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical circuit protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Electrical circuit [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical circuit Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Electrical circuit [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical circuit Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electrical circuit [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Electrical circuit Electric vehicle safety 2.20. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected live parts through which an electrical current isdesigned to pass in normal operation conditions; No.100 2009-02-14
Electrical circuit [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electrical circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected live parts which is designed to be electrically energized in normal operation.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Electrical circuit [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electrical circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electrical energy conversion system [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Electrical energy conversion system [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electrical power train [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical power train protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the RESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Electrical power train [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical power train Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the RESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Electrical power train [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical power train Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the REESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the REESS.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electrical protection barrier [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical protection barrier protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electrical protection barrier" the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Electrical Protection Barrier [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical Protection Barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical Protection Barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Electrical protection barrier [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical protection barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical protection barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electrical sub assembly [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electrical system [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical/electronic system Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Electrical/electronic system" means (an) electrical and/or electronic device(s) or set(s) of devices together with any associated electrical connections which form part of a vehicle but which are not intended to be type-approved separately from the vehicle. Both RESS and Coupling system for charging the RESS are considered electrical/electronic systems.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.10. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intendedto be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one ormore specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer as either a ‘component’ ora ‘separate technical unit (STU)' (see Article 4(1)(c) of Directive 2003/37/EC).		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Electrical/electronic sub-assembly [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
Electrical/electronic system [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electrical/electronic system suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.9. "Electrical/electronic system" means (an) electrical and/or electronic device(s) or set(s) of devices together with anyassociated electrical connections which form part of a vehicle but which are not intended to be type approvedseparately from the vehicle		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Electrical/electronic system [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electrical/electronic system Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Electrical/electronic system" means (an) electrical and/or electronic device(s) or set(s) of devices together with any associated electrical connections which form part of a vehicle but which are not intended to be type approved separately from the vehicle.		 No.010 2010-05-08
electrolyte (Flammable) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Flammable electrolyte Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Flammable electrolyte" means an electrolyte that contains substances classified as Class 3 "flammable liquid" under "UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods — Model Regulations (Revision 17 from June 2011), Volume I, Chapter 2.3".		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electromagnetic compatibility [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electromagnetic compatibility suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Electromagnetic compatibility [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electromagnetic compatibility [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic compatibility Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Electromagnetic disturbance [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electromagnetic disturbance suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.2. "Electromagnetic disturbance" means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of avehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s). An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagneticnoise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself.		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Electromagnetic disturbance [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic disturbance Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Electromagnetic disturbance" means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s), or of any other device, unit of equipment or system operated in vicinity of a vehicle. An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electromagnetic disturbance [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic disturbance Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Electromagnetic disturbance" means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s), or of any other device, unit of equipment or system operated in vicinity of a vehicle. An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself		 No.010 2010-05-08
Electromagnetic environment [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electromagnetic environment suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.4. "Electromagnetic environment" means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.nce		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Electromagnetic environment [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic environment Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Electromagnetic environment" means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electromagnetic environment [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic environment Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Electromagnetic environment" means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Electromagnetic immunity [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electromagnetic immunity suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to perform without degradation of performance in the presence of specified electromagnetic disturbances		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Electromagnetic immunity [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic immunity Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to operate without degradation of performance in the presence of (specified) electromagnetic disturbances which includes wanted radio frequency signals from radio transmitters or radiated in-band emissions of industrial-scientific-medical (ISM) apparatus, internal or external to the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electromagnetic immunity [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic immunity Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to operate without degradation of performance in the presence of (specified) electro- magnetic disturbances which includes wanted radio frequency signals from radio transmitters or radiated in-band emissions of industrial-scientific-medical (ISM) apparatus, internal or external to the vehicle.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Electronic control unit [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Electronic control unit Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.23. "Electronic control unit" means an engine's electronic device that uses data from engine sensors to control engine parameters;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.38. "Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG)" means a device that controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.24. "Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling)" means a device which controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.		 No.110 2011-05-07
electronic control unit (Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.40. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 4.38 means components that do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.		 No.110 2015-06-30
electronic control unit (Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.26. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 2.24 means components which do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Electronic control unit [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Electronic control unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.12. "Electronic control unit" means a device which controls the LPG demand of the engine and cuts off automatically the power to the shut-off valves of the LPG-system in case of a broken fuel supply pipe caused by an accident, or by stalling of the engine		 No.067 2008-03-14
Electronic converter [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electronic converter protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Electronic converter [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electronic converter Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Electronic converter [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electronic converter Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Electronic converter [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2.13. "Electronic converter" means an apparatus allowing the control and/or transfer of electric energy.#2 No.100 2009-02-14
Electronic converter [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electric power for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Electronic converter [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electric power for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Electronic light source control gear [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Electronic light source control gear Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.2. "Electronic light source control gear" means one or more components between supply and light source to control voltage and/or electrical current of the light source; No.048 2008-05-23
Electronic light source control gear [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Electronic light source control gear Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.2. "Electronic light source control gear" means one or more components between supply and light source to control voltage and/or electrical current of the light source;
2.7.1.2.1. "Ballast" means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source;
2.7.1.2.2. "Ignitor" means an electronic light source control gear to start the arc of a gas-discharge light source;		 No.048 2011-12-06
electronic stability control [REG. No 661/2009] 　 electronic stability control safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 1. "electronic stability control" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle; REG. No 661/2009
Electronic Stability Control System [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or "ESC System" means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side- slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Electronic Stability Control System [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or ‘ESC System’ means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side-slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
electronic sub assembly [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2012-09-20
Electronic system [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical/electronic system Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Electrical/electronic system" means (an) electrical and/or electronic device(s) or set(s) of devices together with any associated electrical connections which form part of a vehicle but which are not intended to be type-approved separately from the vehicle. Both RESS and Coupling system for charging the RESS are considered electrical/electronic systems.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Element of design [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Element of design Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine:
(a) Any element of the engine system;
(b) Any control system, including: computer software; electronic control systems; and computer logic;
(c) Any control system calibration; or
(d) The results of any interaction of systems;		 No.049 2013-06-24
element of design [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 element of design Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine,
(a) any control system, including computer software, electronic control systems and computer logic;
(b) any control system calibrations;
(c) the result of systems interaction, or;
(d) any hardware items;		 No.049 2008-04-12
element of design [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 element of design Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "element of design" means in respect of a vehicle or engine,
(a) any control system, including computer software, electronic control systems and computer logic;
(b) any control system calibrations;
(c) the result of systems interaction, or;
(d) any hardware items;		 No.049 2010-08-31
ELR [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 ELR Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
ELR European load response test		 No.049 2010-08-31
ELR test [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 ELR test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "ELR test" means a test cycle consisting of a sequence of load steps at constant engine speeds to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2008-04-12
ELR test [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 ELR test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "ELR test" means a test cycle consisting of a sequence of load steps at constant engine speeds to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2010-08-31
EMC [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 No.010 2012-09-20
EMC [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic compatibility Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.		 No.010 2010-05-08
EMD [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic immunity Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to operate without degradation of performance in the presence of (specified) electromagnetic disturbances which includes wanted radio frequency signals from radio transmitters or radiated in-band emissions of industrial-scientific-medical (ISM) apparatus, internal or external to the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
EMD [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic disturbance Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Electromagnetic disturbance" means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s), or of any other device, unit of equipment or system operated in vicinity of a vehicle. An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself		 No.010 2010-05-08
EME [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic environment Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Electromagnetic environment" means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Emergency braking phase [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Emergency braking phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency braking phase" means the phase starting when the AEBS emits a braking demand for at least 4 m/s2 deceleration to the service braking system of the vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Emergency braking signal [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Emergency braking signal [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23 of this Regulation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Emergency braking signal [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Emergency braking signal [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Emergency Braking System (Advanced) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Emergency door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Emergency door" means a door intended for use by passengers as an exit only exceptionally and in particular in an emergency.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Emergency door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Emergency door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Emergency door" means a door intended for use by passengers as an exit only exceptionally, and in particular in an emergency;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Emergency door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Emergency door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Emergency door" means a door intended for use by passengers as an exit only exceptionally, and in particular in an emergency;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Emergency exit [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Emergency exit" means an emergency door, emergency window or escape hatch.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Emergency exit [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Emergency exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Emergency exit" means an emergency door, emergency window or escape hatch.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Emergency exit [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Emergency exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Emergency exit" means an emergency door, emergency window or escape hatch.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Emergency lighting system [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency lighting system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Emergency lighting system" means a system that provides a minimum level of lighting necessary to enable occupants to safely egress from the vehicle, including the emergency exits.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Emergency locking retractor [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Emergency-locking retractor Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a Child Restraint System. The term covers the following devices:
2.41.1. "Automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented.
2.41.2. "Emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the strap wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.41.2.1. Deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity);
2.41.2.2. A combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.129 2014-03-29
Emergency locking retractor (type 4) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Emergency locking retractor (type 4) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. Deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity),
2.14.4.2. A combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.016 2015-11-20
Emergency locking retractor [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Emergency locking retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity).
2.14.4.2. A combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.016 2011-09-09
Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 1 , N 2 and N 3.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 ( 1 ).		 No.016 2011-09-09
Emergency stop signal [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Emergency stop signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.28. "Emergency stop signal" means a signal to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that a high retardation force has been applied to the vehicle relative to the prevailing road conditions. No.048 2008-05-23
Emergency stop signal [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Emergency stop signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Emergency stop signal" means a signal to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that a high retardation force has been applied to the vehicle relative to the prevailing road conditions.		 No.048 2011-12-06
Emergency window [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency window" means a window, not necessarily glazed, intended for use as an exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Emergency window [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Emergency window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency window" means a window, not necessarily glazed, intended for use as an exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Emergency window [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Emergency window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency window" means a window, not necessarily glazed, intended for use as an exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2010-09-29
emergency-locking retractor [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 an emergency-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic
means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2007-11-23
emergency-locking retractor [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 emergency-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer’s freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer’s physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2011-09-09
EMI [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic immunity Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to operate without degradation of performance in the presence of (specified) electro- magnetic disturbances which includes wanted radio frequency signals from radio transmitters or radiated in-band emissions of industrial-scientific-medical (ISM) apparatus, internal or external to the vehicle.		 No.010 2010-05-08
emission (Broadband) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Broadband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Broadband emission" means an emission, which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) 25, second edition 2002 and Corrigendum 2004).		 No.010 2012-09-20
emission (Broadband) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Broadband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Broadband emission" means an emission, which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) 25, second edition).		 No.010 2010-05-08
emission (crankcase, Open) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Open crankcase emissions Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.54. "Open crankcase emissions" means any flow from an engine's crankcase that is emitted directly into the environment;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission (Evaporative) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Evaporative emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Evaporative emissions" means the hydrocarbon vapours lost from the fuel system of a motor vehicle other than those from exhaust emissions;		 No.083 2012-02-15
emission (Evaporative) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Evaporative emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Evaporative emissions" means the hydrocarbon vapours lost from the fuel system of a motor vehicle other than those from exhaust emissions.		 No.083 2015-07-03
emission (Exhaust) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Exhaust emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- For positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants,
- For compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particle numbers;		 No.083 2012-02-15
emission (Narrowband) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Narrowband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Narrowband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth less than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (CISPR 25, second edition 2002 and Corrigendum 2004).		 No.010 2012-09-20
emission (Narrowband) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Narrowband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Narrowband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth less than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (CISPR 25, second edition).		 No.010 2010-05-08
emission (sound, Rolling) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Rolling sound emission Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Rolling sound emission" means the sound emitted from the contact between the tyres in motion and the road surface.		 No.117 2011-11-23
emission (Specific) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Specific emissions Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.17. "Specific emissions" means the mass emissions expressed in g/kWh.		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission (Specific) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Specific emissions Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.80. "Specific emissions" means the mass emissions expressed in g/kWh;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission (Tailpipe) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Tailpipe emissions Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.60. "Tailpipe emissions" means the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission (Vehicle type with regard to) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Vehicle type with regard to emissions Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.64. "Vehicle type with regard to emissions" means a group of vehicles which do not differ in essential engine and vehicle characteristics as set out in Annex 1;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission control (diagnostic system for, on-board) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 on-board diagnostic system for emission control (OBD) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Emission control monitoring system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NO x control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5;
"Emission control system" means the elements of design and emission strategies developed or calibrated for the purpose of controlling emissions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission control monitoring system [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.		 No.049 2008-04-12
emission control monitoring system [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.		 No.049 2010-08-31
Emission control strategy [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission control strategy Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.25. "Emission control strategy" means a combination of an emission control system with one base emission control strategy and with one set of auxiliary emission control strategies, incorporated into the overall design of an engine or non-road mobile machinery into which the engine is installed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission control strategy (auxiliary) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
emission control strategy (auxiliary) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2010-08-31
emission control strategy (base) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2008-04-12
emission control strategy (base) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2010-08-31
emission control strategy [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2008-04-12
emission control strategy [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Emission control system [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Emission control system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Emission control system" means the electronic engine management controller and any emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative system which supplies an input to or receives an output from this controller.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Emission control system [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission control system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.24. "Emission control system" means any device, system, or element of design that controls or reduces the emissions of regulated pollutants from an engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission control system [REG. No 692/2008] 　 emission control system emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 18. "emission control system" means, in the context of the OBD system, the electronic engine management controller and any emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative system which supplies an input to or receives an output from this controller; REG. No 692/2008
emission control system [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control system" means the exhaust aftertreatment system, the electronic management controller(s) of the engine system and any emission-related component of the engine system in the exhaust which supplies an input to or receives an output from this(these) controller(s), and when applicable the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other power train or vehicle control unit with respect to emissions management;		 No.049 2008-04-12
emission control system [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control system" means the exhaust aftertreatment system, the electronic management controller(s) of the engine system and any emission-related component of the engine system in the exhaust which supplies an input to or receives an output from this(these) controller(s), and when applicable the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other power train or vehicle control unit with respect to emissions management;		 No.049 2010-08-31
emission default mode (Permanent) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Permanent emission default mode Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Permanent emission default mode" refers to a case where the engine management controller permanently switches to a setting that does not require an input from a failed component or system where such a failed component or system would result in an increase in emissions from the vehicle to a level above the limits given in paragraph 3.3.2 of this Annex.		 No.083 2012-02-15
emission default mode [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission default mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission default mode" means an AECS activated in the case of a malfunction of the ECS detected by the OBD system that results in the MI being activated and that does not require an input from the failed component or system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
emission default mode [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission default mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission default mode" means an AECS activated in the case of a malfunction of the ECS detected by the OBD system that results in the MI being activated and that does not require an input from the failed component or system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Emission durability period [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission durability period Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.26. "Emission durability period" means the number of hours indicated in Annex 8 used to determine the deterioration factors;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission limit (Applicable) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Applicable emission limit Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.3. "Applicable emission limit" means an emission limit to which an engine is subject;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission measurement system (Portable) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PEMS (Portable emissions measurement system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Portable emissions measurement system" (PEMS) means a portable emissions measurement system meeting the requirements specified in Appendix 2 to Annex 8 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission related component (Critical) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Critical emission-related components Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Critical emission-related components" means the following components which are designed primarily for emission control: any exhaust after-treatment system, the ECU and its associated sensors and actuators, and the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission related component (Critical) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Critical emission-related components Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.15. "Critical emission-related components" means the components which are designed primarily for emission control, that is, any exhaust after-treatment system, the electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and actuators, and the EGR system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Emission related maintenance [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Emission related maintenance" means the maintenance which substantially affects emissions or which is likely to affect emissions deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in- use operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Emission related maintenance [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.27. "Emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance which substantially affects emissions or which is likely to affect emissions performance deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in-use operation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission related maintenance (Critical) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Critical emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission related maintenance (Critical) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Critical emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.16. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components;		 No.096 2014-03-22
emission related maintenance (Non) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Non-emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Non-emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance which does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting effect on the emissions deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emission related maintenance (Non) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Non-emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.50. "Non-emission-related maintenance" means maintenance which does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting effect on the emissions performance deterioration of the machine or the engine during normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Emission strategy [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Emission strategy" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle and used in controlling emissions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Emission Strategy (Auxiliary) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 AES (Auxiliary Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those conditions exist;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Emission Strategy (Base) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 BES (Base Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AES is activated;		 No.049 2013-06-24
emissions-related defect [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emissions-related defect Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emissions-related defect" means a deficiency or deviation from normal production tolerances in design, materials or workmanship in a device, system or assembly that affects any parameter, specification or component belonging to the emission control system. A missing component may be considered to be an "emissions-related defect";		 No.049 2008-04-12
emissions-related defect [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emissions-related defect Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emissions-related defect" means a deficiency or deviation from normal production tolerances in design, materials or workmanship in a device, system or assembly that affects any parameter, specification or component belonging to the emission control system. A missing component may be considered to be an "emissions-related defect";		 No.049 2010-08-31
emitted from the device (light, Colour of the) [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.005 2014-05-29
emitted from the device (light, Colour of the) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval, shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.019 2014-08-22
emitted from the device (light, Colour of the) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation		 No.074 2013-06-18
emitting area (light, Apparent) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Apparent light emitting area Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.10. Apparent light emitting area: area that contains the (apparent) element of visible radiation when observed under a certain viewing axis. The apparent light emitting area is defined in a plane that contains the light centre and that is perpendicular to the corresponding viewing axis.		 No.128 2014-05-29
emitting surface (Light) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means all or part of the exterior surface of the transparent material as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3;		 No.053 2013-06-18
emitting surface of a lighting device, light signalling device or a retro reflector means (Light) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means all or part of the exterior surface of the transparent material as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3;		 No.074 2013-06-18
enclosed / none- buckle release button [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 enclosed / none- buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Enclosed buckle release button [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Enclosed buckle release button [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
enclosed buckle release button (Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
enclosed buckle release button (Non) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
enclosed buckle release button (non-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 non-enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
enclosed buckle release button [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
enclosed buckle-release button (Non-) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
enclosed buckle-release button (Non-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Enclosed buckle-release button [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button : A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Enclosed buckle-release button [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Enclosure [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Enclosure protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Enclosure" means the part enclosing the internal units and providing protection against any direct contact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Enclosure [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Enclosure Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Enclosure" means the part enclosing the internal units and providing protection against any direct contact,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Enclosure [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Enclosure Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Enclosure" means the part enclosing the internal units and providing protection against any direct contact.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Enclosure [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Enclosure Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Enclosure" means the part enclosing the internal units and providing protection against direct contact from any direction of access.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Enclosure [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Enclosure Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Enclosure" means the part enclosing the internal units and providing protection against direct contact from any direction of access.		 No.100 2015-03-31
End outline marker lamp [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain powerdriven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2014-09-30
End outline marker lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.23. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edge and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. This lamp is intended, for certain vehicles and trailers, to complement the vehicle's front and rear position lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.048 2011-12-06
end outline marker lamp of different type [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
End-outline marker lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 End-outline marker lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.19. End-outline marker lamp
"End-outline marker lamp" means the lamps fitted to the extreme outer edge as close as possible to the top of the tractor and intended clearly to indicate the tractor’s overall width. This signal is intended, for certain tractors, to complement the tractor’s front and rear position (side) lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
End-outline marker lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.23. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edge and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle"s overall width. This lamp is intended, for certain vehicles and trailers, to complement the vehicle"s front and rear position lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;f No.048 2008-05-23
End-outline marker lamp [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 1997-07-30
End-outline marker lamp [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle’s overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle’s position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2010-06-12
End-outline marker lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.20. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamps fitted to the extreme outer edge as close as possible to the top of the tractor and intended clearly to indicate the tractor’s overall width. This signal is intended, for certain tractors, to complement the tractor’s front and rear position (side) lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Endurance braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device.
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems;
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device;
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Endurance braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2010-09-30
energy (Reference) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Reference energy (ER) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Reference energy" (ER) means the potential energy of the vehicle type to be approved, measured in relation to the horizontal lower level of the ditch, at the starting, unstable position of the rollover process.		 No.066 2007-12-06
energy (Reference) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 ER (Reference energy) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Reference energy" (ER) means the potential energy of the vehicle type to be approved, measured in relation to the horizontal lower level of the ditch, at the starting, unstable position of the rollover process.		 No.066 2011-03-30
energy (stored, braking equipment with, Hydraulic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
energy (stored, braking equipment with, Hydraulic) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
energy (stored, braking system with, Hydraulic) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Energy absorber [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber
Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Energy absorber [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Energy absorber Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Energy absorber [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber : Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Energy absorber [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber
Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Energy absorber [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Energy absorber Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Energy absorber [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Energy absorber Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
energy conversion system (Electric) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electric energy conversion system protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
energy conversion system (Electric) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
energy conversion system (Electric) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2015-03-31
energy conversion system (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
energy conversion system (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Energy reservoir [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Energy reservoir Steering equipment 2.3.6.2. "Energy reservoir" means that part of the energy supply in which the energy provided by the energy source is stored, for example, a pressurised fluid reservoir or vehicle battery. No.079 2008-05-27
Energy source [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Energy source Steering equipment 2.3.6.1. "Energy source" means the part of the energy supply, which provides the energy in the required form. No.079 2008-05-27
energy storage system (rechargeable) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "RESS" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
energy storage system (Rechargeable) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
energy storage system (Rechargeable) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
energy storage system (Rechargeable) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 REESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
energy storage system (rechargeable) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2011-02-14
energy storage system (Rechargeable) [No.100 2011-02-14]a 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Energy Storage System (Rechargeable) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.
The REESS may include subsystem(s) together with the necessary ancillary systems for physical support, thermal management, electronic control and enclosures.		 No.100 2015-03-31
energy storage system (rechargeable, charging the, Coupling system for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Energy Storage System (Rechargeable, Coupling system for charging the) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Energy supply [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Energy supply Steering equipment 2.3.6. "Energy supply" includes those parts of the steering equipment which provide it with energy, regulate that energy and where appropriate, process and store it. It also includes any storage reservoirs for the operating medium and the return lines, but not the vehicle"s engine (except for the purpose of paragraph 5.3.2.1.) or its drive to the energy source. No.079 2008-05-27
Energy transmission [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Energy transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Energy transmission [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Energy transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Energy transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Energy transmission Steering equipment 2.3.2.2. "Energy transmission" means all components by means of which the energy required for control/Regulation of the steering function of the wheels is transmitted." No.079 2008-05-27
Energy transmission [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Energy transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013 2010-09-30
energy transmission [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 energy transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission":
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
engagement (mechanical, Positive) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Positive mechanical engagement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Positive mechanical engagement" means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.		 No.055 2006-12-27
engagement (mechanical, Positive) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Positive mechanical engagement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Positive mechanical engagement" means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.		 No.055 2010-08-28
engine [COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2008/74/EC] 　 engine emissions from light
passenger and commercial vehicles		 (b) "engine" means the motive propulsion source of a vehicle for which type approval as a separate technical unit, as defined in Article 2 of Directive 70/156/EEC, may be granted; COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2008/74/EC
Engine [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Engine noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.12. "Engine" means the power source of the vehicle without detachable accessories.		 No.041 2012-11-14
engine [REG. No 595/2009] 　 engine emissions 1. "engine" means the motive propulsion source of a vehicle for which type-approval as a separate technical unit, as defined in point 25 of Article 3 of Directive 2007/46/EC, may be granted; REG. No 595/2009
engine (Approval of an) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
engine (Approval of an) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Approval of an engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.4. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type or family with regard to the level of emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
engine (Approval of an) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of an engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
engine (approval of an) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine (approval of an) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine (Approval of an) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of an engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;
(Method for measuring internal combustion engine net power
1. These provisions apply to the method for determining the power curve at full load of an internal combustion engine operated under intermittent speed as a function of engine speed and the rated speed and rated net power of an internal combustion engine under constant speed.
2. TEST CONDITIONS)		 No.120 2010-09-30
engine (C.I. : Compression ignition) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 C.I. (Compression ignition) engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.9. "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.096 2014-03-22
engine (diesel) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 diesel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "diesel engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine (diesel) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 diesel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "diesel engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine (Dual fuel) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel engine Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system type approved according to Regulation No 49 or mounted on a vehicle type approved with regards to its emissions according to Regulation No 49 and that is designed to simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
engine (Fuel requirement by the) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Fuel requirement by the engine Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Fuel requirement by the engine" means the type of fuel normally used by the engine:
(a) Petrol (E5);
(b) LPG (liquefied petroleum gas);
(c) NG/biomethane (natural gas);
(d) Either petrol (E5) or LPG;
(e) Either petrol (E5) or NG/biomethane;
(f) Diesel fuel (B5);
(g) Mixture of ethanol (E85) and petrol (E5) (Flex fuel);
(h) Mixture of biodiesel and diesel (B5) (Flex fuel);
(i) Hydrogen;
(j) Either petrol (E5) or Hydrogen (Bi-fuel);		 No.083 2012-02-15
engine (fuel, Dual) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system that is designed to simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
engine (gas) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 gas engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "gas engine" means a positive-ignition engine which is fuelled with natural gas (NG) or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine (gas) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 gas engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "gas engine" means a positive-ignition engine which is fuelled with natural gas (NG) or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine (ignition, Compression) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Compression ignition (C.I.) engine Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.3 "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which operates on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.024 2006-11-24
engine (injection, Direct) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Direct injection engine Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Direct injection engine" means an engine which can operate in a mode where the fuel is injected into the intake air after the air has been drawn through the inlet valves.		 No.083 2015-07-03
engine (multi-setting) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 multi-setting engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "multi-setting engine" means an engine containing more than one engine setting;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine (multi-setting) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 multi-setting engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "multi-setting engine" means an engine containing more than one engine setting;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine (Parent) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Parent engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family;		 No.049 2013-06-24
engine (Parent) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Parent engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.57. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics are representative for that engine family and that it complies with the requirements set out in Annex 1B of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
engine (Parent) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Parent engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that it complies with requirements set out in Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
engine (parent) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 parent engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine (parent) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 parent engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine (Parent) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Parent engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that it complies with requirements set out in Annex 5 of this Regulation;
(2. CHOICE OF THE PARENT ENGINE
2.1. In the case of diesel engines the parent engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criteria of the highest fuel delivery per stroke at the declared maximum torque speed.
In the event that two or more engines share this primary criteria, the parent engine shall be selected using the secondary criteria of highest fuel delivery per stroke at rated speed. Under certain circumstances, the approval authority may conclude that the family can best be characterized by testing a second engine. Thus, the approval authority may select an additional engine for test.
2.2. In the case of S.I. engines the parent engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criteria of the fuel flow (g/h).)		 No.120 2010-09-30
engine (speed, Constant) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Constant-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.11. "Constant-speed engine" means an engine whose type approval or certification is limited to constant-speed operation. Engines whose constant-speed governor function is removed or disabled are no longer constant-speed engines;		 No.096 2014-03-22
engine (speed, Variable) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Variable-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.94. "Variable-speed engine" means an engine that is not a constant-speed engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Engine [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Engine Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Engine" means the power source without detachable accessories.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Engine after treatment system family [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine after-treatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Engine after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Engine after treatment system family [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine after treatment system family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.28. "Engine-after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that complies with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into a family of engine families utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Engine capacity [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston;		 No.083 2008-05-06
Engine capacity [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Engine capacity [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston.		 No.083 2015-07-03
engine capacity [REG. No 692/2008] 　 engine capacity emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 5. "engine capacity" means either of the following:
(a) for reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
(b) for rotary piston (Wankel) engines, double the nominal engine swept volume;		 REG. No 692/2008
Engine compartment [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Engine compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.3. "Engine compartment" means the compartment in which the engine is installed and in which a combustion heater may be installed.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Engine crankcase [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape; No.083 2008-05-06
Engine crankcase [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Engine crankcase [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Engine disconnected [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Engine disconnected Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine disconnected" means when the engine is no longer connected to the driving wheel(s).		 No.078 2015-01-30
Engine family [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Engine family" means a manufacturer’s grouping of engines which through their design, as defined in paragraph 7 of this Regulation, have similar exhaust emission characteristics;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Engine family [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.29. "Engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines which, through their design, are expected to have similar exhaust emission characteristics and comply with the requirements in paragraph 7. of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Engine family [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines which, through their design, fulfil the grouping criteria laid down in Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
engine family (Approval of an) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
engine family (Approval of an) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2010-09-30
engine family (NCD) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCD engine family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.48. "NCD engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common methods of monitoring/diagnosing NCMs.		 No.096 2014-03-22
engine family (OBD) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 OBD engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "OBD engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common methods of monitoring and diagnosing emission-related malfunctions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
engine family (OBD-) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 OBD-engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "OBD-engine family" means, for approval of the OBD system according to the requirements of Annex 9A to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common OBD system design parameters according to paragraph 7.3. of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine family (OBD-) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 OBD-engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD-engine family" means, for approval of the OBD system according to the requirements of Annex 9A to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common OBD system design parameters according to paragraph 7.3. of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine family [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems which, through their design as defined in paragraph 7. of this Regulation, have similar exhaust emission characteristics; all members of the family shall comply with the applicable emission limit values;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine family [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems which, through their design as defined in paragraph 7. of this Regulation, have similar exhaust emission characteristics; all members of the family shall comply with the applicable emission limit values;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Engine family [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Engine family" means a manufacturer’s grouping of engines which, through their design, fulfil the grouping criteria laid down in Annex 5 to this Regulation;
(1. PARAMETERS DEFINING THE ENGINE FAMILY
The engine family may be defined by basic design parameters which must be common to engines within the family. In some cases there may be interaction of parameters. These effect must also be taken into consideration to ensure that only engines with similar exhaust emission characteristics are included within an engine family.)		 No.120 2010-09-30
Engine governed speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine governed speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.30. "Engine governed speed" means the engine operating speed when it is controlled by the installed governor;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Engine misfire [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Engine misfire Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine misfire" means lack of combustion in the cylinder of a positive-ignition engine due to absence of spark, poor fuel metering, poor compression or any other cause. In terms of OBD monitoring it is that percentage of misfires out of a total number of firing events (as declared by the manufacturer) that would result in emissions exceeding the limits given in paragraph 3.3.2 or that percentage that could lead to an exhaust catalyst, or catalysts, overheating causing irreversible damage.		 No.083 2012-02-15
engine misfire [REG. No 692/2008] 　 engine misfire emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 29. "engine misfire" means lack of combustion in the cylinder of a positive ignition engine due to absence of spark, poor fuel metering, poor compression or any other cause; REG. No 692/2008
engine operating speed range [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine operating speed range [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine power (Rated) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 (Rated) engine power Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "(Rated) engine power" means the engine power expressed in kW (ECE) and measured by the ECE method pursuant to Regulation No 85.		 No.051 2007-05-30
engine representative of the type to be approved [No.024 2006-11-243] 　 engine representative of the type to be approved Diesel smoke and power PART I — EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM C.I. ENGINES
3. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
3.3 "An engine representative of the type to be approved" means the engine which develops the highest net power within the engine type,		 No.024 2006-11-24
engine setting [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine setting Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine setting" means a specific engine/vehicle configuration that includes the emission control strategy (ECS), one single engine performance rating (the approved full-load curve) and, if used, one set of torque limiters;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine setting [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine setting Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine setting" means a specific engine/vehicle configuration that includes the emission control strategy (ECS), one single engine performance rating (the approved full-load curve) and, if used, one set of torque limiters;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engine speed (Rated) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 S (Rated engine speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.8. "Rated engine speed" means the engine speed at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power as stated by the manufacturer.
The symbol S denotes the numerical value of the rated engine speed expressed in revolutions per minute.		 No.041 2012-11-14
engine speed (Rated) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Rated engine speed, S Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated engine speed, S" means the declared engine speed in min-1 (rpm) at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power pursuant to Regulation No 85. If the rated maximum net power is reached at several engine speeds, the highest engine speed shall be used.		 No.051 2007-05-30
engine speed A, B and C [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine speed A, B and C [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Engine start [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine start Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Engine start" consists of the ignition-On, cranking and start of combustion, and is completed when the engine speed reaches 150 min -1 below the normal, warmed-up idle speed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Engine system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Engine system" means the engine, the emission control system and the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit or units (ECU) and any other powertrain or vehicle control unit;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Engine system [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.31. "Engine system" means the engine, the emission control system and the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (ECU) and any other powertrain or vehicle control unit;		 No.096 2014-03-22
engine system [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine system" means the engine, the emission control system and the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other powertrain or vehicle control unit;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine system [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine system" means the engine, the emission control system and the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other powertrain or vehicle control unit;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Engine type [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in essential engine characteristics as set out in Annex 1;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Engine type [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine type Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.32. "Engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential engine characteristics as defined in paragraphs 1. to 4. of Annex 1A, Appendix 3 to this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Engine type [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Engine type Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential engine characteristics as defined in Annex 1 — Appendix 3 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
Engine type [No.024 2006-11-243] 　 Engine type Diesel smoke and power PART I — EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM C.I. ENGINES
3. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
3.2 "Engine type" means a category of C.I. engine for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annex 1 to this Regulation except for modifications as permitted by paragraphs 7.2 and 7.3 of this Regulation,		 No.024 2006-11-24
engine type [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential respects as engine characteristics as described in Annex 1 to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine type [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential respects as engine characteristics as described in Annex 1 to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Engine type [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Engine type Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential engine characteristics as defined in Annex 1 — Appendix 3[様式];		 No.120 2010-09-30
engine vehicle (Cab-over) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Cab-over engine vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab-over engine vehicle" means a vehicle where more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub is in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.		 No.029 2010-11-20
engine vehicle (combustion, Internal) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
engine vehicle (Internal combustion) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
engine-aftertreatment system family [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
engine-aftertreatment system family [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
engineering judgment (Good) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Good engineering judgment Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.37. "Good engineering judgment" means judgments made consistent with generally accepted scientific and engineering principles and available relevant information;		 No.096 2014-03-22
enhanced environment-friendly vehicle (EEV) [COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2008/74/EC] 　 enhanced environment-friendly vehicle (EEV) emissions from light
passenger and commercial vehicles		 (c) "enhanced environment-friendly vehicle (EEV)" means a vehicle propelled by an engine which complies with the permissive emission limit values set out in row C of the tables in Section 6.2.1 of Annex I. COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2008/74/EC
Entrance angle [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Entrance angle (symbol β) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol β)" means the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90° but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0° ＜ β ＜ 180°. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, β 1 and β 2 ;		 No.104 2014-03-14
entrance angle (component of the, First) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180° ＜ β1 ＜ 180°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
entrance angle (component of the, Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90° ＜ β2 ＜ 90°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
entrance angle (First component of the, β1) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.9. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1)", the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis. Range: – 180° < β 1 ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
entrance angle (Second component of the, β2) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.10. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2)", the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis. Range: – 90° ≤ β 2 ≤ 90°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Entrance angle (β) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Entrance angle (symbol β) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol β)", the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90° but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0° ≤ β ≤ 180°. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, β 1 and β 2 .		 No.069 2010-07-31
environment (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic environment Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Electromagnetic environment" means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.		 No.010 2012-09-20
environment (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic environment Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Electromagnetic environment" means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.		 No.010 2010-05-08
equipment (production, Standard) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Standard-production equipment Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Standard-production equipment" means equipment provided by the manufacturer for a particular application;		 No.085 2014-11-07
equipment (Specific) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Specific equipment LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific equipment" means:
(a) the container,
(b) the accessories fitted to the container,
(c) the vaporizer/pressure regulator,
(d) the shut-off valve,
(e) the gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece,
(f) the gas dosage unit, either separate or combined with the gas injection device,
(g) flexible hoses,
(h) filling unit,
(i) non-return valve,
(j) gas-tube pressure relief valve,
(k) filter unit,
(l) pressure or temperature sensor,
(m) fuel pump,
(n) service coupling,
(o) electronic control unit,
(p) fuel rail,
(q) pressure relief device;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Equivalent brake disc [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Equivalent brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Equivalent brake drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Equivalent brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Equivalent lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Equivalent lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.1. Equivalent lamps
"Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the tractor is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the tractor when it is approved, on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Annex.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
equivalent lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 equivalent lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.2. equivalent lamps
means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the vehicle when it is approved on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Annex;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Equivalent lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Equivalent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.2. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorized in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the vehicle when it is approved on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation; No.048 2008-05-23
Equivalent lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Equivalent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.1. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those of the lamps with which the vehicle is equipped at the time of approval, on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Equivalent lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Equivalent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.1. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those of the lamps with which the vehicle is equipped at the time of approval, on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Equivalent lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Equivalent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.2. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the vehicle when it is approved on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Equivalent lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Equivalent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and approved under Regulation No 37 or in conformity with the same requirements; such lamps may have different characteristics from those of the lamps with which the vehicle is equipped at the time of approval on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.086 2010-09-30
ER [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Reference energy (ER) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Reference energy" (ER) means the potential energy of the vehicle type to be approved, measured in relation to the horizontal lower level of the ditch, at the starting, unstable position of the rollover process.		 No.066 2007-12-06
ER [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 ER (Reference energy) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Reference energy" (ER) means the potential energy of the vehicle type to be approved, measured in relation to the horizontal lower level of the ditch, at the starting, unstable position of the rollover process.		 No.066 2011-03-30
ESA [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2012-09-20
ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly ) [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.10. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intendedto be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one ormore specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer as either a ‘component’ ora ‘separate technical unit (STU)' (see Article 4(1)(c) of Directive 2003/37/EC).		 Directive 2009/064/EC
ESA [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
ESA type [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 ESA type suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.12. An "ESA type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means ESAs which do not differ in such essentialrespects as:
2.1.12.1. the function performed by the ESA;
2.1.12.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components, if applicable.		 Directive 2009/064/EC
ESA type [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 ESA type Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. An "ESA type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means ESAs, which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. The function performed by the ESA;
2.10.2. The general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components, if applicable.		 No.010 2012-09-20
ESA type [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 ESA type Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. An "ESA type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means ESAs, which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the function performed by the ESA;
2.10.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components, if applicable.		 No.010 2010-05-08
ESC [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 ESC Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
ESC European steady state cycle		 No.049 2010-08-31
ESC System [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or "ESC System" means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side- slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
ESC System [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or ‘ESC System’ means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side-slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
ESC test [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 ESC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "ESC test" means a test cycle consisting of 13 steady state modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2008-04-12
ESC test [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 ESC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "ESC test" means a test cycle consisting of 13 steady state modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Escape hatch [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Escape hatch Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Escape hatch" means an opening in the roof or the floor intended for use as an emergency exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Escape hatch [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Escape hatch Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Escape hatch" means an opening in the roof or the floor intended for use as an emergency exit by passengers in an emergency only;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Escape hatch [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Escape hatch Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Escape hatch" means an opening in the roof or the floor intended for use as an emergency exit by passengers in an emergency only;		 No.107 2010-09-29
etalon filament lamp (standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
etalon LED light source (standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) LED light source(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
etalon LED light source (Standard) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Standard (étalon) LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. Standard (étalon) LED light source: Special LED light source used for the testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. It has reduced tolerances for dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet. Standard LED light sources are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.128 2014-05-29
ETC [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 ETC Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
ETC European transient cycle		 No.049 2010-08-31
ETC test [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 ETC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "ETC test" means a test cycle consisting of 1 800 second-by-second transient modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2008-04-12
ETC test [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 ETC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "ETC test" means a test cycle consisting of 1 800 second-by-second transient modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2010-08-31
ethanol vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85);		 No.083 2012-02-15
ethanol vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85).		 No.083 2015-07-03
European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
Evaporative emission [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Evaporative emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Evaporative emissions" means the hydrocarbon vapours lost from the fuel system of a motor vehicle other than those from exhaust emissions;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Evaporative emission [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Evaporative emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Evaporative emissions" means the hydrocarbon vapours lost from the fuel system of a motor vehicle other than those from exhaust emissions.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Evaporative emissions [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Evaporative emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.7. "Evaporative emissions" means the hydrocarbon vapours lost from the fuel system of a motor vehicle other than those from exhaust emissions; No.083 2008-05-06
even number of lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 even number of lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. Two lamps or an even number of lamps
"Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual light-emitting surfaces.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Excess flow valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Excess flow valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Excess flow valve [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 Excess flow valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.21. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device that automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas or liquid flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
excess flow valve (Remotely controlled service valve with) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Excess flow valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Excess flow valve (excess flow limiting device) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.10. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device which automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2011-05-07
exchanger (Heat) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Heat exchanger/Vaporiser using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.41. "Heat exchanger/Vaporiser" means a device used to change the state of LNG into CNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Exhaust after treatment system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Exhaust after-treatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation, 3-way or any other), particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter, or any other emission reducing device, that is installed downstream of the engine;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Exhaust after treatment system [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust after-treatment system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.33. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst, particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) and turbochargers, which are considered an integral part of the engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
exhaust aftertreatment system [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
exhaust aftertreatment system [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Exhaust emission [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Exhaust emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- For positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants,
- For compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particle numbers;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Exhaust emission [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Exhaust emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
(a) For Positive ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants;
(b) For Compression-Ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particulate numbers.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Exhaust emissions [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Exhaust emissions Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- for positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants;
- for compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants;		 No.083 2008-05-06
Exhaust gas recirculation [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust-gas recirculation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.34. "Exhaust-gas recirculation" means a technology that reduces emissions by routing exhaust gases that have been exhausted from the combustion chamber(s) back into the engine to be mixed with incoming air before or during combustion. The use of valve timing to increase the amount of residual exhaust gas in the combustion chamber(s) that is mixed with incoming air before or during combustion is not considered exhaust-gas recirculation for the purposes of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Exhaust system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.3. "Exhaust or silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motor cycle engine and its exhaust.
2.3.1. "Original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval. It may also be the vehicle manufacturer’s replacement part.
2.3.2. "Non-original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval.		 No.041 2012-11-14
exhaust system (Component of an) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Component of an exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.5. "Component of an exhaust or silencing system" means one of the individual components which together form the exhaust system (such as exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system (air filter) if any.
If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or absorber shall be treated as components having the same importance as the exhaust system.		 No.041 2012-11-14
exhaust system (motor cycle as regards its, Type of) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.2. "Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system" means motor cycles which do not differ in such essential respects as the following:
2.2.1. The type of engine (two-stroke or four-stroke, reciprocating piston engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection systems, arrangement of valves, rated maximum net power and corresponding engine speed). For rotary-piston engines the cubic capacity should be taken to be double of the volume of the chamber;
2.2.2. Transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of the gears;
2.2.3. Number, type and arrangement of exhaust or silencing systems.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Exhaust system of differing type [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Exhaust or silencing systems of differing types noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.4. "Exhaust or silencing systems of differing types" means systems which are fundamentally different in one of the following ways:
2.4.1. Systems comprising components bearing different factory or trade marks;
2.4.2. Systems comprising any component made of materials of different characteristics or comprising components which are of a different shape or size;
2.4.3. Systems in which the operating principles of at least one component are different;
2.4.4. Systems comprising components in different combinations.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Exit [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Exit" means a service door, intercommunication staircase, half-staircase or emergency exit.		 No.107 2015-06-18
exit (Emergency) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Emergency exit" means an emergency door, emergency window or escape hatch.		 No.107 2015-06-18
exit (Emergency) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Emergency exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Emergency exit" means an emergency door, emergency window or escape hatch.		 No.107 2006-12-27
exit (Emergency) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Emergency exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Emergency exit" means an emergency door, emergency window or escape hatch.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Exit [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Exit" means a service door, intercommunication staircase, half-staircase or emergency exit;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Exit [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Exit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Exit" means a service door, intercommunication staircase, half-staircase or emergency exit;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Explosion [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Explosion Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Explosion" means the sudden release of energy sufficient to cause pressure waves and/or projectiles that may cause structural and/or physical damage to the surrounding of the tested-device.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Exposed conductive part [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Exposed conductive part protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.012 2013-03-27
Exposed conductive part [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Exposed conductive part [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Exposed conductive part [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2.19. "Exposed conductive part" means any conductive part which can readily be touched and which is not normally alive, but which may become electrically energised under fault conditions. No.100 2009-02-14
Exposed conductive part [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB, and which becomes electrically energized under isolation failure conditions.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Exposed conductive part [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB, and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Exposed face [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Exposed face burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.4. "Exposed face" means the side of a material which is facing towards the passenger compartment, the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment when the material is mounted in the vehicle.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Exposed face [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Exposed face Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.4. "Exposed face" means the side of a material which is facing towards the passenger compartment whenthe material is mounted in the vehicle		 No.118 2010-07-10
Extended mobility system [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Extended mobility system Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.34. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode. No.030 2008-07-30
Extended mobility system [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Extended mobility system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Extended seat-adjustment range [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Extended seat-adjustment range Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Extended seat-adjustment range" means the range designated by the vehicle manufacturer for the adjustment of the seat in the direction of the X axis (see paragraph 2.3 above) beyond the range of normal driving positions specified in paragraph 2.16 and used for converting seats into beds or facilitating entry to the vehicle.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Extension of approval [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Extension of approval Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extension of approval" means the official process in which a modified vehicle type is approved on the basis of an earlier approved vehicle type, by comparison of structure, potential energy and residual space criteria.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Extension of approval [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Extension of approval Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Extension of approval" means the official process in which a modified vehicle type is approved on the basis of an earlier approved vehicle type, by comparison of structure, potential energy and residual space criteria.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Exterior Courtesy lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Exterior Courtesy lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.29. "Exterior Courtesy lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to assist the entry and exit of the vehicle driver and passenger or in loading operations;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Exterior light-emitting surfaces [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Exterior light-emitting surfaces installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6.4. Exterior light-emitting surfaces
"Exterior light-emitting surfaces", for a defined direction of observation, means the orthogonal projection of the surface of light emission in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation (see drawing in
Appendix 1). 		Directive 2009/061/EC
Exterior mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.2. "Exterior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, which can be mounted on the external surface of a vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
exterior mirror (proximity, Close) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Close-proximity exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
exterior mirror (Wide angle) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Wide-angle exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(c) Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.4 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
Exterior mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Exterior mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.2. "Exterior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, which can be mounted on the external surface of a vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
exterior rear view mirror (Main) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Main exterior rear-view mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(b) Classes II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in para graphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
Exterior rear-view mirror [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Exterior rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) 1.3. "Exterior rear-view mirror" means a device as defined in point 1.1 which is mounted on any part of the external surface of a tractor Directive 2009/059/EC
External electric power supply [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2011-02-14
External electric power supply [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
External surface [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 External surface External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "External surface" means the outside of the vehicle including the bonnet, the lid of the luggage compartment, the doors, the wings, the roof, the lighting and light-signalling devices and the visible strengthening components.		 No.026 2005-12-16
External surface [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 External surface external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "External surface" means the outside of the vehicle including the bonnet, the lid of the luggage compartment, the doors, the wings, the roof, the lighting and light-signalling devices and the visible strengthening components.		 No.026 2010-08-14
External surface [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 External surface external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "External surface" means that part of the vehicle forward of the cab rear panel as defined in paragraph 2.5 below, with the exception of the rear panel itself, and includes such items as the front wings, front bumpers and front wheels;		 No.061 2010-06-30
Extra Load [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Extra Load Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.4. "Reinforced" or "Extra Load" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre; No.030 2008-07-30
extra load tyre (reinforced tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 reinforced tyre (extra load tyre) safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 10. "reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" means a C1 pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is designed to carry a greater load than the corresponding standard tyre; REG. No 661/2009
extra load tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" of Class C1 means a pneumatic-tyre structure designed to carry more load at a higher inflation pressure than the load carried by the corresponding standard version tyre at the standard inflation pressure as specified in ISO 4000-1:2010.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Extreme outer edge [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Extreme outer edge installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.10. Extreme outer edge
"Extreme outer edge" on either side of the tractor means the plane parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and coinciding with its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
1.10.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground and connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
1.10.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
1.10.3. of rear-view mirrors;
1.10.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
1.10.5. of customs seals affixed to the tractor and devices for securing and protecting such seals.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
extreme outer edge [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 extreme outer edge installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
11. extreme outer edge
on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and coinciding with its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection(s) of:
11.1. the rear-view mirrors;
11.2. the direction indicator lamps;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Extreme outer edge [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.14. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the vehicle, means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.14.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and of connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.14.2. of any anti-skid devices mounted on the wheels;
2.14.3. of devices for indirect vision;
2.14.4. of side direction-indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position lamps, parking lamps, retro-reflectors and side-marker lamps.
2.14.5. of customs seals affixed to the vehicle, and of devices for securing and protecting such seals.
2.14.6. of service-door lighting systems on vehicles of categories M2 and M3 as specified in paragraph 2.7.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Extreme outer edge [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Extreme outer edge", on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching the lateral extremity of the vehicle, disregarding the projection or projections:
2.12.1. of rear-view mirrors,
2.12.2. of direction-indicator lamps,
2.12.3. of front and rear position lamps and retro-reflectors;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Extreme outer edge [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Extreme outer edge", on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and tangent to the latter’s lateral outer edge, disregarding rear-view mirrors, direction indicators, position lamps and retro-reflectors;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Extreme outer edge [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Extreme outer edge External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extreme outer edge" of the vehicle means, in relation to the sides of the vehicle, the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer lateral edge, and, in relation to the front and rear ends, the perpendicular transverse plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer front and rear edges, account not being taken of the projection
2.7.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and connections for tyre pressure gauges
2.7.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.7.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.7.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
2.7.5. in relation to the front and rear ends, of parts mounted on the bumpers, of towing devices and of exhaust pipes.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Extreme outer edge [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Extreme outer edge external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extreme outer edge" of the vehicle means, in relation to the sides of the vehicle, the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer lateral edge, and, in relation to the front and rear ends, the perpendicular transverse plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer front and rear edges, account not being taken of the projection:
2.7.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and connections for tyre pressure gauges;
2.7.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.7.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.7.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
2.7.5. in relation to the front and rear ends, of parts mounted on the bumpers, of towing devices and of exhaust pipes.		 No.026 2010-08-14
Extreme outer edge [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the vehicle, means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.14.1. Of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and of connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.14.2. Of any anti-skid devices mounted on the wheels;
2.14.3. Of devices for indirect vision;
2.14.4. Of side direction-indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position lamps, parking lamps, retro-reflectors and side-marker lamps.
2.14.5. Of customs seals affixed to the vehicle, and of devices for securing and protecting such seals.
2.14.6. Of service-door lighting systems on vehicles of categories M 2 and M 3 as specified in paragraph 2.7;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Extreme outer edge [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the tractor means the plane parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and coinciding with its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.11.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground and connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.11.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.11.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.11.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps, parking lamps and lateral reflex reflectors;
2.11.5. of customs seals affixed to the tractor and devices for securing and protecting such seals.		 No.086 2010-09-30
extrusion (Direct) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Direct extrusion 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
f (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 f : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
F3 (class, Front fog lamp) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 classes "B" or "F3" (Front fog lamp) Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),		 No.019 2014-08-22
Fa (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
face (barrier, Deformable) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;		 No.094 2012-09-20
face (barrier, Deformable) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;		 No.094 2010-05-28
face (Exposed) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Exposed face burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.4. "Exposed face" means the side of a material which is facing towards the passenger compartment, the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment when the material is mounted in the vehicle.		 No.108 2015-04-21
face (Exposed) [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Exposed face Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.4. "Exposed face" means the side of a material which is facing towards the passenger compartment whenthe material is mounted in the vehicle		 No.118 2010-07-10
facing (Forward-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Forward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Forward-facing" means facing in the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2007-11-23
facing (Forward-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Forward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Forward-facing" means facing in the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2011-09-09
facing (Rearward) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Rearward-facing Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
facing (Rearward) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Rearward-facing Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.094 2012-09-20
facing (Rearward-) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Rearward-facing Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle		 No.016 2007-11-30
facing (Rearward-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Rearward-facing Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.016 2011-09-09
facing (Rearward-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Rearward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2007-11-23
facing (Rearward-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Rearward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2011-09-09
facing (Rearward-) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Rearward-facing Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.094 2010-05-28
facing seat (Forward) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Forward-facing seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.2. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
facing seat (Forward) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Forward-facing seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.2. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than +10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
facing seat (Rearward) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Rearward-facing seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.3. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
facing seat (Rearward) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Rearward-facing seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.3. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than +10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.18.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
facing seat (Side) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Side-facing seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
facing seat (Side) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Side-facing seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
factor (Adjustment) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Adjustment factors Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.1. "Adjustment factors" mean additive (upward adjustment factor and downward adjustment factor) or multiplicative factors to be considered during the periodic (infrequent) regeneration;		 No.096 2014-03-22
factor (stability, Static) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Static stability factor Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Static stability factor" means one-half the track width of a vehicle divided by the height of its centre of gravity, also expressed as SSF = T/2H, where: T = track width (for vehicles with more than one track width the average is used; for axles with dual wheels, the outer wheels are used when calculating ‘T’) and H = height of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
failure (functional, major) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 major functional failure Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "major functional failure" means a permanent or temporary malfunction of any exhaust aftertreatment system that is expected to result in an immediate or delayed increase of the gaseous or particulate emissions of the engine system and which cannot be properly estimated by the OBD system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
failure (functional, major) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 major functional failure Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "major functional failure" (*) means a permanent or temporary malfunction of any exhaust aftertreatment system that is expected to result in an immediate or delayed increase of the gaseous or particulate emissions of the engine system and which cannot be properly estimated by the OBD system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
family [No.083 2012-02-15A12] 　 family Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 12] GRANTING OF AN ECE TYPE APPROVAL FOR A VEHICLE FUELLED BY LPG OR NG/BIOMETHANE 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. A "family" means a group of vehicle types fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane identified by a parent vehicle.
A "parent vehicle" means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle on which the self-adaptability of a fuelling system is going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer. It is possible to have more than one parent vehicle in a family.		 No.083 2012-02-15
family (Engine) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines which, through their design, fulfil the grouping criteria laid down in Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
family (Engine) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Engine family" means a manufacturer’s grouping of engines which, through their design, fulfil the grouping criteria laid down in Annex 5 to this Regulation;
(1. PARAMETERS DEFINING THE ENGINE FAMILY
The engine family may be defined by basic design parameters which must be common to engines within the family. In some cases there may be interaction of parameters. These effect must also be taken into consideration to ensure that only engines with similar exhaust emission characteristics are included within an engine family.)		 No.120 2010-09-30
family (engine, Approval of an) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
family (engine, Approval of an) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2010-09-30
family (engine, OBD-) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 OBD-engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD-engine family" means, for approval of the OBD system according to the requirements of Annex 9A to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common OBD system design parameters according to paragraph 7.3. of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
family (member of the) [No.083 2012-02-15A12] 　 member of the family Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 12] GRANTING OF AN ECE TYPE APPROVAL FOR A VEHICLE FUELLED BY LPG OR NG/BIOMETHANE 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Member of the family
2.2.1. A "member of the family" is a vehicle that shares the following essential characteristics with its parent(s):
(a) It is produced by the same manufacturer.
(b) It is subject to the same emission limits.
(c) If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine:
It has a certified power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the parent vehicle.
If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder:
It has a certified power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the parent vehicle.
(d) If fitted with a catalyst, it has the same type of catalyst, i.e. three way, oxidation, de-NO x .
(e) It has a gas fuelling system (including the pressure regulator) from the same system manufacturer and of the same type: induction, vapour injection (single point, multipoint), liquid injection (single point, multipoint).
(f) This gas fuelling system is controlled by an ECU of the same type and technical specification, containing the same software principles and control strategy. The vehicle may have a second ECU compared to the parent vehicle, provided that the ECU is only used to control the injectors, additional shut-off valves and the data acquisition from additional sensors.		 No.083 2012-02-15
family (member of the) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 a member of the family LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. For the purposes of this Regulation, "the parent vehicle", with regard both to LPG system and to CNG system, means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle, on which the requirements of this Regulation are going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer.
2.5.1. According to this Regulation, "a member of the family" is a vehicle sharing the following essential characteristics with its parent vehicle:
The family definition is based on the original vehicle characteristics.
2.5.1.1.
(a) It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer.
(b) It is classified in the same category M 1 or M 2 or M 3 or N 1 or N 2 or N 3 . Vehicles of category M 1 and N 1 class I may belong to the same family.
(c) It is subject to the same emission limits or those specified in earlier series of amendments of the applicable Regulation.
(d) If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine: it has an approved power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle. If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder: it has an approved power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle.
(e) Fuel feed and combustion process (injection: direct or indirect, single-point or multi-point).
(f) It has the same pollution control system:
(i) Same type of catalyst if fitted (three-way, oxidation, DeNO x )
(ii) Air injection (with or without)
(iii) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) (with or without)
If the tested vehicle was not equipped with air-injection or EGR, engines with these devices are allowed.
2.5.1.2. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(a), the vehicle family can also cover vehicles produced by other vehicle manufacturers if it can be demonstrated to the Type-Approval Authority that the same engine type and emission strategy is used.
2.5.1.3. With regard to requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(d):
(a) In the case of a central metering for the whole vehicle where a demonstration shows that two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2;
(b) In the case of an individual metering per cylinder where a demonstration shows two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2.
2.5.1.4. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(f) in case of a "master-slave" system, as defined in paragraph 2.1.6, the family relation will be considered valid regardless of the presence of the air injection or the EGR.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Family of vehicle [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Family of vehicles Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.17. "Family of vehicles" means a group of vehicle types identified by a parent vehicle for the purpose of Annex 12; No.083 2008-05-06
Family of vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Family of vehicles Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Family of vehicles" means a group of vehicle types identified by a parent vehicle for the purpose of Annex 12;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Family of vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Family of vehicles Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Family of vehicles" means a group of vehicle types identified by a parent vehicle for the purpose of Annex 12 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Family of vehicle type [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Family of vehicle types Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Family of vehicle types" means those vehicle types, proposed in future as well as existing now, which are covered by the approval of the worst case, in respect of this Regulation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
fastened (belt is not, Safety) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety-belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.		 No.016 2015-11-20
fastened (Safety-belt is not) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety- belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Fh (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Fh : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
FID [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 FID Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
FID Flame ionisation detector		 No.049 2010-08-31
Fiducial marks [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Fiducial marks Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Fiducial marks [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Fiducial marks Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
Fiducial marks [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Fiducial marks Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Fiducial marks [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Fiducial marks head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Fiducial marks [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Fiducial marks protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Fiducial marks [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Fiducial marks Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by themanufacturer;		 No.046 2010-07-10
Fiducial marks [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Fiducial marks Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Field of vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Field of vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.8."Field of vision" means the section of the tri-dimensional space which is monitored with the help of a device for indirect vision. Unless otherwise stated, this is based on the view on ground level offered by a device and/or devices other than mirrors. This may be limited by the relevant detec tion distance corresponding to the critical object.		 No.046 2014-08-08
field of vision (Vehicle type with regard to the) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. the external and internal forms and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1 which may affect visibility; and
2.2.2. the shape and dimensions of the windscreen and its mounting;		 No.125 2010-07-31
Field of vision [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Field of vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.8. "Field of vision" means the section of the tri-dimensional space which is monitored with the helpof a device for indirect vision. Unless otherwise stated, this is based on the view on ground leveloffered by a device and/or devices other than mirrors. This may be limited by the relevant detection distance corresponding to the critical object..		 No.046 2010-07-10
Field of vision [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Field of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Field of vision" means the aggregate of forward and side directions in which the tractor driver can see;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Field of vision [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Field of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Field of vision" means the aggregate of forward and side directions in which the tractor driver can see.		 No.071 2010-07-31
filament lamp [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 filament lamp, LED light source Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.006 2014-07-18
filament lamp (etalon, standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
filament lamp (Standard (étalon)) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Standard (étalon) filament lamp Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "Standard (étalon) filament lamp": a filament lamp emitting white or amber or red light with reduced dimensional tolerances, used for the photometric testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. Standard filament lamps are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Filament light source [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Filament light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.4. "Filament light source" (filament lamp) means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more heated filaments producing thermal radiation; No.048 2008-05-23
Filament light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Filament light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.4. "Filament light source" (filament lamp) means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more heated filaments producing thermal radiation;		 No.048 2011-12-06
fill ratio (Void to) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Void to fill ratio Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Void to fill ratio" means the ratio between the area of voids in a reference surface and the area of this reference surface calculated from the mould drawing.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Filling pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Filling pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.55. "Filling pressure" means the gas pressure in the cylinder immediately upon completion of filling.		 No.110 2015-06-30
filling pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 filling pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.10. filling pressure: The gas pressure in the cylinder immediately upon completion of filling.		 No.110 2008-03-14
filling receptacle (LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG filling receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.74. "LNG filling receptacle" means device connected to a vehicle or storage system which receives the LNG fuelling nozzle and permits safe transfer of fuel. The receptacle consists as minimum from a receptacle body and from a check valve mounted inside the body.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Filling unit [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Filling unit or receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.37. "Filling unit or receptacle" means a device fitted in the vehicle used to fill the container or tank in the filling station.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Filling unit [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Filling unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.16. "Filling unit" means a device to allow filling of the container; the filling unit can be re alised by integrationin the 80 per cent stop valve of the container or by a remote filling unit at the outside of the vehicle;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Filling unit [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Filling unit or receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.23. "Filling unit or receptacle" means a device fitted in the vehicle external or internal (engine compartment) used to fill the container in the filling station.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Filter [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Filter using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.25. "Filter" means a protective screen that removes foreign debris from the gas or liquid stream.		 No.110 2015-06-30
filter (HEPA) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 HEPA filter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.38. "HEPA filter" means high-efficiency particulate air filters that are rated to achieve a minimum initial particle-removal efficiency of 99.97 per cent using ASTM F 1471–93 or equivalent standard;		 No.096 2014-03-22
filter (particulate, deNOx-, combined) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2008-04-12
filter (particulate, deNOx-, combined) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Filter (Particulate, Diesel, Wall flow) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.65. "Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter" means a Diesel Particulate Filter ("DPF") in which all the exhaust gas is forced to flow through a wall which filters out the solid matter;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Filter [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Filter using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.14. "Filter" means a protective screen which removes foreign debris from the gas stream.		 No.110 2011-05-07
filter unit (LPG) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 LPG filter unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.14. "LPG filter unit" means a device which filters the LPG, the filter can be integrated in other components;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Finished cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Finished cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.56. "Finished cylinders" means completed cylinders that are ready for use, typical of normal production, complete with identification marks and external coating including integral insulation specified by the manufacturer, but free from non-integral insulation or protection.		 No.110 2015-06-30
finished cylinders [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 finished cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.11. finished cylinders: Completed cylinders which are ready for use, typical of normal production, complete with identification marks and external coating including integral insulation specified by the manufacturer, but free from nonintegral insulation or protection.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Fire [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Fire Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Fire" means the emission of flames from a tested-device. Sparks and arcing shall not be considered as flames.		 No.100 2015-03-31
First axis [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First axis (symbol 1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.9. "First axis (symbol 1)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane;		 No.104 2014-03-14
First axis [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 First axis Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.8. "First axis", an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane.		 No.069 2010-07-31
First component of the entrance angle [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180° ＜ β1 ＜ 180°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
First component of the entrance angle (β1) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.9. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1)", the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis. Range: – 180° < β 1 ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
First level warning [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 First level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "First level warning" means a visual warning activated when the ignition switch is engaged (engine running or not) and the driver's safety-belt is not fastened. An audible warning can be added as an option.		 No.016 2015-11-20
First level warning [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 First level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "First level warning" means a visual warning activated when the ignition switch is engaged (engine running or not) and the driver’s safety-belt is not fastened. An audible warning can be added as an option.		 No.016 2011-09-09
fitment configuration (Tyre to rim) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tyre to rim fitment configuration Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Rim" means the support for a tyre-and-tube assembly, or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.
2.18.1. "Tyre to rim fitment configuration" means the type of rim to which the tyre is designed to be fitted. In the case of non-standard rims this will be identified by a symbol applied to the tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
fitted (normally, tyre) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tyres normally fitted speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tyres normally fitted" means the type or types of tyre provided by the manufacturer on the vehicle type in question; snow tyres shall not be regarded as tyres normally fitted.		 No.039 2010-05-13
Fitting [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Fitting using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.26. "Fitting" means a connector used in a piping, tubing, or hose system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
fitting (Attachment) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Attachment fittings strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Attachment fittings" means bolts or other components used to attach the seat to the vehicle;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Fitting [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Fitting using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.15. "Fitting" means a connector used in a piping, tubing, or hose system.		 No.110 2011-05-07
fittings (Attachment) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Attachment fittings Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Attachment fittings" means bolts or other components used to attach the seat to the vehicle;		 No.080 2010-06-30
fixture (marking, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "ISOFIX marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an ISOFIX child restraint system of the ISOFIX positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
fixture (restraint, Child) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Fixture (Seat, Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 VSF (Vehicle Seat Fixture) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Vehicle Seat Fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes whose dimensions are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Appendix 2 to Annex 17 to Regulation No. 16, used by a Child Restraint System manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.129 2014-03-29
fixture (seat, Vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in figures 1 to 6 of annex 17 appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an Isofix child restraint system and the location of its Isofix attachments.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Flammable electrolyte [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Flammable electrolyte Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Flammable electrolyte" means an electrolyte that contains substances classified as Class 3 "flammable liquid" under "UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods — Model Regulations (Revision 17 from June 2011), Volume I, Chapter 2.3".		 No.100 2015-03-31
Flat pane [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Flat pane safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pane" means any single piece of glazing other than a windscreen;
2.17.1. "Curved pane" means a pane with a height of segment "h" greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.17.2. "Flat pane" means a pane with a height of segment equal to or less than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Flat tyre running mode [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Flat tyre running mode Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.32. "Flat tyre running mode" describes the state of the tyre, essentially maintaining its structural integrity, while operating at an inflation pressure between 0 and 70 kPa. No.030 2008-07-30
Flat tyre running mode [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Flat tyre running mode Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Flat tyre running mode" describes the state of tyre, essentially maintaining its structural integrity, while operating at an inflation pressure between 0 and 70 kPa.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Flat windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Flat windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests.
2.16.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.16.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Flat windscreen [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Flat windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests;
2.13.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre;
2.13.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
flex fuel biodiesel vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 flex fuel biodiesel vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 15. "flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel; REG. No 692/2008
Flex fuel ethanol vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85);		 No.083 2012-02-15
Flex fuel ethanol vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85).		 No.083 2015-07-03
flex fuel ethanol vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 flex fuel ethanol vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 14. "flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 % ethanol blend (E85); REG. No 692/2008
Flex fuel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Flex fuel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels.		 No.083 2015-07-03
flex fuel vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 flex fuel vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 13. "flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels; REG. No 692/2008
Flexible fuel line [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Flexible fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.28. "Flexible fuel lines" means flexible tubing or hose through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Flexible fuel lines [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Flexible fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.16. Fuel lines
2.16.1. "Flexible fuel lines" means a flexible tubing or hose through which natural gas flow.
2.16.2. "Rigid fuel lines" means tubing which has not been designed to flex in normal operation and through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Flexible hoses [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Flexible hoses LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.15. "Flexible hoses" means hoses for conveying liquefied petroleum gas in either a liquid or vapour state at various pressures from one point to another;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Flexible plastic glazing [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Flexible plastic glazing safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture of processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow.
2.6.1. "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).
2.6.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2014-02-12
Flexible plastic glazing [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Flexible plastic glazing Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture or processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow;
2.5.1 "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12);
2.5.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2010-08-31
Flexion Tyre (Improved) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Improved Flexion Tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.
2.20.1. "Improved Flexion Tyre" or "Very High Flexion Tyre" describe a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Floor [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Floor safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Floor" means the lower part of the vehicle body-work connecting the vehicle side walls. In this context it includes ribs, swages and possibly other reinforcements, even if they are below the floor, such as longitudinal and transverse members;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Floor [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Floor or deck Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Floor or deck":
2.14.1. "Floor" means that part of the bodywork whose upper surface supports standing passengers, the feet of seated passengers and the driver and any crew member, and may support the seat mountings;
2.14.2. "Deck" means that part of the floor provided only for the passengers.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Floor [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Floor Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Floor" means the lower part of the vehicle body-work connecting the vehicle side walls. In this context it includes ribs, swages and possibly other reinforcements, even if they are below the floor, such as longitudinal and transverse members;		 No.014 2007-12-06
floor [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 floor safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "floor" means the lower part of the vehicle body-work connecting the vehicle side walls. In this context it includes ribs, swages and possibly other reinforcements, even if they are below the floor, such as longitudinal and transverse members;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Floor [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Floor or deck Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Floor or deck" means that part of the bodywork whose upper surface supports standing passengers, the feet of seated passengers and the driver and any crew member, and may support the seat mountings;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Floor [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Floor or deck Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Floor or deck" means that part of the bodywork whose upper surface supports standing passengers, the feet of seated passengers and the driver and any crew member, and may support the seat mountings;		 No.107 2010-09-29
floor contact surface (Vehicle) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Vehicle floor contact surface safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle floor contact surface" means the area which results from the intersection of the upper surface of the vehicle floor (incl. trim, carpet, foam, etc.) with the support leg foot assessment volume and is designed to withstand the support leg forces of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Floor line [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Floor line External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Floor line" means the line determined as follows: Successively position round a laden vehicle a cone with a vertical axis the height of which is not defined, and with a half angle of 30° in such a way that it contacts, constantly and as low as possible, the external surface of the vehicle. The floor line is the geometric trace of these points of contact. In determining the floor line, the jacking points, exhaust pipes or wheels shall not be taken into consideration. The gaps of the wheel arches are assumed to be filled in by an imaginary surface forming a smooth continuation of the surrounding external surface. At both ends of the vehicle the bumper shall be taken into consideration when establishing the floor line. Dependent upon the particular vehicle the floor line trace may occur at the bumper section extremity or at the body panel below the bumper. Where two or more points of contact occur simultaneously, the lower point of contact shall be used to determine the floor line		 No.026 2005-12-16
Floor line [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Floor line external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Floor line" means the line determined as follows:
Successively position round a laden vehicle a cone with a vertical axis the height of which is not defined, and with a half angle of 30° in such a way that it contacts, constantly and as low as possible, the external surface of the vehicle. The floor line is the geometric trace of these points of contact. In determining the floor line, the jacking points, exhaust pipes or wheels shall not be taken into consideration. The gaps of the wheel arches are assumed to be filled in by an imaginary surface forming a smooth continuation of the surrounding external surface. At both ends of the vehicle the bumper shall be taken into consideration when establishing the floor line. Dependent upon the particular vehicle the floor line trace may occur at the bumper section extremity or at the body panel below the bumper. Where two or more points of contact occur simultaneously, the lower point of contact shall be used to determine the floor line.		 No.026 2010-08-14
Floor line [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Floor line external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Floor line" means a line determined as follows:
When a vertical-axis cone of undetermined height having its side at an angle of 15° to the vertical is moved about the external surface of the loaded vehicle so as to remain in contact with the external surface of the body at its lowest point, the floor line is the geometrical trace of the points of contact.
In determining the floor line, no account shall be taken of the exhaust pipes or wheels, or of functional mechanical features attached to the under-body such as jacking points, suspension mountings or attachments for use in towing or in case of breakdown. In the spaces at the outside of wheel arches an imaginary surface extending the adjacent external surfaces without change of position shall be assumed. The front bumpers shall be taken into account in determining the floor line. Depending on the type of vehicle, the trace of the floor line may be at either the outer edge of the bumper profile or at the body panel below the bumper. Where there are two or more points of contact at the same time, the lowest point of contact shall be used to determine the floor line,		 No.061 2010-06-30
floor vehicle (Low) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Low floor vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.4. "Low floor vehicle" is a vehicle of Class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2015-06-18
floor vehicle (Low) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Low floor vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Low floor vehicle" is a vehicle of Class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2010-09-29
flow adjuster (Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.33. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.		 No.110 2015-06-30
flow adjuster (Gas) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.18. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.		 No.110 2011-05-07
flow dilution method (Full) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Full flow dilution method Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total exhaust flow with diluent prior to separating a fraction of the diluted exhaust stream for analysis.		 No.049 2013-06-24
flow dilution method (Full) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Full flow dilution method Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.35. "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total exhaust flow with dilution air prior to separating a fraction of the diluted exhaust stream for analysis;		 No.096 2014-03-22
flow dilution method (Partial) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Partial flow dilution method Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.11. "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount of diluent prior to the particulate sampling filter.		 No.049 2013-06-24
flow dilution method (Partial) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Partial flow dilution method Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.60. "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount of dilution air prior to the particulate sampling filter;		 No.096 2014-03-22
flow valve (Excess) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Excess flow valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
flow valve (Excess) [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 Excess flow valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.21. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device that automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas or liquid flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
flow valve (excess, Remotely controlled service valve with) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Fluorescence [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Fluorescence Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Fluorescence
2.5.1. When certain substances are brought near to a source of ultraviolet or blue radiations, they emit radiations which are nearly always of longer wavelength than those producing the effect. This phenomenon is called fluorescence. By day and in twilight, fluorescent colours are brighter than normal colours because they reflect part of the light falling upon them and in addition they emit light. At night, they are not brighter than ordinary coloursEN
2.5.2. "Colour of the fluorescent light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the fluorescent light are given in paragraph 2.32 of Regulation No 48.		 No.069 2010-07-31
fluorescent (Daytime colour of the) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime colour of the fluorescent Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. Daytime colour of the fluorescent a device
2.32.1. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] FR12,FR23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
flux (luminous, Cumulative) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Cumulative luminous flux Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. Cumulative luminous flux: luminous flux emitted by the light source under operating conditions, within a cone enclosing the specified solid angle and centred on the reference axis.		 No.128 2014-05-29
flux (luminous, Measuring) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Measuring luminous flux Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Measuring luminous flux": specified value of the luminous flux for testing a filament lamp in a standard headlamp as specified in paragraph 3.9.		 No.037 2010-11-13
flux (luminous, Objective) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Objective luminous flux Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.27. "Objective luminous flux" means a design value of the luminous flux of a replaceable light source or light source module. It shall be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the replaceable light source or light source module is energised by the power supply at the specified test voltage, as indicated in the data sheet of the light source or the technical specification as submitted with the light source module;		 No.048 2011-12-06
flux (luminous, Reference) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference luminous flux Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Reference luminous flux": specified luminous flux of a standard filament lamp to which the optical characteristics of a lighting device shall be referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
fog lamp (Front) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.15. "Front fog lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;		 No.053 2013-06-18
fog lamp (Front) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.19. "Front fog lamp" means a lamp used to improve the illumination of the road ahead of the vehicle in case of fog or any similar condition of reduced visibility;		 No.048 2011-12-06
fog lamp (Rear) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.16. "Rear fog lamp" means the lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.053 2013-06-18
fog lamp (Rear) [No.038 2010-06-12] 　 Rear fog lamp rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear by giving a red signal of greater intensity than the rear position (side) lamps		 No.038 2010-06-12
fog lamp (Rear) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.20. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.048 2011-12-06
fog lamp of different type (Front) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. The trade name or mark;
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. The inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. The category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code (s) (if applicable);
1.4.6. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2014-08-22
fog lamp of different type (Front) [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. the trade name or mark;
1.4.2. different "Classes" (B or F3) identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. the characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LEDmodule, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. the inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. the category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code(s) (if applicable).
1.4.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.4.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2010-07-10
fog lamp of different type (Rear) [No.038 2010-06-12] 　 Rear fog lamps of different types rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Rear fog lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.038 2010-06-12
fog light (rear) [No.038 2001-06-25] 　 rear fog light Rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "rear fog light" means a light used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear by giving a red signal of greater intensity than the rear position (side) lights;		 No.038 2001-06-25
fog lights of different type (rear) [No.038 2001-06-25] 　 rear fog lights of different types Rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. rear fog lights of different "types" are rear fog lights which differ in such essential respects as
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the category of lamp.		 No.038 2001-06-25
fog-lamp (Front) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Front fog-lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.10. "Front fog-lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;		 No.086 2010-09-30
fog-lamp (Rear) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear fog-lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.18. "Rear fog-lamp" means the lamp used to make the tractor more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.086 2010-09-30
folding (tip-up) seat [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 folding (tip-up) seat Interior fittings 2.9. "folding (tip-up) seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and which is normally folded out of the way. No.021 2008-07-16
Folding seat [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Folding seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use which is normally folded;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Folding seat [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Folding seat Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.9. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Folding seat [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Folding seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Folding seat [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Folding seat Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Folding seat [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Folding seat head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.025 2010-08-14
foot (Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg foot Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
foot assessment volume (leg, Support) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Support leg foot assessment volume safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Support leg foot assessment volume" means the volume, as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of Annex 10 to this Regulation, in which the support leg foot of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129 will rest and therefore the vehicle floor has to intersect;		 No.014 2015-08-19
foot contact surface (Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg foot contact surface Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Foot lever [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Foot lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Foot lever [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Foot lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
footprint [REG. No 443/2009] 　 footprint reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (e) "footprint" means the track width multiplied by the wheelbase as stated in the certificate of conformity and defined in sections 2.1 and 2.3 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 443/2009
Footrest [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Footrest Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Footrest" means the projections on either side of the vehicle on which the driver places his feet when seated in the driving position;		 No.060 2004-03-31
force (braking, Reference) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.		 No.013 2016-02-18
force application device (Static) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 SFAD (Static force application device) safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle ISOFIX anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture for lower anchorages and top tethers is described in the Figures 1 and 2, Annex 9, as well as an SFAD SL (Support Leg) to assess i-Size seating positions with regard to the vehicle floor strength. An example for such an SFAD SL is given in Figure 3 of Annex 10;		 No.014 2015-08-19
force application device (static) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 SFAD (static force application device) safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle Isofix anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture is described in the figures 1 and 2 of Annex 9.		 No.014 2011-04-28
force application device (Static, SFAD) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Static force application device (SFAD) Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle Isofix anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture is described in the figures 1 and 2 of Annex 9.		 No.014 2007-12-06
force control (Coupling) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.013 2016-02-18
force control (Coupling) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.013 2010-09-30
foremost [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 foremost Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Forestry tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Forestry tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. Forestry tyre: means a tyre designed to be fitted to machines or equipments used in forestry applications.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Fork-bolt [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fork-bolt door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Fork-bolt" is the part of the latch that engages and retains the striker when in a latched position.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Fork-bolt opening direction [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fork-bolt opening direction door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Fork-bolt opening direction" is the direction opposite to that in which the striker enters the latch to engage the fork-bolt.		 No.011 2010-05-13
forward (Handlebar) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: forward Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Handlebars: forward" means any part of the handlebars lying on the side furthest from the driver when seated in a driving position.		 No.060 2014-10-15
forward [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 forward Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Forward control [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Forward control devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.5."Forward control" means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rear ward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Forward control [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Forward control Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.5. "Forward control" means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub in the forwardquarter of the vehicle length.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Forward facing seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Forward-facing seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.2. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Forward facing seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Forward-facing seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.2. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than +10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Forward facing seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Forward-facing seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat" means a structure likely to be anchored to the vehicle structure, including its trim and attachment fittings, intended to be used in a vehicle, and to seat one or more adult persons. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.5.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.080 2013-08-24
forward field of vision (Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Forward-facing [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Forward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Forward-facing" means facing in the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Forward-facing [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Forward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Forward-facing" means facing in the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Forward-facing seat [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Forward-facing seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.3.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which, with regard to its alignment with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle, does not meet either of the definitions given in paragraph 2.3.1 or 2.3.2 above;		 No.017 2010-08-31
fraction (Penetration) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PF (Penetration fraction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.62. "Penetration fraction PF" means the deviation from ideal functioning of a non-methane cutter (see Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E). An ideal non-methane cutter would have a methane penetration fraction, PFCH4 , of 1,000 (that is, a methane conversion efficiency EC of 0), and the penetration fraction for all other hydrocarbons would be 0,000, as represented by PFC2H6 (that is, an ethane conversion efficiency EC2H6 of 1). The relationship is:
PF CH 4 = 1 - EC and PFC2H6 = 1 - EC2H6 ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Frame [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Frame" means any part of the frame, chassis or cradle of the vehicle, to which is attached the engine and/or transmission unit, and/or the engine and transmission unit itself.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Frame [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Frame Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Frame" means any part of the frame, chassis or cradle of the vehicle, to which is attached the engine and/or transmission unit, and/or the engine and transmission unit itself;
2.7.1. "Frame: right side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.7.2. "Frame: left side" means any part of the frame which, when facing in the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Frame left side [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame: left side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Frame: left side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle		 No.060 2014-10-15
Frame right side [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame: right side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Frame: right side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle		 No.060 2014-10-15
frettage (Auto) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Auto-frettage using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.47. "Auto-frettage" means a pressure application procedure used in manufacturing composite cylinders with metal liners, which strains the liner past its limit of elasticity, sufficiently to cause permanent plastic deformation which results in the liner having compressive stresses and the fibres having tensile stresses at zero internal pressure.		 No.110 2015-06-30
frettage (auto-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 auto-frettage Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.2. auto-frettage: A pressure application procedure used in manufacturing composite cylinders with metal liners, which strains the liner past its limit of elasticity, sufficiently to cause permanent plastic deformation which results in the liner having compressive stresses and the fibres having tensile stresses at zero internal pressure.		 No.110 2008-03-14
frettage pressure (Auto) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Auto-frettage pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.48. "Auto-frettage pressure" means the pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.		 No.110 2015-06-30
frettage pressure (auto-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 auto-frettage pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.3. auto-frettage pressure: The pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Friction brake [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Friction brake Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.2. "Friction brake" means the part of a braking system in which the forces opposing the movement of a vehicle are developed by friction between a brake lining and a wheel disc or drum moving relatively to each other.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Friction brake [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Friction brake Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Friction brake" means the part of a braking system in which the forces opposing the movement of a vehicle are developed by friction between a brake lining and a wheel disc or drum moving relatively to each other;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Friction material [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Friction material Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Friction material [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Friction material Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Front [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 "Front" and "rear" Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Front [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 "Front" and "rear" Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Front [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 "Front" and "rear" Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Front and rear position lamp of different type [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
front and rear wheels (lockup of the, Simultaneous) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2010-09-30
front door (Side) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Side front door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Side front door" is a door that, in a side view, has 50 per cent or more of its opening area forward of the rearmost point on the driver’s seat back, when the seat back is adjusted to its most vertical and rearward position, providing direct access for passengers to enter or depart the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
front fog lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 front fog lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.13. front fog lamp
means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Front fog lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.19. "Front fog lamp" means a lamp used to improve the illumination of the road ahead of the vehicle in case of fog or any similar condition of reduced visibility.icle te No.048 2008-05-23
Front fog lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.15. "Front fog lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Front fog lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.19. "Front fog lamp" means a lamp used to improve the illumination of the road ahead of the vehicle in case of fog or any similar condition of reduced visibility;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Front fog lamp of different type [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. The trade name or mark;
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. The inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. The category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code (s) (if applicable);
1.4.6. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2014-08-22
Front fog lamp of different type [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. the trade name or mark;
1.4.2. different "Classes" (B or F3) identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. the characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LEDmodule, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. the inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. the category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code(s) (if applicable).
1.4.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.4.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2010-07-10
Front fog-lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Front fog-lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.9. Front fog-lamp
"Front fog-lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Front fog-lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Front fog-lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.10. "Front fog-lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;		 No.086 2010-09-30
front lighting system (Adaptive) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);		 No.048 2011-12-06
front lighting system (Adaptive) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1.; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2006-12-27
front lighting system (Adaptive) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped- beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Front mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Front mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(e) Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
Front passenger seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Front passenger seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.1. "Front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R point;		 No.014 2015-08-19
front passenger seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 A front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the ‘foremost H-point’ of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Front passenger seat [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Front passenger seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.1. "Front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or
in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R point;		 No.014 2007-12-06
front passenger seat [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H-point" of the seat in question is in
or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.		 No.016 2007-11-30
front passenger seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H-point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver’s R-point.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Front position (side) lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Front position (side) lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.15. Front position (side) lamp
"Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the front#		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Front position (side) lamp [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Front position (side) lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1."'Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 1997-07-30
Front position (side) lamp [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Front position (side) lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 2010-06-12
Front position (side) lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Front position (side) lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.16. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the front;		 No.086 2010-09-30
front position lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 front position lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.11. front position lamp
means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Front position lamp [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front position lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 2014-09-30
Front position lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.14. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;・ No.048 2008-05-23
Front position lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.11. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Front position lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.8. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Front position lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.14. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Front position lamp of different type [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
front seat (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle front seats Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
"Group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons.
"Vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person.
"Vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them.
"Vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.		 No.129 2014-03-29
front seats (vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 vehicle front seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
front seats (vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 vehicle front seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Front underrun protection (FUP) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "Front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. A special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. Body work, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2010-07-17
front underrun protection [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. a special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. bodywork, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2002-02-01
front wheel (lockup of the, Simultaneous) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2016-02-18
frontal protection system [REG. No 078/2009] 　 frontal protection system protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 4. "frontal protection system" means a separate structure or structures, such as a bull bar, or a supplementary bumper which, in addition to the original-equipment bumper, is intended to protect the external surface of the vehicle from damage in the event of a collision with an object, with the exception of structures having a mass of less than 0,5 kg, intended to protect only the vehicle’s lights; REG. No 078/2009
front-lighting function (Mode of a) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Mode of a front-lighting function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2010-08-24
front-lighting system (adaptive) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems SCOPE
This Regulation applies to adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) for motor vehicles		 No.123 2006-12-27
Front-wheel steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Front-wheel steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.1. "Front-wheel steering equipment" in which only the wheels of the front axle(s) are steered. This includes all wheels which are steered in the same direction. No.079 2008-05-27
Fs (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Fs : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
fuel (bi, vehicle is considered) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 A vehicle is considered bi-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.115 2014-11-07
fuel (Bio-) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Biofuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18.1. "Biofuel" means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport, produced from biomass;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel (Bio) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Biofuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Biofuel" means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport, produced from biomass.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel (Gaseous) [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Gaseous fuel Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.8. "Gaseous fuel" includes fuels that are gaseous at normal temperature and pressure (288,2 K and 101,33 kPa), such as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and compressed natural gas (CNG).		 No.122 2010-06-30
fuel (liquid) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 liquid fuel Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.6. "liquid fuel" means a fuel which is liquid in normal conditions of temperature and pressure		 No.034 2011-04-28
fuel (Liquid) [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Liquid fuel Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.3. "Liquid fuel" means a fuel which is liquid in normal conditions of temperature and pressure;		 No.034 2011-04-28
fuel (mono, vehicle is considered) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 A vehicle is considered mono-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
fuel (reference) [No.083 2012-02-15A10] 　 reference fuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 10] SPECIFICATIONS OF REFERENCE FUELS
1. SPECIFICATIONS OF REFERENCE FUELS FOR TESTING VEHICLES TO THE EMISSION LIMITS
1.1. Technical data on the reference fuel to be used for testing vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines
Type: Petrol (E5) : [表] Parameter / Unit / Limits (Minimum / Maximum) / Test method
Type: Ethanol (E85) : [表], Type: Diesel fuel (B5) [表], Type: Petrol (E5) [表],
[ANNEX 10A]
1. SPECIFICATIONS OF GASEOUS REFERENCE FUELS		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel (repel, Capability to) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Capability to repel fuel or lubricant burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.8. "Capability to repel fuel or lubricant" means the capability of materials to repel fuel or lubricant when measured according to Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
fuel biodiesel vehicle (Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel biodiesel vehicle (Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel cell vehicle (Hydrogen) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle" means a vehicle powered by a fuel cell that converts chemical energy from hydrogen into electric energy, for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel engine (Dual) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system that is designed to simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
fuel engine (Dual) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel engine Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Dual-fuel engine" means an engine system type approved according to Regulation No 49 or mounted on a vehicle type approved with regards to its emissions according to Regulation No 49 and that is designed to simultaneously operate with diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel, both fuels being metered separately, where the consumed amount of one of the fuels relative to the other one may vary depending on the operation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
fuel ethanol vehicle (Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85);		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel ethanol vehicle (Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85).		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel gas vehicle (Bi) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel gas vehicle (Bi) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol (petrol mode) and also on either LPG, NG/ biomethane, or hydrogen (gas mode).		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel gas vehicle (Mono) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel gas vehicle (Mono) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/ biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel line (Flexible) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Flexible fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.28. "Flexible fuel lines" means flexible tubing or hose through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2015-06-30
fuel line (Rigid) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Rigid fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.29. "Rigid fuel lines" means tubing that has not been designed to flex in normal operation and through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Fuel lines [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.16. Fuel lines
2.16.1. "Flexible fuel lines" means a flexible tubing or hose through which natural gas flow.
2.16.2. "Rigid fuel lines" means tubing which has not been designed to flex in normal operation and through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2011-05-07
fuel mode (Dual) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
fuel mode (Dual) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel mode Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions;		 No.085 2014-11-07
fuel pump (LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG fuel pump using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.27. "LNG fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of LNG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the fluid (liquid or vapour).		 No.110 2015-06-30
Fuel pump [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Fuel pump LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Fuel rail [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Fuel rail using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.72. "Fuel rail" means the pipe or duct that connects the fuel injection devices.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Fuel rail [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Fuel rail LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.18. "Fuel rail" means a pipe or duct that connects the fuel injection devices;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Fuel requirement by the engine [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Fuel requirement by the engine Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.18. "Fuel requirement by the engine" means the type of fuel normally used by the engine:
- petrol,
- LPG (liquefied petroleum gas),
- NG (natural gas),
- either petrol or LPG,
- either petrol or NG,
- diesel fuel;		 No.083 2008-05-06
Fuel requirement by the engine [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Fuel requirement by the engine Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Fuel requirement by the engine" means the type of fuel normally used by the engine:
(a) Petrol (E5);
(b) LPG (liquefied petroleum gas);
(c) NG/biomethane (natural gas);
(d) Either petrol (E5) or LPG;
(e) Either petrol (E5) or NG/biomethane;
(f) Diesel fuel (B5);
(g) Mixture of ethanol (E85) and petrol (E5) (Flex fuel);
(h) Mixture of biodiesel and diesel (B5) (Flex fuel);
(i) Hydrogen;
(j) Either petrol (E5) or Hydrogen (Bi-fuel);		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel tank (Capacity of the) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle.		 No.095 2015-07-10
fuel tank (capacity of the) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.5. "capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer; and		 No.034 2011-04-28
fuel tank (Capacity of the) [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.2. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the tank manufacturer;		 No.034 2011-04-28
fuel tank (Capacity of the) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Fuel trim [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Fuel trim Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. A "Fuel trim" refers to feedback adjustments to the base fuel schedule. Short-term fuel trim refers to dynamic or instantaneous adjustments. Long-term fuel trim refers to much more gradual adjustments to the fuel calibration schedule than short-term trim adjustments. These long-term adjustments compensate for vehicle differences and gradual changes that occur over time.		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel vehicle (Alternative) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non- mineral oil derived;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel vehicle (Alternative) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non-mineral oil derived.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel vehicle (Bi) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel vehicle (Bi) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount and duration.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel vehicle (Dual) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel engine and that supplies the fuels used by the engine from separate on-board storage systems;"		 No.049 2013-06-24
fuel vehicle (Dual) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel vehicle Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel engine and that supplies the fuels used by the engine from separate on-board storage systems;		 No.085 2014-11-07
fuel vehicle (Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel vehicle (Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuel vehicle (Mono) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
fuel vehicle (Mono) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
fuelling (CNG-, Electronic control unit) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.24. "Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling)" means a device which controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.		 No.110 2011-05-07
fulfil specific social need (Vehicle designed to) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M 1 which are either:
(a) special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg ( 1 );
(b) vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion, as from 1 September 2012, of vehicles of category M 1 G 3 ;
(c) vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Full contour marking [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Full contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line; No.048 2008-05-23
Full contour marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Full contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Full flow dilution method [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Full flow dilution method Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total exhaust flow with diluent prior to separating a fraction of the diluted exhaust stream for analysis.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Full flow dilution method [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Full flow dilution method Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.35. "Full flow dilution method" means the process of mixing the total exhaust flow with dilution air prior to separating a fraction of the diluted exhaust stream for analysis;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Full wrap [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Full-wrap using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.57. "Full-wrap" means an over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement both in the circumferential and axial direction of the cylinder.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Full-power steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Full-power steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.1.1.3. "Full-power steering equipment" in which the steering forces are provided solely by one or more energy supplies; No.079 2008-05-27
full-wrap [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 full-wrap Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.12. full-wrap: An over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement both in the circumferential and axial direction of the cylinder.		 No.110 2008-03-14
fully developed deceleration (Mean) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "mfdd" (Mean fully developed deceleration) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Fully latched position [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fully latched position door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Fully latched position" is the coupling condition of the latch that retains the door in a completely closed position.		 No.011 2010-05-13
function (Substitute) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Substitute function Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.20. "Substitute function" means any specified front-lighting and/or front light-signalling, be it a front-lighting and/or a front light-signalling function, or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of it, intended to replace a front-lighting function/ mode in case of failure.		 No.123 2006-12-27
function (Traffic-change) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Traffic-change function Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.19. "Traffic-change function" means any front-lighting function or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of these, intended to avoid glare and provide sufficient illumination in case where a vehicle being equipped with a system designed for one traffic direction only is temporarily used in a country with the opposite direction of traffic.		 No.123 2006-12-27
Functional dimension [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Functional dimensions Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.5. "Functional dimensions": all the measurements that are relevant with regard to the fitting and functioning of the components of the braking system (see paragraph 5.3.7.1 and Annex 10).		 No.090 2012-07-13
functional failure (major) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 major functional failure Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "major functional failure" means a permanent or temporary malfunction of any exhaust aftertreatment system that is expected to result in an immediate or delayed increase of the gaseous or particulate emissions of the engine system and which cannot be properly estimated by the OBD system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
functional failure (major) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 major functional failure Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "major functional failure" (*) means a permanent or temporary malfunction of any exhaust aftertreatment system that is expected to result in an immediate or delayed increase of the gaseous or particulate emissions of the engine system and which cannot be properly estimated by the OBD system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
FUP [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. a special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. bodywork, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2002-02-01
FUP [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "Front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. A special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. Body work, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2010-07-17
FUPD (approval of an) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 approval of an FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "approval of an FUPD" means the approval of such a type of FUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7;		 No.093 2002-02-01
FUPD (Approval of an) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Approval of an FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Approval of an FUPD" means the approval of such a type of FUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7 below;		 No.093 2010-07-17
FUPD (type of) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 type of FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "type of FUPD" means FUPD which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings cited in paragraph 4.2.;		 No.093 2002-02-01
FUPD (Type of) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Type of FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Type of FUPD" means FUPD which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings cited in paragraph 4.2 below;		 No.093 2010-07-17
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
g (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 g :Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
G (Wet grip index) [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Wet grip index ("G") Tyre noise and wet grip 2.15. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the erformance of the standard reference test tyre. No.117 2008-08-29
G [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "G" (Wet grip index) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.4. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the performance of the standard reference test tyre.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Gangway [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Gangway Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gangway" means the space providing access by passengers from any seat or row of seats or each special area for wheelchair users to any other seat or row of seats or each special area for wheelchair users or to any access passage from or to any service door or intercommunication staircase and any area for standing passengers; it does not include:
2.15.1. The space extending 300 mm in front of any seat, except where a sideways-facing seat is situated above a wheel arch, in which case this dimension may be reduced to 225 mm (see Annex 4, Figure 25);
2.15.2. The space above the surface of any step or staircase (except where the surface of the step is contiguous with that of a gangway or access passageway); or
2.15.3. Any space which affords access solely to one seat or row of seats or a facing pair of transverse seats or row of seats.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Gangway [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Gangway Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gangway" means the space providing access by passengers from any seat or row of seats to any other seat or row of seats or to any access passage from or to any service door or intercommunication staircase and any area for standing passengers; it does not include:
2.15.1. the space extending 300 mm in front of any seat, except where a sidewaysfacing seat is situated above a wheel arch, in which case this dimension may be reduced to 225 mm.
2.15.2. the space above the surface of any step or staircase, or
2.15.3. any space which affords access solely to one seat or row of seats or a facing pair of transverse seats or row of seats.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Gangway [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Gangway Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gangway" means the space providing access by passengers from any seat or row of seats or each special area for wheelchair users to any other seat or row of seats or each special area for wheelchair users or to any access passage from or to any service door or intercommunication staircase and any area for standing passengers; it does not include:
2.15.1. the space extending 300 mm in front of any seat, except where a sideways-facing seat is situated above a wheel arch, in which case this dimension may be reduced to 225 mm (see Annex 4, figure 25).
2.15.2. the space above the surface of any step or staircase (except where the surface of the step is contiguous with that of a gangway or access passageway), or
2.15.3. any space which affords access solely to one seat or row of seats or a facing pair of transverse seats or row of seats.		 No.107 2010-09-29
gaps (head restraint) [No.025 2010-08-14A7] 　 head restraint gaps head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 7] Determination of dimension "A" of head restraint gaps
Figure 1 Example of horizontal gaps
Figure 2 Example of vertical gaps		 No.025 2010-08-14
gas (Calibration) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Calibration gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.8. "Calibration gas" means a purified gas mixture used to calibrate gas analysers. Calibration gases shall meet the specifications of paragraph 9.5.1. of Annex 4B. Note that calibration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analysers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span gases;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Gas (Natural, Compressed) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.43. "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means natural gas that has been compressed and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Gas (Natural, Liquefied / Liquid) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG (Liquefied /Liquid Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.42. "Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)" also called "Liquid Natural Gas" means a cryogenic liquid produced by reducing the temperature of natural gas to about – 161,7℃ at atmospheric pressure and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
gas (petroleum, Liquefied) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.19. "Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG)" means any product essentially composed of the following hydrocarbons: propane, propene (propylene), normal butane, isobutane, isobutylene, butene (butylene) and ethane.
European Standard EN 589:1993 specifies requirements and methods of test for automotive LPG as marketed and delivered in the countries of the members of CEN (European Committee for Standardization).		 No.067 2008-03-14
gas (Span) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Span gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.79. "Span gas" means a purified gas mixture used to span gas analysers. Span gases shall meet the specifications of paragraph 9.5.1. Note that calibration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analysers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span gases;		 No.096 2014-03-22
gas (Zero) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Zero gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.97. "Zero gas" means a gas that yields a zero response in an analyser. This may either be purified nitrogen, purified air, a combination of purified air and purified nitrogen.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Gas air mixer [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas/air mixer using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.31. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.		 No.110 2015-06-30
GAS CYLINDERS [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 GAS CYLINDERS Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
1. SCOPE
This annex sets out minimum requirements for light-weight refillable gas cylinders. The cylinders are intended only for the on-board storage of high pressure compressed natural gas as a fuel for automotive vehicles to which the cylinders are to be fixed. Cylinders may be of any steel, aluminium or non-metallic material, design or method of manufacture suitable for the specified service conditions. This annex does not cover metal liners or cylinders of stainless steels or of welded construction. Cylinders covered by this annex are Classified in Class 0, as described in paragraph 2. of this Regulation, and are:
CNG-1 Metal
CNG-2 Metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 Metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 Resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite)
【以下略】		 No.110 2008-03-14
Gas discharge light source of different type [No.099 2014-09-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. "Gas-discharge light sources of different types" are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which
differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark; that means:
(a) gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types;
(b) gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. Bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results.		 No.099 2014-09-30
Gas dosage unit [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas dosage unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.11. "Gas dosage unit" means a device which meters and/or distributes the gas flow to the engine and can be either combined with the gas injection device or separate.		 No.067 2008-03-14
gas engine [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 gas engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "gas engine" means a positive-ignition engine which is fuelled with natural gas (NG) or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);		 No.049 2008-04-12
gas engine [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 gas engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "gas engine" means a positive-ignition engine which is fuelled with natural gas (NG) or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Gas flow adjuster [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.33. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Gas flow adjuster [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.18. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Gas injection device [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.10. "Gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece" means a device which establishes the liquid or vaporized LPG to enter the engine;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Gas injector [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas injector using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.32. "Gas injector" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine or associated intake system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
gas range (NG) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 NG gas range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "NG gas range" means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated November 1993;		 No.049 2008-04-12
gas range (NG) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 NG gas range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "NG gas range" means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated November 1993;		 No.049 2010-08-31
gas recirculation (Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust-gas recirculation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.34. "Exhaust-gas recirculation" means a technology that reduces emissions by routing exhaust gases that have been exhausted from the combustion chamber(s) back into the engine to be mixed with incoming air before or during combustion. The use of valve timing to increase the amount of residual exhaust gas in the combustion chamber(s) that is mixed with incoming air before or during combustion is not considered exhaust-gas recirculation for the purposes of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Gas supply device [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas supply device using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.30. "Gas supply device" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine intake manifold (carburettor or injector).		 No.110 2015-06-30
Gas supply device [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas supply device using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Gas supply device" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine intake manifold (carburettor or injector).
2.17.1. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.
2.17.2. "Gas injector" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine or associated intake system.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Gas temperature [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.58. "Gas temperature" means the temperature of gas in a cylinder.		 No.110 2015-06-30
gas temperature [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 gas temperature Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.13. gas temperature: The temperature of gas in a cylinder.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Gas tight housing [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas-tight housing using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2015-06-30
gas vehicle (fuel, Bi) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;		 No.083 2012-02-15
gas vehicle (fuel, Bi) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol (petrol mode) and also on either LPG, NG/ biomethane, or hydrogen (gas mode).		 No.083 2015-07-03
gas vehicle (fuel, Mono) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol;		 No.083 2012-02-15
gas vehicle (fuel, Mono) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/ biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Gas-discharge light source [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Gas-discharge light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.5. "Gas-discharge light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is a discharge arc producing electro-luminescence/fluorescence; No.048 2008-05-23
Gas-discharge light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Gas-discharge light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.5. "Gas-discharge light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is a discharge arc producing electro-luminescence/fluorescence		 No.048 2011-12-06
Gas-discharge light source [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light source Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Gas-discharge light source": light source in which the light is produced by a stabilized discharge arc		 No.099 2010-06-30
Gas-discharge light sources of different type [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Gas-discharge light sources of different "types" ( 1 ) are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. trade name or mark; that means:
(a) Gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types.
(b) Gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;		 No.099 2010-06-30
Gaseous fuel [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Gaseous fuel Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.8. "Gaseous fuel" includes fuels that are gaseous at normal temperature and pressure (288,2 K and 101,33 kPa), such as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and compressed natural gas (CNG).		 No.122 2010-06-30
Gaseous pollutant [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, NO x , expressed in NO 2 equivalent, hydrocarbons (i.e. total hydrocarbons, non-methane hydrocarbons and methane);		 No.049 2013-06-24
Gaseous pollutant [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 ) equivalent and hydrocarbons assuming ratio of:
(a) C 1 H 2,525 for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);
(b) C 1 H 4 for natural gas (NG) and biomethane;
(c) C 1 H 1,89 O 0,016 for petrol (E5);
(d) C 1 H 1,86 O 0,005 for diesel (B5);
(e) C 1 H 2,74 O 0,385 for ethanol (E85);		 No.083 2012-02-15
Gaseous pollutant [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent and hydrocarbons assuming ratio of:
(a) C1H2,525 for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG);
(b) C1H4 for Natural Gas (NG) and biomethane;
(c) C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol (E5);
(d) C1H1,93O0,033 for petrol (E10);
(e) C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel (B5);
(f) C1H1,86O0,007 for diesel (B7);
(g) C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85);
(h) C1H2,61O0,329 for ethanol (E75).		 No.083 2015-07-03
Gaseous pollutant [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Gaseous pollutants Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.36. "Gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 1.85 ) and, oxides of nitrogen, the last named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 ) equivalent;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Gaseous pollutants [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.4. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen,expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent and hydrocarbons assuming ratio of:
- C1H1,85 for petrol,
- C1H1,86 for diesel,
- C1H2,525 for LPG,
- C1H4 for NG.		 No.083 2008-05-06
gaseous pollutants [REG. No 595/2009] 　 gaseous pollutants emissions 2. "gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, NO x , expressed in NO 2 equivalent, and hydrocarbons; REG. No 595/2009
gaseous pollutants [REG. No 692/2008] 　 gaseous pollutants emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 3. "gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen, expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent, and hydrocarbons with the following ratio:
(a) C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol (E5);
(b) C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel (B5);
(c) C1H2,525 for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);
(d) CH4 for natural gas (NG) and biomethane;
(e) C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85);		 REG. No 692/2008
gaseous pollutants [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 gaseous pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of CH1,85 for diesel, CH2,525 for LPG and CH2,93 for NG (NMHC) and an assumed molecule CH3O0,5 for ethanol-fuelled diesel engines), methane (assuming a ratio of CH4 for NG) and oxides of nitrogen, the last-named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent;		 No.049 2008-04-12
gaseous pollutants [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 gaseous pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of CH1,85 for diesel, CH2,525 for LPG and CH2,93 for NG (NMHC) and an assumed molecule CH3O0,5 for ethanol-fuelled diesel engines), methane (assuming a ratio of CH4 for NG) and oxides of nitrogen, the last-named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Gas-tight housing [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas-tight housing LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Gas-tight housing [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas-tight housing using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.19. "Gas-tight housing" means a device which vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Gas-tube pressure relief valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas-tube pressure relief valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.9. "Gas-tube pressure relief valve" means a device to prevent the pressure build up in the tubes above a pre-set value;		 No.067 2008-03-14
GC [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 GC Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
GC Gas chromatograph		 No.049 2010-08-31
gear (Locked) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Locked gear noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.11. "Locked gear" means the control of the transmission such that the transmission gear ratio cannot change during a test.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Gear ratio weighting factor [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Gear ratio weighting factor k Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gear ratio weighting factor k" means a dimensionless numerical quantity used to combine the test results of two gear ratios for the acceleration test and the constant speed test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
gear ratios (Locked) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Locked gear ratios Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Locked gear ratios" means the control of transmission such that the transmission gear cannot change during a test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
gear shift indicator (GSI) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 gear shift indicator (GSI) safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 15. "gear shift indicator" or "GSI" means a visible indicator recommending that the driver shift gear; REG. No 661/2009
General Denominator [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 General Denominator Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "General Denominator" means a counter indicating the number of times a vehicle has been operated, taking into account general conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
general steering control [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 general steering control Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.6. "general steering control" means a steering control which can be fitted to more than one approved vehicle type where differences in the attachment of the steering control to the steering column do not affect the impact performance of the steering control; No.012 2008-06-26
General steering control [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 General steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "General steering control" means a steering control which can be fitted to more than one approved vehicle type where differences in the attachment of the steering control to the steering column do not affect the impact performance of the steering control;		 No.012 2013-03-27
generating system (re, Periodically) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Periodically regenerating system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 13 to this Regulation does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the Type Approval Authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in paragraph 5.3.1.4 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the Technical Service.		 No.083 2015-07-03
generation (Re) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.71. "Regeneration" means an event during which emissions levels change while the aftertreatment performance is being restored by design. Two types of regeneration can occur: continuous regeneration (see paragraph 6.6.1. of Annex 4B) and infrequent (periodic) regeneration (see paragraph 6.6.2. of Annex 4B);		 No.096 2014-03-22
generation (re-, Continuous) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
generation (re, Continuous) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Continuous regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.13. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either in a sustained manner or at least once over the applicable transient test cycle or ramped-modal cycle; in contrast to periodic (infrequent) regeneration;		 No.096 2014-03-22
generation (re-, Periodic) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.49. "Periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
generation (re-, periodic) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.		 No.049 2008-04-12
generation (re-, periodic) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.		 No.049 2010-08-31
generative braking (re, Electric) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
generator (Signal) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Signal generator Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.11. "Signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the signals for system tests;		 No.123 2006-12-27
generator (Signal) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Signal generator Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.11. "Signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the signals for system tests;		 No.123 2010-08-24
generator (signal, HIAS) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS signal generator Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "HIAS signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the HIAS signals for system test;		 No.053 2013-06-18
geometric visibility (Angle of) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;		 No.053 2013-06-18
geometric visibility (Angle of) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal.		 No.074 2013-06-18
geometric visibility (Angle of) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp is visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 to this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;		 No.048 2011-12-06
geometric visibility (Angles of) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see explanatory figure below).[図]		 No.086 2010-09-30
glass (Laminated) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Laminated-glass safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass" means glazing consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayer of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "Ordinary laminated glass", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; or
2.2.2. "Treated laminated glass", when at least one of the layers of glass, of which it is composed, has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2014-02-12
glass (Toughened) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Toughened-glass safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Toughened-glass" means glazing consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering.		 No.043 2014-02-12
glass faced with plastic material (Safety) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety-glass faced with plastics material safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Safety-glass faced with plastics material" means glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastics material on its inner face.		 No.043 2014-02-12
glass outline (Design) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Design glass outline safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Design glass outline" means the design maximum unobstructed vehicle aperture designated to be glazed, before the glazing is installed or mounted, including all trims, but excluding obscuration bands.		 No.043 2014-02-12
glass pane (Laminated-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Laminated-glass pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "ordinary", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; orEN
2.2.2. "treated", when at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
glass pane (Toughened-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Toughened-glass pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Toughened-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
glass pane faced with plastics material (Safety-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material" means a glass pane as defined in paragraphs 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastics material on its inner face;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Glass plastic [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Glass-plastics safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Glass-plastics" means glazing consisting of any glazing material that comprises one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastic in which a plastic surface of the product faces the inner side.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Glass-plastics pane [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Glass-plastics pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Glass-plastics pane" means a pane of laminated glass having one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastics material, at least one of which acts as interlayer. The plastics layer(s) shall be on the inner face when the glazing is fitted on the vehicle;		 No.043 2010-08-31
glazed unit (Double-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Double-glazed unit Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double-glazed unit" means an assembly of two glazing panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by a uniform gap;
2.7.1. "Symmetrical double-glazing" means a double-glazed unit where the two component glazings are of the same type (toughened glass, laminated glass, rigid plastic) and have the same principal and/or secondary characteristics;
2.7.2. "Asymmetrical double-glazing" means a double-glazed unit where the two component glazings are of different type (toughened glass, laminated glass, rigid plastic) or have different principal and/or secondary characteristics;		 No.043 2010-08-31
glazed unit (Multiple) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Multiple-glazed unit safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Multiple-glazed unit" means an assembly of at least two parallel panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by one or more gap(s).
2.8.1. "Symmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit where all component panes are identical (e.g. all uniform toughened glass).
2.8.2. "Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit other than a symmetrical multiple-glazed unit).		 No.043 2014-02-12
glazing (Bullet resistant or Bullet proof) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing", means glazing constructed so as to be resistant to firearms.		 No.043 2014-02-12
glazing (Plastic) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Plastic glazing safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture of processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow.
2.6.1. "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).
2.6.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2014-02-12
glazing (Plastic) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Plastic glazing Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture or processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow;
2.5.1 "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12);
2.5.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2010-08-31
glazing material (safety, Type of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Type of safety glazing material safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of safety glazing material" means a glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 to 2.7 not exhibiting any essential differences, with respect, in particular, to the principal and secondary characteristics defined in Annexes 4 to 12 and 14 to 16;
2.19.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognised that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual annexes, glazings may be grouped if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics;
2.19.2. Types of glazing exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type. Certain tests may however be carried out on samples of such glazings if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test condition;		 No.043 2014-02-12
glazing material (safety, Type of) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Type of safety glazing material Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Type of safety glazing material" means a glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 to 2.7 not exhibiting any essential differences, with respect, in particular, to the principal and secondary characteristics defined in annexes 4 to 12 and 14 to 16;
2.15.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognised that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual annexes, glazings may be grouped if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics;
2.15.2. Types of glazing exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type; certain tests may however be carried out on samples of such glazings if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test condition.		 No.043 2010-08-31
glazing material requisite for driver visibility (Safety) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
glazing material requisite for driver visibility (Safety) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.18.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver’s R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.18.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver’s R point perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2010-08-31
goniometer [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 goniometer Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Description of goniometer
A goniometer which can be used in making retro-reflection measurements in the CIE geometry is illustrated in Annex 1, figure 2. In this illustration, the photometer head is arbitrarily shown to be vertically above the source. The first axis is shown to be fixed and horizontal and is situated perpendicular to the observation half-plane. Any arrangement of the components which is equivalent to the one shown can be used.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Good engineering judgment [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Good engineering judgment Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.37. "Good engineering judgment" means judgments made consistent with generally accepted scientific and engineering principles and available relevant information;		 No.096 2014-03-22
graduated braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.013 2016-02-18
graduated braking (Progressive and) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
graduated braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.013 2010-09-30
graduated braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
graduated braking [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and whether during application or during release of the brakes,
2.10.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control,
2.10.2. the braking force varies proportionally to the action on the control (monotonic function), and,
2.10.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.078 2004-03-31
graphic (Distinctive) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Distinctive markings, graphics Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Distinctive markings, graphics" mean coloured markings, whose coefficient of retro-reflection is as defined in paragraphs 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 below.		 No.104 2014-03-14
grip (Hand) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Handgrip" means that part of the handlebars, furthest from the centre, by which the handlebars are held by the driver of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
grip (Hand) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Handgrip" means that part of the handlebars, furthest from the centre, by which the handlebars are held by the driver of the vehicle;
2.6.1. "Rotating handgrip" means a handgrip, operating some functional mechanism of the vehicle, which is free to rotate around the handlebar when so turned by the driver of the vehicle;		 No.060 2004-03-31
grip (hand, Rotating) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Rotating handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rotating handgrip" means a handgrip, operating some functional mechanism of the vehicle, which is free to rotate around the handlebar when so turned by the driver of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
grip index (Wet) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "G" (Wet grip index) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.4. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the performance of the standard reference test tyre.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Grip measurement (Wet) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Wet Grip measurement Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.1. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT).
2.17.2. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation.
2.17.3. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre – see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.17.4. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the performance of the standard reference test tyre.
2.17.5. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up.
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.
2.17.7. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer shall be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test.		 No.117 2011-11-23
groove (Principal) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Principal groove Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Principal groove" means the wide grooves situated in the central zone of the tread.		 No.075 2011-03-30
groove (Principal) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Principal grooves Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.1. "Principal grooves" means the wide circumferential grooves positioned in the central zone of the tyre tread, which, in the case of passenger and light truck (commercial) tyres, have the treadwear indicators located in the base.		 No.117 2011-11-23
groove (Tread) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tread groove Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Tread groove" means the space between two adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.		 No.075 2011-03-30
groove (Tread) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread groove Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Tread groove" means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern;		 No.106 2010-09-30
groove (Tread) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread groove 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tread groove" means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.		 No.108 2006-07-04
groove (Tread) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tread groove Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Tread groove" means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.		 No.109 2006-07-04
grooves (Principal) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Principal grooves 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Principal grooves" means the wide grooves situated in the central zone of the tread, which cover approximately three-quarters of the breadth of the tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Gross vehicle mass [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Gross vehicle mass [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Ground [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Ground Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.21. "Ground" means the surface on which the vehicle stands which should be substantially horizontal; No.048 2008-05-23
Ground [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Ground Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Ground" means the surface on which the vehicle stands which should be substantially horizontal;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Ground [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Ground Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Ground" means the surface on which the vehicle stands which should be substantially horizontal;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Ground [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Ground Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Ground" means the surface on which the vehicle stands which should be substantially horizontal;		 No.048 2011-12-06
group (Axle) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Axle group Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Axle group" means multiple axles where the axle spread between one axle and its adjacent axle is equal to or less than 2,0 m. Where the axle spread between one axle and its adjacent axle is greater than 2,0 m, each individual axle shall be considered as an independent axle group.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Group of monitor [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Group of monitors Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Group of monitors" means, for the purpose of assessing the in-use performance of an OBD engine family, a set of OBD monitors used for determining the correct operation of the emission control system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Group of seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Group of seats safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult person;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Group of seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats
Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front or the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Group of seat [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Group of seats burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.7. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and which accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Group of seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats
Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front of the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Group of seats [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Group of seats Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult person;		 No.014 2007-12-06
group of seats [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 group of seats safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult person;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Group of seats [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats : Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front of the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Group of seats [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Group of seats Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.5. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. withthe foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in linewith or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and which accommodate one or moreseated adult persons.		 No.118 2010-07-10
group of vehicle seats [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 group of vehicle seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
group of vehicle seats [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 group of vehicle seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Group of vehicle type [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Group of vehicle types Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Group of vehicle types" means those vehicle types, proposed in future as well as existing now, which are covered by the approval of the worst case, in respect of this Regulation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Group of windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Group of windscreens safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests.
2.16.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.16.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Group of windscreens [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Group of windscreens Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests;
2.13.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre;
2.13.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Grouped lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Grouped lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.3. Grouped lamps
"Grouped lamps" means devices having separate lenses and separate light sources, but a common lamp body.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
grouped lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 grouped lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.4. grouped lamps
means lamps having separate illuminating surfaces and light sources, but a common lamp body;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Grouped lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Grouped lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.4. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces (1) and separate light sources, but a common lamp body; No.048 2008-05-23
Grouped lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Grouped lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.3. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Grouped lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Grouped lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.3. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Grouped lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Grouped lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.4. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ) and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Grouped lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Grouped lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.3. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate lenses and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;		 No.086 2010-09-30
GSI (gear shift indicator) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 gear shift indicator (GSI) safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 15. "gear shift indicator" or "GSI" means a visible indicator recommending that the driver shift gear; REG. No 661/2009
guidance device [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 A guidance device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "A guidance device" is intended to help the person installing the ISOFIX child restraint system by physically guiding the ISOFIX attachments on the ISOFIX child restraint into correct alignment with the ISOFIX low anchorages to facilitate engagement;		 No.014 2015-08-19
guidance device [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 guidance device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. A "guidance device" is intended to help the person installing the ISOFIX child restraint system by physically guiding the ISOFIX attachments on the ISOFIX child restraint into correct alignment with the ISOFIX low anchorages to facilitate engagement.		 No.016 2015-11-20
guidance device [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 guidance device Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "A guidance device" is intended to help the person installing the Isofix child restraint system by physically guiding the Isofix attachments on the Isofix child restraint into correct alignment with the Isofix low anchorages to facilitate engagement.		 No.014 2007-12-06
guidance device [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 a guidance device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "a guidance device" is intended to help the person installing the Isofix child restraint system by physically guiding the Isofix attachments on the Isofix child restraint into correct alignment with the Isofix low anchorages to facilitate engagement.		 No.014 2011-04-28
guidance device [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 guidance device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. A "guidance device" is intended to help the person installing the Isofix child restraint system by physically guiding the Isofix attachments on the Isofix child restraint into correct alignment with the Isofix low anchorages to facilitate engagement.		 No.016 2007-11-30
guidance device [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 guidance device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. A "guidance device" is intended to help the person installing the ISOFIX child restraint system by physically guiding the ISOFIX attachments on the ISOFIX child restraint into correct alignment with the ISOFIX low anchorages to facilitate engagement.		 No.016 2011-09-09
guide (webbing, safety-belt, Adult) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
guide strap (booster, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 guide strap (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
guide strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 guide strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.8. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer’s shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2011-09-09
gum (Cushion) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cushion gum 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Cushion gum" is material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.		 No.108 2006-07-04
gum (Cushion) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cushion gum Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Cushion gum" is a material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
H (Section height) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 H (Section height) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.14. "Section height (H)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter; No.054 2008-07-11
h (Section height) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Section height (h) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Section height (h)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter;		 No.106 2010-09-30
h (segment, Height of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Height of segment "h" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Height of segment "h" " means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glazing, separating the inner surface of the glazing from a plane passing through the ends of the glazing (see Annex 17, Figure 1).		 No.043 2014-02-12
h (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 h : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
h [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Height of segment "h" Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Height of segment "h"" means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glass pane, separating the inner surface of the pane from a plane passing through the ends of the pane (see annex 17, figure 1);		 No.043 2010-08-31
H [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 H (Section height) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Section height (H)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.075 2011-03-30
H machine (3D) [No.017 2010-08-31A3] 　 3-D H machine seats, their anchorages and any head restraints [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
APPENDIX 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL "H" POINT MACHINE (*) (3-D H machine)
1. BACK AND SEAT PANS
2. BODY AND LEG ELEMENTS
Figure 1 3-D H machine elements designation [図]
Figure 2 Dimensions of the 3-D H machine elements and load distribution (Dimensions in millimeters)		 No.017 2010-08-31
H machine (3D) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three-dimensional H point machine (3-D H machine) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
H machine (3D) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ pointsand actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex.		 No.046 2010-07-10
H point [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 "H" point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. " "H" point" means a reference point determined for each seat by the testing service responsible for approval, in accordance with the procedure described in Annex 6;		 No.094 2012-09-20
H point [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 H point Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "H point" is as established by Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
H point [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "H" point Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and the thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The ‘H’ point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R2 point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H2 point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.014 2007-12-06
H point [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 H point Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and the thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.016 2007-11-30
H point [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 H point Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4. below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4., the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.017 2006-12-27
H point [No.017 2010-08-31A3] 　 "H" point seats, their anchorages and any head restraints [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
1. PURPOSE
The procedure described in this annex is used to establish the ‘H’ point location and the actual torso angle for one or several seating positions in a motor vehicle and to verify the relationship of measured data to design specifications given by the vehicle manufacturer ( 1 ).
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this annex:
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship,
【以下略】		 No.017 2010-08-31
H point [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Reference point of the seat (H point) Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" of the seat (H point) (see annex 3 to this Regulation) means the trace, in a vertical plane longitudinal in relation to the seat, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the leg and the torso of a human body represented by a manikin;		 No.025 2005-12-16
H point [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Reference point of the seat (H point) head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" of the seat ("H point") (see Annex 3 to this Regulation) means the trace, in a vertical plane longitudinal in relation to the seat, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the leg and the torso of a human body represented by a manikin;		 No.025 2010-08-14
H point [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 "H" point head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
1. PURPOSE
The procedure described in this Annex is used to establish the ‘H’ point location and the actual torso angle for one or several seating positions in a motor vehicle and to verify the relationship of measured data to design specifications given by the vehicle manufacturer ( 1 ).		 No.025 2010-08-14
H point [No.025 2010-08-14A33] 　 "H" point head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "H" point means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the ‘R’ point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted.		 No.025 2010-08-14
H point [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 H point protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.3. "H point" means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted.		 No.029 2010-11-20
H point [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 H point Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is betweenthe "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R"point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described inparagraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it whenthe seat is adjusted.		 No.046 2010-07-10
H point [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 "H" point external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. The "H" point, which indicates the position of a seated occupant in the passenger compartment, is the trace, in a longitudinal vertical plane, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the legs and the torso of a human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.		 No.061 2010-06-30
H point [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 "H" point Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3 DH machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3 DH machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.080 2010-06-30
H point [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 "H” point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. " "H” point" means a reference point determined for each seat by the testing service responsible for approval, in accordance with the procedure described in annex 6;		 No.094 2010-05-28
H point [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 H point Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "H point" is as established by annex 3 to this Regulation;		 No.095 2007-11-30
H point [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 H point Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "H point" means the point defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.3.		 No.125 2010-07-31
H point machine (3D) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.025 2010-08-14
H point machine (Three-dimensional) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.014 2007-12-06
H point machine (Three-dimensional) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional 'H' point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.017 2006-12-27
H point machine (Three-dimensional) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.080 2010-06-30
half plane (Observation on) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation on half-plane Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.5. "Observation on half-plane" means the half-plane which originates on the illumination axis and which contains the observation axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Half staircase [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Half staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Half staircase" is a staircase from the upper deck which terminates in an emergency door.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Half staircase [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Half staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Half staircase" is a staircase from the upper deck which terminates in an emergency door.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Half staircase [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Half staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Half staircase" is a staircase from the upper deck which terminates in an emergency door.		 No.107 2010-09-29
halogen lamp [No.082 2014-03-25] 　 HS2 lamps (halogen lamps) Headlamps (HS2 moped) 1. SCOPE
This regulation applies to the approval of headlamps equipped with halogen lamps (HS2 lamps), which are provided for the equipment of mopeds and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. The trade name or mark,
2.2. The characteristics of the optical systems,
2.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.082 2014-03-25
Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1",
when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21",
when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22",
when they emit, at the user's choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2001-06-25
Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit of different type [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 HSB units of different types (Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "HSB units of different types" means units which differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. the trade name or mark;
2.4.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation; the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not constitute a change of type;
2.4.4. the rated voltage;
2.4.5. the shape of the filament or filaments;
2.4.6. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.7. the materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.031 2010-07-17
Hand lever [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Hand lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression, (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disengage the clutch mechanism.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Hand lever [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Hand lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
Hand-grip [Directive 2009/079/EC] 　 Hand-grip passenger hand-holds on two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.2. Hand-grip
If a hand-grip is used it must be close to the saddle and symmetrical to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle.　・・・		 Directive 2009/079/EC
Handgrip [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Handgrip" means that part of the handlebars, furthest from the centre, by which the handlebars are held by the driver of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
handgrip (Rotating) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Rotating handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rotating handgrip" means a handgrip, operating some functional mechanism of the vehicle, which is free to rotate around the handlebar when so turned by the driver of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Handgrip [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Handgrip" means that part of the handlebars, furthest from the centre, by which the handlebars are held by the driver of the vehicle;
2.6.1. "Rotating handgrip" means a handgrip, operating some functional mechanism of the vehicle, which is free to rotate around the handlebar when so turned by the driver of the vehicle;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Handlebar [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Handlebars" means any part of the bar or bars connected to the head of the forks (steering head) by means of which the vehicle is steered.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Handlebar forward [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: forward Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Handlebars: forward" means any part of the handlebars lying on the side furthest from the driver when seated in a driving position.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Handlebar left side [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: left side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8."Handlebars: left side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Handlebar right side [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: right side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7."Handlebars: right side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Handlebars [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Handlebars Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Handlebars" means any part of the bar or bars connected to the head of the forks (steering head) by means of which the vehicle is steered;
2.5.1. "Handlebars: right side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.5.2. "Handlebars: left side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.5.3. "Handlebars: forward" means any part of the handlebars lying on the side farthest from the driver when seated in a driving position;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (World) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
harness (wiring, Vehicle) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle wiring harness Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle wiring harness" means supply voltage, bus system (e.g. CAN), signal or active antenna cables, which are installed by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.010 2012-09-20
harness (wiring, Vehicle) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Vehicle wiring harness Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle wiring harness" means supply voltage, bus system (e.g. CAN), signal or active antenna cables, which are installed by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Harness belt [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Harness belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Harness belt [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Harness belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and a crotch strap.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Harness belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Harness belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.5. Harness belt : A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Harness belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Harness belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
harness belt [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 harness belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
harness belt [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 harness belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;		 No.044 2011-09-09
hatch (Escape) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Escape hatch Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Escape hatch" means an opening in the roof or the floor intended for use as an emergency exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2015-06-18
hatch (Escape) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Escape hatch Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Escape hatch" means an opening in the roof or the floor intended for use as an emergency exit by passengers in an emergency only;		 No.107 2006-12-27
hatch (Escape) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Escape hatch Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Escape hatch" means an opening in the roof or the floor intended for use as an emergency exit by passengers in an emergency only;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Hazard warning signal [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Hazard-warning signal installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.12. Hazard-warning signal
"Hazard-warning signal" means the device permitting the simultaneous operation of all of a tractor's direction indicator lamps to draw attention to the fact that the tractor temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
hazard warning signal [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 hazard warning signal installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.16. hazard warning signal
means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction indicator lamps to draw attention to the fact that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road users;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Hazard warning signal [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.18. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle"s direction-indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users; No.048 2008-05-23
Hazard warning signal [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.14. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction-indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road users;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Hazard warning signal [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.18. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction- indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Hazard-warning signal [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Hazard-warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.13. "Hazard-warning signal" means the device permitting the simultaneous operation of all of a tractor's direction indicator lamps to draw attention to the fact that the tractor temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;		 No.086 2010-09-30
HC [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 HC (Hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.39. "Hydrocarbon (HC)" means THC, NMHC as applicable. Hydrocarbon generally means the hydrocarbon group on which the emission standards are based for each type of fuel and engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
HCLD [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 HCLD Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
HCLD Heated chemiluminescent detector		 No.049 2010-08-31
Head Injury Criteria [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "HIC (Head Injury Criteria)" value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Head Injury Criteria [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "HIC" (Head Injury Criteria) value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Head line [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Head line Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Head line" means a straight line passing through the centre of gravity of the head and through the joint of the neck with the thorax. When the head is at rest the head line is situated in the extension of the reference line;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Head line [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Head line head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Head line" means a straight line passing through the centre of gravity of the head and through the joint of the neck with the thorax. When the head is at rest the head line is situated in the extension of the reference line;		 No.025 2010-08-14
head restraint (Type of) [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Type of head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of head restraint" means a category of head restraints which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish, in colour and in covering;		 No.025 2005-12-16
head restraint (Type of) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Type of head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of head restraint" means a category of head restraints which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish, in colour and in covering;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Head restraint [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Head restraint seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back. Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2 or 2.12.3 below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Head restraint [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult
occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head
restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Head restraint [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2010-08-14
head restraint gaps [No.025 2010-08-14A7] 　 head restraint gaps head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 7] Determination of dimension "A" of head restraint gaps
Figure 1 Example of horizontal gaps
Figure 2 Example of vertical gaps		 No.025 2010-08-14
headlamp (beam, Driving / main) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
headlamp (beam, Passing / dipped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road- users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Headlamp (Class A / B) [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2014-08-22
headlamp (Driving beam, main beam) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
headlamp (Driving, main beam) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
headlamp (Passing , dipped beam) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
headlamp (Passing, dipped-beam) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;		 No.074 2013-06-18
headlamp including LED modules [No.098 2010-06-30A11] 　 headlamps including LED modules gas-discharge light sources [ANNEX 11] Requirements for LED modules and headlamps including LED modules
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. Each LED module sample submitted shall conform to the relevant specifications of this Regulation when tested with the supplied electronic light source control-gear(s), if any.
1.2. LED module(s) shall be so designed as to be and to remain in good working order when in normal use. They shall moreover exhibit no fault in design or manufacture.
1.3. LED module(s) shall be tamperproof.
1.4. The design of removable LED module(s) shall be such that:
1.4.1. when the LED module is removed and replaced with another module provided by the applicant and bearing the same light source module identification code, the photometric specifications of the headlamp shall be met;
1.4.2. LED modules with different light source module identification codes within the same lamp housing, shall not be interchangeable.
1.5. Electronic light source control gear(s) may be part of the LED module(s).
2. MANUFACTURE 【略】
3. TEST CONDITIONS 【略】
4. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS 【略】		 No.098 2010-06-30
Headlamp of different "type" [No.001 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different "types" Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption; and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. Ability to provide a passing beam or a driving beam or both;
1.3.6. The materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.3.7. The holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the following categories: R2 and/or HS1(		 No.001 2010-07-10
Headlamp of different Classe A～E [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D or E) headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different “Classes (A or B or C or D or E)" mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
1.6. However, in the case of a system consisting of two headlamps a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.113 2014-06-14
Headlamp of different Classes (A or B or C or D) [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D) Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B or C or D)" means headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.113 2005-12-16
Headlamp of different Classes (A or B) [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B) Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2005-12-16
Headlamp of different Classes [No.112 2010-08-31] 　 Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2010-08-31
Headlamp of different type [No.072 2014-33-14] 　 Headlamp of different type Headlamps (HS1) (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. The trade name or mark;
2.3.2. The characteristics of the optical systems;
2.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption and/or deformation during operation. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps;
2.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.3.5. The materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.072 2014-03-14
Headlamp of different type [No.098 2014-06-14] 　 Headlamps of different types gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.5.1. The trade name or mark;
1.5.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.5.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.5.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.5.5. The kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.5.6. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.098 2014-06-14
Headlamp of different type [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Headlamps of different types headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. The category of filament lamp used and/or the LED module specific identification code(s);
1.3.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.112 2014-08-22
Headlamp of different type [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Headlamps of different types headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.5. The category of filament lamp(s), the gas-discharge light source or the light source module specific identification code(s);
1.6. However, in the case of a system consisting of two headlamps a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.113 2014-06-14
Headlamp of different type [No.008 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters designed solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution shall not constitute a change in the type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the categories H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11
1.3.7. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.008 2010-07-10
Headlamp of different type [No.020 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different types Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.020 2010-07-10
Headlamp of different type [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.6.1. the trade name or mark;
1.6.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.6.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.6.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.6.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.6.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;		 No.098 2001-06-25
Headlamp of different type [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Headlamps of different types gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.6.1. the trade name or mark;
1.6.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.6.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.6.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.6.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.6.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.6.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.098 2010-06-30
Headlamp of different type [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different types Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation.
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.7. The category of filament lamp used.		 No.112 2005-12-16
Headlamp of different type [No.112 2010-08-31] 　 Headlamps of different "types" headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.7. the category of filament lamp used and/or the LED module specific identification code(s).
1.3.8. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.112 2010-08-31
Headlamp of different type [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different types Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different "types"" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.6. the category of filament lamp used;		 No.113 2005-12-16
headlamp type [No.056 2014-03-25] 　 type (headlamp) Headlamps (mopeds) 1. SCOPE
This Regulation applies to the approval of headlamps using filament lamps, producing one single passing beam, which are provided for the equipment of mopeds ( 1 ) and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. the trade name or mark;
2.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.3. the inclusion or the suppression of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflexion, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.056 2014-03-25
headlamp type [No.057 2014-05-01] 　 types (headlamps) Headlamps (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. the trade name or mark;
2.3.2. marking of the headlamp as defined in paragraph 4.1.4 below;
2.3.3. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.3.4. the inclusion or the suppression of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption and/or deformation during operation. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.
2.3.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.057 2014-05-01
headlamp type [No.082 2014-03-25] 　 type (headlamp) Headlamps (HS2 moped) 1. SCOPE
This regulation applies to the approval of headlamps equipped with halogen lamps (HS2 lamps), which are provided for the equipment of mopeds and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. The trade name or mark,
2.2. The characteristics of the optical systems,
2.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.082 2014-03-25
Headlamp type [No.001 2001-05-14] 　 Headlamps types Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1 The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption; and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. Ability to provide a passing beam or a driving beam or both;
1.3.6. The materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.3.7. The holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the following categories: R2 and/or HS1 (2);		 No.001 2001-05-14
Headlamp type [No.008 2001-05-14] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters designed solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution shall not constitute a change in the type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the categories H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 (2) (3).		 No.008 2001-05-14
headlamp type [No.020 2001-06-25] 　 headlamp type Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.020 2001-06-25
headlamp unit (Halogen sealed-beam) [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1", when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21", when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22", when they emit, at the user’s choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2010-07-17
headlamp unit (Sealed beam) [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) headlamp unit Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2014-05-29
headlamp unit (Sealed beam) [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 Sealed beam headlamp unit (SB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2001-05-14
headlamp unit (sealed-beam, Halogen) [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1",
when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21",
when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22",
when they emit, at the user's choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2001-06-25
headlamp unit of different type (Halogen sealed-beam) [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 HSB units of different types (Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "HSB units of different types" means units which differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. the trade name or mark;
2.4.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation; the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not constitute a change of type;
2.4.4. the rated voltage;
2.4.5. the shape of the filament or filaments;
2.4.6. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.7. the materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.031 2010-07-17
Heat exchanger [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Heat exchanger/Vaporiser using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.41. "Heat exchanger/Vaporiser" means a device used to change the state of LNG into CNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
heater (Combustion) [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Combustion heater" means a device directly using liquid or gaseous fuel and not using the waste heat from the engine used for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.122 2010-06-30
heater (combustion, Type of) [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Type of combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Type of combustion heater" means devices which do not differ in essential respects such as:
- fuel type (e.g. liquid or gaseous),
- transfer medium (e.g. air or water),
- vehicle location (e.g. passenger compartment or load area).		 No.122 2010-06-30
heating (Over-) [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Overheating Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.9. "Overheating" means the condition that exists when the air inlet for the heating air to the combustion heater is completely blocked.		 No.122 2010-06-30
heating compartment (Separate) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Separate heating compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Separate heating compartment" means a compartment for a combustion heater located outside the interior compartment and the engine compartment.		 No.108 2015-04-21
heating system (Vehicle type with regard to) [No.122 2010-06-30P1] 　 Vehicle type with regard to heating system Heating systems 5. PART I . APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE WITH REGARD TO ITS HEATING SYSTEM
5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type with regard to heating system" means vehicles which do not differ in essential respects such as the functioning principle(s) of the heating system.		 No.122 2010-06-30
heating system (Waste-heat) [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Waste-heat heating system Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.4. "Waste-heat heating system" means any type of device using the waste heat from the engine used for propulsion of the vehicle to increase the temperature of the interior of the vehicle, this may include water, oil or air as the transfer medium.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Heating system [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Heating system Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Heating system" means any type of device which is designed to increase the temperature of the interior of a vehicle, including any load area.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Heating system for the load area [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Heating system for the load area Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.5. "Heating system for the load area" means any type of device designed to increase the temperature of the load area.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Heating system for the passenger compartment [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Heating system for the passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Heating system for the passenger compartment" means any type of device designed to increase the temperature of the passenger compartment.		 No.122 2010-06-30
height (hitch, Coupling) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.7. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer shall be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test.		 No.117 2011-11-23
height (Reference) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Reference height Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Reference height" means the height of the top of the seat above the reference plane;		 No.080 2010-06-30
height (Section) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 H (Section height) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Section height (H)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.075 2011-03-30
height (Section) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Section height (h) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Section height (h)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter;		 No.106 2010-09-30
height (Section) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Section height 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Section height" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.108 2006-07-04
height (Section) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Section height Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Section height" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.109 2006-07-04
height (trim, suspension) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 suspension trim height Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "suspension trim height" means the distance between the wheel centre and a fixed point on the chassis as declared by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.111 2002-02-01
Height of segment [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Height of segment "h" Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Height of segment "h"" means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glass pane, separating the inner surface of the pane from a plane passing through the ends of the pane (see annex 17, figure 1);		 No.043 2010-08-31
Height of segment h [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Height of segment "h" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Height of segment "h" " means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glazing, separating the inner surface of the glazing from a plane passing through the ends of the glazing (see Annex 17, Figure 1).		 No.043 2014-02-12
HEPA filter [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 HEPA filter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.38. "HEPA filter" means high-efficiency particulate air filters that are rated to achieve a minimum initial particle-removal efficiency of 99.97 per cent using ASTM F 1471–93 or equivalent standard;		 No.096 2014-03-22
HEV [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
(a) a consumable fuel;
(b) an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.083 2012-02-15
HEV [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 HEV (HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. This Annex defines the specific provisions regarding type-approval of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) as defined in paragraph 2.21.2 of this Regulation.
1.2. As a general principle, for the tests of Type I, II, III, IV, V, VI and OBD, hybrid electric vehicles shall be tested according to Annexes 4a, 5, 6, 7, 9, 8 and 11 respectively, unless modified by this Annex.
1.3. For the Type I test only, OVC vehicles (as categorised in paragraph 2) shall be tested according to condition A and to condition B. The test results under both conditions A and B and the weighted values shall be reported in the communication form.
1.4. The emissions test results shall comply with the limits under all specified test conditions of this Regulation.2. CATEGORIES OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES
[表] Vehicle charging / Off-Vehicle Charging (OVC) / Not Off-Vehicle Charging (NOVC)		 No.083 2012-02-15
HEV [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.2. Definition of Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV): "Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle, including vehicles which draw energy from a consumable fuel only for the purpose of recharging the electrical energy/power storage device that for the purpose of mechanical propulsion draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power: (a) A consumable fuel; (b) A battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device.		 No.083 2015-07-03
HEV [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)":
2.6.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.6.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- A consumable fuel;
- An electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);
2.6.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- An internal combustion engine; and
- One (or several) electric drive train(s);		 No.085 2014-11-07
HEV [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) [COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2009/108/ECa] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)
two or three-wheel motor vehicles		 [ANNEX I]
1.10. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a motorcycle, tricycle or quadricycle that, for the purpose of mechanical
propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy:
(a) a consumable fuel
(b) an electrical energy storage device'		 COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2009/108/EC
HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g.: battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator etc.)		 No.083 2008-05-06
HEV [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
HEV [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
HEV [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;
2.14.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2007-06-19
HFID [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 HFID Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
HFID Heated flame ionisation detector		 No.049 2010-08-31
HIAS [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS (Horizontal inclination adjustment system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Horizontal inclination adjustment system (HIAS)" means a device that adjusts the horizontal inclination of the headlamp towards zero;		 No.053 2013-06-18
HIAS signal [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "HIAS signal" means any control signal or, any additional control input to the system or, a control output from the system to the motorcycle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
HIAS signal generator [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS signal generator Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "HIAS signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the HIAS signals for system test;		 No.053 2013-06-18
HIAS test angle [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS test angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "HIAS test angle" means the angle δ created by the headlamp cut-off line and HH line (in case of an asymmetrical beam headlamp, the horizontal part of the cut-off shall be used), (see drawing in Annex 6).		 No.053 2013-06-18
HIC [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "HIC (Head Injury Criteria)" value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
HIC [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "HIC" (Head Injury Criteria) value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2010-08-31
High speed [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 n hi (High speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "High speed (n hi )" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs.		 No.049 2013-06-24
High speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 n hi (High speed) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.40. "High speed (n hi)" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the rated power (Annex 4A) or the maximum power (Annex 4B) occurs		 No.096 2014-03-22
high speed [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 high speed (nhi) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "high speed (nhi)_" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2008-04-12
high speed [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 high speed (nhi) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "high speed (nhi)" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2010-08-31
High voltage [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 High voltage protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "High voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is > 60 V and ≤ 1 500 V direct current (DC) or > 30 V and ≤ 1 000 V alternating current (AC) root-mean-square (rms);		 No.012 2013-03-27
High Voltage [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 High Voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High Voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is > 60 V and ≤ 1 500 V direct current (DC) or > 30 V and ≤ 1 000 V alternating current (AC) root – mean – square (rms),		 No.094 2012-09-20
High voltage [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 High voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is ＞ 60 V and ≦ 1 500 V direct current (DC) or ＞ 30 V and ≦ 1 000 V alternating current (AC) root-mean-square (rms).		 No.095 2015-07-10
High Voltage [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 High Voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "High Voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is > 60 V and ≤ 1 500 V DC or > 30 V and ≤ 1 000 V AC root mean square (rms).		 No.100 2011-02-14
High Voltage [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 High Voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "High Voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is ＞ 60 V and ≦ 1 500 V DC or ＞ 30 V and ≦ 1 000 V AC root mean square (rms).		 No.100 2015-03-31
High Voltage Bus [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 High Voltage Bus protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage;		 No.012 2013-03-27
High Voltage Bus [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 High Voltage Bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage,		 No.094 2012-09-20
High voltage bus [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 High voltage bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on a high voltage.		 No.095 2015-07-10
High voltage bus [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on high voltage.		 No.100 2011-02-14
High voltage bus [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on high voltage.
Where electrical circuits, that are galvanically connected to each other, are galvanically connected to the electrical chassis and the maximum voltage between any live part and the electrical chassis or any exposed conductive part is ≦ 30 V AC and ≦ 60 V DC, only the components or parts of the electric circuit that operate on high voltage are classified as a high voltage bus.		 No.100 2015-03-31
higher response threshold (Emergency locking retractor with, type 4N) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 1 , N 2 and N 3.		 No.016 2015-11-20
hinge (Plastic) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Plastic hinge (PH) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Plastic hinge" (PH) means a simple plastic zone formed on a rod-like element (single tube, window column, etc).		 No.066 2007-12-06
hinge (Plastic) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 PH (Plastic hinge) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Plastic hinge" (PH) means a simple plastic zone formed on a rod-like element (single tube, window column, etc.).		 No.066 2011-03-30
Hinge [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Hinge door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Hinge" is a device used to position the door relative to the body structure and control the path of the door swing for passenger ingress and egress.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Hinge pin [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Hinge pin door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Hinge pin" is that portion of the hinge normally interconnecting the body and door members and establishing the swing axis.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Hinge System (Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door Hinge System door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Door Hinge System" is one or more hinges used to support a door.		 No.011 2010-05-13
hitch (Coupling) height [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2.18. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer must be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test. No.117 2008-08-29
hitch height (Coupling) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.7. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer shall be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test.		 No.117 2011-11-23
hook (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation;		 No.014 2015-08-19
hook (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
hook (tether, top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether hook Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 of this Regulation.		 No.014 2007-12-06
hook (tether, top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
hook (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
hook (top-tether, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top-tether hook" means an Isofix top-tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top-tether strap to an Isofix top-tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Hoop wrap [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Hoop-wrap using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.59. "Hoop-wrap" means an over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement in a substantially circumferential pattern over the cylindrical portion of the liner so that the filament does not carry any significant load in a direction parallel to the cylinder longitudinal axis.		 No.110 2015-06-30
hoop-wrap [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 hoop-wrap Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.14. hoop-wrap: An over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement in a substantially circumferential pattern over the cylindrical portion of the liner so that the filament does not carry any significant load in a direction parallel to the cylinder longitudinal axis.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Horizontal inclination [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Horizontal inclination Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Horizontal inclination" means the angle created between the beam pattern when the motorcycle is set as specified in paragraph 5.4, and the beam pattern when the motorcycle is banked (see drawing in Annex 6);		 No.053 2013-06-18
Horizontal inclination adjustment system [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS (Horizontal inclination adjustment system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Horizontal inclination adjustment system (HIAS)" means a device that adjusts the horizontal inclination of the headlamp towards zero;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Horizontal seat-adjustment range [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Horizontal seat-adjustment range Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Horizontal seat-adjustment range" means the range of normal driving positions designated by the vehicle manufacturer for the adjustment of the driver’s seat in the direction of the X axis (see paragraph 2.3 above).		 No.125 2010-07-31
hoses (Flexible) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Flexible hoses LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.15. "Flexible hoses" means hoses for conveying liquefied petroleum gas in either a liquid or vapour state at various pressures from one point to another;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Hot soak loss [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,20 );		 No.083 2012-02-15
Hot soak loss [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C1 H2,20).		 No.083 2015-07-03
Hot soak losses [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C1 H2,20); No.083 2008-05-06
housing (Gas tight) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas-tight housing using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2015-06-30
housing (Gas-tight) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas-tight housing LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
housing (Gas-tight) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas-tight housing using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.19. "Gas-tight housing" means a device which vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2011-05-07
H-point [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 H-point protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "H-point" means the point defined in Annex 4, paragraph 2.3.		 No.029 2010-11-20
HS2 lamp [No.082 2014-03-25] 　 HS2 lamps (halogen lamps) Headlamps (HS2 moped) 1. SCOPE
This regulation applies to the approval of headlamps equipped with halogen lamps (HS2 lamps), which are provided for the equipment of mopeds and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. The trade name or mark,
2.2. The characteristics of the optical systems,
2.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.082 2014-03-25
HSB [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1", when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21", when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22", when they emit, at the user’s choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2010-07-17
HSB unit [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1",
when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21",
when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22",
when they emit, at the user's choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2001-06-25
HSB units of different type [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 HSB units of different types Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "HSB units of different types", means "units which differ" in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. the trade name or mark;
2.4.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation; the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not constitute a change of type;
2.4.4. the rated voltage;
2.4.5. the shape of the filament or filaments;
2.4.6. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.7. the materials constituting the lens and coating, if any		 No.031 2001-06-25
HSB units of different type [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 HSB units of different types asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "HSB units of different types" means units which differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. the trade name or mark;
2.4.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation; the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not constitute a change of type;
2.4.4. the rated voltage;
2.4.5. the shape of the filament or filaments;
2.4.6. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.7. the materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.031 2010-07-17
humidity measurement (Shared) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared humidity measurement Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.77. "Shared humidity measurement" means a humidity measurement that is used as the humidity for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
HV [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
(a) a consumable fuel;
(b) an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.083 2012-02-15
HV [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HV (Hybrid Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of Hybrid Vehicles (HV): "Hybrid Vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.		 No.083 2015-07-03
HV [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)":
2.6.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.6.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- A consumable fuel;
- An electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);
2.6.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- An internal combustion engine; and
- One (or several) electric drive train(s);		 No.085 2014-11-07
HV [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
HV (Hybrid vehicle) [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Hybrid vehicle (HV) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.		 No.083 2008-05-06
HV [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid vehicles (HV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
HV [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid vehicles (HV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the ‘power train’ comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
HV [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid vehicle (HV) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;
2.14.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Hybrid electric power train [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Hybrid electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/ power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.101 2012-05-26
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHIcle [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 HEV (HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. This Annex defines the specific provisions regarding type-approval of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) as defined in paragraph 2.21.2 of this Regulation.
1.2. As a general principle, for the tests of Type I, II, III, IV, V, VI and OBD, hybrid electric vehicles shall be tested according to Annexes 4a, 5, 6, 7, 9, 8 and 11 respectively, unless modified by this Annex.
1.3. For the Type I test only, OVC vehicles (as categorised in paragraph 2) shall be tested according to condition A and to condition B. The test results under both conditions A and B and the weighted values shall be reported in the communication form.
1.4. The emissions test results shall comply with the limits under all specified test conditions of this Regulation.2. CATEGORIES OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES
[表] Vehicle charging / Off-Vehicle Charging (OVC) / Not Off-Vehicle Charging (NOVC)		 No.083 2012-02-15
Hybrid Electric Vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.2. Definition of Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV): "Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle, including vehicles which draw energy from a consumable fuel only for the purpose of recharging the electrical energy/power storage device that for the purpose of mechanical propulsion draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power: (a) A consumable fuel; (b) A battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Hybrid electric vehicle [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)":
2.6.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.6.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- A consumable fuel;
- An electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);
2.6.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- An internal combustion engine; and
- One (or several) electric drive train(s);		 No.085 2014-11-07
Hybrid electric vehicle [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g.: battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator etc.)		 No.083 2008-05-06
hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) [REG. No 692/2008] 　 hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 16. "hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
(a) a consumable fuel;
(b) battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device;		 REG. No 692/2008
Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) COMMISSION [DIRECTIVE 2009/108/ECa] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)
two or three-wheel motor vehicles		 [ANNEX I]
1.10. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a motorcycle, tricycle or quadricycle that, for the purpose of mechanical
propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy:
(a) a consumable fuel
(b) an electrical energy storage device'		 COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2009/108/EC
Hybrid electric vehicle [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
Hybrid electric vehicle [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
Hybrid electric vehicle [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;
2.14.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Hybrid power train [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Hybrid power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hybrid power train" means a power train with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on-board the vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Hybrid power train [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Hybrid power train" means a power train with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on-board the vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.13.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g.: battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator …)		 No.101 2007-06-19
Hybrid steering transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Hybrid steering transmission Steering equipment 2.6.4. "Hybrid steering transmission" means a steering transmission in which part of the steering forces is transmitted through one and the other part through another of the above mentioned means. However, in the case where any mechanical part of the transmission is designed only to give position feedback and is too weak to transmit the total sum of the steering forces, this system shall be considered to be purely hydraulic or purely electric steering transmission. No.079 2008-05-27
Hybrid vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
(a) a consumable fuel;
(b) an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.083 2012-02-15
Hybrid Vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HV (Hybrid Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of Hybrid Vehicles (HV): "Hybrid Vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Hybrid vehicle [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)":
2.6.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.6.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- A consumable fuel;
- An electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);
2.6.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- An internal combustion engine; and
- One (or several) electric drive train(s);		 No.085 2014-11-07
Hybrid vehicle [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Hybrid vehicle (HV) [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Hybrid vehicle (HV) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.		 No.083 2008-05-06
Hybrid vehicle [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid vehicles (HV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
Hybrid vehicle [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid vehicles (HV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the ‘power train’ comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
Hybrid vehicle [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid vehicle (HV) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;
2.14.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Hydraulic braking system with stored energy [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Hydraulic braking system with stored energy [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Hydrocarbon [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 HC (Hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.39. "Hydrocarbon (HC)" means THC, NMHC as applicable. Hydrocarbon generally means the hydrocarbon group on which the emission standards are based for each type of fuel and engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
hydrocarbon (methane, Non) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NMHC (Non-methane hydrocarbons) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.51. "Non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC)" means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane;		 No.096 2014-03-22
hydrocarbon (Total) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 THC (Total hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.88. "Total hydrocarbon (THC)" means the combined mass of organic compounds measured by the specified procedure for measuring total hydrocarbon, expressed as a hydrocarbon with a hydrogen-to-carbon mass ratio of 1,85:1;		 No.096 2014-03-22
hydrogen component [REG. No 079/2009] 　 hydrogen component hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(c) "hydrogen component" means the hydrogen container and all other parts of the hydrogen-powered vehicle that are in direct contact with hydrogen or which form part of a hydrogen system; REG. No 079/2009
Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle" means a vehicle powered by a fuel cell that converts chemical energy from hydrogen into electric energy, for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
hydrogen powered vehicle [REG. No 079/2009] 　 hydrogen-powered vehicle hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(a) "hydrogen-powered vehicle" means any motor vehicle that uses hydrogen as fuel to propel the vehicle; REG. No 079/2009
hydrogen system [REG. No 079/2009] 　 hydrogen system hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(d) "hydrogen system" means an assembly of hydrogen components and connecting parts fitted on hydrogen-powered vehicles, excluding the propulsion systems or auxiliary power units; REG. No 079/2009
hydrogen system [REG. No 079/2009a] 　 hydrogen systems hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 2. For the purposes of paragraph 1(d), "hydrogen systems" shall include, inter alia, the following:
(a) usage monitoring and control systems;
(b) vehicle interface systems;
(c) excess flow systems;
(d) overpressure protection systems;
(e) heat exchanger failure detection systems.		 REG. No 079/2009
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
I (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Illumination axis (symbol I) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.2. "Illumination axis (symbol I)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the light source.		 No.104 2014-03-14
i Size [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
i Size seating position [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 i-Size seating position safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "i-Size seating position" means a seating position, if any defined by the vehicle manufacturer, which is designed to accommodate an i-Size child restraint system, as defined in Regulation No 129, and fulfils the requirements defined in this Regulation.		 No.014 2015-08-19
i Size seating position [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size seating position Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "i-Size seating position" means a seating position, if defined by the vehicle manufacturer, which is designed to accommodate an i-Size child restraint system, as defined in Regulation No 129, and fulfils the requirements defined in this Regulation.		 No.016 2015-11-20
i Size support leg installation assessment volume [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Identical brake disc [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identical brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Identical brake drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identical brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Identical replacement wheels [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Identical replacement wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Identical replacement wheels" being wheels which are manufactured using the same manufacturing equipment and material as that used for replacement wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer. They differ from vehicle manufacturer’s replacement wheels only by the absence of vehicle manufacturer's trademarks and part number;		 No.124 2006-12-27
Identification Code [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Identification Code Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Identification Code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to this regulation. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Identification code [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Identification code Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Identification code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to this regulation. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Identification code [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Identification code Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.2. "Identification code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to Regulations Nos 13 and 13-H. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.
The vehicle manufacturer shall provide on request of the technical service and/or approval authority the necessary information, which makes the link between the braking system type- approval and the corresponding identification code.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Idle speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Idle speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.41. "Idle speed" means the lowest engine speed with minimum load (greater than or equal to zero load), where an engine governor function controls engine speed. For engines without a governor function that controls idle speed, idle speed means the manufacturer-declared value for lowest engine speed possible with minimum load. Note that warm idle speed is the idle speed of a warmed-up engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
ignition (positive-, compression-) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 P.I., C.I. (positive-, compression-ignition) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- For positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants,
- For compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particle numbers;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Ignition cycle counter [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Ignition cycle counter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Ignition cycle counter" means a counter indicating the number of engine starts a vehicle has experienced;		 No.049 2013-06-24
ignition engine (Compression) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 C.I. (Compression ignition) engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.9. "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.096 2014-03-22
ignition engine (Compression) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Compression ignition (C.I.) engine Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.3 "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which operates on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);		 No.024 2006-11-24
Ignition key [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Ignition key Interior fittings 2.16.1. "Ignition key" means the device that operates the electric power supply necessary to operate the engine or motor of the vehicle. This definition does not preclude a non-mechanical device. No.021 2008-07-16
Ignitor [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Ignitor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.2.2. "Ignitor" means an electronic light source control gear to start the arc of a gas-discharge light source. No.048 2008-05-23
Ignitor [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Ignitor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.2.2. "Ignitor" means an electronic light source control gear to start the arc of a gas-discharge light source;		 No.048 2011-12-06
illuminating device (registration plate, Rear) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.10. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;		 No.053 2013-06-18
illuminating device (registration plate, Rear) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Rear-registration-plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.13. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical component.		 No.074 2013-06-18
illuminating device (registration plate, Rear) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear-registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.13. "Rear-registration plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;		 No.048 2011-12-06
illuminating device of different type (registration plate, rear) [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
illuminating lamp (Concealable) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Concealable illuminating lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.6. "Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.086 2010-09-30
illuminating surface [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 illuminating surface installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6. illuminating surface (see Appendix 1)
6.1. light-emitting surface of a lighting device or retro-reflector
6.2. illuminating surface of a lighting device (see points 5.7, 5.8, 5.13 and 5.15)
6.3. illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector (see points 5.9 to 5.12, 5.14, 5.16 and 5.17)
6.4. illuminating surface of a retro-reflector (see point 5.18)		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Illuminating surface [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Illuminating surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.9. "Illuminating surface" (see Annex 3); No.048 2008-05-23
Illuminating surface [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Illuminating surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Illuminating surface" (see Annex 3);
2.7.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.5.6, 2.5.7 and 2.5.15) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the "projection lens", on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.7.2 shall be applied. If the light emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.
In the case of a passing beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;
In the case where any combination of a headlamp producing the principal passing beam and additional lighting units or light sources designed to produce bend lighting are operated together, the individual illuminating surfaces, taken together, constitute the illuminating surface.
2.7.2. "Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector" (paragraphs 2.5.8, 2.5.9, 2.5.11, 2.5.12, 2.5.14 and 2.5.16) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used;
2.7.3. "Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector" (paragraph 2.5.13) means the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes continuous to the outermost parts of the retro-reflector’s optical system and parallel to that axis. For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Illuminating surface [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Illuminating surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Illuminating surface" (see Annex 3);
2.7.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.5.6 and 2.5.7) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the ‘projection lens’, on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.7.2 shall be applied. If the light emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.
In the case of a passing beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;
2.7.2. "Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector" (paragraphs 2.5.8, 2.5.10, 2.5.11 and 2.5.12) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used;
2.7.3. "Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector" (paragraph 2.5.9) means the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes continuous to the outermost parts of the retro-reflector's optical system and parallel to that axis. For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Illuminating surface [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Illuminating surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Illuminating surface" (see Annex 3);
2.9.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.7.9, 2.7.10, 2.7.19, 2.7.21 and 2.7.26) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the "projection lens", on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.9.2 shall be applied. If the light- emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.
In the case of a dipped-beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;
In the case of AFS being installed: where a lighting function is produced by two or more simultaneously operated lighting units on a given side of the vehicle, the individual illuminating surfaces, taken together, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered (for example, in the figure of paragraph 6.22.4 below, the individual illuminating surfaces of the lighting units 8, 9 and 11, regarded together and taking into account their respective location, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered for the right hand side of the vehicle);
2.9.2. "Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector" (paragraphs 2.7.11 to 2.7.15, 2.7.18, 2.7.20 and 2.7.22 to 2.7.25) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference.
To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used to verify the distance to the extreme edges of the vehicle and the height above the ground.
For other applications of the illuminating surface, e.g. distance between two lamps or functions, the shape of the periphery of this illuminating surface shall be used. The screens shall remain parallel, but other orientations are allowed to be used.
In the case of a light-signalling device whose illuminating surface encloses either totally or partially the illuminating surface of another function or encloses a non-lighted surface, the illuminating surface may be considered to be the light-emitting surface itself (see, e.g. Annex 3, Parts 2, 3, 5 and 6);
2.9.3. "Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector" (paragraph 2.7.16) means, as declared by the applicant during the component approval procedure for the retro-reflectors, the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes contiguous to the declared outermost parts of the retro-reflectors' optical system and parallel to that axis. For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Illuminating surface of a lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Illuminating surface of a lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Illuminating surface of a lamp (see Annex 3).
2.6.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.5.8 to 2.5.11) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector in a transverse plane. If the lamp glass (or glasses) extend(s) over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account. In the case of a passing lamp, the illuminating surface is limited on the side of the cut-off by the apparent projection of the line of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and glass are adjustable, the mean adjustment should be used;
2.6.2. "Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a retro reflector" (paragraphs 2.5.12 to 2.5.20) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 % of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used;
2.6.3. "Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector" (paragraph 2.5.22) means the orthogonal projection of the reflecting surface of the retro reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and bounded by planes touching the outer edges of the light projection surface of the retro reflector and parallel to this axis. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only vertical and horizontal planes shall be used;
2.6.4. "Light-emitting surface" means that part of the exterior surface of the transparent lens that encloses the lighting or light-signalling device and allows it to emit light.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Illuminating surface of a lighting device [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Illuminating surface of a lighting device installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6.1. Illuminating surface of a lighting device
"Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (points 1.5.7 to 1.5.10) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector in a transverse plane. If the lamp glass (or glasses) extend(s) over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account. In the case of a dippedbeam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited on the side of the cut-off by the apparent projection of the line of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and glass are adjustable, the mean adjustment should be used.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
illuminating surface of a lighting device [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 illuminating surface of a lighting device installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.2. illuminating surface of a lighting device (see points 5.7, 5.8, 5.13 and 5.15)
means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the projection lens, on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of point 6.3 is applied. If the light-emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account. In the case of a dipped-beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment is used;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Illuminating surface of a lighting device [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Illuminating surface of a lighting device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.9.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.7.9., 2.7.10., 2.7.19., 2.7.21. and 2.7.26.) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the "projection lens", on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.9.2. shall be applied. If the light emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.
In the case of a dipped-beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;
In case an AFS is installed:
where a lighting function is produced by two or more simultaneously operated lighting units on a given side of the vehicle, the individual illuminating surfaces, taken together, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered (for example, in the figure of paragraph 6.22.4. below, the individual illuminating surfaces of the lighting units 8, 9 and 11, regarded together and taking into account their respective location, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered for the right hand side of the vehicle).		 No.048 2008-05-23
illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.3. illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector (see points 5.9 to 5.12, 5.14, 5.16 and 5.17)
means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 % of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference; to determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges are used;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.9.2. "Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector" (paragraphs 2.7.11. to 2.7.15., 2.7.18., 2.7.20. and 2.7.22. to 2.7.25) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference.
To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used to verify the distance to the extreme edges of the vehicle and the height above the ground.
For other applications of the illuminating surface, e.g. distance between two lamps or functions, the shape of the periphery of this illuminating surface shall be used. The screens shall remain parallel, but other orientations are allowed to be used.
In the case of a light-signalling device whose illuminating surface encloses either totally or partially the illuminating surface of another function or encloses a non-lighted surface, the illuminating surface may be considered to be the light emitting surface itself.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6.3. Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector
"Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector" (point 1.5.20) means the orthogonal projection of the reflecting surface of the reflex reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and bounded by planes touching the outer edges of the light projection surface of the reflex reflector and parallel to this axis. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only vertical and horizontal planes shall be used.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
illuminating surface of a retro-reflector [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 illuminating surface of a retro-reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.4. illuminating surface of a retro-reflector (see point 5.18)
means the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and bounded by planes touching the outer edges of the light projection surface of the retro-reflector and parallel to this axis. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only horizontal and vertical planes are used;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.9.3. "Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector" (paragraph 2.7.16.) means, as declared by the applicant during the component approval procedure for the retro-reflectors, the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes contiguous to the declared outermost parts of the retro-reflectors" optical system and parallel to that axis.
For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a reflex reflector [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a reflex reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6.2. Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a reflex reflector
"Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a reflex reflector" (points 1.5.11 to 1.5.19) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 % of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Illumination angle [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Illumination angle Retro-reflecting devices 2.6. "Illumination angle" means the angle between the axis of reference and the straight line connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the source of illumination. No.003 2009-01-31
Illumination angle [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Illumination angle Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Illumination angle" means the angle between the axis of reference and the straight line connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the source of illumination.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Illumination axis [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Illumination axis (symbol I) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.2. "Illumination axis (symbol I)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the light source.		 No.104 2014-03-14
Illumination axis [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Illumination axis Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.2. "Illumination axis", a line segment from the reference centre to the light source.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Illumination of the retro reflecting device [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Illumination of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Illumination of the retro-reflecting device" is the abbreviated expression used conventionally to designate the illumination measured in a plane perpendicular to the incident rays and passing through the centre of reference.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Illumination of the retro-reflecting device [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Illumination of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2.9. "Illumination of the retro-reflecting device" is the abbreviated expression used conventionally to designate the illumination measured in a plane perpendicular to the incident rays and passing through the centre of reference. No.003 2009-01-31
image (Secondary) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary image safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Secondary image" means a spurious or ghost image, in addition to the bright primary image, usually seen at night when the object being viewed is very bright in relation to its surroundings, for example, the headlights of an approaching vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
image separation (Secondary) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary image separation safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Secondary image separation" means the angular distance between the position of the primary and secondary images.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Imbalance [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Imbalance 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Imbalance" means a measurement of the variation in distribution of mass around the centre axis of the tyre. It can be measured as either "Static" or "Dynamic" imbalance.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Immobiliser [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Immobiliser alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.1. "Immobiliser" means a device which is intended to prevent normal driving away of a vehicle under its own power (prevention of unauthorised use).		 No.097 2012-05-08
Immobiliser [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Immobiliser alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Immobiliser" means a device which is intended to prevent the vehicle being driven away powered by its own engine;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Immobiliser [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.11. "Immobiliser" means a device which is intended to prevent the vehicle being driven away powered by its own engine.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Immobiliser [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.1. "Immobiliser" means a device which is intended to prevent normal driving away of a vehicle under its own power (prevention of unauthorised use).		 No.116 2012-02-16
immobiliser (Type of) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Type of immobiliser alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.9. "Type of immobiliser" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer’s trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of control equipment;
(c) the design of their operation on the relevant vehicle system(s) (as referred to in paragraph 32.1 below).		 No.097 2012-05-08
immobiliser (Type of) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Type of immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.9. "Type of immobiliser" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of control equipment,
(c) the design of their operation on the relevant vehicle system(s) (as referred to in paragraph 8.3.1 below).		 No.116 2012-02-16
immobiliser (Type of) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Type of immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.9. "Type of immobiliser" means systems that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of control equipment;
(c) the design of their operation on the relevant vehicle system(s) (as referred to in paragraph 8.3.1 below).		 No.116 2010-06-30
immobiliser (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser;
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.097 2012-05-08
immobiliser (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser;
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.116 2010-06-30
immobiliser (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser,
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Immobiliser [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.11. "Immobiliser" means a device which is intended to prevent the vehicle being driven away powered by its own engine.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Immobiliser [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.1. "Immobiliser" means a device that is intended to prevent normal driving away of a vehicle under its own power (prevention of unauthorised use).		 No.116 2010-06-30
Immobilizer [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Immobilizer Alarm systems 2.10. "Immobilizer" means a device which is intended to prevent the vehicle being driven away powered by its own engine; No.097 2008-12-30
immunity (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Electromagnetic immunity Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to operate without degradation of performance in the presence of (specified) electromagnetic disturbances which includes wanted radio frequency signals from radio transmitters or radiated in-band emissions of industrial-scientific-medical (ISM) apparatus, internal or external to the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
immunity (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electromagnetic immunity Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Electromagnetic immunity" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to operate without degradation of performance in the presence of (specified) electro- magnetic disturbances which includes wanted radio frequency signals from radio transmitters or radiated in-band emissions of industrial-scientific-medical (ISM) apparatus, internal or external to the vehicle.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Immunity related function [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Immunity related functions Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Immunity related functions" are:
(a) Functions related to the direct control of the vehicle:
(i) By degradation or change in: e.g. engine, gear, brake, suspension, active steering, speed limitation devices;
(ii) By affecting driver's position: e.g. seat or steering wheel positioning;
(iii) By affecting driver's visibility: e.g. dipped beam, windscreen wiper.
(b) Functions related to driver, passenger and other road user protection:
E.g. airbag and safety restraint systems.
(c) Functions which when disturbed cause confusion to the driver or other road users:
(i) Optical disturbances: incorrect operation of e.g. direction indicators, stop lamps, end outline marker lamps, rear position lamp, light bars for emergency system, wrong information from warning indicators, lamps or displays related to functions in subparagraph (a) or (b) which might be observed in the direct view of the driver;
(ii) Acoustical disturbances: incorrect operation of e.g. anti-theft alarm, horn.
(d) Functions related to vehicle data bus functionality:
By blocking data transmission on vehicle data bus-systems, which are used to transmit data, required to ensure the correct functioning of other immunity related functions.
(e) Functions which when disturbed affect vehicle statutory data: e.g. tachograph, odometer.
(f) Functions related to the RESS in charging mode coupled to the power grid:
By leading to unexpected vehicle motion.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Immunity related functions [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Immunity related functions Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Immunity related functions" are:
(a) Functions related to the direct control of the vehicle:
(i) by degradation or change in: e.g. engine, gear, brake, suspension, active steering, speed limitation devices;
(ii) by affecting driver’s position: e.g. seat or steering wheel positioning;
(iii) by affecting driver’s visibility: e.g. dipped beam, windscreen wiper.
(b) Functions related to driver, passenger and other road user protection:
(i) e.g. airbag and safety restraint systems.
(c) Functions which when disturbed cause confusion to the driver or other road users:
(i) optical disturbances: incorrect operation of e.g. direction indicators, stop lamps, end outline marker lamps, rear position lamp, light bars for emergency system, wrong information from warning indicators, lamps or displays related to functions in subparagraphs (a) or (b) which might be observed in the direct view of the driver;
(ii) acoustical disturbances: incorrect operation of e.g. anti-theft alarm, horn.
(d) Functions related to vehicle data bus functionality:
(i) by blocking data transmission on vehicle data bus-systems, which are used to transmit data, required to ensure the correct functioning of other immunity related functions.
(e) Functions which when disturbed affect vehicle statutory data: e.g. tachograph, odometer.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Impact shield [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Impact shield Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Impact shield" means a device secured in front of the child and designed to distribute the restraining forces over the greater part of the height of the child's body in the event of a frontal impact.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Impact shield [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Impact shield Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Impact shield’ means a device secured in front of the child and designed to distribute the restraining forces over the greater part of the height of the child's body in the event of a frontal impact.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Impact shield [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Impact shield Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Impact shield" means a device secured in front of the child and designed to distribute the restraining forces over the greater part of the height of the child’s body in the event of a frontal impact.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Impactor [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Impactor Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.17. "Impactor" consists of a rigid hemispherical headform 165 mm in diameter, in accordance with Annex 5, paragraph 3 of this Regulation; No.012 2008-06-26
Impactor [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Impactor protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Impactor" consists of a rigid hemispherical headform 165 mm in diameter, in accordance with Annex 5, paragraph 3 of this Regulation;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Impactor [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Impactor Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Impactor" means a crushable section mounted on the front of mobile deformable barrier.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Impactor [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Impactor Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Impactor" means a crushable section mounted on the front of mobile deformable barrier;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Implement tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Implement tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Implement tyre" means a tyre designed primarily for agricultural machines or implements (vehicles in category S) or for agricultural trailers (vehicles in category R); however it may also equip either front steering wheels and drive wheels of agricultural and forestry tractors (vehicles in category T), but it is not suitable for sustained high torque services.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Improved Flexion Tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Improved Flexion Tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.
2.20.1. "Improved Flexion Tyre" or "Very High Flexion Tyre" describe a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre.		 No.106 2010-09-30
In service operating pressure [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 In service operating pressure (Pwarm) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "In service operating pressure (P warm)" means the inflation pressure for each tyre position elevated from the cold pressure (P rec ) by temperature effects during vehicle usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
In service test [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 In-service test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.14. "In-service test" means the test and evaluation of conformity conducted in accordance with paragraph 8.2.1. of this Regulation; No.083 2008-05-06
In service test [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 In-service test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "In-service test" means the test and evaluation of conformity conducted in accordance with paragraph 9.2.1 of this Regulation;		 No.083 2012-02-15
In service test [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 In-service test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "In-service test" means the test and evaluation of conformity conducted in accordance with paragraph 9.2.1 of this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
In Use performance ratio [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 IUPR (In-Use performance ratio) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "In-Use performance ratio" (IUPR) means the ratio of the number of times that the conditions have existed under which a monitor, or group of monitors, should have detected a malfunction relative to the number of driving cycles relevant for the operation of that monitor or group of monitors;		 No.049 2013-06-24
In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 IUPRM (In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
inclination (Horizontal) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Horizontal inclination Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Horizontal inclination" means the angle created between the beam pattern when the motorcycle is set as specified in paragraph 5.4, and the beam pattern when the motorcycle is banked (see drawing in Annex 6);		 No.053 2013-06-18
inclination adjustment system (Horizontal) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS (Horizontal inclination adjustment system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Horizontal inclination adjustment system (HIAS)" means a device that adjusts the horizontal inclination of the headlamp towards zero;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Inclination angle of a windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Inclination angle of a windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.15.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 ± 1 kg;
2.15.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Inclination angle of a windscreen [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Inclination angle of a windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.12.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 ± 1 kg;
2.12.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Inclined position [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Inclined position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Inclined position" means a special position of the chair which allows the child to recline.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Inclined position [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Inclined position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Inclined position" means a special position of the chair which allows the child to recline.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Inclined position [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Inclined position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Inclined position" means a special position of the chair which allows the child to recline.		 No.044 2011-09-09
incorporated (Reciprocally) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Reciprocally incorporated Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;		 No.053 2013-06-18
incorporated (Reciprocally) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Reciprocally incorporated Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;		 No.074 2013-06-18
incorporated lamp (Reciprocally) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.6. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
incorporated lamp (Reciprocally) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources (or a single light source operating under different conditions), totally or partially common lenses and a common lamp body;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Independent endurance braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Independent endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device.
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems;
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device;
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Independent endurance braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Independent endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Independent lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Independent lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.2. Independent lamps
"Independent lamps" means lamps having separate lenses, separate light sources, and separate lamp bodies		 Directive 2009/061/EC
independent lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 independent lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.3. independent lamps
means lamps having separate illuminating surfaces, light sources and lamp bodies;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Independent lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Independent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.3. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces (1), separate light sources and separate lamp bodies; No.048 2008-05-23
Independent lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Independent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.2. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Independent lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Independent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.2. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Independent lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Independent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.3. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ), separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Independent lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Independent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.2. "Independent lamps" means lamps having separate lenses, separate light sources, and separate lamp bodies;		 No.086 2010-09-30
independent operator [REG. No 595/2009] 　 independent operator emissions 13. "independent operator" means undertakings other than authorised dealers and repairers which are directly or indirectly involved in the repair and maintenance of motor vehicles, in particular repairers, manufacturers or distributors of repair equipment, tools or spare parts, publishers of technical information, automobile clubs, roadside assistance operators, operators offering inspection and testing services, operators offering training for installers, manufacturers and repairers of equipment for alternative fuel vehicles; REG. No 595/2009
index (Load) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Load index 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Load index" means a numerical code which indicates the maximum load the tyre can support. The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation.		 No.108 2006-07-04
index (Load) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Load index Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Load index" means a numerical code which indicates the load the tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to the associated speed symbol and when operated in conformity with the service conditions specified by the manufacturer. A pneumatic tyre can have more than one load index to indicate its load capacity when used in single or dual (twin) formation, or to indicate an alternative load capacity (Unique point) on which a load variation in accordance with paragraph 2.35 and Annex 8 to this Regulation is not permitted.
The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation.		 No.109 2006-07-04
index (Load-capacity) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Load-capacity index Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Load-capacity index" means one number which indicates the load the tyre can carry in single formation at the speed corresponding to the associated speed category and when operated in conformity with the requirements governing utilisation specified by the manufacturer. The list of these indices and their corresponding masses is given in annex 4;		 No.106 2010-09-30
index (Wobbe) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
W=Hgas x Root (ρair/ρgas)		 No.049 2008-04-12
index (Wobbe) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:		 No.049 2010-08-31
index (Wobbe, lower; or upper) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wl, Wu (Wobbe index : lower; or upper) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.66. "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
[式] W = H gas SQRT(ρ air / ρ gas)		 No.049 2013-06-24
index of difficulty [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 indices of difficulty safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. The term "indices of difficulty" covers a two-stage grading system applying to the variations observed in practice in each secondary characteristic. A change from index "1" to index "2" indicates the need for additional tests.		 No.043 2014-02-12
indicator [Directive 2009/080/EC] 　 indicator identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators for two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "indicator" means a device providing information on the proper functioning or state of a system or part of a system such as the level of a fluid;		 Directive 2009/080/EC
Indicator [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Indicator Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Indicator" means a device which presents information on the functioning or situation of a system or a part of a system, for example a fluid level.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Indicator [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Indicator Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Indicator" means a device that shows the magnitude of the physical characteristics that the instrument is designed to sense.		 No.121 2016-01-08
indicator (Direction) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 Direction indicator Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Direction indicator" means a device mounted on a motor vehicle or trailer which, when operated by the driver, signals the latter’s intention to change the direction in which the vehicle is proceeding. The present Regulation applies solely to fixed-position flashing light devices whose flashing is obtained by the intermittent supply of electric current to the lamp.		 No.006 2014-07-18
indicator (Direction) [No.006 2001-05-14] 　 Direction indicator Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Direction indicator" means a device mounted on a motor vehicle or trailer which, when operated by the driver, signals the latter’s intention to change the direction in which the vehicle is proceeding. The present Regulation applies solely to fixed-position flashing light devices whose flashing is obtained by the intermittent supply of electric current to the lamp.		 No.006 2001-05-14
indicator (Direction) [No.006 2010-07-10] 　 Direction indicator Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Direction indicator" means a device mounted on a motor vehicle or trailer which, when operated by the driver, signals the latter’s intention to change the direction in which the vehicle is proceeding. The present Regulation applies solely to fixed-position flashing light devices whose flashing is obtained by the intermittent supply of electric current to the lamp.		 No.006 2010-07-10
indicator (Level) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Level indicator LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
indicator (Malfunction) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 MI (Malfunction indicator) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Malfunction indicator" (MI) means an indicator which is part of the alert system and which clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
indicator (Malfunction) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 MI (Malfunction indicator) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visible or audible indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction of any emission-related component connected to the OBD system, or the OBD system itself.		 No.083 2012-02-15
indicator (malfunction) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visual indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction in the sense of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
indicator (malfunction) [No.049 2010-68-31] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visual indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction in the sense of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
indicator (Pressure) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure sensor/indicator using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.		 No.110 2015-06-30
indicator (Pressure) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure indicator using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.20. "Pressure indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas pressure.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Indicator [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Indicator Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Indicator" means a device which presents information on the functioning or situation of a system or a part of a system, for example a fluid level;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Indicator [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Indicator Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Indicator" means a device that shows the magnitude of the physical characteristics that the instrument is designed to sense.		 No.121 2010-07-10
indicator lamp (Direction) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.8. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.		 No.053 2013-06-18
indicator lamp (Direction) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.10. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.		 No.074 2013-06-18
indicator lamp (Direction) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.11. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to the provisions of Regulation No 97;		 No.048 2011-12-06
indicator lamp (Direction-) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.12. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;		 No.086 2010-09-30
indicator lamp of different type (direction) [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
indicator of different type (Direction) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 Direction indicators of different types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the category of direction indicator lamps;
(d) the variable intensity control, if any;
(e) the sequential activation of light sources, if any.
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.006 2014-07-18
indicators (Direction, of different type) [No.006 2010-07-10] 　 Direction indicators of different types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category offilament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the category of direction indicator lamps;
(d) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a changeof type.		 No.006 2010-07-10
indicators (Remote) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Remote indicators Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged.		 No.055 2006-12-27
indicators (Remote) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Remote indicators mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged.		 No.055 2010-08-28
indicators (wear, Tread) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread wear indicators 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Tread wear indicators" means the projections within the tread grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degree of wear of the tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
indicators type (Direction) [No.006 2001-05-14] 　 Direction indicators types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different "types""
- are different indicators which differ in such essential respects as:
- The trade name or mark, The characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, etc.),
- The category of direction indicators,
- The colour of the filament lamp.		 No.006 2001-05-14
Indices of difficulty [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Indices of difficulty Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. The term "Indices of difficulty" covers a two-stage grading system applying to the variations observed in practice in each secondary characteristic. A change from index "1" to index "2" indicates the need for additional tests;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Indirect contact [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Indirect contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Indirect contact [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Indirect contact [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Indirect contact [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2.18. "Indirect contact" means contact of persons or livestock with exposed conductive parts. No.100 2009-02-14
Indirect contact [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts		 No.100 2011-02-14
Indirect contact [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.		 No.100 2015-03-31
indirect vision (Camera-monitor device for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2.		 No.046 2010-07-10
indirect vision (Device for) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Devices for indirect vision" means devices to observe the traffic area adjacent to the vehicle which cannot be observed by direct vision. These can be conventional mirrors, camera-monitors or other devices able to present information about the indirect field of vision to the driver.		 No.046 2014-08-08
indirect vision (device for, Other) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Other devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3."Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, where the field of vision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indi rect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
indirect vision (device for, Type of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4."Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essential characteristics:
(a) Design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork;
(b) In case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mir ror’s reflecting surface;
(c) In case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
indirect vision (Devices for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Devices for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Devices for indirect vision" means devices to observe the traffic area adjacent to the vehicle which cannot be observed by direct vision. These can be conventional mirrors, camera-monitors or other devices able to present information about the indirect field of vision to the driver.		 No.046 2010-07-10
indirect vision (monitor device for, Camera) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2."Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2 below.		 No.046 2014-08-08
indirect vision (Other devices for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Other devices for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field ofvision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
indirect vision (Type of device for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Type of device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essentialcharacteristics:
- design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork,
- in case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mirror's reflecting surface,—
in case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
indirect vision (vehicle as regard, Type of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.3."Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optional devi ces for indirect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
indirect vision (vehicle as regards, Type of) [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.3. "Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respectof the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optionaldevices for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Individual occupant mass [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Individual occupant mass (Mmi) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Individual occupant mass [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mmi (Individual occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi ) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Individual seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Individual seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Individual seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of one seated passenger;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Individual seat [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Individual seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Individual seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of one seated passenger;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Inertia braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilising the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Inertia braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilizing the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Infant carrier [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Infant carrier Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.129 2014-03-29
infant carrier [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 infant carrier Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2007-11-23
infant carrier [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 infant carrier Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child’s head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2011-09-09
inflation pressure (cold, Recommended) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec )" means the pressure recommended for each tyre position by the vehicle manufacturer, for the intended service conditions (e.g. speed and load) of the given vehicle, as defined on the vehicle placard and/or the vehicle owner's manual.		 No.064 2010-11-26
information (Repair) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Repair information Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Repair information" means all information required for diagnosis, servicing, inspection, periodic monitoring or repair of the vehicle and which the manufacturers provide for their authorised dealers/repair shops. Where necessary, such information shall include service handbooks, technical manuals, diagnosis information (e.g. minimum and maximum theoretical values for measurements), wiring diagrams, the software calibration identification number applicable to a vehicle type, instructions for individual and special cases, information provided concerning tools and equipment, data record information and two-directional monitoring and test data. The manufacturer shall not be obliged to make available that information which is covered by intellectual property rights or constitutes specific know-how of manufacturers and/or OEM suppliers; in this case the necessary technical information shall not be improperly withheld.		 No.083 2012-02-15
information (repair) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 repair information Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"repair information" means all information required for diagnosis, servicing, inspection, periodic monitoring or repair of the engine and which the manufacturers provide for their authorized dealers/repair shops. Where necessary, such information shall include service handbooks, technical manuals, diagnosis information (e.g. minimum and maximum theoretical values for measurements), wiring diagrams, the software calibration identification number applicable to an engine type, information enabling the update of the software of the electronic systems in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer, instructions for individual and special cases, information provided concerning tools and equipment, data record information and twodirectional monitoring and test data. The manufacturer shall not be obliged to make available that information which is covered by intellectual property rights or constitutes specific know-how of manufacturers and/or OEM suppliers; in this case the necessary technical information shall not be improperly withheld;		 No.049 2008-04-12
infrequent regeneration [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Periodic (or infrequent) regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.64. "Periodic (or infrequent) regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after- treatment system that occurs periodically in typically less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission limits may be exceeded;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Initial brake temperature [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Initial brake temperature Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Initial brake temperature" means the temperature of the hottest brake before any brake application.		 No.078 2015-01-30
injection engine (Direct) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Direct injection engine Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Direct injection engine" means an engine which can operate in a mode where the fuel is injected into the intake air after the air has been drawn through the inlet valves.		 No.083 2015-07-03
injector (Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas injector using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.32. "Gas injector" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine or associated intake system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
injector (gas) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.10. "Gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece" means a device which establishes the liquid or vaporized LPG to enter the engine;		 No.067 2008-03-14
injector (Gas) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas injector using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Gas supply device" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine intake manifold (carburettor or injector).
2.17.1. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.
2.17.2. "Gas injector" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine or associated intake system.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Injury Criteria (Head) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "HIC (Head Injury Criteria)" value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Injury Criteria (Head) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 HIC (Head Injury Criteria) Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "HIC" (Head Injury Criteria) value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.		 No.043 2010-08-31
inner tank [REG. No 079/2009] 　 inner tank hydrogen-powered motor vehicles (g) "inner tank" means the part of the hydrogen container designed to use liquid hydrogen that contains the cryogenic hydrogen. REG. No 079/2009
Inner vessel or tank [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Inner vessel or inner tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.70. "Inner vessel or inner tank" means part of the fuel tank that contains LNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Inset [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Inset (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Inset" means the distance from the attachment face of the disc to the centre line of the rim (that can be positive, as shown in Figure 1 below, zero, or negative).		 No.124 2006-12-27
inside diameter (Maximum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Maximum inside diameter Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.13. "Maximum inside diameter": the maximum inside diameter of the brake drum is the point at which replacement becomes necessary.		 No.090 2012-07-13
installation assessment volume (leg, support, i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Installation unit [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Installation unit Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.2. "Installation unit" means an indivisible housing (lamp body) which contains one or more lighting unit(s);ﾁ No.048 2008-05-23
Installation unit [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Installation unit (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.2. "Installation unit" means an indivisible housing (lamp body) which contains one or more lighting unit(s);		 No.048 2011-12-06
Installation unit [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Installation unit Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Installation unit" means an indivisible housing (lamp body) which contains one or more lighting unit(s);		 No.123 2006-12-27
Installation unit [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Installation unit Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Installation unit" means an indivisible housing (lamp body) which contains one or more lighting unit(s);		 No.123 2010-08-24
installed in a vertical position (Material) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Material installed in a vertical position burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.9. "Material installed in a vertical position" means materials installed in the interior compartment, the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment of the vehicle such that its slope exceeds 15 % from the horizontal when the vehicle is at its mass in running order and it is standing on a smooth and horizontal ground surface.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Installer [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Installer LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Installer" means an organisation which can assume technical responsibility for the correct and safe installation of the approved LPG and CNG retrofit system, in conformity with respectively paragraphs 6.1.1.3 and 6.2.1.3 of this Regulation.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Insulation material [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Insulation material(s) burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.7. "Insulation material(s)" means material(s) used to reduce heat transfer by conduction, radiation or convection and for sound-proofing in the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment.		 No.108 2015-04-21
insulator (Solid) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Solid insulator protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses provided in order to cover and prevent the high voltage live parts from any direct contact. This includes covers for insulating the high voltage live parts of connectors; and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation;		 No.012 2013-03-27
insulator (Solid) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Solid insulator Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses, provided in order to cover and prevent the high voltage live parts from any direct contact. This includes covers for insulating the high voltage live parts of connectors; and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation,		 No.094 2012-09-20
insulator (Solid) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Solid insulator Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses, provided in order to cover and prevent the high voltage live parts from any direct contact. This includes covers for insulating the high voltage live parts of connectors and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
insulator (Solid) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Solid insulator Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses provided in order to cover and protect the live parts against direct contact from any direction of access; covers for insulating the live parts of connectors, and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation.		 No.100 2011-02-14
insulator (Solid) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Solid insulator Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses provided in order to cover and protect the live parts against direct contact from any direction of access; covers for insulating the live parts of connectors, and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Integral [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Integral Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Integral" is a class of Child Restraint System, meaning that the child is restrained only by components which comprise the Child Restraint System (e.g. strap harness, shield, etc.), and not by means connected directly to the vehicle (e.g; seat belt).		 No.129 2014-03-29
integral class (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 integral class (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;		 No.044 2007-11-23
integral class (non-, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 non-integral class (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;		 No.044 2007-11-23
Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint System [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Integrated endurance braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Integrated endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Integrated head restraint [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Integrated head restraint Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back.
Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2. or 2.12.3. below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Integrated head restraint [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Integrated head restraint seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back. Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2 or 2.12.3 below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Integrated head restraint [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Integrated head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult
occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head
restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Integrated head restraint [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Integrated head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2010-08-14
intensity (luminous, Coefficient of) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.		 No.003 2011-12-06
intensity (luminous, Normalised) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Normalised luminous intensity Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.11. Normalised luminous intensity: luminous intensity divided by the luminous flux of the light source in order to characterise the angular radiation pattern of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Interchangeable brake disc [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Interchangeable brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Interchangeable brake drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Interchangeable brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Intercommunication staircase [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Intercommunication staircase [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Intercommunication staircase [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks		 No.107 2010-09-29
Interdependent lamp system [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Interdependent lamp system Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.30. "Interdependent lamp system" means an assembly of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function;
2.7.30.1. "Interdependent lamp" means a device operating as part of an interdependent lamp system. Interdependent lamps operate together when activated, have separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and separate lamp bodies, and may have separate light source(s);		 No.048 2011-12-06
interface (electric electronic, Brake) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Brake electric/electronic interface Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Brake electric/electronic interface" means the part of a separable electrical/electronic connection between the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle which is dedicated to the braking system.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Interior [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Interior Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.3. "Interior" means the enclosed parts of a vehicle used for the accommodation of the vehicle occupants and/or the load.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Interior compartment [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Interior compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.2. "Interior compartment" means any compartment intended for passengers, drivers and/or crew bounded by the interior facing surface(s) of:
(a) the ceiling;
(b) the floor;
(c) the front, rear and side walls,
(d) the doors;
(e) the outside glazing.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Interior lining [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Interior lining(s) burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.6. "Interior lining(s)" means material(s) that (together) constitute(s) the surface finish and substrate of a roof, wall or floor.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Interior lining [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Interior lining(s) Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.6. "Interior lining(s)" means material(s) that (together) constitute(s) the surface finish and substrate of aroof, wall or floor.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Interior mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Interior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.1. "Interior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, which can be fitted in the passenger compartment of a vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Interior mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Interior mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.1. "Interior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, which can be fitted in the passenger compartment of a vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Interior rear view mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Interior rear-view mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(a) Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
Interior rear-view mirror [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Interior rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) 1.2. "Interior rear-view mirror" means a device as defined in point 1.1 which is fitted inside the cab or frame of a tractor. Directive 2009/059/EC
Interlayer [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Interlayer safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Interlayer" means any material designed to be used to hold together the component layers of laminated-glass.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Interlayer [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Interlayer Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Interlayer" means any material used to hold together the component layers of laminated glazing.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Intermediate speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Intermediate speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.42. "Intermediate speed" means that engine speed which meets one of the following requirements:
(a) For engines which are designed to operate over a speed range on a full load torque curve, the intermediate speed shall be the declared maximum torque speed if it occurs between 60 per cent and 75 per cent of the rated speed;
(b) If the declared maximum torque speed is less than 60 per cent of the rated speed, then the intermediate speed shall be 60 per cent of the rated speed;
(c) If the declared maximum torque speed is greater than 75 per cent of the rated speed then the intermediate speed shall be 75 per cent of the rated speed.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Internal combustion engine vehicle [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Internal combustion engine vehicle [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (Agreement concerning the, European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
International Tyre and Rim Standards [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 International Tyre and Rim Standards (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "International Tyre and Rim Standards" mean documents concerning wheel standardization issued by the following Organizations:
(a) The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 2/;
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Standards Manual";
(c) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(d) The Tyre and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) 4/: "Year Book";
(e) The Japan Automobile Tyre Manufacturers Association (JATMA) 5/: "Year Book";
(f) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) 6/:"Standard Manual";
(g) The Associação Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) 7/ "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(h) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) 8/:"Data Book"		 No.124 2006-12-27
International Tyre Standard [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 International Tyre Standard 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "International Tyre Standard" means any one of the following standard documents:
(a) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Standards Manual";
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(c) The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): "Year Book";
(d) The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): "Year Book";
(e) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): "Standards Manual";
(f) The Associaçiao Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) (5): "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(g) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): "Data Book".		 No.108 2006-07-04
International Tyre Standard [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 International Tyre Standard Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "International Tyre Standard" means any one of the following standard documents:
(a) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Standards Manual";
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Engineering Design Information — obsolete data";
(c) The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): "Year Book";
(d) The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): "Year Book";
(e) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): "Standards Manual";
(f) The Assiciacao Brasileira de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(g) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): "Data Book".
The tyre standards can be obtained from the following addresses:
(1) ETRTO, 32 Av. Brugmann — Bte 2, B-1060 Brussels, Belgium
(2) TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 USA
(3) JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No 1-12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato‑ku, Tokyo 105, Japan
(4) TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Australia
(5) ABPA, Avenida Paulista 244-12o Andar, CEP, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazil
(6) STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Sweden		 No.109 2006-07-04
interval (Test) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Test interval Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.86. "Test interval" means a duration of time over which brake-specific emissions are determined. In cases where multiple test intervals occur over a duty cycle, the Regulation may specify additional calculations that weigh and combine results to arrive at composite values for comparison against the applicable emission limits;		 No.096 2014-03-22
IPXXB (degree, Protection) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Protection degree IPXXB Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Protection degree IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a Jointed Test Finger (degree IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 9.		 No.095 2015-07-10
IPXXB (Protection) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Protection IPXXB protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Protection IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a Jointed Test Finger (IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 7;
[ANNEX 7] Test procedures for the protection of the occupants of vehicles operating on electrical power from high voltage and electrolyte spillage
4. PHYSICAL PROTECTION
Appendix: Jointed Test Finger (IPXXB)		 No.012 2013-03-27
IPXXB (Protection) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Protection IPXXB Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Protection IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a jointed test finger (IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 11,		 No.094 2012-09-20
ISOFIX [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "ISOFIX" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "ISOFIX" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system, and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
ISOFIX [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "ISOFIX" is a system that provides a method of connecting a Child Restraint System to a vehicle. It is based on two vehicle anchorages and two corresponding attachments on the Child Restraint System in conjunction with a means to limit the pitch rotation of the Child Restraint System. All three vehicle anchorages are to be approved according to Regulation No. 14.		 No.129 2014-03-29
ISOFIX (vehicle, Specific) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Specific vehicle ISOFIX Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" is a category of Child Restraint System connecting to specific vehicle types. All vehicle anchorages are to be approved according to Regulation No. 14. It is also an indication for Child Restraint Systems including dashboard as a vehicle contact zone.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Isofix [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a means to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system, and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "ISOFIX" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system, and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Isofix [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system (restraint) means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry-cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.
"Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6 Isofix Child restraint systems fall into 7 Isofix size classes described in Regulation No 16 annex 17, appendix 2:
A - ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B - ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C - ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
[表] Mass group /　/ Isofix size category
0 - up to 10 kg / F ISO/L1, G ISO/L2, E ISO/R1
0+ - up to 13 kg / C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2, E ISO/R1
I - 9 to 18 kg / A ISO/F3, B ISO/F2, B1 ISO/F2X, C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX anchorage system [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX anchorage system [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2015-11-20
ISOFIX anchorage system [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX anchorage system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "ISOFIX anchorage system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX Child Restraint System in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.11.1. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.
2.11.2. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.3. of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX Child Restraint System structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Isofix anchorages system [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix anchorages system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix anchorages system [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix anchorages system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix anchorages system [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX anchorages system [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Isofix anchorages system [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix anchorages system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX anchorages system [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX anchorages system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.3. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX attachment [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX attachment safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, extending from the ISOFIX child restraint system structure and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Isofix attachment [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix attachment Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, extending from the Isofix child restraint system structure, and compatible with an Isofix low anchorage.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix attachment [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix attachment safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Isofix attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, extending from the Isofix child restraint system structure, and compatible with an Isofix low anchorage.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix attachment [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Isofix attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.2. of this Regulation, extending from the Isofix child restraint system structure, and compatible with an Isofix low anchorage.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX attachment [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.2 of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX child restraint system structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX child restraint system [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX child restraint system [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2015-11-20
ISOFIX Child Restraint System (Universal, Integral) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Isofix child restraint system [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix child restraint system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Isofix child restraint system2 means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix child restraint system [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix child restraint system [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX child restraint system [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Isofix child restraint system [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX child restraint system [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX low anchorage [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX low anchorage [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Isofix low anchorage [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix low anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix low anchorage [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix low anchorage [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX low anchorage [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Isofix low anchorage [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix low anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX low anchorage [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.2. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX marking fixture [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "ISOFIX marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an ISOFIX child restraint system of the ISOFIX positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Isofix marking fixture [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix marking fixture Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Isofix marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix marking fixture [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix marking fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix marking fixture" means something that informs someone whishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each Isofix corresponding Isofix anchorages systems.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix marking fixture [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Isofix marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding Isofix anchorages system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX marking fixture [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "ISOFIX marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an ISOFIX child restraint system of the ISOFIX positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2011-09-09
ISOFIX position [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX position safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "ISOFIX position" means a position which allows the installation of:
(a) Either an universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(b) Or a semi-universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(c) Or a semi-universal ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(d) Or a semi-universal ISOFIX lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(e) Or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.
(f) Or an i-Size child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 129,
(g) Or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 129;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX position [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX position Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "ISOFIX position" means a system which allows installing:
(a) Either a universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(b) Or a semi-universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(c) Or a semi-universal ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(d) Or a semi-universal ISOFIX lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(e) Or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(f) Or an i-Size child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 129,
(g) Or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 129.		 No.016 2015-11-20
ISOFIX position [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.51. "ISOFIX position" means a location which allows for the installation of either:
(a) Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint System as defined in Regulation No. 44; or
(b) A "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" Child Restraint System as defined in Regulation No. 44 or a "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" as defined in this Regulation; or
(c) An i-Size Child Restraint System suitable for use in specific ISOFIX seating positions as defined by the vehicle manufacturer according to Regulation 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Isofix position [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix position Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix position [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix position safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Isofix position" means a system which allows installing:
(a) either a universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix position [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix position Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either a universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX position [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX position Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "ISOFIX position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either a universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(b) or a semi-universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(c) or a semi-universal ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(d) or a semi-universal ISOFIX lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44;
(e) or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Isofix position [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX position [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20.5. "ISOFIX position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal ISOFIX lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX top tether anchorage [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX top tether anchorage [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Isofix top tether anchorage [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix top tether anchorage [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
ISOFIX top tether anchorage [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Isofix top tether anchorage [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX top tether anchorage [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Isofix top tether attachment [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether attachment" is a device to secure the Isofix top tether strap to the Isofix child restraint system.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX top tether attachment [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX child restraint system.		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX top tether connector [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Isofix top tether connector [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether connector Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix top tether connector [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX top tether connector [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX top tether hook [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Isofix top tether hook [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether hook Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 of this Regulation.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix top tether hook [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX top tether hook [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
ISOFIX top tether strap [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector;		 No.014 2015-08-19
ISOFIX top tether strap [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Isofix top tether strap [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether strap Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Isofix top tether strap [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.044 2007-11-23
ISOFIX top tether strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Isofix top-tether anchorage [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Isofix top-tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top-tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix top-tether connector [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top-tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top-tether anchorage.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix top-tether hook [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top-tether hook" means an Isofix top-tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top-tether strap to an Isofix top-tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Isofix top-tether strap [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top-tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top-tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top-tether connector.		 No.014 2011-04-28
ISOFIX Universal [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX Universal Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "ISOFIX Universal" is an ISOFIX comprising either a top-tether or a support-leg, to limit the pitch rotation of the Child Restraint System, attached to, or supported by, the corresponding vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
isolation monitoring system (resistance, On-board) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2011-02-14
isolation resistance monitoring system (On board) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
isolation resistance monitoring system (On-board) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2011-02-14
IUPR [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 IUPR (In-Use performance ratio) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "In-Use performance ratio" (IUPR) means the ratio of the number of times that the conditions have existed under which a monitor, or group of monitors, should have detected a malfunction relative to the number of driving cycles relevant for the operation of that monitor or group of monitors;		 No.049 2013-06-24
IUPRM [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 IUPRM (In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
jacket (outer) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Outer vessel or outer jacket using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.71. "Outer vessel or outer jacket" means part of the fuel tank that encases the inner vessel or inner tank(s) and its insulation system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
judgment (engineering, Good) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Good engineering judgment Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.37. "Good engineering judgment" means judgments made consistent with generally accepted scientific and engineering principles and available relevant information;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
k [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Gear ratio weighting factor k Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gear ratio weighting factor k" means a dimensionless numerical quantity used to combine the test results of two gear ratios for the acceleration test and the constant speed test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
k p [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Partial power factor kp Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Partial power factor kp" means a numerical quantity with no dimension used for the weighted combination of the test results of the acceleration test and the constant speed test for vehicles		 No.051 2007-05-30
Kerb mass [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Kerb mass noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.6. "Kerb mass" (as defined in section 4.1.2 of ISO 6726: 1988) means the mass of the vehicle ready for normal operation and fitted with the following equipment:
(a) Full electrical equipment including the lighting and signalling devices supplied by the manufacturer;
(b) All instruments and fittings required by any legislation in respect of which a measurement of the vehicle dry mass is being made;
(c) Full complement of liquids to ensure the correct functioning of every part of the vehicle and the fuel tank filled at least to 90 per cent of the capacity specified by the manufacturer;
(d) Auxiliary equipment usually supplied by the manufacturer in addition to that necessary for normal operation (tool-kit, carrier(s), windscreen(s), protective equipment, etc.)
Notes:
1. In the case of a vehicle which operates on a fuel/oil mixture:
1.1. Where the fuel and oil are premixed, the word "fuel" is interpreted as including such premixture of fuel and oil;
1.2. Where the fuel and oil are separately metered, the word "fuel" is interpreted as including only the petrol. [The "oil", in this case, is already included in subparagraph (c) of this paragraph.]		 No.041 2012-11-14
kerb mass (Unladen) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Unladen kerb mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Unladen kerb mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if these are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.094 2012-09-20
kerb mass (Unladen) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Unladen kerb mass (Mk) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2007-12-06
kerb mass (Unladen) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mk (Unladen kerb mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2011-03-30
kerb mass (Unladen) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Unladen kerb mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Unladen kerb mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if these are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.094 2010-05-28
Key [No.018 2008-10-15] 　 Key Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.018 2008-10-15
Key [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Key protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.018 2010-05-13
Key [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Key Interior fittings 2.16. "Key"
2.16.1. "Ignition key" means the device that operates the electric power supply necessary to operate the engine or motor of the vehicle. This definition does not preclude a non-mechanical device.
2.16.2. "Power key" means the device which allows power to be supplied to the power systems of the vehicle. This key may also be the ignition key. This definition does not preclude a nonmechanical
device.		 No.021 2008-07-16
Key [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Key Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.062 2004-03-31
Key [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Key Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.062 2013-03-27
Key [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Key Alarm systems 2.7. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device; No.097 2008-12-30
Key [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Key alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system, which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Key [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Key alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Key [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Key Electric vehicle safety 2.25. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device. No.100 2009-02-14
Key [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Key Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.5. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system that is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Key [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Key Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.8. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system that is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Key [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Key Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system, which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Key [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Key Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.5. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Key [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Key Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.8. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Key [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Key Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.6. "Key" means any device designed and constructed to provide a method of operating a locking system, which is designed and constructed to be operated only by that device		 No.116 2012-02-16
Kneeling system [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Kneeling system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Kneeling system" means a system which lowers and lifts totally or partially the body of a vehicle relative to the normal position of travel.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Kneeling system [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Kneeling system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Kneeling system" means a system which lowers and lifts totally or partially the body of a vehicle relative to the normal position of travel.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Kneeling system [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Kneeling system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Kneeling system" means a system which lowers and lifts totally or partially the body of a vehicle relative to the normal position of travel.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
L (Category) [2012/wp29grrf/GRRF-72-09e__2_.pdf] 　 Category L 　 Category L (light) vehicles
L1e : light two-wheel vehicle
　L1Ae : powered cycle
　L1Be : Moped
L2e : Three-wheel moped
L3e : motorcycle
L4e : motorcycle with side car
L5e : tricycles
　L5Ae : Tricycles
　L5Be : Commercial tricycles
L6e : Light quadricycle
　L6Ae : Light quad
　L6Be : Light mini car
L7e : Heavy quadricycle
　L7Ae : On-road quad
　L7Be : All Terrain Vehicles
　L7Be : Heavy mini car
参考 : http://www2u.biglobe.ne.jp/~standard/ecinf.htm#2013-06-23UNECE		 2012/wp29grrf/GRRF-72-09e__2_.pdf
L (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 L : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
L category vehicle with bodywork (Mirror intended for) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(f) Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork, giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.7 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Laden [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Laden Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Laden" means so loaded as to attain the gross vehicle mass as defined in paragraph 2.22.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Laden [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Laden Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Laden" means so loaded as to attain the gross vehicle mass as defined in paragraph 2.12.		 No.078 2015-01-30
laden mass (maximum, permissible, Technically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 M (Technically permissible maximum laden mass) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2015-06-18
laden mass (maximum, permissible, Technically) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2006-12-27
laden mass (maximum, Technically permissible) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2006-12-27
laden mass (maximum, Technically permissible) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2010-09-29
laden mass (Un-) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.62. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.049 2013-06-24
laden mass (Un) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.083 2015-07-03
laden mass (Un-) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen mass Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Unladen mass" means the weight of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen, but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if supplied by the vehicle manufacturer as standard equipment;		 No.073 2004-03-31
Laden tractor [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Laden tractor installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Laden tractor
"Laden tractor" means the tractor loaded to its technically permissible maximum weight, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this weight between the axles.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
laden tractor (Un-) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Unladen tractor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen tractor" means the tractor in running order, i.e. excluding optional accessories but including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and driver.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Laden tractor [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Laden tractor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Laden tractor" means the tractor loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this weight between the axles.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Laden vehicle [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Laden vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its "maximum mass";		 No.013 2016-02-18
Laden vehicle [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its ‘maximum mass’.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Laden vehicle [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Laden vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.5. "Laden vehicle" means a vehicle loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this mass between the axles in accordance with the method described in Annex 5; No.048 2008-05-23
laden vehicle (Un-) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen vehicle Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order, complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer), carrying a driver weighing 75 kg, but no driver's mate, optional accessories or load.		 No.039 2004-03-31
laden vehicle (Un-) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without driver, crew, passengers and load, but with a full supply of fuel, spare wheel and the tools normally carried;		 No.048 2011-12-06
laden vehicle (Un-) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle alone, as submitted for the tests, plus the rider alone and any necessary test equipment or instrumentation.		 No.078 2004-03-31
laden vehicle (Un-) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Unladen vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.093 2010-07-17
Laden vehicle [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its ‘maximum mass’;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Laden vehicle [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its ‘maximum mass’.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Laden vehicle [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Laden vehicle External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Laden vehicle" means the vehicle laden to the maximum permitted technical mass. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or a device for automatic levelling according to load shall be tested with the vehicle in the most adverse normal running condition specified by the manufacturer.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Laden vehicle [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Laden vehicle external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Laden vehicle" means the vehicle laden to the maximum permitted technical mass. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or a device for automatic levelling according to load shall be tested with the vehicle in the most adverse normal running condition specified by the manufacturer.		 No.026 2010-08-14
Laden vehicle [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Laden vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Laden vehicle" means a vehicle loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this mass between the axles in accordance with the method described in Annex 5;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Laden vehicle [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its "maximum mass";		 No.078 2004-03-31
laden vehicle [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 laden vehicle Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "laden vehicle", except where otherwise stated, means a vehicle so laden as to attain its "maximum mass";		 No.111 2002-02-01
Laminated glass [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Laminated-glass safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass" means glazing consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayer of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "Ordinary laminated glass", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; or
2.2.2. "Treated laminated glass", when at least one of the layers of glass, of which it is composed, has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2014-02-12
Laminated-glass pane [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Laminated-glass pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "ordinary", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; orEN
2.2.2. "treated", when at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. Lamp
"Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road (headlamp) or to emit a light signal. Rear registrationplate lamps and reflex reflectors shall likewise be regarded as lamps		 Directive 2009/061/EC
lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5. lamp
means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration-plate lamps and retro-reflectors are likewise regarded as lamps;
5.1. single lamp
5.2. equivalent lamps
5.3. independent lamps
5.4. grouped lamps
5.5. combined lamps
5.6. reciprocally incorporated lamps
5.7. main-beam headlamp
5.8. dipped-beam headlamp
5.9. direction indicator lamp
5.10. stop lamp
5.11. front position lamp
5.12.rear position lamp
5.13.front fog lamp
5.14.rear fog lamp
5.15.reversing lamp
5.16. hazard warning signal
5.17. rear registration-plate lamp
5.18. retro-reflector		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users.
Rear registration plate lamps and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps. For the purpose of this Regulation, light-emitting rear registration plates and the service-door-lighting system according to the provisions of Regulation No 107 on vehicles of categories M2 and M3 are not considered as lamps;		 No.048 2008-05-23
Lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.1. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those of the lamps with which the vehicle is equipped at the time of approval, on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;
2.5.2. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;
2.5.3. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;
2.5.4. "Combined" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, but a common light source and a common lamp body;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.
2.5.8. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.
2.5.9. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake;
2.5.10. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device2 means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;
2.5.11. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;
2.5.13. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
For the purpose of this Regulation, retro-reflecting number plates are not considered as retro- reflectors;
2.5.14. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction-indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road users;
2.5.15. "Front fog lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;
2.5.16. "Rear fog lamp" means the lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;
2.5.17. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime.		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.1. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those of the lamps with which the vehicle is equipped at the time of approval, on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;
2.5.2. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;
2.5.3. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;
2.5.4. "Combined" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, but a common light source and a common lamp body;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.8. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;
2.5.9. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
For the purpose of this Regulation, retro-reflecting number plates are not considered as retro- reflectors:
2.5.10. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.
2.5.11. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;
2.5.13. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical component.		 No.074 2013-06-18
lamp (colour of the light emitted by the) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 colours of the light emitted by the lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 5. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.15. The colours of the light emitted by the lamps are the following:
Main-beam headlamp: White
Dipped-beam headlamp: White
Front fog lamp: White or selective yellow
Reversing lamp: White
Direction-indicator lamp: Amber
Hazard warning signal: Amber
Stop lamp: Red
Emergency stop signal: Amber or red
Rear-end collision alert signal: Amber
Rear registration plate lamp: White
Front position lamp: White
Rear position lamp: Red
Front fog lamp: White or selective yellow
Rear fog lamp: Red
Parking lamp: White in front, red at the rear, amber if reciprocally incorporated in the side direction-indicator lamps or in the side-marker lamps.
Side-marker lamp: Amber; however the rearmost side- marker lamp can be red if it is grouped or combined or reciprocally incorporated with the rear position lamp, the rear end-outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp or is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear retro-reflector.
End-outline marker lamp: White in front, red at the rear
Daytime running lamp: White
Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular: Red
Rear retro-reflector, triangular: Red
Front retro-reflector, non- triangular: Identical to incident light Side retro-reflector, non-triangular: Amber; however the rearmost side retro-reflector can be red if it is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear position lamp, the rear end outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp, the red rearmost side-marker lamp or the rear retro-reflector, non-triangular.
Cornering lamp: White
Conspicuity marking: White to the front White or yellow to the side; Red or yellow to the rear
Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): White
Exterior courtesy lamp: White		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Combined) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.5. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ), but a common light source and a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Concealable) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Concealable lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.8. "Concealable lamp" means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Cornering) [No.119 2014-03-25] 　 Cornering lamp Cornering lamps [SCOPE]
This Regulation applies to cornering lamps for vehicles of categories M, N and T.
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn.
1.2. "Cornering lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark;
(b) The characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.
1.3. The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.119 2014-03-25
lamp (Cornering) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Cornering lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.26. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Courtesy, Exterior) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Exterior Courtesy lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.29. "Exterior Courtesy lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to assist the entry and exit of the vehicle driver and passenger or in loading operations;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (different type, Front and rear position lamp, stop-lamp and end-outline marker lamp of) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2010-06-12
lamp (Distance between two) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (Distance between two) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;		 No.074 2013-06-18
lamp (Distance between two) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Distance between two) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Distance between two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Distance between two lamps" which face in the same direction, means the distance between the orthogonal projections in a plane perpendicular to the direction in question of the outlines of the two illuminating surfaces as defined according to the case mentioned in paragraph 2.6.		 No.086 2010-09-30
lamp (Equivalent) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Equivalent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.2. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the vehicle when it is approved on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (filament) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 filament lamp, LED light source Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.006 2014-07-18
lamp (filament, etalon, standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
lamp (filament, Standard (étalon)) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Standard (étalon) filament lamp Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "Standard (étalon) filament lamp": a filament lamp emitting white or amber or red light with reduced dimensional tolerances, used for the photometric testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. Standard filament lamps are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.037 2010-11-13
lamp (fog, Front) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.15. "Front fog lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (fog, Front) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Front fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.19. "Front fog lamp" means a lamp used to improve the illumination of the road ahead of the vehicle in case of fog or any similar condition of reduced visibility;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (fog, Front, of different type) [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. the trade name or mark;
1.4.2. different "Classes" (B or F3) identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. the characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LEDmodule, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. the inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. the category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code(s) (if applicable).
1.4.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.4.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2010-07-10
lamp (fog, Rear) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.16. "Rear fog lamp" means the lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (fog, Rear) [No.038 2010-06-12] 　 Rear fog lamp rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear by giving a red signal of greater intensity than the rear position (side) lamps		 No.038 2010-06-12
lamp (fog, Rear) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.20. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Grouped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Grouped lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.4. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ) and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (head-, beam, Driving / main) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (head-, beam, Passing / dipped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road- users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Head, of different type) [No.008 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters designed solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution shall not constitute a change in the type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the categories H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11
1.3.7. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.008 2010-07-10
lamp (Head, of different type) [No.020 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different types Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.020 2010-07-10
lamp (HS2 halogen) [No.082 2014-03-25] 　 HS2 lamps (halogen lamps) Headlamps (HS2 moped) 1. SCOPE
This regulation applies to the approval of headlamps equipped with halogen lamps (HS2 lamps), which are provided for the equipment of mopeds and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. The trade name or mark,
2.2. The characteristics of the optical systems,
2.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.082 2014-03-25
lamp (Independent) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Independent lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.3. "Independent lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ), separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (indicator, Direction) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.8. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to provisions of Regulation No 97.		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (indicator, Direction) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Direction-indicator lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.11. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to the provisions of Regulation No 97;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Manoeuvring) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Manoeuvring lamp reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Manoeuvring lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to the side of the vehicle to assist during slow manoeuvres.		 No.023 2014-08-08
lamp (marker, End-outline) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 1997-07-30
lamp (marker, outline, End) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain powerdriven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2014-09-30
lamp (marker, outline, End-) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle’s overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle’s position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2010-06-12
lamp (marker, outline, End) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.23. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edge and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. This lamp is intended, for certain vehicles and trailers, to complement the vehicle's front and rear position lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (marker, Side) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Side marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.24. "Side marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (marker, Side-) [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamp Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Side-marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;		 No.091 2010-06-30
lamp (multiple) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 multiple lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Single and multiple lamps"
2.16.2. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps", means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band or strip if such band or strip is placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, extends on both sides to within at least 0,4 m of the extreme outer edge of the vehicle, and is not less than 0,8 m long; the illumination of such surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends; the light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces on a transverse plane occupy not less than 60 per cent of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said individual light-emitting surfaces;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Optional) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (Optional) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;		 No.074 2013-06-18
lamp (Optional) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Optional) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Optional lamp" means a lamp the presence of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.		 No.086 2010-09-30
lamp (Parking) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Parking lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.22. "Parking lamp" means a lamp which is used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position lamps;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Parking) [No.077 2001-05-14] 　 Parking lamp Parking lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle;		 No.077 2001-05-14
lamp (Parking) [No.077 2010-05-28] 　 Parking lamp parking lamps for power-driven vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle;		 No.077 2010-05-28
lamp (Parking, of different type) [No.077 2001-05-14] 　 Parking lamps of different types Parking lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Parking lamps of different types" are parking lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. the trade name or mark,
2.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system,
2.3.3. the category of filament lamp.		 No.077 2001-05-14
lamp (position (side), Front) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Front position (side) lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 2010-06-12
lamp (position (side),Rear) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Rear position (side) lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 2010-06-12
lamp (position, Front(side)) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Front position (side) lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1."'Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 1997-07-30
lamp (position, Front) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front position lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 2014-09-30
lamp (position, Front) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.11. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (position, Front) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.14. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (position, Rear (side)) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Rear position (side) lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 1997-07-30
lamp (position, Rear) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Rear position lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 2014-09-30
lamp (position, Rear) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (position, Rear) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.15. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Reciprocally incorporated) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.6. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Reversing) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing lamp reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp of the vehicle designed to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse.		 No.023 2014-08-08
lamp (reversing) [No.023 1997-07-30] 　 reversing lamp Reversing lamps 1. Definitions
1.1. "reversing lamp" means the lamp of the vehicle designed to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.023 1997-07-30
lamp (Reversing) [No.023 2010-06-12] 　 Reversing lamp reversing lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp of the vehicle designed to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.023 2010-06-12
lamp (Reversing) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Reversing lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.21. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road-users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (running, Daytime) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.17. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime.		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (running, Daytime) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.25. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (running, Daytime) [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamp Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;
2.2. The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation;		 No.087 2010-06-30
lamp (Single function) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Single-function lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.7. "Single-function lamp" means a part of a device which performs a single lighting or light- signalling function;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (single) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 A single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "A single lamp" means:
(a) a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts, or
(b) any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type ‘D’ lamp and installed so that the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis.		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (single) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 A single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "A single lamp" means a device or part of a device, having one function and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis (see paragraph 2.8 of this Regulation) and one or more light sources.
For the purpose of installation on a vehicle, a "single lamp" also means any assembly of two independent or grouped lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, if they are installed so that the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. In such a case, each of these lamps shall, where approval is required, be approved as a type "D" lamp. This possible combination does not apply to driving beam headlamps and passing beam headlamps.		 No.074 2013-06-18
lamp (single) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Single and multiple lamps"
2.16.1. "A single lamp" means:
(a) a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts; or
(b) any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type "D" lamp and installed so that:
(i) the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or
(ii) the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or
(c) any assembly of two independent retro-reflectors, whether identical or not, that have been approved separately and are installed in such a way that:
(i) the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or
(ii) the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or
(d) any interdependent lamp system composed of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function, approved together as type ‘Y’ and installed so that the distance between adjacent apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis does not exceed 75 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (single) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 A single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "A single lamp" includes any combination of two or more lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function and colour, if it comprises devices, the projection of whose aggregate light- emitting surfaces in a given transverse plane occupies 60 % or more of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the light-emitting surfaces of the aforementioned lamps, provided that such combination is, where approval is required, approved as a single lamp.
This possible combination does not apply to driving lamps, passing lamps, front fog lamps or lateral reflex reflectors.		 No.086 2010-09-30
lamp (Stop) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Stop-lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Stop-lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake. The stop-lamps may be activated by the application of a retarder or a similar device;		 No.007 2014-09-30
lamp (Stop) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.9. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake;		 No.053 2013-06-18
lamp (Stop-) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Stop-lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Stop-lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake
The stop-lamps may be activated by the application of a retarder or a similar device		 No.007 1997-07-30
lamp (Stop-) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Stop-lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Stop-lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake. The stop-lamps may be activated by the application of a retarder or a similar device;		 No.007 2010-06-12
lamp (Stop) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.12. "Stop lamp" means a lamp used to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that the longitudinal movement of the vehicle is intentionally retarded;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp (Two or an even number of) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" includes a single illuminating surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The illuminating surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual illuminating surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual illuminating surfaces.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Lamp [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamps and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps. For the purpose of this Regulation, light-emitting rear registration plates and the service-door- lighting system according to the provisions of Regulation No 107 on vehicles of categories M 2 and M 3 are not considered as lamps;
【以下略】		 No.048 2011-12-06
Lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road (headlamp) or to emit a light signal. Rear registration-plate lamps and retro reflectors shall likewise be regarded as lamps.
2.5.1. "Equivalent lamps" means lamps having the same function and approved under Regulation No 37 or in conformity with the same requirements; such lamps may have different characteristics from those of the lamps with which the vehicle is equipped at the time of approval on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;
2.5.2. "Independent lamps" means lamps having separate lenses, separate light sources, and separate lamp bodies;
2.5.3. "Grouped lamps" means devices having separate lenses and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;
2.5.4. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate lenses but a common light source and a common lamp body;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources (or a single light source operating under different conditions), totally or partially common lenses and a common lamp body;
2.5.6. "Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;
2.5.7. "Lamps of variable position" means lamps installed on the tractor which can move in relation to the tractor, without being detached;
2.5.8. "Driving-lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the tractor;
2.5.9. "Passing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the tractor without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road-users;
2.5.10. "Front fog-lamp" means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds;
2.5.11. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the tractor and to warn other road-users that the tractor is reversing or about to reverse;
2.5.12. "Direction-indicator lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;
2.5.13. "Hazard-warning signal" means the device permitting the simultaneous operation of all of a tractor's direction indicator lamps to draw attention to the fact that the tractor temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;
2.5.14. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the tractor that the latter's driver is applying the service brake;
2.5.15. "Rear-registration-plate lamp" means the device used to illuminate the space intended to accommodate the rear registration plate; it may consist of several optical components;
2.5.16. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the front;
2.5.17. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the rear;
2.5.18. "Rear fog-lamp" means the lamp used to make the tractor more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;
2.5.19. 2Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary tractor, without a trailer, in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position (side) lamps;
2.5.20. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamps fitted to the extreme outer edge as close as possible to the top of the tractor and intended clearly to indicate the tractor’s overall width. This signal is intended, for certain tractors, to complement the tractor's front and rear position (side) lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;
2.5.21. "Work lamp" means a device for illuminating a working area or process;
2.5.22. "Retro reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a tractor by reflection of light emanating from a light source unconnected with the vehicle, the observer being situated near that source. For the purpose of this Regulation, the following are not considered as retro reflectors:
retro-reflecting number plates;
other plates and retro-reflecting signals which must be used to comply with a Contracting Party's specifications for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation.		 No.086 2010-09-30
lamp including LED modules (head) [No.098 2010-06-30A11] 　 headlamps including LED modules gas-discharge light sources [ANNEX 11] Requirements for LED modules and headlamps including LED modules
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. Each LED module sample submitted shall conform to the relevant specifications of this Regulation when tested with the supplied electronic light source control-gear(s), if any.
1.2. LED module(s) shall be so designed as to be and to remain in good working order when in normal use. They shall moreover exhibit no fault in design or manufacture.
1.3. LED module(s) shall be tamperproof.
1.4. The design of removable LED module(s) shall be such that:
1.4.1. when the LED module is removed and replaced with another module provided by the applicant and bearing the same light source module identification code, the photometric specifications of the headlamp shall be met;
1.4.2. LED modules with different light source module identification codes within the same lamp housing, shall not be interchangeable.
1.5. Electronic light source control gear(s) may be part of the LED module(s).
2. MANUFACTURE 【略】
3. TEST CONDITIONS 【略】
4. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS 【略】		 No.098 2010-06-30
lamp of different Classes (A or B or C or D) (Head-) [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D) Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B or C or D)" means headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.113 2005-12-16
lamp of different Classes (A or B) (Head-) [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different Classes (A or B) Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.		 No.112 2005-12-16
lamp of different type (fog, Front) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. The trade name or mark;
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. The inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. The category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code (s) (if applicable);
1.4.6. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2014-08-22
lamp of different type (fog, Rear) [No.038 2010-06-12] 　 Rear fog lamps of different types rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Rear fog lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.038 2010-06-12
lamp of different type (Front and rear position, stop and end outline marker) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
lamp of different type (Head) [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Headlamps of different types headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. The category of filament lamp used and/or the LED module specific identification code(s);
1.3.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.112 2014-08-22
lamp of different type (Head) [No.001 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different "types" Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption; and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. Ability to provide a passing beam or a driving beam or both;
1.3.6. The materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.3.7. The holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the following categories: R2 and/or HS1(		 No.001 2010-07-10
lamp of different type (Head-) [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.6.1. the trade name or mark;
1.6.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.6.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.6.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.6.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.6.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;		 No.098 2001-06-25
lamp of different type (Head) [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Headlamps of different types gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.6.1. the trade name or mark;
1.6.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.6.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.6.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.6.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.6.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.6.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.098 2010-06-30
lamp of different type (Head-) [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different types Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation.
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.7. The category of filament lamp used.		 No.112 2005-12-16
lamp of different type (Head) [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different types Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different "types"" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.6. the category of filament lamp used;		 No.113 2005-12-16
lamp of different type (marker, Side-) [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamps of different types Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Side-marker lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.091 2010-06-30
lamp of different type (Parking) [No.077 2010-05-28] 　 Parking lamps of different types parking lamps for power-driven vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Parking lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark,
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.077 2010-05-28
lamp of different type (position, stop,direction indicator) [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
lamp of different type (Reversing) [No.023 2010-06-12] 　 Reversing lamps of different types reversing lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Reversing lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2010-06-12
lamp of different type (running, Daytime) [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamps of different types Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Daytime running lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.087 2010-06-30
lamp system (Interdependent) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Interdependent lamp system Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.30. "Interdependent lamp system" means an assembly of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function;
2.7.30.1. "Interdependent lamp" means a device operating as part of an interdependent lamp system. Interdependent lamps operate together when activated, have separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and separate lamp bodies, and may have separate light source(s);		 No.048 2011-12-06
lamp type [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Front and rear position (side) lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different types End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position (side) lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
- The trade name or mark,
- The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, type of filament lamp, etc.),
- The system used to reduce illumination at night - in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.		 No.007 1997-07-30
lamp type [No.023 1997-07-30] 　 lamp type Reversing lamps 1. Definitions
1.3. reversing lamps of different "types" are reversing lamps which differ in such essential respects as,
13.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion of components capable of altering of the optical effects by reflection, reflection or absorption; and
1.3.4. the category of filament lamps.

1^^. the dBj-jcmisicf <ji ihc optical fT^EFiu;

lJ-Jt. th^iiK]・＼azm ot lompiooib L-apabI? of iiltering・kotp^ical etieにus br reflection, rcfiactioii or Absfirpdch・; ・・d1_S.4. the catcgtOfj of libnu:・・kt lamp・		 No.023 1997-07-30
lamp unit (head-, Halogen sealed-beam) [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1", when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21", when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22", when they emit, at the user’s choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2010-07-17
lamp unit (head, Sealed beam) [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) headlamp unit Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2014-05-29
Lane [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Lane Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Lane" means one of the longitudinal strips into which a roadway is divided (as shown in Annex 3);		 No.130 2014-06-18
Lane Departure Warning System [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" means a system to warn the driver of an unintentional drift of the vehicle out of its travel lane;		 No.130 2014-06-18
lane departure warning system [REG. No 661/2009] 　 lane departure warning system safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 4. "lane departure warning system" means a system to warn the driver of unintentional drift of the vehicle out of its travel lane; REG. No 661/2009
Lane Departure Warning System (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Lane Departure Warning System;
(c) the type and design of the Lane Departure Warning System;		 No.130 2014-06-18
lane marking (Visible) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Visible lane marking Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Visible lane marking" means delineators intentionally placed on the borderline of the lane that are directly visible by the driver while driving (e.g. not covered by snow, etc.);		 No.130 2014-06-18
Lap belt [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Lap belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Lap belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Lap belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.1. Lap belt : A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Lap belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Lap belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer’s pelvic region.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Lap strap [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Lap strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt passes across the front of, and restrains, directly or not, the child's pelvis.		 No.129 2014-03-29
lap strap [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 lap strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
lap strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 lap strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child’s pelvic region;		 No.044 2011-09-09
latch (door, Auxiliary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Auxiliary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Auxiliary door latch" is a latch equipped with a fully latched position with or without a secondary latch position, and fitted to a door or door system equipped with a primary door latch system.		 No.011 2010-05-13
latch (door, Primary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Primary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Primary door latch" is a latch equipped with both a fully latched position and a secondary latched position and is designated as a "primary door latch" by the manufacturer. The manufacturer may not thereafter change such designation. Each manufacturer shall, upon request, provide information regarding which latches are "primary door latches" for a particular vehicle or make/ model.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Latch [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Latch" is a device employed to maintain the door in a closed position relative to the vehicle body with provisions for deliberate release (or operation).		 No.011 2010-05-13
latch system (Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of a latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
latch system (door, Auxiliary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Auxiliary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of an auxiliary door latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
latch system (door, Primary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Primary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Primary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of a primary door latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
latched position (Fully) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fully latched position door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Fully latched position" is the coupling condition of the latch that retains the door in a completely closed position.		 No.011 2010-05-13
latched position (Secondary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Secondary latched position door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Secondary latched position" refers to the coupling condition of the latch that retains the door in a partially closed position		 No.011 2010-05-13
Lateral acceleration [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Lateral acceleration Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lateral acceleration" means the component of the acceleration vector of a point in the vehicle perpendicular to the vehicle x axis (longitudinal) and parallel to the road plane.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Lateral acceleration [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Lateral acceleration Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lateral acceleration" means the component of the acceleration vector of a point in the vehicle perpendicular to the vehicle x axis (longitudinal) and parallel to the road plane.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Lateral protection device [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 LPD (Lateral protection device) LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.4. "Lateral protection device (LPD)" consist of longitudinal member(s) and link(s) (fixing elements) to the chassis side members or other structural parts of the vehicle, designed to offer effective protection to unprotected road users against the risk of falling under the sides of the vehicle and being caught under the wheels. Parts of the vehicle can also be used as LPD.		 No.073 2012-05-08
layer (Inter) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Interlayer safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Interlayer" means any material designed to be used to hold together the component layers of laminated-glass.		 No.043 2014-02-12
LDWS [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" means a system to warn the driver of an unintentional drift of the vehicle out of its travel lane;		 No.130 2014-06-18
LDWS (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Lane Departure Warning System;
(c) the type and design of the Lane Departure Warning System;		 No.130 2014-06-18
LED light source [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 filament lamp, LED light source Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.006 2014-07-18
LED light source [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light emitting diode (LED) light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.13. Light emitting diode (LED) light source: a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence and/or fluorescence.		 No.128 2014-05-29
LED light source (axis on to the, Viewing) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Viewing axis on to the LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. Viewing axis on to the LED light source: an axis through the light centre at defined polar and azimuthal angle used to characterise photometrical properties of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
LED light source (etalon, standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) LED light source(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
LED light source (Standard (etalon)) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Standard (étalon) LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. Standard (étalon) LED light source: Special LED light source used for the testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. It has reduced tolerances for dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet. Standard LED light sources are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.128 2014-05-29
LED light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Light-emitting diode (LED) light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.6. "Light-emitting diode (LED) light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence/fluorescence;		 No.048 2011-12-06
LED module [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 LED module Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.7. "LED module" means a light source module containing as light sources only LEDs; No.048 2008-05-23
LED module [No.019 2010-07-10A12] 　 LED module Front fog lamps [ANNEX 12] Requirements in case of use of led module(s) or of light-generators
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. Each LED module or light-generator sample submitted shall conform to the relevant specifications of this Regulation when tested with the electronic light source control-gear(s) supplied, if any.
1.2. LED modules or light-generators shall be so designed as to be, and to remain, in good working order when in normal use. They shall moreover exhibit no fault in design or manufacture.
1.3. LED modules or light-generators shall be tamperproof.
1.4. The design of removable LED modules shall be such that: 【略】
2. MANUFACTURE
3. TEST CONDITIONS
4. SPECIFIC TESTS		 No.019 2010-07-10
LED module [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 LED module Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.7. "LED module" means a light source module containing as light sources only LEDs;		 No.048 2011-12-06
LED module [No.123 2010-08-24A11] 　 LED module Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) ANNEX 11
Requirements for LED modules and AFS including LED modules
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. Each LED module sample submitted shall conform to the relevant specifications of this Regulation when tested with the supplied electronic light source control-gear(s), if any.
1.2. LED module(s) shall be so designed as to be and to remain in good working order when in normal use. They shall moreover exhibit no fault in design or manufacture. A LED module shall be considered to have failed if any one of its LEDs has failed.
1.3. LED module(s) shall be tamperproof.
1.4. The design of removable LED module(s) shall be such that:
2. MANUFACTURE
3. TEST CONDITIONS
4. SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS
【以下略】		 No.123 2010-08-24
LED modules (lamp including, head) [No.098 2010-06-30A11] 　 headlamps including LED modules gas-discharge light sources [ANNEX 11] Requirements for LED modules and headlamps including LED modules
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. Each LED module sample submitted shall conform to the relevant specifications of this Regulation when tested with the supplied electronic light source control-gear(s), if any.
1.2. LED module(s) shall be so designed as to be and to remain in good working order when in normal use. They shall moreover exhibit no fault in design or manufacture.
1.3. LED module(s) shall be tamperproof.
1.4. The design of removable LED module(s) shall be such that:
1.4.1. when the LED module is removed and replaced with another module provided by the applicant and bearing the same light source module identification code, the photometric specifications of the headlamp shall be met;
1.4.2. LED modules with different light source module identification codes within the same lamp housing, shall not be interchangeable.
1.5. Electronic light source control gear(s) may be part of the LED module(s).
2. MANUFACTURE 【略】
3. TEST CONDITIONS 【略】
4. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS 【略】		 No.098 2010-06-30
left side (Frame) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame: left side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Frame: left side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle		 No.060 2014-10-15
left side (Handlebar) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: left side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8."Handlebars: left side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Left side [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Right side / left side Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Right side" respectively "left side" means the combined total of the lighting units intended to be installed to that side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle, relative to its forward motion;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Left side [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Right side / left side Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Right side" respectively "left side" means the combined total of the lighting units intended to be installed to that side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle, relative to its forward motion;		 No.123 2010-08-24
leg (Support) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
leg (support) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 support leg Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Attachments" means parts of the child restraint, including securing components, which
enable the child restraint to be firmly secured to the vehicle structure either directly or
through the vehicle seat;
2.11.1. "support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.		 No.044 2007-11-23
leg (Support) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Support leg Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11.1. "Support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.		 No.044 2011-09-09
leg foot assessment volume (Support) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Support leg foot assessment volume safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Support leg foot assessment volume" means the volume, as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of Annex 10 to this Regulation, in which the support leg foot of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129 will rest and therefore the vehicle floor has to intersect;		 No.014 2015-08-19
leg installation assessment volume (support, i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Lens [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 Lens Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.005 2014-05-29
Lens [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Lens Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the front fog lamp (unit), which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.019 2014-08-22
Lens [No.057 2014-05-01] 　 Lens Headlamps (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.057 2014-05-01
Lens [No.072 2014-03-14] 　 Lens Headlamps (HS1) (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Lens" means that outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.072 2014-03-14
Lens [No.098 2014-06-14] 　 Lens gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.098 2014-06-14
Lens [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Lens headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.112 2014-08-22
Lens [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Lens headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.113 2014-06-14
lens (outer, Textured) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 "Textured outer lens" or "Textured outer lens area" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.1. "Textured outer lens" or "Textured outer lens area" means all or part of an outer lens, designed to modify or influence the propagation of light from the light source(s), such that the light rays are significantly diverted from their original direction;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Lens [No.001 2001-05-14] 　 Lens Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through　the illuminating surface;		 No.001 2001-05-14
Lens [No.001 2010-07-10] 　 Lens Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.001 2010-07-10
Lens [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 Lens Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.005 2001-05-14
Lens [No.008 2001-05-14] 　 Lens Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.008 2001-05-14
Lens [No.008 2010-07-10] 　 Lens Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.008 2010-07-10
Lens [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Lens Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the front fog lamp (unit), which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.019 2010-07-10
Lens [No.020 2001-06-25] 　 Lens Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.020 2001-06-25
Lens [No.020 2010-07-10] 　 Lens Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.020 2010-07-10
lens [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 lens Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "lens," means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.031 2001-06-25
Lens [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Lens asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.031 2010-07-17
Lens [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Lens Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.098 2001-06-25
Lens [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Lens gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.098 2010-06-30
Lens [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Lens Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.112 2005-12-16
Lens [No.112 2010-08-31] 　 Lens headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.112 2010-08-31
Lens [No.113 2005-12-16] 　 Lens Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Lens" means the outermost component of the headlamp (unit) which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.113 2005-12-16
Lens [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Lens Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.14. "Lens" means the outermost component of an installation unit, which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Lens [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Lens Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.14. "Lens" means the outermost component of an installation unit, which transmits light through the illuminating surface;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Level indicator [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Level indicator LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
level of the instrument panel [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 level of the instrument panel Interior fittings 2.4. "level of the instrument panel" means the line defined by the points of contact of vertical tangents to the instrument panel; (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraph 2.4); No.021 2008-07-16
Lever [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated.		 No.060 2014-10-15
lever (Foot) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Foot lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever.		 No.060 2014-10-15
lever (Hand) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Hand lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression, (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disengage the clutch mechanism.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Lever [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Lever Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
lid (Trunk) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Trunk lid door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Trunk lid" is a movable body panel that provides access from outside the vehicle to a space wholly partitioned from the occupant compartment by a permanently attached partition or fixed or fold-down seat back.		 No.011 2010-05-13
life (Service) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Service life using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.65. "Service life" means the life in years during which the cylinders may safely be used in accordance with the standard service conditions.		 No.110 2015-06-30
life (service) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 service life Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.20. service life: The life in years during which the cylinders may safely be used in accordance with the standard service conditions		 No.110 2008-03-14
life (Useful) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Useful life Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.63. "Useful life" means the relevant period of distance and/or time over which compliance with the relevant gaseous and particulate emission limits has to be assured;		 No.049 2013-06-24
life (Useful) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Useful life Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.93. "Useful life" means the relevant period of distance and/or time over which compliance with the relevant gaseous and particulate emission limits has to be assured;		 No.096 2014-03-22
life (useful) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 useful life Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "useful life" means, for vehicles and engines that are approved to either row B1, row B2 or row C of the table given in paragraph 5.2.1. of this Regulation, the relevant period of distance and/or time that is defined in paragraph 5.3. (durability of emission control systems) of this Regulation over which compliance with the relevant gaseous, particulate and smoke emission limits has to be assured as part of the approval;		 No.049 2008-04-12
life (useful) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 useful life Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "useful life" means, for vehicles and engines that are approved to either row B1, row B2 or row C of the table given in paragraph 5.2.1. of this Regulation, the relevant period of distance and/or time that is defined in paragraph 5.3. (durability of emission control systems) of this Regulation over which compliance with the relevant gaseous, particulate and smoke emission limits has to be assured as part of the approval;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Lift [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Lift Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Lift" means a device or system with a platform that can be raised and lowered to provide passenger access between the floor of a passenger compartment and the ground or kerb.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Lift [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Lift Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Lift" means a device or system with a platform that can be raised and lowered to provide passenger access between the floor of a passenger compartment and the ground or kerb.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Lift [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Lift Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Lift" means a device or system with a platform that can be raised and lowered to provide passenger access between the floor of a passenger compartment and the ground or kerb.		 No.107 2010-09-29
light (Colour of the, emitted from the device) [No.019 2010-07-10] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, givenin Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for typeapproval, shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.019 2010-07-10
light (fog, rear) [No.038 2001-06-25] 　 rear fog light Rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "rear fog light" means a light used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear by giving a red signal of greater intensity than the rear position (side) lights;		 No.038 2001-06-25
LIGHT (WHITE, COLOUR OF) [No.119A4 2014-03-25] 　 COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT Cornering lamps [ANNEX 4] COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT (Chromaticity coordinates)
1. For checking the colorimetric characteristics, a source of light at a colour temperature of 2 856 K, corresponding to illuminant A of the international commission (CIE), shall be used. For lamps equipped with non-replaceable light sources (filament lamps and other), or light sources (replaceable or non-replaceable) operated together with an electronic light source control gear, the colorimetric characteristics should be verified with the light sources present in the lamp, in accordance with paragraph 7 of this Regulation.
2. The replaceable light source shall be subjected to the intensity, which produces the same colour as the illuminant A of the CIE.		 No.119 2014-03-25
Light [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means the surface as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3 (see, e.g. Parts 1 and 4);
This shall be declared according to one of the following conditions:
(a) in the case where the outer lens is textured, the declared light-emitting surface shall be all or part of the exterior surface of the outer lens;
(b) in the case where the outer lens is non-textured the outer lens may be disregarded and the light-emitting surface shall be as declared on the drawing, Annex 3 (see, e.g. Part 5);		 No.048 2011-12-06
Light centre [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light centre Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. Light centre: a point on the reference axis at a defined distance from the reference plane that represents the nominal origin of the visible radiation emitted.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Light centre length [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light centre length Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. Light centre length: the distance between the reference plane and the light centre		 No.128 2014-05-29
light emitted from a device (Colour of the) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Colour of the light emitted from a device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, , ,W61
2.29.2. "Selective-yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] SY12,SY23, ,
2.29.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] A12,A23, ,
2.29.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
light emitted from the device (Colour of the) [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.005 2014-05-29
light emitted from the device (Colour of the) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval, shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.019 2014-08-22
light emitted from the device (Colour of the) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.053 2013-06-18
light emitted from the device (Colour of the) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation		 No.074 2013-06-18
light emitted from the device (Colour of the) [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.113 2014-06-14
light emitted from the device (Colour of the) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Colour of the light emitted from the device" The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.086 2010-09-30
light emitting area (Apparent) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Apparent light emitting area Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.10. Apparent light emitting area: area that contains the (apparent) element of visible radiation when observed under a certain viewing axis. The apparent light emitting area is defined in a plane that contains the light centre and that is perpendicular to the corresponding viewing axis.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Light emitting diode (LED) light source [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Light-emitting diode (LED) light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.6. "Light-emitting diode (LED) light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence/fluorescence; No.048 2008-05-23
Light emitting diode light source [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light emitting diode (LED) light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.13. Light emitting diode (LED) light source: a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence and/or fluorescence.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Light emitting surface [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Light emitting surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.8. "Light emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means all or part of the exterior surface of the transparent material as declared in he request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3; No.048 2008-05-23
Light emitting surface [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means all or part of the exterior surface of the transparent material as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3;		 No.053 2013-06-18
light emitting surface of a lighting device or retro-reflector [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 light-emitting surface of a lighting device or retro-reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1. light-emitting surface of a lighting device or retro-reflector
means all or part of the exterior surface of the translucent material as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing (see Appendix 1);		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Light emitting surface of a lighting device, light signalling device or a retro reflector means [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Light-emitting surface" of a "lighting device", "light-signalling device" or a retro-reflector means all or part of the exterior surface of the transparent material as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3;		 No.074 2013-06-18
light of the device (reflected, Colour of the) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.5. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 of Regulation No 48.		 No.104 2014-03-14
light of the device (reflected, Colour of the) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Light signalling function [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Light-signalling function Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions;
2.6.2. "Light-signalling function" means the light emitted or reflected by a device to give to other road users visual information on the presence, identification and/or the change of movement of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Light source [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1. "Light source" means one or more elements for visible radiation, which may be assembled with one or more transparent envelopes and with a base for mechanical and electrical connection.
A light source may also be constituted by the extreme outlet of a light-guide, as part of a distributed lighting or light-signalling system not having a built-in outer lens;		 No.048 2008-05-23
light source (Gas-discharge) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light source Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Gas-discharge light source": light source in which the light is produced by a stabilized discharge arc		 No.099 2010-06-30
light source (LED) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 filament lamp, LED light source Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.006 2014-07-18
light source (LED) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light emitting diode (LED) light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.13. Light emitting diode (LED) light source: a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence and/or fluorescence.		 No.128 2014-05-29
light source (LED, axis on to the, Viewing) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Viewing axis on to the LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. Viewing axis on to the LED light source: an axis through the light centre at defined polar and azimuthal angle used to characterise photometrical properties of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
light source (LED, etalon, standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) LED light source(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
light source (LED, Standard (etalon)) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Standard (étalon) LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. Standard (étalon) LED light source: Special LED light source used for the testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. It has reduced tolerances for dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet. Standard LED light sources are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.128 2014-05-29
light source (standard) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 standard (etalon) light sources Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) light sources and to Regulations Nos 37 and 99 shall refer to Regulations Nos 37 and 99 and their series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.019 2014-08-22
Light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1. "Light source" means one or more elements for visible radiation, which may be assembled with one or more transparent envelopes and with a base for mechanical and electrical connection.
A light source may also be constituted by the extreme outlet of a light-guide, as part of a distributed lighting or light-signalling system not having a built-in outer lens;
2.7.1.1.1. "Replaceable light source" means a light source which is designed to be inserted in and removed from the holder of its device without tool;
2.7.1.1.2. "Non-replaceable light source" means a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the device to which this light source is fixed;
(a) In case of a light source module: a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the light source module to which this light source is fixed;
(b) In case of adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the lighting unit to which this light source is fixed;
2.7.1.1.3. "Light source module" means an optical part of a device which is specific to that device, is containing one or more non-replaceable light sources, and is only removable from its device with the use of tool(s). A light source module is so designed that regardless the use of tool(s), it is not mechanically interchangeable with any replaceable approved light source;
2.7.1.1.4. "Filament light source" (filament lamp) means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more heated filaments producing thermal radiation;
2.7.1.1.5. "Gas-discharge light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is a discharge arc producing electro-luminescence/fluorescence;
2.7.1.1.6. "Light-emitting diode (LED) light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence/fluorescence;
2.7.1.1.7. "LED module" means a light source module containing as light sources only LEDs;		 No.048 2011-12-06
light source [No.123 2006-12-27A4] 　 light source Adaptive Front-lighting Systems [Annex 4] TESTS FOR STABILITY OF PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
(c) the expression "light source" shall be understood to comprise also any single filament of a filament lamp.		 No.123 2006-12-27
light source control gear (Electronic) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Electronic light source control gear Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.2. "Electronic light source control gear" means one or more components between supply and light source to control voltage and/or electrical current of the light source;
2.7.1.2.1. "Ballast" means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source;
2.7.1.2.2. "Ignitor" means an electronic light source control gear to start the arc of a gas-discharge light source;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Light source module [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Light source module Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.3. "Light source module" means an optical part of a device which is specific to that device, is containing one or more non-replaceable light sources, and is only removable from its device with the use of tool(s). A light source module is so designed that regardless the use of tool(s), it is not mechanically interchangeable with any replaceable approved light source; No.048 2008-05-23
light source of different type (discharge, Gas) [No.099 2014-09-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. "Gas-discharge light sources of different types" are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which
differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark; that means:
(a) gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types;
(b) gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. Bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results.		 No.099 2014-09-30
light sources of different type (Gas-discharge) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Gas-discharge light sources of different "types" ( 1 ) are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. trade name or mark; that means:
(a) Gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types.
(b) Gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;		 No.099 2010-06-30
light transmittance (Regular) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Regular light transmittance safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Regular light transmittance" means light transmittance measured perpendicularly to the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Light-emitting diode light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Light-emitting diode (LED) light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.6. "Light-emitting diode (LED) light source" means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence/fluorescence;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Light-emitting surface [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Light-emitting surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.4. "Light-emitting surface" means that part of the exterior surface of the transparent lens that encloses the lighting or light-signalling device and allows it to emit light.		 No.086 2010-09-30
lighting (Bend) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends		 No.053 2013-06-18
lighting (Bend) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lighting (door, Service) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Service-door lighting Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Service-door lighting" means a lighting device(s) of the vehicle designed to illuminate the exterior vicinity of service doors and wheels.		 No.107 2015-06-18
lighting (door, Service-) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Service-door lighting Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Service-door lighting" means a lighting device(s) of the vehicle designed to illuminate the exterior vicinity of service doors and wheels.		 No.107 2010-09-29
lighting and light-signalling devices (Tractor type, with regard to the installation of) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the dimensions and exterior shape of the tractor;
2.1.2. the number and positioning of the devices;
2.1.3. the following are likewise considered not to be tractors of a different type:
tractors which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 above, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the type, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the tractor type in question;
tractors on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent;
tractors which are fitted with lamps, the position of which varies according to the direction of traffic in the country of registration.		 No.086 2010-09-30
lighting and light-signalling devices (Vehicle type with regard to the installation of) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means vehicles which do not differ in the essential respects mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4.
The following are likewise considered not to be "vehicles of a different type": vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps and the inclination of the dipped-beam prescribed for the vehicle type in question, and vehicles on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent:
2.2.1. The dimension and the external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. The number and positioning of the devices;
2.2.3. The headlamp-levelling system;
2.2.4. The suspension system.		 No.048 2011-12-06
lighting device (Illuminating surface of a) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Illuminating surface of a lighting device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.5.8 to 2.5.11) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector in a transverse plane. If the lamp glass (or glasses) extend(s) over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account. In the case of a passing lamp, the illuminating surface is limited on the side of the cut-off by the apparent projection of the line of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and glass are adjustable, the mean adjustment should be used;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Lighting function [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Lighting function Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.6.1. "Lighting function" means the light emitted by a device to illuminate the road and objects in the direction of vehicle movement; No.048 2008-05-23
lighting function (front-, Mode of a) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Mode of a front-lighting function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Lighting function [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Lighting function Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions;
2.6.1. "Lighting function" means the light emitted by a device to illuminate the road and objects in the direction of vehicle movement;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Lighting mode [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Lighting mode Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.3. "Lighting mode" or "mode" means a state of a front lighting function provided by the AFS, as specified by the manufacturer and intended for adaptation to specific vehicle and ambient conditions; No.048 2008-05-23
Lighting mode [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Lighting mode or mode (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.3. "Lighting mode" or "mode" means a state of a front lighting function provided by the AFS, as specified by the manufacturer and intended for adaptation to specific vehicle and ambient conditions;		 No.048 2011-12-06
lighting system (Emergency) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency lighting system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Emergency lighting system" means a system that provides a minimum level of lighting necessary to enable occupants to safely egress from the vehicle, including the emergency exits.		 No.107 2015-06-18
lighting system (front, Adaptive) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);		 No.048 2011-12-06
lighting system (front, Adaptive) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1.; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2006-12-27
lighting system (front, Adaptive) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped- beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;		 No.123 2010-08-24
lighting systems (front-, adaptive) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems SCOPE
This Regulation applies to adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) for motor vehicles		 No.123 2006-12-27
Lighting unit [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Lighting unit Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.1. "Lighting unit" means a light-emitting component designed to provide or contribute to one or more front lighting function(s) provided by the AFS;e No.048 2008-05-23
lighting unit (Additional) [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Additional lighting unit headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Additional lighting unit" means the part of a headlamp system that provides the bend lighting. It is independent from the device that provides the principal passing beam, may consist of optical, mechanical and electrical components, and it may be grouped and/or reciprocally incorporated with other lighting or light- signalling devices.		 No.113 2014-06-14
Lighting unit [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Lighting unit (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.1. "Lighting unit" means a light-emitting component designed to provide or contribute to one or more front lighting function(s) provided by the AFS;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Lighting unit [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Lighting unit Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Lighting unit" means a light emitting part of the system, which may consist of optical, mechanical and electrical components, designed to provide or contribute to the beam of one or more front-lighting function(s) provided by the system;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Lighting unit [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Lighting unit Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Lighting unit" means a light emitting part of the system, which may consist of optical, mechanical and electrical components, designed to provide or contribute to the beam of one or more front-lighting function(s) provided by the system;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Lightly loaded [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Lightly loaded Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Lightly loaded" means mass in running order plus 15 kg for test equipment, or the laden condition, whichever is less. In the case of ABS tests on a low friction surface (Annex 3, paragraphs 9.4 to 9.7), the mass for test equipment is increased to 30 kg to account for outriggers.		 No.078 2015-01-30
lights of different type (fog, rear) [No.038 2001-06-25] 　 rear fog lights of different types Rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. rear fog lights of different "types" are rear fog lights which differ in such essential respects as
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the category of lamp.		 No.038 2001-06-25
Light-signalling function [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Light-signalling function Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.6.2. "Light-signalling function" means the light emitted or reflected by a device to give to other road users visual information on the presence, identification and/or the change of movement of the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Light-transmitting components [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Light-transmitting components Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Light-transmitting components" means any part of the headlamp which transmits light for illumination, such as outer and inner lenses, lens or reflector coatings.		 No.098 2001-06-25
limit (Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch limits using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.52. "Batch limits" means in no case a "batch" shall be permitted to exceed 200 finished cylinders or liners (not including destructive test cylinders or liners), or one shift of successive production, whichever is greater.		 No.110 2015-06-30
limit speed Vadj (Adjustable) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable limit speed Vadj Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Adjustable limit speed Vadj" means the speed voluntarily set by the driver;		 No.089 2007-06-19
limitation device (Speed) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Speed limitation device (SLD) Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. For the purpose of Part III of this Regulation:
2.6.1. "Speed limitation device (SLD)" means a device whose primary function is to control the fuel feed to the engine in order to limit the vehicle speed to the specified value;
2.6.2. "Approval of an SLD" means the approval of a type of SLD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 21 below;
2.6.3. "Type of an SLD" means SLDs which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as:
The make and type of the device,
The range of speed values at which the SLD may be set,
The method used to control the fuel feed of the engine.		 No.089 2007-06-19
limitation function (Speed) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Speed limitation function Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.7. "Speed limitation function", means a function to control the fuel feed of the vehicle or engine management in order to limit the vehicle speed to a fixed maximum value.		 No.089 2007-06-19
Limitation speed V [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Limitation speed V Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Limitation speed V" means the maximum speed of the vehicle such that its design or equipment does not permit a response after a positive action on the accelerator control;		 No.089 2007-06-19
limiter (torque) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 torque limiter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1"torque limiter" means a device that temporarily limits the maximum torque of the engine;		 No.049 2008-04-12
limiter (torque) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 torque limiter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "torque limiter" means a device that temporarily limits the maximum torque of the engine;		 No.049 2010-08-31
limiter function (load, Thorax) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Thorax load limiter function safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant thorax in case of a collision;		 No.014 2015-08-19
limiter function (load, thorax) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 thorax load limiter function safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant thorax in case of a collision.		 No.014 2011-04-28
limiting device (excess flow) [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 excess flow limiting device using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.21. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device that automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas or liquid flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
limiting device (excess flow) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Excess flow valve (excess flow limiting device) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.10. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device which automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2011-05-07
line (Floor) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Floor line External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Floor line" means the line determined as follows: Successively position round a laden vehicle a cone with a vertical axis the height of which is not defined, and with a half angle of 30° in such a way that it contacts, constantly and as low as possible, the external surface of the vehicle. The floor line is the geometric trace of these points of contact. In determining the floor line, the jacking points, exhaust pipes or wheels shall not be taken into consideration. The gaps of the wheel arches are assumed to be filled in by an imaginary surface forming a smooth continuation of the surrounding external surface. At both ends of the vehicle the bumper shall be taken into consideration when establishing the floor line. Dependent upon the particular vehicle the floor line trace may occur at the bumper section extremity or at the body panel below the bumper. Where two or more points of contact occur simultaneously, the lower point of contact shall be used to determine the floor line		 No.026 2005-12-16
line (Floor) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Floor line external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Floor line" means the line determined as follows:
Successively position round a laden vehicle a cone with a vertical axis the height of which is not defined, and with a half angle of 30° in such a way that it contacts, constantly and as low as possible, the external surface of the vehicle. The floor line is the geometric trace of these points of contact. In determining the floor line, the jacking points, exhaust pipes or wheels shall not be taken into consideration. The gaps of the wheel arches are assumed to be filled in by an imaginary surface forming a smooth continuation of the surrounding external surface. At both ends of the vehicle the bumper shall be taken into consideration when establishing the floor line. Dependent upon the particular vehicle the floor line trace may occur at the bumper section extremity or at the body panel below the bumper. Where two or more points of contact occur simultaneously, the lower point of contact shall be used to determine the floor line.		 No.026 2010-08-14
line (Floor) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Floor line external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Floor line" means a line determined as follows:
When a vertical-axis cone of undetermined height having its side at an angle of 15° to the vertical is moved about the external surface of the loaded vehicle so as to remain in contact with the external surface of the body at its lowest point, the floor line is the geometrical trace of the points of contact.
In determining the floor line, no account shall be taken of the exhaust pipes or wheels, or of functional mechanical features attached to the under-body such as jacking points, suspension mountings or attachments for use in towing or in case of breakdown. In the spaces at the outside of wheel arches an imaginary surface extending the adjacent external surfaces without change of position shall be assumed. The front bumpers shall be taken into account in determining the floor line. Depending on the type of vehicle, the trace of the floor line may be at either the outer edge of the bumper profile or at the body panel below the bumper. Where there are two or more points of contact at the same time, the lowest point of contact shall be used to determine the floor line,		 No.061 2010-06-30
line (Head) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Head line head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Head line" means a straight line passing through the centre of gravity of the head and through the joint of the neck with the thorax. When the head is at rest the head line is situated in the extension of the reference line;		 No.025 2010-08-14
line (Reference) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Reference line seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference line" means the line on the manikin reproduced in annex 3, appendix 1, figure 1, to this Regulation.		 No.017 2010-08-31
line (Reference) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Reference line head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Reference line" means a straight line which, either on a test manikin having the weight and dimensions of a fiftieth percentile adult male or on a test manikin having identical characteristics, passes through the joint of the leg with the pelvis and the joint of the neck with the thorax. On the manikin reproduced in Annex 3 to this Regulation, for determining the H point of the seat, the reference line is that shown in figure 1 in the appendix to that Annex;		 No.025 2010-08-14
line (Torso-) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Torso-line Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position;		 No.014 2007-12-06
line (Torso-) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Torso-line head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position.		 No.025 2010-08-14
line (Torso-) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Torso-line protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position.		 No.029 2010-11-20
line (Torso-) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Torso-line Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3 DH machine with the probe in the fully rearward position;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Line marking [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Line marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17.2. "Line marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line.cle No.048 2008-05-23
Line marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Line marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17.2. "Line marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line;		 No.048 2011-12-06
line of a panel (nominal) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 The nominal line of a panel External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "The nominal line of a panel" means the line passing through the two points represented by the position of the centre of a sphere when its surface makes its first and last contact with a component during the measuring procedure described in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Linearity [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Linearity Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.43. "Linearity" means the degree to which measured values agree with respective reference values. Linearity is quantified using a linear regression of pairs of measured values and reference values over a range of values expected or observed during testing;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Liner [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Liner using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.60. "Liner" means a container that is used as a gas-tight, inner shell, on which reinforcing fibres are filament wound to reach the necessary strength. Two types of liners are described in this standard: Metallic liners that are designed to share the load with the reinforcement, and non-metallic liners that do not carry any part of the load.		 No.110 2015-06-30
liner (metal cylinder and, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - metal cylinders and liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.50. "Batch — metal cylinders and liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2015-06-30
liner (metallic, non, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch non-metallic liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.51. "Batch non-metallic liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
liner [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 liner Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.15. liner: A container that is used as a gas-tight, inner shell, on which reinforcing fibres are filament wound to reach the necessary strength. Two types of liners are described in this standard: Metallic liners that are designed to share the load with the reinforcement, and non-metallic liners that do not carry any part of the load.		 No.110 2008-03-14
liners (cylinders and, metal, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - metal cylinders and liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.5. batch - metal cylinders and liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2008-03-14
liners (metallic, non-, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch non-metallic liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.6. batch non-metallic liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
lining (Brake) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining (Brake) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining (brake, Drum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining (brake, drum, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining (brake, drum, Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation.		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining (brake, drum, Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining (brake, drum, Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining (brake, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type-approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1.1, Regulation No 13-H, Annex 1, paragraph 7.1 or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining (brake, Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1 ( 2 ) or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining (Interior) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Interior lining(s) burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.6. "Interior lining(s)" means material(s) that (together) constitute(s) the surface finish and substrate of a roof, wall or floor.		 No.108 2015-04-21
lining assembly (Brake) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining assembly (Brake) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake;
2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining;
2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake;
2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining;
2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate;
2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining assembly (brake, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining assembly (brake, Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining assembly (brake, Parking) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining assembly (brake, Parking) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining assembly (brake, Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining assembly (brake, Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining assembly type (Brake) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining assembly type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.5. "Brake lining assembly type" means wheel sets of brake lining assemblies which do not differ in brake lining type, dimension or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining assembly type (Brake) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining assembly type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Brake lining assembly type" means wheel sets of brake lining assemblies which do not differ in brake lining type, dimension or functional characteristics;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining type (Brake) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining type (Brake) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics;		 No.090 2010-05-28
lining type (brake, Drum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2012-07-13
lining type (brake, Drum) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.		 No.090 2010-05-28
Liquefied Natural Gas [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG (Liquefied /Liquid Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.42. "Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)" also called "Liquid Natural Gas" means a cryogenic liquid produced by reducing the temperature of natural gas to about – 161,7℃ at atmospheric pressure and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Liquefied petroleum gas [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.19. "Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG)" means any product essentially composed of the following hydrocarbons: propane, propene (propylene), normal butane, isobutane, isobutylene, butene (butylene) and ethane.
European Standard EN 589:1993 specifies requirements and methods of test for automotive LPG as marketed and delivered in the countries of the members of CEN (European Committee for Standardization).		 No.067 2008-03-14
liquid fuel [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 liquid fuel Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.6. "liquid fuel" means a fuel which is liquid in normal conditions of temperature and pressure		 No.034 2011-04-28
Liquid fuel [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Liquid fuel Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.3. "Liquid fuel" means a fuel which is liquid in normal conditions of temperature and pressure;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Liquid Natural Gas [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG (Liquefied /Liquid Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.42. "Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)" also called "Liquid Natural Gas" means a cryogenic liquid produced by reducing the temperature of natural gas to about – 161,7℃ at atmospheric pressure and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Live part [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Live parts protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Live parts" means conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Live part [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Live parts Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Live parts" means conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Live part [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Live parts Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Live parts" means conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Live part [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Live parts Electric vehicle safety 2.17. "Live parts" means any conductor or conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use. No.100 2009-02-14
Live part [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Live parts Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Live parts" means the conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energized in normal use.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Live part [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Live parts Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Live parts" means the conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use.		 No.100 2015-03-31
LNG [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG (Liquefied /Liquid Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.42. "Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)" also called "Liquid Natural Gas" means a cryogenic liquid produced by reducing the temperature of natural gas to about – 161,7℃ at atmospheric pressure and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
LNG Electronic control unit [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.38. "Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG)" means a device that controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.		 No.110 2015-06-30
LNG filling receptacle [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG filling receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.74. "LNG filling receptacle" means device connected to a vehicle or storage system which receives the LNG fuelling nozzle and permits safe transfer of fuel. The receptacle consists as minimum from a receptacle body and from a check valve mounted inside the body.		 No.110 2015-06-30
LNG fuel pump [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG fuel pump using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.27. "LNG fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of LNG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the fluid (liquid or vapour).		 No.110 2015-06-30
LNG nozzle [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG nozzle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.73. "LNG nozzle" means device which permits quick connection and disconnection of fuel supply hose to the LNG receptacle in a safe manner.		 No.110 2015-06-30
LNG system [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG system using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.11. "LNG system" means an assembly of components (tanks, valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (fuel lines, fittings, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using LNG in their propulsion system and related components up to and including the vaporiser. Other parts downstream from the vaporiser shall be considered as CNG components.		 No.110 2015-06-30
LNG trapping [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG trapping using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.68. "LNG trapping" means the containment of LNG in an enclosure of constant volume.		 No.110 2015-06-30
load (axle, Maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Maximum axle load Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum axle load" means the maximum value, as indicated by the manufacturer, of the total vertical force between the contact surfaces of the tyres or tracks of one axle and the ground and resulting from the part of the vehicle mass supported by that axle; this load may be higher than the "authorised axle load" laid down by the national administration. The sum of the axle loads may be greater than the value corresponding to the total mass of the vehicle;		 No.064 2010-11-26
load (Per cent) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Per cent load Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
load (Per cent) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Per cent load Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.63. "Per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
load (per cent) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 per cent load Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.049 2008-04-12
load (per cent) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 per cent load Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.049 2010-08-31
load (Wheel axle) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
load (wheel axle, stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
load (Wheel/axle) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
load (Wheel/axle) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
load (Wheel/axle) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
load (wheel/axle, Maximum stationary) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
load area (Heating system for the) [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Heating system for the load area Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.5. "Heating system for the load area" means any type of device designed to increase the temperature of the load area.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Load area [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Load area Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.6. "Load area" means the interior part of the vehicle used to accommodate the non-passenger load.		 No.122 2010-06-30
load capacity at various speed (tyre, Table of) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds" means the table in Annex 8 which shows, by reference to indices of load capacity and of capacity at nominal speed, load variations of a tyre if used at speeds other than that corresponding to the index of its nominal speed category.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Load capacity index [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Load capacity index Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Load capacity index" means a figure associated with the maximum load a tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to its speed symbol according to the operating conditions specified by the tyre manufacturer. A list of those indices and of the corresponding loads is given in Annex 4 to this Regulation.		 No.075 2011-03-30
load capacity with speed (Variation of) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Variation of load capacity with speed Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Table: Variation of load capacity with speed" means the tables in annex 7 showing as a function of the category of use, the type of application, the load capacity index and the nominal speed category symbol, the maximum load rating variations which a tyre can withstand when used at speeds different from that corresponding to its speed category symbol;
2.30.1. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to the "supplementary service description".
2.30.2. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to ‘Improved Flexion’ or "Very High Flexion" tyres.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Load index [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Load index 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Load index" means a numerical code which indicates the maximum load the tyre can support. The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Load index [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Load index Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Load index" means a numerical code which indicates the load the tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to the associated speed symbol and when operated in conformity with the service conditions specified by the manufacturer. A pneumatic tyre can have more than one load index to indicate its load capacity when used in single or dual (twin) formation, or to indicate an alternative load capacity (Unique point) on which a load variation in accordance with paragraph 2.35 and Annex 8 to this Regulation is not permitted.
The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation.		 No.109 2006-07-04
load limiter function (Thorax) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Thorax load limiter function safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant thorax in case of a collision;		 No.014 2015-08-19
load limiter function (Thorax) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Thorax load limiter function Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant’s thorax in case of a collision.		 No.014 2007-12-06
load limiter function (thorax) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 thorax load limiter function safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant thorax in case of a collision.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Load platforms [Directive 2009/060/EC] 　 Load platforms Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 2. Load platforms
2.1. The centre of gravity of the platform shall be situated between the axles.
2.2. The dimensions of the platform shall be such that:　・・・		 Directive 2009/060/EC
load rating (Maximum) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry.
2.33.1. For speeds lower or equal to 130 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the relevant load capacity index of the tyre as indicated in the table "Load capacity variation with speed" (see paragraph 2.27) with reference to the speed category symbol of the tyre and the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted.
2.33.2. For speeds above 130 km/h but not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the value of the mass associated with the load capacity index of the tyre.
2.33.3. For speeds above 210 km/h but not exceeding 270 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of the mass, associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, indicated in the table below with reference to the speed category symbol of the tyre and the maximum design speed of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted:
[表] Maximum speed km/h / Maximum Load Rating (%) (Speed Category Symbol V / Speed Category Symbol W )
210 / (100 / 100)
220 / (95 / 100)
--- / (--- / ---)
270 / ( (70) / 75 )
2.33.4. For speeds in excess of 270 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the mass specified by the tyre manufacturer with reference to the speed capacity of the tyre.
For intermediate speeds between 270 km/h and the maximum speed permitted by the tyre manufacturer, a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating applies.		 No.075 2011-03-30
load rating (Maximum) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry:
2.31.1. It must not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the relevant load capacity index of the tyre as indicated in the table "Load-capacity variation with speed" (see paragraph 2.30 above), with reference to the category of use, the speed category symbol of the tyre and the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted.		 No.106 2010-09-30
load rating (Maximum) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Maximum load rating 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass which the tyre is rated to support.
2.35.1. For speeds not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the value corresponding to the
load index for the tyre.
2.35.2. For speeds greater than 210 km/h but not exceeding 300 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, given in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted: [表]
Tyre speed symbol / Maximum speed (km/h) / Maximum load rating ( %)
V / 210～240 / 100～91.0
W / 240～270 / 100～85
Y / 270～300 / 100～85
For intermediate maximum speeds a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating is permissible		 No.108 2006-07-04
load tyre (extra) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" of Class C1 means a pneumatic-tyre structure designed to carry more load at a higher inflation pressure than the load carried by the corresponding standard version tyre at the standard inflation pressure as specified in ISO 4000-1:2010.		 No.117 2011-11-23
load value (Calculated) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Calculated load value Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. A "Calculated load value" refers to an indication of the current airflow divided by peak airflow, where peak airflow is corrected for altitude, if available. This definition provides a dimensionless number that is not engine specific and provides the service technician with an indication of the proportion of engine capacity that is being used (with wide open throttle as 100 per cent); CLV = [式]		 No.083 2012-02-15
Load-capacity index [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Load-capacity index Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.28. "Load-capacity index" means a number associated to the reference mass a tyre can carry when operated in conformity with requirements governing utilization specified by the manufacturer. No.030 2008-07-30
Load-capacity index [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Load-capacity index Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.27. "Load-capacity index" means one or two numbers which indicate the load the tyre can carry in single or in single and dual operation at the speed corresponding to the associated speed category and when operated in conformity with the requirements governing utilization specified by the manufacturer. A type of pneumatic tyre can have either one or two sets of load capacity indices depending on whether or not the provisions of paragraph 6.2.5 are applied. The list of these indices and their corresponding loads is given in Annex IV; No.054 2008-07-11
load-capacity index [REG. No 661/2009] 　 load-capacity index safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 6. "load-capacity index" means one or two numbers which indicate the load the tyre can carry in single or in single and dual formation at the speed corresponding to the associated speed category and when used in conformity with requirements specified by the manufacturer; REG. No 661/2009
Load-capacity index [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Load-capacity index Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Load-capacity index" means one number which indicates the load the tyre can carry in single formation at the speed corresponding to the associated speed category and when operated in conformity with the requirements governing utilisation specified by the manufacturer. The list of these indices and their corresponding masses is given in annex 4;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Load-capacity variation with speed [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Load-capacity variation with speed Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Load-capacity variation with speed" means an alternative load capacity for the tyre when used at a speed different from that indicated by the speed symbol in the normal service description. The permissible variations are given in the table in Annex 8 to this Regulation.		 No.109 2006-07-04
loaded (Lightly) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Lightly loaded Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Lightly loaded" means mass in running order plus 15 kg for test equipment, or the laden condition, whichever is less. In the case of ABS tests on a low friction surface (Annex 3, paragraphs 9.4 to 9.7), the mass for test equipment is increased to 30 kg to account for outriggers.		 No.078 2015-01-30
loading device (Pre) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Pre-loading device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Pre-loading device
An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.		 No.016 2015-11-20
loading device (Pre-) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Pre-loading device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Pre-loading device : An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.		 No.016 2007-11-30
loading device (Pre-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Pre-loading device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Pre-loading device
An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.		 No.016 2011-09-09
lock (Wheel) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Wheel lock Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Wheel lock" means the condition that occurs when there is a slip ratio of 1,00.		 No.078 2015-01-30
lock device (anti-) [No.078 2004-03-31A4] 　 anti-lock device Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. An "anti-lock device" is a component of a service braking system which automatically controls the degree of slip, in the direction of rotation of the wheel(s) on one or more wheels of the vehicle during braking;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Lock System (Safety, Child) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Child Safety Lock System door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Child Safety Lock System" is a locking device which can be engaged and released independently of other locking devices and which, when engaged, prevents operation of the interior door handle or other release device. The lock release/engagement device may be manual or electric and may be located anywhere on or in the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Locked gear [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Locked gear noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.11. "Locked gear" means the control of the transmission such that the transmission gear ratio cannot change during a test.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Locked gear ratios [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Locked gear ratios Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Locked gear ratios" means the control of transmission such that the transmission gear cannot change during a test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
locking retractor (Automatically) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Automatically, Emergency-locking retractor Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a Child Restraint System. The term covers the following devices:
2.41.1. "Automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented.
2.41.2. "Emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the strap wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.41.2.1. Deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity);
2.41.2.2. A combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.129 2014-03-29
locking retractor (automatically-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 an automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic
means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2007-11-23
locking retractor (automatically-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer’s physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;		 No.044 2011-09-09
locking retractor (Automatically, type 3) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Automatically locking retractor (type 3) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.		 No.016 2015-11-20
locking retractor (emergency-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 an emergency-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic
means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2007-11-23
locking retractor (emergency-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 emergency-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer’s freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer’s physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2011-09-09
locking retractor (Emergency, type 4) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Emergency locking retractor (type 4) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. Deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity),
2.14.4.2. A combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.016 2015-11-20
locking retractor (Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-locking retractor (type 1) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.		 No.016 2015-11-20
locking retractor (un, Manually, type 2) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Manually unlocking retractor (type 2) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Locking system [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Locking system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Locking system" means any device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use and includes devices to lock both the seat back relative to the seat and the seat relative to the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Locking system [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Locking system strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Locking system [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Locking system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.49. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the adult seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use.		 No.129 2014-03-29
locking system (door, activated, Automatically) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Automatically activated door locking system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Automatically activated door locking system" means a system that locks the doors automatically at a pre-set speed or under any other condition as defined by the manufacturer.		 No.095 2015-07-10
locking system (Overnight) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Overnight locking system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Overnight locking system" means a system designed to provide the possibility to secure the service and emergency doors of the vehicle against opening.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Locking system [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Locking system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Locking system" means any device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use and includes devices to lock both the seat back relative to the seat and the seat relative to the vehicle.		 No.014 2007-12-06
locking system [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 locking system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "locking system" means any device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use and includes devices to lock both the seat back relative to the seat and the seat relative to the vehicle.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Locking system [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Locking system Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.8. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Locking system [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Locking system seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Locking system [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Locking system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the adult seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Locking system [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Locking system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the adult seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Locking system [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Locking system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Locking system" means a device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in the position of use;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Locking system of the seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Locking system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. Locking system of the seat
A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Locking system of the seat [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Locking system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. Locking system of the seat : A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Locking system of the seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Locking system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. Locking system of the seat
A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Lock-off device [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Lock-off device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lock-off device" is a device which locks and prevents movement of one section of the webbing of an adult safety-belt relative to another section of the webbing of the same belt.
Such devices may act upon either diagonal or lap section or secure together both lap and diagonal sections of the adult belt. The term covers the following classes:
2.26.1. "class A device", a device that prevents the child pulling webbing from the retractor through to the lap part of the belt, when the adult belt is used to restrain the child directly. When supplied with group I restraints, the device allows compliance with paragraph 6.2.9;
2.26.2. "class B device", a device that allows the retention of an applied tension in the lap part of an adult safety-belt, when the adult belt is used to restrain the child restraint. The device is intended to prevent webbing slipping from the retractor through the device, which would release the tension and place the restraint in a non-optimal position.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Lock-off device [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Lock-off device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lock-off device" is a device which locks and prevents movement of one section of the webbing of an adult safety-belt relative to another section of the webbing of the same belt. Such devices may act upon either diagonal or lap section or secure together both lap and diagonal sections of the adult belt. The term covers the following classes:
2.26.1. "Class A device", a device that prevents the child pulling webbing from the retractor through to the lap part of the belt, when the adult belt is used to restrain the child directly;
2.26.2. "Class B device", a device that allows the retention of an applied tension in the lap part of an adult safety-belt, when the adult belt is used to restrain the child restraint. The device is intended to prevent webbing slipping from the retractor through the device, which would release the tension and place the restraint in a non-optimal position.		 No.044 2011-09-09
lockup of the front and rear wheel (Simultaneous) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2016-02-18
lockup of the front and rear wheels (Simultaneous) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2010-09-30
longitudinal central plane (Vertical) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vertical longitudinal central plane (VLCP) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the midpoints of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2007-12-06
longitudinal central plane (Vertical) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 VLCP (Vertical longitudinal central plane) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the mid- points of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Longitudinal plane [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Longitudinal plane Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.11. "Longitudinal plane" means a plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Longitudinal plane [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Longitudinal plane seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Longitudinal plane" means a plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
longitudinal plane [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 longitudinal plane protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "longitudinal plane" means a plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle.		 No.029 2010-11-20
longitudinal tilt (lt) [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 longitudinal tilt (lt) stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.5. "longitudinal tilt (lt)" means the gradient, expressed as a percentage, of the actual supporting surface, the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle being parallel to the line of maximum gradient (figure 2);		 Directive 2009/078/EC
Lorry [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Lorry CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lorry" means a motor vehicle of category N 1 which is designed and constructed exclusively or principally for conveying goods;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Lorry [No.101 2008-02-22 Supplement 7] 　 Lorry CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lorry" means a motor vehicle of category N1 which is designed and constructed exclusively or
principally for conveying goods		 No.101 2008-02-22 Supplement 7
loss (breathing, Tank) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,33 );		 No.083 2012-02-15
loss (breathing, Tank) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C1H2,33).		 No.083 2015-07-03
loss (soak, Hot) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,20 );		 No.083 2012-02-15
loss (soak, Hot) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C1 H2,20).		 No.083 2015-07-03
low anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;		 No.014 2015-08-19
low anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.		 No.016 2015-11-20
low anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "ISOFIX anchorage system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX Child Restraint System in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.11.1. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.
2.11.2. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.3. of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX Child Restraint System structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.		 No.129 2014-03-29
low anchorage (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix low anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.014 2007-12-06
low anchorage (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.014 2011-04-28
low anchorage (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.		 No.016 2007-11-30
low anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.		 No.016 2011-09-09
low anchorage (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix low anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
low anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX low anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.2. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Low floor bus [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Low floor bus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Low floor bus" is a vehicle of class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Low floor vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Low floor vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.4. "Low floor vehicle" is a vehicle of Class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Low floor vehicle [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Low floor vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Low floor vehicle" is a vehicle of Class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Low speed [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 n lo (Low speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Low speed (n lo )" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Low speed [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 n lo (Low speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Low speed (n lo )" means the lowest engine speed where 55 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Low speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 n lo (Low speed) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.44. "Low speed (n lo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the rated power (Annex 4A) or the maximum power (Annex 4B) occurs;		 No.096 2014-03-22
low speed [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 low speed (nlo) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "low speed (nlo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2008-04-12
low speed [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 low speed (nlo) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "low speed (nlo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Lower area of tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Lower area of tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.10. "Lower area of tyre" means the area included between the point of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim (1);
2.10.1. However, in case of tyres identified by the "tyre to rim fitment configuration" (see para. 3.1.10) symbol "A" or "U", it means the area of the tyre which is seating on the rim.		 No.030 2008-07-30
Lower area of tyre [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Lower area of tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Lower area of tyre" means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Lower area of tyre [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Lower area of tyre Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Lower area of tyre" means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Lower sidewall [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Lower sidewall Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.10. "Lower sidewall" means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange;
2.10.1. However, in case of tyres identified by the "tyre to rim fitment configuration" (see paragraph 3.1.11) symbol "A", it means the area of the tyre which is seating on the rim.		 No.054 2008-07-11
LPD [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 LPD (Lateral protection device) LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.4. "Lateral protection device (LPD)" consist of longitudinal member(s) and link(s) (fixing elements) to the chassis side members or other structural parts of the vehicle, designed to offer effective protection to unprotected road users against the risk of falling under the sides of the vehicle and being caught under the wheels. Parts of the vehicle can also be used as LPD.		 No.073 2012-05-08
LPD (Approval of an) [No.073 2012-05-082] 　 Approval of an LPD LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions specific to Part II
2.3.1. "Approval of an LPD" means the approval of a type of LPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 14;		 No.073 2012-05-08
LPD (Type of) [No.073 2012-05-082] 　 Type of LPD LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions specific to Part II
2.3.2. "Type of LPD" means an LPD that does not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings specified in paragraph 5.2.4		 No.073 2012-05-08
LPG [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 LPG Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
LPG Liquefied petroleum gas		 No.049 2010-08-31
LPG [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.19. "Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG)" means any product essentially composed of the following hydrocarbons: propane, propene (propylene), normal butane, isobutane, isobutylene, butene (butylene) and ethane.
European Standard EN 589:1993 specifies requirements and methods of test for automotive LPG as marketed and delivered in the countries of the members of CEN (European Committee for Standardization).		 No.067 2008-03-14
LPG components for use in vehicle [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 LPG components for use in vehicles LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
LPG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the maximum operating pressure and function, according to Figure 1.
Class 1 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing liquid LPG at vapour pressure or increased vapour pressure up to 3 000 kPa.
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 450 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 2A Low pressure parts for a limited pressure range including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 120 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 3 Shut-off valves and pressure relief valves, when operating in the liquid phase.
LPG components designed for a maximum operating pressure below 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure are not subjected to this Regulation.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in his own class with regard to maximum operating pressure and function.
[フローチャート] Figure 1 Classification with regard to maximum operating pressure and function		 No.067 2008-03-14
LPG filter unit [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 LPG filter unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.14. "LPG filter unit" means a device which filters the LPG, the filter can be integrated in other components;		 No.067 2008-03-14
LPG retrofit system (Approval of an) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
LPG retrofit system (component of) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 components of LPG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. For definitions of the components of LPG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments.		 No.115 2014-11-07
LPG retrofit system of an approved type (Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).		 No.115 2014-11-07
lt (longitudinal tilt) [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 longitudinal tilt (lt) stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.5. "longitudinal tilt (lt)" means the gradient, expressed as a percentage, of the actual supporting surface, the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle being parallel to the line of maximum gradient (figure 2);		 Directive 2009/078/EC
lubricant (repel, Capability to) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Capability to repel fuel or lubricant burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.8. "Capability to repel fuel or lubricant" means the capability of materials to repel fuel or lubricant when measured according to Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
lug (Tread) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread lug (or cleat) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Tread lug (or cleat)" means the solid-block element protruding from the base of the tread pattern;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Luggage compartment [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Luggage compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Luggage compartment" means the space in the vehicle for luggage accommodation, bounded by the roof, hood, floor, side walls, as well as by the barrier and enclosure provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with live parts, being separated from the passenger compartment by the front bulkhead or the rear bulkhead.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Luggage compartment [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Luggage compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Luggage compartment" means the space in the vehicle for luggage accommodation, bounded by the roof, hood, floor, side walls, as well as by the barrier and enclosure provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with live parts, being separated from the passenger compartment by the front bulkhead or the rear bulk head.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Luminance contrast [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Luminance contrast devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.4."Luminance contrast" means the brightness ratio between an object and its immediate background/surrounding that allows the object to be distinguished from its background/surroundings.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Luminance contrast [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Luminance contrast Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.4. "Luminance contrast" means the brightness ratio between an object and its immediatebackground/surrounding that allows the object to be distinguished from itsbackground/surroundings.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Luminance factor [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Luminance factor (symbol ß) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.4. "Luminance factor (symbol ß)" means the ratio of the luminance of the body to the luminance of a perfect diffuser under identical conditions of illumination and observation;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Luminance factor [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Luminance factor Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.3. "Luminance factor", the ratio of the luminance of the body considered to the luminance of a perfect diffuser under identical conditions of illumination and observation.		 No.069 2010-07-31
luminous flux (Cumulative) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Cumulative luminous flux Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. Cumulative luminous flux: luminous flux emitted by the light source under operating conditions, within a cone enclosing the specified solid angle and centred on the reference axis.		 No.128 2014-05-29
luminous flux (Measuring) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Measuring luminous flux Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Measuring luminous flux": specified value of the luminous flux for testing a filament lamp in a standard headlamp as specified in paragraph 3.9.		 No.037 2010-11-13
luminous flux (Objective) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Objective luminous flux Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.27. "Objective luminous flux" means a design value of the luminous flux of a replaceable light source or light source module. It shall be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the replaceable light source or light source module is energised by the power supply at the specified test voltage, as indicated in the data sheet of the light source or the technical specification as submitted with the light source module;		 No.048 2011-12-06
luminous flux (Reference) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference luminous flux Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Reference luminous flux": specified luminous flux of a standard filament lamp to which the optical characteristics of a lighting device shall be referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
luminous intensity (Coefficient of) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.		 No.003 2011-12-06
luminous intensity (Normalised) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Normalised luminous intensity Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.11. Normalised luminous intensity: luminous intensity divided by the luminous flux of the light source in order to characterise the angular radiation pattern of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Lying down position [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Lying down position [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Lying down position [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child’s head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Lying position (down/supine/prone) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Lying prone position [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Lying supine position [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
M [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2006-12-27
M [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2010-09-29
M [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 M (Technically permissible maximum laden mass) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2015-06-18
M1 (vehicle of category) [REG. No 078/2009] 　 vehicles of category M1 protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 7. "vehicles of category M1" derived from N1" means those vehicles of M1 category which, forward of the A-pillars, have the same general structure and shape as a pre-existing N1 category vehicle. REG. No 078/2009
machine (3D H) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three-dimensional H point machine (3-D H machine) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
main beam headlamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
main beam headlamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
main beam headlamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Main exterior rear view mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Main exterior rear-view mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(b) Classes II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in para graphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
Main steering system [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Main steering system Steering equipment 2.5.1.1. "Main steering system" means the steering equipment of a vehicle which is mainly responsible for determining the direction of travel. It may comprise: No.079 2008-05-27
Main-beam headlamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Main-beam headlamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.7. Main-beam headlamp
"Main-beam headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the tractor.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
main-beam headlamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 main-beam headlamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.7. main-beam headlamp
means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
maintained and used (Properly) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2 of Appendix 3 to this Regulation;		 No.083 2012-02-15
maintained and used (Properly) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2 of Appendix 3 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
maintenance (Emission related) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Emission related maintenance" means the maintenance which substantially affects emissions or which is likely to affect emissions deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in- use operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
maintenance (Emission related) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.27. "Emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance which substantially affects emissions or which is likely to affect emissions performance deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in-use operation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
maintenance (emission related, Critical) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Critical emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components		 No.049 2013-06-24
maintenance (emission related, Critical) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Critical emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.16. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components;		 No.096 2014-03-22
maintenance (emission related, Non) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Non-emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Non-emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance which does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting effect on the emissions deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
maintenance (emission related, Non) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Non-emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.50. "Non-emission-related maintenance" means maintenance which does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting effect on the emissions performance deterioration of the machine or the engine during normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
major functional failure [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 major functional failure Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "major functional failure" means a permanent or temporary malfunction of any exhaust aftertreatment system that is expected to result in an immediate or delayed increase of the gaseous or particulate emissions of the engine system and which cannot be properly estimated by the OBD system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
major functional failure [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 major functional failure Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "major functional failure" (*) means a permanent or temporary malfunction of any exhaust aftertreatment system that is expected to result in an immediate or delayed increase of the gaseous or particulate emissions of the engine system and which cannot be properly estimated by the OBD system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Malfunction [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Malfunction Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Malfunction" means a failure or deterioration of an engine system, including the OBD system, that might reasonably be expected to lead either to an increase in any of the regulated pollutants emitted by the engine system or to a reduction in the effectiveness of the OBD system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Malfunction [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Malfunction Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Malfunction" means the failure of an emission-related component or system that would result in emissions exceeding the limits in paragraph 3.3.2 or if the OBD system is unable to fulfil the basic monitoring requirements of this Annex.		 No.083 2012-02-15
malfunction [REG. No 692/2008] 　 malfunction emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 20. "malfunction" means the failure of an emission-related component or system that would result in emissions exceeding the limits in section 3.3.2 of Annex XI or if the OBD system is unable to fulfil the basic monitoring requirements set out in Annex XI; REG. No 692/2008
Malfunction (Control, NOx) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCM (NOx Control Malfunction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.53. "NO x Control Malfunction (NCM)" means an attempt to tamper with the NO x control system of an engine or a malfunction affecting that system that might be due to tampering, that is considered by this Regulation as requiring the activation of a warning or an inducement system once detected;		 No.096 2014-03-22
malfunction [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 malfunction Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "malfunction" means:
(a) any deterioration or failure, including electrical failures, of the emission control system, that would result in emissions exceeding the OBD threshold limits or, when applicable, in failing to reach the range of functional performance of the exhaust aftertreatment
system where the emission of any regulated pollutant would exceed the OBD threshold limits;
(b) any case where the OBD system is not able to fulfil the monitoring requirements of this Regulation.
A manufacturer may nevertheless consider a deterioration or failure that would result in emissions not exceeding the OBD threshold limits as a malfunction;		 No.049 2008-04-12
malfunction [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 malfunction Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "malfunction" means:
(a) any deterioration or failure, including electrical failures, of the emission control system, that would result in emissions exceeding the OBD threshold limits or, when applicable, in failing to reach the range of functional performance of the exhaust aftertreatment system where the emission of any regulated pollutant would exceed the OBD threshold limits;
(b) any case where the OBD system is not able to fulfil the monitoring requirements of this Regulation.
A manufacturer may nevertheless consider a deterioration or failure that would result in emissions not exceeding the OBD threshold limits as a malfunction;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Malfunction indicator [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 MI (Malfunction indicator) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Malfunction indicator" (MI) means an indicator which is part of the alert system and which clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Malfunction indicator [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 MI (Malfunction indicator) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visible or audible indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction of any emission-related component connected to the OBD system, or the OBD system itself.		 No.083 2012-02-15
malfunction indicator (MI) [REG. No 692/2008] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 19. "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visible or audible indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction of any emission-related component connected to the OBD system, or of the OBD system itself; REG. No 692/2008
malfunction indicator [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visual indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction in the sense of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
malfunction indicator [No.049 2010-68-31] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visual indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction in the sense of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
MANIKIN [No.016 2011-09-09A7] 　 MANIKIN Seat belts [ANNEX 7] DESCRIPTION OF MANIKIN
1. SPECIFICATIONS OF THE MANIKIN
1.1. General
The main characteristics of the manikin are illustrated in the following figures and tables:
Figure 1 Side view of head, neck and torso;
Figure 2 Front view of head, neck and torso;
【以下略】		 No.016 2011-09-09
Manikin [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Manikin strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Manikin", a manikin corresponding to the specifications for HYBRID II or III ( 1 ) for forward-facing seats; or a manikin corresponding to the specifications for side impact dummy according to Regulation No 95, Annex 6 for side facing seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Manikin [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Manikin Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Manikin", a manikin corresponding to the specifications for HYBRID II or III ( 1 )		 No.080 2010-06-30
Manoeuvring lamp [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Manoeuvring lamp reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Manoeuvring lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to the side of the vehicle to assist during slow manoeuvres.		 No.023 2014-08-08
manoeuvring lamp of different type [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2014-08-08
manual gearbox [REG. No 661/2009] 　 manual gearbox safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 16. "manual gearbox" means a gearbox that can be operated in a mode where the shift between all or some of the gears is always an immediate consequence of an action of the driver, regardless of its physical implementation; this does not cover systems where the driver can only preselect a certain gear shift strategy or limit the number of gears available for driving, and where the actual gear shifts are initiated independently of the decision of the driver according to certain driving patterns. REG. No 661/2009
Manual steering equipment [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Manual steering equipment Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1.2. "Different types of steering equipment"
1.2.1.1. Manual steering equipment, in which the steering power is provided solely by the muscular power of the driver;		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Manual steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Manual steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.1.1.1. "Manual steering equipment" in which the steering forces result solely from the muscular effort of the driver. No.079 2008-05-27
Manual valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Manual valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Manual valve [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 Manual valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.22. "Manual valve" means a manual valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder or tank.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Manual valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Manual valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.11. "Manual valve" means a manual valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Manually unlocking retractor (type 2) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Manually unlocking retractor (type 2) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Manually unlocking retractor [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Manually unlocking retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Manufacturer [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Manufacturer Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the Type Approval Authority for all aspects of the type approval or authorisation process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body be directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit which is the subject of the approval process;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Manufacturer [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Manufacturer Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. General definitions
2.1.1. "Manufacturer" means the organisation which can assume technical responsibility for the brake lining assemblies or drum brake linings or brake drums and discs and can demonstrate that it possesses the necessary means to achieve conformity of production.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Manufacturer [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Manufacturer Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the type approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body be directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle, system or component which is the subject of the approval process.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Manufacturer [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Manufacturer burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.1. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the Type-Approval Authority for all aspects of the type-approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle or component which is the subject of the approval process.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Manufacturer [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Manufacturer using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.61. "Manufacturer" means the person or organisation responsible for the design, fabrication and testing of CNG or LNG specific components.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Manufacturer [No.116 2012-02-16] 　 Manufacturer Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.3. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the type approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body is directly involved in all stage of the construction of the vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit which is the subject of the approval process.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Manufacturer [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Manufacturer Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the type approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit which is the subject of the approval process.		 No.121 2016-01-08
manufacturer [REG. No 443/2009] 　 manufacturer reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (c) "manufacturer" means the person or body responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the EC type-pproval procedure in accordance with Directive 2007/46/EC and for ensuring conformity of production; REG. No 443/2009
manufacturer [REG. No 595/2009] 　 manufacturer emissions 12. "manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the type-approval or authorisation process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body be directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit which is the subject of the approval process; REG. No 595/2009
manufacturer (System) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 System manufacturer LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "System manufacturer" means an organisation which can assume technical responsibility for the manufacturing of LPG and CNG retrofit systems and can demonstrate that it possesses the features required and the necessary means to achieve quality assessment and conformity of production of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Manufacturer [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Manufacturer Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Manufacturer" means the organization which can assume technical responsibility for the brake lining assemblies or drum brake linings and can demonstrate that it possesses the necessary means to achieve conformity of production.		 No.090 2010-05-28
manufacturer [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 manufacturer Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.16. manufacturer: The person or organization responsible for the design, fabrication and testing of the cylinders.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Manufacturer [No.116 2010-06-30] 　 Manufacturer Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.1. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the type approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit that is the subject of the approval process.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Manufacturer [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Manufacturer Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.1. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspectsof the type-approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that theperson or body is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle or componentwhich is the subject of the approval process.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Manufacturer [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Manufacturer Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspectsof the type approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that theperson or body is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle, system, component or separate technical unit which is the subject of the approval process.		 No.121 2010-07-10
Manufacturer [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Manufacturer Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.2. "Manufacturer" means the person or body who is responsible to the approval authority for all aspects of the type approval process and for ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the vehicle or component which is the subject of the approval proces		 No.122 2010-06-30
manufacturer's replacement wheels (Vehicle) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels" being wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.124 2006-12-27
marker lamp (End-outline) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 1997-07-30
marker lamp (End-outline) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.20. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamps fitted to the extreme outer edge as close as possible to the top of the tractor and intended clearly to indicate the tractor’s overall width. This signal is intended, for certain tractors, to complement the tractor’s front and rear position (side) lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.086 2010-09-30
marker lamp (outline, End) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain powerdriven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2014-09-30
marker lamp (outline, End-) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle’s overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle’s position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2010-06-12
marker lamp (outline, End) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.23. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edge and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. This lamp is intended, for certain vehicles and trailers, to complement the vehicle's front and rear position lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.048 2011-12-06
marker lamp (Side) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Side marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.24. "Side marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;		 No.048 2011-12-06
marker lamp (Side-) [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamp Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Side-marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;		 No.091 2010-06-30
marker lamp of different type (outline, end) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
marker lamp of different type (Side-) [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamps of different types Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Side-marker lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.091 2010-06-30
market (Placing on the) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Placing on the market Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.65. "Placing on the market" means the action of making available a product covered by this Regulation on the market of a country applying this Regulation, for payment or free of charge, with a view to distribution and/or use in the country;		 No.096 2014-03-22
marking (Conspicuity) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Conspicuity marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17. "Conspicuity marking" means a device intended to increase the conspicuity of a vehicle, when viewed from the side or rear (or in the case of trailers, additionally from the front), by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;
2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;
2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;
2.7.17.2. "Line marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line;		 No.048 2011-12-06
marking (Distinctive) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Distinctive markings, graphics Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Distinctive markings, graphics" mean coloured markings, whose coefficient of retro-reflection is as defined in paragraphs 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 below.		 No.104 2014-03-14
marking (lane, Visible) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Visible lane marking Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Visible lane marking" means delineators intentionally placed on the borderline of the lane that are directly visible by the driver while driving (e.g. not covered by snow, etc.);		 No.130 2014-06-18
marking fixture (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "ISOFIX marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an ISOFIX child restraint system of the ISOFIX positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
marking fixture (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix marking fixture Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Isofix marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
marking fixture (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix marking fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix marking fixture" means something that informs someone whishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each Isofix corresponding Isofix anchorages systems.		 No.014 2011-04-28
marking fixture (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Isofix marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an Isofix child restraint system of the Isofix positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding Isofix anchorages system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
marking fixture (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX marking fixture Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "ISOFIX marking fixture" means something that informs someone wishing to install an ISOFIX child restraint system of the ISOFIX positions in the vehicle and the position of each corresponding ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2011-09-09
marking material (Retro reflective) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Retro-reflective marking material Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Retro-reflection" means the reflection in which luminous flux is returned in directions close to the direction from which it came, this property being maintained even over wide variations of the direction of the luminous flux.
2.2.1. "Retro-reflective marking material" means a surface or a device from which, when directionally illuminated, a relatively large portion of the incident radiation is retro-reflected.		 No.104 2014-03-14
marking plate (rear, SMV) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 SMV rear marking plate Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "SMV rear marking plate", a triangular plate with truncated corners with a characteristic pattern faced with retro-reflective and fluorescent material or devices (class 1); or with retro-reflective materials or devices only		 No.069 2010-07-31
marking plates of different type (rear, SMV) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 SMV rear marking plates of different types Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Definition of "type"
SMV rear marking plates of different types means SMV marking plates which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. The trade name or mark.
2.7.2. The characteristics of the retro-reflective material or devices.
2.7.3. The characteristics of the fluorescent material.
2.7.4. The parts affecting the properties of the retro-reflective material or devices.		 No.069 2010-07-31
MARKINGS (VOLTAGE) [No.098 2010-06-30A08] 　 VOLTAGE MARKINGS gas-discharge light sources [ANNEX 7] VOLTAGE MARKINGS
[* * V]
This marking must be placed on the main body of each headlamp containing only gas discharge light sources and ballast, and on each external part of the ballast. The ballast(s) is(are) designed for a ** Volts network system.
【略】		 No.098 2010-06-30
marks (Fiducial) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Fiducial marks Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
marks (Fiducial) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Fiducial marks Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
marks (Fiducial) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Fiducial marks Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
marks (Fiducial) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Fiducial marks head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.025 2010-08-14
marks (Fiducial) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Fiducial marks protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
marks (Fiducial) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Fiducial marks Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by themanufacturer;		 No.046 2010-07-10
marks (Fiducial) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Fiducial marks Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Fiducial marks" are physical points (holes, surfaces, marks or indentations) on the vehicle body as defined by the manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Masking effect [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Masking effect Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Masking effect" means the chords of the sectors of the semi-circle of vision which cannot be seen because of structural components — for instance, the roof pillars, air intakes, exhaust stacks, windscreen frames, protective frame;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Masking effect [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Masking effect Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Masking effect" means the chords of the sectors of the semi-circle of vision which cannot be seen because of structural components – for instance, the roof pillars, air intakes, exhaust stacks, windscreen frames, protective frame.		 No.071 2010-07-31
mass [REG. No 443/2009] 　 mass reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (d) "mass" means the mass of the car with bodywork in running order as stated in the certificate of conformity and defined in section 2.6 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 443/2009
mass (Driver) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Driver mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Driver mass" means the nominal mass of a driver that shall be 75 kg (subdivided into 68 kg occupant mass at the seat and 7 kg luggage mass).		 No.078 2015-01-30
mass (Gross vehicle or maximum) [No.053 2013-06-18]a 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.053 2013-06-18
mass (Gross vehicle or maximum) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
mass (Kerb) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Kerb mass noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.6. "Kerb mass" (as defined in section 4.1.2 of ISO 6726: 1988) means the mass of the vehicle ready for normal operation and fitted with the following equipment:
(a) Full electrical equipment including the lighting and signalling devices supplied by the manufacturer;
(b) All instruments and fittings required by any legislation in respect of which a measurement of the vehicle dry mass is being made;
(c) Full complement of liquids to ensure the correct functioning of every part of the vehicle and the fuel tank filled at least to 90 per cent of the capacity specified by the manufacturer;
(d) Auxiliary equipment usually supplied by the manufacturer in addition to that necessary for normal operation (tool-kit, carrier(s), windscreen(s), protective equipment, etc.)
Notes:
1. In the case of a vehicle which operates on a fuel/oil mixture:
1.1. Where the fuel and oil are premixed, the word "fuel" is interpreted as including such premixture of fuel and oil;
1.2. Where the fuel and oil are separately metered, the word "fuel" is interpreted as including only the petrol. [The "oil", in this case, is already included in subparagraph (c) of this paragraph.]		 No.041 2012-11-14
mass (kerb, Unladen) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Unladen kerb mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Unladen kerb mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if these are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.094 2012-09-20
mass (kerb, Unladen) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Unladen kerb mass (Mk) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2007-12-06
mass (kerb, Unladen) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mk (Unladen kerb mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2011-03-30
mass (kerb, Unladen) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Unladen kerb mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Unladen kerb mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if these are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.094 2010-05-28
mass (laden, maximum, permissible, Technically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 M (Technically permissible maximum laden mass) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2015-06-18
mass (laden, maximum, permissible, Technically) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2006-12-27
mass (laden, maximum, Technically permissible) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2010-09-29
mass (laden, Un-) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.62. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.049 2013-06-24
mass (laden, Un) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.083 2015-07-03
mass (Maximum) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum mass Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.013 2016-02-18
mass (Maximum) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Maximum mass Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration).		 No.013H 2015-12-22
mass (Maximum) [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Maximum mass LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.2. "Maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.073 2012-05-08
mass (Maximum) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Maximum mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration);		 No.083 2012-02-15
mass (Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration).		 No.083 2015-07-03
mass (Maximum) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Maximum mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration);		 No.101 2012-05-26
mass (Maximum) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum mass Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.013 2010-09-30
mass (Maximum) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum mass Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration).		 No.013H 2010-08-31
mass (Maximum) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Maximum mass Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration).		 No.051 2007-05-30
mass (Maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Maximum mass Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum mass" means the maximum value of the vehicle stated by the manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.064 2010-11-26
mass (Maximum) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum mass Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.073 2004-03-31
mass (Maximum) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Maximum mass lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.073 2010-05-13
mass (Maximum) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration).		 No.078 2004-03-31
mass (maximum) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 maximum mass Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "maximum mass" of the vehicle means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be the maximum technically permissible (this may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.093 2002-02-01
mass (Maximum) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Maximum mass Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Maximum mass" of the vehicle means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be the maximum technically permissible (this may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.093 2010-07-17
mass (Maximum) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Maximum mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration);		 No.101 2007-06-19
mass (maximum) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 maximum mass Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.111 2002-02-01
mass (occupant, Individual) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Individual occupant mass (Mmi) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2007-12-06
mass (occupant, Individual) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mmi (Individual occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi ) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2011-03-30
mass (occupant, Total) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total occupant mass (Mm) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Total occupant mass" (Mm) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2007-12-06
mass (occupant, Total) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mm (Total occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total occupant mass" (Mm ) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2011-03-30
mass (Reference) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Reference mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.55. "Reference mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order less the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg and increased by a uniform mass of 100 kg;		 No.049 2013-06-24
mass (Reference) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Reference mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Reference mass" means the "unladen mass" of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg for test according to Annexes 4a and 8;		 No.083 2012-02-15
mass (Reference) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Reference mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg for test according to Annexes 4a and 8 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
mass (Reference) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Reference mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a mass of 100 kg (that is the mass of the side impact dummy and its instrumentation).		 No.095 2015-07-10
mass (Reference) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Reference mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg;		 No.101 2012-05-26
mass (Reference) [No.049 2011-07-08] 　 Reference mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.64. "Reference mass" means the "unladen mass" of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg for test according to Annexes 4A and 8 of Regulation No 83.		 No.049 2011-07-08
mass (Reference) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Reference mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a mass of 100 kg (that is the mass of the side impact dummy and its instrumentation);		 No.095 2007-11-30
mass (Reference) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Reference mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg;		 No.101 2007-06-19
mass (Running order) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Running order mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.2.2. "Running order mass" means the mass described in Paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to this Regulation and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats; No.083 2012-02-15
mass (Running order) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Running order mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.2. "Running order mass" means the mass described in paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to this Regulation and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats.		 No.083 2015-07-03
mass (Running order) [No.049 2011-07-08] 　 Running order mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.66. "Running order mass" means the mass described in paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to the Regulation No 83 and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats.’		 No.049 2011-07-08
mass (Test) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Test mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Test mass" for the pure electric vehicles, means the ‘reference mass’ for the category M 1 vehicles and the unladen mass plus half the full load for the category N 1 vehicles;		 No.101 2012-05-26
mass (Test) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Test mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Test mass" for the pure electric vehicles, means the "reference mass" for the category M1 vehicles and the unladen mass plus half the full load for the category N1 vehicles;		 No.101 2007-06-19
mass (Unladen) [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Unladen mass LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.073 2012-05-08
mass (Unladen) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.2.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable; No.083 2012-02-15
mass (Unladen) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Unladen mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank filled to 90 per cent of its capacity and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.095 2015-07-10
mass (Unladen) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Unladen mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without crew, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank full (if any), cooling liquid, service and traction batteries, oils, onboard charger, portable charger, tools and spare wheel, whatever is appropriate for the vehicle considered and if provided by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.101 2012-05-26
mass (unladen) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 unladen mass Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.4. "unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricants, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.034 2011-04-28
mass (Unladen) [No.049 2011-07-08] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.65. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passenger or load, but with the fuel tank 90 % full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.049 2011-07-08
mass (Un-laden) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen mass Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Unladen mass" means the weight of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen, but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if supplied by the vehicle manufacturer as standard equipment;		 No.073 2004-03-31
mass (Unladen) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Unladen mass lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Unladen mass" means the weight of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen, but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if supplied by the vehicle manufacturer as standard equipment;		 No.073 2010-05-13
mass (Unladen) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Unladen mass Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without crew, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.089 2007-06-19
mass (Unladen) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Unladen mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank filled to 90 per cent of its capacity and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.095 2007-11-30
mass (Unladen) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Unladen mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without crew, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank full (if any), cooling liquid, service and traction batteries, oils, onboard charger, portable charger, tools and spare wheel, whatever is appropriate for the vehicle considered and if provided by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
mass (vehicle, effective, Total) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total effective vehicle mass (Mt) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (Mk) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (Mm), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
mass (vehicle, effective, Total) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mt (Total effective vehicle mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt ) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (M k ) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (M m ), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
mass (vehicle, Unladen) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Unladen vehicle mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Unladen vehicle mass" means the nominal mass of the vehicle as indicated by the manufacturer(s) including all factory fitted equipment for normal operation of that vehicle (e.g. fire extinguisher, tools, spare wheel), plus coolant, oils, 90 per cent of fuel and 100 per cent of other gas or liquids, as specified by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
mass among the axle (distribution of) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2016-02-18
mass among the axle (distribution of) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
mass among the axles (distribution of) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2010-09-30
mass among the axles (distribution of) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
mass among the axles (distribution of) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 the distribution of mass among the axles Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "the distribution of mass among the axles" means the proportion of the maximum permissible mass borne by each axle, as declared by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.111 2002-02-01
mass group (Child restraint system) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 mass group (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6. ISOFIX Child restraint systems fall into 7 ISOFIX size classes described in Regulation No 16 Annex 17, Appendix 2:
A — ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B — ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 — ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C — ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D — ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E — ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F — ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
G — ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
[表]		 No.044 2011-09-09
Mass in running order [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Mass in running order Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Mass in running order" means the sum of the unladen vehicle mass and driver mass.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Mass of a vehicle in running order [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Mass of a vehicle in running order (mro) Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Mass of a vehicle in running order (mro)" means the mass of an unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device, including coolant, oils, 90 % of fuel, 100 % of other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel, driver (75 kg) and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Mass of the vehicle in running order [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the vehicle unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant tools and spare wheel, if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer, and propulsion battery tray(s) including the monoblocs of the electric vehicle's propulsion battery. No.012 2008-06-26
Mass of the vehicle in running order [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the vehicle unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant tools and spare wheel, if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer, and RESS.		 No.012 2013-03-27
Mass of the vehicle in running order [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
mass of the vehicle in running order [REG. No 692/2008] 　 mass of the vehicle in running order emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 28. "mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass described in point 2.6 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 692/2008
Mass of the vehicle in running order [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Mass of the vehicle in running order [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
mass ratio index (Power to) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 PMR (Power-to-mass ratio index) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.9. "Power-to-mass ratio index" means the ratio of the rated maximum net power of a vehicle to its mass. It is defined as:
PMR = (P n /(m kerb + 75)) * 1 000
Where m kerb is the numerical value of the kerb mass as defined in paragraph 2.6 above, expressed in kilograms.
The symbol PMR denotes the power-to-mass ratio index.		 No.041 2012-11-14
mass ratio index (Power to) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Power to mass ratio index (PMR) Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Power to mass ratio index (PMR)" means a numerical quantity (see Annex 10 paragraph 3.1.2.1.1) with no dimension used for the calculation of acceleration.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Master slave system [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Master-slave system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Matched pair [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Matched pair Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.27.1. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle, which, as a pair, complies with the photometric requirements. No.048 2008-05-23
Matched pair [No.098 2014-06-14] 　 Matched pair gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;		 No.098 2014-06-14
Matched pair [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Matched pair Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;
2.27.1. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle, which, as a pair, complies with the photometric requirements.		 No.048 2011-12-06
Matched pair [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Matched pair Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;		 No.098 2001-06-25
Matched pair [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Matched pair gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;		 No.098 2010-06-30
Material [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Material Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.9. "Material": chemical composition and mechanical properties as per paragraph 3.4.1.2.		 No.090 2012-07-13
material (Composite) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Composite material burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Composite material" means a material composed of several layers of similar or different materials intimately held together at their surfaces by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), such materials shall not be considered as composite materials.		 No.108 2015-04-21
material (Composite) [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Composite material Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Composite material" means a material composed of several layers of similar or different materialsintimately held together at their surfaces by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), such materials shall not be considered as composite materials.		 No.118 2010-07-10
material (Insulation) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Insulation material(s) burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.7. "Insulation material(s)" means material(s) used to reduce heat transfer by conduction, radiation or convection and for sound-proofing in the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment.		 No.108 2015-04-21
material (Production) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Production materials burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.5. "Production materials" means products, in the form of bulk materials (e.g. rolls of upholstery) or preformed components, supplied to a manufacturer for incorporation in a vehicle type approved under this Regulation, or to a workshop for use in the business of vehicle maintenance or repair.		 No.108 2015-04-21
material (Tread) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread material 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Material group [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Material group Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.10. "Material group": e.g. grey cast iron, steel, aluminium, etc.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Material installed in a vertical position [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Material installed in a vertical position burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.9. "Material installed in a vertical position" means materials installed in the interior compartment, the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment of the vehicle such that its slope exceeds 15 % from the horizontal when the vehicle is at its mass in running order and it is standing on a smooth and horizontal ground surface.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Material sub group [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Material sub-group Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.11. "Material sub-group": one of the sub-group defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.		 No.090 2012-07-13
materials (Production) [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Production materials Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.3. "Production materials" means products, in the form of bulk materials (e.g. rolls of upholstery) or preformed components, supplied to a manufacturer for incorporation in a vehicle type approved underthis Regulation, or to a workshop for use in the business of vehicle maintenance or repair.		 No.118 2010-07-10
matter (Particulate) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PM (Particulate matter) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.61. "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting C.I. engine exhaust gas with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52℃);		 No.096 2014-03-22
matter (Particulate) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PM (Particulate matter) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting exhaust with a clean filtered diluent to a temperature between 315 K (42℃) and 325 K (52℃); this is primarily carbon, condensed hydrocarbons, and sulphates with associated water;		 No.049 2013-06-24
MAWP (maximum allowable working pressure) [REG. No 079/2009] 　 maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(e) "maximum allowable working pressure" (MAWP) means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration; REG. No 079/2009
Maximum 30 minute power [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at Direct Current (DC) voltage as set out in paragraph 5.3.2 of Regulation No 85.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Maximum 30 minute power [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average.		 No.085 2006-11-24
Maximum 30 minute power [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1 of this Regulation, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average;		 No.085 2014-11-07
maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) [REG. No 079/2009] 　 maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(e) "maximum allowable working pressure" (MAWP) means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration; REG. No 079/2009
Maximum axle load [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Maximum axle load Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum axle load" means the maximum value, as indicated by the manufacturer, of the total vertical force between the contact surfaces of the tyres or tracks of one axle and the ground and resulting from the part of the vehicle mass supported by that axle; this load may be higher than the "authorised axle load" laid down by the national administration. The sum of the axle loads may be greater than the value corresponding to the total mass of the vehicle;		 No.064 2010-11-26
Maximum design speed [Directive 2009/060/EC] 　 Maximum design speed Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. Maximum design speed
1.1. For the type-approval tests, the average speed shall be measured on a straight track, which the tractor shall traverse in both directions from a flying start. The soil of the track shall be stabilised; the track shall be flat and at least 100 metres long; however it may include slopes of not more than 1,5 %.
1.2 ・・・		 Directive 2009/060/EC
maximum design speed [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 maximum design speed Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.1. "The maximum design speed" as specified in paragraph 16.2 of this Regulation.		 No.081 2012-07-13
Maximum design speed [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum design speed Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum design speed" means the speed which the vehicle cannot exceed, on the level and without undue external influence, taking into account any special limitations imposed on the design and construction of the vehicle;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Maximum developed pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum developed pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.62. "Maximum developed pressure" means the settled pressure developed when gas in a cylinder filled to the working pressure is raised to the maximum service temperature.		 No.110 2015-06-30
maximum developed pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 maximum developed pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.17. maximum developed pressure: The settled pressure developed when gas in a cylinder filled to the working pressure is raised to the maximum service temperature.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Maximum inside diameter [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Maximum inside diameter Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.13. "Maximum inside diameter": the maximum inside diameter of the brake drum is the point at which replacement becomes necessary.		 No.090 2012-07-13
maximum laden mass (permissible, Technically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 M (Technically permissible maximum laden mass) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2015-06-18
maximum laden mass (permissible, Technically) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2006-12-27
maximum laden mass (Technically permissible) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Maximum load rating [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.31. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry;
2.31.1. for speed not exceeding 210 km/h the maximum load rating shall not exceed the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre;
2.31.2. for speed higher than 210 km/h, but not exceeding 240 km/h, (tyres classified with speed category symbol "V") the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, indicated in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the car to which the tyre is fitted.
【表 : Maximum speed (km/h) vs Maximum load rating (%)】 略
2.31.3. For speeds higher than 240 km/h (tyres classified with speed category symbol "W") the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the loadcapacity index of the tyre, indicated in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the car to which the tyre is fitted.
【表 : Maximum speed (km/h) vs Maximum load rating (%)】 略
2.31.4. For speeds higher than 270 km/h (tyres classified with speed-category symbol "Y") the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load-capacity index of the tyre, indicated in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the car to which the tyre is fitted.
【表 : Maximum speed (km/h) vs Maximum load rating (%)】 略
2.31.5. For speeds lower or equal to 60 km/h the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of mass, associated with the load-capacity index of the tyre indicated in the table below with reference to the maximum design speed of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted.
【表 : Maximum speed (km/h) vs Maximum load rating (%)】 略
2.31.6. For speeds in excess of 300 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the mass specified by the tyre manufacturer with reference to the speed capacity of the tyre. For intermediate speeds between 300 km/h and the maximum speed permitted by the tyre manufacturer, a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating applies.		 No.030 2008-07-30
Maximum load rating [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry.
2.33.1. For speeds lower or equal to 130 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the relevant load capacity index of the tyre as indicated in the table "Load capacity variation with speed" (see paragraph 2.27) with reference to the speed category symbol of the tyre and the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted.
2.33.2. For speeds above 130 km/h but not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the value of the mass associated with the load capacity index of the tyre.
2.33.3. For speeds above 210 km/h but not exceeding 270 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of the mass, associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, indicated in the table below with reference to the speed category symbol of the tyre and the maximum design speed of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted:
[表] Maximum speed km/h / Maximum Load Rating (%) (Speed Category Symbol V / Speed Category Symbol W )
210 / (100 / 100)
220 / (95 / 100)
--- / (--- / ---)
270 / ( (70) / 75 )
2.33.4. For speeds in excess of 270 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the mass specified by the tyre manufacturer with reference to the speed capacity of the tyre.
For intermediate speeds between 270 km/h and the maximum speed permitted by the tyre manufacturer, a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating applies.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Maximum load rating [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry:
2.31.1. It must not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the relevant load capacity index of the tyre as indicated in the table "Load-capacity variation with speed" (see paragraph 2.30 above), with reference to the category of use, the speed category symbol of the tyre and the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Maximum load rating [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Maximum load rating 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass which the tyre is rated to support.
2.35.1. For speeds not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the value corresponding to the
load index for the tyre.
2.35.2. For speeds greater than 210 km/h but not exceeding 300 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, given in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted: [表]
Tyre speed symbol / Maximum speed (km/h) / Maximum load rating ( %)
V / 210～240 / 100～91.0
W / 240～270 / 100～85
Y / 270～300 / 100～85
For intermediate maximum speeds a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating is permissible		 No.108 2006-07-04
Maximum mass [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum mass Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.013 2016-02-18
Maximum mass [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Maximum mass Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration).		 No.013H 2015-12-22
maximum mass [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.053 2013-06-18
maximum mass [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 maximum mass RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 3.1.2. "maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration); No.058 2008-08-30
Maximum mass [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Maximum mass LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.2. "Maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.073 2012-05-08
maximum mass [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Maximum mass [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Maximum mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.3. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration); No.083 2008-05-06
Maximum mass [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Maximum mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration);		 No.083 2012-02-15
Maximum mass [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration).		 No.083 2015-07-03
Maximum mass [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Maximum mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration);		 No.101 2012-05-26
maximum mass [REG. No 078/2009] 　 maximum mass protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 5. "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass stated by the manufacturer pursuant to point 2.8 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 078/2009
Maximum mass [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum mass Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.013 2010-09-30
Maximum mass [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum mass Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration).		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Maximum mass [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Maximum mass Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration).		 No.051 2007-05-30
Maximum mass [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Maximum mass Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum mass" means the maximum value of the vehicle stated by the manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.064 2010-11-26
Maximum mass [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum mass Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.073 2004-03-31
Maximum mass [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Maximum mass lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Maximum mass" means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.073 2010-05-13
Maximum mass [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration).		 No.078 2004-03-31
maximum mass [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 maximum mass Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "maximum mass" of the vehicle means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be the maximum technically permissible (this may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.093 2002-02-01
Maximum mass [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Maximum mass Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Maximum mass" of the vehicle means the mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be the maximum technically permissible (this may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.093 2010-07-17
Maximum mass [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Maximum mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass declared by the manufacturer (this mass may be greater than the maximum mass authorised by the national administration);		 No.101 2007-06-19
maximum mass [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 maximum mass Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer (this mass may be higher than the ‘permissible maximum mass’ laid down by the national administration);		 No.111 2002-02-01
Maximum net power [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Maximum net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Maximum net power [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum net power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Maximum net power [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Maximum net power [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.120 2015-06-30
maximum net power (Rated) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 P n (Rated maximum net power) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.7. "Rated maximum net power" means the rated engine power as defined in ISO 4106:2004.
The symbol P n denotes the numerical value of the rated maximum net power expressed in kilowatts.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Maximum net power [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Maximum net power speed [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
Maximum net power speed [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Maximum operating pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Maximum operating pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Maximum power [No.049 2013-06-24A4a] 　 P max (Maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in kW as specified by the manufacturer.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Maximum power [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 P max (Maximum power) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.45. "Maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in kW as designed by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
maximum power (Declared) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 P max (Declared maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Declared maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in ECE kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
maximum power (declared) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1"declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;;		 No.049 2008-04-12
maximum power (declared) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Maximum rated speed [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Maximum rated speed Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.6 "Maximum rated speed" means maximum speed permitted by the governor at full load;		 No.024 2006-11-24
Maximum speed [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 v max (Maximum speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.10. "Maximum speed" means the maximum vehicle speed as defined in ISO 7117:1995.
The symbol v max denotes the maximum speed.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Maximum speed Vmax [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Maximum speed Vmax Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Maximum speed Vmax" is the maximum speed reached by the vehicle in the first half period of the response curve as defined in the figure of Annex 5 (para. 1.1.4.2.4);		 No.089 2007-06-19
maximum speed warning symbol [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 maximum speed warning symbol Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 5. SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS
5.1. General
5.1.4. The temporary-use spare unit shall exhibit the following characteristics:
5.1.4.1. An 80 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 80km/h]
5.1.4.1.1. An 120 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position. [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 120km/h]		 No.064 2010-11-26
Maximum stationary wheel axle load [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Maximum stationary wheel/axle load [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Maximum stationary wheel/axle load [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Maximum stationary wheel/axle load [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Maximum torque [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum torque Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum torque" means the maximum value of the net torque measured at full engine load.		 No.120 2015-06-30
Maximum torque [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum torque Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum torque" means the maximum value of the net torque measured at full engine load.		 No.120 2010-09-30
Maximum torque speed [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Maximum torque speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer		 No.049 2013-06-24
Maximum torque speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Maximum torque speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.46. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Maximum torque speed [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum torque speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
Maximum torque speed [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum torque speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
maximum weight [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 maximum weight Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "maximum weight" of the vehicle means the vertical force (in newtons) required to support the same vehicle loaded to its maximum mass;		 No.093 2002-02-01
Maximum weight [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Maximum weight Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "Maximum weight" of the vehicle means the vertical force (in newtons) required to support the same vehicle loaded to its maximum mass;		 No.093 2010-07-17
Mean fully developed deceleration [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "mfdd" (Mean fully developed deceleration) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Mean fully developed deceleration("mfdd") [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd") Tyre noise and wet grip 2.17. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds. No.117 2008-08-29
Mean steering ratio [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Mean steering ratio Steering equipment 2.4.5. "Mean steering ratio" means the ratio of the angular displacement of the steering control to the mean of the swept steering angle of the steered wheels for a full lock-to-lock turn; No.079 2008-05-27
Means of a quantity [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Means of a quantity Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.47. "Means of a quantity" based upon flow-weighted mean values means the mean level of a quantity after it is weighted proportionally to the corresponding flow rate;		 No.096 2014-03-22
measurement (humidity, Shared) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared humidity measurement Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.77. "Shared humidity measurement" means a humidity measurement that is used as the humidity for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
measurement (units of) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 units of measurement Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.1. Units of measurement
The units of measurement shall be:
Dimensions and linear distances / metres (m) or millimetres (mm)
Mass or load / kilograms (kg)
Force (and weight) / Newtons (N)
Moment / Newton-metres (Nm)
Energy / Joules (J)
Gravitational constant / 9,81 (m/s2)		 No.066 2007-12-06
measurement system (emission, Portable) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PEMS (Portable emissions measurement system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Portable emissions measurement system" (PEMS) means a portable emissions measurement system meeting the requirements specified in Appendix 2 to Annex 8 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
measuring attitude (Vehicle) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
measuring attitude (Vehicle) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
measuring attitude (Vehicle) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.017 2006-12-27
measuring attitude (Vehicle) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
measuring attitude (Vehicle) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks inthe three-dimensional reference system.		 No.046 2010-07-10
measuring attitude (Vehicle) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.080 2010-06-30
Measuring luminous flux [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Measuring luminous flux Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Measuring luminous flux": specified value of the luminous flux for testing a filament lamp in a standard headlamp as specified in paragraph 3.9.		 No.037 2010-11-13
measuring mechanism (speedo-meter's, Tolerances of the) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment.
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication limits for a range of speed inputs.
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
Measuring rim [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Measuring rim Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.21. "Measuring rim" means the rim on which a tyre is required to be fitted for size measurements; No.030 2008-07-30
Measuring rim [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Measuring rim Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.21. "Measuring rim" means the rim on which a tyre must be fitted for dimensional measurements; No.054 2008-07-11
Measuring rim [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Measuring rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Measuring rim" means the rim on which a tyre is required to be fitted for size measurements.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Measuring rim [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Measuring rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Measuring rim" means the rim on which a tyre is fitted for the measurement of the dimensions;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Measuring rim [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Measuring rim 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Measuring rim" means the rim specified as a "measuring rim width" or "design rim width" for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Measuring rim [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Measuring rim Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Measuring rim" means the rim specified as a "measuring rim width" or "design rim width" for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards.		 No.109 2006-07-04
mechanical coupling devices and components (standard) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer.		 No.055 2010-08-28
mechanical coupling devices and components (miscellaneous, non-standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2006-12-27
mechanical coupling devices and components (miscellaneous, standard, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6 such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2010-08-28
mechanical coupling devices and components (standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer		 No.055 2006-12-27
mechanical coupling devices and components [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head - see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye - see annex 5, paragraph 3.:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings - see annex 5, paragraph 4.:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices - see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the loadbearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer - see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 8.:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel - see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes - see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings - see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.		 No.055 2006-12-27
mechanical coupling devices and components [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "mechanical coupling devices and components means" all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.		 No.055 2010-08-28
mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.		 No.055 2010-08-28
mechanical coupling devices and components means [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 mechanical coupling devices and components means Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "mechanical coupling devices and components means" all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.		 No.055 2006-12-27
mechanical engagement (Positive) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Positive mechanical engagement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Positive mechanical engagement" means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.		 No.055 2006-12-27
mechanical engagement (Positive) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Positive mechanical engagement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Positive mechanical engagement" means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.		 No.055 2010-08-28
mechanism (Steering) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering mechanism protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Steering mechanism" means the aggregate comprising the steering control, the steering column, the assembly accessories, the steering shaft, the steering gear housing, and all other components such as those designed to contribute to the absorption of energy in the event of impact against the steering control;		 No.012 2013-03-27
median longitudinal plane of the vehicle [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 median longitudinal plane of the vehicle stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.6. "median longitudinal plane of the vehicle" means the longitudinal plane of symmetry of the rear wheel of the vehicle		 Directive 2009/078/EC
medium (Storage) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Storage medium Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.84. "Storage medium" means a particulate filter, sample bag, or any other storage device used for batch sampling;		 No.096 2014-03-22
member (Body) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Body member door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Body member" is that portion of the hinge normally affixed to the body structure.		 No.011 2010-05-13
member (Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door member door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Door member" is that portion of the hinge normally affixed to the door structure and constituting the swinging member.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Member of the crew [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Member of the crew [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Member of the crew [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.		 No.107 2010-09-29
member of the family [No.083 2012-02-15A12] 　 member of the family Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 12] GRANTING OF AN ECE TYPE APPROVAL FOR A VEHICLE FUELLED BY LPG OR NG/BIOMETHANE 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Member of the family
2.2.1. A "member of the family" is a vehicle that shares the following essential characteristics with its parent(s):
(a) It is produced by the same manufacturer.
(b) It is subject to the same emission limits.
(c) If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine:
It has a certified power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the parent vehicle.
If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder:
It has a certified power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the parent vehicle.
(d) If fitted with a catalyst, it has the same type of catalyst, i.e. three way, oxidation, de-NO x .
(e) It has a gas fuelling system (including the pressure regulator) from the same system manufacturer and of the same type: induction, vapour injection (single point, multipoint), liquid injection (single point, multipoint).
(f) This gas fuelling system is controlled by an ECU of the same type and technical specification, containing the same software principles and control strategy. The vehicle may have a second ECU compared to the parent vehicle, provided that the ECU is only used to control the injectors, additional shut-off valves and the data acquisition from additional sensors.		 No.083 2012-02-15
member of the family [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 a member of the family LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. For the purposes of this Regulation, "the parent vehicle", with regard both to LPG system and to CNG system, means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle, on which the requirements of this Regulation are going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer.
2.5.1. According to this Regulation, "a member of the family" is a vehicle sharing the following essential characteristics with its parent vehicle:
The family definition is based on the original vehicle characteristics.
2.5.1.1.
(a) It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer.
(b) It is classified in the same category M 1 or M 2 or M 3 or N 1 or N 2 or N 3 . Vehicles of category M 1 and N 1 class I may belong to the same family.
(c) It is subject to the same emission limits or those specified in earlier series of amendments of the applicable Regulation.
(d) If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine: it has an approved power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle. If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder: it has an approved power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle.
(e) Fuel feed and combustion process (injection: direct or indirect, single-point or multi-point).
(f) It has the same pollution control system:
(i) Same type of catalyst if fitted (three-way, oxidation, DeNO x )
(ii) Air injection (with or without)
(iii) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) (with or without)
If the tested vehicle was not equipped with air-injection or EGR, engines with these devices are allowed.
2.5.1.2. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(a), the vehicle family can also cover vehicles produced by other vehicle manufacturers if it can be demonstrated to the Type-Approval Authority that the same engine type and emission strategy is used.
2.5.1.3. With regard to requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(d):
(a) In the case of a central metering for the whole vehicle where a demonstration shows that two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2;
(b) In the case of an individual metering per cylinder where a demonstration shows two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2.
2.5.1.4. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(f) in case of a "master-slave" system, as defined in paragraph 2.1.6, the family relation will be considered valid regardless of the presence of the air injection or the EGR.		 No.115 2014-11-07
metal cylinder and liner (Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch - metal cylinders and liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.50. "Batch — metal cylinders and liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2015-06-30
metal cylinders and liners (batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch - metal cylinders and liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.5. batch - metal cylinders and liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.		 No.110 2008-03-14
metallic liner (non, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch non-metallic liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.51. "Batch non-metallic liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
metallic liners (non-, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch non-metallic liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.6. batch non-metallic liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
meter (pressure, atmospheric, Shared) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared atmospheric pressure meter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.76. "Shared atmospheric pressure meter" means an atmospheric pressure meter whose output is used as the atmospheric pressure for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
meter (Speedo-) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Speedometer Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment (2);
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication
limits for a range of speed inputs;
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed;		 No.039 2004-03-31
meter (Speedo-) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Speedometer speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment.
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication limits for a range of speed inputs.
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
meter (speedo, vehicle in respect of its, Type of) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular, to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer’s measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
meter's measuring mechanism (speedo-, Tolerances of the) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment.
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication limits for a range of speed inputs.
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
methane cutter E (non, Conversion efficiency of) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Conversion efficiency of NMC (non-methane cutter) E Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.14. "Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E" means the efficiency of the conversion of a NMC that is used for removing the non-methane hydrocarbons from the sample gas by oxidizing all hydrocarbons except methane. Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 per cent (E CH4 = 0) and for the other hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 per cent (E C2H6 = 100 per cent). For the accurate measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate for methane and ethane. Contrast with "penetration fraction";		 No.096 2014-03-22
methane hydrocarbon (Non) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NMHC (Non-methane hydrocarbons) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.51. "Non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC)" means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane;		 No.096 2014-03-22
method (dilution, flow, Partial) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Partial flow dilution method Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.60. "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount of dilution air prior to the particulate sampling filter;		 No.096 2014-03-22
mfdd (Mean fully developed deceleration) [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd") Tyre noise and wet grip 2.17. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds. No.117 2008-08-29
mfdd [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "mfdd" (Mean fully developed deceleration) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.		 No.117 2011-11-23
MI [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 MI (Malfunction indicator) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Malfunction indicator" (MI) means an indicator which is part of the alert system and which clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
MI [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 MI (Malfunction indicator) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visible or audible indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction of any emission-related component connected to the OBD system, or the OBD system itself.		 No.083 2012-02-15
MI [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visual indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction in the sense of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
MI [No.049 2010-68-31] 　 malfunction indicator (MI) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "malfunction indicator (MI)" means a visual indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction in the sense of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Minimum rated speed [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Minimum rated speed Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.7 "Minimum rated speed" means
2.7.1　either the highest of the following three engine speeds:
　　45 % of maximum net power speed
　　1 000rpm
　　minimum speed permitted by the idling control
2.7.2　or such lower speed as the manufacturer may request.		 No.024 2006-11-24
Minimum thickness [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Minimum thickness Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.12. "Minimum thickness": the thickness of the brake disc is the point at which replacement becomes necessary.		 No.090 2012-07-13
minute power (30, Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at Direct Current (DC) voltage as set out in paragraph 5.3.2 of Regulation No 85.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Mirror" means any device, excluding devices such as periscopes, intended to give a clear view to the rear, side or front of the vehicle within the fields of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Aspherical) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Aspherical mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10. "Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which thetransition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked.The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined bythe radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
[式] y=		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror (Centre of the) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Centre of the mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Centre of the mirror" means the centroid of the visible area of the reflecting surface;		 No.081 2012-07-13
mirror (Class of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Class of mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(a) Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1 of this Regulation;
(b) Classes II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in para graphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3 of this Regulation;
(c) Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.4 of this Regulation;
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;
(e) Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6 of this Regulation;
(f) Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork, giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.7 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Class of) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Class of mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13. "Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions.They are classified as follows:
- Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1.
- Class II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in paragraphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3.
- Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined inparagraph 15.2.4.4.
- Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined inparagraph 15.2.4.5.
- Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6.
- Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror (constituent part of the, curvature of the, radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12."The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Exterior) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.2. "Exterior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, which can be mounted on the external surface of a vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Exterior) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Exterior mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.2. "Exterior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, which can be mounted on the external surface of a vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror (Interior) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Interior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.1. "Interior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, which can be fitted in the passenger compartment of a vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Interior) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Interior mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.1. "Interior mirror" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, which can be fitted in the passenger compartment of a vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror (radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12. "The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc ofthe circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror (spherical, A) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Aspherical mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10."Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which the transition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked. The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined by the radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
y=R−[式]
R: nominal radius in the spherical part
k: constant for the change of curvature
a: constant for the spherical size of the spherical primary calotte		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Surveillance) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Surveillance mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.3."Surveillance mirror" means a mirror other than the ones defined in paragraph 2.1.1 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
mirror (Surveillance) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Surveillance mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.3. "Surveillance mirror" means a mirror other than the ones defined in paragraph 2.1.1 which canbe fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other thanthose specified in paragraph 15.2.4.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror (view, Rear) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Rear-view mirror" means any device intended to give a clear view to the rear;		 No.081 2012-07-13
mirror (view, rear, Class of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Class of rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Class of rear-view mirrors" means all devices having one or several features or functions in common.
The rear-view mirrors mentioned in this Regulation are grouped in Class "L".		 No.081 2012-07-13
mirror (view, rear, constituent parts of the, Radius of curvature of the) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.081 2012-07-13
mirror (view, rear, vehicle as regards, Type of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.2. "Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors" means vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
13.2.1. The geometrical features of the vehicle, liable to influence the installation of rear-view mirrors,
13.2.2. The positions and types of rear-view mirror specified.		 No.081 2012-07-13
Mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Mirror" means any device, excluding devices such as periscopes, intended to give a clear view to the rear, side or front of the vehicle within the fields of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mirror type (view, Rear) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Rear-view mirror type Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Rear-view mirror type" means devices which do not differ in respect of the following main characteristics:
2.2.1. The dimensions and radius of curvature of the rear-view mirror reflecting surface,
2.2.2. The design, shape or materials of the rear-view mirrors, including the connection with the vehicle;		 No.081 2012-07-13
miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components (non-standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2006-12-27
miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components (standard, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6 such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2010-08-28
misfire (Engine) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Engine misfire Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine misfire" means lack of combustion in the cylinder of a positive-ignition engine due to absence of spark, poor fuel metering, poor compression or any other cause. In terms of OBD monitoring it is that percentage of misfires out of a total number of firing events (as declared by the manufacturer) that would result in emissions exceeding the limits given in paragraph 3.3.2 or that percentage that could lead to an exhaust catalyst, or catalysts, overheating causing irreversible damage.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Mixed applications tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Mixed applications tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Mixed applications tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to either driven and non-driven axles of implements, agricultural machinery or trailers;		 No.106 2010-09-30
mixer (Gas air) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas/air mixer using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.31. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.		 No.110 2015-06-30
mixer (Gas/air) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas/air mixer using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Gas supply device" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine intake manifold (carburettor or injector).
2.17.1. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.
2.17.2. "Gas injector" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine or associated intake system.		 No.110 2011-05-07
mixing piece (gas) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.10. "Gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece" means a device which establishes the liquid or vaporized LPG to enter the engine;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Mk [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Unladen kerb mass (Mk) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Mk [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mk (Unladen kerb mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Mm [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total occupant mass (Mm) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Total occupant mass" (Mm) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Mm [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mm (Total occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total occupant mass" (Mm ) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Mmi [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Individual occupant mass (Mmi) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Mmi [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mmi (Individual occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi ) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Mobile deformable barrier [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Mobile deformable barrier [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor;		 No.095 2007-11-30
mobility (reduced, Passenger with) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2015-06-18
mobility (reduced, Passenger with) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2010-09-29
mobility system (Extended) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Extended mobility system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
modal steady state test cycle (Ramped) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ramped modal steady state test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.68. "Ramped modal steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined speed and torque ramps between these modes;		 No.096 2014-03-22
mode (default, emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission default mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission default mode" means an AECS activated in the case of a malfunction of the ECS detected by the OBD system that results in the MI being activated and that does not require an input from the failed component or system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
mode (Diesel) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Diesel mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Diesel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine does not use any gaseous fuel for any engine operating condition;"		 No.049 2013-06-24
mode (Diesel) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Diesel mode Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Diesel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine does not use any gaseous fuel for any engine operating condition.		 No.085 2014-11-07
mode (Discrete) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Discrete-mode Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.21. "Discrete-mode" means relating to a discrete-mode type of steady-state test, as described in paragraph 7.4.1.1. of Annex 4B and in Annex 5;		 No.096 2014-03-22
mode (Dual fuel) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel mode Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions;		 No.085 2014-11-07
mode (emission default) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission default mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission default mode" means an AECS activated in the case of a malfunction of the ECS detected by the OBD system that results in the MI being activated and that does not require an input from the failed component or system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
mode (fuel, Dual) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Dual-fuel mode" means the normal operating mode of a dual-fuel engine during which the engine simultaneously uses diesel fuel and a gaseous fuel at some engine operating conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
mode (Lighting) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Lighting mode or mode (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.3. "Lighting mode" or "mode" means a state of a front lighting function provided by the AFS, as specified by the manufacturer and intended for adaptation to specific vehicle and ambient conditions;		 No.048 2011-12-06
mode (possible, driving, Active) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
mode (Service) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Service mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.59. "Service mode" means a special mode of a dual-fuel engine that is activated for the purpose of repairing, or of moving the vehicle from the traffic when operation in the dual-fuel mode is not possible ( 1 )		 No.049 2013-06-24
Mode [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Mode Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2. and 6.3. of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Mode of a front-lighting function [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Mode of a front-lighting function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Modulator [No.078 2004-03-31A4] 　 Modulator Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Modulator" means a component designed to vary the braking force(s) in accordance with the signal received from the controller.		 No.078 2004-03-31
Monitor [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Monitor devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.2."Monitor" means a device that converts a signal into images that are rendered into the visual spectrum.		 No.046 2014-08-08
monitor (Group of) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Group of monitors Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Group of monitors" means, for the purpose of assessing the in-use performance of an OBD engine family, a set of OBD monitors used for determining the correct operation of the emission control system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Monitor [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Monitor Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.2. "Monitor" means a device that converts a signal into images that are rendered into the visualspectrum.		 No.046 2010-07-10
monitor device for indirect vision (Camera) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2."Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2 below.		 No.046 2014-08-08
monitor device for indirect vision (Camera-) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2.		 No.046 2010-07-10
monitor recording device (camera, Surveillance) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13."Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Monitoring (Performance Ratio, In Use) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 IUPRM (In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
monitoring (Performance) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Performance monitoring Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.48. "Performance monitoring" means malfunction monitoring, that consists of functionality checks and the monitoring of parameters that are not directly correlated to emission thresholds, and that is done on components or systems to verify that they are operating within the proper range;		 No.049 2013-06-24
monitoring system (control, Emission) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NO x control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5;
"Emission control system" means the elements of design and emission strategies developed or calibrated for the purpose of controlling emissions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
monitoring system (control, emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.		 No.049 2008-04-12
monitoring system (emission control) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.		 No.049 2010-08-31
monitoring system (isolation, resistance, On-board) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2011-02-14
monitoring system (pressure, Tyre) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" means a system fitted on a vehicle, able to perform a function to evaluate the inflation pressure of the tyres or the variation of this inflation pressure over time and to transmit corresponding information to the user while the vehicle is running.		 No.064 2010-11-26
monitoring system (pressure, tyre, Type of) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Type of tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of tyre pressure monitoring system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the principle of operation;
(b) any components which are likely to have a significant influence on the performance of the system as specified under paragraph 5.3 to this Regulation.		 No.064 2010-11-26
monitoring system (pressure, tyre, Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
monitoring system (resistance, isolation, On board) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
monitor-recording device (camera-, surveillance) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 surveillance camera-monitor-recording device Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13. "surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 which can befitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than thosespecified in paragraph 15.2.4 or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
mono fuel (vehicle is considered) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 A vehicle is considered mono-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Mono fuel gas vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Mono fuel gas vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/ biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.083 2015-07-03
mono fuel gas vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 mono fuel gas vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 10. "mono fuel gas vehicle" means a mono fuel vehicle that primarily runs on LPG, NG/biomethane, or hydrogen but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol; REG. No 692/2008
Mono fuel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Mono fuel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
mono fuel vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] 　 mono fuel vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 9. "mono fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel; REG. No 692/2008
Monobloc [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Monobloc Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.19. "Monobloc" means the smallest unit of the propulsion electric energy source; No.012 2008-06-26
Mono-fuel vehicle [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes for starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol; No.083 2008-05-06
Moped tyre [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Moped tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Moped tyre" means a tyre designed for the equipment of mopeds (categories L1 and L2 ).		 No.075 2011-03-30
motor cycle (Approval of a) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Approval of a motor cycle noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.1. "Approval of a motor cycle" means the approval of a motor cycle type with regard to noise;		 No.041 2012-11-14
motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system (Type of) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.2. "Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system" means motor cycles which do not differ in such essential respects as the following:
2.2.1. The type of engine (two-stroke or four-stroke, reciprocating piston engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection systems, arrangement of valves, rated maximum net power and corresponding engine speed). For rotary-piston engines the cubic capacity should be taken to be double of the volume of the chamber;
2.2.2. Transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of the gears;
2.2.3. Number, type and arrangement of exhaust or silencing systems.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Motor cycle tyre [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Motor cycle tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Motor cycle tyre" means a tyre designed primarily for the equipment of motor cycles (categories L3 , L4 and L5 ). However, they may also equip mopeds (categories L1 and L2 ) and light trailers (category 01).		 No.075 2011-03-30
motor vehicle (Approval of the) [No.028 2011-12-0611] 　 Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices 11. DEFINITIONS
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;		 No.028 2011-12-06
mounted directly on Child Restraint System (Adjuster) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System" means an adjuster for the harness belt which is directly mounted on the Child Restraint System, as opposed to being directly supported by the strap that it is designed to adjust.		 No.129 2014-03-29
movable component (Normal position of use of a) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Normal position of use of a movable component Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Normal position of use of a movable component" means the position(s) of a movable component specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the normal condition of use and the park condition of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Movable component [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Movable components Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Movable components" of the vehicle mean those body panels or other vehicle parts the position(s) of which can be changed by tilting, rotating or sliding without the use of tools. They do not include tiltable driver cabs of trucks;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Movable components [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Movable components Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.22. "Movable components" of the vehicle mean those body panels or other vehicle parts the position( s) of which can be changed by tilting, rotating or sliding without the use of tools. They do not include tiltable driver cabs of trucks; No.048 2008-05-23
Moving target [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Moving target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Moving target" means a target travelling at a constant speed in the same direction and in the centre of the same lane of travel as the subject vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
mro [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Mass of a vehicle in running order (mro) Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Mass of a vehicle in running order (mro)" means the mass of an unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device, including coolant, oils, 90 % of fuel, 100 % of other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel, driver (75 kg) and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.051 2007-05-30
MST [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 MST (multiservice tyre) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "MST" means "multiservice tyre", suitable both on and off road.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Mt [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total effective vehicle mass (Mt) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (Mk) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (Mm), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Mt [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mt (Total effective vehicle mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt ) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (M k ) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (M m ), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Multi functional component [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Multi-functional component using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.7. "Multi-functional component" means any of the above mentioned specific components combined or fitted together as a component.		 No.110 2015-06-30
multi- functional component [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 multi- functional component using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder);
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder;
(c) pressure regulator;
(d) automatic valve;
(e) manual valve;
(f) gas supply device;
(g) gas flow adjuster;
(h) flexible fuel line;
(i) rigid fuel line;
(j) filling unit or receptacle;
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve;
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) filter;
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) excess flow valve;
(q) service valve;
(r) electronic control unit;
(s) gas-tight housing;
(t) fitting;
(u) ventilation hose;
(v) pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered).
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi- functional component".		 No.110 2011-05-07
Multiple glazed unit [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Multiple-glazed unit safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Multiple-glazed unit" means an assembly of at least two parallel panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by one or more gap(s).
2.8.1. "Symmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit where all component panes are identical (e.g. all uniform toughened glass).
2.8.2. "Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit other than a symmetrical multiple-glazed unit).		 No.043 2014-02-12
multiple lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 multiple lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Single and multiple lamps"
2.16.2. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps", means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band or strip if such band or strip is placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, extends on both sides to within at least 0,4 m of the extreme outer edge of the vehicle, and is not less than 0,8 m long; the illumination of such surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends; the light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces on a transverse plane occupy not less than 60 per cent of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said individual light-emitting surfaces;		 No.048 2011-12-06
multiple window (Double or) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window.		 No.107 2015-06-18
multiple window (Double or) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window;		 No.107 2006-12-27
multiple window [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window;		 No.107 2010-09-29
multiservice tyre [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 MST (multiservice tyre) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "MST" means "multiservice tyre", suitable both on and off road.		 No.075 2011-03-30
multi-setting engine [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 multi-setting engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "multi-setting engine" means an engine containing more than one engine setting;		 No.049 2008-04-12
multi-setting engine [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 multi-setting engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "multi-setting engine" means an engine containing more than one engine setting;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Multivalve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Multivalve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Multi-wheel steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Multi-wheel steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.3. "Multi-wheel steering equipment" in which the wheels of one or more of each of the front and the rear axle(s) are steered; No.079 2008-05-27
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
N (Category) [No.073 2004-03-31A3] 　 Category N Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
1. Category N: Power-driven vehicles having at least four wheels or having three wheels when the maximum mass exceeds
1/metric/ton, and used for the carriage of goods
1.1. Category N2: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 but not exceeding 12 metric tons.
1.2. Category N3: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 12 metric tons.		 No.073 2004-03-31
n C (C Rate of) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 C Rate of n C Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "C Rate" of "n C" is defined as the constant current of the tested-device, which takes 1/n hours to charge or discharge the tested-device between 0 per cent of the state of charge and 100 per cent of the state of charge.		 No.100 2015-03-31
n hi [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 n hi (High speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "High speed (n hi )" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs.		 No.049 2013-06-24
n hi [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 n hi (High speed) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.40. "High speed (n hi)" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the rated power (Annex 4A) or the maximum power (Annex 4B) occurs		 No.096 2014-03-22
n lo [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 n lo (Low speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Low speed (n lo )" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2013-06-24
n lo [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 n lo (Low speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Low speed (n lo )" means the lowest engine speed where 55 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs.		 No.049 2013-06-24
n lo [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 n lo (Low speed) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.44. "Low speed (n lo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the rated power (Annex 4A) or the maximum power (Annex 4B) occurs;		 No.096 2014-03-22
N1 (vehicle of category) [REG. No 078/2009] 　 vehicles of category N1 protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 6. "vehicles of category N1" derived from M1" means those vehicles of N1 category which, forward of the A-pillars, have the same general structure and shape as a pre-existing M1 category vehicle; REG. No 078/2009
name (Brand) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Brand name" or "Trade description" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Narrowband emission [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Narrowband emission suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.8. "Narrowband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth less than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receivere		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Narrowband emission [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Narrowband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Narrowband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth less than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (CISPR 25, second edition 2002 and Corrigendum 2004).		 No.010 2012-09-20
Narrowband emission [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Narrowband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Narrowband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth less than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (CISPR 25, second edition).		 No.010 2010-05-08
Natural Gas (Compressed) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.43. "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means natural gas that has been compressed and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Natural Gas (Liquefied / Liquid) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG (Liquefied /Liquid Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.42. "Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)" also called "Liquid Natural Gas" means a cryogenic liquid produced by reducing the temperature of natural gas to about – 161,7℃ at atmospheric pressure and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.		 No.110 2015-06-30
NCD [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCD (NOx Control Diagnostic system) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.52. "NO x Control Diagnostic system (NCD)" means a system on-board the engine which has the capability of
(a) Detecting a NO x Control Malfunction;
(b) Identifying the likely cause of NO x control malfunctions by means of information stored in computer memory and/or communicating that information off-board;		 No.096 2014-03-22
NCD engine family [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCD engine family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.48. "NCD engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common methods of monitoring/diagnosing NCMs.		 No.096 2014-03-22
NCM [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCM (NOx Control Malfunction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.53. "NO x Control Malfunction (NCM)" means an attempt to tamper with the NO x control system of an engine or a malfunction affecting that system that might be due to tampering, that is considered by this Regulation as requiring the activation of a warning or an inducement system once detected;		 No.096 2014-03-22
NDIR [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 NDIR Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
NDIR Non-dispersive infrared analyzer		 No.049 2010-08-31
need (social, specific, designed to fulfil, Vehicle) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M1 which are either:
(a) Special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg (3);
(b) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion of vehicles of category M1G (3);
(c) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Need Restraint (Special) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Special Needs Restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Special Needs Restraint" is a Child Restraint System designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental disability; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it shall contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Net power [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries according to UN/ECE Regulation No 85 and determined under reference atmospheric conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Net power [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Net power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries tested in accordance with Regulation No 85 and determined under reference atmospheric conditions.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Net power [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries listed in Table 1 of Annex 5 or in Annex 6 to this Regulation, and determined under reference atmospheric condition;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Net power [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Net power Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.49. "Net power" means the power in "ECE kW" obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalent, measured in accordance with the method described in Regulation No. 120 on the measurement of the net power, net torque and specific fuel consumption of internal combustion engines for agricultural and forestry tractors and non-road mobile machinery.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Net power [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine speed with the auxiliaries and equipment listed in Table 1 of Annex 4 to this Regulation, determined under reference atmospheric conditions;		 No.120 2015-06-30
net power (Maximum) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Maximum net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.049 2013-06-24
net power (Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum net power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load.		 No.083 2015-07-03
net power (Maximum) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.085 2014-11-07
net power (Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.120 2015-06-30
net power (Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.120 2010-09-30
net power (maximum, Rated) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 P n (Rated maximum net power) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.7. "Rated maximum net power" means the rated engine power as defined in ISO 4106:2004.
The symbol P n denotes the numerical value of the rated maximum net power expressed in kilowatts.		 No.041 2012-11-14
net power (Rated) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Rated net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Rated net power" means engine net power as declared by the manufacturer at rated speed;		 No.120 2015-06-30
net power (Rated) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Rated net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Rated net power" means engine net power as declared by the manufacturer at rated speed;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Net power [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Net power Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.2 "Net power" means the power of a C.I. engine as defined in Annex 10 to this Regulation;		 No.024 2006-11-24
net power [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "net power" means the power in kW obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalent, measured in accordance with the method of measuring power as set out in Regulation No 85;		 No.049 2008-04-12
net power [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "net power" means the power in kW obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalent, measured in accordance with the method of measuring power as set out in Regulation No 85;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Net power [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries listed in table 1 of Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation, and determined under reference atmospheric conditions.		 No.085 2006-11-24
Net power [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine speed with the auxiliaries and equipment listed in Table 1 of Annex 4 to this Regulation, determined under reference atmospheric conditions;		 No.120 2010-09-30
net power speed (Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
net power speed (Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Neutral state [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Neutral state Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.6. "Neutral state" means the state of the AFS when a defined mode of the class C passing beam ("basic passing beam") or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies. No.048 2008-05-23
Neutral state [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Neutral state Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.6. "Neutral state" means the state of the AFS when a defined mode of the class C passing beam (‘basic passing beam’) or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Neutral state [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Neutral state Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Neutral state" means the state of the system when a defined mode of the class C
passing beam ("basic passing beam") or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no
AFS control signal applies;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Neutral state [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Neutral state Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Neutral state" means the state of the system when a defined mode of the class C passing beam (‘basic passing beam’) or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies;		 No.123 2010-08-24
NG [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 NG Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
NG Natural gas		 No.049 2010-08-31
NG gas range [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 NG gas range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "NG gas range" means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated November 1993;		 No.049 2008-04-12
NG gas range [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 NG gas range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "NG gas range" means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated November 1993;		 No.049 2010-08-31
nhi [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 high speed (nhi) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "high speed (nhi)_" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2008-04-12
nhi [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 high speed (nhi) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "high speed (nhi)" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Night time Colour of the light retro-reflected [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, ,
2.30.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: Y12,Y23, ,
2.30.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries [表] A12,A23, ,
2.30.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
nitrogen (Oxide of) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NOx (Oxides of nitrogen) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.56. "Oxides of nitrogen" means compounds containing only nitrogen and oxygen as measured by the procedures specified in this Regulation. Oxides of nitrogen are expressed quantitatively as if the NO is in the form of NO 2 , such that an effective molar mass is used for all oxides of nitrogen equivalent to that of NO 2 ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
nlo [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 low speed (nlo) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "low speed (nlo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2008-04-12
nlo [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 low speed (nlo) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "low speed (nlo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2010-08-31
NMC [No.049 2010-08-31223] 　 NMC Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
NMC Non-methane cutter		 No.049 2010-08-31
NMC E (Conversion efficiency of) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Conversion efficiency of NMC (non-methane cutter) E Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.14. "Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E" means the efficiency of the conversion of a NMC that is used for removing the non-methane hydrocarbons from the sample gas by oxidizing all hydrocarbons except methane. Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 per cent (E CH4 = 0) and for the other hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 per cent (E C2H6 = 100 per cent). For the accurate measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate for methane and ethane. Contrast with "penetration fraction";		 No.096 2014-03-22
NMHC [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NMHC (Non-methane hydrocarbons) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.51. "Non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC)" means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Noise reduction system [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Noise reduction system Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Noise reduction system" means a complete set of components necessary for limiting the noise made by a motor vehicle and its exhaust;		 No.051 2007-05-30
Noise reduction system component [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Noise reduction system component Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Noise reduction system component" means one of the individual constituent parts whose assembly constitutes the noise reduction system.
These components are, in particular: the exhaust piping(s), the expansion chamber(s), the silencer(s) proper.
2.5.1. The air filter is considered as a component only if its presence is essential to ensure observance of the prescribed soundlevel limits.
2.5.2. Manifolds are not considered components of the noise reduction system.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Noise reduction systems of different type [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Noise reduction systems of different types Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Noise reduction systems of different types" means noise reduction systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. that their components as specified in paragraph 4.1, bear different trade names or marks;
2.4.2. that the characteristics of the materials constituting a component are different or that the components differ in shape or size, a change in the plating procedure (galvanisation, aluminium coating, etc.) is not deemed to produce a difference of type;
2.4.3. that the operating principles of at least one component are different;
2.4.4. that their components are assembled differently;
2.4.5. that the number of the intake and/or exhaust silencers is different.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.15. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means the centuple of the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height in mm by the number expressing the nominal section width in mm No.030 2008-07-30
Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.15. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height (H) by the number expressing the nominal section width (S1), both dimensions expressed in the same units; No.054 2008-07-11
Nominal aspect ratio [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means the centuple of the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height (H) by the number expressing the nominal section width (S 1 ), both dimensions expressed in the same units.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Nominal aspect ratio [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height in millimetres by the number expressing the nominal section width in millimetres;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Nominal aspect ratio [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Nominal aspect ratio 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal aspect ratio" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Nominal aspect ratio [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Nominal aspect ratio Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal aspect ratio" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.		 No.109 2006-07-04
nominal line of a panel [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 The nominal line of a panel External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "The nominal line of a panel" means the line passing through the two points represented by the position of the centre of a sphere when its surface makes its first and last contact with a component during the measuring procedure described in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2005-12-16
nominal line of a panel [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 nominal line of a panel external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "The nominal line of a panel" means the line passing through the two points represented by the position of the centre of a sphere when its surface makes its first and last contact with a component during the measuring procedure described in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2010-08-14
Nominal radius of steering control [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Nominal radius of steering control Steering equipment 2.4.7. "Nominal radius of steering control" means in the case of a steering wheel the shortest dimension from its centre of rotation to the outer edge of the rim. In the case of any other form of control it means the distance between its centre of rotation and the point at which the steering effort is applied. If more than one such point is provided, the one requiring the greatest effort shall be used. No.079 2008-05-27
Nominal rim diameter [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Nominal rim diameter Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.18. "Nominal rim diameter" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted; No.030 2008-07-30
Nominal rim diameter (d) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.18. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted; No.054 2008-07-11
Nominal rim diameter (d) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Nominal rim diameter (d) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Nominal rim diameter [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 d (Nominal rim diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Nominal rim diameter [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means a conventional number denoting the nominal diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted and corresponding to the diameter of the rim expressed either by size codes (number below 100 — see table for equivalence with millimeters) or in mm (numbers above 100) but not both;
[表]		 No.106 2010-09-30
Nominal thickness [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Nominal thickness safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Nominal thickness": means the manufacturer's design thickness with a tolerance of ± (n × 0,2 mm) where n equals the number of glass layers in the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Nominal value [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Nominal value Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually and when used in combination.
2.28.1. "Nominal value" is defined, for a power-driven vehicle, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.
2.28.2. "Nominal value" is defined, for a trailer, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate to the coupling head signal.
2.28.3. "Nominal demand value" is defined, for coupling force control, as the characteristic which relates the coupling head signal to the braking rate and which can be demonstrated at Type Approval, within the limits of the compatibility bands of Annex 10.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Nominal value [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Nominal value Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually
.2.19.1. "Nominal value" is defined as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at type approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Nominal value [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal value Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually and when used in combination.
2.28.1. "Nominal value" is defined, for a power-driven vehicle, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.
2.28.2. "Nominal value" is defined, for a trailer, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate to the coupling head signal.
2.28.3. "Nominal demand value" is defined, for coupling force control, as the characteristic which relates the coupling head signal to the braking rate and which can be demonstrated at Type Approval, within the limits of the compatibility bands of Annex 10.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Nominal value [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Nominal value Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually.
2.19.1. "Nominal value" is defined as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at type approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Nominal voltage [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Nominal voltage Electric vehicle safety 2.22. "Nominal voltage" means the root-mean-square (rms) value of the voltage specified by the manufacturer, for which the electrical circuit is designed and to which its characteristics are referred. No.100 2009-02-14
Non emission related maintenance [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Non-emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Non-emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance which does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting effect on the emissions deterioration of the vehicle or the engine during normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Non emission related maintenance [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Non-emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.50. "Non-emission-related maintenance" means maintenance which does not substantially affect emissions and which does not have a lasting effect on the emissions performance deterioration of the machine or the engine during normal in-use operation once the maintenance is performed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Non enclosed buckle release button [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Non enclosed buckle release button [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Non locking retractor [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-locking retractor (type 1) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.		 No.016 2015-11-20
non metallic liner (Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Batch non-metallic liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.51. "Batch non-metallic liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
non methane cutter E (Conversion efficiency of) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Conversion efficiency of NMC (non-methane cutter) E Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.14. "Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E" means the efficiency of the conversion of a NMC that is used for removing the non-methane hydrocarbons from the sample gas by oxidizing all hydrocarbons except methane. Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 per cent (E CH4 = 0) and for the other hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 per cent (E C2H6 = 100 per cent). For the accurate measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate for methane and ethane. Contrast with "penetration fraction";		 No.096 2014-03-22
Non methane hydrocarbon [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NMHC (Non-methane hydrocarbons) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.51. "Non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC)" means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Non original exhaust system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Non-original exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.3. "Exhaust or silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motor cycle engine and its exhaust.
2.3.1. "Original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval. It may also be the vehicle manufacturer’s replacement part.
2.3.2. "Non-original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Non original silencing system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Non-original exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.3. "Exhaust or silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motor cycle engine and its exhaust.
2.3.1. "Original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval. It may also be the vehicle manufacturer’s replacement part.
2.3.2. "Non-original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Non return valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Non-return valve or check valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.20. "Non-return valve or check valve" means an automatic valve that allows gas/fluid to flow in only one direction.		 No.110 2015-06-30
none-enclosed buckle release button [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 enclosed / none- buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2011-09-09
non-enclosed buckle release button [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 non-enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Non-enclosed buckle-release button [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button : A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Non-enclosed buckle-release button [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
non-integral class (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 non-integral class (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;		 No.044 2007-11-23
Non-locking retractor [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Non-locking retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.		 No.016 2011-09-09
non-metallic liners (batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 batch non-metallic liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.6. batch non-metallic liners: A ‘batch’ shall be a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Non-replaceable light source [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Non-replaceable light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.2. "Non-replaceable light source" means a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the device to which this light source is fixed;
(a) in case of a light source module: a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the light source module to which this light source is fixed;
(b) in case of adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the lighting unit to which this light source is fixed;		 No.048 2008-05-23
Non-replaceable light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Non-replaceable light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.1. "Replaceable light source" means a light source which is designed to be inserted in and removed from the holder of its device without tool;
2.7.1.1.2. "Non-replaceable light source" means a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the device to which this light source is fixed;
(a) In case of a light source module: a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the light source module to which this light source is fixed;
(b) In case of adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the lighting unit to which this light source is fixed;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Non-return valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Non-return valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Non-return valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Non-return valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.9. "Non-return valve" means an automatic valve which allows gas to flow in only one direction.		 No.110 2011-05-07
non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2006-12-27
non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2010-08-28
non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2006-12-27
non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6 such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Normal condition of use of a vehicle [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Normal condition of use of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.24. "Normal condition of use of a vehicle" means:
2.24.1. for a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is ready to move with its propulsion engine running and its movable components in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.;
2.24.2. and for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the conditions as prescribed in paragraph 2.24.1. and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Normal condition of use of a vehicle [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Normal condition of use of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Normal condition of use of a vehicle" means:
2.24.1. For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is ready to move with its propulsion engine running and its movable components in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;
2.24.2. And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the conditions as prescribed in paragraph 2.24.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.		 No.048 2011-12-06
normal operation (Vehicle is in) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle is in normal operation Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle is in normal operation" means that vehicle is in forward motion at the speed greater than 10 km/h.		 No.016 2015-11-20
normal operation (Vehicle is in) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle is in normal operation Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Vehicle is in normal operation" means that vehicle is in forward motion at the speed greater than 10 km/h.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Normal position of use of a movable component [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Normal position of use of a movable component Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.23. "Normal position of use of a movable component" means the position(s) of a movable component specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the normal condition of use and the park condition of the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Normal position of use of a movable component [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Normal position of use of a movable component Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Normal position of use of a movable component" means the position(s) of a movable component specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the normal condition of use and the park condition of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Normal running pressure [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Normal running pressure (Tyre) Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Normal running pressure" means the cold inflation pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer increased by 0,2 bar;		 No.039 2004-03-31
Normal running pressure. [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Normal running pressure speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Normal running pressure" means the cold inflation pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer increased by 0,2 bar.		 No.039 2010-05-13
Normal tyre [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Normal tyre Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.2. Category of use:
2.2.1. "Normal tyre" means a tyre intended for normal, everyday, on-road use;		 No.054 2008-07-11
Normal tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Normal tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.8. "Normal tyre" means a tyre intended for normal, everyday, on-road use. No.117 2008-08-29
Normal tyre [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Normal tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Normal tyre [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Normal tyre Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Normal tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Normal tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Normal tyre" means a tyre intended for normal on-road use.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Normal tyree [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Normal tyre Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Normalised luminous intensity [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Normalised luminous intensity Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.11. Normalised luminous intensity: luminous intensity divided by the luminous flux of the light source in order to characterise the angular radiation pattern of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Normalized torque [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Normalized torque Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. "Normalized torque" means engine torque in per cent normalized to the maximum available torque at an engine speed.		 No.049 2013-06-24
normally fitted (tyre) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tyres normally fitted speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tyres normally fitted" means the type or types of tyre provided by the manufacturer on the vehicle type in question; snow tyres shall not be regarded as tyres normally fitted.		 No.039 2010-05-13
not fastened (Safety-belt is) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety- belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.		 No.016 2011-09-09
NOx [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NOx (Oxides of nitrogen) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.56. "Oxides of nitrogen" means compounds containing only nitrogen and oxygen as measured by the procedures specified in this Regulation. Oxides of nitrogen are expressed quantitatively as if the NO is in the form of NO 2 , such that an effective molar mass is used for all oxides of nitrogen equivalent to that of NO 2 ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
NOx Control Diagnostic system [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCD (NOx Control Diagnostic system) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.52. "NO x Control Diagnostic system (NCD)" means a system on-board the engine which has the capability of
(a) Detecting a NO x Control Malfunction;
(b) Identifying the likely cause of NO x control malfunctions by means of information stored in computer memory and/or communicating that information off-board;		 No.096 2014-03-22
NOx Control Malfunction [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NCM (NOx Control Malfunction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.53. "NO x Control Malfunction (NCM)" means an attempt to tamper with the NO x control system of an engine or a malfunction affecting that system that might be due to tampering, that is considered by this Regulation as requiring the activation of a warning or an inducement system once detected;		 No.096 2014-03-22
NOx- particulate filter (de-, combined) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2008-04-12
NOx- particulate filter (de-, combined) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2010-08-31
NOx system (de-) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 deNOx system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "deNOx system" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx ) (e.g. passive and active lean NOx catalysts, NOx adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.049 2013-06-24
NOx system (De) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 DeNOx system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.18. "DeNO x system" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NO x ) (e.g. passive and active lean NO x catalysts, NO x adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.096 2014-03-22
NOx system (de-) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 deNOx system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "deNOx system" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) (e.g. there are presently passive and active lean NOx catalysts, NOx adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.049 2008-04-12
NOx system (de-) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 deNOx system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "deNOx system" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) (e.g. there are presently passive and active lean NOx catalysts, NOx adsorbers and selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems);		 No.049 2010-08-31
nozzle (LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG nozzle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.73. "LNG nozzle" means device which permits quick connection and disconnection of fuel supply hose to the LNG receptacle in a safe manner.		 No.110 2015-06-30
nref [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 reference speed (nref) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "reference speed (nref)" means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalizing the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Appendix 2 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
nref [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 reference speed (nref) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "reference speed (nref)" means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalizing the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Appendix 2 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
number (Particle) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Particle numbers Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Particle numbers" means the total number of particles of a diameter greater than 23 mm diameter present in the diluted exhaust gas after it has been conditioned to remove volatile material, as described in Annex 4a, Appendix 5;		 No.083 2012-02-15
number (Particulate) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Particulate numbers Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Particulate numbers" means the total number of particulates of a diameter greater than 23 nm present in the diluted exhaust gas after it has been conditioned to remove volatile material, as described in Appendix 5 to Annex 4a to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
NWP (nominal working pressure) [REG. No 079/2009] 　 nominal working pressure (NWP) hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(f) "nominal working pressure" (NWP) means, as regards containers, the settled pressure at a uniform temperature of 288K (15℃) for a full container, or as regards other components, the pressure level at which a component typically operates; REG. No 079/2009
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
O (Category) [No.073 2004-03-31A3] 　 Category O Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
2. Category O: Trailers (including semi-trailers)
2.1. Category O3: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5, but not exceeding 10 metric tons.
2.2. Category O4: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 10 metric btons.		 No.073 2004-03-31
O (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 O : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
O (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation axis (symbol O) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.3. "Observation axis (symbol O)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the photometer head;		 No.104 2014-03-14
OBD [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 OBD Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.13. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory; No.083 2008-05-06
OBD [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 OBD (on-board diagnostic system) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.083 2012-02-15
OBD [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 OBD (On-board diagnostics) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control which shall have the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory.		 No.083 2012-02-15
OBD [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory.		 No.083 2015-07-03
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system [REG. No 595/2009] 　 on-board diagnostic (OBD) system emissions 7. "on-board diagnostic (OBD) system" means a system on board a vehicle or connected to an engine which has the capability of detecting malfunctions, and, if applicable, of indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system, of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of information stored in computer memory, and of communicating that information off-board; REG. No 595/2009
OBD [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 OBD Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2008-04-12
OBD [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 on-board diagnostic system for emission control (OBD) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2010-08-31
OBD engine family [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 OBD engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "OBD engine family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common methods of monitoring and diagnosing emission-related malfunctions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
OBD information [REG. No 692/2008] 　 OBD information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 26. "vehicle OBD information" means information relating to an on-board diagnostic system for any electronic system on the vehiclel REG. No 692/2008
OBD system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 OBD (On-board diagnostic) system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "On-board diagnostic system" (OBD system) means a system on-board of a vehicle or engine which has the capability of:
(a) Detecting malfunctions, affecting the emission performance of the engine system;
(b) Indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system; and
(c) Identifying the likely area of the malfunction by means of information stored in computer memory and communicating that information off-board;		 No.049 2013-06-24
OBD test cycle [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 OBD test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"OBD test cycle" means a driving cycle which is a version of the ESC test cycle having the same running-order of the 13 individual modes as described in paragraph 2.7.1. of Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation but where the length of each mode is reduced to 60 seconds;		 No.049 2008-04-12
OBD-engine family [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 OBD-engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "OBD-engine family" means, for approval of the OBD system according to the requirements of Annex 9A to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common OBD system design parameters according to paragraph 7.3. of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
OBD-engine family [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 OBD-engine family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD-engine family" means, for approval of the OBD system according to the requirements of Annex 9A to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engine systems having common OBD system design parameters according to paragraph 7.3. of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
object (Critical) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Critical object devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.6."Critical object" means a cylindrical object with a height of 0,50 m and a diameter of 0,30 m.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Objective luminous flux [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Objective luminous flux Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.27. "Objective luminous flux" means a design value of the luminous flux of a replaceable light source or light source module. It shall be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the replaceable light source or light source module is energized by the power supply at the specified test voltage, as indicated in the data sheet of the light source or the technical specification as submitted with the light source module; No.048 2008-05-23
Objective luminous flux [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Objective luminous flux Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.27. "Objective luminous flux" means a design value of the luminous flux of a replaceable light source or light source module. It shall be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the replaceable light source or light source module is energised by the power supply at the specified test voltage, as indicated in the data sheet of the light source or the technical specification as submitted with the light source module;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Objective value [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Objective values Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.3. Objective values: Design value of an electrical or photometric characteristic. To be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the LED light source is energised at relevant test voltage.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Objective value [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Objective value Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Objective value": Design value of an electrical or photometric characteristic. To be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the gas-discharge light source is energized by the ballast operated at test voltage.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Objective values [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Objective values Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Objective values": values to be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the filament lamp is supplied with current at its test voltage.		 No.037 2010-11-13
obscuration (Opaque) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Opaque obscuration safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Opaque obscuration" means any area of the glazing preventing light transmission, including any screen-printed area, whether solid or dot-printed, but excluding any shade band.		 No.043 2014-02-12
obscuration (Opaque) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Opaque obscuration Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Opaque obscuration" means any area of the glazing preventing light transmission		 No.043 2010-08-31
Observation angle [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation angle (symbol α) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol α)" means the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Observation angle (α) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Observation angle (symbol α) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol α)", the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles. Maximum range: 0° ≤ α ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Observation axis [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation axis (symbol O) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.3. "Observation axis (symbol O)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the photometer head;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Observation axis [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Observation axis Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.3. "Observation axis", a line segment from the reference centre to the photometer head.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Observation half-plane [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Observation half-plane Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.5. "Observation half-plane", the half-plane which originates on the illumination axis and which contains the observation axis.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Observation on half plane [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation on half-plane Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.5. "Observation on half-plane" means the half-plane which originates on the illumination axis and which contains the observation axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
occupant (Centre plane of) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
occupant (Centreplane of) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
occupant (Centreplane of) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
occupant (Centreplane of) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.025 2010-08-14
occupant (Centreplane of) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupantis specified by the manufacturer;		 No.046 2010-07-10
occupant (Centreplane of) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3 DH machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the ‘H’ point on the ‘Y’ axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
occupant (plane of, Centre) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
occupant mass (Individual) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Individual occupant mass (Mmi) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2007-12-06
occupant mass (Individual) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mmi (Individual occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Individual occupant mass" (Mmi ) means the mass of an individual occupant. The value of this mass is 68 kg.		 No.066 2011-03-30
occupant mass (Total) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total occupant mass (Mm) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Total occupant mass" (Mm) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2007-12-06
occupant mass (Total) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mm (Total occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total occupant mass" (Mm ) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2011-03-30
occupant protection (Passenger compartment with regard to) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
occupant protection (Passenger compartment with regard to) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Occupant restraint [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Occupant restraint Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Occupant restraint" means any device which connects a passenger, driver or crew member to his seat, during a rollover.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Occupant restraint [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Occupant restraint Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Occupant restraint" means any device which connects a passenger, driver or crew member to his seat, during a rollover.		 No.066 2011-03-30
ocular point (driver) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 The driver's ocular points devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1."The driver's ocular points" means two points 65 mm apart and 635 mm vertically above point R of the driver's seat as defined in Annex 8. The straight line joining these points runs perpen dicular to the vertical longitudinal median plane of the vehicle. The centre of the segment joining the two ocular points is in a vertical longitudinal plane which shall pass through the centre of the driver’s designated seating position, as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.046 2014-08-08
ocular points (driver's) [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 driver's ocular points Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.1. "The driver's ocular points" means two points 65 mm apart and 635 mm vertically above pointR of the driver's seat as defined in Annex 8. The straight line joining these points runs perpendicular to the vertical longitudinal median plane of the vehicle. The centre of the segment joining the two ocular points is in a vertical longitudinal plane which must pass through the centreof the driver’s designated seating position, as specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.046 2010-07-10
OE-wheels [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 OE-wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "OE-wheels" means wheels which are authorized to be fitted, to the vehicle model, by the vehicle manufacturer during the production of the vehicle.		 No.124 2006-12-27
off-road professional tyre [REG. No 661/2009] 　 off-road professional tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 9. "off-road professional tyre" means a special use tyre primarily used in severe off-road conditions; REG. No 661/2009
off-road tyre (Professional) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Professional off-road tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Professional off-road tyre" is a special use tyre primarily used for service in severe off-road conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
offset (Wheel) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Wheel offset Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Wheel" means a complete wheel consisting of a rim and a wheel disc;
2.3.1. "Wheel size designation" means a designation comprising at least the nominal rim diameter, the nominal rim width and the rim profile;
2.3.2. "Wheel offset" means the distance from the hub abutment face to the centre line of the rim.		 No.064 2010-11-26
On board charger [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 On-board charger Electric vehicle safety 2.9. "On-board charger" means an energy electronic converter linked by construction to the vehicle and used for charging the traction battery from an external electric power supply (mains network). No.100 2009-02-14
On board diagnostic [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 OBD (On-board diagnostics) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control which shall have the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory.		 No.083 2012-02-15
On Board Diagnostic [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory.		 No.083 2015-07-03
On board diagnostic system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 OBD (On-board diagnostic) system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "On-board diagnostic system" (OBD system) means a system on-board of a vehicle or engine which has the capability of:
(a) Detecting malfunctions, affecting the emission performance of the engine system;
(b) Indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system; and
(c) Identifying the likely area of the malfunction by means of information stored in computer memory and communicating that information off-board;		 No.049 2013-06-24
on board diagnostic system [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 OBD (on-board diagnostic system) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.083 2012-02-15
On board isolation resistance monitoring system [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2011-02-14
On board isolation resistance monitoring system [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
on-board diagnostic (OBD) system [REG. No 595/2009] 　 on-board diagnostic (OBD) system emissions 7. "on-board diagnostic (OBD) system" means a system on board a vehicle or connected to an engine which has the capability of detecting malfunctions, and, if applicable, of indicating their occurrence by means of an alert system, of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of information stored in computer memory, and of communicating that information off-board; REG. No 595/2009
on-board diagnostic system [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 on-board diagnostic system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2008-04-12
on-board diagnostic system for emission control [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 on-board diagnostic system for emission control (OBD) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Opacimeter [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Opacimeter Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.5 "Opacimeter" means an instrument for continuous measurement of the light absorption coefficients
of the exhaust gases emitted by vehicles, as specified in Annex 8 to this Regulation;		 No.024 2006-11-24
opacimeter [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 opacimeter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "opacimeter" means an instrument designed to measure the opacity of smoke particles by means of the light extinction principle;		 No.049 2008-04-12
opacimeter [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 opacimeter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "opacimeter" means an instrument designed to measure the opacity of smoke particles by means of the light extinction principle;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Opaque obscuration [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Opaque obscuration safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Opaque obscuration" means any area of the glazing preventing light transmission, including any screen-printed area, whether solid or dot-printed, but excluding any shade band.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Opaque obscuration [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Opaque obscuration Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Opaque obscuration" means any area of the glazing preventing light transmission		 No.043 2010-08-31
Open crankcase emission [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Open crankcase emissions Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.54. "Open crankcase emissions" means any flow from an engine's crankcase that is emitted directly into the environment;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Open type traction battery [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Open type traction battery protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.012 2013-03-27
Open type traction battery [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.094 2012-09-20
Open type traction battery [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Open type traction battery [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Open type traction battery [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Opening [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Opening Interior fittings 2.15. "Opening" is the maximum unobstructed aperture between the upper edge or leading edge, depending on the closing direction, of a power-operated window or partition or roof panel and the vehicle structure which forms the boundary of the window, partition or roof panel, when viewed from the interior of the vehicle or, in the case of partition system, from the rear part of the passenger compartment.
To measure an opening, a cylindrical test rod shall (without exerting force) be placed through it normally perpendicular to the edge of the window, roof panel or partition and perpendicular to the closing direction as shown in Figure 1 of Annex IX, from the interior through to the exterior of the vehicle or, as applicable, from the rear part of the passenger compartment.		 No.021 2008-07-16
opening (Daylight) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Daylight opening Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Daylight opening" means the whole glazing area, excluding any opaque obscuration but including any shade band.		 No.043 2010-08-31
opening direction (Fork-bolt) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fork-bolt opening direction door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Fork-bolt opening direction" is the direction opposite to that in which the striker enters the latch to engage the fork-bolt.		 No.011 2010-05-13
operated service door (Automatically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2015-06-18
operated service door (Driver) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2015-06-18
operated service door (Driver) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver		 No.107 2010-09-29
operated service door (Power) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Operating area of the windscreen wipers [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2004-03-31
Operating area of the windscreen wipers [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2010-07-31
operating device (Supply and) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Supply and operating device Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.12. "Supply and operating device" means one or more components of a system providing power to one or more parts of the system, including such as power and/or voltage control(s) for one or more light sources as e.g. electronic light source control gears;		 No.123 2006-12-27
operating device (Supply and) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Supply and operating device Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.12. "Supply and operating device" means one or more components of a system providing power to one or more parts of the system, including such as power and/or voltage control(s) for one or more light sources as e.g. electronic light source control gears;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Operating pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Service pressure" or "Operating pressure" using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.2. "Service pressure" or "Operating pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C. Service pressure for LNG means the intended settled pressure of the tank in use –as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.110 2015-06-30
operating pressure (In service) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 In service operating pressure (Pwarm) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "In service operating pressure (P warm)" means the inflation pressure for each tyre position elevated from the cold pressure (P rec ) by temperature effects during vehicle usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Operating pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Operating pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Operating sequence [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Operating sequence Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Operating sequence" means a sequence consisting of an engine start, an operating period (of the engine), an engine shut-off, and the time until the next start, where a specific OBD monitor runs to completion and a malfunction would be detected if present;		 No.049 2013-06-24
operating sequence [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 operating sequence Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"operating sequence" means the sequence used for determining the conditions for extinguishing the MI. It consists of an engine start-up, an operating period, an engine shut-off, and the time until the next start-up, where the OBD monitoring is running and a malfunction would be detected if present;		 No.049 2008-04-12
operating speed range (engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
operating speed range (engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Operating tell tale [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Operating tell tale [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Operating tell-tale [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.18. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and is operating correctly or not; No.048 2008-05-23
Operating tell-tale [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and is operating correctly or not;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Operating temperature [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Operating temperatures using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.5. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Operating temperatures [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Operating temperatures Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Operating temperatures [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Operating temperatures using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2011-05-07
operation (normal, Vehicle is in) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle is in normal operation Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle is in normal operation" means that vehicle is in forward motion at the speed greater than 10 km/h.		 No.016 2015-11-20
operation (speed, Constant) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Constant-speed operation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.12. "Constant-speed operation" means engine operation with a governor that automatically controls the operator's demand to maintain engine speed, even under changing load. Governors do not always maintain exactly constant speed. Typically, speed can decrease (0,1 to 10) per cent below the speed at zero load, such that the minimum speed occurs near the engine's point of maximum power;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Operational tell-tale [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Operational tell-tale installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.16. Operational tell-tale
"Operational tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing whether a device that has been actuated is operating correctly or not.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
operational telltale [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 operational telltale installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
14. operational telltale
means the telltale showing whether a device that has been actuated is operating correctly or not;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Operational tell-tale [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Operational tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Operational tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing whether a device that has been actuated is operating correctly or not.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Operator demand [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Operator demand Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.10. "Operator demand" means an engine operator's input to control engine output. The operator may be a person (i.e., manual), or a governor
(i.e., automatic) that mechanically or electronically signals an input that demands engine output. Input may be from an accelerator pedal or signal, a throttle-control lever or signal, a fuel lever or signal, a speed lever or signal, or a governor setpoint or signal.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Operator demand [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Operator demand Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.55. "Operator demand" means an engine operator's input to control engine output. The "operator" may be a person (i.e. manual), or a governor (i.e., automatic) that mechanically or electronically signals an input that demands engine output. Input may be from an accelerator pedal or signal, a throttle-control lever or signal, a fuel lever or signal, a speed lever or signal, or a governor setpoint or signal;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Optical distortion [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Optical distortion safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Optical distortion" means an optical defect in a windscreen that changes the appearance of an object viewed through the windscreen.		 No.043 2014-02-12
optical unit (Retro reflecting) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflecting optical unit Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Retro-reflecting optical unit" means a combination of optical components producing retro- reflection.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Optical warning device [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Optical warning device Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Optical warning device" means a headlamp where the beam can be flashed to give signals to the oncoming or preceding traffic, e.g., when a vehicle is about to overtake a slower preceding vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Optional lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Optional lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.15. Optional lamp
"Optional lamp" means a lamp the presence of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Optional lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.20. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer; No.048 2008-05-23
Optional lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Optional lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Optional lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Optional lamp" means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Optional lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Optional lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Optional lamp" means a lamp the presence of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.		 No.086 2010-09-30
order mass (Running) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Running order mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.2.2. "Running order mass" means the mass described in Paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to this Regulation and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats; No.083 2012-02-15
ordinary [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 ordinary Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "ordinary", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; orEN
2.2.2. "treated", when at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Ordinary laminated glass [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Ordinary laminated glass safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass" means glazing consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayer of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "Ordinary laminated glass", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; or
2.2.2. "Treated laminated glass", when at least one of the layers of glass, of which it is composed, has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2014-02-12
Orientation [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Orientation Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Orientation" indicates a direction in which a Child Restraint System has been approved for use. The following distinctions are made:
(a) Forward-facing means facing in the normal direction of travel of the vehicle;
(b) Rearward-facing means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle;
(c) Lateral-facing means facing perpendicular to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Original body section [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Original body section [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Original brake disc/brake drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake disc/brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.1. "Original brake disc/brake drum"
2.3.1.1. In the case of motor vehicles, is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type- approval according to Regulation No 13 or 13-H.
2.3.1.2. In the case of trailers:
(a) is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type-approval according to Regulation No 13;
(b) is a brake disc/drum which is part of a brake for which the axle manufacturer owns a test report according to Annex 11 of Regulation No 13.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Original brake lining [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type-approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1.1, Regulation No 13-H, Annex 1, paragraph 7.1 or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Original brake lining [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1 ( 2 ) or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Original brake lining assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Original brake lining assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Original drum brake lining [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Original drum brake lining [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation.		 No.090 2010-05-28
Original equipment catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original equipment catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Original equipment catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters covered by the type approval delivered for the vehicle and whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
Original exhaust system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.3. "Exhaust or silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motor cycle engine and its exhaust.
2.3.1. "Original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval. It may also be the vehicle manufacturer’s replacement part.
2.3.2. "Non-original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Original part [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original part Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. General definitions
2.1.3. "Original part" means either an original brake lining, an original brake lining assembly, an original drum brake lining, an original brake drum or an original brake disc		 No.090 2012-07-13
Original pollution control device [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Original pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Original pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices covered by the type approval granted for the vehicle concerned;		 No.049 2013-06-24
original pollution control device [REG. No 595/2009] 　 original pollution control device emissions 9. "original pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices covered by the typeapproval granted for the vehicle concerned; REG. No 595/2009
Original replacement brake disc and brake drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original replacement brake discs and brake drums Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Original replacement catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Original replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83, but are offered in the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval.		 No.103 2007-06-19
original replacement pollution control device [REG. No 692/2008] 　 original replacement pollution control device emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 7. "original replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of pollution control devices whose types are indicated in Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation but are offered on the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval; REG. No 692/2008
Original silencing system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Original exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.3. "Exhaust or silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motor cycle engine and its exhaust.
2.3.1. "Original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval. It may also be the vehicle manufacturer’s replacement part.
2.3.2. "Non-original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Original vehicle [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Original vehicle LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Other device for indirect vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Other devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3."Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, where the field of vision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indi rect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Other devices for indirect vision [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Other devices for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field ofvision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Outer diameter [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Outer diameter Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.16. "Outer diameter" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Outer diameter (D) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Outer diameter (D) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.16. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre (1); No.054 2008-07-11
Outer diameter [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 D (Outer diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Outer diameter [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Outer diameter (D) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new tyre;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Outer diameter [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Outer diameter 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Outer diameter" means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Outer diameter [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Outer diameter Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Outer diameter" means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
outer edge (Extreme) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Extreme outer edge", on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching the lateral extremity of the vehicle, disregarding the projection or projections:
2.12.1. of rear-view mirrors,
2.12.2. of direction-indicator lamps,
2.12.3. of front and rear position lamps and retro-reflectors;		 No.053 2013-06-18
outer edge (Extreme) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Extreme outer edge", on either side of the vehicle means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and tangent to the latter’s lateral outer edge, disregarding rear-view mirrors, direction indicators, position lamps and retro-reflectors;		 No.074 2013-06-18
outer edge (Extreme) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Extreme outer edge External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extreme outer edge" of the vehicle means, in relation to the sides of the vehicle, the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer lateral edge, and, in relation to the front and rear ends, the perpendicular transverse plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer front and rear edges, account not being taken of the projection
2.7.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and connections for tyre pressure gauges
2.7.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.7.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.7.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
2.7.5. in relation to the front and rear ends, of parts mounted on the bumpers, of towing devices and of exhaust pipes.		 No.026 2005-12-16
outer edge (Extreme) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Extreme outer edge external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extreme outer edge" of the vehicle means, in relation to the sides of the vehicle, the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer lateral edge, and, in relation to the front and rear ends, the perpendicular transverse plane of the vehicle coinciding with its outer front and rear edges, account not being taken of the projection:
2.7.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and connections for tyre pressure gauges;
2.7.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.7.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.7.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
2.7.5. in relation to the front and rear ends, of parts mounted on the bumpers, of towing devices and of exhaust pipes.		 No.026 2010-08-14
outer edge (Extreme) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the vehicle, means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.14.1. Of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and of connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.14.2. Of any anti-skid devices mounted on the wheels;
2.14.3. Of devices for indirect vision;
2.14.4. Of side direction-indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position lamps, parking lamps, retro-reflectors and side-marker lamps.
2.14.5. Of customs seals affixed to the vehicle, and of devices for securing and protecting such seals.
2.14.6. Of service-door lighting systems on vehicles of categories M 2 and M 3 as specified in paragraph 2.7;		 No.048 2011-12-06
outer edge (Extreme) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Extreme outer edge Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Extreme outer edge" on either side of the tractor means the plane parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and coinciding with its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:
2.11.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground and connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
2.11.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
2.11.3. of rear-view mirrors;
2.11.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps, parking lamps and lateral reflex reflectors;
2.11.5. of customs seals affixed to the tractor and devices for securing and protecting such seals.		 No.086 2010-09-30
outer lens (Textured) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 "Textured outer lens" or "Textured outer lens area" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.1. "Textured outer lens" or "Textured outer lens area" means all or part of an outer lens, designed to modify or influence the propagation of light from the light source(s), such that the light rays are significantly diverted from their original direction;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Outer vessel or jacket [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Outer vessel or outer jacket using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.71. "Outer vessel or outer jacket" means part of the fuel tank that encases the inner vessel or inner tank(s) and its insulation system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
outline (glass, Design) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Design glass outline safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Design glass outline" means the design maximum unobstructed vehicle aperture designated to be glazed, before the glazing is installed or mounted, including all trims, but excluding obscuration bands.		 No.043 2014-02-12
outline marker lamp (End) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain powerdriven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2014-09-30
outline marker lamp (End-) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle's position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 1997-07-30
outline marker lamp (End-) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 End-outline marker lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "End-outline marker lamp" means a lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edges and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle’s overall width. In the case of certain power-driven vehicles and trailers, this lamp is intended to complement the vehicle’s position (side) lamps and draw special attention to its outline;		 No.007 2010-06-12
outline marker lamp (End) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.23. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edge and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. This lamp is intended, for certain vehicles and trailers, to complement the vehicle's front and rear position lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.048 2011-12-06
outline marker lamp (End-) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 End-outline marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.20. "End-outline marker lamp" means the lamps fitted to the extreme outer edge as close as possible to the top of the tractor and intended clearly to indicate the tractor’s overall width. This signal is intended, for certain tractors, to complement the tractor’s front and rear position (side) lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;		 No.086 2010-09-30
outline marker lamp of different type (end) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
OVC range [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 OVC range CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "OVC range": the total distance covered during complete combined cycles run until the energy imparted by external charging of the battery (or other electric energy storage device) is depleted, as measured according to the procedure described in Annex 9;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Over all width [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Over-all width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Over-all width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.12 above;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Over all width [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Over-all width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Over-all width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.12 above;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Over wrap [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Over-wrap using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.63. "Over-wrap" means the reinforcement system of filament and resin applied over the liner.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Overall dimension [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Overall dimensions Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Overall dimensions" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14 above;
2.15.1. "Overall width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14 above;
2.15.2. "Overall length" means the distance between the two vertical planes perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its front and rear outer edge, disregarding the projection:
(a) of devices for indirect vision;
(b) of end-outline marker lamps;
(c) of coupling devices, in the case of motor vehicles.
For trailers in the "overall length" and in any measurement in length the drawbar shall be included, except when specifically excluded;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Overall width [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Overall width installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.11. Overall width
"Overall width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in point 1.10 above.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
overall width [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 overall width installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
12. overall width
means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in point 11;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Overall width [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Overall width Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.13. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, including labelling (marking), decoration and protective bands or ribs (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Overall width [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Overall width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.15. "Overall width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14. above; No.048 2008-05-23
Over-all width [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Over-all width Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.13. "Over-all width" means the linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, including labelling (marking), decoration and protective bands or ribs; No.054 2008-07-11
Overall width [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Overall width Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, including labelling (marking), decoration and protective bands or ribs; in the case of tyres where the tread is wider than the section width, the overall width corresponds to the tread width.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Overall width [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Overall width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Overall width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.11 above.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Overall width [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Overall width Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated tyre, including labelling (marking), decoration and protective bands or ribs;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Overall width [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Overall width 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including		 No.108 2006-07-04
Overall width [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Overall width Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Overheating [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Overheating Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.9. "Overheating" means the condition that exists when the air inlet for the heating air to the combustion heater is completely blocked.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Overlap [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Overlap Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Overlap" means the percentage of the vehicle width directly in line with the barrier face;		 No.094 2012-09-20
Overlap [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Overlap Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Overlap" means the percentage of the vehicle width directly in line with the barrier face;		 No.094 2010-05-28
Overnight locking system [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Overnight locking system Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Overnight locking system" means a system designed to provide the possibility to secure the service and emergency doors of the vehicle against opening.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Override [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Override alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.7. "Override" means a design feature which locks the immobiliser in the unset condition.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Override [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Override Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.7. "Override" means a design feature which locks the immobiliser in the unset condition.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Override [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Override Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.7. "Override" means a design feature that locks the immobiliser in the unset condition.		 No.116 2010-06-30
overrun braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilising the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
overrun braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilizing the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Oversteer [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Oversteer Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Oversteer" means a condition in which the vehicle’s yaw rate is greater than the yaw rate that would occur at the vehicle’s speed as a result of the Ackermann steer angle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Oversteer [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Oversteer Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Oversteer" means a condition in which the vehicle's yaw rate is greater than the yaw rate that would occur at the vehicle's speed as a result of the Ackerman steer angle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
over-wrap [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 over-wrap Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.18. over-wrap: The reinforcement system of filament and resin applied over the liner.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Oxide of nitrogen [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 NOx (Oxides of nitrogen) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.56. "Oxides of nitrogen" means compounds containing only nitrogen and oxygen as measured by the procedures specified in this Regulation. Oxides of nitrogen are expressed quantitatively as if the NO is in the form of NO 2 , such that an effective molar mass is used for all oxides of nitrogen equivalent to that of NO 2 ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
p (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 p : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
P max [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 P max (Declared maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Declared maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in ECE kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
P max [No.049 2013-06-24A4a] 　 P max (Maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in kW as specified by the manufacturer.		 No.049 2013-06-24
P max [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 P max (Maximum power) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.45. "Maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in kW as designed by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
P n [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 P n (Rated maximum net power) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.7. "Rated maximum net power" means the rated engine power as defined in ISO 4106:2004.
The symbol P n denotes the numerical value of the rated maximum net power expressed in kilowatts.		 No.041 2012-11-14
P points [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 P points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "P points" means the points about which the driver’s head rotates when he views objects on a horizontal plane at eye level.		 No.125 2010-07-31
P rec [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec )" means the pressure recommended for each tyre position by the vehicle manufacturer, for the intended service conditions (e.g. speed and load) of the given vehicle, as defined on the vehicle placard and/or the vehicle owner's manual.		 No.064 2010-11-26
P test [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Test Pressure (Ptest) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Test Pressure (Ptest)" means the actual pressure of the tyre(s) selected for each tyre position after deflation during the test procedure.		 No.064 2010-11-26
P warm [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 In service operating pressure (Pwarm) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "In service operating pressure (P warm)" means the inflation pressure for each tyre position elevated from the cold pressure (P rec ) by temperature effects during vehicle usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
P.I. [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 P.I. (positive-ignition) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- For positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants,
- For compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particle numbers;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Pad assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Pad assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Pad assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Pad assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake;
2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Pair [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Pair Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.27. "Pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
pair (Matched) [No.098 2014-06-14] 　 Matched pair gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;		 No.098 2014-06-14
pair (Matched) [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Matched pair Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;		 No.098 2001-06-25
pair (Matched) [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Matched pair gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;		 No.098 2010-06-30
Pair [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Pair Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;
2.27.1. "Matched pair" means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle, which, as a pair, complies with the photometric requirements.		 No.048 2011-12-06
Pane [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Pane safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pane" means any single piece of glazing other than a windscreen;
2.17.1. "Curved pane" means a pane with a height of segment "h" greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.17.2. "Flat pane" means a pane with a height of segment equal to or less than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
pane (glass, Laminated-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Laminated-glass pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "ordinary", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; orEN
2.2.2. "treated", when at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
pane (glass, Toughened-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Toughened-glass pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Toughened-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
pane (Glass-plastics) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Glass-plastics pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Glass-plastics pane" means a pane of laminated glass having one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastics material, at least one of which acts as interlayer. The plastics layer(s) shall be on the inner face when the glazing is fitted on the vehicle;		 No.043 2010-08-31
pane faced with plastics material (glass, Safety-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material" means a glass pane as defined in paragraphs 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastics material on its inner face;		 No.043 2010-08-31
panel (line of a, nominal) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 The nominal line of a panel External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "The nominal line of a panel" means the line passing through the two points represented by the position of the centre of a sphere when its surface makes its first and last contact with a component during the measuring procedure described in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2005-12-16
panel (nominal line of a) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 nominal line of a panel external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "The nominal line of a panel" means the line passing through the two points represented by the position of the centre of a sphere when its surface makes its first and last contact with a component during the measuring procedure described in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2010-08-14
panel (rear, Cab) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Cab rear panel external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab rear panel" means the rearmost part of the external surface of the driver and passenger compartment. Where it is not possible to determine the position of the rear cab panel, for the purposes of this Regulation it would be deemed to be the vertical transversal plane situated 50 cm to the rear of the ‘R’ point of the driver seat, with the seat, if adjustable, located at its rearmost driving position (see Annex 3). However, the manufacturer may, with the agreement of the technical services, request an alternative distance if 50 cm can be shown as being inappropriate for a particular vehicle ( 2 );		 No.061 2010-06-30
Panic Alarm [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Panic Alarm Alarm systems 2.11. "Panic Alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency. No.097 2008-12-30
Panic Alarm [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Panic Alarm alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Panic Alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Panic alarm [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Panic alarm Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.12. "Panic alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Panic alarm [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Panic alarm Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.12. "Panic alarm" means a device that enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Parent engine [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Parent engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Parent engine [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Parent engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.57. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics are representative for that engine family and that it complies with the requirements set out in Annex 1B of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Parent engine [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Parent engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that it complies with requirements set out in Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
parent engine [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 parent engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family;		 No.049 2008-04-12
parent engine [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 parent engine Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Parent engine [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Parent engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Parent engine" means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that it complies with requirements set out in Annex 5 of this Regulation;
(2. CHOICE OF THE PARENT ENGINE
2.1. In the case of diesel engines the parent engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criteria of the highest fuel delivery per stroke at the declared maximum torque speed.
In the event that two or more engines share this primary criteria, the parent engine shall be selected using the secondary criteria of highest fuel delivery per stroke at rated speed. Under certain circumstances, the approval authority may conclude that the family can best be characterized by testing a second engine. Thus, the approval authority may select an additional engine for test.
2.2. In the case of S.I. engines the parent engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criteria of the fuel flow (g/h).)		 No.120 2010-09-30
parent vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15A12] 　 parent vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 12] GRANTING OF AN ECE TYPE APPROVAL FOR A VEHICLE FUELLED BY LPG OR NG/BIOMETHANE 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. A "family" means a group of vehicle types fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane identified by a parent vehicle.
A "parent vehicle" means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle on which the self-adaptability of a fuelling system is going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer. It is possible to have more than one parent vehicle in a family.		 No.083 2012-02-15
parent vehicle [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 the parent vehicle LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. For the purposes of this Regulation, "the parent vehicle", with regard both to LPG system and to CNG system, means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle, on which the requirements of this Regulation are going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer.
2.5.1. According to this Regulation, "a member of the family" is a vehicle sharing the following essential characteristics with its parent vehicle:
The family definition is based on the original vehicle characteristics.
2.5.1.1.
(a) It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer.
(b) It is classified in the same category M 1 or M 2 or M 3 or N 1 or N 2 or N 3 . Vehicles of category M 1 and N 1 class I may belong to the same family.
(c) It is subject to the same emission limits or those specified in earlier series of amendments of the applicable Regulation.
(d) If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine: it has an approved power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle. If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder: it has an approved power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle.
(e) Fuel feed and combustion process (injection: direct or indirect, single-point or multi-point).
(f) It has the same pollution control system:
(i) Same type of catalyst if fitted (three-way, oxidation, DeNO x )
(ii) Air injection (with or without)
(iii) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) (with or without)
If the tested vehicle was not equipped with air-injection or EGR, engines with these devices are allowed.
2.5.1.2. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(a), the vehicle family can also cover vehicles produced by other vehicle manufacturers if it can be demonstrated to the Type-Approval Authority that the same engine type and emission strategy is used.
2.5.1.3. With regard to requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(d):
(a) In the case of a central metering for the whole vehicle where a demonstration shows that two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2;
(b) In the case of an individual metering per cylinder where a demonstration shows two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2.
2.5.1.4. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(f) in case of a "master-slave" system, as defined in paragraph 2.1.6, the family relation will be considered valid regardless of the presence of the air injection or the EGR.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Park condition of a vehicle [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Park condition of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.25. "Park condition of a vehicle" means:
2.25.1. for a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is at standstill and its propulsion engine is not running and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.;
2.25.2. and for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the condition as described in paragraph 2.25.1. and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Park condition of a vehicle [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Park condition of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Park condition of a vehicle" means:
2.25.1. For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is at standstill and its propulsion engine is not running and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;
2.25.2. And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the condition as described in paragraph 2.25.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Parking brake lining assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Parking brake lining assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system		 No.090 2010-05-28
Parking lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Parking lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.18. Parking lamp
"Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary tractor, without a trailer, in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position (side) lamps.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Parking lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Parking lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.22. "Parking lamp" means a lamp which is used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position lamps; No.048 2008-05-23
Parking lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Parking lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.22. "Parking lamp" means a lamp which is used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position lamps;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Parking lamp [No.077 2001-05-14] 　 Parking lamp Parking lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle;		 No.077 2001-05-14
Parking lamp [No.077 2010-05-28] 　 Parking lamp parking lamps for power-driven vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle;		 No.077 2010-05-28
Parking lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Parking lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.19. "Parking lamp" means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary tractor, without a trailer, in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position (side) lamps;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Parking lamp of different type [No.077 2001-05-14] 　 Parking lamps of different types Parking lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Parking lamps of different types" are parking lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. the trade name or mark,
2.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system,
2.3.3. the category of filament lamp.		 No.077 2001-05-14
Parking lamp of different type [No.077 2010-05-28] 　 Parking lamps of different types parking lamps for power-driven vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Parking lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark,
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.077 2010-05-28
part (conductive, Exposed) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Exposed conductive part protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.012 2013-03-27
part (conductive, Exposed) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools,		 No.094 2012-09-20
part (conductive, Exposed) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.		 No.095 2015-07-10
part (Live) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Live parts protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Live parts" means conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use;		 No.012 2013-03-27
part (Live) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Live parts Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Live parts" means conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use,		 No.094 2012-09-20
part (Live) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Live parts Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Live parts" means conductive part(s) intended to be electrically energised in normal use.		 No.095 2015-07-10
part (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original part Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. General definitions
2.1.3. "Original part" means either an original brake lining, an original brake lining assembly, an original drum brake lining, an original brake drum or an original brake disc		 No.090 2012-07-13
part (Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement part Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. General definitions
2.1.2. "Replacement part" means either a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type, a replacement drum brake lining, a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.		 No.090 2012-07-13
part (Replacement) [No.09023 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement parts Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
part (Rigid) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Rigid part Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Rigid part" means a structural part or element which does not have significant deformation and energy absorption during the rollover test.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Partial contour marking [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Partial contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners. No.048 2008-05-23
Partial contour marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Partial contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Partial flow dilution method [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Partial flow dilution method Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.11. "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount of diluent prior to the particulate sampling filter.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Partial flow dilution method [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Partial flow dilution method Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.60. "Partial flow dilution method" means the process of separating a part from the total exhaust flow, then mixing it with an appropriate amount of dilution air prior to the particulate sampling filter;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Partial power factor [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Partial power factor kp Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Partial power factor kp" means a numerical quantity with no dimension used for the weighted combination of the test results of the acceleration test and the constant speed test for vehicles		 No.051 2007-05-30
Partial pressure [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Partial pressure Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.58. "Partial pressure" means the pressure, p, attributable to a single gas in a gas mixture. For an ideal gas, the partial pressure divided by the total pressure is equal to the constituent's molar concentration, x;		 No.096 2014-03-22
partial restraint (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 partial restraint (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Particle number [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Particle numbers Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Particle numbers" means the total number of particles of a diameter greater than 23 mm diameter present in the diluted exhaust gas after it has been conditioned to remove volatile material, as described in Annex 4a, Appendix 5;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Particulate after treatment device [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Particulate after-treatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Particulate after treatment device [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Particulate after-treatment device Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.59. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PM) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
particulate aftertreatment device [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
particulate aftertreatment device [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
particulate filter (deNOx-, combined) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2008-04-12
particulate filter (deNOx-, combined) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Particulate Filter (Diesel, Wall flow) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.65. "Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter" means a Diesel Particulate Filter ("DPF") in which all the exhaust gas is forced to flow through a wall which filters out the solid matter;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Particulate matter [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PM (Particulate matter) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting exhaust with a clean filtered diluent to a temperature between 315 K (42℃) and 325 K (52℃); this is primarily carbon, condensed hydrocarbons, and sulphates with associated water;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Particulate matter [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PM (Particulate matter) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.61. "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting C.I. engine exhaust gas with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52℃);		 No.096 2014-03-22
Particulate number [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Particulate numbers Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Particulate numbers" means the total number of particulates of a diameter greater than 23 nm present in the diluted exhaust gas after it has been conditioned to remove volatile material, as described in Appendix 5 to Annex 4a to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Particulate pollutant [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Particulate pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Particulate pollutants" means components of the exhaust gas which are removed from the diluted exhaust gas at a maximum temperature of 325 K (52 °C) by means of the filters described in Annex 4a, Appendix 4;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Particulate pollutant [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Particulate pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Particulate pollutants" means components of the exhaust gas which are removed from the diluted exhaust gas at a maximum temperature of 325 K (52℃) by means of the filters described in Appendix 4 to Annex 4a to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Particulate pollutants [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Particulate pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.5. "Particulate pollutants" means components of the exhaust gas which are removed from the diluted exhaust gas at a maximum temperature of 325 K (52 °C) by means of the filters described in Annex 4; No.083 2008-05-06
particulate pollutants [REG. No 595/2009] 　 particulate pollutants emissions 3. "particulate pollutants" means components of the exhaust gas which are removed from the diluted exhaust gas at a maximum temperature of 325 K (52 °C) by means of the filters described in the test procedure for verifying average tailpipe emissions; REG. No 595/2009
particulate pollutants [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 particulate pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "particulate pollutants" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting the exhaust with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52℃);		 No.049 2008-04-12
particulate pollutants [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 particulate pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "particulate pollutants" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting the exhaust with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52 oC);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Partitioning system [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Partitioning system Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.15. "Partitioning system" means parts or devices which, in addition to the seat-backs, are intended to protect the occupants from displaced luggage; in particular, a partitioning system may be constituted by netting or wire mesh located above the level of the seat-backs in their upright or folded down position. Head restraints fitted as standard equipment for vehicles equipped with such parts or devices shall be considered as part of the partitioning system.
However, a seat equipped with a head restraint shall not be considered as being on its own a partitioning system.		 No.017 2006-12-27
Partitioning system [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Partitioning system seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Partitioning system" means parts or devices which, in addition to the seat-backs, are intended to protect the occupants from displaced luggage; in particular, a partitioning system may be constituted by netting or wire mesh located above the level of the seat-backs in their upright or folded down position. Head restraints fitted as standard equipment for vehicles equipped with such parts or devices shall be considered as part of the partitioning system. However, a seat equipped with a head restraint shall not be considered as being on its own a partitioning system		 No.017 2010-08-31
passage (Access) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half-staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to Annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1 up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the test gauge.		 No.107 2015-06-18
passage (Access) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half-staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1. up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the dual panel.		 No.107 2006-12-27
passage (Access) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half- staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to Annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1 up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the test gauge.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Passenger [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Passenger Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Passenger" means a person, other than the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Passenger [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Passenger Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Passenger" means a person, other than the driver or a member of the crew;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Passenger [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Passenger Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Passenger" means a person, other than the driver or a member of the crew;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Passenger airbag [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Passenger airbag [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver’s in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.094 2012-09-20
Passenger airbag [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Passenger airbag [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver’s in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Passenger airbag [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Passenger airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.		 No.094 2010-05-28
Passenger and load compartment [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Passenger and load compartment Electric vehicle safety 2.14. "Passenger and load compartment" means the space in the vehicle for occupant accommodation and bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, outside glazing, front bulkhead and the plane of the rear-seat back support and eventually the partition between it and the compartment(s) containing
the battery or battery modules.		 No.100 2009-02-14
passenger compartment [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 passenger compartment Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.16. "passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead, and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear seat back support, and if necessary any partition of the tray(s) containing the monoblocs of the electric vehicle's propulsion battery; No.012 2008-06-26
Passenger compartment [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
Passenger compartment [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
Passenger compartment [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Passenger compartment [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Passenger compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, window glass, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with live parts		 No.100 2011-02-14
Passenger compartment [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Passenger compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, window glass, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with live parts.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Passenger compartment [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.		 No.107 2015-06-18
passenger compartment (Heating system for the) [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Heating system for the passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Heating system for the passenger compartment" means any type of device designed to increase the temperature of the passenger compartment.		 No.122 2010-06-30
passenger compartment [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 passenger compartment Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.3. "passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead, and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear seat back support;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Passenger compartment [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Passenger compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger compartment" means the space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes or toilets.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Passenger compartment [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Passenger compartment(s) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Passenger compartment(s)" means the space(s) intended for passengers’ use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes or toilets.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Passenger compartment [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;		 No.094 2010-05-28
Passenger compartment [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Passenger compartment [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Passenger compartment [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Passenger compartment [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.2. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupants’ accommodation including bar, kitchen, toilet, etc.), bounded by:
- the roof,
- the floor,
- the side walls,
- the doors,
- the outside glazing,
- the rear compartment bulkhead, or the plane of the rear seat,
- back support,
- at the driver's side of the longitudinal vertical median plane of the vehicle, the vertical transversal plane through the driver's R-point as defined in Regulation No 17,
- at the opposite side of the longitudinal vertical median plane of the vehicle, the front bulkhead.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Passenger compartment [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.7. "Passenger compartment" means the interior part of the vehicle used to accommodate the driver and any passengers.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Passenger occupant's protection (compartment with regard to) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
Passenger protection (occupant's, compartment with regard to) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
passenger seat (Front) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Front passenger seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.1. "Front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R point;		 No.014 2015-08-19
passenger seat (front) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 A front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the ‘foremost H-point’ of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.		 No.016 2015-11-20
passenger seat (Front) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Front passenger seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.1. "Front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or
in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R point;		 No.014 2007-12-06
passenger seat (front) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H-point" of the seat in question is in
or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.		 No.016 2007-11-30
passenger seat (front) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H-point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver’s R-point.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Passenger with reduced mobility [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2015-06-18
Passenger with reduced mobility [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2006-12-27
Passenger with reduced mobility [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2010-09-29
passing beam (Class of a) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Class of a passing beam Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No 48 ( 1 );		 No.123 2010-08-24
Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road-users; No.048 2008-05-23
passing beam (Principal) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
passing beam (Principal) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Passing beam headlamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Passing beam headlamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Passing beam headlamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road- users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Passing lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Passing lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.9. "Passing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the tractor without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road-users;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Pattern part replacement wheels [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Pattern part replacement wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.4. "Pattern part replacement wheels" being wheels produced by a manufacturer who is not a supplier of the vehicle manufacturer with the specified wheel. With regard to the design, inset, rim designation wheel fixing PCD and spigot mounting diameter, correspond to that of an OE-wheel, but wheel contour, material and so on, may be different;		 No.124 2006-12-27
PBC [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
PBC [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)" means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.078 2015-01-30
PBC [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Peak braking coefficient (PBC) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
pbfc (Peak brake force coefficient) [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc") Tyre noise and wet grip 2.16. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up. No.117 2008-08-29
pbfc [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "pbfc" (Peak brake force coefficient) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.5. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc") [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc") Tyre noise and wet grip 2.16. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up. No.117 2008-08-29
Peak brake force coefficient [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "pbfc" (Peak brake force coefficient) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.5. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Peak braking coefficient [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Peak braking coefficient [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)" means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Peak braking coefficient [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Peak braking coefficient (PBC) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Pedal [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Pedal Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever.
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.		 No.060 2014-10-15
pedal (Riding) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Riding pedals Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped		 No.060 2014-10-15
Pedal [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Pedal Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
PEMS [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PEMS (Portable emissions measurement system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Portable emissions measurement system" (PEMS) means a portable emissions measurement system meeting the requirements specified in Appendix 2 to Annex 8 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Penetration fraction [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PF (Penetration fraction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.62. "Penetration fraction PF" means the deviation from ideal functioning of a non-methane cutter (see Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E). An ideal non-methane cutter would have a methane penetration fraction, PFCH4 , of 1,000 (that is, a methane conversion efficiency EC of 0), and the penetration fraction for all other hydrocarbons would be 0,000, as represented by PFC2H6 (that is, an ethane conversion efficiency EC2H6 of 1). The relationship is:
PF CH 4 = 1 - EC and PFC2H6 = 1 - EC2H6 ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Per cent load [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Per cent load Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Per cent load [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Per cent load Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.63. "Per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
per cent load [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 per cent load Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.049 2008-04-12
per cent load [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 per cent load Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "per cent load" means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed;		 No.049 2010-08-31
perception (Critical) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Critical perception devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.7."Critical perception" means the level of perception that can just be obtained under critical condi tions via the viewing system used. This corresponds to the situation in which the representative scale of the critical object is multiple times larger than the smallest detail that can be perceived via the viewing system.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Performance monitoring [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Performance monitoring Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.48. "Performance monitoring" means malfunction monitoring, that consists of functionality checks and the monitoring of parameters that are not directly correlated to emission thresholds, and that is done on components or systems to verify that they are operating within the proper range;		 No.049 2013-06-24
performance ratio (In Use) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 IUPR (In-Use performance ratio) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "In-Use performance ratio" (IUPR) means the ratio of the number of times that the conditions have existed under which a monitor, or group of monitors, should have detected a malfunction relative to the number of driving cycles relevant for the operation of that monitor or group of monitors;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Performance Ratio Monitoring (In Use) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 IUPRM (In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
period (durability, Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission durability period Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.26. "Emission durability period" means the number of hours indicated in Annex 8 used to determine the deterioration factors;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Periodic regeneration [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.49. "Periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Periodic regeneration [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Periodic (or infrequent) regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.64. "Periodic (or infrequent) regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after- treatment system that occurs periodically in typically less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission limits may be exceeded;		 No.096 2014-03-22
periodic regeneration [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.		 No.049 2008-04-12
periodic regeneration [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.		 No.049 2010-08-31
Periodically regenerating system [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Periodically regenerating system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.20. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate
trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 13 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type approval authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in paragraph 5.3.1.4. applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the technical service.y aft		 No.083 2008-05-06
Periodically regenerating system [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Periodically regenerating system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 13 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type Approval Authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in paragraph 5.3.1.4 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the Technical Service;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Periodically regenerating system [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Periodically regenerating system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 13 to this Regulation does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the Type Approval Authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in paragraph 5.3.1.4 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the Technical Service.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Periodically regenerating system [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Periodically regenerating system CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during the vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system, which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 10 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type-approval authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emission of CO 2 does not exceed the declared value by more than 4 per cent after agreement of the technical service.		 No.101 2012-05-26
periodically regenerating system [REG. No 692/2008] 　 periodically regenerating system emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 6. "periodically regenerating system" means catalytic converters, particulate filters or other pollution control devices that require a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation REG. No 692/2008
Periodically regenerating system [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Periodically regenerating system CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during the vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system, which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 10 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type approval authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emission of CO2 does not exceed the declared value by more than 4 % after agreement of the technical service.		 No.101 2007-06-19
Permanent emission default mode [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Permanent emission default mode Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Permanent emission default mode" refers to a case where the engine management controller permanently switches to a setting that does not require an input from a failed component or system where such a failed component or system would result in an increase in emissions from the vehicle to a level above the limits given in paragraph 3.3.2 of this Annex.		 No.083 2012-02-15
permissible maximum laden mass (Technically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 M (Technically permissible maximum laden mass) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2015-06-18
permissible maximum laden mass (Technically) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2010-09-29
permissible maximum mass [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ permissible maximum mass Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.013 2016-02-18
permissible maximum mass [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum mass Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Maximum mass" means the maximum mass stated by the vehicle manufacturer to be technically permissible (this mass may be higher than the "permissible maximum mass" laid down by the national administration);		 No.013 2010-09-30
petroleum gas (Liquefied) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.19. "Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG)" means any product essentially composed of the following hydrocarbons: propane, propene (propylene), normal butane, isobutane, isobutylene, butene (butylene) and ethane.
European Standard EN 589:1993 specifies requirements and methods of test for automotive LPG as marketed and delivered in the countries of the members of CEN (European Committee for Standardization).		 No.067 2008-03-14
PF [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PF (Penetration fraction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.62. "Penetration fraction PF" means the deviation from ideal functioning of a non-methane cutter (see Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E). An ideal non-methane cutter would have a methane penetration fraction, PFCH4 , of 1,000 (that is, a methane conversion efficiency EC of 0), and the penetration fraction for all other hydrocarbons would be 0,000, as represented by PFC2H6 (that is, an ethane conversion efficiency EC2H6 of 1). The relationship is:
PF CH 4 = 1 - EC and PFC2H6 = 1 - EC2H6 ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
PH [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Plastic hinge (PH) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Plastic hinge" (PH) means a simple plastic zone formed on a rod-like element (single tube, window column, etc).		 No.066 2007-12-06
PH [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 PH (Plastic hinge) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Plastic hinge" (PH) means a simple plastic zone formed on a rod-like element (single tube, window column, etc.).		 No.066 2011-03-30
phase (braking, Emergency) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Emergency braking phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency braking phase" means the phase starting when the AEBS emits a braking demand for at least 4 m/s2 deceleration to the service braking system of the vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
phase (stop, Commanded) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Commanded stop phase using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.75. "Commanded stop phase" defines the period of time during which the combustion engine is switched off automatically for fuel saving and is allowed to start again automatically		 No.110 2015-06-30
phase (warning, Collision) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Collision warning phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Collision warning phase" means the phase directly preceding the emergency braking phase, during which the AEBS warns the driver of a potential forward collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Phased braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Phased braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Phased braking [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Phased braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Phased braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Phased braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Phased braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Phased braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
piece (Test) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Test piece safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Test piece" means a sample or a finished product of glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
pillar (A-) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 A-pillar protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "A-pillar" means the foremost and outermost roof support		 No.029 2010-11-20
pillar (A) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 A pillar Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "A pillar" means any roof support forward of the vertical transverse plane located 68 mm in front of the V points and includes non-transparent items such as windscreen mouldings and door frames, attached or contiguous to such a support.		 No.125 2010-07-31
pin (Hinge) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Hinge pin door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Hinge pin" is that portion of the hinge normally interconnecting the body and door members and establishing the swing axis.		 No.011 2010-05-13
pitch angle (CRF) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 CRF pitch angle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "CRF pitch angle" is the angle between the bottom surface of the fixture ISO/F2 (B) as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2, Figure 2) and the horizontal Z plane of the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 14 (Annex 4, Appendix 2), with the fixture installed in the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2).		 No.129 2014-03-29
Placing on the market [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Placing on the market Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.65. "Placing on the market" means the action of making available a product covered by this Regulation on the market of a country applying this Regulation, for payment or free of charge, with a view to distribution and/or use in the country;		 No.096 2014-03-22
plane (central, longitudinal,Vertical) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vertical longitudinal central plane (VLCP) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the midpoints of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2007-12-06
plane (half, Observation on) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation on half-plane Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.5. "Observation on half-plane" means the half-plane which originates on the illumination axis and which contains the observation axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
plane (Longitudinal) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Longitudinal plane Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.11. "Longitudinal plane" means a plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
plane (Longitudinal) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Longitudinal plane seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Longitudinal plane" means a plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
plane (longitudinal) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 longitudinal plane protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "longitudinal plane" means a plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle.		 No.029 2010-11-20
plane (Reference) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Reference plane Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. Reference plane: a plane defined with reference to the cap perpendicular to the reference axis and to which certain dimensions of the LED light sources are referred.		 No.128 2014-05-29
plane (Reference) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference plane Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. "Reference plane": a plane defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the filament lamp are referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
plane (Reference) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Reference plane external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Reference plane" means a horizontal plane passing through the centre of the front wheels or a horizontal plane situated at the height of 50 cm above the ground, whichever is lower;		 No.061 2010-06-30
plane (Reference) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Reference plane Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Reference plane" means the plane passing through the points of contact of the heels of the manikin, used for the determination of the H point and the actual angle of torso for the seating position of motor vehicles according to the prescriptions of annex 4;		 No.080 2010-06-30
plane (Reference) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Reference plane Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. "Reference plane": a plane defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the gas-discharge light source are referred.		 No.099 2010-06-30
plane (Transverse) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
plane (transverse) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
plane (Transverse) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Transverse plane Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal vertical plane of the vehicle.		 No.095 2015-07-10
plane (Transverse) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Transverse plane Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.10. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
plane (Transverse) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Transverse plane seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
plane (transverse) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 transverse plane protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the longitudinal plane of the vehicle.		 No.029 2010-11-20
plane (Transverse) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
plane (Transverse) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor.		 No.086 2010-09-30
plane (Transverse) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Transverse plane Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal vertical plane of the vehicle;		 No.095 2007-11-30
plane of occupant (Centre) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
plane of occupant (Centre) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Plane of the steering control [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Plane of the steering control Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.12. "Plane of the steering control" means in the case of the steering wheel the flat surface that splits the steering wheel rim equally between the driver and the front of the car; No.012 2008-06-26
Plane of the steering control [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Plane of the steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Plane of the steering control" means in the case of the steering wheel the flat surface that splits the steering wheel rim equally between the driver and the front of the car;		 No.012 2013-03-27
plastic (Glass) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Glass-plastics safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Glass-plastics" means glazing consisting of any glazing material that comprises one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastic in which a plastic surface of the product faces the inner side.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Plastic glazing [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Plastic glazing safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture of processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow.
2.6.1. "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).
2.6.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2014-02-12
Plastic glazing [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Plastic glazing Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture or processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow;
2.5.1 "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12);
2.5.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2010-08-31
Plastic hinge [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 PH (Plastic hinge) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Plastic hinge" (PH) means a simple plastic zone formed on a rod-like element (single tube, window column, etc.).		 No.066 2011-03-30
plastic material (Safety glass faced with) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety-glass faced with plastics material safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Safety-glass faced with plastics material" means glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastics material on its inner face.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Plastic zone [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Plastic zone (PZ) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Plastic zone" (PZ) means a special geometrically limited part of the superstructure in which, as the result of dynamic, impact forces:
- large scale plastic deformations are concentrated,
- essential distortion of the original shape (cross section, length, or other geometry) occurs,
- loss of stability occurs, as a result of local buckling,
- kinetic energy is absorbed due to deformation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Plastic zone [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 PZ (Plastic zone) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Plastic zone" (PZ) means a special geometrically limited part of the superstructure in which, as the result of dynamic, impact forces:
- large scale plastic deformations are concentrated;
- essential distortion of the original shape (cross section, length, or other geometry) occurs;
- loss of stability occurs, as a result of local buckling;
- kinetic energy is absorbed due to deformation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
plastics pane (Glass-) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Glass-plastics pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Glass-plastics pane" means a pane of laminated glass having one layer of glass and one or more layers of plastics material, at least one of which acts as interlayer. The plastics layer(s) shall be on the inner face when the glazing is fitted on the vehicle;		 No.043 2010-08-31
platform (Tilting) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Tilting platform Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tilting platform" means a rigid plane which can be rotated around a horizontal axis in order to tilt a complete vehicle or body section.		 No.066 2007-12-06
platform (Tilting) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Tilting platform Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Tilting platform" means a rigid plane which can be rotated around a horizontal axis in order to tilt a complete vehicle or body section.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Platform [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Platform Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Platform" means that part of the vehicle on which the driver places his feet, when seated in the normal driving position, in the case that the vehicle is not equipped with riding pedals or footrests for the driver;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Ply [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Ply Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.6. "Ply" means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Ply [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Ply Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.6. "Ply" means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords; No.054 2008-07-11
ply (bias) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
ply (bias) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 bias ply 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
ply (bias) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Ply [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Ply Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Ply" means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Ply [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Ply Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Ply" means a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Ply [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Ply 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Ply" means a layer of "rubber" coated parallel cords.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Ply [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Ply Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Ply" means a layer of "rubber" coated parallel cords.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Ply separation [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Ply separation Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.25. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies; No.030 2008-07-30
Ply separation [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Ply separation Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.25. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies; No.054 2008-07-11
Ply separation [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Ply separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Ply separation [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Ply separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Ply separation [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Ply separation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Ply separation [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Ply separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies.		 No.109 2006-07-04
PM [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PM (Particulate matter) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting exhaust with a clean filtered diluent to a temperature between 315 K (42℃) and 325 K (52℃); this is primarily carbon, condensed hydrocarbons, and sulphates with associated water;		 No.049 2013-06-24
PM [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PM (Particulate matter) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.61. "Particulate matter (PM)" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting C.I. engine exhaust gas with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52℃);		 No.096 2014-03-22
Pmax [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1"declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Pmax [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;		 No.049 2010-08-31
PMR [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 PMR (Power-to-mass ratio index) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.9. "Power-to-mass ratio index" means the ratio of the rated maximum net power of a vehicle to its mass. It is defined as:
PMR = (P n /(m kerb + 75)) * 1 000
Where m kerb is the numerical value of the kerb mass as defined in paragraph 2.6 above, expressed in kilograms.
The symbol PMR denotes the power-to-mass ratio index.		 No.041 2012-11-14
PMR [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Power to mass ratio index (PMR) Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Power to mass ratio index (PMR)" means a numerical quantity (see Annex 10 paragraph 3.1.2.1.1) with no dimension used for the calculation of acceleration.		 No.051 2007-05-30
pneumatic tyre (retreaded, Range of) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.109 2006-07-04
pneumatic tyre (Structure of a) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Structure of a pneumatic tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
pneumatic tyre (Type of) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Type of pneumatic tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of pneumatic tyre" means a category of pneumatic tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. The manufacturer;
2.1.2. Tyre size designation;
2.1.3. Category of use (normal: for normal highway service; special: for special applications such as on- and off-the-road, snow, moped);
2.1.4. Structure (diagonal or bias-ply, bias belted, radial);
2.1.5. Speed category;
2.1.6. Load capacity index;
2.1.7. Tyre cross-section.		 No.075 2011-03-30
point (Dew) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Dew point Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.19. "Dew point" means a measure of humidity stated as the equilibrium temperature at which water condenses under a given pressure from moist air with a given absolute humidity. Dew point is specified as a temperature in ° C or K, and is valid only for the pressure at which it is measured;		 No.096 2014-03-22
point (H) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 "H" point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. " "H" point" means a reference point determined for each seat by the testing service responsible for approval, in accordance with the procedure described in Annex 6;		 No.094 2012-09-20
point (H) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 H point Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "H point" is as established by Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
point (H) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "H" point Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and the thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The ‘H’ point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R2 point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H2 point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.014 2007-12-06
point (H) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 H point Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and the thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.016 2007-11-30
point (H) [No.017 2010-08-31A3] 　 "H" point seats, their anchorages and any head restraints [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
1. PURPOSE
The procedure described in this annex is used to establish the ‘H’ point location and the actual torso angle for one or several seating positions in a motor vehicle and to verify the relationship of measured data to design specifications given by the vehicle manufacturer ( 1 ).
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this annex:
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship,
【以下略】		 No.017 2010-08-31
point (H) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 "H" point head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
1. PURPOSE
The procedure described in this Annex is used to establish the ‘H’ point location and the actual torso angle for one or several seating positions in a motor vehicle and to verify the relationship of measured data to design specifications given by the vehicle manufacturer ( 1 ).		 No.025 2010-08-14
point (H-) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 H-point protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "H-point" means the point defined in Annex 4, paragraph 2.3.		 No.029 2010-11-20
point (H) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 H point protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.3. "H point" means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3-D H machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3-D H machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted.		 No.029 2010-11-20
point (H) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 "H" point external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. The "H" point, which indicates the position of a seated occupant in the passenger compartment, is the trace, in a longitudinal vertical plane, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the legs and the torso of a human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.		 No.061 2010-06-30
point (H) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 "H" point Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. ""H" point" means the pivot centre of the torso and thigh of the 3 DH machine installed in the vehicle seat in accordance with paragraph 4 below. The "H" point is located in the centre of the centreline of the device which is between the "H" point sight buttons on either side of the 3 DH machine. The "H" point corresponds theoretically to the "R" point (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below). Once determined in accordance with the procedure described in paragraph 4, the "H" point is considered fixed in relation to the seat-cushion structure and to move with it when the seat is adjusted;		 No.080 2010-06-30
point (H) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 "H” point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. " "H” point" means a reference point determined for each seat by the testing service responsible for approval, in accordance with the procedure described in annex 6;		 No.094 2010-05-28
point (H) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 H point Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "H point" means the point defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.3.		 No.125 2010-07-31
point (R) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 "R" point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. " "R" point" means a reference point defined for each seat by the manufacturer in relation to the vehicle’s structure, as indicated in Annex 6;		 No.094 2012-09-20
point (R) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. Has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. Corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him.		 No.095 2015-07-10
point (R) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.014 2007-12-06
point (R) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 "R" point" or "seating reference point" Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.016 2007-11-30
point (R) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 R point seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in annex 3 to this Regulation;		 No.017 2010-08-31
point (R) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R" point or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by a vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.025 2010-08-14
point (R) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 R point protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in Annex 4, paragraph 2.4.		 No.029 2010-11-20
point (R) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 seating reference point (R point) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
point (R) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. The "R" point or "seating reference point" is the reference point specified by the manufacturer which:
1.2.1. has coordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
1.2.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/legs rotation ("H" point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat provided by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.061 2010-06-30
point (R) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 ""R" point" or "seating reference point" Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.080 2010-06-30
point (R) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 "R" point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. " "R" point" means a reference point defined for each seat by the manufacturer in relation to the vehicle's structure, as indicated in annex 6;		 No.094 2010-05-28
point (Reference) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Reference point Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Reference point" means a point which is defined as follows:
2.11.1. Category M1, N1:
- for front engine vehicles: the front end of the vehicle;
- for mid engine vehicles: the centre of the vehicle;
- for rear engine vehicles: the rear end of the vehicle.
2.11.2. Category M2, M3, N2, N3:
the border of the engine closest to the front of the vehicle.		 No.051 2007-05-30
point (Reference) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Reference point Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" means the point which is situated in the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the seat, at a position 700 mm along the vertical above the line of intersection of that plane with the surface of the seat and 270 mm — in the direction of the pelvis support — from the vertical plane tangential to the front edge of the seat surface and perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor (see figure 1); the reference point as thus determined applies to an empty seat adjusted in the average position prescribed by the tractor manufacturer;		 No.071 2004-03-31
point (Reference) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Reference point Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" means the point which is situated in the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the seat, at a position 700 mm along the vertical above the line of intersection of that plane with the surface of the seat and 270 mm – in the direction of the pelvis support – from the vertical plane tangential to the front edge of the seat surface and perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor (see figure 1); the reference point as thus determined applies to an empty seat adjusted in the average position prescribed by the tractor manufacturer.		 No.071 2010-07-31
Point to point [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Point-to-point Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Point-to-point" means a topology of a communication network with only two units. Each unit has an integrated termination resistor for the communication line.		 No.013 2016-02-18
points (E) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 E points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "E points" means points representing the centres of the driver’s eyes and used to assess the extent to which A pillars obscure the field of vision.		 No.125 2010-07-31
points (P) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 P points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "P points" means the points about which the driver’s head rotates when he views objects on a horizontal plane at eye level.		 No.125 2010-07-31
points (V) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 V points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "V points" means points whose position in the passenger compartment is determined as a function of vertical longitudinal planes passing through the centres of the outermost designated seating positions on the front seat and in relation to the ‘R’ point and the design angle of the seat-back, which points are used for verifying compliance with the field of vision requirements.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Point-to-point [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Point-to-point Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Point-to-point" means a topology of a communication network with only two units. Each unit has an integrated termination resistor for the communication line.		 No.013 2010-09-30
pollutant (Gaseous) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, NO x , expressed in NO 2 equivalent, hydrocarbons (i.e. total hydrocarbons, non-methane hydrocarbons and methane);		 No.049 2013-06-24
pollutant (Gaseous) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 ) equivalent and hydrocarbons assuming ratio of:
(a) C 1 H 2,525 for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);
(b) C 1 H 4 for natural gas (NG) and biomethane;
(c) C 1 H 1,89 O 0,016 for petrol (E5);
(d) C 1 H 1,86 O 0,005 for diesel (B5);
(e) C 1 H 2,74 O 0,385 for ethanol (E85);		 No.083 2012-02-15
pollutant (Gaseous) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Gaseous pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Gaseous pollutants" means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent and hydrocarbons assuming ratio of:
(a) C1H2,525 for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG);
(b) C1H4 for Natural Gas (NG) and biomethane;
(c) C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol (E5);
(d) C1H1,93O0,033 for petrol (E10);
(e) C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel (B5);
(f) C1H1,86O0,007 for diesel (B7);
(g) C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85);
(h) C1H2,61O0,329 for ethanol (E75).		 No.083 2015-07-03
pollutant (Gaseous) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Gaseous pollutants Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.36. "Gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 1.85 ) and, oxides of nitrogen, the last named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 ) equivalent;		 No.096 2014-03-22
pollutant (Particulate) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Particulate pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Particulate pollutants" means components of the exhaust gas which are removed from the diluted exhaust gas at a maximum temperature of 325 K (52 °C) by means of the filters described in Annex 4a, Appendix 4;		 No.083 2012-02-15
pollutant (Particulate) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Particulate pollutants Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Particulate pollutants" means components of the exhaust gas which are removed from the diluted exhaust gas at a maximum temperature of 325 K (52℃) by means of the filters described in Appendix 4 to Annex 4a to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
pollutants (gaseous) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 gaseous pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of CH1,85 for diesel, CH2,525 for LPG and CH2,93 for NG (NMHC) and an assumed molecule CH3O0,5 for ethanol-fuelled diesel engines), methane (assuming a ratio of CH4 for NG) and oxides of nitrogen, the last-named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent;		 No.049 2008-04-12
pollutants (gaseous) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 gaseous pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of CH1,85 for diesel, CH2,525 for LPG and CH2,93 for NG (NMHC) and an assumed molecule CH3O0,5 for ethanol-fuelled diesel engines), methane (assuming a ratio of CH4 for NG) and oxides of nitrogen, the last-named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent;		 No.049 2010-08-31
pollutants (particulate) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 particulate pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "particulate pollutants" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting the exhaust with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52℃);		 No.049 2008-04-12
pollutants (particulate) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 particulate pollutants Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "particulate pollutants" means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting the exhaust with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52 oC);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Pollution control device [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Pollution control device [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions.		 No.083 2015-07-03
pollution control device [REG. No 595/2009] 　 pollution control device emissions 6. "pollution control device" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit tailpipe emissions; REG. No 595/2009
pollution control device (Original) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Original pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Original pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices covered by the type approval granted for the vehicle concerned;		 No.049 2013-06-24
pollution control device (Replacement) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Replacement pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.56. "Replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices intended to replace an original pollution control device and which can be approved as a separate technical unit;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Pollution control devices [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions. No.083 2008-05-06
Portable emission measurement system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 PEMS (Portable emissions measurement system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Portable emissions measurement system" (PEMS) means a portable emissions measurement system meeting the requirements specified in Appendix 2 to Annex 8 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Portable ramp [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Portable ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Portable ramp" means a ramp that may be detached from the vehicle structure and capable of being deployed by a driver or crew member.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Portable ramp [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Portable ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Portable ramp" means a ramp that may be detached from the vehicle structure and capable of being deployed by a driver or crew member.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Portable ramp [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Portable ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Portable ramp" means a ramp that may be detached from the vehicle structure and capable of being deployed by a driver or crew member.		 No.107 2010-09-29
position (driving, Central) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Central driving position safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Central driving position" is defined when Y co-ordinate of the R point is in Y0 position within + or – 60 mm.		 No.043 2014-02-12
position (Inclined) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Inclined position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Inclined position" means a special position of the chair which allows the child to recline.		 No.129 2014-03-29
position (Inclined) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Inclined position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Inclined position" means a special position of the chair which allows the child to recline.		 No.044 2007-11-23
position (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.51. "ISOFIX position" means a location which allows for the installation of either:
(a) Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint System as defined in Regulation No. 44; or
(b) A "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" Child Restraint System as defined in Regulation No. 44 or a "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" as defined in this Regulation; or
(c) An i-Size Child Restraint System suitable for use in specific ISOFIX seating positions as defined by the vehicle manufacturer according to Regulation 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
position (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix position Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either a universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44,
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2007-11-30
position (lamp of variable) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Lamps of variable position Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.7. "Lamps of variable position" means lamps installed on the tractor which can move in relation to the tractor, without being detached;		 No.086 2010-09-30
position (latched, Fully) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Fully latched position door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Fully latched position" is the coupling condition of the latch that retains the door in a completely closed position.		 No.011 2010-05-13
position (latched, Secondary) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Secondary latched position door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Secondary latched position" refers to the coupling condition of the latch that retains the door in a partially closed position		 No.011 2010-05-13
position (Lying down, supine, prone) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.129 2014-03-29
position (side) lamp (Front) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Front position (side) lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1."'Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 1997-07-30
position (side) lamp (Front) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Front position (side) lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 2010-06-12
position (side) lamp (Rear) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Rear position (side) lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 1997-07-30
position (side) lamp (Rear) [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Rear position (side) lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 2010-06-12
position (vertical, installed in a, Material) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Material installed in a vertical position burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.9. "Material installed in a vertical position" means materials installed in the interior compartment, the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment of the vehicle such that its slope exceeds 15 % from the horizontal when the vehicle is at its mass in running order and it is standing on a smooth and horizontal ground surface.		 No.108 2015-04-21
position lamp (Front) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front position lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.007 2014-09-30
position lamp (Front) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.11. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.053 2013-06-18
position lamp (Front) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.8. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.074 2013-06-18
position lamp (Front) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Front position (side) lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.16. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the front;		 No.086 2010-09-30
position lamp (Front) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Front position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.14. "Front position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;		 No.048 2011-12-06
position lamp (Rear) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Rear position lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 2014-09-30
position lamp (Rear) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.053 2013-06-18
position lamp (Rear) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.074 2013-06-18
position lamp (Rear) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.15. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.048 2011-12-06
position lamp (Rear) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear position (side) lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.17. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the rear;		 No.086 2010-09-30
position lamp of different type (Front and rear) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
position lamp of different type (Front, rear) [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
positioner (strap, Shoulder) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Shoulder strap positioner Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.55. "Shoulder strap positioner" means a device intended to maintain, during normal transit conditions, the appropriate shoulder strap position on the child’s torso by connecting the shoulder straps to one another.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Positive mechanical engagement [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Positive mechanical engagement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Positive mechanical engagement" means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Positive mechanical engagement [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Positive mechanical engagement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Positive mechanical engagement" means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.		 No.055 2010-08-28
possible mode (driving, Active) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle. No.100 2011-02-14
possible mode (driving, Active) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
power (30 minute, Maximum) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1 of this Regulation, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average;		 No.085 2014-11-07
power (engine, Rated) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 (Rated) engine power Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "(Rated) engine power" means the engine power expressed in kW (ECE) and measured by the ECE method pursuant to Regulation No 85.		 No.051 2007-05-30
power (Maximum 30 minute) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average.		 No.085 2006-11-24
power (Maximum) [No.049 2013-06-24A4a] 　 P max (Maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in kW as specified by the manufacturer.		 No.049 2013-06-24
power (Maximum) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 P max (Maximum power) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.45. "Maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in kW as designed by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
power (maximum, Declared) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 P max (Declared maximum power) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Declared maximum power (P max )" means the maximum power in ECE kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
power (maximum, declared) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1"declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;;		 No.049 2008-04-12
power (maximum, declared) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 declared maximum power (Pmax) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "declared maximum power (Pmax)" means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for approval;		 No.049 2010-08-31
power (minute, 30, Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum 30 minutes power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at Direct Current (DC) voltage as set out in paragraph 5.3.2 of Regulation No 85.		 No.083 2015-07-03
power (Net) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries according to UN/ECE Regulation No 85 and determined under reference atmospheric conditions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
power (Net) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Net power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries tested in accordance with Regulation No 85 and determined under reference atmospheric conditions.		 No.083 2015-07-03
power (Net) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries listed in Table 1 of Annex 5 or in Annex 6 to this Regulation, and determined under reference atmospheric condition;		 No.085 2014-11-07
power (Net) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Net power Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.49. "Net power" means the power in "ECE kW" obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalent, measured in accordance with the method described in Regulation No. 120 on the measurement of the net power, net torque and specific fuel consumption of internal combustion engines for agricultural and forestry tractors and non-road mobile machinery.		 No.096 2014-03-22
power (Net) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine speed with the auxiliaries and equipment listed in Table 1 of Annex 4 to this Regulation, determined under reference atmospheric conditions;		 No.120 2015-06-30
power (Net) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Net power Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.2 "Net power" means the power of a C.I. engine as defined in Annex 10 to this Regulation;		 No.024 2006-11-24
power (net) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "net power" means the power in kW obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalent, measured in accordance with the method of measuring power as set out in Regulation No 85;		 No.049 2008-04-12
power (net) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "net power" means the power in kW obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalent, measured in accordance with the method of measuring power as set out in Regulation No 85;		 No.049 2010-08-31
power (Net) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine or motor speed with the auxiliaries listed in table 1 of Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation, and determined under reference atmospheric conditions.		 No.085 2006-11-24
power (Net) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Net power" means the power obtained on a test bench at the end of the crankshaft or its equivalent at the corresponding engine speed with the auxiliaries and equipment listed in Table 1 of Annex 4 to this Regulation, determined under reference atmospheric conditions;		 No.120 2010-09-30
power (net, Maximum) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Maximum net power Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.049 2013-06-24
power (net, Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Maximum net power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load.		 No.083 2015-07-03
power (net, Maximum) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.085 2014-11-07
power (net, Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.120 2015-06-30
power (net, Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Maximum net power" means the maximum value of the net power measured at full engine load;		 No.120 2010-09-30
power (net, maximum, Rated) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 P n (Rated maximum net power) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.7. "Rated maximum net power" means the rated engine power as defined in ISO 4106:2004.
The symbol P n denotes the numerical value of the rated maximum net power expressed in kilowatts.		 No.041 2012-11-14
power (net, Rated) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Rated net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Rated net power" means engine net power as declared by the manufacturer at rated speed;		 No.120 2015-06-30
power (net, Rated) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Rated net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Rated net power" means engine net power as declared by the manufacturer at rated speed;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Power assisted braking system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Power-assisted braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Power-assisted braking system" means a brake system in which the energy necessary to produce the braking force is supplied by the physical effort of the rider assisted by one or more energy supplying devices, for example vacuum assisted (with vacuum booster).		 No.078 2015-01-30
Power assisted steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Power assisted steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.1.1.2. "Power assisted steering equipment" in which the steering forces result from both the muscular effort of the driver and the energy supply (supplies).
2.5.1.1.2.1. Steering equipment in which the steering forces result solely from one or more energy supplies when the equipment is intact, but in which the steering forces can be provided by the muscular effort of the driver alone if there is a fault in the steering (integrated power systems), is also considered to be power assisted steering equipment;		 No.079 2008-05-27
power factor (Partial) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Partial power factor kp Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Partial power factor kp" means a numerical quantity with no dimension used for the weighted combination of the test results of the acceleration test and the constant speed test for vehicles		 No.051 2007-05-30
Power key [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Power key Interior fittings 2.16.2. "Power key" means the device which allows power to be supplied to the power systems of the vehicle. This key may also be the ignition key. This definition does not preclude a nonmechanical device. No.021 2008-07-16
Power operated service door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2015-06-18
power speed (net, Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
power speed (net, Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
power supply (electric, External) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2011-02-14
power supply (electric, External) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Power take off unit [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Power take-off unit Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.51. "Power take-off unit" means an engine driven output device for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Power take off unit [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Power take-off unit Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Power take-off unit" means an engine-driven output provision for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment.		 No.083 2012-02-15
power take-off operation or unit [REG. No 692/2008] 　 power take-off operation or unit emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 31. "power take-off operation or unit" means an engine-driven output provision for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment; REG. No 692/2008
power take-off unit [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 power take-off unit Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "power take-off unit" means an engine-driven output device for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;		 No.049 2008-04-12
power take-off unit [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 power take-off unit Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "power take-off unit" means an engine-driven output device for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Power to mass ratio index [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 PMR (Power-to-mass ratio index) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.9. "Power-to-mass ratio index" means the ratio of the rated maximum net power of a vehicle to its mass. It is defined as:
PMR = (P n /(m kerb + 75)) * 1 000
Where m kerb is the numerical value of the kerb mass as defined in paragraph 2.6 above, expressed in kilograms.
The symbol PMR denotes the power-to-mass ratio index.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Power to mass ratio index [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Power to mass ratio index (PMR) Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Power to mass ratio index (PMR)" means a numerical quantity (see Annex 10 paragraph 3.1.2.1.1) with no dimension used for the calculation of acceleration.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Power train [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Power train Electric vehicle safety 2.11. "Power train" means the electrical circuit including:
(i) the traction battery;
(ii) the electronic converters (on-board charger, electronic control of the traction motor, DC/DC converter, etc.);
(iii) the traction motors, the associated wiring harness and connectors, etc.
(iv) the charging circuit;
(v) the power auxiliary equipment (e.g. heating, defrosting, power steering, etc.).		 No.100 2009-02-14
Power train [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Power train" means the system of energy storage device(s), energy converter(s) and transmission(s) that converts stored energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2012-05-26
power train (Electric) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Electric power train Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices, one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
power train (Electric) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electric power train Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Electric power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may include the RESS, the electric energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS.		 No.100 2011-02-14
power train (Electric) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electric power train Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Electric power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may include the REESS, the electric energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the REESS.		 No.100 2015-03-31
power train (Electric) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices (e.g. a battery, electromechanical flywheel or super capacitor), one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
power train (Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical power train protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the RESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS;		 No.012 2013-03-27
power train (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical power train Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the RESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS,		 No.094 2012-09-20
power train (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical power train Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the REESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the REESS.		 No.095 2015-07-10
power train (Hybrid) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Hybrid power train" means a power train with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on-board the vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.13.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g.: battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator …)		 No.101 2007-06-19
Power train [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Power train" means the system of energy storage device(s), energy converter(s) and transmission(s) that converts stored energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Power-operated partition systems [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Power-operated partition systems Interior fittings 2.14. "Power-operated partition systems" means systems which divide a passenger car compartment into at least two sections and which are closed using the power supply of the vehicle. No.021 2008-07-16
Power-operated roof-panel systems [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Power-operated roof-panel systems Interior fittings 2.13. "Power-operated roof-panel systems" means movable panels in the vehicle roof which are closed by power supply of the vehicle by either a sliding and/or tilting motion, and which do not include
convertible top systems.		 No.021 2008-07-16
Power-operated service door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Power-operated service door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Power-operated windows [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Power-operated windows Interior fittings 2.12. "Power-operated windows" means windows which are closed by power supply of the vehicle. No.021 2008-07-16
PRD [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.35. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive temperature and/or pressure which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
PRD [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (pressure triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.36. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered)" (this device sometimes is referred to as ‘burst disc’) means a one-time-use device triggered by excessive pressure that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
PRD (pressure triggered) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (burst disc) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.27. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (this device sometimes is referred to as "burst disc")" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive pressure which prevents a pre- determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
PRD (temperature triggered) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.22. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one time use device triggered by excessive temperature which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Pre loading device [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Pre-loading device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Pre-loading device
An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Pre stressing [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pre-stressing using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.64. "Pre-stressing" means the process of applying auto-frettage or controlled tension winding.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Pre-acceleration [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Pre-acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pre-acceleration" means application of acceleration control device prior to AA' for the purpose of achieving stable acceleration between AA' and BB'.		 No.051 2007-05-30
preconditioning cycle [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 preconditioning cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"preconditioning cycle" means the running of at least three consecutive OBD test cycles or emission test cycles for the purpose of achieving stability of the engine operation, the emission control system and OBD monitoring readiness;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Pre-cured [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Pre-cured 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Pre-cured [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Pre-cured Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back"— pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Pre-loading device [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Pre-loading device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Pre-loading device : An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Pre-loading device [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Pre-loading device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Pre-loading device
An additional or integrated device which tightens the seat-belt webbing in order to reduce the slack of the belt during a crash sequence.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (Atmospheric) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Atmospheric pressure Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.6. "Atmospheric pressure" means the wet, absolute, atmospheric static pressure. Note that if the atmospheric pressure is measured in a duct, negligible pressure losses shall be ensured between the atmosphere and the measurement location, and changes in the duct's static pressure resulting from the flow shall be accounted for;		 No.096 2014-03-22
pressure (developed, Maximum) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum developed pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.62. "Maximum developed pressure" means the settled pressure developed when gas in a cylinder filled to the working pressure is raised to the maximum service temperature.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (developed, maximum) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 maximum developed pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.17. maximum developed pressure: The settled pressure developed when gas in a cylinder filled to the working pressure is raised to the maximum service temperature.		 No.110 2008-03-14
pressure (Filling) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Filling pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.55. "Filling pressure" means the gas pressure in the cylinder immediately upon completion of filling.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (filling) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 filling pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.10. filling pressure: The gas pressure in the cylinder immediately upon completion of filling.		 No.110 2008-03-14
pressure (frettage, Auto) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Auto-frettage pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.48. "Auto-frettage pressure" means the pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (frettage, auto-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 auto-frettage pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.3. auto-frettage pressure: The pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.		 No.110 2008-03-14
pressure (inflation, cold, Recommended) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec )" means the pressure recommended for each tyre position by the vehicle manufacturer, for the intended service conditions (e.g. speed and load) of the given vehicle, as defined on the vehicle placard and/or the vehicle owner's manual.		 No.064 2010-11-26
pressure (operating, In service) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 In service operating pressure (Pwarm) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "In service operating pressure (P warm)" means the inflation pressure for each tyre position elevated from the cold pressure (P rec ) by temperature effects during vehicle usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
pressure (Partial) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Partial pressure Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.58. "Partial pressure" means the pressure, p, attributable to a single gas in a gas mixture. For an ideal gas, the partial pressure divided by the total pressure is equal to the constituent's molar concentration, x;		 No.096 2014-03-22
pressure (running, Normal) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Normal running pressure (Tyre) Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Normal running pressure" means the cold inflation pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer increased by 0,2 bar;		 No.039 2004-03-31
pressure (Service or Operating) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Service pressure" or "Operating pressure" using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.2. "Service pressure" or "Operating pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C. Service pressure for LNG means the intended settled pressure of the tank in use –as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (Settled) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Settled pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.66. "Settled pressure" means the gas pressure when a given settled temperature is reached.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (settled) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 settled pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.21. settled pressure: The gas pressure when a given settled temperature is reached.		 No.110 2008-03-14
pressure (Test) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Test pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.3. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing. For LNG tank the economizer pressure setting, or normal saturation pressure of LNG required by the engine. For the CNG cylinder the pressure at which the cylinder is hydrostatically tested.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Pressure (Test) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Test Pressure (Ptest) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Test Pressure (Ptest)" means the actual pressure of the tyre(s) selected for each tyre position after deflation during the test procedure.		 No.064 2010-11-26
pressure (test) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 test pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.23. test pressure: The pressure at which the cylinder is hydrostatically tested.		 No.110 2008-03-14
pressure (tyre inflation, Cold) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Cold tyre inflation pressure Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Cold tyre inflation pressure" means the tyre pressure at ambient temperature, in the absence of any pressure build-up due to tyre usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
pressure (vacuum) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 pressure (vacuum) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.3. If the compression of the springs is obtained by means of a vacuum device, "pressure" shall mean negative pressure everywhere in this annex.		 No.013 2010-09-30
pressure (Working) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Working pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.4. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration. For CNG cylinder, the settled pressure of 20 MPa at a uniform temperature of 15 °C. For LNG tank, the pressure of the LNG tank primary relief valve setting.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure (working) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 working pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.24. working pressure: The settled pressure of 20 MPa at a uniform temperature of 15℃.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure2 means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure2 means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Pressure [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15℃.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O,
at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Pressure [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Pressure indicator [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure indicator using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.20. "Pressure indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas pressure.		 No.110 2011-05-07
pressure meter (atmospheric, Shared) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared atmospheric pressure meter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.76. "Shared atmospheric pressure meter" means an atmospheric pressure meter whose output is used as the atmospheric pressure for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
pressure monitoring system (Tyre) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" means a system fitted on a vehicle, able to perform a function to evaluate the inflation pressure of the tyres or the variation of this inflation pressure over time and to transmit corresponding information to the user while the vehicle is running.		 No.064 2010-11-26
pressure monitoring system (tyre, Type of) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Type of tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of tyre pressure monitoring system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the principle of operation;
(b) any components which are likely to have a significant influence on the performance of the system as specified under paragraph 5.3 to this Regulation.		 No.064 2010-11-26
pressure monitoring system (tyre, Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
Pressure regulator [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure regulator using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.34. "Pressure regulator" means a device used to control the pressure of CNG or LNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Pressure regulator [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure regulator LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.7. "Pressure regulator" means a device intended for reducing and regulating the pressure of liquefied petroleum gas;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Pressure regulator [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure regulator using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.21. "Pressure regulator" means a device used to control the delivery pressure of gaseous fuel to the engine.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Pressure relief device [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.35. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive temperature and/or pressure which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Pressure relief device [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (pressure triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.36. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered)" (this device sometimes is referred to as ‘burst disc’) means a one-time-use device triggered by excessive pressure that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Pressure relief device (pressure triggered) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (burst disc) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.27. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (this device sometimes is referred to as "burst disc")" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive pressure which prevents a pre- determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Pressure relief device (temperature triggered) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.22. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one time use device triggered by excessive temperature which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Pressure relief valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.23. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure relief valve (Gas-tube) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas-tube pressure relief valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.9. "Gas-tube pressure relief valve" means a device to prevent the pressure build up in the tubes above a pre-set value;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Pressure relief valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Pressure relief valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.12. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device which prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Pressure sensor [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure or temperature sensor LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.13. "Pressure or temperature sensor" means a device which measures pressure or temperature;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Pressure sensor, indicator [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure sensor/indicator using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure triggered [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (pressure triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.36. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered)" (this device sometimes is referred to as ‘burst disc’) means a one-time-use device triggered by excessive pressure that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
pressure triggered (PRD) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (burst disc) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.27. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (this device sometimes is referred to as "burst disc")" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive pressure which prevents a pre- determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
pressure. (running, Normal) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Normal running pressure speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Normal running pressure" means the cold inflation pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer increased by 0,2 bar.		 No.039 2010-05-13
prestressing [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 prestressing Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.19. prestressing: The process of applying auto-frettage or controlled tension winding.		 No.110 2008-03-14
prevention device (Starting) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Starting prevention device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Starting prevention device" means a device which prevents the vehicle being driven away from rest when a door is not fully closed.		 No.107 2015-06-18
prevention device (Starting) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Starting prevention device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Starting prevention device" means a device which prevents the vehicle being driven away from rest;		 No.107 2006-12-27
prevention device (Starting) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Starting prevention device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Starting prevention device" means a device which prevents the vehicle being driven away from rest when a door is not fully closed;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Primary door latch [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Primary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Primary door latch" is a latch equipped with both a fully latched position and a secondary latched position and is designated as a "primary door latch" by the manufacturer. The manufacturer may not thereafter change such designation. Each manufacturer shall, upon request, provide information regarding which latches are "primary door latches" for a particular vehicle or make/ model.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Primary door latch system [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Primary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Primary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of a primary door latch and a striker.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Primary reference marks [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Primary reference marks Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Primary reference marks" means holes, surfaces, marks and identification signs on the vehicle body. The type of reference mark used and the position of each mark relative to the X, Y and Z coordinates of the three-dimensional reference grid and to a design ground plane shall be specified by the vehicle manufacturer. These marks may be the control points used for body- assembly purposes.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Principal characteristic [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Principal characteristic safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Principal characteristic" means a characteristic that appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way not without significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The term also covers the trade names or marks as specified by the holder of the approval.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Principal characteristic [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Principal characteristic Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Principal characteristic" means a characteristic which appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way not without significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The term also covers the trade names or marks as specified by the holder of the approval;		 No.043 2010-08-31
principal dipped beam [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Principal groove [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Principal groove Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Principal groove" means the wide grooves situated in the central zone of the tread.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Principal grooves (Tread pattern) [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Principal grooves (Tread pattern) Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.30.1. "Principal grooves" means the wide grooves positioned in the central zone of the tyre tread, which have the tread-wear indicators (see para. 2.27) located inside them. No.030 2008-07-30
Principal grooves [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Principal grooves 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Principal grooves" means the wide grooves situated in the central zone of the tread, which cover approximately three-quarters of the breadth of the tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Principal grooves [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Principal grooves Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.1. "Principal grooves" means the wide circumferential grooves positioned in the central zone of the tyre tread, which, in the case of passenger and light truck (commercial) tyres, have the treadwear indicators located in the base.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting. No.048 2008-05-23
Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.		 No.053 2013-06-18
Principal passing beam [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 ri and r'i (Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (ri) and (r'i)" means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in Annex 6, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface contained in a plane parallel to the greatest dimension of the mirror and passing through its centre and on the arc perpendicular to it;		 No.081 2012-07-13
principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri) Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6. "The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the valuesobtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surfacepassing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2010-07-10
principal radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Priority seat [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Priority seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Priority seat" means a seat with additional space for a passenger with reduced mobility and marked accordingly.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Priority seat [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Priority seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Priority seat" means a seat with additional space for a passenger with reduced mobility and marked accordingly.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Priority seat [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Priority seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Priority seat" means a seat with additional space for a passenger with reduced mobility and marked accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Probe [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Probe Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.66. "Probe" means the first section of the transfer line which transfers the sample to next component in the sampling system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
PRODUCTION (CONFORMITY OF) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 COP (CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 8. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION (COP)
8.1. Every vehicle bearing an approval mark as prescribed under this Regulation shall conform, with regard to components affecting the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine, emissions from the crankcase and evaporative emissions, to the vehicle type approved. The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the 1958 Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/ 505/Rev.2), with the following requirements: [略]		 No.083 2015-07-03
production equipment (Standard) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Standard-production equipment Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Standard-production equipment" means equipment provided by the manufacturer for a particular application;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Production material [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Production materials burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.5. "Production materials" means products, in the form of bulk materials (e.g. rolls of upholstery) or preformed components, supplied to a manufacturer for incorporation in a vehicle type approved under this Regulation, or to a workshop for use in the business of vehicle maintenance or repair.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Production materials [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Production materials Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.3. "Production materials" means products, in the form of bulk materials (e.g. rolls of upholstery) or preformed components, supplied to a manufacturer for incorporation in a vehicle type approved underthis Regulation, or to a workshop for use in the business of vehicle maintenance or repair.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Production qualification test [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Production qualification test (qualification of production test) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.53. "Production qualification test (qualification of production test)", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a Child Restraint System in conformity with the Child Restraint Systems submitted for type approval.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Production qualification test [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Production qualification test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Production qualification test", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a child restraint system in conformity with the child restraint systems submitted for type approval.		 No.044 2007-11-23
production qualification test [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 production qualification test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "production qualification test", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a child restraint system in conformity with the child restraint systems submitted for type approval.		 No.044 2011-09-09
production testing (conformity of) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Routine testing (or conformity of production testing) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Routine testing" (or conformity of production testing), means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
production unit (Retreading) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Retreading production unit 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Retreading production unit" means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Professional off-road tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Professional off-road tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Professional off-road tyre" is a special use tyre primarily used for service in severe off-road conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Progressive and graduated braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Progressive and graduated braking [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Progressive braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Progressive braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Progressive braking [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Progressive and graduated braking Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and whether during application or during release of the brakes,
2.10.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control,
2.10.2. the braking force varies proportionally to the action on the control (monotonic function), and,
2.10.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;		 No.078 2004-03-31
projection (dimension of the) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 The dimension of the projection External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "The dimension of the projection" of a component mounted on a panel means the dimension determined by the method described in paragraph 2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2005-12-16
projection (dimension of the) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 dimension of the projection external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "The dimension of the projection" of a component mounted on a panel means the dimension determined by the method described in paragraph 2 of Annex 3 to this Regulation.		 No.026 2010-08-14
prone position [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.129 2014-03-29
prone position [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child’s head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
prop stand [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 prop stand stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.2. "prop stand" means a stand which, when extended or swung into the open position, supports the vehicle on one side only, while leaving both wheels in contact with the supporting surface;		 Directive 2009/078/EC
Properly maintained and used [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2. of Appendix 3 to this Regulation; No.083 2008-05-06
Properly maintained and used [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2 of Appendix 3 to this Regulation;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Properly maintained and used [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2 of Appendix 3 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
properly maintained and used [REG. No 692/2008] 　 properly maintained and used emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 17. "properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in section 2 of Appendix 1 to Annex II; REG. No 692/2008
Propulsion battery [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Propulsion battery Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.20. "Propulsion battery" means the assembly of the blocs constituting the electric energy source; No.012 2008-06-26
Propulsion battery tray [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Propulsion battery tray Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.21. "Propulsion battery tray" means the tray containing one or more monoblocs; a vehicle can comprise no tray or one or more trays; No.012 2008-06-26
propulsion system [REG. No 079/2009] 　 propulsion system hydrogen-powered motor vehicles 1.(b) "propulsion system" means the internal combustion engine or fuel cell system used to propel the vehicle; REG. No 079/2009
protected road users (Un-) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unprotected road users Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2004-03-31
protected road users (Un-) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Unprotected road users lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2010-05-13
protection (occupant, Passenger compartment with regard to) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
protection (occupant, Passenger compartment with regard to) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
protection (underrun, front) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. a special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. bodywork, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2002-02-01
protection (underrun, Front) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "Front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. A special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. Body work, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2010-07-17
protection barrier (Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical protection barrier protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electrical protection barrier" the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Protection Barrier (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical Protection Barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical Protection Barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts,		 No.094 2012-09-20
protection barrier (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical protection barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical protection barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Protection degree [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Protection degree Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Protection degree" means the protection provided by a barrier/enclosure related to the contact with live parts by a test probe, such as a test finger (IPXXB) or a test wire (IPXXD), as defined in Annex 3.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Protection degree [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Protection degree Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Protection degree" means the protection provided by a barrier/enclosure related to the contact with live parts by a test probe, such as a test finger (IPXXB) or a test wire (IPXXD), as defined in Annex 3.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Protection degree IPXXB [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Protection degree IPXXB Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Protection degree IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a Jointed Test Finger (degree IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 9.		 No.095 2015-07-10
protection device (Lateral) [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 LPD (Lateral protection device) LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.4. "Lateral protection device (LPD)" consist of longitudinal member(s) and link(s) (fixing elements) to the chassis side members or other structural parts of the vehicle, designed to offer effective protection to unprotected road users against the risk of falling under the sides of the vehicle and being caught under the wheels. Parts of the vehicle can also be used as LPD.		 No.073 2012-05-08
Protection IPXXB [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Protection IPXXB protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Protection IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a Jointed Test Finger (IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 7;
[ANNEX 7] Test procedures for the protection of the occupants of vehicles operating on electrical power from high voltage and electrolyte spillage
4. PHYSICAL PROTECTION
Appendix: Jointed Test Finger (IPXXB)		 No.012 2013-03-27
Protection IPXXB [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Protection IPXXB Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Protection IPXXB" means protection from contact with high voltage live parts provided by either an electrical protection barrier or an enclosure and tested using a jointed test finger (IPXXB) as described in paragraph 4 of Annex 11,		 No.094 2012-09-20
protection structure (roll-over) (safety cab or frame) [Directive 2009/057/ECA1] 　 roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] Conditions for EC component type-approval
1. DEFINITION
1.1. A roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that, in the event of roll-over, they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver		 Directive 2009/057/EC
protection structure (Roll-over) (safety cab or frame) [Directive 2009/075/ECA1] 　 Roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (static testing) [ANNEX I] Conditions for EC component type-approval
1. DEFINITION
1.1. "Roll-over protection structure" (safety cab or frame), hereinafter called "protection structure", means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that during the tests prescribed in Annexes II and III they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.		 Directive 2009/075/EC
Protective breaker [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Protective breaker Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Protective breaker" applies to a radial ply tyre and means an optional intermediate ply between the tread and the belt to minimise damage to the belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Protective devic [No.018 2008-10-15] 　 "Protective device Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Protective device" means a system designed to prevent unauthorized normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes.
In the case of a system which locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver's intention.		 No.018 2008-10-15
Protective device [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Protective device Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Protective device" means a system designed to prevent unauthorized use of the vehicle providing a positive locking action of the steering or of the transmission; this system may be:
2.3.1. type 1: solely and positively operated on the steering alone,
2.3.2. type 2: positively operated on the steering in conjunction with the device which de-activates the engine of the vehicle,
2.3.3. type 3: pre-loaded, operating on the steering in conjunction with the device which de-activates the engine of the vehicle;
2.3.4. type 4: positively operated on the transmission		 No.062 2013-03-27
Protective device [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Protective device protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Protective device" means a system designed to prevent unauthorized normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes.
In the case of a system which locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver's intention.		 No.018 2010-05-13
Protective device [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Protective device Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Protective device means a system designed to prevent unauthorized use of the vehicle providing a positive locking action of the steering or of the transmission; this system may be:
2.3.1. type 1: solely and positively operated on the steering alone,
2.3.2. type 2: positively operated on the steering in conjunction with the device which de-activates the engine of the vehicle,
2.3.3. type 3: pre-loaded, operating on the steering in conjunction with the device which de-activates the engine of the vehicle;
2.3.4. type 4: positively operated on the transmission.		 No.062 2004-03-31
Protective system [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Protective system Interior fittings 2.10. "Protective system" means interior fittings and devices intended to restrain the occupants. No.021 2008-07-16
Protective system [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Protective system" means interior fittings and devices intended to restrain the occupants and contribute towards ensuring compliance with the requirements set out in paragraph 5 below;		 No.094 2012-09-20
Protective system [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Protective system" means devices intended to restrain and/or protect the occupants.		 No.095 2015-07-10
protective system (Type of) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as:
Their technology;
Their geometry;
Their constituent materials;		 No.094 2012-09-20
protective system (Type of) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as their:
Technology;
Geometry;
Constituent materials.		 No.095 2015-07-10
protective system (Type of) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as:
Their technology;
Their geometry;
Their constituent materials;		 No.094 2010-05-28
protective system (Type of) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as their:
- technology
- geometry
- constituent materials;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Protective system [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Protective system" means interior fittings and devices intended to restrain the occupants and contribute towards ensuring compliance with the requirements set out in paragraph 5 below;		 No.094 2010-05-28
Protective system [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Protective system" means devices intended to restrain and/or protect the occupants;		 No.095 2007-11-30
proximity exterior mirror (Close) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Close-proximity exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
PTFE [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 PTFE Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.67. "PTFE" means polytetrafluoroethylene, commonly known as Teflon TM ;		 No.096 2014-03-22
pump (Fuel) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Fuel pump LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
2.5.5. "Fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of liquid LPG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the container with the fuel pump supply pressure;
2.5.6. "Multivalve" means a device consisting of all or part of the accessories mentioned in paragraphs 2.5.1. to 2.5.3. and 2.5.8.;
2.5.7. "Gas-tight housing" means a device to protect the accessories and to vent any leakages to the open air;
2.5.8. power supply bushing (fuel pump/actuators/fuel level sensor);
2.5.9. "Non-return valve" means a device to allow the flow of liquid LPG in one direction and to prevent the flow of liquid LPG in the opposite direction;		 No.067 2008-03-14
pump (fuel, LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG fuel pump using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.27. "LNG fuel pump" means a device to establish the supply of LNG to the engine by increasing the pressure of the fluid (liquid or vapour).		 No.110 2015-06-30
Pure electric vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Pure electric vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Pure electric vehicle" means a vehicle powered by an electric power train only.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Pure electric vehicle [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Pure electric vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Pure electric vehicle" means vehicle powered by an electric power train only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Pure electric vehicle [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Pure electric vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pure electric vehicle" means vehicle powered by an electric power train only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Purely electric steering transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Purely electric steering transmission Steering equipment 2.6.3. "Purely electric steering transmission" means a steering transmission in which the steering forces, somewhere in the transmission, are transmitted only through electric means. No.079 2008-05-27
Purely hydraulic steering transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Purely hydraulic steering transmission Steering equipment 2.6.2. "Purely hydraulic steering transmission" means a steering transmission in which the steering forces, somewhere in the transmission, are transmitted only by hydraulic means.a No.079 2008-05-27
Purely mechanical steering transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Purely mechanical steering transmission Steering equipment 2.6.1. "Purely mechanical steering transmission" means a steering transmission in which the steering forces are transmitted entirely by mechanical means. No.079 2008-05-27
PZ [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Plastic zone (PZ) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Plastic zone" (PZ) means a special geometrically limited part of the superstructure in which, as the result of dynamic, impact forces:
- large scale plastic deformations are concentrated,
- essential distortion of the original shape (cross section, length, or other geometry) occurs,
- loss of stability occurs, as a result of local buckling,
- kinetic energy is absorbed due to deformation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
PZ [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 PZ (Plastic zone) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Plastic zone" (PZ) means a special geometrically limited part of the superstructure in which, as the result of dynamic, impact forces:
- large scale plastic deformations are concentrated;
- essential distortion of the original shape (cross section, length, or other geometry) occurs;
- loss of stability occurs, as a result of local buckling;
- kinetic energy is absorbed due to deformation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
QDC [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 QDC (Qualified deteriorated component or system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Qualified deteriorated component or system" (QDC) means a component or system that has been intentionally deteriorated such as by accelerated ageing or by having been manipulated in a controlled manner and which has been accepted by the Type Approval Authority according to the provisions set out in paragraph 6.3.2 of Annex 9B and paragraph A.8.2.2 of Appendix 8 to Annex 9B to this Regulation for use when demonstrating the OBD performance of the engine system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
qualification of production test [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Production qualification test (qualification of production test) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.53. "Production qualification test (qualification of production test)", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a Child Restraint System in conformity with the Child Restraint Systems submitted for type approval.		 No.129 2014-03-29
qualification test (Production) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Production qualification test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Production qualification test", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a child restraint system in conformity with the child restraint systems submitted for type approval.		 No.044 2007-11-23
qualification test (production) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 production qualification test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "production qualification test", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a child restraint system in conformity with the child restraint systems submitted for type approval.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Qualified deteriorated component or system [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 QDC (Qualified deteriorated component or system) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Qualified deteriorated component or system" (QDC) means a component or system that has been intentionally deteriorated such as by accelerated ageing or by having been manipulated in a controlled manner and which has been accepted by the Type Approval Authority according to the provisions set out in paragraph 6.3.2 of Annex 9B and paragraph A.8.2.2 of Appendix 8 to Annex 9B to this Regulation for use when demonstrating the OBD performance of the engine system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
quantity (Means of a) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Means of a quantity Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.47. "Means of a quantity" based upon flow-weighted mean values means the mean level of a quantity after it is weighted proportionally to the corresponding flow rate;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Quick adjuster [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Quick adjuster Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement		 No.129 2014-03-29
quick adjuster [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 quick adjuster Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2007-11-23
quick adjuster [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 quick adjuster Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
r [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 r devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.5."r" means the average of the radii of curvature measured over the reflecting surface, in accordance with the method described in Annex 7.		 No.046 2014-08-08
r [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 r Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "r" means the average of the radii of curvature measured over the reflecting surface, in accordance with the method described in paragraph 2 of Annex 6 to this Regulation;		 No.081 2012-07-13
r (Curvature) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Curvature "r" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Curvature "r" " means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the most curved area.		 No.043 2014-02-12
R (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 R : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
R' (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R') Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R′)" means the quotient of the coefficient of luminous intensity R of a plane retro-reflecting surface and its area A
[式]		 No.104 2014-03-14
R (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Reference axis (symbol R) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.6. "Reference axis (symbol R)" means a designated line segment originating on the reference centre which is used to describe the angular position of the retro-reflective device;		 No.104 2014-03-14
r [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Curvature "r" Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Curvature "r"" means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the most curved area.		 No.043 2010-08-31
r [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 r Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.5. "r" means the average of the radii of curvature measured over the reflecting surface, in accordance with the method described in Annex 7.		 No.046 2010-07-10
R' [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (R') Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.1. Coefficient of retro-reflection R'
Coefficient (R') obtained from the luminous intensity (I) of the retro-reflective area in the direction of observation and the illuminance (E⊥) on the retro-reflective plane at right angles to the direction of the incident light and the illuminated plane sample surface A. [式] R'=1/E⊥A
The coefficient of retro-reflection R' is expressed in candela per square metre per lux (cd. m-2 . lx-1 ).		 No.069 2010-07-31
r i [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2014-08-08
r i and r'i [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 ri and r'i (Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (ri) and (r'i)" means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in Annex 6, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface contained in a plane parallel to the greatest dimension of the mirror and passing through its centre and on the arc perpendicular to it;		 No.081 2012-07-13
r p [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 rp (The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7."The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri′ i.e.:
rp=(ri+ri')/2		 No.046 2014-08-08
r p [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 rp (Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetic average of the principal radii of curvature ri and r'i, i.e.: rp = [式]		 No.081 2012-07-13
R point [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 "R" point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. " "R" point" means a reference point defined for each seat by the manufacturer in relation to the vehicle’s structure, as indicated in Annex 6;		 No.094 2012-09-20
R point [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. Has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. Corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him.		 No.095 2015-07-10
R point [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 R point (seating reference point) Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "R point or seating reference point" means the point defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.4.		 No.125 2010-07-31
R point [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.014 2007-12-06
R point [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 "R" point" or "seating reference point" Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.016 2007-11-30
R point [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 R point Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.13. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in annex 3 to this Regulation;
[Annex 3] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES		 No.017 2006-12-27
R point [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.017 2006-12-27
R point [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 R point seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in annex 3 to this Regulation;		 No.017 2010-08-31
R point [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R" point or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by a vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.025 2010-08-14
R point [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 R point protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in Annex 4, paragraph 2.4.		 No.029 2010-11-20
R point [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 seating reference point (R point) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
R point [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 R point (seating reference point) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by a vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.046 2010-07-10
R point [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. The "R" point or "seating reference point" is the reference point specified by the manufacturer which:
1.2.1. has coordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
1.2.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/legs rotation ("H" point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat provided by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.061 2010-06-30
R point [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 ""R" point" or "seating reference point" Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.080 2010-06-30
R point [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 "R" point Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. " "R" point" means a reference point defined for each seat by the manufacturer in relation to the vehicle's structure, as indicated in annex 6;		 No.094 2010-05-28
R point [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.15. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means the centuple of the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height in mm by the number expressing the nominal section width in mm No.030 2008-07-30
Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.15. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height (H) by the number expressing the nominal section width (S1), both dimensions expressed in the same units; No.054 2008-07-11
Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height in millimetres by the number expressing the nominal section width in millimetres;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Ra [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means the centuple of the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height (H) by the number expressing the nominal section width (S 1 ), both dimensions expressed in the same units.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Radial [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Radial Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90 ° to the centre line of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt; No.030 2008-07-30
Radial [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Radial Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.2. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90 ° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilized by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt. No.054 2008-07-11
Radial [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Radial Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Radial [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Radial Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.3. "Radial" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Radial [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Radial 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Radial [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Radial Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Radial run out [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Radial run out 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Radial run out" means the variation in radius of the tyre measured around the outer circumference of the tread surface.		 No.108 2006-07-04
radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (Principal) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 ri and r'i (Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (ri) and (r'i)" means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in Annex 6, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface contained in a plane parallel to the greatest dimension of the mirror and passing through its centre and on the arc perpendicular to it;		 No.081 2012-07-13
radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (principal) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri) Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6. "The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the valuesobtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surfacepassing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2010-07-10
radius (Dynamic) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Dynamic radius (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Dynamic radius" means the dynamic loaded radius defined as the theoretical rolling circumference divided by 2R of the largest tyre to be used on the wheel as specified by the wheel manufacturer.		 No.124 2006-12-27
Radius of curvature [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Radius of curvature External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form
of the component under consideration.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Radius of curvature [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Radius of curvature external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form of the component under consideration		 No.026 2010-08-14
Radius of curvature [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Radius of curvature external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form of the component under consideration.		 No.061 2010-06-30
radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 rp (The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7."The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri′ i.e.:
rp=(ri+ri')/2		 No.046 2014-08-08
Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 rp (Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetic average of the principal radii of curvature ri and r'i, i.e.: rp = [式]		 No.081 2012-07-13
radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (principal) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2014-08-08
radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp) Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7. "The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri i.e.:
[式] rp =(ri + r'i)/2		 No.046 2010-07-10
radius of curvature of the constituent part of the mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12."The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.046 2014-08-08
radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12. "The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc ofthe circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear view mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.081 2012-07-13
rail (Cant-) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Cantrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Cantrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork above the side windows including the curved transition to the roof structures. In the rollover test the cantrail hits the ground first.		 No.066 2007-12-06
rail (Cant-) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Cantrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Cantrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork above the side windows including the curved transition to the roof structures. In the rollover test the cantrail (in the case of a double deck coach, the cantrail of the upper deck) hits the ground first.		 No.066 2011-03-30
rail (Fuel) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Fuel rail using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.72. "Fuel rail" means the pipe or duct that connects the fuel injection devices.		 No.110 2015-06-30
rail (Fuel) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Fuel rail LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.18. "Fuel rail" means a pipe or duct that connects the fuel injection devices;		 No.067 2008-03-14
rail (Waist-) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Waistrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Waistrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork below the side windows. In the rollover test the waistrail may be the second area to contact the ground after initial deformation of the vehicle cross-section.		 No.066 2007-12-06
rail (Waist-) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Waistrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Waistrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork below the side windows. In the rollover test the waistrail (in the case of a double deck coach, the waistrail of the upper deck) may be the second area to contact the ground after initial deformation of the vehicle cross-section.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Ramp [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Ramp" means a device to bridge the gap between the floor of a passenger compartment and the ground or kerb. In its position for use, it includes any surface that may move as part of the ramp deployment or be available for use only when the ramp is in its deployed position and over which a wheelchair is intended to travel.		 No.107 2015-06-18
ramp (Portable) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Portable ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Portable ramp" means a ramp that may be detached from the vehicle structure and capable of being deployed by a driver or crew member.		 No.107 2015-06-18
ramp (Portable) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Portable ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Portable ramp" means a ramp that may be detached from the vehicle structure and capable of being deployed by a driver or crew member.		 No.107 2006-12-27
ramp (Portable) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Portable ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Portable ramp" means a ramp that may be detached from the vehicle structure and capable of being deployed by a driver or crew member.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Ramp [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Ramp" means a device to bridge the gap between the floor of a passenger compartment and the ground or kerb.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Ramp [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Ramp Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Ramp" means a device to bridge the gap between the floor of a passenger compartment and the ground or kerb. In its position for use, it includes any surface that may move as part of the ramp deployment or be available for use only when the ramp is in its deployed position and over which a wheelchair is intended to travel.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Ramped modal steady state test cycle [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ramped modal steady state test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.68. "Ramped modal steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined speed and torque ramps between these modes;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Ramped steady state test cycle [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Ramped steady state test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. "Ramped steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined ramps between these modes (WHSC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
range (Electric) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Electric range CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electric range", for vehicles powered by an electric power train only or by a hybrid electric power train with off-vehicle charging, means distance that can be driven electrically on one fully charged battery (or other electric energy storage device) as measured according to the procedure described in Annex 9;		 No.101 2012-05-26
range (Electric) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Electric range CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Electric range", for vehicles powered by an electric power train only or by a hybrid electric power train with off-vehicle charging, means distance that can be driven electrically on one fully charged battery (or other electric energy storage device) as measured according to the procedure described in Annex 9.		 No.101 2007-06-19
range (gas, NG) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 NG gas range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "NG gas range" means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated November 1993;		 No.049 2008-04-12
range (gas, NG) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 NG gas range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "NG gas range" means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated November 1993;		 No.049 2010-08-31
range (OVC) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 OVC range CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "OVC range": the total distance covered during complete combined cycles run until the energy imparted by external charging of the battery (or other electric energy storage device) is depleted, as measured according to the procedure described in Annex 9;		 No.101 2012-05-26
range (speed, operating, engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
range (speed, operating, engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Range of pneumatic tyre (retreaded) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Range of retreaded pneumatic tyre [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Range of retreaded pneumatic tyre [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Range of tyre (pneumatic, retreaded) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.108 2006-07-04
rate (Burning) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Burning rate burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Burning rate" means the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to Annex 6 and/or Annex 8 to this Regulation and the time taken to burn this distance. It is expressed in millimetres per minute.		 No.108 2015-04-21
rate (Yaw) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Yaw rate Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Yaw rate" means the rate of change of the vehicle’s heading angle measured in degrees/second of rotation about a vertical axis through the vehicle’s centre of gravity.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
rate (Yaw) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Yaw rate Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Yaw rate" means the rate of change of the vehicle’s heading angle measured in degrees/second of rotation about a vertical axis through the vehicle’s centre of gravity.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Rate of departure [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Rate of departure Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Rate of departure" means the subject vehicle's approach velocity at a right angle to the visible lane marking at the warning issue point;		 No.130 2014-06-18
Rated engine power [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 (Rated) engine power Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "(Rated) engine power" means the engine power expressed in kW (ECE) and measured by the ECE method pursuant to Regulation No 85.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Rated engine speed [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 S (Rated engine speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.8. "Rated engine speed" means the engine speed at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power as stated by the manufacturer.
The symbol S denotes the numerical value of the rated engine speed expressed in revolutions per minute.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Rated engine speed [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Rated engine speed, S Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated engine speed, S" means the declared engine speed in min-1 (rpm) at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power pursuant to Regulation No 85. If the rated maximum net power is reached at several engine speeds, the highest engine speed shall be used.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Rated maximum net power [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 P n (Rated maximum net power) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.7. "Rated maximum net power" means the rated engine power as defined in ISO 4106:2004.
The symbol P n denotes the numerical value of the rated maximum net power expressed in kilowatts.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Rated net power [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Rated net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Rated net power" means engine net power as declared by the manufacturer at rated speed;		 No.120 2015-06-30
Rated net power [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Rated net power Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Rated net power" means engine net power as declared by the manufacturer at rated speed;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Rated speed [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Rated speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.13. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor as specified by the manufacturer in his sales and service literature, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer in his sales and service literature.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Rated speed [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Rated speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.69. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor, as designed by the manufacturer, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as designed by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Rated speed [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Rated speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor, as designed by the manufacturer, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
rated speed (Maximum) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Maximum rated speed Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.6 "Maximum rated speed" means maximum speed permitted by the governor at full load;		 No.024 2006-11-24
rated speed [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 rated speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "rated speed" means the maximum full load engine speed allowed by the governor, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer in paragraph 2. of Appendix 2 to Annex 1;		 No.049 2008-04-12
rated speed [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 rated speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "rated speed" means the maximum full load engine speed allowed by the governor, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer in paragraph 2. of Appendix 2 to Annex 1;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Rated speed [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Rated speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
Rated voltage [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Rated voltage Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. Rated voltage: voltage (in volts) marked on the LED light source;		 No.128 2014-05-29
Rated voltage [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Rated voltage Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Rated voltage": voltage (in volts) marked on the filament lamp.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Rated voltage [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Rated voltage Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.3. "Rated voltage": Input voltage marked on the ballast.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Rated wattage [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Rated wattage Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. "Rated wattage": wattage (in watts) marked on the filament lamp which may be incorporated into the international designation of the relevant category.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Rated wattage [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Rated wattage Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Rated wattage": Wattage marked on the gas-discharge light source and ballast.		 No.099 2010-06-30
rating (load, Maximum) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry.
2.33.1. For speeds lower or equal to 130 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the relevant load capacity index of the tyre as indicated in the table "Load capacity variation with speed" (see paragraph 2.27) with reference to the speed category symbol of the tyre and the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted.
2.33.2. For speeds above 130 km/h but not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the value of the mass associated with the load capacity index of the tyre.
2.33.3. For speeds above 210 km/h but not exceeding 270 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the percentage of the mass, associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, indicated in the table below with reference to the speed category symbol of the tyre and the maximum design speed of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted:
[表] Maximum speed km/h / Maximum Load Rating (%) (Speed Category Symbol V / Speed Category Symbol W )
210 / (100 / 100)
220 / (95 / 100)
--- / (--- / ---)
270 / ( (70) / 75 )
2.33.4. For speeds in excess of 270 km/h, the maximum load rating must not exceed the mass specified by the tyre manufacturer with reference to the speed capacity of the tyre.
For intermediate speeds between 270 km/h and the maximum speed permitted by the tyre manufacturer, a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating applies.		 No.075 2011-03-30
rating (load, Maximum) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum load rating Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass the tyre is rated to carry:
2.31.1. It must not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the relevant load capacity index of the tyre as indicated in the table "Load-capacity variation with speed" (see paragraph 2.30 above), with reference to the category of use, the speed category symbol of the tyre and the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted.		 No.106 2010-09-30
rating (load, Maximum) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Maximum load rating 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Maximum load rating" means the maximum mass which the tyre is rated to support.
2.35.1. For speeds not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the value corresponding to the
load index for the tyre.
2.35.2. For speeds greater than 210 km/h but not exceeding 300 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, given in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted: [表]
Tyre speed symbol / Maximum speed (km/h) / Maximum load rating ( %)
V / 210～240 / 100～91.0
W / 240～270 / 100～85
Y / 270～300 / 100～85
For intermediate maximum speeds a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating is permissible		 No.108 2006-07-04
ratio weighting factor (Gear) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Gear ratio weighting factor k Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gear ratio weighting factor k" means a dimensionless numerical quantity used to combine the test results of two gear ratios for the acceleration test and the constant speed test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
ratios (gear, Locked) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Locked gear ratios Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Locked gear ratios" means the control of transmission such that the transmission gear cannot change during a test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Reagent [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Reagent Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.53. "Reagent" means any medium that is stored on-board the vehicle in a tank and provided to the exhaust after-treatment system (if required) upon request of the emission control system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Reagent [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Reagent Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.70. "Reagent" means any consumable or non-recoverable medium required and used for the effective operation of the exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
reagent [REG. No 692/2008] 　 reagent emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 27. "reagent" means any product other than fuel that is stored on-board the vehicle and is provided to the exhaust aftertreatment system upon request of the emission control system; REG. No 692/2008
reagent [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 reagent Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "reagent" means any medium that is stored on-board the vehicle in a tank and provided to the exhaust aftertreatment system (if required) upon request of the emission control system		 No.049 2008-04-12
reagent [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 reagent Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "reagent" means any medium that is stored on-board the vehicle in a tank and provided to the exhaust aftertreatment system (if required) upon request of the emission control system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
rear [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 "Front" and "rear" Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2015-06-18
rear [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 "Front" and "rear" Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2006-12-27
rear [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 "Front" and "rear" Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
rear door (Side) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Side rear door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Side rear door" is a door that, in a side view, has 50 per cent or more of its opening area to the rear of the rearmost point on the driver’s seat back, when the driver’s seat is adjusted to its most vertical and rearward position, providing direct access for passengers to enter or depart the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Rear end collision alert signal [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision		 No.048 2011-12-06
rear fog lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 rear fog lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.14. rear fog lamp
means the lamp used to render the vehicle more readily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Rear fog lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.20. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog; No.048 2008-05-23
Rear fog lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.16. "Rear fog lamp" means the lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Rear fog lamp [No.038 2010-06-12] 　 Rear fog lamp rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear by giving a red signal of greater intensity than the rear position (side) lamps		 No.038 2010-06-12
Rear fog lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear fog lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.20. "Rear fog lamp" means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Rear fog lamp of different type [No.038 2010-06-12] 　 Rear fog lamps of different types rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Rear fog lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
(c) the variable intensity control, if any.
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.038 2010-06-12
rear fog light [No.038 2001-06-25] 　 rear fog light Rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "rear fog light" means a light used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear by giving a red signal of greater intensity than the rear position (side) lights;		 No.038 2001-06-25
rear fog lights of different type [No.038 2001-06-25] 　 rear fog lights of different types Rear fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. rear fog lights of different "types" are rear fog lights which differ in such essential respects as
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the category of lamp.		 No.038 2001-06-25
Rear fog-lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Rear fog-lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.17. Rear fog-lamp
"Rear fog-lamp" means the lamp used to render the tractor more readily visible from the rear in dense fog.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Rear fog-lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear fog-lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.18. "Rear fog-lamp" means the lamp used to make the tractor more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;		 No.086 2010-09-30
rear marking plate (SMV) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 SMV rear marking plate Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "SMV rear marking plate", a triangular plate with truncated corners with a characteristic pattern faced with retro-reflective and fluorescent material or devices (class 1); or with retro-reflective materials or devices only		 No.069 2010-07-31
rear marking plates of different type (SMV) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 SMV rear marking plates of different types Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Definition of "type"
SMV rear marking plates of different types means SMV marking plates which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. The trade name or mark.
2.7.2. The characteristics of the retro-reflective material or devices.
2.7.3. The characteristics of the fluorescent material.
2.7.4. The parts affecting the properties of the retro-reflective material or devices.		 No.069 2010-07-31
rear panel (Cab) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Cab rear panel external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab rear panel" means the rearmost part of the external surface of the driver and passenger compartment. Where it is not possible to determine the position of the rear cab panel, for the purposes of this Regulation it would be deemed to be the vertical transversal plane situated 50 cm to the rear of the ‘R’ point of the driver seat, with the seat, if adjustable, located at its rearmost driving position (see Annex 3). However, the manufacturer may, with the agreement of the technical services, request an alternative distance if 50 cm can be shown as being inappropriate for a particular vehicle ( 2 );		 No.061 2010-06-30
Rear position (side) lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Rear position (side) lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.16. Rear position (side) lamp
"Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the rear32		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Rear position (side) lamp [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Rear position (side) lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 1997-07-30
Rear position (side) lamp [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Rear position (side) lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 2010-06-12
Rear position (side) lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear position (side) lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.17. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the rear;		 No.086 2010-09-30
rear position lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 rear position lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.12. rear position lamp
means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Rear position lamp [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Rear position lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.007 2014-09-30
Rear position lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.15. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear; No.048 2008-05-23
Rear position lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Rear position lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.12. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Rear position lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear position lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.15. "Rear position lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;		 No.048 2011-12-06
rear position lamp of different type [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
rear position lamp of different type (Front and) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
Rear registration plate illuminating device [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.10. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Rear registration plate illuminating device [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Rear-registration-plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.13. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical component.		 No.074 2013-06-18
Rear registration plate illuminating device [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear-registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.13. "Rear-registration plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;		 No.048 2011-12-06
rear registration plate illuminating device of different type [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
Rear registration plate lamp [No.004 2009-01-31] 　 Rear registration plate lamp Rear registration plate lamp 1.1. "Rear registration plate lamp" means the device for the illumination of rear registration plates, hereinafter called ‘illuminating device’, which illuminates the rear registration plate by reflection. For the approval of this device, the illumination of the space to be occupied by the plate is determined. No.004 2009-01-31
Rear registration plate lamp of different type [No.004 2009-01-31] 　 Rear registration plate lamps of different types Rear registration plate lamp 1.3. "Rear registration plate lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.).		 No.004 2009-01-31
Rear registration-plate lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Rear registration-plate lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.14. Rear registration-plate lamp
"Rear registration-plate lamp" means the device used to illuminate the space intended to accommodate the rear registration plate; it may consist of different optical elements		 Directive 2009/061/EC
rear registration-plate lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 rear registration-plate lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.17. rear registration-plate lamp
means the device used to illuminate the space intended to accommodate the rear registration plate; it may consist of several optical elements;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
rear seat (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle rear seats Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
"Group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons.
"Vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person.
"Vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them.
"Vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.		 No.129 2014-03-29
rear seats (vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 vehicle rear seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
rear seats (vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 vehicle rear seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats;		 No.044 2011-09-09
rear underrun protection (RUP) [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 rear underrun protection (RUP) RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 22.1.3. "rear underrun protection (RUP)" means the presence at the rear of the vehicle of either:
22.1.3.1. a special RUPD; or
22.1.3.2. body work, chassis parts or other components, such that, by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as totally or partially fulfilling the function of the RUPD.		 No.058 2008-08-30
Rear view mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Rear-view mirror" means any device intended to give a clear view to the rear;		 No.081 2012-07-13
rear view mirror (Class of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Class of rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Class of rear-view mirrors" means all devices having one or several features or functions in common.
The rear-view mirrors mentioned in this Regulation are grouped in Class "L".		 No.081 2012-07-13
rear view mirror (constituent parts of the, Radius of curvature of the) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.081 2012-07-13
rear view mirror (exterior, Main) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Main exterior rear-view mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(b) Classes II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in para graphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
rear view mirror (Interior) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Interior rear-view mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(a) Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
rear view mirror (vehicle as regards, Type of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.2. "Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors" means vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
13.2.1. The geometrical features of the vehicle, liable to influence the installation of rear-view mirrors,
13.2.2. The positions and types of rear-view mirror specified.		 No.081 2012-07-13
Rear view mirror type [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Rear-view mirror type Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Rear-view mirror type" means devices which do not differ in respect of the following main characteristics:
2.2.1. The dimensions and radius of curvature of the rear-view mirror reflecting surface,
2.2.2. The design, shape or materials of the rear-view mirrors, including the connection with the vehicle;		 No.081 2012-07-13
rear wheel (lockup of the, Simultaneous) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2016-02-18
rearmost [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 rearmost Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Rear-registration plate illuminating device [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Rear-registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.13. "Rear-registration plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components; No.048 2008-05-23
Rear-registration-plate lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear-registration-plate lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.15. "Rear-registration-plate lamp" means the device used to illuminate the space intended to accommodate the rear registration plate; it may consist of several optical components;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Rear-view mirror [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Rear-view mirror" means any device intended to give, within the field of vision geometrically defined in point 2.5 below, a clear view to the rear which, within reasonable limits, is not blocked by component parts of the tractor or by the occupants of the tractor itself. The additional mirrors and rear-view mirrors designed in order to monitor the implements while working in the fields are not necessarily open to component type-approval but must be located in accordance with the setting requirements contained in points 2.3.3 to 2.3.5.		 Directive 2009/059/EC
rear-view mirror (Exterior rear-view mirror) [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Exterior rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) 1.3. "Exterior rear-view mirror" means a device as defined in point 1.1 which is mounted on any part of the external surface of a tractor Directive 2009/059/EC
rear-view mirror (Interior rear-view mirror) [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Interior rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) 1.2. "Interior rear-view mirror" means a device as defined in point 1.1 which is fitted inside the cab or frame of a tractor. Directive 2009/059/EC
rearward [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 rearward Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Front" and "rear" means the front or rear of the vehicle according to the normal direction of travel and the terms; "forward", "foremost", "rearward" and "rearmost" etc. shall be construed accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Rearward facing [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Rearward-facing Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Rearward facing [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Rearward-facing Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.094 2012-09-20
Rearward facing seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Rearward-facing seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.3. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Rearward facing seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Rearward-facing seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.3. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than +10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.18.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Rearward facing seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Rearward-facing seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat" means a structure likely to be anchored to the vehicle structure, including its trim and attachment fittings, intended to be used in a vehicle, and to seat one or more adult persons. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.5.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.080 2013-08-24
rearward field of vision (Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Rearward-facing [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Rearward-facing Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle		 No.016 2007-11-30
Rearward-facing [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Rearward-facing Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Rearward-facing [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Rearward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Rearward-facing [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Rearward-facing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Rearward-facing [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Rearward-facing Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Rearward-facing" means facing in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the vehicle.		 No.094 2010-05-28
Rearward-facing seat [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Rearward-facing seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.3.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which, with regard to its alignment with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle, does not meet either of the definitions given in paragraph 2.3.1 or 2.3.2 above;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Rear-wheel steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Rear-wheel steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.2. "Rear-wheel steering equipment" in which only the wheels of the rear axle(s) are steered. This includes all wheels which are steered in the same direction.d No.079 2008-05-27
Recalibration [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Recalibration" means a fine tuning of a natural gas engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;		 No.049 2013-06-24
recalibration [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "recalibration" means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;		 No.049 2008-04-12
recalibration [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "recalibration" means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Re-capping [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Re-capping Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
RECAS [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision		 No.048 2011-12-06
receiver (diameter of the, Angular) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the receiver as seen from the reference centre (β1 = β2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
receptacle [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Filling unit or receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.37. "Filling unit or receptacle" means a device fitted in the vehicle used to fill the container or tank in the filling station.		 No.110 2015-06-30
receptacle (Filling unit or) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Filling unit or receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.23. "Filling unit or receptacle" means a device fitted in the vehicle external or internal (engine compartment) used to fill the container in the filling station.		 No.110 2011-05-07
receptacle (filling, LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG filling receptacle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.74. "LNG filling receptacle" means device connected to a vehicle or storage system which receives the LNG fuelling nozzle and permits safe transfer of fuel. The receptacle consists as minimum from a receptacle body and from a check valve mounted inside the body.		 No.110 2015-06-30
rechargeable energy storage system [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "RESS" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Rechargeable energy storage system [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Rechargeable energy storage system [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Rechargeable energy storage system [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 REESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Rechargeable energy storage system [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Rechargeable Energy Storage System [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.
The REESS may include subsystem(s) together with the necessary ancillary systems for physical support, thermal management, electronic control and enclosures.		 No.100 2015-03-31
rechargeable energy storage system (charging the, Coupling system for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
rechargeable energy storage system (Coupling system for charging the) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Rechargeable Energy Storage System (Coupling system for charging the) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Reciprocally incorporated [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Reciprocally incorporated Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Reciprocally incorporated [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Reciprocally incorporated Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Reciprocally incorporated lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.5. Reciprocally incorporated lamps
"Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources (or a single light source operating under different conditions), totally or partially common lenses and a common lamp body.efle		 Directive 2009/061/EC
reciprocally incorporated lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 reciprocally incorporated lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.6. reciprocally incorporated lamps
means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (e.g. optical, mechanical or electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces and a common lamp body;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Reciprocally incorporated lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.6. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common illuminating surfaces (1) and a common lamp body; No.048 2008-05-23
Reciprocally incorporated lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.6. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and a common lamp body;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Reciprocally incorporated lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Reciprocally incorporated lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.5. "Reciprocally incorporated lamps" means devices having separate light sources (or a single light source operating under different conditions), totally or partially common lenses and a common lamp body;		 No.086 2010-09-30
recirculation (gas, Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust-gas recirculation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.34. "Exhaust-gas recirculation" means a technology that reduces emissions by routing exhaust gases that have been exhausted from the combustion chamber(s) back into the engine to be mixed with incoming air before or during combustion. The use of valve timing to increase the amount of residual exhaust gas in the combustion chamber(s) that is mixed with incoming air before or during combustion is not considered exhaust-gas recirculation for the purposes of this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Recommended cold inflation pressure [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec )" means the pressure recommended for each tyre position by the vehicle manufacturer, for the intended service conditions (e.g. speed and load) of the given vehicle, as defined on the vehicle placard and/or the vehicle owner's manual.		 No.064 2010-11-26
recording (Updating) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Updating-recording Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.92. "Updating-recording" means the frequency at which the analyser provides new, current, values;		 No.096 2014-03-22
recording device (camera-monitor-, surveillance) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 surveillance camera-monitor-recording device Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13. "surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 which can befitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than thosespecified in paragraph 15.2.4 or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
recording device (monitor, camera, Surveillance) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13."Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Red (Daytime colour of the fluorescent) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Red (Daytime colour of the fluorescent) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. Daytime colour of the fluorescent a device
2.32.1. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] FR12,FR23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Red (Daytime colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Red (Daytime colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.3. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Red (Night-time Colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Red (Night-time Colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Red [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Red Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] R12,R23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
reduced mobility (Passenger with) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2015-06-18
reduced mobility (Passenger with) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2006-12-27
reduced mobility (Passenger with) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Passenger with reduced mobility Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger with reduced mobility" means all passengers who have a difficulty when using public transport, such as disabled people (including people with sensory and intellectual impairments, and wheelchair users, people with limb impairments, people of small stature, people with heavy luggage, elderly people, pregnant women, people with shopping trolleys, and people with children (including children seated in pushchairs).		 No.107 2010-09-29
reduced mobility (Passenger, Wheelchair user) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2006-12-27
reducing device (Tension) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Tension-reducing device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. Tension-reducing device
A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.		 No.016 2015-11-20
reducing device (Tension-) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Tension-reducing device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. Tension-reducing device : A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.		 No.016 2007-11-30
reducing device (Tension-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Tension-reducing device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. Tension-reducing device
A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.		 No.016 2011-09-09
reduction system (Noise) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Noise reduction system Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Noise reduction system" means a complete set of components necessary for limiting the noise made by a motor vehicle and its exhaust;		 No.051 2007-05-30
reduction system component (Noise) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Noise reduction system component Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Noise reduction system component" means one of the individual constituent parts whose assembly constitutes the noise reduction system.
These components are, in particular: the exhaust piping(s), the expansion chamber(s), the silencer(s) proper.
2.5.1. The air filter is considered as a component only if its presence is essential to ensure observance of the prescribed soundlevel limits.
2.5.2. Manifolds are not considered components of the noise reduction system.		 No.051 2007-05-30
reduction systems of different type (Noise) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Noise reduction systems of different types Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Noise reduction systems of different types" means noise reduction systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. that their components as specified in paragraph 4.1, bear different trade names or marks;
2.4.2. that the characteristics of the materials constituting a component are different or that the components differ in shape or size, a change in the plating procedure (galvanisation, aluminium coating, etc.) is not deemed to produce a difference of type;
2.4.3. that the operating principles of at least one component are different;
2.4.4. that their components are assembled differently;
2.4.5. that the number of the intake and/or exhaust silencers is different.		 No.051 2007-05-30
REESS [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 REESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
REESS [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.
The REESS may include subsystem(s) together with the necessary ancillary systems for physical support, thermal management, electronic control and enclosures.		 No.100 2015-03-31
REESS (Coupling system for charging the) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
REESS (Type of) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Type of REESS Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Type of REESS" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) The manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) The chemistry, capacity and physical dimensions of its cells;
(c) The number of cells, the mode of connection of the cells and the physical support of the cells;
(d) The construction, materials and physical dimensions of the casing; and
(e) The necessary ancillary devices for physical support, thermal management and electronic control.		 No.100 2015-03-31
reference (Centre of) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;		 No.053 2013-06-18
reference (Centre of) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;		 No.074 2013-06-18
reference (Centre of) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Reference acceleration [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Reference acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference acceleration" means the required acceleration during the acceleration test on the test track.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Reference antenna [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Reference antenna suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.6. "Reference antenna" for the frequency range 20 to 80 MHz: means a shortened balanced dipole being a half waveresonant dipole at 80 MHz, and for the frequency range above 80 MHz: means a balanced half wave resonantdipole tuned to the measurement frequency.		 Directive 2009/064/EC
reference axis [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Axis of reference or reference axis Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
reference axis [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Axis of reference (or reference axis) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Reference axis [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Reference axis (symbol R) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.6. "Reference axis (symbol R)" means a designated line segment originating on the reference centre which is used to describe the angular position of the retro-reflective device;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Reference axis [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Reference axis Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. Reference axis: an axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the LED light sources are referred;		 No.128 2014-05-29
reference axis (System) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 System reference axis Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1. below;		 No.123 2006-12-27
reference axis (System) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 System reference axis Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1 below;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Reference axis [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference axis Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Reference axis": an axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the filament lamp are referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
reference axis [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 "Axis of reference" or "reference axis" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Reference axis [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Reference axis Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.6. "Reference axis", a designated line segment originating on the reference centre which is used to describe the angular position of the retro-reflective device.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Reference axis [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Reference axis Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Reference axis": An axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the gas-discharge light source are referred.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Reference braking force [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Reference braking forces [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Reference centre [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Reference centre Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.1. "Reference centre" means a point on or near a retro-reflective area which is designated to be the centre of the device for the purpose of specifying its performance;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Reference centre [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Reference centre Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.1. "Reference centre", a point on or near a retro-reflective area which is designated to be the centre of the device for the purpose of specifying its performance.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Reference data [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Reference data Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship,
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Reference data [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Reference data Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship,
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Reference data [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 Reference data Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship,
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.017 2006-12-27
Reference data [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Reference data head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship;
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.025 2010-08-14
Reference data [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Reference data protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship;
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Reference data [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Reference data Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R2 point and their relationship;
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Reference data [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Reference data Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship;
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Reference energy [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Reference energy (ER) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Reference energy" (ER) means the potential energy of the vehicle type to be approved, measured in relation to the horizontal lower level of the ditch, at the starting, unstable position of the rollover process.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Reference energy [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 ER (Reference energy) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Reference energy" (ER) means the potential energy of the vehicle type to be approved, measured in relation to the horizontal lower level of the ditch, at the starting, unstable position of the rollover process.		 No.066 2011-03-30
reference fuel [No.083 2012-02-15A10] 　 reference fuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 10] SPECIFICATIONS OF REFERENCE FUELS
1. SPECIFICATIONS OF REFERENCE FUELS FOR TESTING VEHICLES TO THE EMISSION LIMITS
1.1. Technical data on the reference fuel to be used for testing vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines
Type: Petrol (E5) : [表] Parameter / Unit / Limits (Minimum / Maximum) / Test method
Type: Ethanol (E85) : [表], Type: Diesel fuel (B5) [表], Type: Petrol (E5) [表],
[ANNEX 10A]
1. SPECIFICATIONS OF GASEOUS REFERENCE FUELS		 No.083 2012-02-15
reference grid (3D) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Three-dimensional reference grid Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Three-dimensional reference grid" means a reference system which consists of a vertical longitudinal plane X-Z, a horizontal plane X-Y and a vertical transverse plane Y-Z (see Annex 4, appendix, figure 6); the grid is used to determine the dimensional relationships between the position of design points on drawings and their positions on the actual vehicle. The procedure for situating the vehicle relative to the grid is specified in Annex 4; all coordinates referred to ground zero shall be based on a vehicle in running order ( 1 ) plus one front-seat passenger, the mass of the passenger being 75 kg ±1 per cent.
2.3.1. Vehicles fitted with suspension enabling their ground clearance to be adjusted shall be tested under the normal conditions of use specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Reference height [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Reference height strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Reference height" means the height of the top of the seat above the reference plane;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Reference height [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Reference height Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Reference height" means the height of the top of the seat above the reference plane;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Reference limit [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Reference limit suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.5. "Reference limit" means the nominal level to which type-approval and conformity of production limit values arereferenced		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Reference line [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Reference line Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.14. "Reference line" means the line on the manikin reproduced in annex 3, appendix 1, figure 1, to this Regulation.
[Annex 3 - Appendix 1] DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL "H" POINT MACHINE ∗/(3-D H machine)		 No.017 2006-12-27
Reference line [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Reference line seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference line" means the line on the manikin reproduced in annex 3, appendix 1, figure 1, to this Regulation.		 No.017 2010-08-31
Reference line [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Reference line Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Reference line" means a straight line which, either on a test manikin having the weight and dimensions of a fiftieth percentile adult male or on a test manikin having identical characteristics, passes through the joint of the leg with the pelvis and the joint of the neck with the thorax. On the manikin reproduced in annex 3 to this Regulation, for determining the H point of the seat, the reference line is that shown in fig. 1 in the appendix to that annex;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Reference line [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Reference line head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Reference line" means a straight line which, either on a test manikin having the weight and dimensions of a fiftieth percentile adult male or on a test manikin having identical characteristics, passes through the joint of the leg with the pelvis and the joint of the neck with the thorax. On the manikin reproduced in Annex 3 to this Regulation, for determining the H point of the seat, the reference line is that shown in figure 1 in the appendix to that Annex;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Reference luminous flux [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference luminous flux Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Reference luminous flux": specified luminous flux of a standard filament lamp to which the optical characteristics of a lighting device shall be referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
reference marks (Primary) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Primary reference marks Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Primary reference marks" means holes, surfaces, marks and identification signs on the vehicle body. The type of reference mark used and the position of each mark relative to the X, Y and Z coordinates of the three-dimensional reference grid and to a design ground plane shall be specified by the vehicle manufacturer. These marks may be the control points used for body- assembly purposes.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Reference mass [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Reference mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.55. "Reference mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order less the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg and increased by a uniform mass of 100 kg;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Reference mass [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Reference mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Reference mass" means the "unladen mass" of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg for test according to Annexes 4a and 8;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Reference mass [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Reference mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg for test according to Annexes 4a and 8 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Reference mass [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Reference mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a mass of 100 kg (that is the mass of the side impact dummy and its instrumentation).		 No.095 2015-07-10
Reference mass [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Reference mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg;		 No.101 2012-05-26
reference mass [REG. No 595/2009] 　 reference mass emissions 15. "reference mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order less the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg and increased by a uniform mass of 100 kg; REG. No 595/2009
Reference mass [No.049 2011-07-08] 　 Reference mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.64. "Reference mass" means the "unladen mass" of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg for test according to Annexes 4A and 8 of Regulation No 83.		 No.049 2011-07-08
Reference mass [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Reference mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a mass of 100 kg (that is the mass of the side impact dummy and its instrumentation);		 No.095 2007-11-30
Reference mass [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Reference mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Reference mass" means the unladen mass of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Reference plane [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Reference plane strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Reference plane" means the plane passing through the points of contact of the heels of the manikin, used for the determination of the H point and the actual angle of torso for the seating position of motor vehicles according to the prescriptions of Annex 4;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Reference plane [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Reference plane Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. Reference plane: a plane defined with reference to the cap perpendicular to the reference axis and to which certain dimensions of the LED light sources are referred.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Reference plane [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Reference plane Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. "Reference plane": a plane defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the filament lamp are referred.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Reference plane [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Reference plane external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Reference plane" means a horizontal plane passing through the centre of the front wheels or a horizontal plane situated at the height of 50 cm above the ground, whichever is lower;		 No.061 2010-06-30
Reference plane [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Reference plane Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Reference plane" means the plane passing through the points of contact of the heels of the manikin, used for the determination of the H point and the actual angle of torso for the seating position of motor vehicles according to the prescriptions of annex 4;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Reference plane [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Reference plane Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. "Reference plane": a plane defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the gas-discharge light source are referred.		 No.099 2010-06-30
reference point (seating) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. Has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. Corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him.		 No.095 2015-07-10
reference point (seating) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.014 2007-12-06
reference point (seating) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 "R" point" or "seating reference point" Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.016 2007-11-30
reference point (seating) [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.017 2006-12-27
reference point (seating) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 seating reference point (R point) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in Annex 4, paragraph 2.4.		 No.029 2010-11-20
reference point (seating) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 seating reference point (R point) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
reference point (seating) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 R point (seating reference point) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by a vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.046 2010-07-10
reference point (seating) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. The "R" point or "seating reference point" is the reference point specified by the manufacturer which:
1.2.1. has coordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
1.2.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/legs rotation ("H" point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat provided by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.061 2010-06-30
reference point (seating) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 ""R" point" or "seating reference point" Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.080 2010-06-30
reference point (seating) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him;		 No.095 2007-11-30
reference point (seating) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 R point (seating reference point) Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "R point or seating reference point" means the point defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.4.		 No.125 2010-07-31
reference point (Viewing) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Viewing reference point Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.11. "Viewing reference point" means the point linked to the vehicle to which the prescribed field ofvision is related. This point is the projection on the ground of the intersection of a vertical planepassing through the driver’s ocular points with a plane parallel to the median longitudinal planeof the vehicle situated 20 cm outside the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Reference point [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Reference point Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Reference point" means a point which is defined as follows:
2.11.1. Category M1, N1:
- for front engine vehicles: the front end of the vehicle;
- for mid engine vehicles: the centre of the vehicle;
- for rear engine vehicles: the rear end of the vehicle.
2.11.2. Category M2, M3, N2, N3:
the border of the engine closest to the front of the vehicle.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Reference point [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Reference point Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" means the point which is situated in the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the seat, at a position 700 mm along the vertical above the line of intersection of that plane with the surface of the seat and 270 mm — in the direction of the pelvis support — from the vertical plane tangential to the front edge of the seat surface and perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor (see figure 1); the reference point as thus determined applies to an empty seat adjusted in the average position prescribed by the tractor manufacturer;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Reference point [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Reference point Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" means the point which is situated in the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the seat, at a position 700 mm along the vertical above the line of intersection of that plane with the surface of the seat and 270 mm – in the direction of the pelvis support – from the vertical plane tangential to the front edge of the seat surface and perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor (see figure 1); the reference point as thus determined applies to an empty seat adjusted in the average position prescribed by the tractor manufacturer.		 No.071 2010-07-31
Reference point of the seat [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Reference point of the seat (H point) Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" of the seat (H point) (see annex 3 to this Regulation) means the trace, in a vertical plane longitudinal in relation to the seat, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the leg and the torso of a human body represented by a manikin;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Reference point of the seat [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Reference point of the seat (H point) head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" of the seat ("H point") (see Annex 3 to this Regulation) means the trace, in a vertical plane longitudinal in relation to the seat, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the leg and the torso of a human body represented by a manikin;		 No.025 2010-08-14
reference speed [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 reference speed (nref) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "reference speed (nref)" means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalizing the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Appendix 2 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
reference speed [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 reference speed (nref) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "reference speed (nref)" means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalizing the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Appendix 2 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
reference system (3D) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.014 2007-12-06
reference system (3D) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.016 2007-11-30
reference system (3D) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Three dimensional reference system Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.017 2006-12-27
reference system (3D) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Three-dimensional reference system head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex;		 No.025 2010-08-14
reference system (3D) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three dimensional reference system protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
reference system (3D) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.046 2010-07-10
reference system (3D) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.080 2010-06-30
reference test tyre (Standard) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 SRTT (Standard reference test tyre) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Standard reference test tyre" (SRTT) means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) standards E1136-93 (2003) (size P195/75R14).		 No.117 2011-11-23
Reference zone [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Reference zone safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head form apparatus, as described in Regulation No 21, Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that Annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Reference zone [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Reference zone Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, described in Regulation No 21 Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
reference zone [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 reference zone Interior fittings 2.3. "reference zone" is the head impact zone as defined in Annex I to this Regulation, or at the choice of the manufacturer, according to Annex VIII, excluding the following areas: (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.3 and 2.3.1);
2.3.1. the area bounded by the forward horizontal projection of a circle circumscribing the outer limits of the steering control, increased by a peripheral band 127 mm in width; this area is bounded below by the horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the steering control when the latter is in the position for driving straight ahead. (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.3 and 2.3.1);
2.3.2. the part of the surface of the instrument panel comprised between the edge of the area specified in paragraph 2.3.1 above and the nearest inner side-wall of the vehicle; this part of the surface is bounded below by the horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the steering control; and (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.3 and 2.3.1);
2.3.3. the windscreen side pillars; (see Annex 10, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.3 and 2.3.1);		 No.021 2008-07-16
Reference zone [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Reference zone strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Reference zone", means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the headform apparatus, described in Regulation No 21, Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to its maximum length of 840 mm and its minimum length of 736 mm for residual limitation of said space;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Reference zone [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Reference zone Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the headform apparatus, as described in Regulation No 21, annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm.		 No.014 2007-12-06
reference zone [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 reference zone safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, as described in Regulation No 21, Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that Annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Reference zone [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Reference zone Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, described in Regulation No 21 Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm		 No.016 2007-11-30
Reference zone [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Reference zone Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, described in Regulation No 21 Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that Annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Reference zone [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Reference zone Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the headform apparatus, described in Regulation No 21, annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex of Regulation No 21 and set to its maximum length of 840 mm and its minimum length of 736 mm for residual limitation of said space.		 No.080 2010-06-30
reflected light of the device (Colour of the) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.5. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 of Regulation No 48.		 No.104 2014-03-14
reflected light of the device (Colour of the) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflected light of the device (Colour of the) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Colour of the reflected light of the device Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.4. "Colour of the reflected light of the device." The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 and 2.31 of Regulation No 48.		 No.069 2010-07-31
reflecting device (Retro) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Retro-reflecting device" means an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro- reflecting optical units.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflecting device (retro, Angular diameter of the) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflecting device (Retro, Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA. (Retro-reflecting device) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Retro-reflecting devices are divided into three classes according to their photometric characteristics: Class IA or IB, Class IIIA or IIIB, and Class IVA.
2.14. Retro-reflecting devices of Class IB and IIIB are devices combined with other signal lamps which are not watertight according to Annex 8, paragraph 1.1, and which are integrated into the body of a vehicle.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflecting device (retro, Illumination of the) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Illumination of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Illumination of the retro-reflecting device" is the abbreviated expression used conventionally to designate the illumination measured in a plane perpendicular to the incident rays and passing through the centre of reference.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflecting device (retro, type of) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 type of "retro-reflecting device" Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. A type of "retro-reflecting device" is defined by the models and descriptive literature submitted with the application for approval. Retro-reflecting devices can be considered as belonging to the same type if they have one or more ‘retro-reflecting optical units’ which are identical with those of the standard model, or if not identical are symmetrical and suitable for mounting one on the left and one on the right side of the vehicle, and if their other parts differ from those of the standard model only in ways not affecting the properties to which this Regulation applies.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflecting optical unit (Retro) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflecting optical unit Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Retro-reflecting optical unit" means a combination of optical components producing retro- reflection.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflecting surface (Centre of the) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Centre of the reflecting surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11."Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.		 No.046 2014-08-08
reflecting surface (Centre of the) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Centre of the reflecting surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11. "Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.		 No.046 2010-07-10
reflecting surface (curvature at one point on the, radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 rp (The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7."The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri′ i.e.:
rp=(ri+ri')/2		 No.046 2014-08-08
reflecting surface (curvature at one point on the, radius of, principal) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2014-08-08
reflection (Retro) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Retro-reflection Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Retro-reflection" means the reflection in which luminous flux is returned in directions close to the direction from which it came, this property being maintained even over wide variations of the direction of the luminous flux.
2.2.1. "Retro-reflective marking material" means a surface or a device from which, when directionally illuminated, a relatively large portion of the incident radiation is retro-reflected.		 No.104 2014-03-14
reflection (Retro-) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflection Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Retro-reflection" means the reflection in which light is reflected in directions close to the direction from which it came. This property is maintained over wide variations of the illumination angle.		 No.003 2011-12-06
reflection (Retro-) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Retro-reflection Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Retro-reflection
Reflection in which radiation is returned in directions close to the direction from which it came, this property being maintained even over wide variations of the direction of the incident radiation:
2.2.1. "Retro-reflective material", a surface or device from which, when directionally irradiated, a relatively large portion of the incident radiation is retroreflected.
2.2.2. "Retro-reflective device", an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro-reflective optical units.		 No.069 2010-07-31
reflection (retro, Coefficient of) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R') Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R′)" means the quotient of the coefficient of luminous intensity R of a plane retro-reflecting surface and its area A
[式]		 No.104 2014-03-14
reflector (Retro) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.13. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
For the purpose of this Regulation, retro-reflecting number plates are not considered as retro- reflectors;		 No.053 2013-06-18
reflector (Retro) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.9. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
For the purpose of this Regulation, retro-reflecting number plates are not considered as retro- reflectors:		 No.074 2013-06-18
reflector (Retro) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.16. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source.
For the purposes of this Regulation the following are not considered as retro-reflectors:
2.7.16.1. Retro-reflecting number plates;
2.7.16.2. The retro-reflecting signals mentioned in the ADR (European Agreement concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods by road);
2.7.16.3. Other retro-reflective plates and signals which shall be used to comply with national requirements for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation;
2.7.16.4. Retro-Reflecting materials approved as Class D or E according to Regulation No 104 and used for other purposes in compliance with national requirements, e.g. advertising;		 No.048 2011-12-06
reflector (Retro) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Retro reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.22. "Retro reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a tractor by reflection of light emanating from a light source unconnected with the vehicle, the observer being situated near that source. For the purpose of this Regulation, the following are not considered as retro reflectors:
retro-reflecting number plates;
other plates and retro-reflecting signals which must be used to comply with a Contracting Party’s specifications for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation.		 No.086 2010-09-30
reflector sample (retro, diameter of the, Angular) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
Reflex reflector [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Reflex reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.20. Reflex reflector
"Reflex reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a tractor by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the tractor, the observer being situated near the source.
For the purposes of this Directive the following are not considered as reflex reflectors:
- retro-reflecting number plates,
- other plates and retro-reflecting signals which must be used to comply with a Member State's specifications for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation		 Directive 2009/061/EC
reflex reflector (Illuminating surface of a) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.3. "Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector" (paragraph 2.5.22) means the orthogonal projection of the reflecting surface of the retro reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and bounded by planes touching the outer edges of the light projection surface of the retro reflector and parallel to this axis. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only vertical and horizontal planes shall be used;		 No.086 2010-09-30
regenerating system (Periodically) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Periodically regenerating system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 13 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type Approval Authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in paragraph 5.3.1.4 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the Technical Service;		 No.083 2012-02-15
regenerating system (Periodically) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Periodically regenerating system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 13 to this Regulation does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the Type Approval Authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in paragraph 5.3.1.4 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the Technical Service.		 No.083 2015-07-03
regenerating system (Periodically) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Periodically regenerating system CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during the vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system, which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 10 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type-approval authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emission of CO 2 does not exceed the declared value by more than 4 per cent after agreement of the technical service.		 No.101 2012-05-26
regenerating system (Periodically) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Periodically regenerating system CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Periodically regenerating system" means an anti-pollution device (e.g. catalytic converter, particulate trap) that requires a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation. If a regeneration of an anti-pollution device occurs at least once per Type I test and that has already regenerated at least once during the vehicle preparation cycle, it will be considered as a continuously regenerating system, which does not require a special test procedure. Annex 10 does not apply to continuously regenerating systems.
At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems will not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the type approval authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emission of CO2 does not exceed the declared value by more than 4 % after agreement of the technical service.		 No.101 2007-06-19
Regeneration [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.71. "Regeneration" means an event during which emissions levels change while the aftertreatment performance is being restored by design. Two types of regeneration can occur: continuous regeneration (see paragraph 6.6.1. of Annex 4B) and infrequent (periodic) regeneration (see paragraph 6.6.2. of Annex 4B);		 No.096 2014-03-22
regeneration (Continuous) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
regeneration (Continuous) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Continuous regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.13. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either in a sustained manner or at least once over the applicable transient test cycle or ramped-modal cycle; in contrast to periodic (infrequent) regeneration;		 No.096 2014-03-22
regeneration (continuous) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust aftertreatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per ETC test. Such a regeneration process will not require a special test procedure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
regeneration (continuous) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust aftertreatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per ETC test. Such a regeneration process will not require a special test procedure;		 No.049 2010-08-31
regeneration (Periodic or infrequent) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Periodic (or infrequent) regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.64. "Periodic (or infrequent) regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after- treatment system that occurs periodically in typically less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission limits may be exceeded;		 No.096 2014-03-22
regeneration (Periodic) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.49. "Periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
regeneration (periodic) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.		 No.049 2008-04-12
regeneration (periodic) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 periodic regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "periodic regeneration" means the regeneration process of an emission control device that occurs periodically in less than 100 hours of normal engine operation. During cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.		 No.049 2010-08-31
regenerative braking (Electric) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
regenerative braking (Electric) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
regenerative braking (Electric) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
regenerative braking (Electric) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
registration plate illuminating device (Rear) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Rear registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.10. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;		 No.053 2013-06-18
registration plate illuminating device (Rear) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Rear-registration-plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.13. "Rear-registration-plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical component.		 No.074 2013-06-18
registration plate illuminating device (Rear) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Rear-registration plate illuminating device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.13. "Rear-registration plate illuminating device" means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;		 No.048 2011-12-06
registration plate illuminating device of different type (rear) [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
registration-plate lamp (Rear-) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear-registration-plate lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.15. "Rear-registration-plate lamp" means the device used to illuminate the space intended to accommodate the rear registration plate; it may consist of several optical components;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Regular light transmittance [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Regular light transmittance safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Regular light transmittance" means light transmittance measured perpendicularly to the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
regulator (Pressure) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure regulator using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.34. "Pressure regulator" means a device used to control the pressure of CNG or LNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
regulator (Pressure) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure regulator LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.7. "Pressure regulator" means a device intended for reducing and regulating the pressure of liquefied petroleum gas;		 No.067 2008-03-14
regulator (Pressure) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure regulator using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.21. "Pressure regulator" means a device used to control the delivery pressure of gaseous fuel to the engine.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Reinforced [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Reinforced Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.4. "Reinforced" or "Extra Load" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre; No.030 2008-07-30
Reinforced [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Reinforced Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
reinforced tyre (extra load tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 reinforced tyre (extra load tyre) safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 10. "reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" means a C1 pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is designed to carry a greater load than the corresponding standard tyre; REG. No 661/2009
Reinforced tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" of Class C1 means a pneumatic-tyre structure designed to carry more load at a higher inflation pressure than the load carried by the corresponding standard version tyre at the standard inflation pressure as specified in ISO 4000-1:2010.		 No.117 2011-11-23
release button (buckle, enclosed / none-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 enclosed / none- buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2011-09-09
release button (buckle, Enclosed) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
release button (buckle, Enclosed) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
release button (buckle-, Enclosed) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
release button (buckle-, Enclosed) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
release button (buckle, enclosed, Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
release button (buckle, enclosed, Non) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.129 2014-03-29
release button (buckle-, Non-enclosed) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2007-11-30
release button (buckle-, Non-enclosed) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.016 2011-09-09
release button (enclosed buckle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
release button (non-enclosed buckle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 non-enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.		 No.044 2007-11-23
relief device (Pressure) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.35. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive temperature and/or pressure which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
relief device (Pressure) [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (pressure triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.36. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered)" (this device sometimes is referred to as ‘burst disc’) means a one-time-use device triggered by excessive pressure that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
relief device (Pressure, temperature triggered) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.22. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one time use device triggered by excessive temperature which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2011-05-07
relief valve (Pressure) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.23. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
relief valve (Pressure) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
relief valve (pressure, Gas-tube) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Gas-tube pressure relief valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.9. "Gas-tube pressure relief valve" means a device to prevent the pressure build up in the tubes above a pre-set value;		 No.067 2008-03-14
relieving device (Tension) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Tension relieving device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tension relieving device" means a system which allows to release the device that adjusts and maintains the tension in the ISOFIX top tether strap.		 No.129 2014-03-29
relieving device (tension) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 A tension relieving device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "A tension relieving device" means a system which allow to release the device which adjust and maintain the tension in the Isofix top tether strap.		 No.044 2007-11-23
relieving device (tension) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 tension relieving device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "A tension relieving device" means a system which allow to release the device which adjust and maintain the tension in the ISOFIX top tether strap.		 No.044 2011-09-09
reminder (belt, Safety) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver's alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.		 No.016 2015-11-20
reminder (belt, Safety-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver’s alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Remote control systems [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Remote control systems Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Remote control systems [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Remote control systems mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Remote indicators [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Remote indicators Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Remote indicators [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Remote indicators mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Removable head restraint [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Removable head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult
occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head
restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Removable head restraint [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Removable head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Repair [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Repair 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Repair" is the remedial work carried out to damaged casings within recognised limits.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Repair [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Repair Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Repair" is the remedial work carried out to damaged casings within recognised limits.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Repair information [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Repair information Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Repair information" means all information required for diagnosis, servicing, inspection, periodic monitoring or repair of the vehicle and which the manufacturers provide for their authorised dealers/repair shops. Where necessary, such information shall include service handbooks, technical manuals, diagnosis information (e.g. minimum and maximum theoretical values for measurements), wiring diagrams, the software calibration identification number applicable to a vehicle type, instructions for individual and special cases, information provided concerning tools and equipment, data record information and two-directional monitoring and test data. The manufacturer shall not be obliged to make available that information which is covered by intellectual property rights or constitutes specific know-how of manufacturers and/or OEM suppliers; in this case the necessary technical information shall not be improperly withheld.		 No.083 2012-02-15
repair information [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 repair information Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"repair information" means all information required for diagnosis, servicing, inspection, periodic monitoring or repair of the engine and which the manufacturers provide for their authorized dealers/repair shops. Where necessary, such information shall include service handbooks, technical manuals, diagnosis information (e.g. minimum and maximum theoretical values for measurements), wiring diagrams, the software calibration identification number applicable to an engine type, information enabling the update of the software of the electronic systems in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer, instructions for individual and special cases, information provided concerning tools and equipment, data record information and twodirectional monitoring and test data. The manufacturer shall not be obliged to make available that information which is covered by intellectual property rights or constitutes specific know-how of manufacturers and/or OEM suppliers; in this case the necessary technical information shall not be improperly withheld;		 No.049 2008-04-12
repel fuel or lubricant (Capability to) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Capability to repel fuel or lubricant burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.8. "Capability to repel fuel or lubricant" means the capability of materials to repel fuel or lubricant when measured according to Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Replaceable light source [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Replaceable light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.1.1. "Replaceable light source" means a light source which is designed to be inserted in and removed from the holder of its device without tool; No.048 2008-05-23
Replaceable light source [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Replaceable light source Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.1.1. "Replaceable light source" means a light source which is designed to be inserted in and removed from the holder of its device without tool;
2.7.1.1.2. "Non-replaceable light source" means a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the device to which this light source is fixed;
(a) In case of a light source module: a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the light source module to which this light source is fixed;
(b) In case of adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the lighting unit to which this light source is fixed;		 No.048 2011-12-06
replacement brake disc and brake drum (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Original replacement brake discs and brake drums Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Replacement brake lining assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Replacement brake lining assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly;		 No.090 2010-05-28
replacement catalytic converter (Approval of a) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).		 No.103 2007-06-19
replacement catalytic converter (Deteriorated) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter" means a converter that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extend that it fulfils the requirements laid out in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
replacement catalytic converter (Original) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Original replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Original replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83, but are offered in the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval.		 No.103 2007-06-19
Replacement catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters for which approval can be obtained according to this Regulation, other than those defined in paragraph 2.1 above.		 No.103 2007-06-19
Replacement drum brake lining [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Replacement drum brake lining [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.		 No.090 2010-05-28
Replacement part [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement part Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. General definitions
2.1.2. "Replacement part" means either a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type, a replacement drum brake lining, a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Replacement part [No.09023 2012-07-13] 　 Replacement parts Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Replacement pollution control device [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Replacement pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.56. "Replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices intended to replace an original pollution control device and which can be approved as a separate technical unit;		 No.049 2013-06-24
replacement pollution control device [REG. No 595/2009] 　 replacement pollution control device emissions 10. "replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices intended to replace an original pollution control device and which can be approved as a separate technical unit, as defined in point 25 of Article 3 of Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 595/2009
replacement silencing system or components of said system (Approval of a) [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system" means the approval of the whole or part of a silencing system adaptable to one or several specified types of motor vehicles, as regards the limitation of their noise level;		 No.059 2006-11-24
Replacement silencing system or components of said system [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Replacement silencing system or components of said system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Replacement silencing system or components of said system" means any part of the exhaust system defined in paragraph 2.1. above, intended for use on a vehicle, other than a part of the type fitted to this vehicle when submitted for type approval pursuant to this Regulation;		 No.059 2006-11-24
Replacement Wheels [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Replacement Wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Replacement Wheels" means wheels which are intended to replace the OE wheels during the service life of the vehicle. Replacement wheels may belong to one of the following category:
2.4.1. "Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels" being wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer;
2.4.2. "Identical replacement wheels" being wheels which are manufactured using the same manufacturing equipment and material as that used for replacement wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer. They differ from vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels only by the absence of vehicle manufacturer’s trademarks and part number;
2.4.3. "Replica replacement wheels" being wheels which are replicas of vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels but produced by a manufacturer who is not a supplier of the vehicle manufacturer with the specified wheel. With regard to the design (basic contour, dimensions, inset, material type and quality and so on) and service life they fully correspond to vehicle manufacturer’s replacement wheels;
2.4.4. "Pattern part replacement wheels" being wheels produced by a manufacturer who is not a supplier of the vehicle manufacturer with the specified wheel. With regard to the design, inset, rim designation wheel fixing PCD and spigot mounting diameter, correspond to that of an OE-wheel, but wheel contour, material and so on, may be different;		 No.124 2006-12-27
Replica replacement wheels [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Replica replacement wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Replica replacement wheels" being wheels which are replicas of vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels but produced by a manufacturer who is not a supplier of the vehicle manufacturer with the specified wheel. With regard to the design (basic contour, dimensions, inset, material type and quality and so on) and service life they fully correspond to vehicle manufacturer’s replacement wheels;		 No.124 2006-12-27
representative of the type to be approved (engine) [No.024 2006-11-243] 　 engine representative of the type to be approved Diesel smoke and power PART I — EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM C.I. ENGINES
3. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
3.3 "An engine representative of the type to be approved" means the engine which develops the highest net power within the engine type,		 No.024 2006-11-24
Representative tyre size [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Representative tyre size Tyre noise and wet grip 2.5. "Representative tyre size" means the tyre size which is submitted to the test described in Annex 3 to this Regulation with regard to rolling sound emissions, and Annex 5 for adhesion on wet surfaces, to assess the conformity for the type approval of the type of tyre. No.117 2008-08-29
Representative tyre size [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Representative tyre size Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Representative tyre size" means the tyre size which is submitted to the test described in Annex 3 to this Regulation with regard to rolling sound emissions, or Annex 5 for adhesion on wet surfaces or Annex 6 for rolling resistance to assess the conformity for the type approval of the type of tyre, or Annex 7 for snow performance to assess the category of use "snow".		 No.117 2011-11-23
requisite for driver visibility (glazing material, Safety) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
res (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 res : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
Residual space [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Residual space Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Residual space" means a space to be preserved in the passengers', crew and driver's compartment(s) to provide better survival possibility for passengers, driver and crew in case of a rollover accident.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Residual space [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Residual space Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Residual space" means a space to be preserved in the passengers’, crew and driver’s compartment(s) to provide better survival possibility for passengers, driver and crew in case of a rollover accident.		 No.066 2011-03-30
resistance measurement (Rolling) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Rolling resistance measurement Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Rolling resistance measurement – Specific definitions
2.18.1. Rolling resistance Fr
Loss of energy (or energy consumed) per unit of distance travelled.
2.18.2. Rolling resistance coefficient Cr
Ratio of the rolling resistance to the load on the tyre.
2.18.3. New test tyre
A tyre which has not been previously used in a rolling deflected test that raises its temperature above that generated in rolling resistance tests, and which has not previously been exposed to a temperature above 40 ℃.
2.18.4. Laboratory Control Tyre
Tyre used by an individual laboratory to control machine behaviour as a function of time.
2.18.5. Capped inflation
Process of inflating the tyre and allowing the inflation pressure to build up, as the tyre is warmed up while running.
2.18.6. Parasitic loss
Loss of energy (or energy consumed) per unit distance excluding internal tyre losses, attributable to aerodynamic loss of the different rotating elements of the test equipment, bearing friction and other sources of systematic loss which may be inherent in the measurement.
2.18.7. Skim test reading
Type of parasitic loss measurement, in which the tyre is kept rolling without slippage, while reducing the tyre load to a level at which energy loss within the tyre itself is virtually zero.
2.18.8. Inertia or Moment of Inertia.
Ratio of the torque applied to a rotating body to the rotational acceleration of this body.
2.18.9. Measurement reproducibility σm
Capability of a machine to measure rolling resistance.		 No.117 2011-11-23
resistance monitoring system (isolation, On board) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 On-board isolation resistance monitoring system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "On-board isolation resistance monitoring system" means the device which monitors the isolation resistance between the high voltage buses and the electrical chassis.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Resolution [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Resolution devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.5."Resolution" means the smallest detail that can be discerned with a perceptual system, i.e. per ceived as separate from the larger whole. The resolution of the human eye is indicated as ‘visual acuity’.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Resolution [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Resolution Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.5. "Resolution" means the smallest detail that can be discerned with a perceptual system, i.e. perceived as separate from the larger whole. The resolution of the human eye is indicated as ‘visualacuity’.		 No.046 2010-07-10
response (Span) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Span response Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.16. "Span response" means the mean response to a span gas during a 30 s time interval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
response (Zero) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Zero response Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.21. "Zero response" means the mean response to a zero gas during a 30 s time interval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
response threshold (higher, Emergency locking retractor with, type 4N) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 1 , N 2 and N 3.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Response time [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Response time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.14. "Response time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 90 per cent of the final reading (t 90 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point, whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent full scale (FS) and takes place in less than 0,1 second. The system response time consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Response time [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Response time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.72. "Response time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 90 per cent of the final reading (t 90 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point, whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent full scale (FS) and the devices for gas switching shall be specified to perform the gas switching in less than 0,1 s. The system response time consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
response time [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 response time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "response time" means the difference in time between a rapid change of the component to be measured at the reference point and the appropriate change in the response of the measuring system whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent FS and takes place in less than 0,1 second. The system response time (t90) consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system (see also ISO 16183);		 No.049 2008-04-12
response time [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 response time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "response time" means the difference in time between a rapid change of the component to be measured at the reference point and the appropriate change in the response of the measuring system whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent FS and takes place in less than 0,1 second. The system response time (t90) consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system (see also ISO 16183);		 No.049 2010-08-31
RESS [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 RESS Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "RESS" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
RESS [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
RESS [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
RESS [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2011-02-14
RESS [No.100 2011-02-14]a 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
RESS (charging the, Coupling system for) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet,		 No.094 2012-09-20
RESS (charging the, Coupling system for) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Coupling system for charging the RESS" means the electrical circuit installed in the vehicle used for charging the RESS.		 No.010 2012-09-20
RESS (charging the, Coupling system for) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet;		 No.012 2013-03-27
rest (Foot-) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Footrest Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Footrest" means the projections on either side of the vehicle on which the driver places his feet when seated in the driving position;		 No.060 2004-03-31
restraining strap (Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child-restraining strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt (harness) and restrains only the body of the child.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraining strap (child-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 child-restraining strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint (carry-cot) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 carry-cot restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.		 No.044 2007-11-23
restraint (carry-cot) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 carry-cot restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint (Child) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129.		 No.016 2015-11-20
restraint (Child) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Child restraint Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Child restraint" means an arrangement of components which may comprise a combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments, and in some cases a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body.		 No.094 2012-09-20
restraint (Child) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2007-11-30
restraint (Child) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.		 No.016 2011-09-09
restraint (Child) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Child restraint Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Child restraint" means an arrangement of components which may comprise a combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments, and in some cases a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body		 No.094 2010-05-28
restraint (child, adjuster mounted directly on) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2007-11-23
restraint (child, adjuster mounted directly on) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint (cot, Carry) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Carry-cot restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraint (Head) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Head restraint Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back.
Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2. or 2.12.3. below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
restraint (Head) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Head restraint seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back. Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2 or 2.12.3 below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
restraint (Head) [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult
occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head
restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2005-12-16
restraint (Head) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2010-08-14
restraint (head, Type of) [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Type of head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of head restraint" means a category of head restraints which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish, in colour and in covering;		 No.025 2005-12-16
restraint (head, Type of) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Type of head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of head restraint" means a category of head restraints which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish, in colour and in covering;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Restraint (Need, Special) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Special Needs Restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Special Needs Restraint" is a Child Restraint System designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental disability; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it shall contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraint (Occupant) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Occupant restraint Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Occupant restraint" means any device which connects a passenger, driver or crew member to his seat, during a rollover.		 No.066 2007-12-06
restraint (Occupant) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Occupant restraint Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Occupant restraint" means any device which connects a passenger, driver or crew member to his seat, during a rollover.		 No.066 2011-03-30
restraint (shoulder) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 shoulder restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child’s upper torso;		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint (Special needs) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Special needs restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Special needs restraint" is a child restraint system designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental handicap; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it must contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Restraint (Special Needs) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Special Needs Restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Special Needs Restraint" is a child restraint system designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental handicap; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it must contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child restraint system (restraint) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system (restraint) means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry-cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.
"Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6 Isofix Child restraint systems fall into 7 Isofix size classes described in Regulation No 16 annex 17, appendix 2:
A - ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B - ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C - ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
[表] Mass group /　/ Isofix size category
0 - up to 10 kg / F ISO/L1, G ISO/L2, E ISO/R1
0+ - up to 13 kg / C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2, E ISO/R1
I - 9 to 18 kg / A ISO/F3, B ISO/F2, B1 ISO/F2X, C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Restraint anchorages [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Restraint anchorages Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Restraint anchorages [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Restraint anchorages Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in Annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg.
2.14.2. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;
2.14.3. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint attachment strap (child-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint fixture (child) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 A child restraint fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "A child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, so-called either ISO/F2 (B) or ISO/F2X(B1) which is described in Regulation No 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2), is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system;		 No.014 2015-08-19
restraint fixture (Child) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2015-11-20
restraint fixture (child) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 child restraint fixture Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "A child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of annex 17 — appendix 2 of Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B) which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
restraint fixture (child) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 a child restraint fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "a child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B) which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2011-04-28
restraint fixture (Child) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
restraint fixture (Child) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.		 No.016 2011-09-09
restraint gaps (head) [No.025 2010-08-14A7] 　 head restraint gaps head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 7] Determination of dimension "A" of head restraint gaps
Figure 1 Example of horizontal gaps
Figure 2 Example of vertical gaps		 No.025 2010-08-14
Restraint system [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Restraint system
A system for a specific vehicle type or a type defined by the vehicle manufacturer and agreed by the Technical Service consisting of a seat and a belt fixed to the vehicle by appropriate means and consisting additionally of all elements which are provided to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of an abrupt vehicle deceleration, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Restraint System (Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 CRS (Child Restraint System) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Child Restraint System" (CRS) means a device capable of accommodating a child occupant in a sitting or supine position. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the child’s body.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraint system (Child) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system ("restraint") means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body.
"ISOFIX" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint system (Child, category) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 category (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. A "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1, and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 — as being compatible with such a category of child restraint.
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either;
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint system (Child, classe) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 classe (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt.		 No.044 2011-09-09
restraint system (child, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system;		 No.014 2015-08-19
restraint system (child, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2015-11-20
restraint system (child, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix child restraint system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Isofix child restraint system2 means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
restraint system (child, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.		 No.014 2011-04-28
restraint system (child, Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2007-11-30
restraint system (child, ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.		 No.016 2011-09-09
restraint system (child, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
restraint system (child, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Restraint System (Child, ISOFIX, Universal, Integral) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraint system (Child, mass group) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 mass group (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6. ISOFIX Child restraint systems fall into 7 ISOFIX size classes described in Regulation No 16 Annex 17, Appendix 2:
A — ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B — ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 — ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C — ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D — ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E — ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F — ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
G — ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
[表]		 No.044 2011-09-09
Restraint System (Child, mounted directly on, Adjuster) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System" means an adjuster for the harness belt which is directly mounted on the Child Restraint System, as opposed to being directly supported by the strap that it is designed to adjust.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraint system (safety belt and, Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Restraint system [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Restraint system
A system for a specific vehicle type or a type defined by the vehicle manufacturer and agreed by the Technical Service consisting of a seat and a belt fixed to the vehicle by appropriate means and consisting additionally of all elements which are provided to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of an abrupt vehicle deceleration, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Restraint system [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Restraint system
A system for a specific vehicle type or a type defined by the vehicle manufacturer and agreed by the Technical Service consisting of a seat and a belt fixed to the vehicle by appropriate means and consisting additionally of all elements which are provided to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of an abrupt vehicle deceleration, by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body.		 No.016 2011-09-09
restraint systems (Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2007-11-30
restraint systems (Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2011-09-09
restraint systems [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2007-11-30
restraint type (Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child restraint type Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child restraint type" means a Child Restraint System which does not differ in such essential respects as:
The category in which the restraint is type approved;
The design, material and construction of the Child Restraint System.
Convertible or modular Child Restraint Systems shall be considered to not differ in their design, material and construction.		 No.129 2014-03-29
restraint type (Child-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child-restraint type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Child-restraint type" means child restraints which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.19.1. the category, and the mass group(s) for which and the position and orientation (as defined in paragraphs 2.15. and 2.16.) in which the restraint is intended to be used;
2.19.2. the geometry of the child restraint;
2.19.3. the dimensions, mass, material and colour of:
- the seat,
- the padding, and
- the impact shield,
2.19.4. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps;
2.19.5. the rigid components (buckle, attachments, etc.).		 No.044 2007-11-23
restraint type (Child-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child-restraint type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Child-restraint type" means child restraints which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.19.1. the category, and the mass group(s) for which and the position and orientation (as defined in paragraphs 2.15 and 2.16) in which the restraint is intended to be used;
2.19.2. the geometry of the child restraint;
2.19.3. the dimensions, mass, material and colour of:
the seat;
the padding; and
the impact shield;
2.19.4. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps;
2.19.5. the rigid components (buckle, attachments, etc.).		 No.044 2011-09-09
restricted (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 restricted (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
restricted (Un-) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Unrestricted Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Unrestricted" means:
2.17.1. Access not dependent on an access code obtainable only from the manufacturer, or a similar device; or
2.17.2. Access allowing evaluation of the data produced without the need for any unique decoding information, unless that information itself is standardised.		 No.083 2012-02-15
retractable [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 retractable Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.8. "Concealable lamp" means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.048 2011-12-06
retractable [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 retractable Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.6. "Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Retractor [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. Deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity),
2.14.4.2. A combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 1 , N 2 and N 3.
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Retractor [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Retractor Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a Child Restraint System. The term covers the following devices:
2.41.1. "Automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented.
2.41.2. "Emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the strap wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.41.2.1. Deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity);
2.41.2.2. A combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.129 2014-03-29
retractor (automatically-locking) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer’s physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;		 No.044 2011-09-09
retractor (locking ,emergency-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 emergency-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer’s freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer’s physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2011-09-09
Retractor [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor : Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity).
2.14.4.2. a combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic
means (multiple sensitivity).
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 (*).
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Retractor [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity).
2.14.4.2. A combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 ( 1 ).
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Retractor [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic
means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2007-11-23
Retractor [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer’s physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer’s freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer’s physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).		 No.044 2011-09-09
retreaded pneumatic tyre (Range of) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Retreading [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Retreading 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" - replacement of the tread.
2.37.2. "Re-capping" - replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall.
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" - replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Retreading [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Retreading Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Retreading production unit [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Retreading production unit 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Retreading production unit" means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Retreading production unit [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Retreading production unit Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Retreading production unit" means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced.		 No.109 2006-07-04
retro reflecting device (Angular diameter of the) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Retro reflecting device (Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA. (Retro-reflecting device) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Retro-reflecting devices are divided into three classes according to their photometric characteristics: Class IA or IB, Class IIIA or IIIB, and Class IVA.
2.14. Retro-reflecting devices of Class IB and IIIB are devices combined with other signal lamps which are not watertight according to Annex 8, paragraph 1.1, and which are integrated into the body of a vehicle.		 No.003 2011-12-06
retro reflecting device (Illumination of the) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Illumination of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Illumination of the retro-reflecting device" is the abbreviated expression used conventionally to designate the illumination measured in a plane perpendicular to the incident rays and passing through the centre of reference.		 No.003 2011-12-06
retro reflecting device (type of) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 type of "retro-reflecting device" Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. A type of "retro-reflecting device" is defined by the models and descriptive literature submitted with the application for approval. Retro-reflecting devices can be considered as belonging to the same type if they have one or more ‘retro-reflecting optical units’ which are identical with those of the standard model, or if not identical are symmetrical and suitable for mounting one on the left and one on the right side of the vehicle, and if their other parts differ from those of the standard model only in ways not affecting the properties to which this Regulation applies.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Retro reflecting device [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Retro-reflecting device" means an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro- reflecting optical units.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Retro reflecting optical unit [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflecting optical unit Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Retro-reflecting optical unit" means a combination of optical components producing retro- reflection.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Retro reflection [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Retro-reflection Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Retro-reflection" means the reflection in which luminous flux is returned in directions close to the direction from which it came, this property being maintained even over wide variations of the direction of the luminous flux.
2.2.1. "Retro-reflective marking material" means a surface or a device from which, when directionally illuminated, a relatively large portion of the incident radiation is retro-reflected.		 No.104 2014-03-14
retro reflection (Coefficient of) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R') Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R′)" means the quotient of the coefficient of luminous intensity R of a plane retro-reflecting surface and its area A
[式]		 No.104 2014-03-14
Retro reflection [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Retro-reflection Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Retro-reflection" means the reflection in which light is reflected in directions close to the direction from which it came. This property is maintained over wide variations of the illumination angle.		 No.003 2011-12-06
Retro reflector [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.13. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
For the purpose of this Regulation, retro-reflecting number plates are not considered as retro- reflectors;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Retro reflector [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.9. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
For the purpose of this Regulation, retro-reflecting number plates are not considered as retro- reflectors:		 No.074 2013-06-18
Retro reflector [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.16. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source.
For the purposes of this Regulation the following are not considered as retro-reflectors:
2.7.16.1. Retro-reflecting number plates;
2.7.16.2. The retro-reflecting signals mentioned in the ADR (European Agreement concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods by road);
2.7.16.3. Other retro-reflective plates and signals which shall be used to comply with national requirements for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation;
2.7.16.4. Retro-Reflecting materials approved as Class D or E according to Regulation No 104 and used for other purposes in compliance with national requirements, e.g. advertising;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Retro reflector [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Retro reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.22. "Retro reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a tractor by reflection of light emanating from a light source unconnected with the vehicle, the observer being situated near that source. For the purpose of this Regulation, the following are not considered as retro reflectors:
retro-reflecting number plates;
other plates and retro-reflecting signals which must be used to comply with a Contracting Party’s specifications for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation.		 No.086 2010-09-30
retro reflector sample (diameter of the, Angular) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
retrofit system (CNG, component of) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 components of CNG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. For definitions of the components of CNG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 110.		 No.115 2014-11-07
retrofit system (LPG or CNG, Approval of an) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
retrofit system (LPG, component of) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 components of LPG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. For definitions of the components of LPG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments.		 No.115 2014-11-07
retrofit system of an approved type (LPG or CNG, Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).		 No.115 2014-11-07
Retro-reflecting device [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2.4. "Retro-reflecting device" (1) means an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro-reflecting optical units. No.003 2009-01-31
Retro-reflecting optical unit [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Retro-reflecting optical unit Retro-reflecting devices 2.3. "Retro-reflecting optical unit" means a combination of optical components producing retro-reflection. No.003 2009-01-31
Retro-reflection [No.003 2009-01-31] 　 Retro-reflection Retro-reflecting devices 2.2. "Retro-reflection" means the reflection in which light is reflected in directions close to the direction from which it came. This property is maintained over wide variations of the illumination angle. No.003 2009-01-31
retro-reflection (Coefficient of) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (R') Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.1. Coefficient of retro-reflection R'
Coefficient (R') obtained from the luminous intensity (I) of the retro-reflective area in the direction of observation and the illuminance (E⊥) on the retro-reflective plane at right angles to the direction of the incident light and the illuminated plane sample surface A. [式] R'=1/E⊥A
The coefficient of retro-reflection R' is expressed in candela per square metre per lux (cd. m-2 . lx-1 ).		 No.069 2010-07-31
Retro-reflection [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Retro-reflection Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Retro-reflection
Reflection in which radiation is returned in directions close to the direction from which it came, this property being maintained even over wide variations of the direction of the incident radiation:
2.2.1. "Retro-reflective material", a surface or device from which, when directionally irradiated, a relatively large portion of the incident radiation is retroreflected.
2.2.2. "Retro-reflective device", an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro-reflective optical units.		 No.069 2010-07-31
retro-reflective sample (Angular diameter of the) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (η) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (symbol η)", the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.069 2010-07-31
retro-reflector [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 retro-reflector installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.18. retro-reflector
means the device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near that source; for the purposes of this Annex retro-reflecting number plates are not considered to be retro-reflectors;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Retro-reflector [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Retro-reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.16. "Retro-reflector" means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source.
For the purposes of this Regulation the following are not considered as retro-reflectors:
2.7.16.1. retro-reflecting number plates;
2.7.16.2. the retro-reflecting signals mentioned in the ADR (European Agreement concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods by road);
2.7.16.3. other retro-reflective plates and signals which must be used to comply with national requirements for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation;
2.7.16.4. retro-reflecting materials approved as Class D or E according to Regulation No 104 and used for other purposes in compliance with national requirements, e.g. advertising.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Reversing lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Reversing lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.10. Reversing lamp
"Reversing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the tractor and to warn other road-users that the tractor is reversing or about to reverse		 Directive 2009/061/EC
reversing lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 reversing lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.15. reversing lamp
means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Reversing lamp [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing lamp reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp of the vehicle designed to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse.		 No.023 2014-08-08
Reversing lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Reversing lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.21. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road-users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse; No.048 2008-05-23
reversing lamp [No.023 1997-07-30] 　 reversing lamp Reversing lamps 1. Definitions
1.1. "reversing lamp" means the lamp of the vehicle designed to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.023 1997-07-30
Reversing lamp [No.023 2010-06-12] 　 Reversing lamp reversing lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp of the vehicle designed to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.023 2010-06-12
Reversing lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Reversing lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.21. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road-users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Reversing lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Reversing lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.11. "Reversing lamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the tractor and to warn other road-users that the tractor is reversing or about to reverse;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Reversing lamp of different type [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2014-08-08
Reversing lamp of different type [No.023 2010-06-12] 　 Reversing lamps of different types reversing lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Reversing lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2010-06-12
Reversing manoeuvring lamp of different type [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2014-08-08
ri [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri) Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6. "The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the valuesobtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surfacepassing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Riding pedal [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Riding pedals Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped		 No.060 2014-10-15
Riding pedals [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Riding pedals Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
right side (Frame) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame: right side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Frame: right side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle		 No.060 2014-10-15
right side (Handlebar) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: right side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7."Handlebars: right side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Right side [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Right side / left side Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Right side" respectively "left side" means the combined total of the lighting units intended to be installed to that side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle, relative to its forward motion;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Right side [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Right side / left side Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Right side" respectively "left side" means the combined total of the lighting units intended to be installed to that side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle, relative to its forward motion;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Rigid fuel line [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Rigid fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.29. "Rigid fuel lines" means tubing that has not been designed to flex in normal operation and through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Rigid fuel lines [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Rigid fuel lines using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.16. Fuel lines
2.16.1. "Flexible fuel lines" means a flexible tubing or hose through which natural gas flow.
2.16.2. "Rigid fuel lines" means tubing which has not been designed to flex in normal operation and through which natural gas flows.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Rigid part [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Rigid part Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Rigid part" means a structural part or element which does not have significant deformation and energy absorption during the rollover test.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Rigid part [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Rigid part Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Rigid part" means a structural part or element which does not have significant deformation and energy absorption during the rollover test.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Rigid plastic glazing [No.043 2014-02-12]a 　 Rigid plastic glazing safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture of processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow.
2.6.1. "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).
2.6.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (Annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2014-02-12
Rigid plastic glazing [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Rigid plastic glazing Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Plastic glazing" is a glazing material that contains as an essential ingredient one or more organic polymeric substances of large molecular weight, is solid in its finished state and, at some stage in its manufacture or processing into finished articles, can be shaped by flow;
2.5.1 "Rigid plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which does not deflect vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12);
2.5.2. "Flexible plastic glazing" means a plastic glazing material which deflects vertically more than 50 mm in the flexibility test (annex 3, paragraph 12).		 No.043 2010-08-31
Rim [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Rim Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.19. "Rim" means the support for a tyre-and-tube assembly, or for a tubeless tyre, on which support the tyre beads are seated; No.054 2008-07-11
rim (demountable, Wheel with) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel with demountable rim (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Wheel with demountable rim " means a wheel so constructed that the demountable rim is clamped to the wheel disc.		 No.124 2006-12-27
rim (Measuring) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Measuring rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Measuring rim" means the rim on which a tyre is required to be fitted for size measurements.		 No.075 2011-03-30
rim (Measuring) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Measuring rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Measuring rim" means the rim on which a tyre is fitted for the measurement of the dimensions;		 No.106 2010-09-30
rim (Measuring) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Measuring rim 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Measuring rim" means the rim specified as a "measuring rim width" or "design rim width" for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards.		 No.108 2006-07-04
rim (Measuring) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Measuring rim Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Measuring rim" means the rim specified as a "measuring rim width" or "design rim width" for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards.		 No.109 2006-07-04
rim (Steering control) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering control rim protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Steering control rim" means the quasi-toroidal outer ring in the case of the steering wheel usually griped by the driver’s hands during driving;		 No.012 2013-03-27
rim (Test) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Test rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Test rim" means the rim on which a tyre is required to be fitted for testing.		 No.075 2011-03-30
rim (Test) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Test rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Test rim" means the rim on which a tyre must be fitted for the performance test.		 No.106 2010-09-30
rim (Test) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Test rim 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Test rim" means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type.		 No.108 2006-07-04
rim (Test) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Test rim Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Test rim" means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type.		 No.109 2006-07-04
rim (Theoretical) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Theoretical rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Theoretical rim" means the rim whose width would be equal to X times the nominal section width of a tyre. The value of X shall be specified by the manufacturer of the tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
rim (Theoretical) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Theoretical rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Theoretical rim" means the notional rim whose width would be equal to X times the nominal section width of a tyre; the value "X" must be specified by the tyre manufacturer or the reference rim width is that mentioned in annex 5 for the relevant "tyre size designation";		 No.106 2010-09-30
Rim [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Rim" means the support for a tyre-and-tube assembly, or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.
2.18.1. "Tyre to rim fitment configuration" means the type of rim to which the tyre is designed to be fitted. In the case of non-standard rims this will be identified by a symbol applied to the tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Rim [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Rim" means the support for a tyre-and-tube assembly, or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Rim [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Rim 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Rim" means the support, either for a tyre-and-tube assembly or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Rim [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Rim Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Rim" means the support, either for a tyre-and-tube assembly or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Rim [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Rim (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Rim" means that part of the wheel on which the tyre is mounted and supported.		 No.124 2006-12-27
rim diameter (d) (Nominal) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.109 2006-07-04
rim diameter (Nominal) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 d (Nominal rim diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.		 No.075 2011-03-30
rim diameter (Nominal) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal rim diameter (d) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means a conventional number denoting the nominal diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted and corresponding to the diameter of the rim expressed either by size codes (number below 100 — see table for equivalence with millimeters) or in mm (numbers above 100) but not both;
[表]		 No.106 2010-09-30
Rim Standards (International) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 International Tyre and Rim Standards (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "International Tyre and Rim Standards" mean documents concerning wheel standardization issued by the following Organizations:
(a) The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 2/;
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Standards Manual";
(c) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(d) The Tyre and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) 4/: "Year Book";
(e) The Japan Automobile Tyre Manufacturers Association (JATMA) 5/: "Year Book";
(f) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) 6/:"Standard Manual";
(g) The Associação Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) 7/ "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(h) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) 8/:"Data Book"		 No.124 2006-12-27
Rise time [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Rise time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.15. "Rise time" means the difference in time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t 90 – t 10 ).		 No.049 2013-06-24
Rise time [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Rise time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.73. "Rise time" means the difference in time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t 90 – t 10 );		 No.096 2014-03-22
rise time [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 rise time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "rise time" means the time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t90 − t10). This is the instrument response after the component to be measured has reached the instrument. For the rise time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2008-04-12
rise time [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 rise time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "rise time" means the time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t90 − t10). This is the instrument response after the component to be measured has reached the instrument. For the rise time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Road (Carriage of Dangerous Goods by, International, Agreement concerning the, European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] 　 European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers 【略】
2.3. Endurance braking system 【略】
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 【略】		 No.013 2010-09-30
Road Cycle (Standard) [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard road cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer.
The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course. The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Road Cycle (Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION The Standard Road Cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer. The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course.
The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2015-07-03
road user (Unprotected) [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Unprotected road users LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.3. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels;		 No.073 2012-05-08
road users (Un-protected) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unprotected road users Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2004-03-31
road users (Un-protected) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Unprotected road users lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2010-05-13
Rocker arm [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Rocker arm Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Rocker arm [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Rocker arm Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);		 No.060 2004-03-31
Roll over control [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Roll-over control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Rolling code [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Rolling code alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Rolling code [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.6. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Rolling code [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Rolling code [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.6. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Rolling code [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Rolling resistance measurement [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Rolling resistance measurement Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Rolling resistance measurement – Specific definitions
2.18.1. Rolling resistance Fr
Loss of energy (or energy consumed) per unit of distance travelled.
2.18.2. Rolling resistance coefficient Cr
Ratio of the rolling resistance to the load on the tyre.
2.18.3. New test tyre
A tyre which has not been previously used in a rolling deflected test that raises its temperature above that generated in rolling resistance tests, and which has not previously been exposed to a temperature above 40 ℃.
2.18.4. Laboratory Control Tyre
Tyre used by an individual laboratory to control machine behaviour as a function of time.
2.18.5. Capped inflation
Process of inflating the tyre and allowing the inflation pressure to build up, as the tyre is warmed up while running.
2.18.6. Parasitic loss
Loss of energy (or energy consumed) per unit distance excluding internal tyre losses, attributable to aerodynamic loss of the different rotating elements of the test equipment, bearing friction and other sources of systematic loss which may be inherent in the measurement.
2.18.7. Skim test reading
Type of parasitic loss measurement, in which the tyre is kept rolling without slippage, while reducing the tyre load to a level at which energy loss within the tyre itself is virtually zero.
2.18.8. Inertia or Moment of Inertia.
Ratio of the torque applied to a rotating body to the rotational acceleration of this body.
2.18.9. Measurement reproducibility σm
Capability of a machine to measure rolling resistance.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Rolling sound emission [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Rolling sound emission Tyre noise and wet grip 2.3. "Rolling sound emission" means the sound emitted from the contact between the tyres in motion and the road surface. No.117 2008-08-29
Rolling sound emission [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Rolling sound emission Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Rolling sound emission" means the sound emitted from the contact between the tyres in motion and the road surface.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Roll-over control [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 Roll-over control Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll-over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-11-13
roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) [Directive 2009/057/ECA1] 　 roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] Conditions for EC component type-approval
1. DEFINITION
1.1. A roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that, in the event of roll-over, they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver		 Directive 2009/057/EC
Roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) [Directive 2009/075/ECA1] 　 Roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (static testing) [ANNEX I] Conditions for EC component type-approval
1. DEFINITION
1.1. "Roll-over protection structure" (safety cab or frame), hereinafter called "protection structure", means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that during the tests prescribed in Annexes II and III they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.		 Directive 2009/075/EC
Rollover test on a complete vehicle [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Rollover test on a complete vehicle [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.		 No.066 2011-03-30
rollover threshold [No.111 2002-02-01A3] 　 rollover threshold Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) [ANNEX 3] Tilt table test procedure
1. DEFINITIONS
"rollover threshold" means the instant when all the wheels on one side of the vehicle have lost contact with the tilt table surface.		 No.111 2002-02-01
roof [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 roof Interior fittings 2.5. "roof" means the upper part of the vehicle extending from the upper edge of the windscreen to the upper edge of the rear window and bounded at the sides by the upper framework of the side-walls; (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraph 2.5); No.021 2008-07-16
roof (Vehicle without) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle without roof Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.9. "Vehicle without roof" ( 1 ) means a vehicle without roof over all or part of its deck. In the case of a double-decked vehicle this shall be the upper deck. Space for standing passengers shall not be provided on any deck without roof, independently of the class of vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
roof (without, Vehicle) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Vehicle without roof Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.9. "Vehicle without roof" (1) means a vehicle without roof over all or part of its deck. In the case of a double-decked vehicle this shall be the upper deck. Space for standing passengers shall not be provided on any deck without roof, independently of the class of vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Rotating handgrip [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Rotating handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Rotating handgrip" means a handgrip, operating some functional mechanism of the vehicle, which is free to rotate around the handlebar when so turned by the driver of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Rotating handgrip [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Rotating handgrip Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Handgrip" means that part of the handlebars, furthest from the centre, by which the handlebars are held by the driver of the vehicle;
2.6.1. "Rotating handgrip" means a handgrip, operating some functional mechanism of the vehicle, which is free to rotate around the handlebar when so turned by the driver of the vehicle;		 No.060 2004-03-31
rotation (Angle of) [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 Angle of rotation Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Angle of rotation" means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position.		 No.003 2011-12-06
rotation (Anti-) device [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2007-11-30
rotation (Anti-) device [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Rotation angle [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Rotation angle (symbol ε) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.8. "Rotation angle (symbol ε)" means the angle indicating the orientation of the retro-reflecting material by an appropriate symbol with respect to rotation about the reference axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
rotation device (Anti) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Anti-rotation device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) An anti-rotation device for an i-Size child restraint system consists of either a top tether or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(d) For ISOFIX, i-Size, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;		 No.014 2015-08-19
rotation device (Anti) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether,
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact,
(c) An anti-rotation device for an i-Size child restraint system consists of either a top tether or a support leg, which is intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact,
(d) For ISOFIX, i-Size, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2015-11-20
rotation device (Anti) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Anti-rotation device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Anti-rotation device" means a device intended to limit the rotation of the Child Restraint System during a vehicle impact and consisting of:
(a) A top-tether strap; or
(b) A support-leg.
Meeting the requirements of this Regulation and fitted to an ISOFIX anchorage system and ISOFIX top tether anchorages or vehicle floor contact surface meeting the requirements of Regulation No. 14.
An "Anti-rotation device" for a "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" Child Restraint System may comprise a top tether, a support-leg or any other means capable of limiting the rotation.		 No.129 2014-03-29
rotation device (anti-) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 anti-rotation device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top-tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.014 2011-04-28
rotation device (Anti-) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.		 No.016 2011-09-09
rotation device (Anti-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Anti-rotation device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
rotation device (Anti-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Anti-rotation device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Routine testing [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Routine testing (or conformity of production testing) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Routine testing" (or conformity of production testing), means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Routine testing [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Routine testing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Routine testing", means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirement		 No.044 2007-11-23
Routine testing [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Routine testing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Routine testing", means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Row of seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Row of seats strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Row of seats" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of three or more seated passengers side by side; several individual or double seats arranged side by side shall not be regarded as a row of seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Row of seats [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Row of seats Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Row of seats" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of three or more seated passengers side by side; several individual or double seats arranged side by side shall not be regarded as a row of seats;		 No.080 2010-06-30
rp [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp) Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7. "The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri i.e.:
[式] rp =(ri + r'i)/2		 No.046 2010-07-10
Run flat system [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Run flat system Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.34. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode. No.030 2008-07-30
Run flat system [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Run flat system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Run flat tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Run flat tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.7. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode. No.030 2008-07-30
Run flat tyre [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Run flat tyre Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
run out (Radial) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Radial run out 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Radial run out" means the variation in radius of the tyre measured around the outer circumference of the tread surface.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Run-flat warning system [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Run-flat warning system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Run-flat warning system" describes a system which delivers information to the driver that a tyre is operating in the flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
running lamp (Daytime) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.17. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime.		 No.053 2013-06-18
running lamp (Daytime) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Daytime running lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.25. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;		 No.048 2011-12-06
running lamp (Daytime) [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamp Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Daytime running lamp" means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;
2.2. The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation;		 No.087 2010-06-30
running lamp of different type (Daytime) [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamps of different types Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Daytime running lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.087 2010-06-30
running mode (Flat tyre) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Flat tyre running mode Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Flat tyre running mode" describes the state of tyre, essentially maintaining its structural integrity, while operating at an inflation pressure between 0 and 70 kPa.		 No.064 2010-11-26
running order (Mass in) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Mass in running order Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Mass in running order" means the sum of the unladen vehicle mass and driver mass.		 No.078 2015-01-30
running order (Mass of a vehicle in) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Mass of a vehicle in running order (mro) Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Mass of a vehicle in running order (mro)" means the mass of an unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device, including coolant, oils, 90 % of fuel, 100 % of other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel, driver (75 kg) and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.051 2007-05-30
running order (vehicle in, Mass of the) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the vehicle unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant tools and spare wheel, if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer, and RESS.		 No.012 2013-03-27
running order (vehicle in, Mass of the) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
running order (vehicle in, Mass of the) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
running order (vehicle in, Mass of the) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Running order mass [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Running order mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.2.2. "Running order mass" means the mass described in Paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to this Regulation and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats; No.083 2012-02-15
Running order mass [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Running order mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.2. "Running order mass" means the mass described in paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to this Regulation and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Running order mass [No.049 2011-07-08] 　 Running order mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.66. "Running order mass" means the mass described in paragraph 2.6 of Annex 1 to the Regulation No 83 and for vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of more than 9 persons (in addition to the driver), the mass of a crew member (75 kg), if there is a crew seat amongst the nine or more seats.’		 No.049 2011-07-08
running pressure (Normal) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Normal running pressure (Tyre) Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Normal running pressure" means the cold inflation pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer increased by 0,2 bar;		 No.039 2004-03-31
running pressure. (Normal) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Normal running pressure speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Normal running pressure" means the cold inflation pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer increased by 0,2 bar.		 No.039 2010-05-13
RUP (rear underrun protection) [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 rear underrun protection (RUP) RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 22.1.3. "rear underrun protection (RUP)" means the presence at the rear of the vehicle of either:
22.1.3.1. a special RUPD; or
22.1.3.2. body work, chassis parts or other components, such that, by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as totally or partially fulfilling the function of the RUPD.		 No.058 2008-08-30
RUPD [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 RUPD RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 3.1.3. an "RUPD" normally consists of a cross-member and links to the chassis side members or other structural members of the vehicle. No.058 2008-08-30
Rupture [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Rupture Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Rupture" means opening(s) through the casing of any functional cell assembly created or enlarged by an event, large enough for a 12 mm diameter test finger (IPXXB) to penetrate and make contact with live parts (see Annex 3).		 No.100 2015-03-31
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
S [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 S (Rated engine speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.8. "Rated engine speed" means the engine speed at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power as stated by the manufacturer.
The symbol S denotes the numerical value of the rated engine speed expressed in revolutions per minute.		 No.041 2012-11-14
S [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Rated engine speed, S Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated engine speed, S" means the declared engine speed in min-1 (rpm) at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power pursuant to Regulation No 85. If the rated maximum net power is reached at several engine speeds, the highest engine speed shall be used.		 No.051 2007-05-30
S [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 S (Section width) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.075 2011-03-30
S (and D, Dc, V, U ) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 characteristic values D, Dc , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [式 D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [式 Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [式 D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [式 V=]		 No.055 2010-08-28
S (characteristic values) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= 式]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= 式]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [式]		 No.055 2006-12-27
S (Section width) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 S (Section width) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.12. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs; No.054 2008-07-11
S (Section width) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Section width (S) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs;		 No.106 2010-09-30
S (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 S :Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
s (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27a] 　 s : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
S type belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 S-type belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.4. S-type belt : A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.		 No.016 2007-11-30
S type belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 S-type belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
S type belt [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 S-type belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
S λ [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 -shift factor (Sλ) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "-shift factor (Sλ)" means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ratio if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Annex 7 for the calculation of Sλ).		 No.049 2008-04-12
S λ [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 -shift factor (Sλ) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "-shift factor (Sλ)" means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ratio if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Annex 7 for the calculation of Sλ).		 No.049 2010-08-31
S λ [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 S λ (λ-shift factor) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.67. "λ-shift factor (S λ )" means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ratio λ if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Appendix 5 to Annex 4 for the calculation of S λ ).		 No.049 2013-06-24
safety assessment (electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.012 2013-03-27
safety assessment (electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.094 2012-09-20
safety assessment (electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Safety belt (seat belt, belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
safety belt and restraint system (Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Safety belt is not fastened [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety-belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Safety belt reminder [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver's alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.		 No.016 2015-11-20
safety cab or frame (roll-over protection structure) [Directive 2009/057/ECA1] 　 roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] Conditions for EC component type-approval
1. DEFINITION
1.1. A roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that, in the event of roll-over, they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver		 Directive 2009/057/EC
safety cab or frame (Roll-over protection structure) [Directive 2009/075/ECA1] 　 Roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (static testing) [ANNEX I] Conditions for EC component type-approval
1. DEFINITION
1.1. "Roll-over protection structure" (safety cab or frame), hereinafter called "protection structure", means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that during the tests prescribed in Annexes II and III they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.		 Directive 2009/075/EC
safety chair (Child-) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.044 2007-11-23
safety chair (Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child-safety chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Child-safety chair" means a Child Restraint System incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.129 2014-03-29
safety chair (Child-) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Safety glass faced with plastic material [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety-glass faced with plastics material safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Safety-glass faced with plastics material" means glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastics material on its inner face.		 No.043 2014-02-12
safety glazing material (Type of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Type of safety glazing material safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of safety glazing material" means a glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 to 2.7 not exhibiting any essential differences, with respect, in particular, to the principal and secondary characteristics defined in Annexes 4 to 12 and 14 to 16;
2.19.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognised that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual annexes, glazings may be grouped if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics;
2.19.2. Types of glazing exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type. Certain tests may however be carried out on samples of such glazings if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test condition;		 No.043 2014-02-12
safety glazing material (Type of) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Type of safety glazing material Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Type of safety glazing material" means a glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 to 2.7 not exhibiting any essential differences, with respect, in particular, to the principal and secondary characteristics defined in annexes 4 to 12 and 14 to 16;
2.15.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognised that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual annexes, glazings may be grouped if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics;
2.15.2. Types of glazing exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type; certain tests may however be carried out on samples of such glazings if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test condition.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.18.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver’s R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.18.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver’s R point perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Safety Lock System (Child) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Child Safety Lock System door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Child Safety Lock System" is a locking device which can be engaged and released independently of other locking devices and which, when engaged, prevents operation of the interior door handle or other release device. The lock release/engagement device may be manual or electric and may be located anywhere on or in the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Safety sign [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Safety sign Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Safety sign" means a configuration of visual elements intended to convey a safety-related message.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Safety-belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a "belt assembly", which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
2.1.3. Three-point belt
2.1.4. S-type belt
2.1.5. Harness belt		 No.016 2007-11-30
Safety-belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer’s pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Safety-belt is not fastened [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety- belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Safety-belt reminder [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver’s alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.		 No.016 2011-09-09
safety-belt webbing guide (Adult) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2007-11-23
safety-belt webbing guide (Adult) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
safety-belts (Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2007-11-30
safety-belts (Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2011-09-09
safety-belts [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Safety-glass pane faced with plastics material" means a glass pane as defined in paragraphs 2.1 or 2.2 with a layer of plastics material on its inner face;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Sample [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Sample safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Sample" means a specially prepared piece of glazing representative of a finished product or a piece cut from a finished product.		 No.043 2014-02-12
sample (reflector, retro, diameter of the, Angular) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
sample (test) [No.123 2006-12-27A4] 　 test sample Adaptive Front-lighting Systems [Annex 4] TESTS FOR STABILITY OF PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
(b) "test sample" in the following text means correspondingly either the "complete system" or the installation unit under test;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Sample unit [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Sample unit Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Sample unit" means part or all of the retro-reflective material intended to be used to achieve the markings defined in paragraph 2.1.2.		 No.104 2014-03-14
Sample unit [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Sample unit Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Sample unit", a complete, finished SMV plate ready to be mounted on a vehicle and representative of current production.		 No.069 2010-07-31
SB headlamp unit [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) headlamp unit Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2014-05-29
SB headlamp unit (Halogen) [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1", when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21", when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22", when they emit, at the user’s choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2010-07-17
SB unit [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) units Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. SB units are considered to be of different types if they differ in one or more of the following essentials of form or characteristics:
2.4.1. Trade name or mark;
2.4.2. Characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. Inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
2.4.4. The rated voltage (the same approval number may be granted if the only change is of rated voltage);
2.4.5. The rated wattage;
2.4.6. The shape of the filament(s);
2.4.7. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.8. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.4.9. The colour of the light emitted;
2.4.10. The materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.005 2014-05-29
SB unit [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 Sealed beam headlamp unit (SB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2001-05-14
SB units type [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 SB(Sealed beam) units types Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. SB units are considered to be of different types if they differ in one or more of the following essentials of form or characteristics:
2.4.1. Trade name or mark;
2.4.2. Characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. Inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
2.4.4. The rated voltage (the same approval number may be granted if the only change is of rated voltage);
2.4.5. The rated wattage;
2.4.6. The shape of the filament(s);
2.4.7. The kind the beam produced (passing beam, driving beam of both);
2.4.8. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.4.9. The colour of the light emitted;
2.4.10. The materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.005 2001-05-14
SBC [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SBC (standard bench cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SBC) described in this Appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.		 No.083 2012-02-15
SBC [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SBC (Standard Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) described in this appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
2. CATALYST TEMPERATURE CONTROL		 No.083 2015-07-03
Scan tool [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Scan-tool Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.57. "Scan-tool" means external test equipment used for standardised off-board communication with the OBD system in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Scan tool [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Scan-tool Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.74. "Scan-tool" means an external test equipment used for off-board communication with the NCD system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
schedule (accumulation, Service) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Service accumulation schedule Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.58. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;		 No.049 2013-06-24
schedule (accumulation, Service) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Service accumulation schedule Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.75. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;		 No.096 2014-03-22
SDBC [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. Introduction
For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.
The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.
During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2012-02-15
SDBC [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Sealed beam headlamp unit [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) headlamp unit Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2014-05-29
Sealed beam headlamp unit [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 Sealed beam headlamp unit (SB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;		 No.005 2001-05-14
Sealed beam unit [No.005 2014-05-29] 　 SB (Sealed beam) units Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. SB units are considered to be of different types if they differ in one or more of the following essentials of form or characteristics:
2.4.1. Trade name or mark;
2.4.2. Characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. Inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
2.4.4. The rated voltage (the same approval number may be granted if the only change is of rated voltage);
2.4.5. The rated wattage;
2.4.6. The shape of the filament(s);
2.4.7. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.8. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.4.9. The colour of the light emitted;
2.4.10. The materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.005 2014-05-29
sealed-beam headlamp unit (Halogen) [No.031 2010-07-17] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB) asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1", when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21", when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22", when they emit, at the user’s choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2010-07-17
sealed-beam headlamp unit (Halogen) [No.031 2001-06-25] 　 Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1",
when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21",
when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22",
when they emit, at the user's choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;		 No.031 2001-06-25
Seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person;
2.6.1. "Front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R point;
2.6.2. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.6.3. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.6.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
A structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person.
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the ‘foremost H-point’ of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.
2.18.2. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than +10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.18.3. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than +10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.18.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat" means a structure likely to be anchored to the vehicle structure, including its trim and attachment fittings, intended to be used in a vehicle, and to seat one or more adult persons. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.5.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Seat [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Seat burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.6. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one adult person.		 No.108 2015-04-21
seat (Adjustment system of the) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. Longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. Vertical displacement;
2.21.3. Angular displacement.		 No.016 2015-11-20
seat (Adjustment system of the) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. vertical displacement;
2.21.3. angular displacement.		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Adjustment system of the) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. vertical displacement;
2.21.3. angular displacement.		 No.016 2011-09-09
seat (Approval of a) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Approval of a seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a seat" means an approval of a seat type as a component in relation to the protection of the occupants of forward-facing seats with regard to their strength and the design of the seat backs;		 No.080 2013-08-24
seat (Approval of a) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Approval of a seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a seat" means an approval of a seat type as a component in relation to the protection of the occupants of forward-facing seats with regard to their strength and the design of the seat backs;		 No.080 2010-06-30
seat (Auxiliary) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Auxiliary seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Auxiliary seat" means a seat for the manikin mounted on the trolley to the rear of the seat to be tested. This seat shall be representative of the seat to be used in the vehicle behind the seat to be tested;		 No.080 2013-08-24
seat (Auxiliary) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Auxiliary seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Auxiliary seat" means a seat for the manikin mounted on the trolley to the rear of the seat to be tested. This seat shall be representative of the seat to be used in the vehicle behind the seat to be tested.		 No.080 2010-06-30
seat (Bench) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Bench seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.014 2015-08-19
seat (Bench) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat
A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.016 2015-11-20
seat (Bench) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Bench seat burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.108 2015-04-21
seat (Bench) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Bench seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat (bench) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 bench seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.014 2011-04-28
seat (Bench) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat : A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Bench) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat
A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.016 2011-09-09
seat (Bench) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Bench seat Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.4. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.017 2006-12-27
seat (Bench) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Bench seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;		 No.017 2010-08-31
seat (Bench) [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Bench seat Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.6. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.		 No.118 2010-07-10
seat (Demountable) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Demountable seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Demountable seat" means a seat that can be easily detached from the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
seat (Demountable) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Demountable seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Demountable seat" means a seat that can be easily detached from the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
seat (Demountable) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Demountable seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Demountable seat" means a seat that can be easily detached from the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
seat (Displacement system of the) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Displacement system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. Displacement system of the seat
A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).		 No.016 2015-11-20
seat (Displacement system of the) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Displacement system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. Displacement system of the seat
A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Displacement system of the) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Displacement system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. Displacement system of the seat
A device enabling the seat or one of its parts to be displaced angularly or longitudinally, without a fixed intermediate position (to facilitate access by passengers).		 No.016 2011-09-09
seat (Double) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Double seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of two seated passengers side by side; two seats side by side and having no interconnection shall be regarded as two individual seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
seat (Double) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Double seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of two seated passengers side by side; two seats side by side and having no interconnection shall be regarded as two individual seats;		 No.080 2010-06-30
seat (Folding) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Folding seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use which is normally folded;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat (Folding) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Folding seat Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.9. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.017 2006-12-27
seat (Folding) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Folding seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.017 2010-08-31
seat (Folding) [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Folding seat Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Folding seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use and normally folded;		 No.025 2005-12-16
seat (Group of) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Group of seats Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult person;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat (Group of) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Group of seats safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult person;		 No.014 2015-08-19
seat (Group of) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats : Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front of the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Group of) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats
Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front or the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2015-11-20
seat (Group of) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Group of seats burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.7. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and which accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.108 2015-04-21
seat (Group of) [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Group of seats Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.5. "Group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. withthe foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in linewith or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and which accommodate one or moreseated adult persons.		 No.118 2010-07-10
seat (group of) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 group of seats safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "group of seats" means either a bench-type seat, or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. with the foremost anchorages of one seat in line with or forward of the rearmost anchorages and in line with or behind the foremost anchorages of another seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult person;		 No.014 2011-04-28
seat (Group of) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats
Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front of the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Group of) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Group of seats Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. Group of seats
Either a bench-type seat or seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. fixed so that front seat anchorages of one of these seats are in line with the front of the rear anchorages of the other or between the anchorages of the other seat) and accommodate one or more seated adult persons.		 No.016 2011-09-09
seat (Individual) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Individual seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Individual seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of one seated passenger;		 No.080 2013-08-24
seat (Individual) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Individual seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Individual seat" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of one seated passenger;		 No.080 2010-06-30
seat (Locking system of the) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Locking system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. Locking system of the seat
A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.		 No.016 2015-11-20
seat (Locking system of the) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Locking system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. Locking system of the seat : A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Locking system of the) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Locking system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. Locking system of the seat
A device ensuring that the seat and its parts are maintained in any position of use.		 No.016 2011-09-09
seat (passenger, Front) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Front passenger seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.1. "Front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or
in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R point;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat (passenger, front) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 front passenger seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H-point" of the seat in question is in
or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver's R-point.		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat (Priority) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Priority seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Priority seat" means a seat with additional space for a passenger with reduced mobility and marked accordingly.		 No.107 2015-06-18
seat (Priority) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Priority seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Priority seat" means a seat with additional space for a passenger with reduced mobility and marked accordingly.		 No.107 2006-12-27
seat (Priority) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Priority seat Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Priority seat" means a seat with additional space for a passenger with reduced mobility and marked accordingly.		 No.107 2010-09-29
seat (Reference point of the) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Reference point of the seat (H point) head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Reference point" of the seat ("H point") (see Annex 3 to this Regulation) means the trace, in a vertical plane longitudinal in relation to the seat, of the theoretical axis of rotation between the leg and the torso of a human body represented by a manikin;		 No.025 2010-08-14
seat (Row of) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Row of seats Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Row of seats" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of three or more seated passengers side by side; several individual or double seats arranged side by side shall not be regarded as a row of seats;		 No.080 2010-06-30
seat (Row of) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Row of seats strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Row of seats" means a seat designed and constructed for the accommodation of three or more seated passengers side by side; several individual or double seats arranged side by side shall not be regarded as a row of seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
seat (Type of) [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Type of seat Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Type of seat" means a category of seats which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish and colour;		 No.025 2005-12-16
seat (Type of) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Type of seat head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Type of seat" means a category of seats which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish and colour;		 No.025 2010-08-14
seat (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle seat Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
"Group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons.
"Vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person.
"Vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them.
"Vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.		 No.129 2014-03-29
seat (Vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
seat (Vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats;
2.20.5. "ISOFIX position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal ISOFIX lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Seat [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat as well as part of a bench seat intended to seat one person;
2.6.1. "front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver’s R point;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Seat [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat : A structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Seat [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
A structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person.
2.18.1. "A front passenger seat" means any seat where the "foremost H-point" of the seat in question is in or in front of the vertical transverse plane through the driver’s R-point.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Seat [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Seat Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.3. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Seat [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.3.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which, with regard to its alignment with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle, does not meet either of the definitions given in paragraph 2.3.1 or 2.3.2 above;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Seat [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5 "Seat" means a structure likely to be anchored to the vehicle structure, including its trim and attachment fittings, intended to be used in a vehicle, and to seat one or more adult persons;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Seat [No.118 2010-07-10] 　 Seat Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.4. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete withtrim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a benchseat intended to seat one adult person.		 No.118 2010-07-10
seat adjustment range (Extended) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Extended seat-adjustment range Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Extended seat-adjustment range" means the range designated by the vehicle manufacturer for the adjustment of the seat in the direction of the X axis (see paragraph 2.3 above) beyond the range of normal driving positions specified in paragraph 2.16 and used for converting seats into beds or facilitating entry to the vehicle.		 No.125 2010-07-31
seat adjustment range (Horizontal) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Horizontal seat-adjustment range Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Horizontal seat-adjustment range" means the range of normal driving positions designated by the vehicle manufacturer for the adjustment of the driver’s seat in the direction of the X axis (see paragraph 2.3 above).		 No.125 2010-07-31
Seat anchorage [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Seat anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Seat anchorage [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage
The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
seat anchorage (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.129 2014-03-29
seat anchorage (Vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
seat anchorage (Vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Seat anchorage [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Seat anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat anchorage [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 seat anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Seat anchorage [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage : The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Seat anchorage [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage
The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Seat back [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat-back Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat-back" means the part of the seat that is almost vertical, designed to support the passenger’s back, shoulders and, possibly, his head;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Seat back [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Seat-back strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat-back" means the part of the seat that is almost vertical, designed to support the passenger’s back, shoulders and, possibly, his head;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Seat back angle [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Seat-back angle" means the inclination of the seat back in relation to the vertical.		 No.061 2010-06-30
Seat back angle [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6 or 2.7.		 No.125 2010-07-31
seat back angle (Actual) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Actual seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle formed by the vertical through the ‘H’ point with the torso reference line of the human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.		 No.061 2010-06-30
seat back angle (Actual) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Actual seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6.		 No.125 2010-07-31
seat back angle (Design) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Design seat-back angle safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle between the vertical line through the R point and the torso line defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.043 2014-02-12
seat back angle (Design) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 Design seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle prescribed by the manufacturer which:
1.5.1. determines the seat-back angle for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat by the vehicle manufacturer;
1.5.2. is formed at the ‘R’ point by the vertical and the torso reference line;
1.5.3. corresponds theoretically to the actual seat-back angle.		 No.061 2010-06-30
seat back angle (Design) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Design seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.7.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Seat back angle [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Seat back angle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Seat back angle" means the design torso angle as defined in annex 19 of this Regulation.		 No.043 2010-08-31
seat belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a "belt assembly", which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
2.1.3. Three-point belt
2.1.4. S-type belt
2.1.5. Harness belt		 No.016 2007-11-30
seat belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer’s body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer’s pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2011-09-09
seat belt [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ‘belt assembly’, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Seat bight [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Seat bight Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat-back.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Seat bight [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Seat bight Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat back.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Seat bight [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Seat bight Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat back.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Seat cushion [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Seat cushion strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat cushion" means the part of the seat which is arranged almost horizontally and designed to support a seated passenger;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Seat cushion [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat cushion Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat cushion" means the part of the seat which is arranged almost horizontally and designed to support a seated passenger;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Seat Fixture (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 VSF (Vehicle Seat Fixture) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Vehicle Seat Fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes whose dimensions are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Appendix 2 to Annex 17 to Regulation No. 16, used by a Child Restraint System manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.129 2014-03-29
seat fixture (Vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in figures 1 to 6 of annex 17 appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an Isofix child restraint system and the location of its Isofix attachments.		 No.044 2007-11-23
seat fixture (Vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Annex 17 Appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX child restraint system and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.044 2011-09-09
seat reference point [Directive 2009/076/EC] 　 seat reference point driver-perceived noise level of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX III] DETERMINATION OF SEAT REFERENCE POINT
1. DEFINITION
1.1. The seat reference point (S) shall be the point in the central longitudinal plane of the seat where the tangential plane of the lower backrest and a horizontal plane intersect. This horizontal plane cuts the lower surface of the seat-pan board 150 mm in front of the seat reference point.		 Directive 2009/076/EC
Seat spacing [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Seat spacing strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Seat spacing" means, in the case of seats facing in the same direction, the distance between the front of a seat squab and the back of the seat squab of the seat preceding it, measured horizontally at the height of 620 mm above the floor.		 No.080 2013-08-24
Seat spacing [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat spacing Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Seat spacing" means, in the case of seats facing in the same direction, the distance between the front of a seat squab and the back of the seat squab of the seat preceding it, measured horizontally at the height of 620 mm above the floor.		 No.080 2010-06-30
Seat type [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Seat type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat type" means a category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.9.1. The shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure,
2.9.2. The types and dimensions of the adjustment systems and all locking systems,
2.9.3. The type and dimensions of the belt anchorages on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Seat type [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Seat type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. Seat type
A category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.23.1. The shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;
2.23.2. The types and dimensions of the seat lock adjustment and locking systems;
2.23.3. The type and dimensions of the belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Seat type [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Seat type strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Seat type" means seats which do not differ essentially with respect to the following characteristics likely to affect their strength and their aggressiveness:
2.3.1. Structure, shape, dimensions and materials of the load bearing parts;
2.3.2. Types and dimensions of the seat back adjustment and locking system;
2.3.3. Dimensions, structure and materials of the attachments and supports (e.g. legs);		 No.080 2013-08-24
Seat type [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Seat type Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Seat type" means a category of adult seats which do not differ in such essential respects as the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure, the types and dimensions of the seat-lock adjustment and locking systems, and the type and dimensions of the adult safety- belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage, and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Seat type [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Seat type Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat type" means a category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure,
2.10.2. the types and dimensions of the adjustment systems and all locking systems,
2.10.3. the type and dimensions of the belt anchorages on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seat type [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 seat type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "seat type" means a category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.9.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure,
2.9.2. the types and dimensions of the adjustment systems and all locking systems,
2.9.3. the type and dimensions of the belt anchorages on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2011-04-28
Seat type [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Seat type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. Seat type
A category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.23.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;
2.23.2. the types and dimensions of the seat lock adjustment and locking systems;
2.23.3. the type and dimensions of the belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Seat type [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Seat type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. Seat type
A category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.23.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;
2.23.2. the types and dimensions of the seat lock adjustment and locking systems;
2.23.3. the type and dimensions of the belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Seat type [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Seat type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Seat type" means a category of adult seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.23.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;
2.23.2. the types and dimensions of the seat-back adjustment and locking systems; and
2.23.3. the type and dimensions of the adult safety-belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage, and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Seat type [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Seat type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Seat type" means a category of adult seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.23.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;
2.23.2. the types and dimensions of the seat-lock adjustment and locking systems; and
2.23.3. the type and dimensions of the adult safety-belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage, and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Seat type [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat type Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Seat type" means seats which do not differ essentially with respect to the following characteristics likely to affect their strength and their aggressiveness:
2.3.1. Structure, shape, dimensions and materials of the load bearing parts;
2.3.2. Types and dimensions of the seat back adjustment and locking system;
2.3.3. Dimensions, structure and materials of the attachments and supports (e.g. legs);		 No.080 2010-06-30
seating position (i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size seating position Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "i-Size seating position" means a seating position, if defined by the vehicle manufacturer, which is designed to accommodate an i-Size child restraint system, as defined in Regulation No 129, and fulfils the requirements defined in this Regulation.		 No.016 2015-11-20
seating position (Size, i) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 i-Size seating position safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "i-Size seating position" means a seating position, if any defined by the vehicle manufacturer, which is designed to accommodate an i-Size child restraint system, as defined in Regulation No 129, and fulfils the requirements defined in this Regulation.		 No.014 2015-08-19
seating reference point [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.014 2007-12-06
seating reference point [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 "R" point" or "seating reference point" Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.016 2007-11-30
seating reference point [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.017 2006-12-27
seating reference point [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R" point or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by a vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.025 2010-08-14
seating reference point [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 seating reference point (R point) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "R point" means the seating reference point as defined in Annex 4, paragraph 2.4.		 No.029 2010-11-20
seating reference point [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 seating reference point (R point) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
seating reference point [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 R point (seating reference point) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by a vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.046 2010-07-10
seating reference point [No.061 2010-06-30A3] 　 "R" point or "seating reference point" external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. The "R" point or "seating reference point" is the reference point specified by the manufacturer which:
1.2.1. has coordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
1.2.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/legs rotation ("H" point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat provided by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.061 2010-06-30
seating reference point [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 ""R" point" or "seating reference point" Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. ""R" point" or "seating reference point" means a design point defined by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position and established with respect to the three-dimensional reference system;		 No.080 2010-06-30
seating reference point [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him;		 No.095 2007-11-30
seating reference point [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 "R point" or "seating reference point" Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "R point" or "seating reference point" means the reference point specified by the vehicle manufacturer which:
2.4.1. Has co-ordinates determined in relation to the vehicle structure;
2.4.2. Corresponds to the theoretical position of the point of torso/thighs rotation (H point) for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given by the vehicle manufacturer for each seating position specified by him.		 No.095 2015-07-10
seating reference point [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 R point (seating reference point) Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "R point or seating reference point" means the point defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.4.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Second axis [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Second axis Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.11. "Second axis", an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90° < β 1 < 90° as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Second axis [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second axis (symbol 2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.12. "Second axis (symbol 2)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90° ＜ β1 ＜ 90° as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.		 No.104 2014-03-14
Second component of the entrance angle [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90° ＜ β2 ＜ 90°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
Second component of the entrance angle (β2) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.10. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2)", the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis. Range: – 90° ≤ β 2 ≤ 90°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Second level warning [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Second level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Second level warning" means a visual and audible warning activated when a driver operates a vehicle without fastening the safety-belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Second level warning [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Second level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Second level warning" means a visual and audible warning activated when a driver operates a vehicle without fastening the safety-belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Secondary air [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Secondary air Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Secondary air" refers to air introduced into the exhaust system by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO contained in the exhaust gas stream		 No.083 2012-02-15
secondary air [REG. No 692/2008] 　 secondary air emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 21. "secondary air" means the air introduced into the exhaust system by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO contained in the exhaust gas stream; REG. No 692/2008
Secondary brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Secondary brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Secondary brake system" means the second service brake system on a vehicle equipped with a combined brake system.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Secondary characteristic [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Secondary characteristic Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Secondary characteristic" means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way which is of significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Secondary characteristic [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary characteristic safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Secondary characteristic" means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way which is of significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Secondary grooves (Tread pattern) [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Secondary grooves (Tread pattern) Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.30.2. "Secondary grooves" means the supplementary grooves of the tread pattern which may disappear in the course of the tyre's life. No.030 2008-07-30
Secondary image [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary image safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Secondary image" means a spurious or ghost image, in addition to the bright primary image, usually seen at night when the object being viewed is very bright in relation to its surroundings, for example, the headlights of an approaching vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Secondary image separation [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary image separation safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Secondary image separation" means the angular distance between the position of the primary and secondary images.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Secondary latched position [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Secondary latched position door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Secondary latched position" refers to the coupling condition of the latch that retains the door in a partially closed position		 No.011 2010-05-13
section (Body) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Body section" means a structural unit, which represents one part of the superstructure for the purposes of an approval test. A body section contains at least two bays connected by representative connecting elements (side, roof, and underfloor, structures).		 No.066 2007-12-06
section (Body) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Body section" means a structural unit, which represents one part of the superstructure for the purposes of an approval test. A body section contains at least two bays connected by representative connecting elements (side, roof, and underfloor, structures).		 No.066 2011-03-30
section (body, Artificial) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.		 No.066 2007-12-06
section (body, Artificial) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.		 No.066 2011-03-30
section (body, Original) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
section (body, Original) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Section height [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Section height Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.14. "Section height" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Section height [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 H (Section height) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Section height (H)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Section height [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Section height (h) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Section height (h)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Section height [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Section height 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Section height" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Section height [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Section height Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Section height" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Section height (H) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Section height (H) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.14. "Section height (H)" means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter; No.054 2008-07-11
Section width [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Section width Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.12. "Section width" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Section width [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 S (Section width) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Section width [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Section width (S) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Section width [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Section width 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Section width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Section width [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Section width Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Section width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Section width (S) [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Section width (S) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.12. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs; No.054 2008-07-11
segment (Height of) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Height of segment "h" Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Height of segment "h"" means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glass pane, separating the inner surface of the pane from a plane passing through the ends of the pane (see annex 17, figure 1);		 No.043 2010-08-31
segment h (Height of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Height of segment "h" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Height of segment "h" " means the maximum distance, measured at right angles approximately to the glazing, separating the inner surface of the glazing from a plane passing through the ends of the glazing (see Annex 17, Figure 1).		 No.043 2014-02-12
Selective braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Selective braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Selective braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Selective braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Selective braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Selective braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Selective braking [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Selective braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Selective yellow [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Selective-yellow Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.2. "Selective-yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] SY12,SY23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
self adaptability [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 self adaptability Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "self adaptability" means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant;		 No.049 2008-04-12
self adaptability [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 self adaptability Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "self adaptability" means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Self check [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Self-check Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Self-check" means an integrated function that checks for a system failure on a semi-continuous basis at least while the system is active.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Self steering [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Self-steering Steering equipment 2.5.2.3. "Self-steering" means equipment in which the steering forces are produced by a change in direction of the towing vehicle and in which the movement of the steered trailer wheels is firmly linked to the relative angle between the longitudinal axis of the trailer frame or a load replacing it and the longitudinal axis of the sub-frame to which the axle(s) is (are) attached; No.079 2008-05-27
Self supporting tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Self supporting tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.7. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode. No.030 2008-07-30
Self supporting tyre [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Self supporting tyre Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Self tracking steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Self-tracking steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.2.1. "Self-tracking steering equipment" means a system designed to create a change of steering angle on one or more wheels only when acted upon by forces and/or moments applied through the tyre to road contact.n No.079 2008-05-27
Semi circle of vision [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point
situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc — seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels — is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2);		 No.071 2004-03-31
Semi circle of vision [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc – seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels – is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2).		 No.071 2010-07-31
Semi continuous braking [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Semi continuous braking [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
semi universal (child restraint) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 semi-universal (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Sensor [No.078 2004-03-31A4] 　 Sensor Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Sensor" means a component designed to identify and transmit to the controller the conditions of rotation of the wheel(s) or the dynamic conditions of the vehicle;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Sensor [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Sensor Alarm systems 2.2. "Sensor" means a device which senses a change which could be caused by intrusion into or interference
with a vehicle;		 No.097 2008-12-30
Sensor [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Sensor alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Sensor" means a device which senses a change which could be caused by intrusion into or interference with a vehicle;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Sensor [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Sensor Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.3. "Sensor" means a device that senses a change that could be caused by intrusion into or interference with a vehicle.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Sensor [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Sensor Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.3. "Sensor" means a device which senses a change which could be caused by intrusion into or interference with a vehicle.		 No.116 2012-02-16
sensor (Pressure or temperature) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure or temperature sensor LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.13. "Pressure or temperature sensor" means a device which measures pressure or temperature;		 No.067 2008-03-14
sensor (Pressure) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure sensor/indicator using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Separate compartment [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Separate compartment [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors		 No.107 2010-09-29
Separate compartment [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Separate head restraint [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Separate head restraint Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back.
Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2. or 2.12.3. below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Separate head restraint [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Separate head restraint seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Head restraint" means a device whose purpose is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident;
2.12.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint formed by the upper part of the seat-back. Head restraints meeting the definitions of paragraphs 2.12.2 or 2.12.3 below but which can only be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure by the use of tools or by partial or complete removal of the seat covering, meet the present definition;
2.12.2. "Detachable head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separable from the seat designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat-back structure;
2.12.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint consisting of a component separate from the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Separate head restraint [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Separate head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult
occupant's head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head
restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Separate head restraint [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Separate head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Head restraint" means a device whose function is to limit the rearward displacement of an adult occupant’s head in relation to his torso in order to reduce the danger of injury to the cervical vertebrae of that occupant in the event of an accident;
2.2.1. "Integrated head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by the upper part of the seat back. Head restraints corresponding to the definitions in paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 below, but which cannot be detached from the seat or the vehicle structure except by the use of tools or following the partial or total removal of the seat furnishings, correspond to this definition;
2.2.2. "Removable head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a component separable from the seat, designed for insertion and positive retention in the seat back structure;
2.2.3. "Separate head restraint" means a head restraint constituted by a separate component of the seat, designed for insertion and/or positive retention in the structure of the vehicle;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Separate heating compartment [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Separate heating compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Separate heating compartment" means a compartment for a combustion heater located outside the interior compartment and the engine compartment.		 No.108 2015-04-21
separate technical unit [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 separate technical unit (STU) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
Separate technical unit [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Separate technical unit alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Separate technical unit" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately, but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Separate technical unit [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Separate technical unit [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type- approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Separate technical unit [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Separate technical unit [No.116 2012-02-16] 　 Separate technical unit Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.2. "Separate technical unit" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately, but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing;		 No.116 2012-02-16
separate technical unit (Approval of a) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2. with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2006-12-27
separate technical unit (Approval of a) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2010-09-29
separate technical unit (vehicle or a, Approval of a) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 above with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.107 2015-06-18
separation (Cord) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Cord separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.		 No.075 2011-03-30
separation (Cord) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Cord separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating;		 No.106 2010-09-30
separation (Cord) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Cord separation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.		 No.108 2006-07-04
separation (Cord) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Cord separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.		 No.109 2006-07-04
separation (image, Secondary) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Secondary image separation safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Secondary image separation" means the angular distance between the position of the primary and secondary images.		 No.043 2014-02-12
separation (Ply) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Ply separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies.		 No.075 2011-03-30
separation (Ply) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Ply separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies;		 No.106 2010-09-30
separation (Ply) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Ply separation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies.		 No.108 2006-07-04
separation (Ply) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Ply separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Ply separation" means the parting of adjacent plies.		 No.109 2006-07-04
separation (Tread) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tread separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.		 No.075 2011-03-30
separation (Tread) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass;		 No.106 2010-09-30
separation (Tread) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread separation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.		 No.108 2006-07-04
separation (Tread) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tread separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.		 No.109 2006-07-04
sequence (operating) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 operating sequence Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"operating sequence" means the sequence used for determining the conditions for extinguishing the MI. It consists of an engine start-up, an operating period, an engine shut-off, and the time until the next start-up, where the OBD monitoring is running and a malfunction would be detected if present;		 No.049 2008-04-12
sequence (Operating) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Operating sequence Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Operating sequence" means a sequence consisting of an engine start, an operating period (of the engine), an engine shut-off, and the time until the next start, where a specific OBD monitor runs to completion and a malfunction would be detected if present;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Service accumulation schedule [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Service accumulation schedule Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.58. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Service accumulation schedule [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Service accumulation schedule Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.75. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;		 No.096 2014-03-22
service brake (Combined) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Combined service brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Combined service brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Service brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Service brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Service brake system" means a brake system which is used for slowing the vehicle when in motion.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Service coupling [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Service coupling LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Service coupling" means a coupling in the fuel line between the fuel container and the engine. If a mono-fuel vehicle is out of fuel the engine can be operated by means of a service fuel container which can be coupled to the service coupling;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Service description [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Service description Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Service description" means the association of a load capacity index with a speed category symbol
2.26.1. In case of implement tyres the service description is supplemented with the relevant symbol for the type of application concerned (traction or trailer) as defined in paragraphs 2.23 and 2.24.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Service description [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Service description 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Service description" means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Service description [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Service description Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Service description" means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
service description (Supplementary) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Supplementary service description Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Supplementary service description" means an additional service description, marked within a circle, to identify a special type of service (load rating and speed category) to which the tyre type is also allowed in addition to the applicable load variation with speed (see annex 7).		 No.106 2010-09-30
Service disconnect [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Service disconnect Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Service disconnect" means the device for deactivation of the electrical circuit when conducting checks and services of the RESS, fuel cell stack, etc.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Service disconnect [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Service disconnect Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Service disconnect" means the device for deactivation of the electrical circuit when conducting checks and services of the REESS, fuel cell stack, etc.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Service door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Service door" means a door intended for use by passengers in normal circumstances with the driver seated:		 No.107 2006-12-27
Service door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Service door" means a door intended for use by passengers in normal circumstances with the driver seated:		 No.107 2010-09-29
Service door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Service door" means a door intended for use by passengers in normal circumstances with the driver seated.		 No.107 2015-06-18
service door (Automatically operated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2006-12-27
service door (Automatically operated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Automatically operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2010-09-29
service door (Driver operated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2006-12-27
service door (Driver operated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver		 No.107 2010-09-29
service door (operated, Automatically) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.		 No.107 2015-06-18
service door (operated, Driver) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Driver operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Driver operated service door" means a service door which normally is opened and closed by the driver.		 No.107 2015-06-18
service door (operated, Power) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2015-06-18
service door (Power-operated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2006-12-27
service door (Power-operated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Power-operated service door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Power-operated service door" means a service door which is operated exclusively by energy other than muscular energy and the opening and closing of which, if not automatically operated, is remotely controlled by the driver or a member of the crew.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Service door lighting [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Service-door lighting Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Service-door lighting" means a lighting device(s) of the vehicle designed to illuminate the exterior vicinity of service doors and wheels.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Service door lighting [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Service-door lighting Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Service-door lighting" means a lighting device(s) of the vehicle designed to illuminate the exterior vicinity of service doors and wheels.		 No.107 2015-06-18
service life [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 service life Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.20. service life: The life in years during which the cylinders may safely be used in accordance with the standard service conditions		 No.110 2008-03-14
Service life [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Service life using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.65. "Service life" means the life in years during which the cylinders may safely be used in accordance with the standard service conditions.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Service mode [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Service mode Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.59. "Service mode" means a special mode of a dual-fuel engine that is activated for the purpose of repairing, or of moving the vehicle from the traffic when operation in the dual-fuel mode is not possible ( 1 )		 No.049 2013-06-24
Service pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Service pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Service pressure [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Service pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15℃.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Service pressure [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Service pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Service pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Service pressure" or "Operating pressure" using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.2. "Service pressure" or "Operating pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C. Service pressure for LNG means the intended settled pressure of the tank in use –as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Service valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Service valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.13. "Service valve" means an isolation valve which is closed only when servicing the vehicle.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Service valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Service valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.24. "Service valve" means an isolation valve that is closed only when servicing the vehicle.		 No.110 2015-06-30
service valve with excess flow valve (Remotely controlled) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Servo steering equipment [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Servo-steering equipment Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1.2. "Different types of steering equipment"
1.2.1.3. Servo-steering equipment, in which the steering power is provided solely by the special equipment defined in
point 1.1.4		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Set [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Set Alarm systems 2.5. "Set" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition can be transmitted to warning devices; No.097 2008-12-30
Set [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Set alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Set" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition can be transmitted to warning devices;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Set [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Set Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.6. "Set" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition can be transmitted to warning devices.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Set [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Set Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.6. "Set" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition can be transmitted to warning devices.		 No.116 2012-02-16
set (Un-) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Unset alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices;		 No.097 2012-05-08
set (Un-) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Unset Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.7. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices.		 No.116 2010-06-30
set (Un-) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Unset Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.7. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Set speed Vset [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Set speed Vset Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Set speed Vset" means the intended mean vehicle speed when operating in a stabilised condition;		 No.089 2007-06-19
Set state [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Set state alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.4. "Set state" means the state in which the vehicle cannot be driven normally under its own power.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Set state [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Set state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.4. "Set state" means the state in which the vehicle cannot be driven normally under its own power.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Set state [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Set state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.4. "Set state" means the state in which the vehicle cannot be driven normally under its own power.		 No.116 2012-02-16
set state (Un-) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Unset state alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.097 2012-05-08
set state (Un-) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Unset state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.116 2010-06-30
set state (Un-) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Unset state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.116 2012-02-16
setting (engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine setting Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine setting" means a specific engine/vehicle configuration that includes the emission control strategy (ECS), one single engine performance rating (the approved full-load curve) and, if used, one set of torque limiters;		 No.049 2008-04-12
setting (engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine setting Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine setting" means a specific engine/vehicle configuration that includes the emission control strategy (ECS), one single engine performance rating (the approved full-load curve) and, if used, one set of torque limiters;		 No.049 2010-08-31
settled pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 settled pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.21. settled pressure: The gas pressure when a given settled temperature is reached.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Settled pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Settled pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.66. "Settled pressure" means the gas pressure when a given settled temperature is reached.		 No.110 2015-06-30
settled temperature [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 settled temperature Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.22. settled temperature: The uniform gas temperature after any change in temperature caused by filling has dissipated.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Settled temperature [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Settled temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.67. "Settled temperature" means the uniform gas temperature after any change in temperature caused by filling has dissipated.		 No.110 2015-06-30
SFAD [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Static force application device (SFAD) Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle Isofix anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture is described in the figures 1 and 2 of Annex 9.		 No.014 2007-12-06
SFAD [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 SFAD (static force application device) safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle Isofix anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture is described in the figures 1 and 2 of Annex 9.		 No.014 2011-04-28
SFAD [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 SFAD (Static force application device) safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle ISOFIX anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture for lower anchorages and top tethers is described in the Figures 1 and 2, Annex 9, as well as an SFAD SL (Support Leg) to assess i-Size seating positions with regard to the vehicle floor strength. An example for such an SFAD SL is given in Figure 3 of Annex 10;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Shade band [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Shade band Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Shade band" means any area of the glazing with a reduced regular transmittance.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Shade band [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Shade band safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Shade band" means any area of the glazing with a reduced light transmittance, excluding any opaque obscuration.		 No.043 2014-02-12
shaft (Steering) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering shaft protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Steering shaft" means the component which transmits to the steering gear the torque applied to the steering control;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Shared atmospheric pressure meter [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared atmospheric pressure meter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.76. "Shared atmospheric pressure meter" means an atmospheric pressure meter whose output is used as the atmospheric pressure for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Shared humidity measurement [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Shared humidity measurement Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.77. "Shared humidity measurement" means a humidity measurement that is used as the humidity for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;		 No.096 2014-03-22
sharp edge [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 sharp edge Interior fittings 2.18. A "sharp edge" is an edge of a rigid material having a radius of curvature of less than 2,5 mm except in the case of projections of less than 3,2 mm, measured from the panel according to the procedure described in paragraph 1 of Annex VI. In this case, the minimum radius of curvature shall not apply provided the height of the projection is not more than half its width and its edges are blunted (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraph 2.18). No.021 2008-07-16
shield (Impact) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Impact shield Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Impact shield’ means a device secured in front of the child and designed to distribute the restraining forces over the greater part of the height of the child's body in the event of a frontal impact.		 No.044 2007-11-23
shield (Impact) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Impact shield Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Impact shield" means a device secured in front of the child and designed to distribute the restraining forces over the greater part of the height of the child’s body in the event of a frontal impact.		 No.044 2011-09-09
shield (Impact) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Impact shield Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Impact shield" means a device secured in front of the child and designed to distribute the restraining forces over the greater part of the height of the child's body in the event of a frontal impact.		 No.129 2014-03-29
shift factor [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 -shift factor (Sλ) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "-shift factor (Sλ)" means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ratio if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Annex 7 for the calculation of Sλ).		 No.049 2008-04-12
shift factor [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 -shift factor (Sλ) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "-shift factor (Sλ)" means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ratio if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Annex 7 for the calculation of Sλ).		 No.049 2010-08-31
Shoe assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Shoe assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake;
2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining;		 No.090 2010-05-28
Shoe assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Shoe assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.		 No.090 2012-07-13
shoulder restraint [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 shoulder restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
shoulder restraint [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 shoulder restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child’s upper torso;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Shoulder strap [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Shoulder strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Shoulder strap" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Shoulder strap positioner [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Shoulder strap positioner Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.55. "Shoulder strap positioner" means a device intended to maintain, during normal transit conditions, the appropriate shoulder strap position on the child’s torso by connecting the shoulder straps to one another.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Shut off valve [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Shut-off valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.8. "Shut-off valve" means a device to cut off the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
side (left, Frame) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame: left side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Frame: left side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle		 No.060 2014-10-15
side (left, Handlebar) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: left side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8."Handlebars: left side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
side (Right / left) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Right side / left side Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Right side" respectively "left side" means the combined total of the lighting units intended to be installed to that side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle, relative to its forward motion;		 No.123 2006-12-27
side (Right / left) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Right side / left side Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Right side" respectively "left side" means the combined total of the lighting units intended to be installed to that side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle, relative to its forward motion;		 No.123 2010-08-24
side (right, Frame) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Frame: right side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Frame: right side" means any part of the frame which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle		 No.060 2014-10-15
side (right, Handlebar) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Handlebars: right side Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7."Handlebars: right side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Side facing seat [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Side-facing seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Side facing seat [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Side-facing seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. Seat
2.18.4. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Side facing seat [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Side-facing seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Seat" means a structure which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure complete with trim, intended to seat one adult person. The term covers both an individual seat or part of a bench seat intended to seat one person. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.3.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;
2.3.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which, with regard to its alignment with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle, does not meet either of the definitions given in paragraph 2.3.1 or 2.3.2 above;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Side facing seat [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Side-facing seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat" means a structure likely to be anchored to the vehicle structure, including its trim and attachment fittings, intended to be used in a vehicle, and to seat one or more adult persons. Depending on its orientation, a seat is defined as follows:
2.5.1. "Forward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the front of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.2. "Rearward-facing seat" means a seat which can be used while the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of less than + 10° or – 10° with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle.
2.5.3. "Side-facing seat" means a seat which can be used whilst the vehicle is in motion and which faces towards the side of the vehicle in such a manner that the vertical plane of symmetry of the seat forms an angle of 90° (± 10°) with the vertical plane of symmetry of the vehicle;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Side front door [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Side front door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Side front door" is a door that, in a side view, has 50 per cent or more of its opening area forward of the rearmost point on the driver’s seat back, when the seat back is adjusted to its most vertical and rearward position, providing direct access for passengers to enter or depart the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
side lamp (Front) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Front position (side) lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.16. "Front position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the front;		 No.086 2010-09-30
side lamp (Rear) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Rear position (side) lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.17. "Rear position (side) lamp" means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the rear;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Side marker lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Side marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.24. "Side marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;e No.048 2008-05-23
Side marker lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Side marker lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.24. "Side marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Side marker lamp [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamp Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Side-marker lamp" means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;		 No.091 2010-06-30
Side marker lamp of different type [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamps of different types Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Side-marker lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.091 2010-06-30
Side rear door [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Side rear door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Side rear door" is a door that, in a side view, has 50 per cent or more of its opening area to the rear of the rearmost point on the driver’s seat back, when the driver’s seat is adjusted to its most vertical and rearward position, providing direct access for passengers to enter or depart the vehicle.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Side slip [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Side slip angle [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Side wall [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Side wall Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Side wall" means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Side wall [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Side wall Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Side wall" means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Sidewall [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Sidewall Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.9. "Sidewall" means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the bead (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Sidewall [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Sidewall Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.9. "Sidewall" means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange; No.054 2008-07-11
Sidewall [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Sidewall Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Sidewall" means the part of the tyre, excluding the tread, which is visible when the tyre, fitted to a rim, is viewed from the side;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Sidewall [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Sidewall 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Sidewall" means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Sidewall veneer [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Sidewall veneer 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Sidewall veneer" is material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Sidewall veneer [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Sidewall veneer Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Sidewall veneer" is a material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed.		 No.109 2006-07-04
sign (Safety) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Safety sign Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Safety sign" means a configuration of visual elements intended to convey a safety-related message.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Signal [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Signal Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.10. "Signal" means any AFS control signal as defined in Regulation No. 48 or, any additional control input to the system or, a control output from the system to the vehicle;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Signal [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Signal Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.10. "Signal" means any AFS control signal as defined in Regulation No 48 or, any additional control input to the system or, a control output from the system to the vehicle;		 No.123 2010-08-24
signal (alert, collision, Rear end) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision		 No.048 2011-12-06
signal (Braking) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.30.		 No.013 2010-09-30
signal (Braking) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph. 5.2.1.30.		 No.013 2016-02-18
signal (Braking) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.22.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
signal (Braking) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.22 of this Regulation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
signal (braking, Emergency) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.		 No.013 2010-09-30
signal (braking, Emergency) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.		 No.013 2016-02-18
signal (braking, Emergency) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23 of this Regulation.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
signal (HIAS) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "HIAS signal" means any control signal or, any additional control input to the system or, a control output from the system to the motorcycle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
signal (stop, Emergency) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Emergency stop signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Emergency stop signal" means a signal to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that a high retardation force has been applied to the vehicle relative to the prevailing road conditions.		 No.048 2011-12-06
signal (warning, Hazard) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.18. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction- indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
signal (warning, Hazard) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.14. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction-indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road users;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Signal generator [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Signal generator Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.11. "Signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the signals for system tests;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Signal generator [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Signal generator Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.11. "Signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the signals for system tests;		 No.123 2010-08-24
signal generator (HIAS) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS signal generator Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "HIAS signal generator" means a device, reproducing one or more of the HIAS signals for system test;		 No.053 2013-06-18
signalling function (Light-) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Light-signalling function Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Device" means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions;
2.6.2. "Light-signalling function" means the light emitted or reflected by a device to give to other road users visual information on the presence, identification and/or the change of movement of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
signalling lamp other than a retro reflector (Illuminating surface of a) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a retro reflector Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6.2. "Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a retro reflector" (paragraphs 2.5.12 to 2.5.20) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 % of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used;		 No.086 2010-09-30
silencing system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.3. "Exhaust or silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motor cycle engine and its exhaust.
2.3.1. "Original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval. It may also be the vehicle manufacturer’s replacement part.
2.3.2. "Non-original exhaust or silencing system" means a system of a type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of type approval or extension of type approval.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Silencing system [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Silencing system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Silencing system" means a complete set of components necessary for limiting the noise produced by the engine of a motor vehicle and its exhaust;		 No.059 2006-11-24
silencing system (Component of an) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Component of an exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.5. "Component of an exhaust or silencing system" means one of the individual components which together form the exhaust system (such as exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system (air filter) if any.
If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or absorber shall be treated as components having the same importance as the exhaust system.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Silencing system component [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Silencing system component Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Silencing system component" means one of the separate components which together form the exhaust system (e.g. silencer proper, expansion chamber, resonator);		 No.059 2006-11-24
Silencing system of different type [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Silencing system of different types Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Silencing system of different types" means silencing systems which differ significantly in such respects as:
2.3.1. that their components bear different trade names or marks,
2.3.2. that the characteristics of the materials constituting a component are different or that the components differ in shape or size, a modification regarding the coating (zinc coating, aluminium coating, etc.) is not considered changing the type,
2.3.3. that the operating principles of at least one component are different,
2.3.4. that their components are combined differently;		 No.059 2006-11-24
silencing system of differing type [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Exhaust or silencing systems of differing types noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.4. "Exhaust or silencing systems of differing types" means systems which are fundamentally different in one of the following ways:
2.4.1. Systems comprising components bearing different factory or trade marks;
2.4.2. Systems comprising any component made of materials of different characteristics or comprising components which are of a different shape or size;
2.4.3. Systems in which the operating principles of at least one component are different;
2.4.4. Systems comprising components in different combinations.		 No.041 2012-11-14
silencing system or components of said system (Replacement) [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Replacement silencing system or components of said system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Replacement silencing system or components of said system" means any part of the exhaust system defined in paragraph 2.1. above, intended for use on a vehicle, other than a part of the type fitted to this vehicle when submitted for type approval pursuant to this Regulation;		 No.059 2006-11-24
silencing system or components of said system (replacement, Approval of a) [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system" means the approval of the whole or part of a silencing system adaptable to one or several specified types of motor vehicles, as regards the limitation of their noise level;		 No.059 2006-11-24
Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheel [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2010-09-30
Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheel [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Single and multiple lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Single and multiple lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.16. "Single and multiple lamps" No.048 2008-05-23
Single brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Single brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Single brake system" means a brake system which acts on only one axle.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Single function lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Single-function lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.7. "Single-function lamp" means a part of a device which performs a single lighting or light-signalling function; No.048 2008-05-23
Single function lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Single-function lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.7. "Single-function lamp" means a part of a device which performs a single lighting or light- signalling function;		 No.048 2011-12-06
single lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 single lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.12. A single lamp
"A single lamp" means any combination of two or more lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function and colour, if it comprises devices, the projection of whose aggregate light-emitting surfaces in a given transverse plane occupies 60 % or more of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the light-emitting surfaces of the aforementioned lamps, provided that such combination is, where approval is required, approved as a single lamp.
This possible combination does not apply to main-beam headlamps, dipped-beam headlamps and front fog lamps.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
single lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 single lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1. single lamp
means a device or part of a device, having one function and one illuminating surface and one or more light sources. For the purpose of installation on a vehicle, a "single lamp" also means any assembly of two independent or grouped lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, if they are installed such that the projections of the illuminating surfaces of the lamps on a given transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said illuminating surfaces.		 Directive 2009/067/EC
single lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.16.1. "A single lamp" means:
(a) a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts, or
(b) any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type "D" lamp and installed so that:
(i) the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis, or
(ii) the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis, or
(c) any assembly of two independent retro-reflectors, whether identical or not, that have been approved separately and are installed in such a way that:
(i) the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis, or
(ii) the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis.		 No.048 2008-05-23
single lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Single and multiple lamps"
2.16.1. "A single lamp" means:
(a) a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts; or
(b) any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type "D" lamp and installed so that:
(i) the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or
(ii) the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or
(c) any assembly of two independent retro-reflectors, whether identical or not, that have been approved separately and are installed in such a way that:
(i) the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or
(ii) the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or
(d) any interdependent lamp system composed of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function, approved together as type ‘Y’ and installed so that the distance between adjacent apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis does not exceed 75 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis;		 No.048 2011-12-06
single lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 A single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "A single lamp" means:
(a) a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts, or
(b) any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type ‘D’ lamp and installed so that the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis.		 No.053 2013-06-18
single lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 A single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "A single lamp" means a device or part of a device, having one function and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis (see paragraph 2.8 of this Regulation) and one or more light sources.
For the purpose of installation on a vehicle, a "single lamp" also means any assembly of two independent or grouped lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, if they are installed so that the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. In such a case, each of these lamps shall, where approval is required, be approved as a type "D" lamp. This possible combination does not apply to driving beam headlamps and passing beam headlamps.		 No.074 2013-06-18
single lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 A single lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "A single lamp" includes any combination of two or more lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function and colour, if it comprises devices, the projection of whose aggregate light- emitting surfaces in a given transverse plane occupies 60 % or more of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the light-emitting surfaces of the aforementioned lamps, provided that such combination is, where approval is required, approved as a single lamp.
This possible combination does not apply to driving lamps, passing lamps, front fog lamps or lateral reflex reflectors.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Size [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Size Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Size" indicates the stature of the Child for whom the Child Restraint System has been designed and approved. Child restraint systems may cover any size range provided that all requirements are fulfilled.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Size (i) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
size designation (Tyre) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre size designation Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyre size designation" means a combination of figures that uniquely identify the geometric size of the tyre, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio and the nominal diameter. Precise definitions of these features may be found in Regulation No 30.		 No.064 2010-11-26
size designation (Tyre-) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Tyre-size designation" means a designation showing:
2.15.1. the nominal section width (S1). This value must be expressed in mm.
2.15.2. the nominal aspect ratio (Ra).
2.15.3. an indication of the structure, placed in front of the nominal rim diameter marking, as follows:
2.15.3.1. n diagonal (bias-ply) tyres, the symbol "-" or the letter "D2;
2.15.3.2. n radial-ply tyres, the letter "R";
2.15.3.3. n bias-belted tyres, the letter "B".
2.15.4. the conventional number "d" denoting the nominal rim diameter;
2.15.5. optionally, the letters "IMP" after the nominal rim diameter marking in case of Implement tyres;
2.15.6. optionally, the letters "FRONT" after the nominal rim diameter marking in case of Tractor steering wheel tyres;
2.15.7. However for tyres listed in annex 5 the "tyre size designation" is that shown in the first column of those tables.
2.15.8. The letters "IF" before the nominal section width in case of "Improved Flexion Tyre"
The letters "VF" before the nominal section width in case of 2Very High Flexion Tyre".		 No.106 2010-09-30
size designation (Tyre) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tyre size designation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:		 No.108 2006-07-04
size designation (Tyre) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tyre size designation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in case of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
2.21.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below: [表]
Nominal rim diameter code (d) / Value of the "d" symbol expressed in mm
8 / 203～ 30 / 762		 No.109 2006-07-04
size designation (Tyre) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Tyre size designation (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio and the conventional number that denotes the nominal rim diameter (these terms are further defined in Regulation No. 30).		 No.124 2006-12-27
size designation (Wheel) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Wheel size designation Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Wheel" means a complete wheel consisting of a rim and a wheel disc;
2.3.1. "Wheel size designation" means a designation comprising at least the nominal rim diameter, the nominal rim width and the rim profile;
2.3.2. "Wheel offset" means the distance from the hub abutment face to the centre line of the rim.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Size seating position (i) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 i-Size seating position safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "i-Size seating position" means a seating position, if any defined by the vehicle manufacturer, which is designed to accommodate an i-Size child restraint system, as defined in Regulation No 129, and fulfils the requirements defined in this Regulation.		 No.014 2015-08-19
SLD [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Speed limitation device (SLD) Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. For the purpose of Part III of this Regulation:
2.6.1. "Speed limitation device (SLD)" means a device whose primary function is to control the fuel feed to the engine in order to limit the vehicle speed to the specified value;
2.6.2. "Approval of an SLD" means the approval of a type of SLD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 21 below;
2.6.3. "Type of an SLD" means SLDs which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as:
The make and type of the device,
The range of speed values at which the SLD may be set,
The method used to control the fuel feed of the engine.		 No.089 2007-06-19
Sliding door [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Sliding door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Sliding door" means a door which can be opened or closed only by sliding it along one or more rectilinear or approximately rectilinear rails.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Sliding door [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Sliding door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Sliding door" means a door which can be opened or closed only by sliding it along one or more rectilinear or approximately rectilinear rails.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Sliding door [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Sliding door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Sliding door" means a door which can be opened or closed only by sliding it along one or more rectilinear or approximately rectilinear rails.		 No.107 2015-06-18
slip angle (Side) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
small volume manufacturer [REG. No 692/2008] 　 small volume manufacturers emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 32. "small volume manufacturers" means vehicle manufacturers whose worldwide annual production is less than 10 000 units. REG. No 692/2008
Smear [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Smear devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.14."Smear" is a vertical bright bar displayed on the monitor while sun light or light from other bright light sources is directly hitting into the lens of the camera. Smear is an optical artefact.		 No.046 2014-08-08
smoke [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 smoke Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "smoke" means particles suspended in the exhaust stream of a diesel engine which absorb, reflect, or refract light;		 No.049 2008-04-12
smoke [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 smoke Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "smoke" means particles suspended in the exhaust stream of a diesel engine which absorb, reflect, or refract light;		 No.049 2010-08-31
SMV rear marking plate [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 SMV rear marking plate Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "SMV rear marking plate", a triangular plate with truncated corners with a characteristic pattern faced with retro-reflective and fluorescent material or devices (class 1); or with retro-reflective materials or devices only		 No.069 2010-07-31
SMV rear marking plate of different type [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 SMV rear marking plates of different types Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Definition of "type"
SMV rear marking plates of different types means SMV marking plates which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. The trade name or mark.
2.7.2. The characteristics of the retro-reflective material or devices.
2.7.3. The characteristics of the fluorescent material.
2.7.4. The parts affecting the properties of the retro-reflective material or devices.		 No.069 2010-07-31
Snow tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Snow tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.2. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern and whose structure are primarily designed to　ensure in mud and fresh or melting snow a performance better than that of an ordinary (roadtype) tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and/or solid-block elements more widely spaced than on an ordinary (road-type) tyre; No.030 2008-07-30
Snow tyre [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Snow tyre Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.2. Category of use:
2.2.3. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern, tread compound or structure are primarily designed to achieve in snow conditions a performance better than that of a normal tyre with regard to its ability to initiate or maintain vehicle motion.		 No.054 2008-07-11
Snow tyre [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Snow tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern and whose structure are primarily designed to ensure in mud and fresh or melting snow a performance better than that of an ordinary (road- type) tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and/or solid-block elements more widely spaced than on an ordinary (road-type) tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Snow tyre [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Snow tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Snow tyre [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Snow tyre Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Snow tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Snow tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.10. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern, tread compound or structure are primarily designed to achieve in snow conditions a performance better than that of a normal tyre with regard to its ability to initiate or maintain vehicle motion. No.117 2008-08-29
Snow tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Snow tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern, tread compound or structure are primarily designed to achieve in snow conditions a performance better than that of a normal tyre with regard to its ability to initiate, maintain or stop vehicle motion.		 No.117 2011-11-23
snow tyre [REG. No 661/2009] 　 snow tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 11. "snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern, tread compound or structure is primarily designed to achieve in snow conditions a performance better than that of a normal tyre with regard to its ability to initiate or maintain vehicle motion;､ REG. No 661/2009
soak loss (Hot) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,20 );		 No.083 2012-02-15
soak loss (Hot) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Hot soak losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.2. "Hot soak losses" are hydrocarbon emissions arising from the fuel system of a stationary vehicle after a period of driving (assuming a ratio of C1 H2,20).		 No.083 2015-07-03
SOC [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 SOC (State Of Charge) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
[Appendix] Electrical energy/power storage device State Of Charge (SOC) profile for OVC HEV Type I Test		 No.083 2012-02-15
SOC [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 SOC (State of Charge) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "State of Charge (SOC)" means the available electrical charge in a tested-device expressed as a percentage of its rated capacity.		 No.100 2015-03-31
social need (fulfil specific, Vehicle designed to) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M 1 which are either:
(a) special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg ( 1 );
(b) vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion, as from 1 September 2012, of vehicles of category M 1 G 3 ;
(c) vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2012-02-15
social need (specific, designed to fulfil, Vehicle) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M1 which are either:
(a) Special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg (3);
(b) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion of vehicles of category M1G (3);
(c) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Soft target [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Soft target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Soft target" means a target that will suffer minimum damage and cause minimum damage to the subject vehicle in the event of a collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Solid insulator [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Solid insulator protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses provided in order to cover and prevent the high voltage live parts from any direct contact. This includes covers for insulating the high voltage live parts of connectors; and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Solid insulator [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Solid insulator Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses, provided in order to cover and prevent the high voltage live parts from any direct contact. This includes covers for insulating the high voltage live parts of connectors; and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation,		 No.094 2012-09-20
Solid insulator [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Solid insulator Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses, provided in order to cover and prevent the high voltage live parts from any direct contact. This includes covers for insulating the high voltage live parts of connectors and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Solid insulator [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Solid insulator Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses provided in order to cover and protect the live parts against direct contact from any direction of access; covers for insulating the live parts of connectors, and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Solid insulator [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Solid insulator Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Solid insulator" means the insulating coating of wiring harnesses provided in order to cover and protect the live parts against direct contact from any direction of access; covers for insulating the live parts of connectors, and varnish or paint for the purpose of insulation.		 No.100 2015-03-31
sound emission (Rolling) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Rolling sound emission Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Rolling sound emission" means the sound emitted from the contact between the tyres in motion and the road surface.		 No.117 2011-11-23
sound level (motor cycle as regards its, Type of) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.2. "Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system" means motor cycles which do not differ in such essential respects as the following:
2.2.1. The type of engine (two-stroke or four-stroke, reciprocating piston engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection systems, arrangement of valves, rated maximum net power and corresponding engine speed). For rotary-piston engines the cubic capacity should be taken to be double of the volume of the chamber;
2.2.2. Transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of the gears;
2.2.3. Number, type and arrangement of exhaust or silencing systems.		 No.041 2012-11-14
source (light, LED) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 filament lamp, LED light source Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.006 2014-07-18
source (light, LED) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Light emitting diode (LED) light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.13. Light emitting diode (LED) light source: a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence and/or fluorescence.		 No.128 2014-05-29
source (light, LED, etalon, standard) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) LED light source(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
space (Common) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Common space Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
space (Common) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Common space Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
space (Common) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Common space Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.060 2014-10-15
space (Common) [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Common space Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may bedisplayed but not simultaneously.		 No.121 2010-07-10
space (Common) [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Common space Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may be displayed but not simultaneously.		 No.121 2016-01-08
space (Common) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Common space Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbols) may be displayed, but not simultaneously.		 No.130 2014-06-18
space (Common) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Common space Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may be displayed, but not simultaneously.		 No.131 2014-07-19
space (Residual) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Residual space Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Residual space" means a space to be preserved in the passengers', crew and driver's compartment(s) to provide better survival possibility for passengers, driver and crew in case of a rollover accident.		 No.066 2007-12-06
space (Residual) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Residual space Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Residual space" means a space to be preserved in the passengers’, crew and driver’s compartment(s) to provide better survival possibility for passengers, driver and crew in case of a rollover accident.		 No.066 2011-03-30
space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three wheel motor vehicle [Directive 2009/062/EC] 　 space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel motor vehicles space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. DIMENSIONS
The dimensions of the space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel motor vehicles are as follows:
1.1. Mopeds and light quadricycles without a body　・・・
1.2. Motorcycles, tricycles up to a maximum power of 15 kW and quadricycles, other than light quadricycles, without a body　・・・
1.3. Tricycles with a maximum power exceeding 15 kW, light quadricycles fitted with a body and quadricycles, other than light quadricycles, fitted with a body　・・・
2. GENERAL LOCATION
3. INCLINATION
4. MAXIMUM HEIGHT
5. MINIMUM HEIGHT
6. GEOMETRIC VISIBILITY		 Directive 2009/062/EC
spacing (Seat) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Seat spacing Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Seat spacing" means, in the case of seats facing in the same direction, the distance between the front of a seat squab and the back of the seat squab of the seat preceding it, measured horizontally at the height of 620 mm above the floor.		 No.080 2010-06-30
Span [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Span Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.78. "Span" means to adjust an instrument so that it gives a proper response to a calibration standard that represents between 75 per cent and 100 per cent of the maximum value in the instrument range or expected range of use;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Span gas [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Span gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.79. "Span gas" means a purified gas mixture used to span gas analysers. Span gases shall meet the specifications of paragraph 9.5.1. Note that calibration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analysers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span gases;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Span response [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Span response Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.16. "Span response" means the mean response to a span gas during a 30 s time interval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
spare tyre (Temporary use) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Temporary use spare tyre Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
spare tyre (Temporary use) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Temporary use spare tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
spare tyre (temporary use, T type) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 "T" type temporary use spare tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
spare tyre (Temporary-use) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Temporary-use spare tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Temporary-use spare tyre" means a tyre different from a tyre intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions; but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
spare unit (Standard) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Standard spare unit Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Standard spare unit" means an assembly of a wheel and tyre identical in terms of wheel and tyre size designations, wheel offset and tyre structure to that fitted in the same axle position and to the particular model or version of the vehicle for normal operation. It includes the case of a wheel that is produced from a different material, for example, steel instead of aluminium alloy, that may use different wheel fixing nut or bolt designs but which is otherwise identical to the wheel intended for normal operation.		 No.064 2010-11-26
spare unit (Temporary use) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Temporary use spare unit Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Temporary use spare unit" means an assembly of any wheel and tyre that is not within that defined as a "Standard spare unit" in paragraph 2.9. Temporary use spare units may be of the following types:
2.10.1. Type 1 : An assembly in which the tyre is a temporary use spare tyre as defined in paragraph 2.4.2;
2.10.2. Type 2 : An assembly in which the wheel has a different offset from that of the wheel fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.3. Type 3 : An assembly in which the tyre is of a different structure from that fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.4. Type 4 : An assembly in which the tyre is a normal tyre as defined in paragraph 2.4.1 but where the size designation of the wheel or the tyre or both, differ from those of the wheel or tyre fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.5. Type 5 : An assembly in which a wheel and tyre unit as defined in paragraph 2.4.3 or 2.4.4 is fitted to the vehicle for normal, long term road use, but used in an emergency in a totally deflated condition;		 No.064 2010-11-26
spare unit (temporary use, Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
Special brake disc/drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Special brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.4. "Special brake disc/drum" means a replacement brake disc/drum not covered by paragraphs 2.3.1 to 2.3.3.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Special equipment [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Special equipment Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1.4. Special equipment
"Special equipment" means that part of the steering equipment by which additional or independent power is produced. Additional or independent power may be produced by any mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic or electrical system, or by any combination of these (for example by an oil pump, air pump or battery, etc.).		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Special need restraint [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Special needs restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Special needs restraint" is a child restraint system designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental handicap; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it must contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Special Need Restraint [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Special Needs Restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Special Needs Restraint" is a child restraint system designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental handicap; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it must contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Special Need Restraint [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Special Needs Restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Special Needs Restraint" is a Child Restraint System designed for children who have special needs as a result of either a physical or mental disability; this device may in particular permit additional restraining devices for any part of the child, but it shall contain as a minimum a primary means of restraint which complies with the requirements of this Regulation.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Special tread [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Special tread Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Special tread" means a tyre, the tread pattern and structure of which are primarily designed to ensure in marshy areas a better grip than that of a standard tread tyre. The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of lugs or cleats deeper than those of a standard tyre;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Special use tyre [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Special use tyre Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.2. Category of use:
2.2.2. "Special use tyre" means a tyre intended for mixed use both on- and off-road or for other special duty.		 No.054 2008-07-11
Special use tyre [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Special use tyre Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Special use tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Special use tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.9. "Special use tyre" means a tyre intended for mixed use both on- and off-road or for other special duty. No.117 2008-08-29
Special use tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Special use tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Special use tyre" means a tyre intended for mixed use both on- and off-road or for other special duty. These tyres are primarily designed to initiate and maintain the vehicle in motion in off-road conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
special use tyre [REG. No 661/2009] 　 special use tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 8. "special use tyre" means a tyre intended for mixed use both on- and off-road or for other special duty; REG. No 661/2009
Special wheel [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Special wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Special wheels" means wheels which are not OE-wheels and which do not fulfil the criteria for wheels described in paragraph 2.4. (for example wheels with different rim width or diameter).		 No.124 2006-12-27
Specific component [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Specific component Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder),
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder
(c) pressure regulator,
(d) automatic valve,
(e) manual valve,
(f) gas supply device,
(g) gas flow adjuster,
(h) flexible fuel line,
(i) rigid fuel line,
(j) filling unit or receptacle,
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve,
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve),
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered),
(n) filter,
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator,
(p) excess flow valve,
(q) service valve,
(r) electronic control unit,
(s) gas-tight housing,
(t) fitting,
(u) ventilation hose.
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi-functional component".		 No.110 2008-03-14
Specific component [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Specific component using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder);
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder;
(c) pressure regulator;
(d) automatic valve;
(e) manual valve;
(f) gas supply device;
(g) gas flow adjuster;
(h) flexible fuel line;
(i) rigid fuel line;
(j) filling unit or receptacle;
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve;
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) filter;
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) excess flow valve;
(q) service valve;
(r) electronic control unit;
(s) gas-tight housing;
(t) fitting;
(u) ventilation hose;
(v) pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered).
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi- functional component".		 No.110 2011-05-07
Specific component [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Specific components using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.6. "Specific components" means:
(a) Container (cylinder or tank);
(b) Accessories fitted to the container;
(c) Pressure regulator;
(d) Automatic valve;
(e) Manual valve;
(f) Gas supply device;
(g) Gas flow adjuster;
(h) Flexible fuel line;
(i) Rigid fuel line;
(j) Filling unit or receptacle;
(k) Non-return valve or check valve;
(l) Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) primary and secondary;
(m) Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) Filter;
(o) Pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) Excess flow valve;
(q) Service valve;
(r) Electronic control unit;
(s) Gas-tight housing;
(t) Fitting;
(u) Ventilation hose;
(v) Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered);
(w) Fuel rail;
(x) Heat exchanger/vaporiser;
(y) Natural gas detector;
(z) Fuel pump (for LNG).		 No.110 2015-06-30
Specific emission [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Specific emissions Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.17. "Specific emissions" means the mass emissions expressed in g/kWh.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Specific emission [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Specific emissions Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.80. "Specific emissions" means the mass emissions expressed in g/kWh;		 No.096 2014-03-22
specific emission of CO2 [REG. No 443/2009] 　 specific emissions of CO2 reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (f) "specific emissions of CO2" means the CO2 emissions of a passenger car measured in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and specified as the CO2 mass emissions (combined) in the certificate of conformity. For passenger cars which are not type-approved in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, "specific emissions of CO2" means the CO2 emissions measured in accordance with the same measurement procedure as specified for passenger cars in Regulation (EC) No 692/2008, or in accordance with procedures adopted by the Commission to establish the CO2 emissions for such passenger cars; REG. No 443/2009
specific emissions target [REG. No 443/2009] 　 specific emissions target reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (g) "specific emissions target" means, in relation to a manufacturer, the average of the specific emissions of CO2 permitted in accordance with Annex I in respect of each new passenger car of which it is the manufacturer or, where the manufacturer is granted a derogation under Article 11, the specific emissions target determined in accordance with that derogation.oｯ REG. No 443/2009
Specific equipment [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Specific equipment LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific equipment" means:
(a) the container,
(b) the accessories fitted to the container,
(c) the vaporizer/pressure regulator,
(d) the shut-off valve,
(e) the gas injection device or injector or gas mixing piece,
(f) the gas dosage unit, either separate or combined with the gas injection device,
(g) flexible hoses,
(h) filling unit,
(i) non-return valve,
(j) gas-tube pressure relief valve,
(k) filter unit,
(l) pressure or temperature sensor,
(m) fuel pump,
(n) service coupling,
(o) electronic control unit,
(p) fuel rail,
(q) pressure relief device;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).		 No.115 2014-11-07
specific social need (designed to fulfil, Vehicle) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M1 which are either:
(a) Special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg (3);
(b) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion of vehicles of category M1G (3);
(c) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
specific vehicle (child restraint) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 specific vehicle (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Specific vehicle ISOFIX [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Specific vehicle ISOFIX Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" is a category of Child Restraint System connecting to specific vehicle types. All vehicle anchorages are to be approved according to Regulation No. 14. It is also an indication for Child Restraint Systems including dashboard as a vehicle contact zone.		 No.129 2014-03-29
spectrum (Visual) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Visual spectrum Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.12. "Visual spectrum" means light with a wavelength within the range of the perceptual limits of thehuman eyes: 380-780 nm.		 No.046 2010-07-10
spectrum (Visual) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Visual spectrum devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.12."Visual spectrum" means light with a wavelength within the range of the perceptual limits of the human eyes: 380-780 nm.		 No.046 2014-08-08
speed (design, Maximum) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Maximum design speed Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum design speed" means the speed which the vehicle cannot exceed, on the level and without undue external influence, taking into account any special limitations imposed on the design and construction of the vehicle;		 No.078 2004-03-31
speed (design, maximum) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 maximum design speed Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.1. "The maximum design speed" as specified in paragraph 16.2 of this Regulation.		 No.081 2012-07-13
speed (Engine governed) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine governed speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.30. "Engine governed speed" means the engine operating speed when it is controlled by the installed governor;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (engine, Rated) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 S (Rated engine speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.8. "Rated engine speed" means the engine speed at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power as stated by the manufacturer.
The symbol S denotes the numerical value of the rated engine speed expressed in revolutions per minute.		 No.041 2012-11-14
speed (engine, Rated) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Rated engine speed, S Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated engine speed, S" means the declared engine speed in min-1 (rpm) at which the engine develops its rated maximum net power pursuant to Regulation No 85. If the rated maximum net power is reached at several engine speeds, the highest engine speed shall be used.		 No.051 2007-05-30
speed (high) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 high speed (nhi) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "high speed (nhi)_" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2008-04-12
speed (high) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 high speed (nhi) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "high speed (nhi)" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2010-08-31
speed (High) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 n hi (High speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "High speed (n hi )" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs.		 No.049 2013-06-24
speed (High) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 n hi (High speed) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.40. "High speed (n hi)" means the highest engine speed where 70 per cent of the rated power (Annex 4A) or the maximum power (Annex 4B) occurs		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (Idle) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Idle speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.41. "Idle speed" means the lowest engine speed with minimum load (greater than or equal to zero load), where an engine governor function controls engine speed. For engines without a governor function that controls idle speed, idle speed means the manufacturer-declared value for lowest engine speed possible with minimum load. Note that warm idle speed is the idle speed of a warmed-up engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (Intermediate) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Intermediate speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.42. "Intermediate speed" means that engine speed which meets one of the following requirements:
(a) For engines which are designed to operate over a speed range on a full load torque curve, the intermediate speed shall be the declared maximum torque speed if it occurs between 60 per cent and 75 per cent of the rated speed;
(b) If the declared maximum torque speed is less than 60 per cent of the rated speed, then the intermediate speed shall be 60 per cent of the rated speed;
(c) If the declared maximum torque speed is greater than 75 per cent of the rated speed then the intermediate speed shall be 75 per cent of the rated speed.		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (Load capacity variation with) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Load-capacity variation with speed Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Load-capacity variation with speed" means an alternative load capacity for the tyre when used at a speed different from that indicated by the speed symbol in the normal service description. The permissible variations are given in the table in Annex 8 to this Regulation.		 No.109 2006-07-04
speed (load capacity with, Variation of) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Variation of load capacity with speed Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Table: Variation of load capacity with speed" means the tables in annex 7 showing as a function of the category of use, the type of application, the load capacity index and the nominal speed category symbol, the maximum load rating variations which a tyre can withstand when used at speeds different from that corresponding to its speed category symbol;
2.30.1. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to the "supplementary service description".
2.30.2. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to ‘Improved Flexion’ or "Very High Flexion" tyres.		 No.106 2010-09-30
speed (low) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 low speed (nlo) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "low speed (nlo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2008-04-12
speed (Low) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 n lo (Low speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Low speed (n lo )" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs;		 No.049 2013-06-24
speed (Low) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 n lo (Low speed) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.6. "Low speed (n lo )" means the lowest engine speed where 55 per cent of the declared maximum power occurs.		 No.049 2013-06-24
speed (Low) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 n lo (Low speed) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.44. "Low speed (n lo)" means the lowest engine speed where 50 per cent of the rated power (Annex 4A) or the maximum power (Annex 4B) occurs;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (Maximum) [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 v max (Maximum speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.10. "Maximum speed" means the maximum vehicle speed as defined in ISO 7117:1995.
The symbol v max denotes the maximum speed.		 No.041 2012-11-14
speed (power, net, Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
speed (power, net, Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum net power speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Maximum net power speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum net power is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
speed (rated) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 rated speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "rated speed" means the maximum full load engine speed allowed by the governor, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer in paragraph 2. of Appendix 2 to Annex 1;		 No.049 2008-04-12
speed (rated) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 rated speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "rated speed" means the maximum full load engine speed allowed by the governor, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer in paragraph 2. of Appendix 2 to Annex 1;		 No.049 2010-08-31
speed (Rated) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Rated speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.13. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor as specified by the manufacturer in his sales and service literature, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer in his sales and service literature.		 No.049 2013-06-24
speed (Rated) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Rated speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.69. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor, as designed by the manufacturer, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as designed by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (Rated) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Rated speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
speed (Rated) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Rated speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Rated speed" means the maximum full load speed allowed by the governor, as designed by the manufacturer, or, if such a governor is not present, the speed at which the maximum power is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
speed (rated, Maximum) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Maximum rated speed Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.6 "Maximum rated speed" means maximum speed permitted by the governor at full load;		 No.024 2006-11-24
speed (reference) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 reference speed (nref) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "reference speed (nref)" means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalizing the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Appendix 2 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
speed (reference) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 reference speed (nref) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "reference speed (nref)" means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalizing the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Appendix 2 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
speed (Test) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Test speed Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Test speed" means the vehicle speed measured the moment the driver begins to actuate the brake control(s). For tests where the simultaneous actuation of two controls is specified, the vehicle speed is taken from the point the first control is actuated.		 No.078 2015-01-30
speed (torque, Maximum) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Maximum torque speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer		 No.049 2013-06-24
speed (torque, Maximum) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Maximum torque speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.46. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed (torque, Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum torque speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
speed (torque, Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum torque speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
speed A, B and C (engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
speed A, B and C (engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Speed category [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Speed category Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.29. "Speed category" means the maximum speed which the tyre can sustain, expressed by speed category symbol (see table below).
2.29.1. The categories of speed are those indicated in the table below:【表 : Speed-category symbol vs Maximum speed (km/h)】略		 No.030 2008-07-30
Speed category [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Speed category Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.28. "Speed category" means:
2.28.1. The speeds, indicated by a symbol, at which the tyre can carry the load indicated by the associated load-capacity index;
2.28.2. The speed categories are as shown in the table below:
[Table : Speed-category symbol vs Corresponding speed (km/h)]		 No.054 2008-07-11
Speed category [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Speed category Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Speed category" means:
2.28.1. The speeds, expressed by the speed category symbol as shown in the table in paragraph 2.28.2.
2.28.2. The speed categories are as shown in the table below: (km/h)
[表] Speed category symbol / Corresponding speed
B / 50
F / 80
- / ---
W / 270
2.28.3. Tyres suitable for maximum speeds in excess of 240 km/h are identified by means of letter codes "V" or "Z" (see paragraph 2.33.3) placed within the tyre size designation in front of the indications of the structure (see paragraph 3.1.3).		 No.075 2011-03-30
Speed category [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Speed category Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Speed category", the reference speed expressed by the speed category symbol as shown in the table below:
[表] Speed category symbol / Reference speed (km/h)
A2 / 10
A4 / 20
A6 / 30
A8 / 40
B / 50
D / 65		 No.106 2010-09-30
speed engine (Constant) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Constant-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.11. "Constant-speed engine" means an engine whose type approval or certification is limited to constant-speed operation. Engines whose constant-speed governor function is removed or disabled are no longer constant-speed engines;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed engine (Variable) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Variable-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.94. "Variable-speed engine" means an engine that is not a constant-speed engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Speed limitation function [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Speed limitation function Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.7. "Speed limitation function", means a function to control the fuel feed of the vehicle or engine management in order to limit the vehicle speed to a fixed maximum value.		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed limitation function ASLF (Adjustable) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF" means a function which allows the driver to set a vehicle speed Vadj, and when activated limits the vehicle automatically to that speed;		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed operation (Constant) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Constant-speed operation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.12. "Constant-speed operation" means engine operation with a governor that automatically controls the operator's demand to maintain engine speed, even under changing load. Governors do not always maintain exactly constant speed. Typically, speed can decrease (0,1 to 10) per cent below the speed at zero load, such that the minimum speed occurs near the engine's point of maximum power;		 No.096 2014-03-22
speed range (operating, engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
speed range (operating, engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine operating speed range Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine operating speed range" means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Speed symbol [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Speed symbol 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Speed symbol" means:
2.34.1. An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index.
2.34.2. The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below: [表]
Speed symbol Corresponding speed (km/h)
L, M, N, P,,, U, H, V, W, Y / 120, 130, 140, 150,,,200, 210, 240, 270, 300		 No.108 2006-07-04
Speed symbol [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Speed symbol Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Speed symbol" means:
2.33.1. An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index.
2.33.2. The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below: [表]
Speed symbol / Corresponding maximum speed (km/h)
F / 80 ～ H / 210		 No.109 2006-07-04
speed V (Limitation) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Limitation speed V Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Limitation speed V" means the maximum speed of the vehicle such that its design or equipment does not permit a response after a positive action on the accelerator control;		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed Vadj (limit, Adjustable) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable limit speed Vadj Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Adjustable limit speed Vadj" means the speed voluntarily set by the driver;		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed Vmax (Maximum) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Maximum speed Vmax Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Maximum speed Vmax" is the maximum speed reached by the vehicle in the first half period of the response curve as defined in the figure of Annex 5 (para. 1.1.4.2.4);		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed Vset (Set) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Set speed Vset Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Set speed Vset" means the intended mean vehicle speed when operating in a stabilised condition;		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed Vstab (Stabilised) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Stabilised speed Vstab Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Stabilised speed Vstab" means the mean vehicle speed when operating in the condition specified in paragraph 1.1.4.2.3 of Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.089 2007-06-19
speed warning symbol (maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 maximum speed warning symbol Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 5. SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS
5.1. General
5.1.4. The temporary-use spare unit shall exhibit the following characteristics:
5.1.4.1. An 80 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 80km/h]
5.1.4.1.1. An 120 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position. [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 120km/h]		 No.064 2010-11-26
Speedometer [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Speedometer Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment (2);
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication
limits for a range of speed inputs;
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed;		 No.039 2004-03-31
Speedometer [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Speedometer speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment.
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication limits for a range of speed inputs.
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
speedometer (Type of vehicle in respect of its) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2004-03-31
speedometer (vehicle in respect of its, Type of) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular, to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer’s measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
speedometer's measuring mechanism (Tolerance of the) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment.
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication limits for a range of speed inputs.
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
spherical mirror (A) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Aspherical mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10."Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which the transition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked. The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined by the radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
y=R−[式]
R: nominal radius in the spherical part
k: constant for the change of curvature
a: constant for the spherical size of the spherical primary calotte		 No.046 2014-08-08
Spherical surface [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Spherical surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.8. "Spherical surface" means a surface, which has a constant and equal radius in all directions		 No.046 2010-07-10
Spherical surface [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Spherical surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.8."Spherical surface" means a surface, which has a constant and equal radius in all directions		 No.046 2014-08-08
spherical surface (A-) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Aspherical surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9. "Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.		 No.046 2010-07-10
spherical surface (A) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Aspherical surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9."Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Split service brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 SSBS (Split service brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Split service brake system (SSBS)" means a brake system that operates the brakes on all wheels, consisting of two or more subsystems actuated by a single control designed so that a single failure in any subsystem (such as a leakage type failure of a hydraulic subsystem) does not impair the operation of any other subsystem.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Spoke [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Spoke Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.9. "Spoke" means a bar connecting the steering control rim to the boss; No.012 2008-06-26
Spoke [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Spoke protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Spoke" means a bar connecting the steering control rim to the boss;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Spring braking systems [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 Spring braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.1. "Spring braking systems" are braking systems in which the energy required for braking is supplied by one or more springs acting as an energy storage device (energy accumulator).
1.1.1. The energy necessary to compress the spring in order to release the brake is supplied and controlled by the "control" actuated by the driver (see definition in paragraph 2.4 of this Regulation).		 No.013 2010-09-30
Spring compression chamber [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 Spring compression chamber Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.2. "Spring compression chamber" means the chamber where the pressure variation that induces the compression of the spring is actually produced.		 No.013 2010-09-30
SRC [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard road cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer.
The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course. The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2012-02-15
SRC [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION The Standard Road Cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer. The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course.
The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2015-07-03
SRTT [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 SRTT (Standard reference test tyre) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Standard reference test tyre" (SRTT) means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) standards E1136-93 (2003) (size P195/75R14).		 No.117 2011-11-23
SRTT (Standard reference test tyre) [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Standard reference test tyre (SRTT) Tyre noise and wet grip 2.12. "Standard reference test tyre (SRTT)" means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard E 1136-93 (re-approved 1998). No.117 2008-08-29
ß (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Luminance factor (symbol ß) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.4. "Luminance factor (symbol ß)" means the ratio of the luminance of the body to the luminance of a perfect diffuser under identical conditions of illumination and observation;		 No.104 2014-03-14
SSBS [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 SSBS (Split service brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Split service brake system (SSBS)" means a brake system that operates the brakes on all wheels, consisting of two or more subsystems actuated by a single control designed so that a single failure in any subsystem (such as a leakage type failure of a hydraulic subsystem) does not impair the operation of any other subsystem.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Stabilised speed Vstab [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Stabilised speed Vstab Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Stabilised speed Vstab" means the mean vehicle speed when operating in the condition specified in paragraph 1.1.4.2.3 of Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.089 2007-06-19
Stability Control System (Electronic) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or ‘ESC System’ means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side-slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Stability Control System (Electronic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or "ESC System" means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehicle’s yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side- slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
stability factor (Static) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Static stability factor Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Static stability factor" means one-half the track width of a vehicle divided by the height of its center of gravity, also expressed as SSF = T/2H, where: T = track width (for vehicles with more than one track width the average is used; for axles with dual wheels, the outer wheels are used when calculating ‘T’) and H = height of the center of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
stability factor (Static) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Static stability factor Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Static stability factor" means one-half the track width of a vehicle divided by the height of its centre of gravity, also expressed as SSF = T/2H, where: T = track width (for vehicles with more than one track width the average is used; for axles with dual wheels, the outer wheels are used when calculating ‘T’) and H = height of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Stability Function (Vehicle) [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 Vehicle Stability Function Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following:
(a) directional control;
(b) roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll-over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-11-13
Stability Function (Vehicle) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Vehicle Stability Function Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
staircase (Half) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Half staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Half staircase" is a staircase from the upper deck which terminates in an emergency door.		 No.107 2006-12-27
staircase (Half) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Half staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Half staircase" is a staircase from the upper deck which terminates in an emergency door.		 No.107 2010-09-29
staircase (Half) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Half staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Half staircase" is a staircase from the upper deck which terminates in an emergency door.		 No.107 2015-06-18
staircase (Intercommunication) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks.		 No.107 2006-12-27
staircase (Intercommunication) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks		 No.107 2010-09-29
staircase (Intercommunication) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks.		 No.107 2015-06-18
stand [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 stand stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.1. "stand" means a device that is firmly attached to the vehicle and is able to maintain the vehicle in its vertical (or almost vertical) parking position when left unattended by its driver;		 Directive 2009/078/EC
Stand alone [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Stand-alone Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.81. "Stand-alone" means something that has no dependencies; it can "stand alone";		 No.096 2014-03-22
Standard (etalon) discharge light source (gas-) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Standard (etalon) gas-discharge light source Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Standard (etalon) gas-discharge light source": Special gas-discharge light source used for the testing of headlamps. It has reduced dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Standard (étalon) filament lamp [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Standard (étalon) filament lamp Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "Standard (étalon) filament lamp": a filament lamp emitting white or amber or red light with reduced dimensional tolerances, used for the photometric testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. Standard filament lamps are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Standard (etalon) gas discharge light source [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Standard (etalon) gas-discharge light source Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Standard (etalon) gas-discharge light source": Special gas-discharge light source used for the testing of headlamps. It has reduced dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Standard (etalon) LED light source [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Standard (étalon) LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. Standard (étalon) LED light source: Special LED light source used for the testing of lighting and light-signalling devices. It has reduced tolerances for dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet. Standard LED light sources are specified in only one voltage rating for each category.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Standard (etalon) light source (gas discharge) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Standard (etalon) gas-discharge light source Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. "Standard (etalon) gas-discharge light source": Special gas-discharge light source used for the testing of headlamps. It has reduced dimensional, electrical and photometric characteristics as specified on the relevant data sheet.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Standard (Tyre, International) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 International Tyre Standard 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "International Tyre Standard" means any one of the following standard documents:
(a) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Standards Manual";
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(c) The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): "Year Book";
(d) The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): "Year Book";
(e) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): "Standards Manual";
(f) The Associaçiao Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) (5): "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(g) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): "Data Book".		 No.108 2006-07-04
Standard (Tyre, International) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 International Tyre Standard Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "International Tyre Standard" means any one of the following standard documents:
(a) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Standards Manual";
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Engineering Design Information — obsolete data";
(c) The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): "Year Book";
(d) The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): "Year Book";
(e) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): "Standards Manual";
(f) The Assiciacao Brasileira de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(g) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): "Data Book".
The tyre standards can be obtained from the following addresses:
(1) ETRTO, 32 Av. Brugmann — Bte 2, B-1060 Brussels, Belgium
(2) TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 USA
(3) JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No 1-12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato‑ku, Tokyo 105, Japan
(4) TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Australia
(5) ABPA, Avenida Paulista 244-12o Andar, CEP, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazil
(6) STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Sweden		 No.109 2006-07-04
standard bench cycle [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SBC (standard bench cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SBC) described in this Appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Standard Bench Cycle [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SBC (Standard Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) described in this appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
2. CATALYST TEMPERATURE CONTROL		 No.083 2015-07-03
standard coupling device and component (mechanical, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2010-08-28
standard coupling device and component (non-mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Standard Diesel Bench Cycle [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. Introduction
For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.
The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.
During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Standard Diesel Bench Cycle [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.		 No.083 2015-07-03
standard etalon filament lamp [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
standard etalon LED light source [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 standard (étalon) LED light source(s) reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) LED light source(s) and to Regulation No 128 shall refer to Regulation No 128 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.023 2014-08-08
standard light source [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 standard (etalon) light sources Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) light sources and to Regulations Nos 37 and 99 shall refer to Regulations Nos 37 and 99 and their series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.		 No.019 2014-08-22
standard mechanical coupling device and component [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer		 No.055 2006-12-27
standard mechanical coupling device and component [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer.		 No.055 2010-08-28
standard mechanical coupling device and component (non-) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2006-12-27
standard mechanical coupling device and component (non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.		 No.055 2010-08-28
standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling device and component (non-) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2006-12-27
standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling device and component (non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6 such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Standard production equipment [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Standard-production equipment Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Standard-production equipment" means equipment provided by the manufacturer for a particular application;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Standard reference test tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 SRTT (Standard reference test tyre) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Standard reference test tyre" (SRTT) means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) standards E1136-93 (2003) (size P195/75R14).		 No.117 2011-11-23
Standard reference test tyre (SRTT) [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Standard reference test tyre (SRTT) Tyre noise and wet grip 2.12. "Standard reference test tyre (SRTT)" means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard E 1136-93 (re-approved 1998). No.117 2008-08-29
Standard Road Cycle [No.083 2012-02-15A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard road cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer.
The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course. The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Standard Road Cycle [No.083 2015-07-03A9] 　 SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION The Standard Road Cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer. The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course.
The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Standard spare unit [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Standard spare unit Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Standard spare unit" means an assembly of a wheel and tyre identical in terms of wheel and tyre size designations, wheel offset and tyre structure to that fitted in the same axle position and to the particular model or version of the vehicle for normal operation. It includes the case of a wheel that is produced from a different material, for example, steel instead of aluminium alloy, that may use different wheel fixing nut or bolt designs but which is otherwise identical to the wheel intended for normal operation.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Standardised [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Standardised Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Standardised" means that all data stream information, including all fault codes used, shall be produced only in accordance with industry standards which, by virtue of the fact that their format and their permitted options are clearly defined, provide for a maximum level of harmonisation in the motor vehicle industry, and whose use is expressly permitted in this Regulation.		 No.083 2012-02-15
standardized [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 standardized Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"standardized" means that all emission related OBD data (i.e. stream information in the case a scanning tool is used), including all fault codes used, shall be produced only in accordance with industry standards which, by virtue of the fact that their format and the permitted options are clearly defined, provide for a maximum level of harmonisation in the motor vehicle industry, and whose use is expressly permitted in this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
Standards (Tyre and Rim, International) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 International Tyre and Rim Standards (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "International Tyre and Rim Standards" mean documents concerning wheel standardization issued by the following Organizations:
(a) The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 2/;
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Standards Manual";
(c) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(d) The Tyre and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) 4/: "Year Book";
(e) The Japan Automobile Tyre Manufacturers Association (JATMA) 5/: "Year Book";
(f) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) 6/:"Standard Manual";
(g) The Associação Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) 7/ "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(h) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) 8/:"Data Book"		 No.124 2006-12-27
start (cold) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 cold start Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
start (Cold) [No.083a 2015-07-03] 　 Cold start Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start less than or equal to 35℃ and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
start (Engine) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine start Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Engine start" consists of the ignition-On, cranking and start of combustion, and is completed when the engine speed reaches 150 min -1 below the normal, warmed-up idle speed;		 No.049 2013-06-24
start device (Cold) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Cold start device CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Cold start device" means a device which enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine temporarily, to assist starting;		 No.101 2007-06-19
start device (Cold) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Cold-start device Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.4 "Cold-start device" means a device which by its operation temporarily increases the amount of fuel supplied to the engine and is intended to facilitate starting of the engine;		 No.024 2006-11-24
start device (Cold) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start;		 No.083 2012-02-15
start device (Cold) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
start device (Cold) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Cold start device CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device which enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine temporarily, to assist starting;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Starting aid [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.; No.083 2008-05-06
Starting aid [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Starting aid [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Starting aid [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Starting aid CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine starting without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture, e.g. glow plug, changed injection timing, etc.;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Starting aid [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Starting aid CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine starting without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture, e.g. glow plug, changed injection timing, etc.;		 No.101 2012-05-26
starting aid [REG. No 692/2008] 　 starting aid emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 4. "starting aid" means glow plugs, modifications to the injection timing and other devices which assist the engine to start without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine; REG. No 692/2008
Starting prevention device [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Starting prevention device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Starting prevention device" means a device which prevents the vehicle being driven away from rest;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Starting prevention device [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Starting prevention device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Starting prevention device" means a device which prevents the vehicle being driven away from rest when a door is not fully closed;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Starting prevention device [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Starting prevention device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Starting prevention device" means a device which prevents the vehicle being driven away from rest when a door is not fully closed.		 No.107 2015-06-18
state (Neutral) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Neutral state Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.6. "Neutral state" means the state of the AFS when a defined mode of the class C passing beam (‘basic passing beam’) or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies;		 No.048 2011-12-06
state (Neutral) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Neutral state Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Neutral state" means the state of the system when a defined mode of the class C
passing beam ("basic passing beam") or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no
AFS control signal applies;		 No.123 2006-12-27
state (Neutral) [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Neutral state Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Neutral state" means the state of the system when a defined mode of the class C passing beam (‘basic passing beam’) or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies;		 No.123 2010-08-24
state (Set) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Set state alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.4. "Set state" means the state in which the vehicle cannot be driven normally under its own power.		 No.097 2012-05-08
state (Set) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Set state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.4. "Set state" means the state in which the vehicle cannot be driven normally under its own power.		 No.116 2010-06-30
state (Set) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Set state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.4. "Set state" means the state in which the vehicle cannot be driven normally under its own power.		 No.116 2012-02-16
state (set, Un-) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Unset state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.116 2010-06-30
state (set, Un-) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Unset state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.116 2012-02-16
state (Steady) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Steady-state Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.82. "Steady-state" means relating to emission tests in which engine speed and load are held at a finite set of nominally constant values. Discrete-mode tests or ramped-modal tests are steady-state tests;		 No.096 2014-03-22
state (Unset) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Unset state alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.097 2012-05-08
State Of Charge [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 SOC (State Of Charge) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
[Appendix] Electrical energy/power storage device State Of Charge (SOC) profile for OVC HEV Type I Test		 No.083 2012-02-15
State of Charge [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 SOC (State of Charge) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "State of Charge (SOC)" means the available electrical charge in a tested-device expressed as a percentage of its rated capacity.		 No.100 2015-03-31
static force application device [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 SFAD (static force application device) safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle Isofix anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture is described in the figures 1 and 2 of Annex 9.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Static force application device [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 SFAD (Static force application device) safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle ISOFIX anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture for lower anchorages and top tethers is described in the Figures 1 and 2, Annex 9, as well as an SFAD SL (Support Leg) to assess i-Size seating positions with regard to the vehicle floor strength. An example for such an SFAD SL is given in Figure 3 of Annex 10;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Static force application device (SFAD) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Static force application device (SFAD) Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Static force application device (SFAD)" means a test fixture that engages the vehicle Isofix anchorages systems and that is used to verify their strength and the ability of the vehicle or seat structure to limit the rotation in a static test. The test fixture is described in the figures 1 and 2 of Annex 9.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Static stability factor [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Static stability factor Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Static stability factor" means one-half the track width of a vehicle divided by the height of its center of gravity, also expressed as SSF = T/2H, where: T = track width (for vehicles with more than one track width the average is used; for axles with dual wheels, the outer wheels are used when calculating ‘T’) and H = height of the center of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Static stability factor [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Static stability factor Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Static stability factor" means one-half the track width of a vehicle divided by the height of its centre of gravity, also expressed as SSF = T/2H, where: T = track width (for vehicles with more than one track width the average is used; for axles with dual wheels, the outer wheels are used when calculating ‘T’) and H = height of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Stationary target [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Stationary target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Stationary target" means a target at standstill facing the same direction and positioned on the centre of the same test lane of travel as the subject vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
stationary wheel axle load (Maximum) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
stationary wheel/axle load (Maximum) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
stationary wheel/axle load (Maximum) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
stationary wheel/axle load (Maximum) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Status display [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Status display alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.3. "Status display" means any device intended to indicate the status of the immobiliser (set/unset, change of set to unset and vice versa).		 No.097 2012-05-08
Status display [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Status display Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.3. "Status display" means any device intended to indicate the status of the immobiliser (set/unset, change of set to unset and vice versa).		 No.116 2010-06-30
Status display [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Status display Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.3. "Status display" means any device intended to indicate the status of the immobiliser (set/unset, change of set to unset and vice versa).		 No.116 2012-02-16
Steady state [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Steady-state Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.82. "Steady-state" means relating to emission tests in which engine speed and load are held at a finite set of nominally constant values. Discrete-mode tests or ramped-modal tests are steady-state tests;		 No.096 2014-03-22
steady state test cycle (modal, Ramped) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ramped modal steady state test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.68. "Ramped modal steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined speed and torque ramps between these modes;		 No.096 2014-03-22
steady state test cycle (Ramped) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Ramped steady state test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. "Ramped steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined ramps between these modes (WHSC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
steer (Over) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Oversteer Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Oversteer" means a condition in which the vehicle’s yaw rate is greater than the yaw rate that would occur at the vehicle’s speed as a result of the Ackermann steer angle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
steer (Under) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Understeer Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Understeer" means a condition in which the vehicle’s yaw rate is less than the yaw rate that would occur at the vehicle’s speed as a result of the Ackermann steer angle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
steer angle (Ackerman) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Ackerman steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackerman steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
steer angle (Ackermann) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Ackermann steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackermann steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Steered wheel [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Steered wheels Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1.3. Steered wheels
"Steered wheels" means:
- the wheels the alignment of which may be altered directly or indirectly in relation to that of the tractor in order to obtain a change in the direction of movement of the tractor,
- all wheels of articulated tractors,
- wheels on the same axle, the speed of which may be varied in order to obtain a change in the direction
of movement of the tractor,
Self-tracking castor wheels are not steered wheels.		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Steered wheel [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steered wheels Steering equipment 2.3.5. "Steered wheels" means the wheels, the alignment of which may be altered directly or indirectly in relation to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle in order to determine the direction of movement of the vehicle. (The steered wheels include the axis around which they are rotated in order to determine the direction of movement of the vehicle); No.079 2008-05-27
Steering [No.018 2008-10-15] 　 Steering Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Steering" means the steering control, the steering column and its accessory cladding, the steering shaft, the steering gearbox and all other components which directly affect the effectiveness of the protective device;		 No.018 2008-10-15
Steering [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Steering protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Steering" means the steering control, the steering column and its accessory cladding, the steering shaft, the steering gearbox and all other components which directly affect the effectiveness of the protective device;		 No.018 2010-05-13
Steering [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Steering Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Steering" means the steering control (handlebars), the steering head and its accessory cladding, the steering shaft and all other components which directly affect the effectiveness of the protective device;		 No.062 2004-03-31
Steering [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Steering Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Steering" means the steering control (handlebars), the steering head and its accessory cladding, the steering shaft and all other components which directly affect the effectiveness of the protective device;		 No.062 2013-03-27
Steering [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Steering Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.3. "Steering" means the steering control, the steering column and its accessory cladding, the steering shaft, the steering gearbox and all other components that directly affect the effectiveness of the device to prevent unauthorised use.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Steering [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Steering Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.3. "Steering" means the steering control, the steering column and its accessory cladding, the steering shaft, the steering gearbox and all other components which directly affect the effectiveness of the device to prevent unauthorised use.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Steering angle [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering angle Steering equipment 2.4.3. "Steering angle" means the angle between the projection of a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane (being the central plane of the wheel, normal to the axis around which it rotates) and the road surface No.079 2008-05-27
steering column [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 steering column Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.14. "steering column" means the housing enclosing the steering shaft; No.012 2008-06-26
Steering column [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering column protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Steering column" means the housing enclosing the steering shaft;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Steering control [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Steering control Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1.1. Steering control
"Steering control" means the part directly operated by the driver in order to steer the tractor		 Directive 2009/066/EC
steering control [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 steering control Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.5. "steering control" means the steering device, usually the steering wheel, which is actuated by the driver; No.012 2008-06-26
Steering control [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Steering control" means the steering device, usually the steering wheel, which is actuated by the driver;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Steering control [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering control Steering equipment 2.3.1. "Steering control" means the part of the steering equipment which controls its operation; it may be operated with or without direct intervention of the driver. For steering equipment in which the steering forces are provided solely or partly by the muscular effort of the driver the steering control includes all parts up to the point where the steering effort is transformed by mechanical, hydraulic or electrical means; No.079 2008-05-27
steering control (Approval of a) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Approval of a steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a steering control" means the approval of a steering control type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
steering control (General) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 General steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "General steering control" means a steering control which can be fitted to more than one approved vehicle type where differences in the attachment of the steering control to the steering column do not affect the impact performance of the steering control;		 No.012 2013-03-27
steering control (Plane of the) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Plane of the steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Plane of the steering control" means in the case of the steering wheel the flat surface that splits the steering wheel rim equally between the driver and the front of the car;		 No.012 2013-03-27
steering control boss (Centre of the) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Centre of the steering control boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Steering control effort [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering control effort Steering equipment 2.4.1. "Steering control effort" means the force applied to the steering control in order to steer the vehicle. No.079 2008-05-27
Steering control rim [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 Steering control rim Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.8. "Steering control rim" means the quasi-toroidal outer ring in the case of the steering wheel usually griped by the driver's hands during driving; No.012 2008-06-26
Steering control rim [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering control rim protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Steering control rim" means the quasi-toroidal outer ring in the case of the steering wheel usually griped by the driver’s hands during driving;		 No.012 2013-03-27
steering control type [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 steering control type Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.4. "steering control type" means a category of steering controls which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. the structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials;		 No.012 2008-06-26
Steering control type [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering control type protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Steering control type" means a category of steering controls which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. The structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Steering effort [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Steering effort Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1.2. "Different types of steering equipment"
1.3. Steering effort
"Steering effort" means the force exerted by the driver on the steering control in order to steer the tractor.		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Steering equipment [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Steering equipment Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Steering equipment"
"Steering equipment" means all the equipment the purpose of which is to alter the direction of movement of
the tractor.
The steering equipment may be considered to include:
- the steering control,
- the steering gear,
- the steered wheels,
- where applicable, special equipment to produce additional or independent power,		 Directive 2009/066/EC
Steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering equipment Steering equipment 2.3. "Steering equipment" means all the equipment the purpose of which is to determine the direction of movement of the vehicle.
The steering equipment consists of:
. The steering control,
. The steering transmission,
. The steered wheels,
. The energy supply, if any.		 No.079 2008-05-27
Steering force [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering forces Steering equipment 2.4.4. "Steering forces" mean all the forces operating in the steering transmission. No.079 2008-05-27
Steering gear [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Steering gear Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1.2. Steering gear
"Steering gear" means all the components between the steering control and the steered wheels, with the exception of the special equipment defined in point 1.1.4. The steering gear may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or a combination of any of these.		 Directive 2009/066/EC
steering mechanism [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 steering mechanism Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.15. "steering mechanism" means the aggregate comprising the steering control, the steering column, the assembly accessories, the steering shaft, the steering gear housing, and all other components such as those designed to contribute to the absorption of energy in the event of impact against the steering control; No.012 2008-06-26
Steering mechanism [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering mechanism protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Steering mechanism" means the aggregate comprising the steering control, the steering column, the assembly accessories, the steering shaft, the steering gear housing, and all other components such as those designed to contribute to the absorption of energy in the event of impact against the steering control;		 No.012 2013-03-27
steering shaft [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 steering shaft Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.13. "steering shaft" means the component which transmits to the steering gear the torque applied to the steering control; No.012 2008-06-26
Steering shaft [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering shaft protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Steering shaft" means the component which transmits to the steering gear the torque applied to the steering control;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Steering time [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering time Steering equipment 2.4.2. "Steering time" means the period of time from the beginning of the movement of the steering control to the moment at which the steered wheels have reached a specific steering angle. No.079 2008-05-27
Steering transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Steering transmission Steering equipment 2.3.2. "Steering transmission" means all components which form a functional link between the steering control and the road wheels.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions:
The control transmission and the energy transmission.
Where the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the control transmission and the energy transmission. A distinction is drawn between mechanical, electrical and hydraulic transmission systems or combinations thereof, according to the means by which the signals and/or energy is transmitted.		 No.079 2008-05-27
Steering wedge [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Steering wedges Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Steering wedge [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Steering wedges mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling.		 No.055 2010-08-28
steering wheel tyre (Tractor) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor steering wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tractor steering wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to non-driven axles of agricultural and forestry tractors (motor vehicles in category T); The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of circumferential grooves and ribs.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Stoichiometric [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Stoichiometric Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.83. "Stoichiometric" means relating to the particular ratio of air and fuel such that if the fuel were fully oxidized, there would be no remaining fuel or oxygen;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Stop lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Stop lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.13. Stop lamp
"Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the tractor that the latter's driver is applying the service brake.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
stop lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 stop lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.10. stop lamp
means the lamp used to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that the latter’s driver is applying the service brake;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Stop lamp [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Stop-lamp End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Stop-lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake
The stop-lamps may be activated by the application of a retarder or a similar device		 No.007 1997-07-30
Stop lamp [No.007 2010-06-12] 　 Stop-lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Stop-lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake. The stop-lamps may be activated by the application of a retarder or a similar device;		 No.007 2010-06-12
Stop lamp [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Stop-lamp front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Stop-lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake. The stop-lamps may be activated by the application of a retarder or a similar device;		 No.007 2014-09-30
Stop lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.12. "Stop lamp" means a lamp used to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that the longitudinal movement of the vehicle is intentionally retarded; No.048 2008-05-23
Stop lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.12. "Stop lamp" means a lamp used to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that the longitudinal movement of the vehicle is intentionally retarded;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Stop lamp [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.9. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Stop lamp [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.11. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the vehicle that its driver is applying the service brake;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Stop lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 　 Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.14. "Stop lamp" means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the tractor that the latter's driver is applying the service brake;		 No.086 2010-09-30
stop lamp of different type [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
stop lamp of different type [No.050 2014-03-29] 　 Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types Front/rear position-, stop-lamps, direction indicators, rear registration‑plate lamps (L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Front position lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps, direction indicator lamps and rear-registration-plate illuminating devices of different types" means lamps which differ, in each said category, in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark,
(b) The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.050 2014-03-29
stop phase (Commanded) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Commanded stop phase using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.75. "Commanded stop phase" defines the period of time during which the combustion engine is switched off automatically for fuel saving and is allowed to start again automatically		 No.110 2015-06-30
stop signal (Emergency) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Emergency stop signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Emergency stop signal" means a signal to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that a high retardation force has been applied to the vehicle relative to the prevailing road conditions.		 No.048 2011-12-06
stop valve (80 per cent) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 80 per cent stop valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Stopping distance [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Stopping distance Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Stopping distance" means the distance travelled by the vehicle from the point the rider begins to actuate the brake control to the point at which the vehicle reaches a full stop. For tests where the simultaneous actuation of two controls is specified, the distance travelled is taken from the point the first control is actuated.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Storage medium [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Storage medium Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.84. "Storage medium" means a particulate filter, sample bag, or any other storage device used for batch sampling;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Storage reservoir [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Storage reservoir Steering equipment 2.3.6.3. "Storage reservoir" means that part of the energy supply in which the operating medium is stored at or near to the atmospheric pressure, for example a fluid reservoir. No.079 2008-05-27
storage system (energy, rechargeable) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "RESS" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.010 2012-09-20
storage system (energy, Rechargeable) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion;		 No.012 2013-03-27
storage system (energy, Rechargeable) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion,		 No.094 2012-09-20
storage system (energy, Rechargeable) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 REESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system which provides electrical energy for propulsion.		 No.095 2015-07-10
storage system (energy, rechargeable) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2011-02-14
storage system (energy, Rechargeable) [No.100 2011-02-14]a 　 RESS (Rechargeable energy storage system) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Storage System (Energy, Rechargeable) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the rechargeable energy storage system that provides electric energy for electric propulsion.
The REESS may include subsystem(s) together with the necessary ancillary systems for physical support, thermal management, electronic control and enclosures.		 No.100 2015-03-31
storage system (energy, rechargeable, charging the, Coupling system for) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Storage System (Energy, Rechargeable, Coupling system for charging the) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.		 No.100 2015-03-31
stored energy (braking equipment with, Hydraulic) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
stored energy (braking equipment with, Hydraulic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
stored energy (braking system with, Hydraulic) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2010-09-30
stored energy (braking system with, Hydraulic) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Strap [Directive 2009/079/EC] 　 Strap passenger hand-holds on two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1. Strap
The strap must be fitted to the seat or to other parts connected to the frame in such a way that it may easily be used by the passenger. ・・・.		 Directive 2009/079/EC
Strap [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Strap Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Strap : A flexible component designed to hold the body and to transmit stresses to the belt anchorages.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Strap [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Strap Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Strap
A flexible component designed to hold the body and to transmit stresses to the belt anchorages.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Strap [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Strap Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Strap
A flexible component designed to hold the body and to transmit stresses to the belt anchorages.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Strap [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Strap [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces;
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child’s pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child’s upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child’s thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child’s legs and a strap for each shoulder;
2.8.8. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer’s shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Strap [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strap (Crotch) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Crotch strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the Child Restraint System and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strap (guide, booster, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 guide strap (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.		 No.044 2007-11-23
strap (Lap) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Lap strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt passes across the front of, and restrains, directly or not, the child's pelvis.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strap (restraining, Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child-restraining strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt (harness) and restrains only the body of the child.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strap (Shoulder) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Shoulder strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Shoulder strap" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strap (tether, top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether strap Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.014 2007-12-06
strap (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector;		 No.014 2015-08-19
strap (tether, top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.044 2007-11-23
strap (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.		 No.044 2011-09-09
strap (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strap (top-tether, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top-tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top-tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top-tether connector.		 No.014 2011-04-28
strap positioner (Shoulder) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Shoulder strap positioner Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.55. "Shoulder strap positioner" means a device intended to maintain, during normal transit conditions, the appropriate shoulder strap position on the child’s torso by connecting the shoulder straps to one another.		 No.129 2014-03-29
strategy (control, emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;		 No.049 2008-04-12
strategy (control, Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Emission control strategy Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.25. "Emission control strategy" means a combination of an emission control system with one base emission control strategy and with one set of auxiliary emission control strategies, incorporated into the overall design of an engine or non-road mobile machinery into which the engine is installed;		 No.096 2014-03-22
strategy (control, emission, auxiliary) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;		 No.049 2008-04-12
strategy (control, emission, base) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;		 No.049 2008-04-12
strategy (defeat) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 defeat strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "defeat strategy" means:
(a) an AECS that reduces the effectiveness of the emission control relative to the BECS under conditions that may reasonably be expected to be encountered in normal vehicle operation and use;
(b) a BECS that discriminates between operation on a standardized approval test and other operations and provides a lesser level of emission control under conditions not substantially included in the applicable approval test procedures, or;
(c) an OBD or an emission control monitoring strategy that discriminates between operation on a standardized approval test and other operations and provides a lower level of monitoring capability (timely and accurately) under conditions not substantially included in the applicable approval test procedures;		 No.049 2008-04-12
strategy (Defeat) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Defeat strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Defeat strategy" means an emission strategy that does not meet the performance requirements for a base and/or auxiliary emission strategy as specified in this annex;		 No.049 2013-06-24
strategy (Emission) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Emission strategy Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Emission strategy" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle and used in controlling emissions;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Strategy (Emission, Auxiliary) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 AES (Auxiliary Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those conditions exist;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Strategy (Emission, Base) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 BES (Base Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AES is activated;		 No.049 2013-06-24
stressing (pre-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 prestressing Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.19. prestressing: The process of applying auto-frettage or controlled tension winding.		 No.110 2008-03-14
stressing (Pre) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pre-stressing using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.64. "Pre-stressing" means the process of applying auto-frettage or controlled tension winding.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Striker [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Striker door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Striker" is a device with which the latch engages to maintain the door in the fully latched or secondary latched position.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Strip wound [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Strip-wound 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Strip wound [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Strip-wound Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back"— pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Structure [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Structure Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3. "Structure" of a pneumatic tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular;
2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90 ° to the centre line of the tread;
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;
2.3.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90 ° to the centre line of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt;
2.3.4. "Reinforced" or "Extra Load" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre;
2.3.5. "Temporary use spare tyre" means a tyre different from a tyre intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.3.6. "T-type temporary use spare tyre" means a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres;
2.3.7. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.030 2008-07-30
Structure [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Structure Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.3. "Structure" of a pneumatic tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. A distinction is made between the following structures in particular: No.054 2008-07-11
Structure [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Structure 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Structure [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Structure Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.		 No.109 2006-07-04
structure (Super-) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Superstructure Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Superstructure" means the load-bearing components of the bodywork as defined by the manufacturer, containing those coherent parts and elements which contribute to the strength and energy absorbing capability of the bodywork, and preserve the residual space in the rollover test.		 No.066 2007-12-06
structure (Super-) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Superstructure Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Superstructure" means the load-bearing components of the bodywork as defined by the manufacturer, containing those coherent parts and elements which contribute to the strength and energy absorbing capability of the bodywork, and preserve the residual space in the rollover test.		 No.066 2011-03-30
structure (Super-) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Superstructure Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Superstructure" means the part of the bodywork which contributes to the strength of the vehicle in the event of a roll-over accident;		 No.107 2010-09-29
structure (Super) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Superstructure Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Superstructure" means the part of the bodywork which contributes to the strength of the vehicle in the event of a roll-over accident.		 No.107 2015-06-18
structure (Tyre) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre structure Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Tyre structure" means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. This may be bias ply (diagonal or cross ply), bias-belted, radial ply or run flat tyre as further defined in Regulation No 30.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Structure of a pneumatic tyre [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Structure of a pneumatic tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Structure of a tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Structure of a tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the bead and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90° to the centreline of the tread;
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;
2.3.3. "Radial" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt;		 No.106 2010-09-30
STU [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 separate technical unit (STU) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
sub assembly (Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2012-09-20
sub-assembly (Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
Subject trailer [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 Subject trailer Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.35. "Subject trailer" is a trailer representative of the trailer type for which type approval is sought.		 No.013 2010-11-13
Subject trailer [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Subject trailer Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Subject trailer" is a trailer representative of the trailer type for which type approval is sought.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Subject vehicle [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Subject vehicle Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Subject vehicle" means the vehicle being tested.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Substitute function [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Substitute function Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.20. "Substitute function" means any specified front-lighting and/or front light-signalling, be it a front-lighting and/or a front light-signalling function, or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of it, intended to replace a front-lighting function/ mode in case of failure.		 No.123 2006-12-27
Substitute function [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Substitute function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.20. "Substitute function" means any specified front-lighting and/or front light-signalling, be it a front- lighting and/or a front light-signalling function, or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of it, intended to replace a front-lighting function/mode in case of failure.		 No.123 2010-08-24
Subsystem [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Subsystem Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Subsystem" means any functional assembly of REESS components.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Superstructure [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Superstructure Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Superstructure" means the load-bearing components of the bodywork as defined by the manufacturer, containing those coherent parts and elements which contribute to the strength and energy absorbing capability of the bodywork, and preserve the residual space in the rollover test.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Superstructure [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Superstructure Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Superstructure" means the load-bearing components of the bodywork as defined by the manufacturer, containing those coherent parts and elements which contribute to the strength and energy absorbing capability of the bodywork, and preserve the residual space in the rollover test.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Superstructure [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Superstructure Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Superstructure" means the part of the bodywork which contributes to the strength of the vehicle in the event of a roll-over accident;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Superstructure [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Superstructure Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Superstructure" means the part of the bodywork which contributes to the strength of the vehicle in the event of a roll-over accident;		 No.107 2010-09-29
Superstructure [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Superstructure Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Superstructure" means the part of the bodywork which contributes to the strength of the vehicle in the event of a roll-over accident.		 No.107 2015-06-18
supine position [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child's head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.129 2014-03-29
supine position [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Lying down/supine/prone position Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Lying down/supine/prone position" means a position where at least the child’s head and body excluding its limbs are on a horizontal surface when at rest in the restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Supplementary service description [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Supplementary service description Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Supplementary service description" means an additional service description, marked within a circle, to identify a special type of service (load rating and speed category) to which the tyre type is also allowed in addition to the applicable load variation with speed (see annex 7).		 No.106 2010-09-30
supply (power, electric, External) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2011-02-14
supply (power, electric, External) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 External electric power supply Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "External electric power supply" means an alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) electric power supply outside of the vehicle.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Supply and operating device [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Supply and operating device Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.12. "Supply and operating device" means one or more components of a system providing power to one or more parts of the system, including such as power and/or voltage control(s) for one or more light sources as e.g. electronic light source control gears;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Supply and operating device [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Supply and operating device Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.12. "Supply and operating device" means one or more components of a system providing power to one or more parts of the system, including such as power and/or voltage control(s) for one or more light sources as e.g. electronic light source control gears;		 No.123 2010-08-24
supply device (Gas) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Gas supply device using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Gas supply device" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine intake manifold (carburettor or injector).
2.17.1. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.
2.17.2. "Gas injector" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine or associated intake system.		 No.110 2011-05-07
supply device (Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas supply device using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.30. "Gas supply device" means a device for introducing gaseous fuel into the engine intake manifold (carburettor or injector).		 No.110 2015-06-30
support (Chair) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Chair support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Chair support" means that part of a child restraint by which the chair can be raised.		 No.044 2007-11-23
support (Chair) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Chair support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Chair support" means that part of a child restraint by which the chair can be raised.		 No.044 2011-09-09
support (Chair) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Chair support Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Chair support" means that part of a Child Restraint System by which the chair can be raised.		 No.129 2014-03-29
support (Child) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Child support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Child support" means that part of a child restraint by which the child can be raised within the child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
support (Child) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Child support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Child support" means that part of a child restraint by which the child can be raised within the child restraint.		 No.044 2011-09-09
support (Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Child support Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Child support" means that part of a Child Restraint System by which the child can be raised within the Child Restraint System.		 No.129 2014-03-29
support leg [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 support leg Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Attachments" means parts of the child restraint, including securing components, which
enable the child restraint to be firmly secured to the vehicle structure either directly or
through the vehicle seat;
2.11.1. "support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Support leg [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Support leg Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11.1. "Support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Support leg [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Support leg foot assessment volume [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Support leg foot assessment volume safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Support leg foot assessment volume" means the volume, as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of Annex 10 to this Regulation, in which the support leg foot of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129 will rest and therefore the vehicle floor has to intersect;		 No.014 2015-08-19
support leg installation assessment volume (i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
support system (Vision) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Vision support system devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.4."Vision support system" means a system to enable the driver to detect and/or see objects in the area adjacent to the vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
surface (apparent) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens;
or the light-emitting surface;
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens. Different examples of the application of apparent surface can be found in Annex 3 to this Regulation.
Only in the case of a light-signalling device producing variable luminous intensities, its apparent surface that may be variable as specified in paragraph 2.7.1.3 shall be considered under all conditions permitted by the variable intensity control, if applicable;		 No.048 2011-12-06
surface (apparent) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b),
or the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation);		 No.053 2013-06-18
surface (apparent) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b),
or the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation);		 No.074 2013-06-18
surface (Apparent) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation, means the orthogonal projection of the light-emitting surface in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation (see Annex 3).		 No.086 2010-09-30
surface (contact, floor, Vehicle) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Vehicle floor contact surface safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle floor contact surface" means the area which results from the intersection of the upper surface of the vehicle floor (incl. trim, carpet, foam, etc.) with the support leg foot assessment volume and is designed to withstand the support leg forces of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129;		 No.014 2015-08-19
surface (contact, foot, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg foot contact surface Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
surface (External) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 External surface External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "External surface" means the outside of the vehicle including the bonnet, the lid of the luggage compartment, the doors, the wings, the roof, the lighting and light-signalling devices and the visible strengthening components.		 No.026 2005-12-16
surface (External) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 External surface external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "External surface" means the outside of the vehicle including the bonnet, the lid of the luggage compartment, the doors, the wings, the roof, the lighting and light-signalling devices and the visible strengthening components.		 No.026 2010-08-14
surface (External) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 External surface external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "External surface" means that part of the vehicle forward of the cab rear panel as defined in paragraph 2.5 below, with the exception of the rear panel itself, and includes such items as the front wings, front bumpers and front wheels;		 No.061 2010-06-30
surface (Illuminating) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Illuminating surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Illuminating surface" (see Annex 3);
2.9.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.7.9, 2.7.10, 2.7.19, 2.7.21 and 2.7.26) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the "projection lens", on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.9.2 shall be applied. If the light- emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.
In the case of a dipped-beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;
In the case of AFS being installed: where a lighting function is produced by two or more simultaneously operated lighting units on a given side of the vehicle, the individual illuminating surfaces, taken together, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered (for example, in the figure of paragraph 6.22.4 below, the individual illuminating surfaces of the lighting units 8, 9 and 11, regarded together and taking into account their respective location, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered for the right hand side of the vehicle);
2.9.2. "Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector" (paragraphs 2.7.11 to 2.7.15, 2.7.18, 2.7.20 and 2.7.22 to 2.7.25) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference.
To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used to verify the distance to the extreme edges of the vehicle and the height above the ground.
For other applications of the illuminating surface, e.g. distance between two lamps or functions, the shape of the periphery of this illuminating surface shall be used. The screens shall remain parallel, but other orientations are allowed to be used.
In the case of a light-signalling device whose illuminating surface encloses either totally or partially the illuminating surface of another function or encloses a non-lighted surface, the illuminating surface may be considered to be the light-emitting surface itself (see, e.g. Annex 3, Parts 2, 3, 5 and 6);
2.9.3. "Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector" (paragraph 2.7.16) means, as declared by the applicant during the component approval procedure for the retro-reflectors, the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes contiguous to the declared outermost parts of the retro-reflectors' optical system and parallel to that axis. For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered;		 No.048 2011-12-06
surface (Illuminating) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Illuminating surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Illuminating surface" (see Annex 3);
2.7.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.5.6 and 2.5.7) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the ‘projection lens’, on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.7.2 shall be applied. If the light emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.
In the case of a passing beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;
2.7.2. "Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector" (paragraphs 2.5.8, 2.5.10, 2.5.11 and 2.5.12) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used;
2.7.3. "Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector" (paragraph 2.5.9) means the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes continuous to the outermost parts of the retro-reflector's optical system and parallel to that axis. For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered;		 No.074 2013-06-18
surface (reflecting, Centre of the) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Centre of the reflecting surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11."Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.		 No.046 2014-08-08
surface (reflecting, curvature at one point on the, radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 rp (The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7."The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and ri′ i.e.:
rp=(ri+ri')/2		 No.046 2014-08-08
surface (reflecting, curvature at one point on the, radius of, principal) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.		 No.046 2014-08-08
surface (Spherical) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Spherical surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.8."Spherical surface" means a surface, which has a constant and equal radius in all directions		 No.046 2014-08-08
surface (spherical, A) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Aspherical surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9."Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.		 No.046 2014-08-08
surface of a lamp (Illuminating) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Illuminating surface of a lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Illuminating surface of a lamp (see Annex 3).
2.6.1. "Illuminating surface of a lighting device" (paragraphs 2.5.8 to 2.5.11) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector in a transverse plane. If the lamp glass (or glasses) extend(s) over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account. In the case of a passing lamp, the illuminating surface is limited on the side of the cut-off by the apparent projection of the line of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and glass are adjustable, the mean adjustment should be used;
2.6.2. "Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a retro reflector" (paragraphs 2.5.12 to 2.5.20) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 % of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used;
2.6.3. "Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector" (paragraph 2.5.22) means the orthogonal projection of the reflecting surface of the retro reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and bounded by planes touching the outer edges of the light projection surface of the retro reflector and parallel to this axis. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only vertical and horizontal planes shall be used;
2.6.4. "Light-emitting surface" means that part of the exterior surface of the transparent lens that encloses the lighting or light-signalling device and allows it to emit light.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Surveillance camera monitor recording device [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13."Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
surveillance camera-monitor-recording device [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 surveillance camera-monitor-recording device Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13. "surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 which can befitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than thosespecified in paragraph 15.2.4 or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Surveillance mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Surveillance mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.3."Surveillance mirror" means a mirror other than the ones defined in paragraph 2.1.1 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Surveillance mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Surveillance mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.3. "Surveillance mirror" means a mirror other than the ones defined in paragraph 2.1.1 which canbe fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other thanthose specified in paragraph 15.2.4.		 No.046 2010-07-10
suspension trim height [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 suspension trim height Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "suspension trim height" means the distance between the wheel centre and a fixed point on the chassis as declared by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.111 2002-02-01
symbol [Directive 2009/080/EC] 　 symbol identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators for two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "symbol" means an outline enabling a control, tell-tale or indicator to be identified.		 Directive 2009/080/EC
Symbol [No.003 2011-12-06A1] 　 Symbols and units Retro-reflecting devices [ANNEX 1] RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES
Symbols and units
A = Area of the illuminating surface of the retro-reflecting device (cm 2 )
C = Centre of reference
NC = Axis of reference
Rr = Receiver, observer or measuring device
　　・・・・・
CIL = Coefficient of luminous intensity (millicandelas/lux) Angles are expressed in degrees and minutes
[図]		 No.003 2011-12-06
symbol [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 symbols noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.13. Following is a table containing all symbols used in this Regulation:
[表 Symbol / Units / Explanation / Reference]
Symbol : AA', a wot, a wot,ref, a urban, BB', CC', k, k p, L, l PA, m kerb, m t, n, n idle, n wot(i), PP', PMR, P n, S, v, v max, v test		 No.041 2012-11-14
Symbol [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Symbol Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Symbol" means a diagram from which to identify a control, a tell-tale or an indicator		 No.060 2004-03-31
Symbol [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Symbol Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Symbol" means a diagram from which to identify a control, a tell-tale or an indicator.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Symbol [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Symbols Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 11. INTRODUCTORY PROVISIONS
Table 1 Symbols, their illumination and colours [表]
No. / Item / Symbol / Function / Illumination / Colour
1. / Master lighting switch / [図] / Control / No / —
【以下略】		 No.121 2010-07-10
symbol (Speed) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Speed symbol 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Speed symbol" means:
2.34.1. An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load
index.
2.34.2. The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below: [表]
Speed symbol Corresponding speed (km/h)
L, M, N, P,,, U, H, V, W, Y / 120, 130, 140, 150,,,200, 210, 240, 270, 300		 No.108 2006-07-04
symbol (Speed) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Speed symbol Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Speed symbol" means:
2.33.1. An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index.
2.33.2. The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below: [表]
Speed symbol / Corresponding maximum speed (km/h)
F / 80 ～ H / 210		 No.109 2006-07-04
symbol (warning, speed, maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 maximum speed warning symbol Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 5. SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS
5.1. General
5.1.4. The temporary-use spare unit shall exhibit the following characteristics:
5.1.4.1. An 80 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 80km/h]
5.1.4.1.1. An 120 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position. [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 120km/h]		 No.064 2010-11-26
symbol 1 [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First axis (symbol 1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.9. "First axis (symbol 1)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol 2 [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second axis (symbol 2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.12. "Second axis (symbol 2)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90° ＜ β1 ＜ 90° as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.		 No.104 2014-03-14
SYMBOL AND DEFINITION [No.013 2010-09-30A19] 　 SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 19] PERFORMANCE TESTING OF TRAILER BRAKING COMPONENTS
[APPENDIX 7] SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS
[表] SYMBOL / DEFINITION
BF / Brake factor (input torque to output torque amplification ratio)
CO / Threshold input torque (minimum torque necessary to produce a measurable brake torque)
D / Outer tyre diameter (overall diameter of an inflated new tyre)
d / A conventional number denoting the nominal rim diameter and corresponding to the diameter of the rim expressed either in inches or mm
FB / Brake force
H / Nominal tyre section height (the distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter)
I / Rotary inertia
lT / Brake lever length of reference test trailer
Mt / Average brake output torque
ne / Equivalent number of static brake applications for the purpose of type approval
ner / Equivalent number of static applications obtained during testing
nD / Rotational speed of the rolling road
nW / Rotational speed of the unbraked wheels of the axle
Pd / Maximum technically permitted mass for the brake
p / Pressure
P15 / The pressure in the brake chamber require to produce a pushrod stroke of15 mm from the zero datum position.
R / Dynamic tyre rolling radius (calculated using 0,485 D)
Ra / Nominal aspect ratio of the tyre (one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height of the tyre in mm by the number expressing the nominal section width in mm).
Rl / Ratio of s T /l T
RR / Radius of the rolling road
S1 / Section width of the tyre (linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decorations or protective bands or ribs).
s / Actuator stroke (working stroke plus free stroke)
smax / Total actuator stroke
sp / Effective stroke (the stroke at which the output thrust is 90per cent of the average thrust Th A )
sT / Brake chamber push rod travel of reference test trailer in mm
ThA / Average thrust (the average thrust is determined by integrating the values between 1/3 and 2/3 of the total stroke s max )
Ths / Spring thrust of the spring brake
TR / Sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of trailer or semi-trailer
v / Rolling road linear speed
v1 / Initial speed, when braking starts
v2 / Speed at end of braking
W60 / Energy input, equivalent to the kinetic energy of the corresponding mass for the brake under test when braked from 60 km/h to standstill
z / Braking rate of vehicle		 No.013 2010-09-30
SYMBOL AND DEFINITION [No.013 2010-09-30A20] 　 SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 20] ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURE FOR THE TYPE APPROVAL OF TRAILERS
[APPENDIX 5] SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS
[表] SYMBOL / DEFINITION
ADi / Tpi when Tpi ≤ 0,8 NFDi for front axles, or 0,8 NFDi when Tpi > 0,8 NFDi for front axles
BDi / Tpi when Tpi ≤ 0,8 NRDi for rear axles, or 0,8 NRDi when Tpi > 0,8 NRDi for rear axles
AUi / Tpi when Tpi ≤ 0,8 NFUi for front axles, or 0,8 NFUi when Tpi > 0,8 NFUi for front axles
BUi / Tpi when Tpi ≤ 0,8 NRUi for rear axles, or 0,8 NRUi when Tpi > 0,8 NRUi for rear axles
BF / brake factor
Co / threshold camshaft input torque (minimum camshaft torque necessary to produce a measurable brake torque)
E / wheelbase
EL / distance between the coupling support leg or landing legs to the centre of the axle(s) of a centre axle trailer or semi-trailer
ER / distance between king-pin and centre of axle or axles of semi-trailer
F / force (N)
Ff / total normal static reaction of road surface on front axle(s)
Ffdyn / total normal dynamic reaction of road surface on front axles(s)
Fr / total normal static reaction of road surface on rear axle(s)
Frdyn / total normal dynamic reaction of road surface on rear axle(s)
FR / total normal static reaction of road surface on all wheels of the trailer or semi-trailer
FRdyn / total normal dynamic reaction of road surface on all wheels of the trailer or semi-trailer
g / acceleration due to gravity (9,81 m/s 2 )
h / height above ground of centre of gravity
hK / height of fifth wheel coupling (king pin)
hr / height of centre of gravity of trailer
i / axle index
iF / number of front axles
iR / number of rear axles
l / lever length
n / number of spring brake actuators per axle
NFD / total normal reaction of road surface on front axle(s) when facing downhill on an 18 per cent gradient
NFDi / normal reaction of road surface on front axle i when facing downhill on an 18 per cent gradient
NFU / total normal reaction of road surface on front axle(s) when facing uphill on an 18 per cent gradient
NFUi / normal reaction of road surface on front axle i when facing uphill on an 18 per cent gradient
NRD / total normal reaction of road surface on rear axle(s) when facing downhill on an 18 per cent gradient
NRDi / normal reaction of road surface on rear axle i when facing downhill on an 18 per cent gradient
NRU / total normal reaction of road surface on rear axle(s) when facing uphill on an 18 per cent gradient
NRUi / normal reaction of road surface on rear axle i when facing uphill on an 18 per cent gradient
pm / pressure at coupling head of control line
pc / pressure in the brake chamber
P / mass of individual vehicle
Ps / static mass at fifth wheel coupling at trailer mass P
PR / total normal static reaction of road surface on wheels of trailer or semi-trailer
PRF / total normal static reaction of road surface on the front axles on level ground
PRR / total normal static reaction of road surface on the rear axles on level ground
Rs / static laden radius of the tyre, calculated using the following formula:
　Rs = ½ dr + FR · H
　where:
　dr = nominal rim diameter
　H = design section height = ½ (d - dr)
　d = rim diameter convention number
　FR = factor, as defined by ETRTO (Engineering Design, Information 1994, page CV.11)
Tpi / brake force at periphery of all wheels of axle i provided by the spring brake(s)
Ths / spring thrust of the spring brake
TR / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the trailer or semi-trailer
TRf / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the front axle(s)
TRr / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the rear axle(s)
TRmax / sum of maximum available braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the trailer or semi-trailer
TRL / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the trailer or semi-trailer at which the limit of adhesion is reached
TRLf / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the front axle(s) at which the limit of adhesion is reached
TRLr / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the rear axle(s) at which the limit of adhesion is reached.
TRpr / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the trailer or semi-trailer required to achieve the prescribed performance
TRprf / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the front axle(s) required to achieve the prescribed performance
TRprr / sum of braking forces at periphery of all wheels of the rear axle(s) required to achieve the prescribed performance
zc / braking rate of the vehicle combination, with the trailer only braked
cos P / cosine of angle subtended by slope of 18 per cent and horizontal plane = 0,98418
tan P / tangent of angle subtended by slope of 18 per cent and horizontal plane = 0,18		 No.013 2010-09-30
Symbol and definition [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Symbol and definition [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Symbols and definitions mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
Dc = D c value in kN for centre axle trailers — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1 of this Regulation.		 No.055 2010-08-28
symbol I [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Illumination axis (symbol I) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.2. "Illumination axis (symbol I)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the light source.		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol O [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation axis (symbol O) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.3. "Observation axis (symbol O)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the photometer head;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol R' [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R') Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R′)" means the quotient of the coefficient of luminous intensity R of a plane retro-reflecting surface and its area A
[式]		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol R [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Reference axis (symbol R) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.6. "Reference axis (symbol R)" means a designated line segment originating on the reference centre which is used to describe the angular position of the retro-reflective device;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol ß [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Luminance factor (symbol ß) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.4. "Luminance factor (symbol ß)" means the ratio of the luminance of the body to the luminance of a perfect diffuser under identical conditions of illumination and observation;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol α [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation angle (symbol α) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol α)" means the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol β [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Entrance angle (symbol β) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol β)" means the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90° but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0° ＜ β ＜ 180°. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, β 1 and β 2 ;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol β1 [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180° ＜ β1 ＜ 180°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol β2 [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90° ＜ β2 ＜ 90°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol ε [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Rotation angle (symbol ε) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.8. "Rotation angle (symbol ε)" means the angle indicating the orientation of the retro-reflecting material by an appropriate symbol with respect to rotation about the reference axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol η1 [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
symbol η2 [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the receiver as seen from the reference centre (β1 = β2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
Symmetrical multiple glazed unit [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Symmetrical multiple-glazed unit safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Multiple-glazed unit" means an assembly of at least two parallel panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by one or more gap(s).
2.8.1. "Symmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit where all component panes are identical (e.g. all uniform toughened glass).
2.8.2. "Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit other than a symmetrical multiple-glazed unit).		 No.043 2014-02-12
system (Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Door system" is the door, latch, striker, hinges, sliding track combinations and other door retention components on a door and its surrounding doorframe. The door system of a double door includes both doors.		 No.011 2010-05-13
system (Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Electrical/electronic system Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Electrical/electronic system" means (an) electrical and/or electronic device(s) or set(s) of devices together with any associated electrical connections which form part of a vehicle but which are not intended to be type approved separately from the vehicle.		 No.010 2010-05-08
System control [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 System control Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.4. "System control" means that part(s) of the AFS receiving the AFS control signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically; No.048 2008-05-23
System control [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 System control (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.4. "System control" means that part(s) of the AFS receiving the AFS control signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;		 No.048 2011-12-06
System control [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 System control Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.8. "System control" means that part(s) of the system receiving the signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;		 No.123 2006-12-27
System control [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 System control Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.8. "System control" means that part(s) of the system receiving the signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;		 No.123 2010-08-24
System manufacturer [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 System manufacturer LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "System manufacturer" means an organisation which can assume technical responsibility for the manufacturing of LPG and CNG retrofit systems and can demonstrate that it possesses the features required and the necessary means to achieve quality assessment and conformity of production of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
System of different type [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Systems of different types Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.16. Systems of different "types" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
1.16.1. the trade name or mark(s);
1.16.2. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering optical characteristics/photometric properties of the system;
1.16.3. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.16.4. the front-lighting function(s), mode(s) and classes produced;
1.16.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coatings, if any;
1.16.6. the characteristic(s) of the signal(s), specified for the system;		 No.123 2006-12-27
System reference axis [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 System reference axis Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1. below;		 No.123 2006-12-27
System reference axis [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 System reference axis Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1 below;		 No.123 2010-08-24
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
T (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 T : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
T type temporary use spare tyre [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 "T" type temporary use spare tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Table load capacity variation with speed [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Table load-capacity variation with speed Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.29. "Table load-capacity variation with speed" means:
The table, in Annex VIII, showing as a function of the load-capacity indices and nominal-speedcategory symbols the load variations which a pneumatic tyre can withstand when used at speeds different from that conforming to its nominal-speed-category symbol.
The load variations do not apply in the case of the additional load capacity symbol and speed category obtained when the provisions of paragraph 6.2.5 are applied.		 No.054 2008-07-11
Table of tyre load capacity at various speed [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds" means the table in Annex 8 which shows, by reference to indices of load capacity and of capacity at nominal speed, load variations of a tyre if used at speeds other than that corresponding to the index of its nominal speed category.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Tailpipe emission [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Tailpipe emissions Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.60. "Tailpipe emissions" means the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants;		 No.049 2013-06-24
tailpipe emissions [REG. No 595/2009] 　 tailpipe emissions emissions 4. "tailpipe emissions" means the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants; REG. No 595/2009
take off unit (Power) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Power take-off unit Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.51. "Power take-off unit" means an engine driven output device for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;		 No.049 2013-06-24
take off unit (Power) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Power take-off unit Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Power take-off unit" means an engine-driven output provision for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment.		 No.083 2012-02-15
take-off unit (power) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 power take-off unit Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "power take-off unit" means an engine-driven output device for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;		 No.049 2008-04-12
take-off unit (power) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 power take-off unit Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "power take-off unit" means an engine-driven output device for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;		 No.049 2010-08-31
tale (Tell-) [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Tell-tale Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Tell-tale" means an optical signal that, when alight, indicates the actuation of a device, a correct ordefective functioning or condition, or a failure to function.		 No.121 2010-07-10
Tampering [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Tampering Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.61. "Tampering" means inactivation, adjustment or modification of the vehicle emissions control or propulsion system, including any software or other logical control elements of those systems, that has the effect, whether intended or not, of worsening the emissions performance of the vehicle;		 No.049 2013-06-24
tampering [REG. No 595/2009] 　 tampering emissions 16. "tampering" means inactivation, adjustment or modification of the vehicle emissions control or propulsion system, including any software or other logical control elements of those systems, that has the effect, whether intended or not, of worsening the emissions performance of the vehicle. REG. No 595/2009
Tank [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Tank" (or vessel) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.14. "Tank" (or vessel) means any storage system used for liquefied natural gas.		 No.110 2015-06-30
tank (Accessory fitted to the) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Accessories fitted to the container or tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.		 No.110 2015-06-30
tank (Approval of a) [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Approval of a tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.4. "Approval of a tank" means the approval of a type of liquid fuel tank;		 No.034 2011-04-28
tank (fuel, Capacity of the) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle.		 No.095 2015-07-10
tank (fuel, capacity of the) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.5. "capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer; and		 No.034 2011-04-28
tank (fuel, Capacity of the) [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.2. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the tank manufacturer;		 No.034 2011-04-28
tank (fuel, Capacity of the) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.095 2007-11-30
tank (Inner) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Inner vessel or inner tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.70. "Inner vessel or inner tank" means part of the fuel tank that contains LNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
tank (Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.15. "Type of tank" means tanks that do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3B.		 No.110 2015-06-30
tank (Type of) [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Type of tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.5. "Type of tank" means tanks which do not differ in such essential respects as:
10.5.1. The structure, shape, dimensions and material (metal/plastic) of the tank(s);
10.5.2. The intended use of the tank: universal use or specific vehicle use;
10.5.3. The presence or absence of the accessories.		 No.034 2011-04-28
tank [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 tank Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.4. "tank" means the tank(s) designed to contain the liquid fuel, as defined in paragraph 4.6, used primarily for the propulsion of the vehicle excluding its accessories (filler pipe, if it is a separate element, filler hole, cap, gauge, connections to the engine or to compensate interior excess pressure, etc.;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Tank [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.1. "Tank" means the tank(s) designed to contain the liquid fuel, as defined in paragraph 10.3, used primarily for the propulsion of the vehicle; the tank may be approved either with or without its accessories (filler pipe, if it is a separate element, filler hole, cap, gauge, connections to compensate interior excess pressure, etc.);		 No.034 2011-04-28
Tank breathing loss [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,33 );		 No.083 2012-02-15
Tank breathing loss [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C1H2,33).		 No.083 2015-07-03
Tank breathing losses [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C1H2,33). No.083 2008-05-06
Target [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Target" means a high volume series production passenger car of category M1 AA saloon (1) or in the case of a soft target an object representative of such a vehicle in terms of its detection characteristics applicable to the sensor system of the AEBS under test.		 No.131 2014-07-19
target (Moving) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Moving target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Moving target" means a target travelling at a constant speed in the same direction and in the centre of the same lane of travel as the subject vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
target (Soft) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Soft target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Soft target" means a target that will suffer minimum damage and cause minimum damage to the subject vehicle in the event of a collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
target (Stationary) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Stationary target Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Stationary target" means a target at standstill facing the same direction and positioned on the centre of the same test lane of travel as the subject vehicle.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Target acceleration [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Target acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Target acceleration" means an acceleration at a partial throttle condition in urban traffic and is derived from statistical investigations.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Technical crack [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Technical crack (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Technical crack" is a material separation with a propagation of more than 1 mm occurring during a dynamic test (defects caused by the production process are not to be taken into account).		 No.124 2006-12-27
technical unit (Separate) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Separate technical unit alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Separate technical unit" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately, but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing.		 No.097 2012-05-08
technical unit (Separate) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
technical unit (Separate) [No.116 2012-02-16] 　 Separate technical unit Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.2. "Separate technical unit" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately, but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing;		 No.116 2012-02-16
technical unit (separate) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 separate technical unit (STU) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".		 No.010 2010-05-08
technical unit (Separate) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle;		 No.107 2006-12-27
technical unit (Separate) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type- approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle;		 No.107 2010-09-29
technical unit (separate, Approval of a) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2010-09-29
technical unit (separate, vehicle or a, Approval of a) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 above with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Technically permissible maximum laden mass [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 M (Technically permissible maximum laden mass) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Technically permissible maximum laden mass [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Technically permissible maximum laden mass [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Technically permissible maximum laden mass (M)" means the maximum mass of the vehicle based on its construction and performance, stated by the manufacturer. The technically permissible maximum laden mass is used to determine the vehicle category.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Tell tale [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Tell-tale Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Tell-tale" means an optical signal which indicates the actuation of a device, correct or defective functioning or condition, or failure to function.		 No.060 2014-10-15
tell tale (closed, Circuit) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.053 2013-06-18
tell tale (closed, Circuit) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.074 2013-06-18
tell tale (Operating) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.053 2013-06-18
tell tale (Operating) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and whether or not it is operating correctly;		 No.074 2013-06-18
tell-tale [Directive 2009/080/EC] 　 tell-tale identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators for two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "tell-tale" means a signal indicating the triggering of a device, an operation or a suspect or faulty state or an absence of operation;		 Directive 2009/080/EC
Telltale [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Tell-tale Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Tell-tale" means an optical signal that, when alight, indicates the actuation or deactivation of a device, a correct or defective functioning or condition, or a failure to function.		 No.121 2016-01-08
tell-tale (Circuit-closed) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.		 No.086 2010-09-30
tell-tale (Closed-circuit) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Closed-circuit tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Closed-circuit tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether it is operating correctly or not;		 No.048 2011-12-06
tell-tale (Operating) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Operating tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Operating tell-tale" means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and is operating correctly or not;		 No.048 2011-12-06
tell-tale (Operational) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Operational tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Operational tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing whether a device that has been actuated is operating correctly or not.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Tell-tale [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Tell-tale Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tell-tale" means an optical signal which indicates the actuation of a device, correct or defective functioning or condition, or failure to function;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Tell-tale [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Tell-tale Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Tell-tale" means an optical signal that, when alight, indicates the actuation of a device, a correct ordefective functioning or condition, or a failure to function.		 No.121 2010-07-10
temperature (brake, Initial) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Initial brake temperature Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Initial brake temperature" means the temperature of the hottest brake before any brake application.		 No.078 2015-01-30
temperature (Cryogenic) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Cryogenic temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.69. "Cryogenic temperature" for the purpose of this Regulation means temperatures below - 40℃.		 No.110 2015-06-30
temperature (Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Gas temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.58. "Gas temperature" means the temperature of gas in a cylinder.		 No.110 2015-06-30
temperature (gas) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 gas temperature Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.13. gas temperature: The temperature of gas in a cylinder.		 No.110 2008-03-14
temperature (Operating) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Operating temperatures using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2011-05-07
temperature (Operating) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Operating temperatures using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.5. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2015-06-30
temperature (Settled) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Settled temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.67. "Settled temperature" means the uniform gas temperature after any change in temperature caused by filling has dissipated.		 No.110 2015-06-30
temperature (settled) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 settled temperature Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.22. settled temperature: The uniform gas temperature after any change in temperature caused by filling has dissipated.		 No.110 2008-03-14
temperature sensor [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure or temperature sensor LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.13. "Pressure or temperature sensor" means a device which measures pressure or temperature;		 No.067 2008-03-14
temperature triggered [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.35. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive temperature and/or pressure which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
temperature triggered (PRD) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.22. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one time use device triggered by excessive temperature which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2011-05-07
temperatures (Operating) [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Operating temperatures Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Temporary use spare tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Temporary use spare tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.5. "Temporary use spare tyre" means a tyre different from a tyre intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions; No.030 2008-07-30
temporary use spare tyre (T type) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 "T" type temporary use spare tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Temporary use spare tyre [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Temporary use spare tyre Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Temporary use spare tyre [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Temporary use spare tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Temporary use spare unit [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Temporary use spare unit Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Temporary use spare unit" means an assembly of any wheel and tyre that is not within that defined as a "Standard spare unit" in paragraph 2.9. Temporary use spare units may be of the following types:
2.10.1. Type 1 : An assembly in which the tyre is a temporary use spare tyre as defined in paragraph 2.4.2;
2.10.2. Type 2 : An assembly in which the wheel has a different offset from that of the wheel fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.3. Type 3 : An assembly in which the tyre is of a different structure from that fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.4. Type 4 : An assembly in which the tyre is a normal tyre as defined in paragraph 2.4.1 but where the size designation of the wheel or the tyre or both, differ from those of the wheel or tyre fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.5. Type 5 : An assembly in which a wheel and tyre unit as defined in paragraph 2.4.3 or 2.4.4 is fitted to the vehicle for normal, long term road use, but used in an emergency in a totally deflated condition;		 No.064 2010-11-26
Temporary-use spare tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Temporary-use spare tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.6. "Temporary-use spare tyre" means a tyre different from a tyre intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions; but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions. No.117 2008-08-29
Temporary-use spare tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Temporary-use spare tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Temporary-use spare tyre" means a tyre different from a tyre intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions; but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
temporary-use spare unit (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
Tension reducing device [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Tension-reducing device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. Tension-reducing device
A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Tension relieving device [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Tension relieving device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tension relieving device" means a system which allows to release the device that adjusts and maintains the tension in the ISOFIX top tether strap.		 No.129 2014-03-29
tension relieving device [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 A tension relieving device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "A tension relieving device" means a system which allow to release the device which adjust and maintain the tension in the Isofix top tether strap.		 No.044 2007-11-23
tension relieving device [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 tension relieving device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "A tension relieving device" means a system which allow to release the device which adjust and maintain the tension in the ISOFIX top tether strap.		 No.044 2011-09-09
tension winding (Controlled) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Controlled tension winding using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.54. "Controlled tension winding" means a process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.		 No.110 2015-06-30
tension winding (controlled) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 controlled tension winding Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.9. controlled tension winding: A process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Tension-reducing device [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Tension-reducing device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. Tension-reducing device : A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Tension-reducing device [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Tension-reducing device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. Tension-reducing device
A device which is incorporated in the retractor and reduces the tension of the strap automatically when the safety-belt is fastened. When it is released, such a device switches off automatically.		 No.016 2011-09-09
test (approval, Type) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Type approval test Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a Child Restraint System type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
test (approval, Type) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.044 2007-11-23
test (Baseline) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Baseline test Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Baseline test" means a stop or a series of stops carried out in order to confirm the performance of the brake prior to subjecting it to a further test such as the heating procedure or wet brake stop.		 No.078 2015-01-30
test (ELR) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 ELR test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "ELR test" means a test cycle consisting of a sequence of load steps at constant engine speeds to be
applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2008-04-12
test (ELR) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 ELR test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "ELR test" means a test cycle consisting of a sequence of load steps at constant engine speeds to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2010-08-31
test (ESC) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 ESC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "ESC test" means a test cycle consisting of 13 steady state modes to be applied in accordance with
paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2008-04-12
test (ESC) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 ESC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "ESC test" means a test cycle consisting of 13 steady state modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2010-08-31
test (ETC) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 ETC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "ETC test" means a test cycle consisting of 1 800 second-by-second transient modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2008-04-12
test (ETC) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 ETC test Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "ETC test" means a test cycle consisting of 1 800 second-by-second transient modes to be applied in accordance with paragraph 5.2.;		 No.049 2010-08-31
test (In service) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 In-service test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "In-service test" means the test and evaluation of conformity conducted in accordance with paragraph 9.2.1 of this Regulation;		 No.083 2012-02-15
test (In service) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 In-service test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "In-service test" means the test and evaluation of conformity conducted in accordance with paragraph 9.2.1 of this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
test (Production qualification) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Production qualification test (qualification of production test) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.53. "Production qualification test (qualification of production test)", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a Child Restraint System in conformity with the Child Restraint Systems submitted for type approval.		 No.129 2014-03-29
test (production qualification) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 production qualification test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "production qualification test", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a child restraint system in conformity with the child restraint systems submitted for type approval.		 No.044 2011-09-09
test (qualification, Production) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Production qualification test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Production qualification test", means a test to determine whether the manufacturer is able to produce a child restraint system in conformity with the child restraint systems submitted for type approval.		 No.044 2007-11-23
test (Routine) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Routine testing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Routine testing", means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.		 No.044 2011-09-09
test (type approval) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Test (Type I) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Type I Test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Type I Test" means the driving cycle (Parts One and Two) used for emission approvals, as detailed in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 4a.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Test A [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Test A protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Test A" means a frontal impact test intended to evaluate the resistance of a cab in frontal impact accident.		 No.029 2010-11-20
test angle (HIAS) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 HIAS test angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "HIAS test angle" means the angle δ created by the headlamp cut-off line and HH line (in case of an asymmetrical beam headlamp, the horizontal part of the cut-off shall be used), (see drawing in Annex 6).		 No.053 2013-06-18
Test B [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Test B protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Test B" means an impact test to the A-pillars of the cab intended to evaluate the resistance of a cab in a 90° rollover accident with subsequent impact.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Test C [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Test C protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Test C" means a cab roof strength test intended to evaluate the resistance of a cab in a 180° rollover accident.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Test cycle [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.18. "Test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (WHSC) or transient operating conditions (WHTC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
Test cycle [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Test (or duty) cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.85. "Test (or duty) cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state or transient operating conditions. Duty cycles are specified in the Annex 5. A single duty cycle may consist of one or more test intervals;		 No.096 2014-03-22
test cycle (OBD) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 OBD test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"OBD test cycle" means a driving cycle which is a version of the ESC test cycle having the same running-order of the 13 individual modes as described in paragraph 2.7.1. of Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation but where the length of each mode is reduced to 60 seconds;		 No.049 2008-04-12
test cycle (steady state, modal, Ramped) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Ramped modal steady state test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.68. "Ramped modal steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined speed and torque ramps between these modes;		 No.096 2014-03-22
test cycle (steady state, Ramped) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Ramped steady state test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. "Ramped steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined ramps between these modes (WHSC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
test cycle (Transient) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Transient test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.20. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (WHTC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
test cycle (Transient) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Transient test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.90. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (NRTC);		 No.096 2014-03-22
test cycle [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by
the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test);		 No.049 2008-04-12
test cycle [No.049 2010-78-31] 　 test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test);		 No.049 2010-08-31
Test group [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Test group Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.7. "Test group": type of brake discs/drums having the same characteristics pursuant to paragraph 5.3.6.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Test interval [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Test interval Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.86. "Test interval" means a duration of time over which brake-specific emissions are determined. In cases where multiple test intervals occur over a duty cycle, the Regulation may specify additional calculations that weigh and combine results to arrive at composite values for comparison against the applicable emission limits;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Test mass [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Test mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Test mass" for the pure electric vehicles, means the ‘reference mass’ for the category M 1 vehicles and the unladen mass plus half the full load for the category N 1 vehicles;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Test mass [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Test mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Test mass" for the pure electric vehicles, means the "reference mass" for the category M1 vehicles and the unladen mass plus half the full load for the category N1 vehicles;		 No.101 2007-06-19
test on a complete vehicle (Rollover) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Test piece [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Test piece safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Test piece" means a sample or a finished product of glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Test pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Test pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.3. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing. For LNG tank the economizer pressure setting, or normal saturation pressure of LNG required by the engine. For the CNG cylinder the pressure at which the cylinder is hydrostatically tested.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Test Pressure [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Test Pressure (Ptest) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Test Pressure (Ptest)" means the actual pressure of the tyre(s) selected for each tyre position after deflation during the test procedure.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Test pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Test pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Test pressure [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Test pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.		 No.110 2008-03-14
test pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 test pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.23. test pressure: The pressure at which the cylinder is hydrostatically tested.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Test pressure [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Test pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Test rim [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Test rim Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.22. "Test rim" means the rim on which a tyre is required to be fitted for testing; No.030 2008-07-30
Test rim [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Test rim Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.22. "Test rim" means the rim on which a tyre must be fitted for load/speed endurance testing; No.054 2008-07-11
Test rim [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Test rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Test rim" means the rim on which a tyre is required to be fitted for testing.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Test rim [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Test rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Test rim" means the rim on which a tyre must be fitted for the performance test.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Test rim [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Test rim 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Test rim" means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Test rim [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Test rim Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Test rim" means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type.		 No.109 2006-07-04
test sample [No.123 2006-12-27A4] 　 test sample Adaptive Front-lighting Systems [Annex 4] TESTS FOR STABILITY OF PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
(b) "test sample" in the following text means correspondingly either the "complete system" or the installation unit under test;		 No.123 2006-12-27
Test speed [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Test speed Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Test speed" means the vehicle speed measured the moment the driver begins to actuate the brake control(s). For tests where the simultaneous actuation of two controls is specified, the vehicle speed is taken from the point the first control is actuated.		 No.078 2015-01-30
test tyre (reference, Standard) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 SRTT (Standard reference test tyre) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Standard reference test tyre" (SRTT) means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) standards E1136-93 (2003) (size P195/75R14).		 No.117 2011-11-23
Test voltage [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Test voltage(s) Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. Test voltage(s): voltage(s) or voltage range(s), at the LED light sources terminals for which the electrical and photometric characteristics of the LED light sources are intended and are to be tested.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Test voltage [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Test voltage Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.3. "Test voltage": voltage, at the filament lamp terminals for which the electrical and photometric characteristics of the filament lamp are intended and are to be tested.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Test voltage [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Test voltage Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "Test voltage": Voltage, at the input terminals of the ballast for which the electrical and photometric characteristics of the gas-discharge light source are intended and are to be tested.		 No.099 2010-06-30
Tested device [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Tested-device Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Tested-device" means either the complete REESS or the subsystem of a REESS that is subjected to the tests prescribed by this Regulation.		 No.100 2015-03-31
testing (Routine) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Routine testing (or conformity of production testing) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Routine testing" (or conformity of production testing), means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
testing (Routine) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Routine testing Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Routine testing", means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirement		 No.044 2007-11-23
tether anchorage (top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
tether anchorage (top, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
tether anchorage (top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2007-12-06
tether anchorage (top-, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Isofix top-tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top-tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2011-04-28
tether anchorage (top, Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
tether anchorage (top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
tether anchorage (top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
tether anchorage (top. ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
tether attachment (top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether attachment" is a device to secure the Isofix top tether strap to the Isofix child restraint system.		 No.044 2007-11-23
tether attachment (top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX child restraint system.		 No.044 2011-09-09
tether connector (top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage;		 No.014 2015-08-19
tether connector (top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether connector Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.014 2007-12-06
tether connector (top-, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top-tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top-tether anchorage.		 No.014 2011-04-28
tether connector (top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2007-11-23
tether connector (top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2011-09-09
tether hook (top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation;		 No.014 2015-08-19
tether hook (top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether hook Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 of this Regulation.		 No.014 2007-12-06
tether hook (top-, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top-tether hook" means an Isofix top-tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top-tether strap to an Isofix top-tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.014 2011-04-28
tether hook (top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
tether hook (top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
tether strap (top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector;		 No.014 2015-08-19
tether strap (top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.		 No.129 2014-03-29
tether strap (top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether strap Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.014 2007-12-06
tether strap (top-, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top-tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top-tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top-tether connector.		 No.014 2011-04-28
tether strap (top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.044 2007-11-23
tether strap (top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Textured outer lens [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 "Textured outer lens" or "Textured outer lens area" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.1. "Textured outer lens" or "Textured outer lens area" means all or part of an outer lens, designed to modify or influence the propagation of light from the light source(s), such that the light rays are significantly diverted from their original direction;		 No.048 2011-12-06
THC [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 THC (Total hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.88. "Total hydrocarbon (THC)" means the combined mass of organic compounds measured by the specified procedure for measuring total hydrocarbon, expressed as a hydrocarbon with a hydrogen-to-carbon mass ratio of 1,85:1;		 No.096 2014-03-22
The distribution of mass among the axle [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Theoretical rim [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Theoretical rim Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.20. "Theoretical rim" means the notional rim whose width would be equal to x times the nominal section width of a tyre. The value of x shall be specified by the manufacturer of that tyre; No.030 2008-07-30
Theoretical rim [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Theoretical rim Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.20. "Theoretical rim" means a rim whose width would be equal to x times the nominal section width of a tyre; the value of x shall be specified by the manufacturer of the type; No.054 2008-07-11
Theoretical rim [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Theoretical rim Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Theoretical rim" means the rim whose width would be equal to X times the nominal section width of a tyre. The value of X shall be specified by the manufacturer of the tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Theoretical rim [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Theoretical rim Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Theoretical rim" means the notional rim whose width would be equal to X times the nominal section width of a tyre; the value "X" must be specified by the tyre manufacturer or the reference rim width is that mentioned in annex 5 for the relevant "tyre size designation";		 No.106 2010-09-30
thickness (Minimum) [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Minimum thickness Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.12. "Minimum thickness": the thickness of the brake disc is the point at which replacement becomes necessary.		 No.090 2012-07-13
thickness (Nominal) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Nominal thickness safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Nominal thickness": means the manufacturer's design thickness with a tolerance of ± (n × 0,2 mm) where n equals the number of glass layers in the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Thorax load limiter function [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Thorax load limiter function safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant thorax in case of a collision;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Thorax load limiter function [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Thorax load limiter function Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant’s thorax in case of a collision.		 No.014 2007-12-06
thorax load limiter function [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 thorax load limiter function safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "thorax load limiter function" means any part of the safety-belt and/or the seat and/or the vehicle intended to limit the level of the restraint forces applying to the occupant thorax in case of a collision.		 No.014 2011-04-28
Three dimensional reference system [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Three dimensional reference system Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Three dimensional reference system [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three dimensional reference system protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Three point belt [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Three-dimensional "H" point machine [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Three-dimensional "H" point machine [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.016 2007-11-30
Three-dimensional "H" point machine [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional 'H' point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Three-dimensional "H" point machine [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;		 No.080 2010-06-30
THREE-DIMENSIONAL H machine [No.017 2010-08-31A3] 　 3-D H machine seats, their anchorages and any head restraints [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
APPENDIX 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL "H" POINT MACHINE (*) (3-D H machine)
1. BACK AND SEAT PANS
2. BODY AND LEG ELEMENTS
Figure 1 3-D H machine elements designation [図]
Figure 2 Dimensions of the 3-D H machine elements and load distribution (Dimensions in millimeters)		 No.017 2010-08-31
Three-dimensional H point machine [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.025 2010-08-14
Three-dimensional H point machine [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Three-dimensional H point machine (3-D H machine) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Three-dimensional H point machine [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of ‘H’ pointsand actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Three-dimensional reference grid [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Three-dimensional reference grid Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Three-dimensional reference grid" means a reference system which consists of a vertical longitudinal plane X-Z, a horizontal plane X-Y and a vertical transverse plane Y-Z (see Annex 4, appendix, figure 6); the grid is used to determine the dimensional relationships between the position of design points on drawings and their positions on the actual vehicle. The procedure for situating the vehicle relative to the grid is specified in Annex 4; all coordinates referred to ground zero shall be based on a vehicle in running order ( 1 ) plus one front-seat passenger, the mass of the passenger being 75 kg ±1 per cent.
2.3.1. Vehicles fitted with suspension enabling their ground clearance to be adjusted shall be tested under the normal conditions of use specified by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Three-dimensional reference system [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Three-dimensional reference system [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.016 2007-11-30
Three-dimensional reference system [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Three-dimensional reference system head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Three-dimensional reference system [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.046 2010-07-10
Three-dimensional reference system [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Three-dimensional reference system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Three-point belt [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt : A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Three-point belt [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.		 No.016 2011-09-09
threshold (rollover) [No.111 2002-02-01A3] 　 rollover threshold Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) [ANNEX 3] Tilt table test procedure
1. DEFINITIONS
"rollover threshold" means the instant when all the wheels on one side of the vehicle have lost contact with the tilt table surface.		 No.111 2002-02-01
Tilting bench [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Tilting bench Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tilting bench" means a technical device, an arrangement of tilting platform, ditch and concrete ground surface, used in the rollover testing of a complete vehicle or body sections		 No.066 2007-12-06
Tilting bench [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Tilting bench Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tilting bench" means a technical device, an arrangement of tilting platform, ditch and concrete ground surface, used in the rollover testing of a complete vehicle or body sections.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Tilting platform [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Tilting platform Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tilting platform" means a rigid plane which can be rotated around a horizontal axis in order to tilt a complete vehicle or body section.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Tilting platform [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Tilting platform Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Tilting platform" means a rigid plane which can be rotated around a horizontal axis in order to tilt a complete vehicle or body section.		 No.066 2011-03-30
time (Delay) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Delay time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. "Delay time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t 10 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. For the gaseous components, this is the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector.		 No.049 2013-06-24
time (Delay) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Delay time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.17. "Delay time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t 10 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. For the gaseous components, this is the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector (see Figure 3.1);		 No.096 2014-03-22
time (delay) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 delay time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "delay time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t10). For the gaseous components, this is basically the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector. For the delay time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2008-04-12
time (delay) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 delay time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "delay time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 10 per cent of the final reading (t10). For the gaseous components, this is basically the transport time of the measured component from the sampling probe to the detector. For the delay time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2010-08-31
time (Response) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Response time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.14. "Response time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 90 per cent of the final reading (t 90 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point, whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent full scale (FS) and takes place in less than 0,1 second. The system response time consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system.		 No.049 2013-06-24
time (Response) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Response time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.72. "Response time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 90 per cent of the final reading (t 90 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point, whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent full scale (FS) and the devices for gas switching shall be specified to perform the gas switching in less than 0,1 s. The system response time consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
time (response) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 response time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "response time" means the difference in time between a rapid change of the component to be measured at the reference point and the appropriate change in the response of the measuring system whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent FS and takes place in less than 0,1 second. The system response time (t90) consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system (see also ISO 16183);		 No.049 2008-04-12
time (response) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 response time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "response time" means the difference in time between a rapid change of the component to be measured at the reference point and the appropriate change in the response of the measuring system whereby the change of the measured component is at least 60 per cent FS and takes place in less than 0,1 second. The system response time (t90) consists of the delay time to the system and of the rise time of the system (see also ISO 16183);		 No.049 2010-08-31
time (Rise) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Rise time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.15. "Rise time" means the difference in time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t 90 – t 10 ).		 No.049 2013-06-24
time (Rise) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Rise time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.73. "Rise time" means the difference in time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t 90 – t 10 );		 No.096 2014-03-22
time (rise) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 rise time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "rise time" means the time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t90 − t10). This is the instrument response after the component to be measured has reached the instrument. For the rise time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2008-04-12
time (rise) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 rise time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "rise time" means the time between the 10 per cent and 90 per cent response of the final reading (t90 − t10). This is the instrument response after the component to be measured has reached the instrument. For the rise time, the sampling probe is defined as the reference point;		 No.049 2010-08-31
time (Transformation) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Transformation time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.19. "Transformation time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t 50 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments.		 No.049 2013-06-24
time (Transformation) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Transformation time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.89. "Transformation time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t 50 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments. See Figure 3.1;		 No.096 2014-03-22
time (transformation) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 transformation time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "transformation time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the sampling probe and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t50). The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments;		 No.049 2008-04-12
time (transformation) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 transformation time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "transformation time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the sampling probe and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t50). The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Time to collision [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 TTC (Time to collision) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Time to collision (TTC)" means the value of time obtained by dividing the distance between the subject vehicle and the target by the relative speed of the subject vehicle and the target, at an instant in time.		 No.131 2014-07-19
To zero [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 To zero Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.96. "To zero" means to adjust an instrument so it gives a zero response to a zero calibration standard, such as purified nitrogen or purified air for measuring concentrations of emission constituents;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Tolerance [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Tolerance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.87. "Tolerance" means the interval in which 95 per cent of a set of recorded values of a certain quantity shall lie, with the remaining 5 per cent of the recorded values deviating from the tolerance interval. The specified recording frequencies and time intervals shall be used to determine if a quantity is within the applicable tolerance;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Speedometer" means that part of the speedometer equipment which indicates to the driver the speed of his vehicle at any given moment.
2.5.1. "Tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism" shall mean the accuracy of the speedometer instrument itself, expressed as the upper and the lower speed indication limits for a range of speed inputs.
2.5.2. "Technical constant of the speedometer" shall mean the relationship between the input revolutions or pulses per minute and a specified displayed speed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
tool (Scan) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Scan-tool Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.57. "Scan-tool" means external test equipment used for standardised off-board communication with the OBD system in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
tool (Scan) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Scan-tool Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.74. "Scan-tool" means an external test equipment used for off-board communication with the NCD system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Top capping [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Top capping Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
top tether anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
top tether anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
top tether anchorage (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2007-12-06
top tether anchorage (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2007-11-30
top tether anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2011-09-09
top tether anchorage (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
top tether anchorage (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2011-09-09
top tether attachment (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether attachment" is a device to secure the Isofix top tether strap to the Isofix child restraint system.		 No.044 2007-11-23
top tether attachment (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX child restraint system.		 No.044 2011-09-09
top tether connector (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage;		 No.014 2015-08-19
top tether connector (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether connector Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.014 2007-12-06
top tether connector (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2007-11-23
top tether connector (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.		 No.044 2011-09-09
top tether hook (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation;		 No.014 2015-08-19
top tether hook (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether hook Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 of this Regulation.		 No.014 2007-12-06
top tether hook (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix top tether hook" means an Isofix top tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top tether strap to an Isofix top tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2007-11-23
top tether hook (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether hook Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No 14.		 No.044 2011-09-09
top tether strap (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector;		 No.014 2015-08-19
top tether strap (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.		 No.129 2014-03-29
top tether strap (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Isofix top tether strap Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.014 2007-12-06
top tether strap (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Isofix top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Isofix top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top tether connector.		 No.044 2007-11-23
top tether strap (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 ISOFIX top tether strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX child restraint system to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.		 No.044 2011-09-09
top-tether anchorage (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Isofix top-tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top-tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.		 No.014 2011-04-28
top-tether connector (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top-tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top-tether anchorage.		 No.014 2011-04-28
top-tether hook (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether hook safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top-tether hook" means an Isofix top-tether connector typically used to attach an Isofix top-tether strap to an Isofix top-tether anchorage as defined in figure 3 of Annex 9 to this Regulation.		 No.014 2011-04-28
top-tether strap (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 Isofix top-tether strap safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Isofix top-tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an Isofix child restraint system to the Isofix top-tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an Isofix top-tether connector.		 No.014 2011-04-28
torque (Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum torque Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum torque" means the maximum value of the net torque measured at full engine load.		 No.120 2015-06-30
torque (Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum torque Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum torque" means the maximum value of the net torque measured at full engine load.		 No.120 2010-09-30
torque (Normalized) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Normalized torque Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. "Normalized torque" means engine torque in per cent normalized to the maximum available torque at an engine speed.		 No.049 2013-06-24
torque limiter [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 torque limiter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1"torque limiter" means a device that temporarily limits the maximum torque of the engine;		 No.049 2008-04-12
torque limiter [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 torque limiter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "torque limiter" means a device that temporarily limits the maximum torque of the engine;		 No.049 2010-08-31
torque speed (Maximum) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Maximum torque speed Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer		 No.049 2013-06-24
torque speed (Maximum) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Maximum torque speed Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.46. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained from the engine, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.096 2014-03-22
torque speed (Maximum) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Maximum torque speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2015-06-30
torque speed (Maximum) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum torque speed Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Maximum torque speed" means the engine speed at which the maximum torque is obtained, as specified by the manufacturer;		 No.120 2010-09-30
torso angle (Actual) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Actual torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);		 No.014 2007-12-06
torso angle (Actual) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Actual torso angle Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design
torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below):		 No.016 2007-11-30
torso angle (Actual) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Actual torso angle Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below);		 No.017 2006-12-27
torso angle (Actual) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Actual torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.025 2010-08-14
torso angle (Actual) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Actual torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.029 2010-11-20
torso angle (Actual) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Actual torso angle Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line usingthe back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torsoangle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).		 No.046 2010-07-10
torso angle (Actual) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Actual torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘H’ point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3 DH machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);		 No.080 2010-06-30
torso angle (Design) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Design torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.014 2007-12-06
torso angle (Design) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Design torso angle Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.016 2007-11-30
torso angle (Design) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Design torso angle Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "R" point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.017 2006-12-27
torso angle (Design) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Design torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.025 2010-08-14
torso angle (Design) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Design torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.029 2010-11-20
torso angle (Design) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Design torso angle Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the "R" point and the torso line in aposition which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.046 2010-07-10
torso angle (Design) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Design torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the ‘R’ point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Torso-line [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Torso-line Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position;		 No.014 2007-12-06
Torso-line [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Torso-line Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully earward position		 No.016 2007-11-30
Torso-line [No.017 2006-12-27A3] 　 Torso-line Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Torso-line [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Torso-line head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position.		 No.025 2010-08-14
Torso-line [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Torso-line protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Torso-line [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Torso-line Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3-D H machine with the probe in the fully rearward position.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Torso-line [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Torso-line Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Torso-line" means the centreline of the probe of the 3 DH machine with the probe in the fully rearward position;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Total effective vehicle mass [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total effective vehicle mass (Mt) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (Mk) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (Mm), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Total effective vehicle mass [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mt (Total effective vehicle mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt ) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (M k ) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (M m ), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Total hydrocarbon [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 THC (Total hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.88. "Total hydrocarbon (THC)" means the combined mass of organic compounds measured by the specified procedure for measuring total hydrocarbon, expressed as a hydrocarbon with a hydrogen-to-carbon mass ratio of 1,85:1;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Total occupant mass [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total occupant mass (Mm) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Total occupant mass" (Mm) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Total occupant mass [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mm (Total occupant mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total occupant mass" (Mm ) means the combined mass of any passengers, crew who occupy seats fitted with occupant restraints.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Toughened glass [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Toughened-glass safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Toughened-glass" means glazing consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Toughened-glass pane [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Toughened-glass pane Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Toughened-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of a single layer of glass which has been subjected to special treatment to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
TPMS (TESTS) [No.064 2010-11-26A5] 　 TPMS (TESTS) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) [ANNEX 5] TESTS FOR TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEMS (TPMS)
1. TEST CONDITIONS
1.1. Ambient temperature : The ambient temperature shall be between 0 °C and 40 °C.
1.2. Road test surface 【略】
1.3. The tests shall be conducted in an environment free of interferences from radio wave.
1.4. Vehicle conditions
1.5. Accuracy of pressure measurement equipment : Pressure measurement equipment to be used for the tests contained in this Annex shall be accurate to at least +/– 3 kPa.
2. TEST PROCEDURE
3. TPMS MALFUNCTION DETECTION		 No.064 2010-11-26
TPMS [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" means a system fitted on a vehicle, able to perform a function to evaluate the inflation pressure of the tyres or the variation of this inflation pressure over time and to transmit corresponding information to the user while the vehicle is running.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Traction battery [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Traction battery Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Traction battery [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Traction battery Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Traction battery [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2.4. "Traction battery" means the assembly of all battery modules which are electrically connected, for the supply of energy of the power circuit. No.100 2009-02-14
traction battery (Open type) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Open type traction battery protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.012 2013-03-27
traction battery (Open type) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.094 2012-09-20
traction battery (Open type) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.095 2015-07-10
traction battery (Open type) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.100 2011-02-14
traction battery (Open type) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Traction battery [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Traction battery Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-09-30
traction tyre [REG. No 661/2009] 　 traction tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 13. "traction tyre" means a tyre of classes C2 or C3 bearing the inscription "M + S", "M.S" or "M&S" and intended to be fitted to a vehicle drive axle or axles; REG. No 661/2009
Traction tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Traction tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Traction tyre" means a tyre designed primarily for the equipment of driven axles of implements or agricultural machinery, excluding sustained high torque services. The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of lugs or cleats. The type of application is identified with the symbol: [図]		 No.106 2010-09-30
Traction tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Traction tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Traction tyre" means a tyre in class C2 or C3 bearing the inscription TRACTION and intended to be fitted primarily to the drive axle(s) of a vehicle to maximise force transmission in various circumstances.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/058/EC] 　 tractor (agricultural or forestry) tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Article 1]
1. For the purposes of this Directive "tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.		 Directive 2009/058/EC
Tractor　(agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/059/EC] 　 Tractor (agricultural or forestry) Tractor (agricultural or forestry) Article 1
1. "Tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.		 Directive 2009/059/EC
Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/060/EC] 　 Tractor (agricultural or forestry) Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Article 1]
1. "Tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.		 Directive 2009/060/EC
Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Tractor (agricultural or forestry) installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [Article 1]
1. "Tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks, having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/063/EC] 　 Tractor (agricultural or forestry) Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Article 1]
1. "Tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a maximum design speed of between 6 and 40 km/h.		 Directive 2009/063/EC
Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/066/EC] 　 Tractor (agricultural or forestry) Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Article 1]
1. "Tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.		 Directive 2009/066/EC
tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/068/EC] 　 tractor (agricultural or forestry) lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors [Article 1]
1. For the purposes of this Directive, "tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a maximum design speed of between 6 and 40 km/h.		 Directive 2009/068/EC
tractor (agricultural or forestry) [Directive 2009/076/EC] 　 tractor (agricultural or forestry) driver-perceived noise level of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors [Article 1]
1. For the purposes of this Directive, "tractor" (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.		 Directive 2009/076/EC
tractor (agricultural) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 agricultural tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. For the purposes of this Regulation "agricultural tractor" means any power-driven vehicle, either wheeled or tracklaying, which has at least two axles, whose function depends essentially on its tractive power, and which is specially designed to pull, push, carry or actuate certain implements, machines or trailers intended for use in agriculture or forestry. Such a tractor may be arranged to carry a load and attendants;		 No.071 2004-03-31
tractor (agricultural) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 agricultural tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. For the purposes of this Regulation "agricultural tractor" means any power-driven vehicle, either wheeled or tracklaying, which has at least two axles, whose function depends essentially on its tractive power, and which is specially designed to pull, push, carry or actuate certain implements, machines or trailers intended for use in agriculture or forestry. Such a tractor may be arranged to carry a load and attendants.		 No.071 2010-07-31
tractor (Approval of a) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a tractor" means the approval of a tractor type with regard to the field of vision defined in paragraph 2.4;		 No.071 2004-03-31
tractor (Approval of a) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Approval of a tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a tractor" means the approval of a tractor type with regard to the field of vision defined in paragraph 2.4.		 No.071 2010-07-31
tractor (Laden) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Laden tractor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Laden tractor" means the tractor loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this weight between the axles.		 No.086 2010-09-30
tractor (Unladen) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Unladen tractor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen tractor" means the tractor in running order, i.e. excluding optional accessories but including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and driver.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Tractor steering wheel tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor steering wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tractor steering wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to non-driven axles of agricultural and forestry tractors (motor vehicles in category T); The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of circumferential grooves and ribs.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tractor type [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Tractor type Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tractor type" means a category of tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. such external and internal shapes and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1.1 as may affect visibility;
2.3.2. the form and size of the windscreen and of the side windows situated in the area specified in paragraph 1.1;		 No.071 2004-03-31
Tractor type [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Tractor type Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tractor type" means a category of tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. such external and internal shapes and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1.1 as may affect visibility;
2.3.2. the form and size of the windscreen and of the side windows situated in the area specified in paragraph 1.1.		 No.071 2010-07-31
Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices
"Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means tractors which do
not differ in such essential respects as:
1.1.1. the dimensions and exterior shape of the tractor;
1.1.2. the number and positioning of the devices.　・・・		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the dimensions and exterior shape of the tractor;
2.1.2. the number and positioning of the devices;
2.1.3. the following are likewise considered not to be tractors of a different type:
tractors which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 above, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the type, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the tractor type in question;
tractors on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent;
tractors which are fitted with lamps, the position of which varies according to the direction of traffic in the country of registration.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Tractor-drive wheel tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor-drive wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.
2.20.1. "Improved Flexion Tyre" or "Very High Flexion Tyre" describe a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Trade description [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Trade description Tyre noise and wet grip 2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark. No.117 2008-08-29
Trade description [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Brand name" or "Trade description" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Traffic-change function [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Traffic-change function Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.19. "Traffic-change function" means any front-lighting function or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of these, intended to avoid glare and provide sufficient illumination in case where a vehicle being equipped with a system designed for one traffic direction only is temporarily used in a country with the opposite direction of traffic.		 No.123 2006-12-27
Traffic-change function [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 Traffic-change function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.19. "Traffic-change function" means any front-lighting function or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of these, intended to avoid glare and provide sufficient illumination in case where a vehicle being equipped with a system designed for one traffic direction only is temporarily used in a country with the opposite direction of traffic.		 No.123 2010-08-24
trailer (axle, Centre) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Centre axle trailer Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass.		 No.055 2006-12-27
trailer (axle, Centre) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Centre axle trailer mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).		 No.055 2010-08-28
trailer (Subject) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Subject trailer Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Subject trailer" is a trailer representative of the trailer type for which type approval is sought.		 No.013 2016-02-18
trailer (Subject) [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 Subject trailer Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.35. "Subject trailer" is a trailer representative of the trailer type for which type approval is sought.		 No.013 2010-11-13
Trailer tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Trailer tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Trailer tyre" means a tyre designed for the equipment of non-driven (trailed) axles of implements, agricultural machinery or trailers.
The type of application is identified with the symbol [図]		 No.106 2010-09-30
train (drive, Approval of a) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
train (Electric power) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices (e.g. a battery, electromechanical flywheel or super capacitor), one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2012-05-26
train (Hybrid electric power) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Hybrid electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/ power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.101 2012-05-26
train (Hybrid power) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Hybrid power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hybrid power train" means a power train with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on-board the vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;		 No.101 2012-05-26
train (Power) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Power train" means the system of energy storage device(s), energy converter(s) and transmission(s) that converts stored energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2012-05-26
train (Power) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Power train" means the system of energy storage device(s), energy converter(s) and transmission(s) that converts stored energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
train (power, Electric) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Electric power train Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices, one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
train (power, Electric) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Electric power train Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Electric power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may include the RESS, the electric energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS.		 No.100 2011-02-14
train (power, Electric) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Electric power train Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Electric power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may include the REESS, the electric energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the REESS.		 No.100 2015-03-31
train (power, Electric) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Electric power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Electric power train" means a system consisting of one or more electric energy storage devices (e.g. a battery, electromechanical flywheel or super capacitor), one or more electric power conditioning devices and one or more electric machines that convert stored electric energy to mechanical energy delivered at the wheels for propulsion of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
train (power, Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Electrical power train protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the RESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS;		 No.012 2013-03-27
train (power, Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Electrical power train Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the RESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the RESS,		 No.094 2012-09-20
train (power, Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Electrical power train Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Electrical power train" means the electrical circuit which includes the traction motor(s), and may also include the REESS, the electrical energy conversion system, the electronic converters, the associated wiring harness and connectors, and the coupling system for charging the REESS.		 No.095 2015-07-10
train (power, Hybrid) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid power train CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Hybrid power train" means a power train with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on-board the vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.13.1. "Hybrid electric power train" means a power train that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g.: battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator …)		 No.101 2007-06-19
train type (Drive) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Drive train type Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Drive train type" means a category of an internal combustion engine or an electric drive train for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annexes 1 or 2 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
Transformation time [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Transformation time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.19. "Transformation time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t 50 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments.		 No.049 2013-06-24
Transformation time [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Transformation time Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.89. "Transformation time" means the difference in time between the change of the component to be measured at the reference point and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t 50 ) with the sampling probe being defined as the reference point. The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments. See Figure 3.1;		 No.096 2014-03-22
transformation time [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 transformation time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "transformation time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the sampling probe and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t50). The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments;		 No.049 2008-04-12
transformation time [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 transformation time Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "transformation time" means the time between the change of the component to be measured at the sampling probe and a system response of 50 per cent of the final reading (t50). The transformation time is used for the signal alignment of different measurement instruments;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Transient Driving Cycle (Harmonised, World) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Transient test cycle [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Transient test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.20. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (WHTC).		 No.049 2013-06-24
Transient test cycle [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Transient test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.90. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (NRTC);		 No.096 2014-03-22
Transmission [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Transmission [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term ‘transmission’ is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the ‘control transmission’ and the ‘energy transmission’:
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Transmission [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Transmission Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Transmission" means the combination of components that provide the functional link between the control and the brake.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Transmission [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013 2010-09-30
transmission [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission":
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Transmission [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Transmission Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver but controlled by him, the reserve of energy in the device is likewise part of the transmission;		 No.078 2004-03-31
transmittance (light, Regular) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Regular light transmittance safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Regular light transmittance" means light transmittance measured perpendicularly to the glazing.		 No.043 2014-02-12
transmitting components (Light-) [No.098 2001-06-25] 　 Light-transmitting components Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. "Light-transmitting components" means any part of the headlamp which transmits light for illumination, such as outer and inner lenses, lens or reflector coatings.		 No.098 2001-06-25
Transparent area [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Transparent area Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Transparent area" means the whole glazing area, excluding any opaque obscuration and any shade band.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Transparent area [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Transparent area Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Transparent area" means that area of a vehicle windscreen or other glazed surface whose light transmittance measured at right angles to the surface is not less than 70 per cent. In the case of armoured vehicles the light transmittance factor is not less than 60 per cent.		 No.125 2010-07-31
Transparent area of the windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Transparent area of the windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Transparent area of the windscreen" means the glazing area contained within the design glass outline, excluding any allowed opaque obscuration (see Annex 18), but including any shade band.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Transverse plane [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Transverse plane installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. Transverse plane
"Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
transverse plane　 [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 transverse plane installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. transverse plane
means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
transverse plane [No.034 2008-07-23] 　 transverse plane Fire risks 7.3. "transverse plane" means the vertical transverse plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle; No.034 2008-07-23
Transverse plane [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.3. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Transverse plane [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.053 2013-06-18
transverse plane [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Transverse plane [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Transverse plane Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal vertical plane of the vehicle.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Transverse plane [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Transverse plane Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.10. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Transverse plane [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Transverse plane seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.017 2010-08-31
transverse plane [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 transverse plane protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the longitudinal plane of the vehicle.		 No.029 2010-11-20
transverse plane [No.034 2011-04-287] 　 transverse plane Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.3. "transverse plane" means the vertical transverse plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Transverse plane [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Transverse plane [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Transverse plane Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor.		 No.086 2010-09-30
Transverse plane [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Transverse plane Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Transverse plane" means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal vertical plane of the vehicle;		 No.095 2007-11-30
transverse tilt (tt) [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 transverse tilt (tt) stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.4. "transverse tilt (tt)" means the gradient, expressed as a percentage, of the actual supporting surface, the intersection of the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and the supporting surface being perpendicular to the line of maximum gradient (figure 1);		 Directive 2009/078/EC
trapping (LNG) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 LNG trapping using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.68. "LNG trapping" means the containment of LNG in an enclosure of constant volume.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Tread [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tread Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.8. "Tread" means that part of a pneumatic tyre which comes into contact with the ground (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Tread [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Tread Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.8. "Tread" means that part of a pneumatic tyre which comes into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion; No.054 2008-07-11
tread (Special) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Special tread Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Special tread" means a tyre, the tread pattern and structure of which are primarily designed to ensure in marshy areas a better grip than that of a standard tread tyre. The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of lugs or cleats deeper than those of a standard tyre;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tread [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tread Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tread" means that part of a pneumatic tyre which comes into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Tread [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Tread" means that part of a tyre which comes into contact with the ground;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tread [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Tread" means that part of a pneumatic-tyre which is designed to come into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Tread [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tread Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Tread" means that part of a pneumatic-tyre which is designed to come into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tread depth [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Tread depth Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tread depth" means the depth of the principal grooves		 No.117 2011-11-23
Tread groove [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tread groove Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.11. "Tread groove" means the space between two adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Tread groove [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Tread groove Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.11. "Tread groove" means the space between two adjacent ribs and/or blocks in the tread pattern; No.054 2008-07-11
Tread groove [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tread groove Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Tread groove" means the space between two adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Tread groove [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread groove Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Tread groove" means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tread groove [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread groove 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tread groove" means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Tread groove [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tread groove Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Tread groove" means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tread lug (or cleat) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread lug (or cleat) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Tread lug (or cleat)" means the solid-block element protruding from the base of the tread pattern;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tread material [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread material 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Tread material [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tread material Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back"— pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tread pattern [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tread pattern Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.30. Tread pattern grooves
2.30.1. "Principal grooves" means the wide grooves positioned in the central zone of the tyre tread, which have the tread-wear indicators (see para. 2.27) located inside them.
2.30.2. "Secondary grooves" means the supplementary grooves of the tread pattern which may disappear in the course of the tyre's life.		 No.030 2008-07-30
Tread separation [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tread separation Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.26. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass; No.030 2008-07-30
Tread separation [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Tread separation Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.26. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass; No.054 2008-07-11
Tread separation [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tread separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Tread separation [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tread separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tread separation [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread separation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.		 No.108 2006-07-04
Tread separation [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tread separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Tread separation" means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tread wear indicators [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread wear indicators 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Tread wear indicators" means the projections within the tread grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degree of wear of the tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
treading (Re-) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Retreading Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
treading production unit (Re-) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Retreading production unit Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Retreading production unit" means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tread-wear indicators [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tread-wear indicators Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.27. "Tread-wear indicators" means the projections within the tread grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degree of wear of the tread; No.030 2008-07-30
treated [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 treated Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass pane" means a glass pane consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayers of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "ordinary", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; orEN
2.2.2. "treated", when at least one of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Treated laminated glass [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Treated laminated glass safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Laminated-glass" means glazing consisting of two or more layers of glass held together by one or more interlayer of plastics material; it may be:
2.2.1. "Ordinary laminated glass", when none of the layers of glass of which it is composed has been treated; or
2.2.2. "Treated laminated glass", when at least one of the layers of glass, of which it is composed, has been specially treated to increase its mechanical strength and to condition its fragmentation after shattering;		 No.043 2014-02-12
treatment device (after, Particulate) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Particulate after-treatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2013-06-24
treatment device (after, Particulate) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Particulate after-treatment device Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.59. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PM) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
treatment device (after-, particulate) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
treatment device (after-, particulate) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
treatment system (after, Exhaust) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Exhaust after-treatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation, 3-way or any other), particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter, or any other emission reducing device, that is installed downstream of the engine;		 No.049 2013-06-24
treatment system (after, Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Exhaust after-treatment system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.33. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst, particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) and turbochargers, which are considered an integral part of the engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
treatment system (after-, exhaust) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
treatment system (after-, exhaust) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
treatment system family (after, Engine) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Engine after-treatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Engine after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2013-06-24
treatment system family (after, Engine) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Engine after treatment system family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.28. "Engine-after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that complies with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into a family of engine families utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.096 2014-03-22
treatment system family (after-, engine-) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2008-04-12
treatment system family (after-, engine-) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;		 No.049 2010-08-31
triggered (pressure) [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (pressure triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.36. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered)" (this device sometimes is referred to as ‘burst disc’) means a one-time-use device triggered by excessive pressure that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
triggered (temperature) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 PRD (Pressure relief device) (temperature triggered) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.35. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (temperature triggered)" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive temperature and/or pressure which vents gas to protect the cylinder from rupture.		 No.110 2015-06-30
trim (Fuel) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Fuel trim Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. A "Fuel trim" refers to feedback adjustments to the base fuel schedule. Short-term fuel trim refers to dynamic or instantaneous adjustments. Long-term fuel trim refers to much more gradual adjustments to the fuel calibration schedule than short-term trim adjustments. These long-term adjustments compensate for vehicle differences and gradual changes that occur over time.		 No.083 2012-02-15
trim height (suspension) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 suspension trim height Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "suspension trim height" means the distance between the wheel centre and a fixed point on the chassis as declared by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.111 2002-02-01
Trolley [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Trolley strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Trolley" means the test equipment made and used for dynamic reproduction of road accidents involving frontal collision;		 No.080 2013-08-24
Trolley [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Trolley Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Trolley" means a wheeled frame free to travel along its longitudinal axis at the point of impact. Its front supports the impactor.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Trolley [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Trolley Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Trolley" means the test equipment made and used for dynamic reproduction of road accidents involving frontal collision;		 No.080 2010-06-30
Trolley [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Trolley Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Trolley" means a wheeled frame free to travel along its longitudinal axis at the point of impact. Its front supports the impactor.		 No.095 2007-11-30
Trolleybus [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Trolleybus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.8. "Trolleybus" means a vehicle, electrically driven by energy from external, overhead contact wires. For the purposes of this Regulation, it also includes such vehicles having an additional internal means of propulsion (dual mode vehicles) or having a means of temporary external guidance (guided trolleybuses).		 No.107 2015-06-18
Trolleybus [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Trolleybus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.8. "Trolleybus" means a vehicle, electrically driven by energy from external, overhead contact wires. For the purposes of this Regulation, it also includes such vehicles having an additional internal means of propulsion (dual mode vehicles) or having a means of temporary external guidance (guided trolleybuses).		 No.107 2010-09-29
trouble code (Diagnostic) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Diagnostic trouble code" (DTC) means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction;		 No.049 2013-06-24
trouble code (Diagnostic) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.20. "Diagnostic trouble code (DTC)" means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a NO x Control Malfunction.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Trunk lid [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Trunk lid door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Trunk lid" is a movable body panel that provides access from outside the vehicle to a space wholly partitioned from the occupant compartment by a permanently attached partition or fixed or fold-down seat back.		 No.011 2010-05-13
tt (transverse tilt) [Directive 2009/078/EC] 　 transverse tilt (tt) stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.4. "transverse tilt (tt)" means the gradient, expressed as a percentage, of the actual supporting surface, the intersection of the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and the supporting surface being perpendicular to the line of maximum gradient (figure 1);		 Directive 2009/078/EC
TTC [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 TTC (Time to collision) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Time to collision (TTC)" means the value of time obtained by dividing the distance between the subject vehicle and the target by the relative speed of the subject vehicle and the target, at an instant in time.		 No.131 2014-07-19
T-type temporary use spare tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 T-type temporary use spare tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.6. "T-type temporary use spare tyre" means a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres; No.030 2008-07-30
T-type temporary-use spare tyre [REG. No 661/2009] 　 T-type temporary-use spare tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 12. "T-type temporary-use spare tyre" means a temporary-use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres; REG. No 661/2009
Turning circle [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Turning circle Steering equipment 2.4.6. "Turning circle" means the circle within which are located the projections onto the ground plane of all the points of the vehicle, excluding the external mirrors and the front direction indicators, when the vehicle is driven in a circle; No.079 2008-05-27
Two lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Two lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. Two lamps or an even number of lamps
"Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual light-emitting surfaces.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Two lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Two lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.16.2. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps", means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band or strip if such band or strip is placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, extends on both sides to within at least 0,4 m of the extreme outer edge of the vehicle, and is not less than 0,8 m long; the illumination of such surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends; the light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces on a transverse plane occupy not less than 60 per cent of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said individual lightemitting surfaces; No.048 2008-05-23
Two lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" includes a single illuminating surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The illuminating surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual illuminating surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual illuminating surfaces.		 No.086 2010-09-30
type [ No.037 2010-11-13] 　 type Filament lamps 2. ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS
2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Definition of "type"
Filament lamps of different "types" (1) are filament lamps within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. trade name or mark (Filament lamps bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types. Filament lamps produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type);
2.1.2.2. bulb design and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;
2.1.2.3. rated voltage;
2.1.2.4. halogen.		 No.037 2010-11-13
type [No.037 2014-07-18] 　 types Filament lamps 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Definition of "type2
Filament lamps of different "types" are filament lamps within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark (Filament lamps bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types. Filament lamps produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type);
2.1.2.2. Bulb design and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;
2.1.2.3. Rated voltage;
2.1.2.4. Halogen.		 No.037 2014-07-18
type [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 type Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. Definition of "type"
Marking materials of the different types means materials which differ in such essential respects as:
2.6.1. the trade name or trade mark;
2.6.2. the characteristics of the retro-reflective material;
2.6.3. the parts affecting the properties of the retro-reflective materials or devices.		 No.104 2014-03-14
type [No.123 2010-08-24] 　 types Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.16. Systems of different "types" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
1.16.1. the trade name or mark(s);
1.16.2. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering optical characteristics/photometric properties of the system;
1.16.3. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.16.4. the front-lighting function(s), mode(s) and classes produced;
1.16.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coatings, if any;
1.16.6. the characteristic(s) of the signal(s), specified for the system;		 No.123 2010-08-24
type [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 type Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Definition of "type"
LED light sources of different "types" are LED light sources within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark;
LED light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types. LED light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type.
2.1.2.2. Light source design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;
2.1.2.3. Rated voltage.		 No.128 2014-05-29
type (approved, retrofit system of an, LPG or CNG, Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).		 No.115 2014-11-07
type (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. the geometry of the belt assembly.		 No.016 2007-11-30
type (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. Rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. The material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. The geometry of the belt assembly.		 No.016 2015-11-20
type (Bodywork) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) Bodywork manufacturer;
(b) Vehicle concept (＞ 22 passengers or ≦ 22 passengers);
(c) Bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor);
(d) Mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent;
(e) Specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2015-06-18
type (different, indicator of, Direction) [No.006 2014-07-18] 　 Direction indicators of different types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the category of direction indicator lamps;
(d) the variable intensity control, if any;
(e) the sequential activation of light sources, if any.
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.006 2014-07-18
type (different, lamp of, Front and rear position, stop and end outline marker) [No.007 2014-09-30] 　 Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps for motor vehicles 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different type" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
(c) the system used to reduce illumination at night — in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.
A change of the colour of light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.007 2014-09-30
type (different, light source of, discharge, Gas) [No.099 2014-09-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. "Gas-discharge light sources of different types" are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which
differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. Trade name or mark; that means:
(a) gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types;
(b) gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. Bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results.		 No.099 2014-09-30
type (different, Reversing manoeuvring lamp of) [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Reversing/manoeuvring lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the light source or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.023 2014-08-08
type (Direction indicator) [No.006 2001-05-14] 　 Direction indicators types Direction indicators 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Direction indicators of different "types""
- are different indicators which differ in such essential respects as:
- The trade name or mark, The characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, etc.),
- The category of direction indicators,
- The colour of the filament lamp.		 No.006 2001-05-14
type (Drive train) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Drive train type Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Drive train type" means a category of an internal combustion engine or an electric drive train for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annexes 1 or 2 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2006-11-24
type (Drive train) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Drive train type Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Drive train type" means a category of an internal combustion engine or an electric drive train for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annexes 1 or 2 to this Regulation;		 No.085 2014-11-07
type (Engine) [No.024 2006-11-243] 　 Engine type Diesel smoke and power 3. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
3.2 "Engine type" means a category of C.I. engine for installation in a motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential characteristics as those defined in Annex 1 to this Regulation except for modifications as permitted by paragraphs 7.2 and 7.3 of this Regulation,		 No.024 2006-11-24
type (engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 engine type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential respects as engine characteristics as described in Annex 1 to this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
type (Engine) [No.120 2010-09-30] 　 Engine type Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential engine characteristics as defined in Annex 1 — Appendix 3;[様式]		 No.120 2010-09-30
type (Engine) [No.120 2015-06-30] 　 Engine type Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Engine type" means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential engine characteristics as defined in Annex 1 — Appendix 3 to this Regulation;		 No.120 2015-06-30
type (ESA) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 ESA type Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. An "ESA type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means ESAs, which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the function performed by the ESA;
2.10.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components, if applicable.		 No.010 2010-05-08
type (Headlamp of different) [No.072 2014-33-14] 　 Headlamp of different type Headlamps (HS1) (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. The trade name or mark;
2.3.2. The characteristics of the optical systems;
2.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption and/or deformation during operation. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps;
2.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.3.5. The materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.072 2014-03-14
type (Headlamp of different) [No.098 2014-06-14] 　 Headlamps of different types gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.5.1. The trade name or mark;
1.5.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.5.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.5.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.5.5. The kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.5.6. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.098 2014-06-14
type (Headlamp of different) [No.112 2010-08-31] 　 Headlamps of different "types" headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.7. the category of filament lamp used and/or the LED module specific identification code(s).
1.3.8. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.112 2010-08-31
type (Headlamp of different) [No.113 2014-06-14] 　 Headlamps of different types headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.5. The category of filament lamp(s), the gas-discharge light source or the light source module specific identification code(s);
1.6. However, in the case of a system consisting of two headlamps a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.113 2014-06-14
type (Headlamp) [No.008 2001-05-14] 　 Headlamps of different types Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters designed solely to change the colour of the beam and not its light distribution shall not constitute a change in the type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the categories H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 (2) (3).		 No.008 2001-05-14
type (headlamp) [No.020 2001-06-25] 　 headlamp type Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation. However, the fitting or elimination of filters intended solely to change the colour of the beam but not its light distribution does not entail a change of type;
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.020 2001-06-25
type (headlamp) [No.056 2014-03-25] 　 type (headlamp) Headlamps (mopeds) 1. SCOPE
This Regulation applies to the approval of headlamps using filament lamps, producing one single passing beam, which are provided for the equipment of mopeds ( 1 ) and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. the trade name or mark;
2.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.3. the inclusion or the suppression of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflexion, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.056 2014-03-25
type (headlamp) [No.057 2014-05-01] 　 types (headlamps) Headlamps (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. the trade name or mark;
2.3.2. marking of the headlamp as defined in paragraph 4.1.4 below;
2.3.3. the characteristics of the optical system;
2.3.4. the inclusion or the suppression of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption and/or deformation during operation. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.
2.3.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.		 No.057 2014-05-01
type (headlamp) [No.082 2014-03-25] 　 type (headlamp) Headlamps (HS2 moped) 1. SCOPE
This regulation applies to the approval of headlamps equipped with halogen lamps (HS2 lamps), which are provided for the equipment of mopeds and vehicles treated as such.
2. DEFINITION OF "TYPE"
Headlamps of different "types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1. The trade name or mark,
2.2. The characteristics of the optical systems,
2.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption. A change in the colour of the beams emitted by headlamps whose other characteristics are not changed does not constitute a change of headlamp type. The same approval number shall accordingly be assigned to such headlamps.		 No.082 2014-03-25
type (lamp of different running, Daytime) [No.087 2010-06-30] 　 Daytime running lamps of different types Daytime running lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Daytime running lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.087 2010-06-30
type (lamp of different, fog, Front) [No.019 2014-08-22] 　 Front fog lamps of different types Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.1. The trade name or mark;
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:
1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),
1.4.4. The inclusion of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation and the variable intensity control, if any:
1.4.5. The category of filament lamp(s) used, as listed in Regulation No 37, Regulation No 99 and/or the LED module or light generator specific identification code (s) (if applicable);
1.4.6. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation of the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.019 2014-08-22
type (lamp of different, Head) [No.098 2010-06-30] 　 Headlamps of different types gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.6.1. the trade name or mark;
1.6.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.6.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.6.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand or for both traffic systems;
1.6.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam or driving beam or both);
1.6.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.6.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.098 2010-06-30
type (lamp of different, Head) [No.112 2005-12-16] 　 Headlamps of different types Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" mean headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation.
1.3.4. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. the kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. the materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any;
1.3.7. The category of filament lamp used.		 No.112 2005-12-16
type (lamp of different, Head) [No.112 2014-08-22] 　 Headlamps of different types headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Headlamps of different types" means headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
1.3.6. The category of filament lamp used and/or the LED module specific identification code(s);
1.3.7. However, a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.		 No.112 2014-08-22
type (lamp of different, marker, Side) [No.091 2010-06-30] 　 Side-marker lamps of different types Side marker lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Side-marker lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark;
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.).
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.091 2010-06-30
type (lamp) [No.007 1997-07-30] 　 Front and rear position (side) lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different types End-outline marker-, front/rear position-, side-, stop lamps (M, N and O) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.6. "Front and rear position (side) lamps, stop-lamps and end-outline marker lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in each said category in such essential respects as:
- The trade name or mark,
- The characteristics of the optical system, (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, type of filament lamp, etc.),
- The system used to reduce illumination at night - in the case of stop-lamps with two levels of intensity.		 No.007 1997-07-30
type (lamp) [No.023 1997-07-30] 　 lamp type Reversing lamps 1. Definitions
1.3. reversing lamps of different "types" are reversing lamps which differ in such essential respects as,
13.1. the trade name or mark;
1.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. the inclusion of components capable of altering of the optical effects by reflection, reflection or absorption; and
1.3.4. the category of filament lamps.

1^^. the dBj-jcmisicf <ji ihc optical fT^EFiu;

lJ-Jt. th^iiK]・＼azm ot lompiooib L-apabI? of iiltering・kotp^ical etieにus br reflection, rcfiactioii or Absfirpdch・; ・・d1_S.4. the catcgtOfj of libnu:・・kt lamp・		 No.023 1997-07-30
type (lamp, Head, of different) [No.001 2010-07-10] 　 Headlamps of different "types" Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Headlamps of different "types" are headlamps which differ in such essential respects as:
1.3.1. The trade name or mark;
1.3.2. The characteristics of the optical system;
1.3.3. The inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction or absorption; and/or deformation during operation;
1.3.4. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.3.5. Ability to provide a passing beam or a driving beam or both;
1.3.6. The materials constituting the lenses and coating, if any.
1.3.7. The holder intended to accommodate the filament lamp (or lamps) of one of the following categories: R2 and/or HS1(		 No.001 2010-07-10
type (light sources of, Gas discharge, different ) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Gas-discharge light sources of different types Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.2. Gas-discharge light sources of different "types" ( 1 ) are gas-discharge light sources within the same category which differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.2.1. trade name or mark; that means:
(a) Gas-discharge light sources bearing the same trade name or mark but produced by different manufacturers are considered as being of different types.
(b) Gas-discharge light sources produced by the same manufacturer differing only by the trade name or mark may be considered to be of the same type;
2.1.2.2. bulb and/or cap design, in so far as these differences affect the optical results;		 No.099 2010-06-30
type (lining, Brake) [No.090 2010-05-28] 　 Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics;		 No.090 2010-05-28
type (Parking lamp of different) [No.077 2001-05-14] 　 Parking lamps of different types Parking lamps 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Parking lamps of different types" are parking lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. the trade name or mark,
2.3.2. the characteristics of the optical system,
2.3.3. the category of filament lamp.		 No.077 2001-05-14
type (Parking lamp of different) [No.077 2010-05-28] 　 Parking lamps of different types parking lamps for power-driven vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Parking lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the trade name or mark,
(b) the characteristics of the optical system (levels of intensity, light distribution angles, category of filament lamp, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.		 No.077 2010-05-28
Type (Protective device) [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Type 1～4 (Protective device) Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Protective device" means a system designed to prevent unauthorized use of the vehicle providing a positive locking action of the steering or of the transmission; this system may be:
2.3.1. type 1: solely and positively operated on the steering alone,
2.3.2. type 2: positively operated on the steering in conjunction with the device which de-activates the engine of the vehicle,
2.3.3. type 3: pre-loaded, operating on the steering in conjunction with the device which de-activates the engine of the vehicle;
2.3.4. type 4: positively operated on the transmission		 No.062 2013-03-27
type (SB unit) [No.005 2001-05-14] 　 SB(Sealed beam) units types Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. SB units are considered to be of different types if they differ in one or more of the following essentials of form or characteristics:
2.4.1. Trade name or mark;
2.4.2. Characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. Inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
2.4.4. The rated voltage (the same approval number may be granted if the only change is of rated voltage);
2.4.5. The rated wattage;
2.4.6. The shape of the filament(s);
2.4.7. The kind the beam produced (passing beam, driving beam of both);
2.4.8. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.4.9. The colour of the light emitted;
2.4.10. The materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.		 No.005 2001-05-14
type (Seat) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Seat type Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat type" means a category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure,
2.10.2. the types and dimensions of the adjustment systems and all locking systems,
2.10.3. the type and dimensions of the belt anchorages on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2007-12-06
type (Seat) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Seat type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat type" means a category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.9.1. The shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure,
2.9.2. The types and dimensions of the adjustment systems and all locking systems,
2.9.3. The type and dimensions of the belt anchorages on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure;		 No.014 2015-08-19
type (Seat) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Seat type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. Seat type
A category of seats which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.23.1. The shape, dimensions and materials of the seat structure;
2.23.2. The types and dimensions of the seat lock adjustment and locking systems;
2.23.3. The type and dimensions of the belt anchorage on the seat, of the seat anchorage and of the affected parts of the vehicle structure.		 No.016 2015-11-20
type (Silencing system of different) [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Silencing system of different types Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Silencing system of different types" means silencing systems which differ significantly in such respects as:
2.3.1. that their components bear different trade names or marks,
2.3.2. that the characteristics of the materials constituting a component are different or that the components differ in shape or size, a modification regarding the coating (zinc coating, aluminium coating, etc.) is not considered changing the type,
2.3.3. that the operating principles of at least one component are different,
2.3.4. that their components are combined differently;		 No.059 2006-11-24
type (Steering control) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Steering control type protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Steering control type" means a category of steering controls which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1. The structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials;		 No.012 2013-03-27
type (System of different) [No.123 2006-12-27] 　 Systems of different types Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.16. Systems of different "types" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
1.16.1. the trade name or mark(s);
1.16.2. the inclusion or elimination of components capable of altering optical characteristics/photometric properties of the system;
1.16.3. suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
1.16.4. the front-lighting function(s), mode(s) and classes produced;
1.16.5. the materials constituting the lenses and coatings, if any;
1.16.6. the characteristic(s) of the signal(s), specified for the system;		 No.123 2006-12-27
type (Tractor) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Tractor type Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tractor type" means a category of tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.3.1. such external and internal shapes and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1.1 as may affect visibility;
2.3.2. the form and size of the windscreen and of the side windows situated in the area specified in paragraph 1.1;		 No.071 2004-03-31
type (Tractor) with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the dimensions and exterior shape of the tractor;
2.1.2. the number and positioning of the devices;
2.1.3. the following are likewise considered not to be tractors of a different type:
tractors which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 above, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the type, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the tractor type in question;
tractors on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent;
tractors which are fitted with lamps, the position of which varies according to the direction of traffic in the country of registration.		 No.086 2010-09-30
type (Vehicle) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Vehicle type Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Vehicle type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility includes all vehicles, which do not differ essentially in such respects as:
2.9.1. the overall size and shape of the engine compartment;
2.9.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components and the general wiring arrangement;
2.9.3. the primary material of which the body or shell of the vehicle is constructed (for example, a steel, aluminium or fibreglass body shell). The presence of panels of different material does not change the vehicle type provided the primary material of the body is unchanged. However, such variations must be notified.		 No.010 2010-05-08
type (Vehicle) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Vehicle type door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. designation of the vehicle type by the manufacturer;
2.2.2. the type of latch;
2.2.3. the type of door retention component;
2.2.4. the way in which the latches and door retention components are fitted to and retained by the structure of the vehicle;
2.2.5. type of sliding doors.		 No.011 2010-05-13
type (Vehicle) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Vehicle type protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. Vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine:
2.2.1.1. The structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials of that part of the vehicle forward of the steering control;
2.2.1.2. The mass of vehicle in running order, as defined in paragraph 2.18 below;
2.2.2. Vehicle powered by an electric engine
2.2.2.1. The structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials of that part of the vehicle forward of the steering control.
2.2.2.2. The locations of the Rechargeable Energy Storage Systems (RESS), in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.2.3. Mass of the vehicle in running order, as defined in paragraph 2.18 below.		 No.012 2013-03-27
type (Vehicle) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Vehicle type Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. in the case of power-driven vehicle,
2.2.1.1. the vehicle category, (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.1.2. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.1.3. the distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.1.4. the maximum design speed;
2.2.1.5. a different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer, or any presence of an electric regenerative braking system;
2.2.1.6. the number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.1.7. the engine type;
2.2.1.8. the number and ratios of gears;
2.2.1.9. the final drive ratios;
2.2.1.10. the tyre dimensions;
2.2.2. in the case of trailers,
2.2.2.1. the vehicle category (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.2.2. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.2.3. the distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.2.4. a different type of braking equipment;
2.2.2.5. the number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.2.6. the tyre dimensions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
type (Vehicle) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Vehicle type Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. In the case of power-driven vehicle;
2.2.1.1. The vehicle category, (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.1.2. The maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.1.3. The distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.1.4. The maximum design speed;
2.2.1.5. A different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer, or any presence of an electric regenerative braking system;
2.2.1.6. The number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.1.7. The engine type;
2.2.1.8. The number and ratios of gears;
2.2.1.9. The final drive ratios;
2.2.1.10. The tyre dimensions;
2.2.2. In the case of trailers,
2.2.2.1. The vehicle category (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.2.2. The maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.2.3. The distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.2.4. A different type of braking equipment;
2.2.2.5. The number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.2.6. The tyre dimensions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
type (Vehicle) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Vehicle type Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.11 below;
2.2.2. the distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.3. the maximum design speed;
2.2.4. a different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer or any presence of electric braking system;
2.2.5. the engine type;
2.2.6. the number and ratios of gears;
2.2.7. the final drive ratios;
2.2.8. the tyre dimensions.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
type (Vehicle) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Vehicle type Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. The maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.11 below;
2.2.2. The distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.3. The maximum design speed;
2.2.4. A different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer or any presence of electric braking system;
2.2.5. The engine type;
2.2.6. The number and ratios of gears;
2.2.7. The final drive ratios;
2.2.8. The tyre dimensions.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
type (Vehicle) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Vehicle type Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles, which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the safety-belts anchorages and the Isofix anchorages systems and Isofix top tether anchorages if any are attached and, if the anchorages strength is tested according to the dynamic test, the characteristics of any component of the restraint system, especially the load limiter function, having an influence on the forces applying to the safety-belt anchorages.		 No.014 2007-12-06
type (vehicle) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 vehicle type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles, which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the safety-belts anchorages and the Isofix anchorages systems and Isofix top- tether anchorages if any are attached and, if the anchorages strength is tested according to the dynamic test, the characteristics of any component of the restraint system, especially the load limiter function, having an influence on the forces applying to the safety-belt anchorages.p		 No.014 2011-04-28
type (Vehicle) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Vehicle type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles, which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the safety-belts anchorages and the ISOFIX anchorages systems and ISOFIX top tether anchorages if any are attached and, if the anchorages strength is tested according to the dynamic test, as well as the vehicle floor strength when tested according to the static test in case of i-Size seating positions, the characteristics of any component of the restraint system, especially the load limiter function, having an influence on the forces applying to the safety-belt anchorages;		 No.014 2015-08-19
type (Vehicle) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle type Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions, materials and the mass of the seats, although the seats may differ in covering and colour; differences not exceeding 5 per cent in the mass of the approved seat type shall not be considered significant;
2.2.2. the type and dimensions of the adjustment, displacement and locking systems of the seat-back and seats and their parts;
2.2.3 the type and dimensions of the seat anchorages;
2.2.4. the dimensions, frame, materials and padding of head restraints, although they may differ in colour and covering;
2.2.5. the type and dimensions of the attachments of the head restraint and the characteristics of the part of the vehicle to which the head restraint is attached, in the case of a separate head restraint;		 No.017 2006-12-27
type (Vehicle) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Vehicle type seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions, materials and the mass of the seats, although the seats may differ in covering and colour; differences not exceeding 5 per cent in the mass of the approved seat type shall not be considered significant;
2.2.2. the type and dimensions of the adjustment, displacement and locking systems of the seat-back and seats and their parts;
2.2.3 the type and dimensions of the seat anchorages;
2.2.4. the dimensions, frame, materials and padding of head restraints, although they may differ in colour and covering;
2.2.5. the type and dimensions of the attachments of the head restraint and the characteristics of the part of the vehicle to which the head restraint is attached, in the case of a separate head restraint;		 No.017 2010-08-31
type (Vehicle) [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Vehicle type protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 2 and N 3 which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type;
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts;
2.2.3. the type of protective device;		 No.018 2010-05-13
type (Vehicle) [No.024 2006-11-2412] 　 Vehicle type Diesel smoke and power PART II . THE INSTALLATION ON ROAD VEHICLES OF TYPE-APPROVED C.I. ENGINES
12. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
12.2 "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics defined in Annex 1 to this Regulation,		 No.024 2006-11-24
type (Vehicle) [No.024 2006-11-2421] 　 Vehicle type Diesel smoke and power PART III . EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM A MOTOR VEHICLE WHOSE ENGINE HAS NOT BEEN SEPARATELY APPROVED
21. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of Part III of this Regulation:
21.2 "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics as defined in Annex 1 to the Regulation;		 No.024 2006-11-24
type (Vehicle) [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Vehicle type Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the lines and internal dimensions of the bodywork constituting the passenger compartment,
2.1.2. the types and dimensions of the seats,
2.1.3. type and dimensions of head-restraint attachment and of the relevant parts of the vehicle structure in the case of head restraint directly anchored to the vehicle structure;		 No.025 2005-12-16
type (Vehicle) [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Vehicle type head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the lines and internal dimensions of the bodywork constituting the passenger compartment,
2.1.2. the types and dimensions of the seats,
2.1.3. type and dimensions of head-restraint attachment and of the relevant parts of the vehicle structure in the case of head restraint directly anchored to the vehicle structure;		 No.025 2010-08-14
type (Vehicle) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Vehicle type External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as, shape or materials of the external surface.		 No.026 2005-12-16
type (Vehicle) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Vehicle type external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as, shape or materials of the external surface.		 No.026 2010-08-14
type (Vehicle) [No.028 2011-12-0611] 　 Vehicle type audible warning devices 11. DEFINITIONS
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.		 No.028 2011-12-06
type (vehicle) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 vehicle type protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the dimensions, shapes and materials of the components of the vehicle cab; or
2.2.2. the manner of attachment of the cab to the chassis frame.		 No.029 2010-11-20
type (vehicle) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 vehicle type Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.2. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
4.2.1. the manufacturer’s type designation;
4.2.2. in vehicles of category M1 ( 1 ) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10;		 No.034 2011-04-28
type (Vehicle) [No.034 2011-04-2812] 　 Vehicle type Fire risks PART IV — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE INSTALLATION OF APPROVED FUEL TANK(S)
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
12.2.1. the manufacturer’s type designation;
12.2.2. in vehicles of category M1 ( 1 ) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10.		 No.034 2011-04-28
type (vehicle) [No.034 2011-04-287] 　 vehicle type Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.2. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
7.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions and materials (metal/plastic) of the tank(s);
7.2.2. In vehicles of category M1 ( 1 ) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10;
7.2.3. the characteristics and siting of the fuel feed system (pump, filters, etc.); and
7.2.4. the characteristics and siting of the electrical installation in so far as they have an effect on the results of the collision tests prescribed in this Regulation;		 No.034 2011-04-28
type (vehicle) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 vehicle type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics as specified in Annex 1 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
type (vehicle) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 vehicle type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics as specified in Annex 1 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
type (Vehicle) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Vehicle type Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ from each other in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the dimensions and external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. the number and position of the devices;
2.2.3. the following shall likewise not be deemed to be ‘vehicles of a different type’:
2.2.3.1. vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 above but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, position and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the vehicle type in question; and
2.2.3.2. vehicles on which lamps approved under one of the Regulations annexed to the 1958 Agreement, or lamps allowed in the country in which the vehicles are registered, are fitted, or are absent where their fitting is optional;		 No.053 2013-06-18
type (Vehicle) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle type Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.055 2006-12-27
type (Vehicle) [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Vehicle type Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ significantly in such respects as:
2.6.1. the lines and constituent materials of the body (more particularly the engine compartment and its soundproofing),
2.6.2. the length and width of the vehicle,
2.6.3. the type of engine (positive ignition, compression ignition, two stroke or four stroke, reciprocating or rotary), number and capacity of cylinders, number of carburetors, arrangement of
valves, maximum horse-power and corresponding engine speed (r.p.m.), etc.
2.6.4. number and ratios of gears, total ratio of the transmission,
2.6.5. the number, type and arrangement of the exhaust systems, and
2.6.6. the number, type and arrangement of the intake systems.		 No.059 2006-11-24
type (Vehicle) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in respect of the arrangements which may affect the function or position of the driver-operated controls;		 No.060 2004-03-31
type (Vehicle) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Vehicle type Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in respect of the arrangements which may affect the function or position of the driver-operated controls.		 No.060 2014-10-15
type (Vehicle) [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle type external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the ‘external surface’;		 No.061 2010-06-30
type (Vehicle) [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type,
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts,
2.2.3. the type of protective-device,		 No.062 2004-03-31
type (Vehicle) [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Vehicle type Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type,
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts,
2.2.3. the type-of protective-device,		 No.062 2013-03-27
type (Vehicle) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
type (Vehicle) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles produced with the same design technical specification, main dimensions and constructional arrangement. The vehicle type shall be defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.066 2007-12-06
type (Vehicle) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles produced with the same design technical specification, main dimensions and constructional arrangement. The vehicle type shall be defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.066 2011-03-30
type (Vehicle) [No.067 2008-03-14p2] 　 Vehicle type LPG equipment [PART II] 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.2. "Vehicle type" means a vehicle or a family of vehicles fitted with specific equipment for the use of LPG in its propulsion system, which do not differ with respect to the following conditions:
14.1.2.1. the manufacturer;
14.1.2.2. the type designation established by the manufacturer;
14.1.2.3. the essential aspects of design and construction;
14.1.2.3.1. chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences);
14.1.2.3.2. installation of the LPG equipment (obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.067 2008-03-14
type (Vehicle) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ with respect to the essential points such as the width of the rear axle, the overall width, the dimensions, the shape and the materials of the whole side of the vehicle (including the cab if fitted), and the characteristics of the suspension in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 7 of this Regulation;		 No.073 2004-03-31
type (Vehicle) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Vehicle type lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ with respect to the essential points such as the width of the rear axle, the overall width, the dimensions, the shape and the materials of the whole side of the vehicle (including the cab if fitted), and the characteristics of the suspension in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 7 of this Regulation;		 No.073 2010-05-13
type (Vehicle) [No.073 2012-05-083] 　 Vehicle type LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definitions specific to Part III
2.4.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(a) the width of the rear axle;
(b) the structure, the dimensions, the shape and the height from the ground of the sides of the vehicle and the characteristics of the suspension, in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 15 of this Regulation;
(c) the approved LPD fitted to the vehicle.		 No.073 2012-05-08
type (Vehicle) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Vehicle type Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ from each other in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the dimensions and external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. the number and position of the devices;
2.2.3. the following shall likewise not be deemed to be ‘vehicles of a different type’:
2.2.3.1. vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 above but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, position and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the vehicle type in question;
2.2.3.2. vehicles on which lamps approved under one of the Regulations annexed to the 1958 Agreement, or lamps allowed in the country in which the vehicles are registered, are fitted, or are absent where their fitting is optional;		 No.074 2013-06-18
type (Vehicle) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the vehicle category, as defined in the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3),
2.2.2. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.14,
2.2.3. the distribution of mass between the axles,
2.2.4. the maximum design speed,
2.2.5. a different type of braking device,
2.2.6. the number and arrangement of the axles,
2.2.7. the engine type,
2.2.8. the number and ratios of gears,
2.2.9. the final drive ratios,
2.2.10. the tyre dimensions;		 No.078 2004-03-31
type (Vehicle) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Vehicle type Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Vehicle type" means a sub-category of L-category vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The vehicle category, as defined in the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3);
(b) The gross vehicle mass, as defined in paragraph 2.12;
(c) The distribution of the mass between the axles;
(d) Vmax;
(e) A different type of braking device;
(f) The number and arrangement of the axles;
(g) The engine type;
(h) The number and ratios of gears;
(i) The final drive ratios;
(j) The tyre dimensions.		 No.078 2015-01-30
type (Vehicle) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle type Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially in respect of:
2.4.1. the constructional features relevant to this Regulation; and,
2.4.2. the type or types of type approved seat(s) fitted to the vehicle, if any.		 No.080 2010-06-30
type (Vehicle) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Vehicle type Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a group of vehicles that do not differ in the following respects:
2.1.1. The equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as prescribed in Annex 4a, Table 3; and
2.1.2. The engine and vehicle characteristics as defined in Annex 1;		 No.083 2012-02-15
type (Vehicle) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicle type Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a group of vehicles that do not differ in the following respects:
2.1.1. The equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as prescribed in Table A4a/3 of Annex 4a to this Regulation; and
2.1.2. The engine and vehicle characteristics as defined in Annex 1 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
type (Vehicle) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Vehicle type Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.8. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not essentially differ in such aspects as:
The width of the foremost axle measured at the outermost part of the tyres excluding the bulging of the tyres close to the ground.
The structure, the dimensions, the shape and materials of the front part of the vehicle in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements of the relevant Part of this Regulation.
The approved FUPDs fitted to the vehicle, where the application is pursuant to satisfying Part II of this Regulation.
The maximum mass of the vehicle type.		 No.093 2010-07-17
type (Vehicle) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Vehicle type Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.6.1. The length and width of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.2. The structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the part of the vehicle forward of the transverse plane through the "R" point of the driver's seat, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.3. The lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective system, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.4. The siting (front, rear or centre) and the orientation (transversal or longitudinal) of the engine,
2.6.5. The unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.6. The optional arrangements or fittings provided by the manufacturer, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,		 No.094 2010-05-28
type (Vehicle) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Vehicle type Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. The length, width and ground learance of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; 2.2.2. The structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the side walls of the passenger compartment in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.3. The lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective systems, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.4. The sitting of the engine (front, rear or centre) and the orientation (transversal or longitudinal) of the engine, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test of this Regulation;
2.2.5. The unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.6. The optional arrangements or interior fittings in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.7. The type of front seat(s) and position of the ‘R’ point in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.8. The locations of the REESS, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
type (Vehicle) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Vehicle type Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(a) installation of the electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage bus;
(b) nature and type of electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage components.		 No.100 2011-02-14
type (Vehicle) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(a) Installation of the electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage bus;
(b) Nature and type of electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage components.		 No.100 2015-03-31
type (Vehicle) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Vehicle type CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as body, power train, transmission, traction battery (if applicable), tyres and unladen mass;		 No.101 2012-05-26
type (Vehicle) [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Vehicle type Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Vehicle type"
See paragraph 2.3 of Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
type (Vehicle) [No.105 2005-12-16] 　 Vehicle type Carriage of dangerous goods — construction of vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.105 2005-12-16
type (Vehicle) [No.105 2010-08-31] 　 Vehicle type carriage of dangerous goods - constructional features 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.105 2010-08-31
type (Vehicle) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) chassis manufacturer;
(c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(d) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(c) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
(e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2010-09-29
type (Vehicle) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Vehicle type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
(a) Bodywork manufacturer;
(b) Chassis manufacturer;
(c) Vehicle concept (＞ 22 passengers or ≦ 22 passengers);
(d) Bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor);
(e) Bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit.		 No.107 2015-06-18
type (Vehicle) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Vehicle type burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as the manufacturer's type designation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
type (Vehicle) [No.110 2011-05-07p2] 　 Vehicle type using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles fitted with specific components for the use of CNG in their propulsion system which do not differ with respect to the following conditions:
14.1.2.1. the manufacturer;
14.1.2.2. the type designation established by the manufacturer,
14.1.2.3. the essential aspects of design and construction:
14.1.2.3.1. chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences);
14.1.2.3.2. the installation of the CNG equipment(obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.110 2011-05-07
type (Vehicle) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Vehicle type using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.9. "Vehicle type" means vehicles fitted with specific components for the use of CNG and/or LNG in their propulsion system which does not differ with respect to the following conditions:
4.9.1. The manufacturer,
4.9.2. The type designation established by the manufacturer,
4.9.3. The essential aspects of design and construction:
4.9.3.1. Chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences),
4.9.3.2. The installation of the CNG and/or LNG equipment (obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.110 2015-06-30
type (vehicle) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 vehicle type Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of vehicle which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. vehicle category, (see paragraph 1) and type (truck, full trailer, semi-trailer, centre-axle trailer) (4);
2.2.2. maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.4;
2.2.3. cross-section profile of the tank (circular, elliptical, maxi-volume);
2.2.4. maximum height of the centre of gravity of the laden vehicle;
2.2.5. distribution of mass among the axles (including fifth wheel);
2.2.6. number and arrangement of the axles (including axle spacing);
2.2.7. suspension arrangements in relation to roll characteristics;
2.2.8. tyre size and structure (radial ply, diagonal ply or bias belted);
2.2.9. track width;
2.2.10. wheel base;		 No.111 2002-02-01
type (Vehicle) [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Vehicle type Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as:
5.1.1.1. the manufacturer's type designation;
5.1.1.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the device to prevent unauthorised use acts;
5.1.1.3. the type of device to prevent unauthorised use.		 No.116 2010-06-30
type (Vehicle) [No.118 2010-07-10I] 　 Vehicle type Fire resistance of interior materials 5. PART I - APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE BURNING BEHAVIOUR OF THE INTERIOR COMPONENTS USED IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as the manufacturer's typedesignation.		 No.118 2010-07-10
type (Vehicle) [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Vehicle type Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles, which do not differ in respect of the internal arrangements,which may affect the identification of symbols for controls, tell-tales, and indicators and operationof controls.		 No.121 2010-07-10
type (Vehicle) [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Vehicle type Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles, which do not differ in respect of the internal arrangements, which may affect the identification of symbols for controls, tell-tales and indicators, and operation of controls.		 No.121 2016-01-08
type (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
type (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
type (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;		 No.125 2010-07-31
type (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;		 No.130 2014-06-18
type (vehicle, Family of) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Family of vehicle types Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Family of vehicle types" means those vehicle types, proposed in future as well as existing now, which are covered by the approval of the worst case, in respect of this Regulation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
type (vehicle, Group of) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Group of vehicle types Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Group of vehicle types" means those vehicle types, proposed in future as well as existing now, which are covered by the approval of the worst case, in respect of this Regulation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
type (Vehicle, with regard to the installation of lighting and light signalling device) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means vehicles which do not differ in the essential respects mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4.
The following are likewise considered not to be "vehicles of a different type": vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps and the inclination of the dipped-beam prescribed for the vehicle type in question, and vehicles on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent:
2.2.1. The dimension and the external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. The number and positioning of the devices;
2.2.3. The headlamp-levelling system;
2.2.4. The suspension system.		 No.048 2011-12-06
type (Wheel) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel type (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Wheel type" means a wheel which does not differ in the following essential characteristics:
the wheel manufacturer;
wheel or rim size designation (according to ISO 3911:1998);
1/ Categories M and O as defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of
Vehicles (R.E.3) (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).
2.2.3. construction materials;
2.2.4. wheel attachment holes;
2.2.5. maximum load capacity;
2.2.6. recommended maximum inflation pressure;
2.2.7. method of production (welded, forged, cast,…).		 No.124 2006-12-27
type 1～4 (Retractor) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 type 1～4 (Retractor) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.1. Non-locking retractor (type 1)
A retractor from which the strap is extracted to its full length by a small external force and which provides no adjustment for the length of the extracted strap.
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.
2.14.4. Emergency locking retractor (type 4)
A retractor which during normal driving conditions does not restrict the freedom of movement by the wearer of the safety-belt. Such a device has length adjusting components which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.14.4.1. Deceleration of the vehicle (single sensitivity),
2.14.4.2. A combination of deceleration of the vehicle, movement of the webbing or any other automatic means (multiple sensitivity).
2.14.5. Emergency locking retractor with higher response threshold (type 4N)
A retractor of the type defined in paragraph 2.14.4, but having special properties as regards its use in vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 1 , N 2 and N 3.
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Type 1～5 (Temporary use spare unit) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Type 1～5 (Temporary use spare unit) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Temporary use spare unit" means an assembly of any wheel and tyre that is not within that defined as a "Standard spare unit" in paragraph 2.9. Temporary use spare units may be of the following types:
2.10.1. Type 1 : An assembly in which the tyre is a temporary use spare tyre as defined in paragraph 2.4.2;
2.10.2. Type 2 : An assembly in which the wheel has a different offset from that of the wheel fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.3. Type 3 : An assembly in which the tyre is of a different structure from that fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.4. Type 4 : An assembly in which the tyre is a normal tyre as defined in paragraph 2.4.1 but where the size designation of the wheel or the tyre or both, differ from those of the wheel or tyre fitted in the same axle position for normal operation of the vehicle;
2.10.5. Type 5 : An assembly in which a wheel and tyre unit as defined in paragraph 2.4.3 or 2.4.4 is fitted to the vehicle for normal, long term road use, but used in an emergency in a totally deflated condition;		 No.064 2010-11-26
type approval [No.023 2014-08-08] 　 type approval reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.		 No.023 2014-08-08
Type approval [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Type approval Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.91. "Type approval" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its emissions measured in accordance with the procedures specified in this Regulation;		 No.096 2014-03-22
type approval of a vehicle with regard to emission and vehicle repair and maintenance information [REG. No 692/2008] 　 type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 2. "EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information" means an EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to its tailpipe emissions, crankcase emissions, evaporative emissions, fuel consumption and access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information; REG. No 692/2008
Type approval test [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.044 2007-11-23
type approval test [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Type approval test [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Type approval test Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a Child Restraint System type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.		 No.129 2014-03-29
type as regards safety belt and restraint system (Vehicle) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Type I Test [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Type I Test Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Type I Test" means the driving cycle (Parts One and Two) used for emission approvals, as detailed in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 4a.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Type of a component [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Type of a component burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Type of a component" means components which do not differ in such essential respects as:
6.1.1.1. The manufacturer's type designation,
6.1.1.2. The intended use (seat upholstery, roof lining, insulation, etc.),
6.1.1.3. The base material(s) (e.g. wool, plastic, rubber, blended materials),
6.1.1.4. The number of layers in the case of composite materials, and
6.1.1.5. Other characteristics in so far as they have an appreciable effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Type of a component [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Type of a component Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Type of a component" means components which do not differ in such essential respects as:
6.1.1.1. the manufacturer's type designation,
6.1.1.2. the intended use (seat upholstery, roof lining, etc.),
6.1.1.3. the base material(s) (e.g. wool, plastic, rubber, blended materials),
6.1.1.4. the number of layers in the case of composite materials, and
6.1.1.5. other characteristics in so far as they have an appreciable effect on the performance prescribed inthis Regulation.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Type of a protective system [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 Type of a protective system Interior fittings 2.11. "Type of a protective system", means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.11.1. their technology;
2.11.2. their geometry;
2.11.3. their constituent materials.		 No.021 2008-07-16
Type of agricultural tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Type of agricultural tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of agricultural tyre" means a category of tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the manufacturer;
2.1.2. tyre-size designation;
2.1.3. category of use:
(a) Tractor - Steering wheel:
(b) Tractor - Drive wheel - standard tread
(c) Tractor - Drive wheel - special tread
(d) Implement - traction:
(e) Implement - trailer;
(f) Implement - mixed applications;
(g) Forestry machines — standard tread;
(h) Forestry machines — special tread.
2.1.4. structure (diagonal (bias-ply), bias-belted, radial-ply);
2.1.5. speed category symbol;
2.1.6. load capacity index;
2.1.7. tyre cross-section;		 No.106 2010-09-30
Type of brake disc/drum [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Type of brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.6. "Type of brake disc/drum": brake discs or drums having the same basic design and material group in accordance with the classification criteria pursuant to paragraph 5.3.5.1 or 5.3.5.2 as appropriate.		 No.090 2012-07-13
type of braking device (Different) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Different types of braking devices Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking devices" means devices which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics,
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size,
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;		 No.078 2004-03-31
type of braking equipment (different) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
type of braking equipment (Different) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
type of braking system (Different) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;		 No.013 2010-09-30
type of braking system (Different) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components;		 No.013 2016-02-18
type of braking system (Different) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Different types of braking systems Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Different types of braking systems" means devices which differ in such essential respects as: (a) Components having different characteristics; (b) A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size; (c) A different assembly of the components.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Type of catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Type of catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of catalytic converter" means catalytic converters which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(i) number of coated substrates, structure and material
(ii) type of catalytic activity (oxidising, three-way, …)
(iii) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length
(iv) catalyst material content
(v) catalyst material ratio
(vi) cell density
(vii) dimensions and shape
(viii) thermal protection		 No.103 2007-06-19
Type of close coupling device [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Type of close-coupling device Close coupling devices 2.1.5. "Type of close-coupling device" means devices which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.5.1. The make and type of the device;
2.1.5.2. The operating principle;
2.1.5.3. The means of attachment to vehicles;
2.1.5.4. The overall dimensions at minimum and maximum extension;
2.1.5.5. The limits of the operating angles;
2.1.5.6. The kinematic characteristics in relation to the angles of articulation;		 No.102 2008-12-30
Type of combustion heater [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Type of combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Type of combustion heater" means devices which do not differ in essential respects such as:
- fuel type (e.g. liquid or gaseous),
- transfer medium (e.g. air or water),
- vehicle location (e.g. passenger compartment or load area).		 No.122 2010-06-30
Type of component [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of components using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.25. "Type of components" as mentioned in paragraphs 2.6 to 2.23 above means components which do not differ in such essential respect as materials, working pressure and operating temperatures.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Type of component [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of components using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.39. "Type of components" as mentioned in paragraphs 4.17 to 4.38 (above) means components that do not differ in such essential respect as materials, working pressure and operating temperatures.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Type of container [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Type of container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.4. "Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect to the following characteristics as specified in Annex 10:
(a) the trade name(s) or trade mark(s),
(b) the shape (cylindrical, special shape),
(c) the openings (plate for accessories/metal ring),
(d) the material,
(e) the welding process (in case of metal containers),
(f) the heat treatment (in case of metal containers),
(g) the production line,
(h) the nominal wall thickness,
(i) the diameter
(j) the height (in case of special containers)		 No.067 2008-03-14
Type of container [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.4. "Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Type of container [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.13."Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3A. 4.13.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).		 No.110 2015-06-30
type of coupling device or component [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 type of coupling device or component Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "type of coupling device or component" means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;
2.10.2. the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.;
2.10.3. the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and
2.10.4. the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.		 No.055 2006-12-27
type of coupling device or component [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 type of coupling device or component mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "type of coupling device or component" means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;
2.10.2. the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6;
2.10.3. the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and
2.10.4. the characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Type of device for indirect vision [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Type of device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essentialcharacteristics:
- design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork,
- in case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mirror's reflecting surface,—
in case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Type of device for indirect vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4."Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essential characteristics:
(a) Design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork;
(b) In case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mir ror’s reflecting surface;
(c) In case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Type of electronic control unit [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.26. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 2.24 means components which do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Type of electronic control unit [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.40. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 4.38 means components that do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.		 No.110 2015-06-30
type of FUPD [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 type of FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "type of FUPD" means FUPD which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings cited in paragraph 4.2.;		 No.093 2002-02-01
Type of FUPD [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Type of FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Type of FUPD" means FUPD which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings cited in paragraph 4.2 below;		 No.093 2010-07-17
Type of head restraint [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Type of head restraint Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of head restraint" means a category of head restraints which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish, in colour and in covering;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Type of head restraint [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Type of head restraint head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of head restraint" means a category of head restraints which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish, in colour and in covering;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Type of immobiliser [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Type of immobiliser alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.9. "Type of immobiliser" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer’s trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of control equipment;
(c) the design of their operation on the relevant vehicle system(s) (as referred to in paragraph 32.1 below).		 No.097 2012-05-08
Type of immobiliser [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Type of immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.9. "Type of immobiliser" means systems that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of control equipment;
(c) the design of their operation on the relevant vehicle system(s) (as referred to in paragraph 8.3.1 below).		 No.116 2010-06-30
Type of immobiliser [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Type of immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.9. "Type of immobiliser" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of control equipment,
(c) the design of their operation on the relevant vehicle system(s) (as referred to in paragraph 8.3.1 below).		 No.116 2012-02-16
Type of LPD [No.073 2012-05-082] 　 Type of LPD LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions specific to Part II
2.3.2. "Type of LPD" means an LPD that does not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings specified in paragraph 5.2.4		 No.073 2012-05-08
Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.2. "Type of motor cycle as regards its sound level and exhaust system" means motor cycles which do not differ in such essential respects as the following:
2.2.1. The type of engine (two-stroke or four-stroke, reciprocating piston engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection systems, arrangement of valves, rated maximum net power and corresponding engine speed). For rotary-piston engines the cubic capacity should be taken to be double of the volume of the chamber;
2.2.2. Transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of the gears;
2.2.3. Number, type and arrangement of exhaust or silencing systems.		 No.041 2012-11-14
Type of pneumatic tyre [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Type of pneumatic tyre Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.1. "Type of pneumatic tyre" means a category of pneumatic tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. The manufacturer;
2.1.2. Tyre-size designation;
2.1.3. Category of use (ordinary (road-type) or snow tyre or for temporary use);
2.1.4. Structure (diagonal (bias-ply), bias-belted, radial-ply, run flat tyre);
2.1.5. Speed category symbol;
2.1.6. Load-capacity index;
2.1.7. Tyre cross section;		 No.030 2008-07-30
Type of pneumatic tyre [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Type of pneumatic tyre Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.1. "Type of pneu matic tyre" means a category of pneumatic tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. The manufacturer;
2.1.2. Tyre-size designation;
2.1.3. Category of use;
2.1.4. Structure (diagonal (bias-ply); radial);
2.1.5. Speed category;
2.1.6. Load-capacity indices; and
2.1.7. Cross-section;		 No.054 2008-07-11
Type of pneumatic tyre [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Type of pneumatic tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of pneumatic tyre" means a category of pneumatic tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. The manufacturer;
2.1.2. Tyre size designation;
2.1.3. Category of use (normal: for normal highway service; special: for special applications such as on- and off-the-road, snow, moped);
2.1.4. Structure (diagonal or bias-ply, bias belted, radial);
2.1.5. Speed category;
2.1.6. Load capacity index;
2.1.7. Tyre cross-section.		 No.075 2011-03-30
type of pollution control device [REG. No 692/2008] 　 type of pollution control device emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 8. "type of pollution control device" means catalytic converters and particulate filters which do not differ in any of the following essential aspects:
(a) number of substrates, structure and material;
(b) type of activity of each substrate;
(c) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length;
(d) catalyst material content;
(e) catalyst material ratio;
(f) cell density;
(g) dimensions and shape;
(h) thermal protection;		 REG. No 692/2008
Type of protective system [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as:
Their technology;
Their geometry;
Their constituent materials;		 No.094 2010-05-28
Type of protective system [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as:
Their technology;
Their geometry;
Their constituent materials;		 No.094 2012-09-20
Type of protective system [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as their:
— technology
— geometry
— constituent materials;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Type of protective system [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Type of protective system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Type of protective system" means a category of protective devices which do not differ in such essential respects as their:
Technology;
Geometry;
Constituent materials.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Type of REESS [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Type of REESS Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Type of REESS" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) The manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) The chemistry, capacity and physical dimensions of its cells;
(c) The number of cells, the mode of connection of the cells and the physical support of the cells;
(d) The construction, materials and physical dimensions of the casing; and
(e) The necessary ancillary devices for physical support, thermal management and electronic control.		 No.100 2015-03-31
type of retro reflecting device [No.003 2011-12-06] 　 type of "retro-reflecting device" Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. A type of "retro-reflecting device" is defined by the models and descriptive literature submitted with the application for approval. Retro-reflecting devices can be considered as belonging to the same type if they have one or more ‘retro-reflecting optical units’ which are identical with those of the standard model, or if not identical are symmetrical and suitable for mounting one on the left and one on the right side of the vehicle, and if their other parts differ from those of the standard model only in ways not affecting the properties to which this Regulation applies.		 No.003 2011-12-06
type of RUPD [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 type of RUPD RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 4.1.2. "type of RUPD" means RUPDs which do not differ with respect to the essential characteristics such as shape, dimensions, attachment, materials and the markings cited in paragraph 5.2.2 below No.058 2008-08-30
Type of safety glazing material [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Type of safety glazing material Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Type of safety glazing material" means a glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 to 2.7 not exhibiting any essential differences, with respect, in particular, to the principal and secondary characteristics defined in annexes 4 to 12 and 14 to 16;
2.15.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognised that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual annexes, glazings may be grouped if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics;
2.15.2. Types of glazing exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type; certain tests may however be carried out on samples of such glazings if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test condition.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Type of safety glazing material [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Type of safety glazing material safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of safety glazing material" means a glazing as defined in paragraphs 2.1 to 2.7 not exhibiting any essential differences, with respect, in particular, to the principal and secondary characteristics defined in Annexes 4 to 12 and 14 to 16;
2.19.1. Although a change in the principal characteristics implies that the product is of a new type, it is recognised that in certain cases a change in shape and dimension does not necessarily require a complete set of tests to be carried out. For certain of the tests prescribed in the individual annexes, glazings may be grouped if it is evident that they have similar principal characteristics;
2.19.2. Types of glazing exhibiting differences only as regards their secondary characteristics may be deemed to be of the same type. Certain tests may however be carried out on samples of such glazings if the performance of those tests is explicitly stipulated in the test condition;		 No.043 2014-02-12
Type of seat [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Type of seat Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Type of seat" means a category of seats which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish and colour;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Type of seat [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Type of seat head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Type of seat" means a category of seats which do not differ in their dimensions, in their framework or in their padding, although they may differ in finish and colour;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Type of tank [No.034 2011-04-2810] 　 Type of tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.5. "Type of tank" means tanks which do not differ in such essential respects as:
10.5.1. The structure, shape, dimensions and material (metal/plastic) of the tank(s);
10.5.2. The intended use of the tank: universal use or specific vehicle use;
10.5.3. The presence or absence of the accessories.		 No.034 2011-04-28
Type of tank [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Type of tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.15. "Type of tank" means tanks that do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3B.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Type of tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Type of tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.1. "Type of tyre" means, in relation to this Regulation, a range of tyres consisting of a list of tyre size designations, brand names and trade descriptions, which do not differ in such essential characteristics as:
(a) The manufacturer's name;
(b) The tyre class (see paragraph 2.4);
(c) The tyre structure;
(d) The category of use: normal tyre, special use tyre and snow tyre;
(e) For Class C1 tyres:
(i) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels, whether normal or reinforced (or extra load);
(ii) In case of tyres submitted for approval of performance adhesion on wet surfaces, whether normal or snow tyres with a speed category of Q or below (160 km/h) or speed category R and above including H (. 170 km/h);
(f) The tread pattern (see paragraph 3.2.1).		 No.117 2008-08-29
Type of tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Type of tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of tyre" means, in relation to this Regulation, a range of tyres consisting of a list of tyre size designations, brand names and trade descriptions, which do not differ in such essential characteristics as:
(a) The manufacturer's name;
(b) The tyre class (see paragraph 2.4);
(c) The tyre structure;
(d) The category of use: normal tyre, snow tyre and special use tyre;
(e) For Class C1 tyres:
(i) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels, whether normal or reinforced (or extra load);
(ii) In case of tyres submitted for approval of performance adhesion on wet surfaces, whether normal tyres or snow tyres with a speed category of Q or below excluding H (≤ 160 km/h) or speed category R and above including H (> 160 km/h);
(f) For Class C2 and C3 tyres:
(i) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels at stage 1, whether M+S marked or not;
(ii) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels at stage 2, whether traction tyre or not;
(g) The tread pattern (see paragraph 3.2.1).		 No.117 2011-11-23
Type of tyre pressure monitoring system [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Type of tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of tyre pressure monitoring system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the principle of operation;
(b) any components which are likely to have a significant influence on the performance of the system as specified under paragraph 5.3 to this Regulation.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Type of vehicle [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Type of vehicle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Type of vehicle", as regards the installation of safety glazing, means vehicles belonging to the same category which do not differ in at least the following essential respects:
The manufacturer;
The manufacturer’s type designation;
Essential aspects of construction and design.		 No.043 2010-08-31
Type of vehicle [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Type of vehicle safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Type of vehicle", as regards the installation of safety glazing, means vehicles belonging to the same category which do not differ in at least the following essential respects:
(a) The manufacturer;
(b) The manufacturer's type designation;
(c) Essential aspects of construction and design.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Type of vehicle alarm system [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Alarm systems 2.8. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of sensor,
(c) the kind of warning device,
(d) the kind of control equipment;		 No.097 2008-12-30
Type of vehicle alarm system [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Type of vehicle alarm system [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Type of vehicle alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of sensor,
(c) the kind of warning device,
(d) the kind of control equipment.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Type of vehicle as regard indirect vision [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.3. "Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respectof the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optionaldevices for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Type of vehicle as regard indirect vision [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.3."Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optional devi ces for indirect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Type of vehicle as regard rear view mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.2. "Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors" means vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
13.2.1. The geometrical features of the vehicle, liable to influence the installation of rear-view mirrors,
13.2.2. The positions and types of rear-view mirror specified.		 No.081 2012-07-13
Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2004-03-31
Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular, to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer’s measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
type with regard to heating system (Vehicle) [No.122 2010-06-30P1] 　 Vehicle type with regard to heating system Heating systems 5. PART I . APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE WITH REGARD TO ITS HEATING SYSTEM
5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type with regard to heating system" means vehicles which do not differ in essential respects such as the functioning principle(s) of the heating system.		 No.122 2010-06-30
type with regard to its AEBS (Vehicle) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) Vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Advanced Emergency Braking System;
(c) The type and design of the Advanced Emergency Braking System.		 No.131 2014-07-19
type with regard to its alarm system (Vehicle) [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer"s trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.097 2012-05-08
type with regard to its alarm system (Vehicle) [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.116 2010-06-30
type with regard to its immobiliser (Vehicle) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser;
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.116 2010-06-30
type with regard to its immobiliser (Vehicle) [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser;
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.097 2012-05-08
type with regard to its LDWS (Vehicle) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Lane Departure Warning System;
(c) the type and design of the Lane Departure Warning System;		 No.130 2014-06-18
type with regard to the field of vision (Vehicle) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. the external and internal forms and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1 which may affect visibility; and
2.2.2. the shape and dimensions of the windscreen and its mounting;		 No.125 2010-07-31
Tyre [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre" means a pneumatic tyre, being a reinforced flexible envelope that is provided with, or forms in conjunction with the wheel on which it is mounted, a continuous, essentially toroidal, closed chamber containing a gas (usually air) or a gas and liquid, that is intended normally to be used at a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. It may be a:
2.4.1. "Normal tyre" being a tyre that is suitable for all normal, on-road, conditions of use;
2.4.2. "Temporary use spare tyre" being a tyre that is specifically designed to be different from a normal tyre and intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions;
2.4.3. "Run flat tyre" or "Self supporting tyre" describes a pneumatic tyre structure provided with any technical solutions (for example, reinforced sidewalls, etc.) allowing the pneumatic tyre, mounted on the appropriate wheel and in the absence of any supplementary component, to supply the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode;
2.4.4. "Run flat system" or "Extended mobility system" describes an assembly of specified functionally dependant components, including a tyre, which together provide the specified performance granting the vehicle with the basic tyre functions, at least, at a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and a distance of 80 km when operating in flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
tyre (agricultural, Type of) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Type of agricultural tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of agricultural tyre" means a category of tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the manufacturer;
2.1.2. tyre-size designation;
2.1.3. category of use:
(a) Tractor - Steering wheel:
(b) Tractor - Drive wheel - standard tread
(c) Tractor - Drive wheel - special tread
(d) Implement - traction:
(e) Implement - trailer;
(f) Implement - mixed applications;
(g) Forestry machines — standard tread;
(h) Forestry machines — special tread.
2.1.4. structure (diagonal (bias-ply), bias-belted, radial-ply);
2.1.5. speed category symbol;
2.1.6. load capacity index;
2.1.7. tyre cross-section;		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (applications, Mixed) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Mixed applications tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Mixed applications tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to either driven and non-driven axles of implements, agricultural machinery or trailers;		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (Candidate) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Candidate tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.2. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (Category of use) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Category of use 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.		 No.108 2006-07-04
tyre (Control) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Control tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.3. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre – see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (extra load tyre, reinforced tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 reinforced tyre (extra load tyre) safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 10. "reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" means a C1 pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is designed to carry a greater load than the corresponding standard tyre; REG. No 661/2009
tyre (extra load) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" of Class C1 means a pneumatic-tyre structure designed to carry more load at a higher inflation pressure than the load carried by the corresponding standard version tyre at the standard inflation pressure as specified in ISO 4000-1:2010.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (Forestry) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Forestry tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. Forestry tyre: means a tyre designed to be fitted to machines or equipments used in forestry applications.		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (Implement) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Implement tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Implement tyre" means a tyre designed primarily for agricultural machines or implements (vehicles in category S) or for agricultural trailers (vehicles in category R); however it may also equip either front steering wheels and drive wheels of agricultural and forestry tractors (vehicles in category T), but it is not suitable for sustained high torque services.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tyre (Improved Flexion) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Improved Flexion Tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.
2.20.1. "Improved Flexion Tyre" or "Very High Flexion Tyre" describe a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre.		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (Lower area of) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Lower area of tyre 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Lower area of tyre" means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim.		 No.108 2006-07-04
tyre (Lower area of) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Lower area of tyre Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Lower area of tyre" means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim.		 No.109 2006-07-04
tyre (Moped) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Moped tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Moped tyre" means a tyre designed for the equipment of mopeds (categories L1 and L2 ).		 No.075 2011-03-30
tyre (Motor cycle) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Motor cycle tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Motor cycle tyre" means a tyre designed primarily for the equipment of motor cycles (categories L3 , L4 and L5 ). However, they may also equip mopeds (categories L1 and L2 ) and light trailers (category 01).		 No.075 2011-03-30
tyre (multiservice) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 MST (multiservice tyre) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "MST" means "multiservice tyre", suitable both on and off road.		 No.075 2011-03-30
tyre (Normal) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Normal tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Normal tyre" means a tyre intended for normal on-road use.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (off road professional tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 off-road professional tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 9. "off-road professional tyre" means a special use tyre primarily used in severe off-road conditions; REG. No 661/2009
tyre (off-road, Professional) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Professional off-road tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Professional off-road tyre" is a special use tyre primarily used for service in severe off-road conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (pneumatic, retreaded, Range of) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres" — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.		 No.109 2006-07-04
tyre (pneumatic, Structure of a) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Structure of a pneumatic tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyre’s carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90° to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
tyre (pneumatic, Type of) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Type of pneumatic tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of pneumatic tyre" means a category of pneumatic tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. The manufacturer;
2.1.2. Tyre size designation;
2.1.3. Category of use (normal: for normal highway service; special: for special applications such as on- and off-the-road, snow, moped);
2.1.4. Structure (diagonal or bias-ply, bias belted, radial);
2.1.5. Speed category;
2.1.6. Load capacity index;
2.1.7. Tyre cross-section.		 No.075 2011-03-30
tyre (reinforced tyre, extra load tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 reinforced tyre (extra load tyre) safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 10. "reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" means a C1 pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is designed to carry a greater load than the corresponding standard tyre; REG. No 661/2009
tyre (Reinforced) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Reinforced tyre" or "extra load tyre" of Class C1 means a pneumatic-tyre structure designed to carry more load at a higher inflation pressure than the load carried by the corresponding standard version tyre at the standard inflation pressure as specified in ISO 4000-1:2010.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (snow tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 snow tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 11. "snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern, tread compound or structure is primarily designed to achieve in snow conditions a performance better than that of a normal tyre with regard to its ability to initiate or maintain vehicle motion;､ REG. No 661/2009
tyre (Snow) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Snow tyre Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern and whose structure are primarily designed to ensure in mud and fresh or melting snow a performance better than that of an ordinary (road- type) tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and/or solid-block elements more widely spaced than on an ordinary (road-type) tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
tyre (Snow) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Snow tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Snow tyre" means a tyre whose tread pattern, tread compound or structure are primarily designed to achieve in snow conditions a performance better than that of a normal tyre with regard to its ability to initiate, maintain or stop vehicle motion.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (spare, Temporary-use) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Temporary-use spare tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Temporary-use spare tyre" means a tyre different from a tyre intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions; but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (special use tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 special use tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 8. "special use tyre" means a tyre intended for mixed use both on- and off-road or for other special duty; REG. No 661/2009
tyre (Special use) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Special use tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Special use tyre" means a tyre intended for mixed use both on- and off-road or for other special duty. These tyres are primarily designed to initiate and maintain the vehicle in motion in off-road conditions.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (steering wheel, Tractor) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor steering wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tractor steering wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to non-driven axles of agricultural and forestry tractors (motor vehicles in category T); The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of circumferential grooves and ribs.		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (Structure of a) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Structure of a tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the bead and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90° to the centreline of the tread;
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;
2.3.3. "Radial" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90° to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt;		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (T type temporary use spare tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 T-type temporary-use spare tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 12. "T-type temporary-use spare tyre" means a temporary-use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres; REG. No 661/2009
tyre (test, reference, Standard) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 SRTT (Standard reference test tyre) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Standard reference test tyre" (SRTT) means a tyre that is produced, controlled and stored in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) standards E1136-93 (2003) (size P195/75R14).		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (traction tyre) [REG. No 661/2009] 　 traction tyre safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 13. "traction tyre" means a tyre of classes C2 or C3 bearing the inscription "M + S", "M.S" or "M&S" and intended to be fitted to a vehicle drive axle or axles; REG. No 661/2009
tyre (Traction) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Traction tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Traction tyre" means a tyre designed primarily for the equipment of driven axles of implements or agricultural machinery, excluding sustained high torque services. The tread pattern of the tyre generally consists of lugs or cleats. The type of application is identified with the symbol: [図]		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (Traction) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Traction tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Traction tyre" means a tyre in class C2 or C3 bearing the inscription TRACTION and intended to be fitted primarily to the drive axle(s) of a vehicle to maximise force transmission in various circumstances.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (Trailer) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Trailer tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Trailer tyre" means a tyre designed for the equipment of non-driven (trailed) axles of implements, agricultural machinery or trailers.
The type of application is identified with the symbol [図]		 No.106 2010-09-30
tyre (Type of) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Type of tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of tyre" means, in relation to this Regulation, a range of tyres consisting of a list of tyre size designations, brand names and trade descriptions, which do not differ in such essential characteristics as:
(a) The manufacturer's name;
(b) The tyre class (see paragraph 2.4);
(c) The tyre structure;
(d) The category of use: normal tyre, snow tyre and special use tyre;
(e) For Class C1 tyres:
(i) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels, whether normal or reinforced (or extra load);
(ii) In case of tyres submitted for approval of performance adhesion on wet surfaces, whether normal tyres or snow tyres with a speed category of Q or below excluding H (≤ 160 km/h) or speed category R and above including H (> 160 km/h);
(f) For Class C2 and C3 tyres:
(i) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels at stage 1, whether M+S marked or not;
(ii) In case of tyres submitted for approval of rolling sound emission levels at stage 2, whether traction tyre or not;
(g) The tread pattern (see paragraph 3.2.1).		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre (use, Category of) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Category of use Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
tyre (wheel, Tractor-drive) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor-drive wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.
2.20.1. "Improved Flexion Tyre" or "Very High Flexion Tyre" describe a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre.		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tyre Class [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Tyre Class Tyre noise and wet grip 2.4. "Tyre Class" means one of the following groupings:
2.4.1. Class C1 tyres: Tyres conforming to ECE Regulation No 30;
2.4.2. Class C2 tyres: Tyres conforming to ECE Regulation No 54 and identified by a load capacity index in single formation lower or equal to 121 and a speed category symbol higher or equal to "N";
2.4.3. Class C3 tyres: Tyres conforming to ECE Regulation No 54 and identified by:
(a) A load capacity index in single formation higher or equal to 122; or
(b) A load capacity index in single formation lower or equal to 121 and a speed category symbol lower or equal to "M".		 No.117 2008-08-29
Tyre Class [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Tyre Class Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Tyre Class" means one of the following groupings:
2.4.1. Class C1 tyres: Tyres conforming to Regulation No 30;
2.4.2. Class C2 tyres: Tyres conforming to Regulation No 54 and identified by a load capacity index in single formation lower or equal to 121 and a speed category symbol higher or equal to "N";
2.4.3. Class C3 tyres: Tyres conforming to Regulation No 54 and identified by:
(a) A load capacity index in single formation higher or equal to 122; or
(b) A load capacity index in single formation lower or equal to 121 and a speed category symbol lower or equal to "M".		 No.117 2011-11-23
Tyre classification code [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tyre classification code Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Tyre classification code" means the optional marking detailed in annex 10 that identifies the category of use and the particular type of tread pattern and application as specified by ISO 4251-4.		 No.106 2010-09-30
TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE [No.106 2010-09-30A10] 　 TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE Tyres (agricultural vehicles) [ANNEX 10] TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE (Optional marking)
[表] Classification code / Nomenclature
F-1 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: single rib tread
F-2 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: multiple rib tread
F-3 / Steering wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
G-1 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): traction service
G-2 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): flotation traction service
G-3 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): maximum flotation service
I-1 / Agricultural implement tyres: multi-rib tread
I-2 / Agricultural implement tyres: moderate traction service
I-3 / Agricultural implement tyres: traction tread
I-4 / Agricultural implement tyres: plough tail wheel service
I-5 / Agricultural implement tyres: steering service
I-6 / Agricultural implement tyres: Smooth tread
LS-1 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: regular tread
LS-2 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: intermediate tread
LS-3 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: deep tread
LS-4 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: shallow tread
R-1 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: regular tread
R-2 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: cane and rice service (deep tread)
R-3 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: flotation service (shallow tread)
R-4 / Drive wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tyre designed for competition [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Tyres designed for competition Tyre noise and wet grip 2.7. "Tyres designed for competition" means tyres intended to be fitted to vehicles involved in motor sport competition and not intended for non-competitive on-road use. No.117 2008-08-29
Tyre designed for competition [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Tyres designed for competition Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyres designed for competition" means tyres intended to be fitted to vehicles involved in motor sport competition and not intended for non-competitive on-road use.		 No.117 2011-11-23
tyre inflation pressure (Cold) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Cold tyre inflation pressure Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Cold tyre inflation pressure" means the tyre pressure at ambient temperature, in the absence of any pressure build-up due to tyre usage.		 No.064 2010-11-26
tyre load capacity at various speed (Table of) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds" means the table in Annex 8 which shows, by reference to indices of load capacity and of capacity at nominal speed, load variations of a tyre if used at speeds other than that corresponding to the index of its nominal speed category.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Tyre normally fitted [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Tyres normally fitted Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tyres normally fitted" means the type or types of tyre provided by the manufacturer on the vehicle type in question; snow tyres shall not be regarded as tyres normally fitted;		 No.039 2004-03-31
Tyre normally fitted [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Tyres normally fitted speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Tyres normally fitted" means the type or types of tyre provided by the manufacturer on the vehicle type in question; snow tyres shall not be regarded as tyres normally fitted.		 No.039 2010-05-13
Tyre pressure monitoring system [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" means a system fitted on a vehicle, able to perform a function to evaluate the inflation pressure of the tyres or the variation of this inflation pressure over time and to transmit corresponding information to the user while the vehicle is running.		 No.064 2010-11-26
tyre pressure monitoring system [REG. No 661/2009] 　 tyre pressure monitoring system safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 7. "tyre pressure monitoring system" means a system fitted on a vehicle which can evaluate the pressure of the tyres or the variation of pressure over time and transmit corresponding information to the user while the vehicle is running; REG. No 661/2009
tyre pressure monitoring system (Type of) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Type of tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Type of tyre pressure monitoring system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the principle of operation;
(b) any components which are likely to have a significant influence on the performance of the system as specified under paragraph 5.3 to this Regulation.		 No.064 2010-11-26
tyre pressure monitoring system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
tyre size (Representative) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Representative tyre size Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Representative tyre size" means the tyre size which is submitted to the test described in Annex 3 to this Regulation with regard to rolling sound emissions, or Annex 5 for adhesion on wet surfaces or Annex 6 for rolling resistance to assess the conformity for the type approval of the type of tyre, or Annex 7 for snow performance to assess the category of use "snow".		 No.117 2011-11-23
Tyre size designation [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.17. "Tyre-size designation" is
2.17.1. a designation showing:
2.17.1.1. the nominal section width. This width must be expressed in mm, except in the case of the types of tyre for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex V to this Regulation;
2.17.1.2. the nominal aspect ratio except in the case of certain types of tyre, for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex V to this Regulation, or, depending on the tyre design type, the nominal outer diameter expressed in mm;
2.17.1.3. a conventional number denoting the nominal rim diameter and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100);
2.17.1.4. the letter "T" in front of the nominal section width in case of T-type temporary use spare tyres;
2.17.1.5. an indication of the tyre to rim fitment configuration when it differs from the standard configuration.		 No.030 2008-07-30
Tyre size designation [No.054 2008-07-11] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.17. "Tyre-size designation" means:
2.17.1. A designation showing:
2.17.1.1. The nominal section width (S1). This width must be expressed in mm, except in the case of types of tyre for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex V to this Regulation;
2.17.1.2. The nominal aspect ratio, except in the case of certain types of tyre for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex V to this Regulation or, depending on the tyre design type, the nominal outer diameter expressed in mm;
2.17.1.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either in codes (number below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurement may be used together in the designation;
2.17.1.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below:
[Table : Nominal rim diameter code ("d" symbol) vs Value of the "d" symbol expressed in mm]
2.17.1.4. An indication of the tyre to rim fitment configuration when it differs from the standard configuration and is not already expressed by the symbol "d" denoting the nominal rim diameter code.		 No.054 2008-07-11
Tyre size designation [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre size designation Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyre size designation" means a combination of figures that uniquely identify the geometric size of the tyre, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio and the nominal diameter. Precise definitions of these features may be found in Regulation No 30.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Tyre size designation [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Tyre-size designation" is a designation showing:		 No.075 2011-03-30
Tyre size designation [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tyre-size designation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Tyre-size designation" means a designation showing:
2.15.1. the nominal section width (S1). This value must be expressed in mm.
2.15.2. the nominal aspect ratio (Ra).
2.15.3. an indication of the structure, placed in front of the nominal rim diameter marking, as follows:
2.15.3.1. n diagonal (bias-ply) tyres, the symbol "-" or the letter "D2;
2.15.3.2. n radial-ply tyres, the letter "R";
2.15.3.3. n bias-belted tyres, the letter "B".
2.15.4. the conventional number "d" denoting the nominal rim diameter;
2.15.5. optionally, the letters "IMP" after the nominal rim diameter marking in case of Implement tyres;
2.15.6. optionally, the letters "FRONT" after the nominal rim diameter marking in case of Tractor steering wheel tyres;
2.15.7. However for tyres listed in annex 5 the "tyre size designation" is that shown in the first column of those tables.
2.15.8. The letters "IF" before the nominal section width in case of "Improved Flexion Tyre"
The letters "VF" before the nominal section width in case of 2Very High Flexion Tyre".		 No.106 2010-09-30
Tyre size designation [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tyre size designation 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
2.21.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below: [表]		 No.108 2006-07-04
Tyre size designation [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Tyre size designation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in case of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
2.21.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below: [表]
Nominal rim diameter code (d) / Value of the "d" symbol expressed in mm
8 / 203～ 30 / 762		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tyre size designation [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Tyre size designation (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio and the conventional number that denotes the nominal rim diameter (these terms are further defined in Regulation No. 30).		 No.124 2006-12-27
Tyre Standard (International) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 International Tyre Standard 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "International Tyre Standard" means any one of the following standard documents:
(a) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Standards Manual";
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(c) The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): "Year Book";
(d) The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): "Year Book";
(e) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): "Standards Manual";
(f) The Associaçiao Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) (5): "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(g) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): "Data Book".		 No.108 2006-07-04
Tyre Standard (International) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 International Tyre Standard Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "International Tyre Standard" means any one of the following standard documents:
(a) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Standards Manual";
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): "Engineering Design Information — obsolete data";
(c) The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): "Year Book";
(d) The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): "Year Book";
(e) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): "Standards Manual";
(f) The Assiciacao Brasileira de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(g) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): "Data Book".
The tyre standards can be obtained from the following addresses:
(1) ETRTO, 32 Av. Brugmann — Bte 2, B-1060 Brussels, Belgium
(2) TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 USA
(3) JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No 1-12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato‑ku, Tokyo 105, Japan
(4) TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Australia
(5) ABPA, Avenida Paulista 244-12o Andar, CEP, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazil
(6) STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Sweden		 No.109 2006-07-04
Tyre Standard (International) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 International Tyre and Rim Standards (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "International Tyre and Rim Standards" mean documents concerning wheel standardization issued by the following Organizations:
(a) The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 2/;
(b) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Standards Manual";
(c) The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organization (ETRTO) 3/: "Engineering Design Information - obsolete data";
(d) The Tyre and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) 4/: "Year Book";
(e) The Japan Automobile Tyre Manufacturers Association (JATMA) 5/: "Year Book";
(f) The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) 6/:"Standard Manual";
(g) The Associação Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) 7/ "Manual de Normal Technicas";
(h) The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) 8/:"Data Book"		 No.124 2006-12-27
Tyre structure [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Tyre structure Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Tyre structure" means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. This may be bias ply (diagonal or cross ply), bias-belted, radial ply or run flat tyre as further defined in Regulation No 30.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Tyre to rim fitment configuration [No.030 2008-07-30] 　 Tyre to rim fitment configuration Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.19. ‘Rim’ means the support for a tyre-and-tube assembly, or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre
beads are seated (1);
2.19.1. "Tyre to rim fitment configuration" means the type of rim to which the tyre is designed to be fitted. In the case of non-standard rims this will be identified by a symbol applied to the tyre, for example, "CT", "TR", "TD", "A" or "U".		 No.030 2008-07-30
Tyre to rim fitment configuration [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Tyre to rim fitment configuration Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Rim" means the support for a tyre-and-tube assembly, or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.
2.18.1. "Tyre to rim fitment configuration" means the type of rim to which the tyre is designed to be fitted. In the case of non-standard rims this will be identified by a symbol applied to the tyre.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
U (and D, Dc , S, V) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 characteristic values D, Dc , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [式 D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [式 Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [式 D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [式 V=]		 No.055 2010-08-28
U (characteristic values) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= 式]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= 式]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [式]		 No.055 2006-12-27
U (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 U : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
U (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27a] 　 U : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
unauthorised use (Device to prevent) [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes
In the case of a system which locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver's intention.		 No.116 2012-02-16
unauthorised use (Device to prevent) [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes.
In the case of a system that locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver’s intention.		 No.116 2010-06-30
underrun protection (front) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. a special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. bodywork, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2002-02-01
underrun protection (Front) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Front underrun protection (FUP) Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.6. "Front underrun protection (FUP)" means the presence at the front of the vehicle of either:
3.1.6.1. A special device (FUPD); or
3.1.6.2. Body work, chassis parts or other components, such that by virtue of their shape and characteristics, these elements can be regarded as fulfilling the function of the FUPD;		 No.093 2010-07-17
Understeer [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Understeer Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Understeer" means a condition in which the vehicle’s yaw rate is less than the yaw rate that would occur at the vehicle’s speed as a result of the Ackermann steer angle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Understeer [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Understeer Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Understeer" means a condition in which the vehicle’s yaw rate is less than the yaw rate that would occur at the vehicle’s speed as a result of the Ackerman steer angle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Unique point [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Unique point Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Unique point" means an additional service description, marked adjacent to the normal service description, but which must not be used for calculating a load capacity variation as defined in paragraph 2.35 and in Annex 8 to this Regulation.		 No.109 2006-07-04
unit [No.003 2011-12-06A1] 　 Symbols and units Retro-reflecting devices [ANNEX 1] RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES
Symbols and units
A = Area of the illuminating surface of the retro-reflecting device (cm 2 )
C = Centre of reference
NC = Axis of reference
Rr = Receiver, observer or measuring device
　　・・・・・
CIL = Coefficient of luminous intensity (millicandelas/lux) Angles are expressed in degrees and minutes
[図]		 No.003 2011-12-06
unit of measurement [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 2.1. Units of measurement
The units of measurement shall be:
Dimensions and linear distances: metres (m) or millimetres (mm)
Mass or load: kilograms (kg)
Force (and weight): Newtons (N)
Moment: Newton-metres (Nm)		 Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.1. Units of measurement
The units of measurement shall be:
Dimensions and linear distances: metres (m) or millimetres (mm)
Mass or load: kilograms (kg)
Force (and weight): Newtons (N)
Moment: Newton-metres (Nm)
Energy: Joules (J)
Gravitational constant: 9,81 (m/s2)		 No.066 2011-03-30
units of measurement [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 units of measurement Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.1. Units of measurement
The units of measurement shall be:
Dimensions and linear distances / metres (m) or millimetres (mm)
Mass or load / kilograms (kg)
Force (and weight) / Newtons (N)
Moment / Newton-metres (Nm)
Energy / Joules (J)
Gravitational constant / 9,81 (m/s2)		 No.066 2007-12-06
universal (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 universal (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Universal (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 ISOFIX Universal Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "ISOFIX Universal" is an ISOFIX comprising either a top-tether or a support-leg, to limit the pitch rotation of the Child Restraint System, attached to, or supported by, the corresponding vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
universal (semi-, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 semi-universal (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint System (Integral) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Unladen kerb mass [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Unladen kerb mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Unladen kerb mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if these are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.094 2012-09-20
Unladen kerb mass [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Unladen kerb mass (Mk) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Unladen kerb mass [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mk (Unladen kerb mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Unladen kerb mass" (Mk) means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but with the addition of 75 kg for the mass of the driver, the mass of fuel corresponding to 90 per cent of the capacity of the fuel tank specified by the manufacturer, and the masses of coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if any.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Unladen kerb mass [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Unladen kerb mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Unladen kerb mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if these are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.094 2010-05-28
unladen mass [No.034 2008-07-23] 　 unladen mass Fire risks 7.4. "unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricants, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer). No.034 2008-07-23
Unladen mass [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.62. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.049 2013-06-24
unladen mass [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 unladen mass RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 3.1.1. "unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); No.058 2008-08-30
Unladen mass [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Unladen mass LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.073 2012-05-08
Unladen mass [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.2. ‘Reference mass’ means the ‘unladen mass’ of the vehicle increased by a uniform figure of 100 kg
for test according to Annexes 4 and 8,
2.2.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;s		 No.083 2008-05-06
Unladen mass [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.2.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable; No.083 2012-02-15
Unladen mass [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.1. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank 90 per cent full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Unladen mass [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Unladen mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank filled to 90 per cent of its capacity and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Unladen mass [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Unladen mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without crew, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank full (if any), cooling liquid, service and traction batteries, oils, onboard charger, portable charger, tools and spare wheel, whatever is appropriate for the vehicle considered and if provided by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.101 2012-05-26
unladen mass [No.034 2011-04-287] 　 unladen mass Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.4. "unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricants, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer).		 No.034 2011-04-28
Unladen mass [No.049 2011-07-08] 　 Unladen mass Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.65. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without the uniform mass of the driver of 75 kg, passenger or load, but with the fuel tank 90 % full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.049 2011-07-08
Unladen mass [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen mass Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Unladen mass" means the weight of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen, but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if supplied by the vehicle manufacturer as standard equipment;		 No.073 2004-03-31
Unladen mass [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Unladen mass lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Unladen mass" means the weight of the vehicle in running order, unoccupied and unladen, but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and spare wheel, if supplied by the vehicle manufacturer as standard equipment;		 No.073 2010-05-13
Unladen mass [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Unladen mass Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without crew, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank full and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable.		 No.089 2007-06-19
Unladen mass [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Unladen mass Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without driver, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank filled to 90 per cent of its capacity and the usual set of tools and spare wheel on board, where applicable;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Unladen mass [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Unladen mass CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running order without crew, passengers or load, but with the fuel tank full (if any), cooling liquid, service and traction batteries, oils, onboard charger, portable charger, tools and spare wheel, whatever is appropriate for the vehicle considered and if provided by the manufacturer of the vehicle;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Unladen tractor [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Unladen tractor installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. Unladen tractor
"Unladen tractor" means the tractor in running order, as defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I, model information document, to Directive 2003/37/EC.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Unladen tractor [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Unladen tractor Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Unladen tractor" means the tractor in running order, i.e. excluding optional accessories but including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and driver.		 No.086 2010-09-30
unladen vehicle [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 unladen vehicle installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.　unladen vehicle
means the vehicle without a driver, passenger or load, but with a full complement of fuel and its normal on-board tool kit;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Unladen vehicle [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.4. "Unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without driver, crew, passengers and load, but with a full supply of fuel, spare wheel and the tools normally carried; No.048 2008-05-23
Unladen vehicle [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without a driver, or passenger, and unladen, but with its fuel tank full and its normal complement of tools;		 No.053 2013-06-18
unladen vehicle [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without a driver, or passenger, and unladen, but with its fuel tank full and its normal complement of tools;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Unladen vehicle [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen vehicle Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order, complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer), carrying a driver weighing 75 kg, but no driver's mate, optional accessories or load.		 No.039 2004-03-31
Unladen vehicle [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Unladen vehicle speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order, complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer), carrying a driver weighing 75 kg, but no driver's mate, optional accessories or load.		 No.039 2010-05-13
Unladen vehicle [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without driver, crew, passengers and load, but with a full supply of fuel, spare wheel and the tools normally carried;		 No.048 2011-12-06
Unladen vehicle [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle alone, as submitted for the tests, plus the rider alone and any necessary test equipment or instrumentation.		 No.078 2004-03-31
unladen vehicle [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 unladen vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.093 2002-02-01
Unladen vehicle [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Unladen vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.093 2010-07-17
Unladen vehicle mass [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Unladen vehicle mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Unladen vehicle mass" means the nominal mass of the vehicle as indicated by the manufacturer(s) including all factory fitted equipment for normal operation of that vehicle (e.g. fire extinguisher, tools, spare wheel), plus coolant, oils, 90 per cent of fuel and 100 per cent of other gas or liquids, as specified by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
unlocking retractor (Manually, type 2) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Manually unlocking retractor (type 2) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.2. Manually unlocking retractor (type 2)
A retractor requiring the manual operation of a device by the user to unlock the retractor in order to obtain the desired strap extraction and which locks automatically when the said operation ceases.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Unprotected road user [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Unprotected road users LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.3. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels;		 No.073 2012-05-08
unprotected road user [REG. No 661/2009] 　 unprotected road user safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + α 14. "unprotected road user" means pedestrians, cyclists and motorcyclists; REG. No 661/2009
Unprotected road users [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unprotected road users Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2004-03-31
Unprotected road users [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Unprotected road users lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2010-05-13
Unrestricted [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Unrestricted Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Unrestricted" means:
2.17.1. Access not dependent on an access code obtainable only from the manufacturer, or a similar device; or
2.17.2. Access allowing evaluation of the data produced without the need for any unique decoding information, unless that information itself is standardised.		 No.083 2012-02-15
unrestricted [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 unrestricted Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"unrestricted" means:
(a) access not dependent on an access code obtainable only from the manufacturer, or a similar device, or,
(b) access allowing evaluation of the data produced without the need for any unique decoding information, unless that information itself is standardized.		 No.049 2008-04-12
Unset [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Unset Alarm systems 2.6. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices; No.097 2008-12-30
Unset [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Unset alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Unset [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Unset Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.7. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Unset [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Unset Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.7. "Unset" means the state of a VAS in which an alarm condition cannot be transmitted to warning devices.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Unset state [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Unset state alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Unset state [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Unset state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Unset state [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Unset state Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.5. "Unset state" means the state in which the vehicle can be driven normally.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Updating recording [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Updating-recording Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.92. "Updating-recording" means the frequency at which the analyser provides new, current, values;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Upholstery [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Upholstery burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.5. "Upholstery" means the combination of interior padding and surface finish material which together constitute the cushioning of the seat frame.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Upholstery [No.118 2010-07-10II] 　 Upholstery Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.5. "Upholstery" means the combination of interior padding and surface finish material which togetherconstitute the cushioning of the seat frame.		 No.118 2010-07-10
use (Category of) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Category of use Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.		 No.109 2006-07-04
use (unauthorised, Device to prevent) [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes.
In the case of a system that locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver’s intention.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (In) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 IUPRM (In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 °C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.		 No.083 2015-07-03
used (maintained and, Properly) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2 of Appendix 3 to this Regulation;		 No.083 2012-02-15
used (maintained and, Properly) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Properly maintained and used Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Properly maintained and used" means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in paragraph 2 of Appendix 3 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
useful life [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 useful life Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "useful life" means, for vehicles and engines that are approved to either row B1, row B2 or row C of the table given in paragraph 5.2.1. of this Regulation, the relevant period of distance and/or time that is defined in paragraph 5.3. (durability of emission control systems) of this Regulation over which compliance with the relevant gaseous, particulate and smoke emission limits has to be assured as part of the approval;		 No.049 2008-04-12
useful life [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 useful life Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "useful life" means, for vehicles and engines that are approved to either row B1, row B2 or row C of the table given in paragraph 5.2.1. of this Regulation, the relevant period of distance and/or time that is defined in paragraph 5.3. (durability of emission control systems) of this Regulation over which compliance with the relevant gaseous, particulate and smoke emission limits has to be assured as part of the approval;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Useful life [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Useful life Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.63. "Useful life" means the relevant period of distance and/or time over which compliance with the relevant gaseous and particulate emission limits has to be assured;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Useful life [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Useful life Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.93. "Useful life" means the relevant period of distance and/or time over which compliance with the relevant gaseous and particulate emission limits has to be assured;		 No.096 2014-03-22
user (road, Un-protected) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Unprotected road users Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2004-03-31
user (road, Un-protected) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Unprotected road users lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.5. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels.		 No.073 2010-05-13
user (road, Unprotected) [No.073 2012-05-08] 　 Unprotected road users LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Definitions common to Parts I, II and III
2.1.3. "Unprotected road users" means pedestrians, cyclists or motor cyclists using the road in such a way that they are liable to fall under the sides of the vehicle and be caught under the wheels;		 No.073 2012-05-08
user (Wheelchair) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2006-12-27
user (Wheelchair) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2010-09-29
user (Wheelchair) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
V (and D, Dc , S, U) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 characteristic values D, Dc , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [式 D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [式 Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [式 D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [式 V=]		 No.055 2010-08-28
V (characteristic values) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= 式]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= 式]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [式]		 No.055 2006-12-27
V (speed, Limitation) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Limitation speed V Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. "Limitation speed V" means the maximum speed of the vehicle such that its design or equipment does not permit a response after a positive action on the accelerator control;		 No.089 2007-06-19
V (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 V : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
V adj (speed, limit, Adjustable) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Adjustable limit speed Vadj Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Adjustable limit speed Vadj" means the speed voluntarily set by the driver;		 No.089 2007-06-19
v max [No.041 2012-11-14] 　 v max (Maximum speed) noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.10. "Maximum speed" means the maximum vehicle speed as defined in ISO 7117:1995.
The symbol v max denotes the maximum speed.		 No.041 2012-11-14
V max [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Vmax Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Vmax" means either the speed attainable by accelerating at a maximum rate from a standing start for a distance of 1,6 km on a level surface, with the vehicle lightly loaded, or the speed measured in accordance with ISO 7117:1995.		 No.078 2015-01-30
V point [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 V points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "V points" means points whose position in the passenger compartment is determined as a function of vertical longitudinal planes passing through the centres of the outermost designated seating positions on the front seat and in relation to the ‘R’ point and the design angle of the seat-back, which points are used for verifying compliance with the field of vision requirements.		 No.125 2010-07-31
V stab (speed, Stabilised) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Stabilised speed Vstab Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Stabilised speed Vstab" means the mean vehicle speed when operating in the condition specified in paragraph 1.1.4.2.3 of Annex 5 to this Regulation;		 No.089 2007-06-19
vacuum pressure [No.013 2010-09-30A08] 　 pressure (vacuum) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.3. If the compression of the springs is obtained by means of a vacuum device, "pressure" shall mean negative pressure everywhere in this annex.		 No.013 2010-09-30
value (demand, Nominal) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal demand value Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually and when used in combination.
2.28.1. "Nominal value" is defined, for a power-driven vehicle, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.
2.28.2. "Nominal value" is defined, for a trailer, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate to the coupling head signal.
2.28.3. "Nominal demand value" is defined, for coupling force control, as the characteristic which relates the coupling head signal to the braking rate and which can be demonstrated at Type Approval, within the limits of the compatibility bands of Annex 10.		 No.013 2010-09-30
value (Nominal) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Nominal value Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually and when used in combination.
2.28.1. "Nominal value" is defined, for a power-driven vehicle, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.
2.28.2. "Nominal value" is defined, for a trailer, as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at Type Approval and which relates the braking rate to the coupling head signal.
2.28.3. "Nominal demand value" is defined, for coupling force control, as the characteristic which relates the coupling head signal to the braking rate and which can be demonstrated at Type Approval, within the limits of the compatibility bands of Annex 10.		 No.013 2010-09-30
value (Nominal) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Nominal value Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually.
2.19.1. "Nominal value" is defined as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at type approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
value (Nominal) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Nominal value Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal value" definitions for braking reference performance are required to put a value on the transfer function of the braking system, relating output to input for vehicles individually.
2.19.1. "Nominal value" is defined as the characteristic which can be demonstrated at type approval and which relates the braking rate of the vehicle on its own to the level of the braking input variable.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
values (Objective) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Objective values Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Objective values": values to be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the filament lamp is supplied with current at its test voltage.		 No.037 2010-11-13
Valve [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.6. "Valve" means a device by which the flow of a fluid may be controlled		 No.110 2011-05-07
Valve [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.17. "Valve" means a device by which the flow of a fluid may be controlled.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (Automatic) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Automatic valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.7. "Automatic valve" mans a valve which is not operated manually.		 No.110 2011-05-07
valve (Automatic) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Automatic valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.18. "Automatic valve" means a valve that is not operated manually.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (cylinder, Automatic) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.8. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder which controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.		 No.110 2011-05-07
valve (cylinder, Automatic) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.19. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder that controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (discharge) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.23. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (Excess flow) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Excess flow valve (excess flow limiting device) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.10. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device which automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2011-05-07
valve (flow, Excess) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Excess flow valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (flow, Excess) [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 Excess flow valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.21. "Excess flow valve" (excess flow limiting device) means a device that automatically shuts off, or limits, the gas or liquid flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (Manual) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Manual valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.11. "Manual valve" means a manual valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder.		 No.110 2011-05-07
valve (Manual) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Manual valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (Manual) [No.110a 2015-06-30] 　 Manual valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.22. "Manual valve" means a manual valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder or tank.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (Non return or check) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Non-return valve or check valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.20. "Non-return valve or check valve" means an automatic valve that allows gas/fluid to flow in only one direction.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (Non-return) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Non-return valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.9. "Non-return valve" means an automatic valve which allows gas to flow in only one direction.		 No.110 2011-05-07
valve (Pressure relief) [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.12. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device which prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2011-05-07
valve (Pressure relief) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.23. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device that prevents a pre-determined upstream pressure being exceeded.		 No.110 2015-06-30
valve (relief, Pressure) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicator’ means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;		 No.067 2008-03-14
valve (Service) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Service valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.24. "Service valve" means an isolation valve that is closed only when servicing the vehicle.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Van [No.101 2008-02-22 Supplement 7] 　 Van CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Van" means a lorry with the cab integrated into the body.		 No.101 2008-02-22 Supplement 7
Van [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Van CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Van" means a lorry with the cab integrated into the body;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Vaporiser [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Heat exchanger/Vaporiser using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.41. "Heat exchanger/Vaporiser" means a device used to change the state of LNG into CNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Vaporizer [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Vaporizer LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.6. "Vaporizer" means a device intended to vaporize LPG from a liquid to a gaseous state;		 No.067 2008-03-14
Variable intensity control [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Variable intensity control Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.3. "Variable intensity control" means the device which automatically controls rear light signalling devices producing variable luminous intensities to assure the unvarying perception of their signals.
The variable intensity control is part of the lamp, or part of the vehicle, or split between the said lamp and the vehicle.		 No.048 2008-05-23
variable position (lamp of ) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Lamps of variable position Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.7. "Lamps of variable position" means lamps installed on the tractor which can move in relation to the tractor, without being detached;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Variable position lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Variable position lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.6.1. Variable position lamps
"Variable position lamps" means lamps installed on the tractor which can move in relation to it and whose lenses cannot be concealed		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Variable speed engine [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Variable-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.94. "Variable-speed engine" means an engine that is not a constant-speed engine;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Variant [No.090 2012-07-13] 　 Variant Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.8. "Variant": individual brake disc/drum within a given test group.		 No.090 2012-07-13
Variation of load capacity with speed [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Variation of load capacity with speed Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Table: Variation of load capacity with speed" means the tables in annex 7 showing as a function of the category of use, the type of application, the load capacity index and the nominal speed category symbol, the maximum load rating variations which a tyre can withstand when used at speeds different from that corresponding to its speed category symbol;
2.30.1. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to the "supplementary service description".
2.30.2. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to ‘Improved Flexion’ or "Very High Flexion" tyres.		 No.106 2010-09-30
VAS [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Vehicle alarm system (VAS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2010-06-30
VAS [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 VAS (Vehicle alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2012-02-16
VAS (Vehicle alarm system) [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Vehicle alarm system (VAS) Alarm systems 2.1. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorized use of the vehicle; No.097 2008-12-30
VAS (Vehicle alarm system) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 VAS (Vehicle alarm system) alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle;		 No.097 2012-05-08
vehicle [COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2008/74/EC] 　 vehicle emissions from light
passenger and commercial vehicles		 (a) "vehicle" means any motor vehicle as defined in Article 2 of Directive 70/156/EEC with a reference mass exceeding 2 610 kg; COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2008/74/EC
vehicle [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 vehicle suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [Article 1]
For the purposes of this Directive, "vehicle" means any vehicle as defined in Article 2(d) of Directive 2003/37/EC.		 Directive 2009/064/EC
Vehicle [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle" means a two-wheeled motor cycle as defined in article 1 (n) or a two-wheeled moped as defined in article 1 (m) of the United Nations Convention on Road Traffic, Vienna 1968;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Vehicle [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle" means a two-wheeled motorcycle or a two-wheeled moped as defined in paragraph 2.1.1 or 2.1.3 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3).		 No.060 2014-10-15
Vehicle [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle" means a bus or coach designed and equipped for transportation of passengers. The vehicle is an individual representative of a vehicle type.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Vehicle [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle" means a bus or coach designed and equipped for transportation of passengers. The vehicle is an individual representative of a vehicle type.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Vehicle [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1. above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement.
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats.
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers.
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A": vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B": vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
2.1.4. "Low floor bus" is a vehicle of class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.
2.1.6. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.
2.1.7. "Separate technical unit" means a device intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved separately but only in relation to one or more specified types of vehicle;		 No.107 2006-12-27
Vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement;
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats;
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers;
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A":vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B":vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Vehicle [No.122 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M, N or O ( 1 ) in which a heating system is fitted		 No.122 2010-06-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to door latches and door retention components.		 No.011 2010-05-13
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact;		 No.012 2013-03-27
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;		 No.013 2010-09-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Approval of a vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;		 No.013 2016-02-18
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;		 No.014 2007-12-06
vehicle (approval of a) [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 approval of a vehicle safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;		 No.014 2011-04-28
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Approval of a vehicle safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;		 No.014 2015-08-19
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the seats and their anchorages, the design of the rear parts of the seat-backs and the characteristics of their head restraints;		 No.017 2006-12-27
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the seats and their anchorages, the design of the rear parts of the seat-backs and the characteristics of their head restraints;		 No.017 2010-08-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.018 2010-05-13
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.024 2006-11-2412] 　 Approval of a vehicle Diesel smoke and power PART II . THE INSTALLATION ON ROAD VEHICLES OF TYPE-APPROVED C.I. ENGINES
12. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
12.1 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of type approved engines for the limitation of visible pollutants from the engine,		 No.024 2006-11-24
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.024 2006-11-2421] 　 Approval of a vehicle Diesel smoke and power PART III . EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM A MOTOR VEHICLE WHOSE ENGINE HAS NOT BEEN SEPARATELY APPROVED
21. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of Part III of this Regulation:
21.1 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to limitation of the emission of visible pollutants from the engine;		 No.024 2006-11-24
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Approval of a vehicle External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections.		 No.026 2005-12-16
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Approval of a vehicle external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections.		 No.026 2010-08-14
vehicle (approval of a) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 approval of a vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type pursuant to the requirements of this Regulation, with regard to the protection of the occupants of the cab of a vehicle in the event of head-on impact or of overturning.		 No.029 2010-11-20
vehicle (approval of a) [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the liquid fuel tanks;		 No.034 2011-04-28
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.034 2011-04-2812] 　 Approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART IV — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE INSTALLATION OF APPROVED FUEL TANK(S)
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of liquid fuel tank(s) approved pursuant to Part III of this Regulation;		 No.034 2011-04-28
vehicle (approval of a) [No.034 2011-04-287] 　 approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the prevention of fire risks;		 No.034 2011-04-28
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation.		 No.039 2004-03-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation.		 No.039 2010-05-13
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;		 No.048 2011-12-06
vehicle (approval of a) [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;		 No.049 2008-04-12
vehicle (approval of a) [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;		 No.049 2010-08-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;		 No.049 2013-06-24
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to noise;		 No.051 2007-05-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;		 No.053 2013-06-18
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to driver-operated controls, where such controls are fitted and to their identification;		 No.060 2004-03-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Approval of a vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to driver operated controls, where such controls are fitted and to their identification.		 No.060 2014-10-15
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.062 2004-03-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;		 No.062 2013-03-27
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Approval of a vehicle Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its temporary use spare wheel and tyre unit;		 No.064 2010-11-26
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.067 2008-03-14p2] 　 Approval of a vehicle LPG equipment [PART II] 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its specific equipment for the use of liquefied petroleum gases in its propulsion system;		 No.067 2008-03-14
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;		 No.073 2004-03-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Approval of a vehicle lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;		 No.073 2010-05-13
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.073 2012-05-081] 　 Approval of a vehicle LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions specific to Part I
2.2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete, incomplete or completed vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;		 No.073 2012-05-08
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.073 2012-05-083] 　 Approval of a vehicle LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definitions specific to Part III
2.4.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of LPD of a type approved according to Part II of this Regulation, including, if necessary, the completion of a vehicle partially approved according to Part I;		 No.073 2012-05-08
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;		 No.074 2013-06-18
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;		 No.078 2004-03-31
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.		 No.078 2015-01-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means an approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the parts of the vehicle structure to which seats are to be secured, and with regard to the installation of seats;		 No.080 2010-06-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Approval of a vehicle strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means an approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the parts of the vehicle structure to which seats are to be secured, and with regard to the installation of seats;		 No.080 2013-08-24
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions ( 1 ):
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG/biomethane or biofuels (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C) or which can be fuelled with either diesel fuel and biosuel or biofuel;
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG/biomethane (Approval D);		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions:
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG/biomethane or biofuels (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on- board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C) or which can be fuelled with either diesel fuel and biofuel or biofuel;
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG/ biomethane (Approval D).		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.089 2007-06-1922] 　 Approval of a vehicle Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
2.2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to speed limitation.		 No.089 2007-06-19
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.089 2007-06-1923] 　 Approval of a vehicle Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
2.3.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of an SLD of a type approved in accordance with Part III of this Regulation.		 No.089 2007-06-19
vehicle (approval of a) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 approval of a vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.7. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type:
- for Part II of this Regulation — with regard to the installation of an FUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation; or
- for Part III of this Regulation — with regard to its FUP;		 No.093 2002-02-01
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Approval of a vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.7. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type:
for Part II of this Regulation — with regard to the installation of an FUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation, or
for Part III of this Regulation - with regard to its FUP;		 No.093 2010-07-17
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;		 No.095 2007-11-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Approval of a vehicle Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;		 No.095 2015-07-10
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 17, 18 and 19 below.		 No.097 2012-05-08
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Approval of a vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the measurement of energy consumption (fuel or electric energy);		 No.101 2007-06-19
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Approval of a vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the measurement of energy consumption (fuel or electric energy);		 No.101 2012-05-26
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2. with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2006-12-27
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;		 No.107 2010-09-29
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.110 2008-03-14P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) PART II
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG system as an original equipment for the use in its propulsion system;		 No.110 2008-03-14
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.110 2011-05-07p2] 　 Approval of a vehicle using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG system as an original equipment for the use in its propulsion system;		 No.110 2011-05-07
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.8. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG and/or LNG system as original equipment for the use in its propulsion system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
vehicle (approval of a) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 approval of a vehicle Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means approval of a vehicle type with regard to rollover stability;		 No.111 2002-02-01
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Approval of a vehicle Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below.		 No.116 2010-06-30
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.116 2012-02-16P3] 　 Approval of a vehicle Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below.		 No.116 2012-02-16
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Approval of a vehicle Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the mode of installation,graphical design, legibility, colour, and brightness of controls, tell-tales, and indicators.		 No.121 2010-07-10
vehicle (Approval of a) [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Approval of a vehicle Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the mode of installation, graphical design, legibility and colour, and brightness of controls, tell-tales and indicators.		 No.121 2016-01-08
vehicle (Approval of the motor) [No.028 2010-07-17] 　 Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices II. AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
11. DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this Regulation,
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.		 No.028 2010-07-17
vehicle (Armoured) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Armoured vehicle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Armoured vehicle" means a vehicle intended for the protection of conveyed passengers and/or goods and complying with armour plating anti-bullet requirements.		 No.125 2010-07-31
vehicle (Articulated) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Articulated vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate to one another, the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.066 2007-12-06
vehicle (Articulated) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Articulated vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate to one another, the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.066 2011-03-30
vehicle (Articulated) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;		 No.107 2006-12-27
vehicle (Articulated) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2010-09-29
vehicle (Articulated) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2015-06-18
vehicle (articulated, decker, Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2015-06-18
vehicle (articulated, Double-decker) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.		 No.107 2006-12-27
vehicle (Base) [No.105 2005-12-16] 　 Base vehicle Carriage of dangerous goods — construction of vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Base vehicle" (hereinafter referred to as "vehicle") means a chassis-cab vehicle, a tractor for semitrailer, a trailer-chassis or a trailer with a self-supporting body intended for the transport of dangerous goods;		 No.105 2005-12-16
vehicle (Base) [No.105 2010-08-31] 　 Base vehicle carriage of dangerous goods - constructional features 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Base vehicle" (hereinafter referred to as "vehicle") means a chassis-cab vehicle, a tractor for semi- trailer, a trailer-chassis or a trailer with a self-supporting body intended for the transport of dangerous goods;		 No.105 2010-08-31
vehicle (Character of the) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Character of the vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Character of the vehicle" means a descriptive term for a vehicle — tractor for semi-trailer, truck, bus, semi-trailer, full trailer, centre-axle trailer.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Vehicle (Class A, B) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle (Class A, B) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A": vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B": vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Vehicle (Class I～III) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle (Class I～III) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement.
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats.
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers.
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Vehicle (Class) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Class I, II, III, A, B Vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement;
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats;
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers;
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A":vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B":vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.		 No.107 2015-06-18
VEHIcle (CLASSIFICATION OF) [No.073 2004-03-31A3] 　 CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
1. Category N: Power-driven vehicles having at least four wheels or having three wheels when the maximum mass exceeds
1/metric/ton, and used for the carriage of goods
1.1. Category N2: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 but not exceeding 12 metric tons.
1.2. Category N3: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 12 metric tons.
2. Category O: Trailers (including semi-trailers)
2.1. Category O3: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5, but not exceeding 10 metric tons.
2.2. Category O4: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 10 metric btons.		 No.073 2004-03-31
vehicle (complete, test on a, Rollover) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.		 No.066 2007-12-06
vehicle (deck, Double) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Double deck vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.066 2011-03-30
vehicle (deck, Double) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2010-09-29
vehicle (deck, Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double-deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.6. "Double-deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2015-06-18
vehicle (Double deck) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double deck vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Double deck vehicle" means a vehicle where the provided spaces for passengers are arranged, at least in one part, in two superimposed levels and spaces for standing passengers are not provided in the upper deck.		 No.107 2006-12-27
vehicle (Dual fuel) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 Dual-fuel vehicle Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel engine and that supplies the fuels used by the engine from separate on-board storage systems;		 No.085 2014-11-07
VEHIcle (ELECTRIC, HYBRID) [No.083 2012-02-15A14] 　 HEV (HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. This Annex defines the specific provisions regarding type-approval of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) as defined in paragraph 2.21.2 of this Regulation.
1.2. As a general principle, for the tests of Type I, II, III, IV, V, VI and OBD, hybrid electric vehicles shall be tested according to Annexes 4a, 5, 6, 7, 9, 8 and 11 respectively, unless modified by this Annex.
1.3. For the Type I test only, OVC vehicles (as categorised in paragraph 2) shall be tested according to condition A and to condition B. The test results under both conditions A and B and the weighted values shall be reported in the communication form.
1.4. The emissions test results shall comply with the limits under all specified test conditions of this Regulation.2. CATEGORIES OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES
[表] Vehicle charging / Off-Vehicle Charging (OVC) / Not Off-Vehicle Charging (NOVC)		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (electric, Hybrid) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
vehicle (electric, Pure) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Pure electric vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Pure electric vehicle" means a vehicle powered by an electric power train only.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (electric, Pure) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Pure electric vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pure electric vehicle" means vehicle powered by an electric power train only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
vehicle (electric, Pure) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Pure electric vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Pure electric vehicle" means vehicle powered by an electric power train only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
vehicle (engine, Cab-over) [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Cab-over engine vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab-over engine vehicle" means a vehicle where more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub is in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.		 No.029 2010-11-20
vehicle (engine, combustion, Internal) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2012-05-26
vehicle (engine, Internal combustion) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;		 No.101 2007-06-19
vehicle (Family of) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Family of vehicles Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Family of vehicles" means a group of vehicle types identified by a parent vehicle for the purpose of Annex 12;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (Family of) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Family of vehicles Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Family of vehicles" means a group of vehicle types identified by a parent vehicle for the purpose of Annex 12 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (floor, Low) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Low floor vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Low floor vehicle" is a vehicle of Class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2010-09-29
vehicle (floor, Low) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Low floor vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.4. "Low floor vehicle" is a vehicle of Class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.		 No.107 2015-06-18
vehicle (fuel biodiesel, Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel cell, Hydrogen) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Hydrogen fuel cell vehicle" means a vehicle powered by a fuel cell that converts chemical energy from hydrogen into electric energy, for propulsion of the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel ethanol, Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85);		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel ethanol, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel ethanol vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.1. "Flex fuel ethanol vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 per cent ethanol blend (E85).		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel gas, Bi) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel gas, Bi) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol (petrol mode) and also on either LPG, NG/ biomethane, or hydrogen (gas mode).		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel gas, Mono) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel gas, Mono) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22.1. "Mono-fuel gas vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or NG/ biomethane or hydrogen, but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel, Alternative) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non- mineral oil derived;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel, Alternative) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non-mineral oil derived.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel, Bi) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel, Bi) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount and duration.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel, bio diesel, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel, Dual) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Dual-fuel vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Dual-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is powered by a dual-fuel engine and that supplies the fuels used by the engine from separate on-board storage systems;"		 No.049 2013-06-24
vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Flex fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Flex fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Flex fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (fuel, Mono) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel;		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (fuel, Mono) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Mono-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Mono-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (Gross) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
vehicle (HV, HEV) [No.085 2014-11-07] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)":
2.6.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.6.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- A consumable fuel;
- An electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);
2.6.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- An internal combustion engine; and
- One (or several) electric drive train(s);		 No.085 2014-11-07
vehicle (Hybrid electric) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
vehicle (hybrid electric) [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle), HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of hybrid vehicles (HV):
"Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion;
2.21.2. Definition of hybrid electric vehicles (HEV):
"Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
(a) a consumable fuel;
(b) an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator, etc.);		 No.083 2012-02-15
Vehicle (Hybrid Electric) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.2. Definition of Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV): "Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle, including vehicles which draw energy from a consumable fuel only for the purpose of recharging the electrical energy/power storage device that for the purpose of mechanical propulsion draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power: (a) A consumable fuel; (b) A battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (Hybrid electric) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
vehicle (Hybrid) [No.024 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid vehicles (HV) Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.8 Hybrid vehicles (HV)
2.8.1 "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.8.2 "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
— a consumable fuel
— an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)		 No.024 2006-11-24
Vehicle (Hybrid) [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 HV (Hybrid Vehicle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Hybrid Vehicles (HV)
2.21.1. General definition of Hybrid Vehicles (HV): "Hybrid Vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.		 No.083 2015-07-03
vehicle (Hybrid) [No.085 2006-11-24] 　 Hybrid vehicles (HV) Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Hybrid vehicles (HV)"
2.5.1. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle with at least two different energy converters and two different energy storage systems (on vehicle) for the purpose of vehicle propulsion.
2.5.2. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:
- a consumable fuel,
- an electrical energy/power storage device (e.g. battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator).
2.5.3. For a hybrid electric vehicle the "power train" comprises a combination of two different drive train types:
- an internal combustion engine, and
- one (or several) electric drive train(s).		 No.085 2006-11-24
vehicle (Hybrid) [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Hybrid vehicle (HV) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;
2.14.1. "Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid electric power train;		 No.101 2007-06-19
vehicle (Hybrid) [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 HV (Hybrid vehicle) CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Hybrid vehicle (HV)" means a vehicle powered by a hybrid power train;		 No.101 2012-05-26
vehicle (Laden) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its ‘maximum mass’;		 No.013 2010-09-30
vehicle (Laden) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Laden vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its "maximum mass";		 No.013 2016-02-18
vehicle (Laden) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its ‘maximum mass’.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
vehicle (Laden) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its ‘maximum mass’.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
vehicle (Laden) [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Laden vehicle External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Laden vehicle" means the vehicle laden to the maximum permitted technical mass. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or a device for automatic levelling according to load shall be tested with the vehicle in the most adverse normal running condition specified by the manufacturer.		 No.026 2005-12-16
vehicle (Laden) [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Laden vehicle external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Laden vehicle" means the vehicle laden to the maximum permitted technical mass. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or a device for automatic levelling according to load shall be tested with the vehicle in the most adverse normal running condition specified by the manufacturer.		 No.026 2010-08-14
vehicle (Laden) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Laden vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Laden vehicle" means a vehicle loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this mass between the axles in accordance with the method described in Annex 5;		 No.048 2011-12-06
vehicle (Laden) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Laden vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Laden vehicle" means, except where otherwise stated, a vehicle so laden as to attain its "maximum mass";		 No.078 2004-03-31
vehicle (laden) [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 laden vehicle Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "laden vehicle", except where otherwise stated, means a vehicle so laden as to attain its "maximum mass";		 No.111 2002-02-01
vehicle (laden, Un-) [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle alone, as submitted for the tests, plus the rider alone and any necessary test equipment or instrumentation.		 No.078 2004-03-31
vehicle (laden, Un-) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Unladen vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.093 2010-07-17
vehicle (LPG components for use in) [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 LPG components for use in vehicles LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
LPG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the maximum operating pressure and function, according to Figure 1.
Class 1 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing liquid LPG at vapour pressure or increased vapour pressure up to 3 000 kPa.
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 450 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 2A Low pressure parts for a limited pressure range including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 120 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 3 Shut-off valves and pressure relief valves, when operating in the liquid phase.
LPG components designed for a maximum operating pressure below 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure are not subjected to this Regulation.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in his own class with regard to maximum operating pressure and function.
[フローチャート] Figure 1 Classification with regard to maximum operating pressure and function		 No.067 2008-03-14
vehicle (motor, Approval of the) [No.028 2011-12-0611] 　 Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices 11. DEFINITIONS
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;		 No.028 2011-12-06
vehicle (Normal condition of use of a) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Normal condition of use of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Normal condition of use of a vehicle" means:
2.24.1. For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is ready to move with its propulsion engine running and its movable components in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;
2.24.2. And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the conditions as prescribed in paragraph 2.24.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.		 No.048 2011-12-06
vehicle (Original) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 Original vehicle LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
vehicle (parent) [No.083 2012-02-15A12] 　 parent vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 12] GRANTING OF AN ECE TYPE APPROVAL FOR A VEHICLE FUELLED BY LPG OR NG/BIOMETHANE 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. A "family" means a group of vehicle types fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane identified by a parent vehicle.
A "parent vehicle" means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle on which the self-adaptability of a fuelling system is going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer. It is possible to have more than one parent vehicle in a family.		 No.083 2012-02-15
vehicle (parent) [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 the parent vehicle LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. For the purposes of this Regulation, "the parent vehicle", with regard both to LPG system and to CNG system, means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle, on which the requirements of this Regulation are going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer.
2.5.1. According to this Regulation, "a member of the family" is a vehicle sharing the following essential characteristics with its parent vehicle:
The family definition is based on the original vehicle characteristics.
2.5.1.1.
(a) It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer.
(b) It is classified in the same category M 1 or M 2 or M 3 or N 1 or N 2 or N 3 . Vehicles of category M 1 and N 1 class I may belong to the same family.
(c) It is subject to the same emission limits or those specified in earlier series of amendments of the applicable Regulation.
(d) If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine: it has an approved power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle. If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder: it has an approved power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle.
(e) Fuel feed and combustion process (injection: direct or indirect, single-point or multi-point).
(f) It has the same pollution control system:
(i) Same type of catalyst if fitted (three-way, oxidation, DeNO x )
(ii) Air injection (with or without)
(iii) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) (with or without)
If the tested vehicle was not equipped with air-injection or EGR, engines with these devices are allowed.
2.5.1.2. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(a), the vehicle family can also cover vehicles produced by other vehicle manufacturers if it can be demonstrated to the Type-Approval Authority that the same engine type and emission strategy is used.
2.5.1.3. With regard to requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(d):
(a) In the case of a central metering for the whole vehicle where a demonstration shows that two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2;
(b) In the case of an individual metering per cylinder where a demonstration shows two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their approved power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1＜P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with an approved power output between 0,7*P1 and 1,15*P2.
2.5.1.4. With regard to the requirement of paragraph 2.5.1.1(f) in case of a "master-slave" system, as defined in paragraph 2.1.6, the family relation will be considered valid regardless of the presence of the air injection or the EGR.		 No.115 2014-11-07
vehicle (Park condition of a) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Park condition of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Park condition of a vehicle" means:
2.25.1. For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is at standstill and its propulsion engine is not running and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;
2.25.2. And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the condition as described in paragraph 2.25.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;		 No.048 2011-12-06
vehicle (Rollover test on a complete) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.		 No.066 2011-03-30
vehicle (specific, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 specific vehicle (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.		 No.044 2007-11-23
vehicle (Subject) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Subject vehicle Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Subject vehicle" means the vehicle being tested.		 No.131 2014-07-19
vehicle (Type of) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Type of vehicle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Type of vehicle", as regards the installation of safety glazing, means vehicles belonging to the same category which do not differ in at least the following essential respects:
The manufacturer;
The manufacturer’s type designation;
Essential aspects of construction and design.		 No.043 2010-08-31
vehicle (Type of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Type of vehicle safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Type of vehicle", as regards the installation of safety glazing, means vehicles belonging to the same category which do not differ in at least the following essential respects:
(a) The manufacturer;
(b) The manufacturer's type designation;
(c) Essential aspects of construction and design.		 No.043 2014-02-12
vehicle (Unladen) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Unladen vehicle Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order, complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer), carrying a driver weighing 75 kg, but no driver's mate, optional accessories or load.		 No.039 2004-03-31
vehicle (Unladen) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Unladen vehicle speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order, complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer), carrying a driver weighing 75 kg, but no driver's mate, optional accessories or load.		 No.039 2010-05-13
vehicle (Unladen) [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without driver, crew, passengers and load, but with a full supply of fuel, spare wheel and the tools normally carried;		 No.048 2011-12-06
vehicle (Unladen) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without a driver, or passenger, and unladen, but with its fuel tank full and its normal complement of tools;		 No.053 2013-06-18
vehicle (unladen) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 unladen vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "unladen vehicle" means a vehicle without a driver, or passenger, and unladen, but with its fuel tank full and its normal complement of tools;		 No.074 2013-06-18
vehicle (unladen) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 unladen vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.3. "unladen vehicle" means the vehicle in running order unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant, tools and a spare wheel (if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer);		 No.093 2002-02-01
Vehicle alarm system [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 VAS (Vehicle alarm system) alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Vehicle alarm system [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Vehicle alarm system (VAS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Vehicle alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 VAS (Vehicle alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.		 No.116 2012-02-16
vehicle alarm system (Approval of a) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below;		 No.097 2012-05-08
vehicle alarm system (Approval of a) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.		 No.116 2010-06-30
vehicle alarm system (Approval of a) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.		 No.116 2012-02-16
vehicle alarm system (Type of) [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment;		 No.097 2012-05-08
vehicle alarm system (Type of) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment.		 No.116 2010-06-30
vehicle alarm system (Type of) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of sensor,
(c) the kind of warning device,
(d) the kind of control equipment.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Vehicle alarm system (VAS) [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Vehicle alarm system (VAS) Alarm systems 2.1. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorized use of the vehicle; No.097 2008-12-30
Vehicle approval [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle approval external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle approval" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections;		 No.061 2010-06-30
Vehicle approved [No.122 2010-06-30A9] 　 Vehicles approved Heating systems [ANNEX 9] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
2. Definitions
Vehicles approved as being in compliance with the requirements applicable to EX/III vehicles under this Annex shall be deemed to comply with the requirements applicable to MEMU vehicles.		 No.122 2010-06-30
vehicle as regard indirect vision (Type of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.3."Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optional devi ces for indirect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vehicle as regards indirect vision (Type of) [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.3. "Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respectof the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optionaldevices for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
vehicle as regards rear view mirror (Type of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.2. "Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors" means vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
13.2.1. The geometrical features of the vehicle, liable to influence the installation of rear-view mirrors,
13.2.2. The positions and types of rear-view mirror specified.		 No.081 2012-07-13
vehicle bench seat [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 vehicle bench seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Vehicle designed to fulfil specific social need [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M 1 which are either:
(a) special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg ( 1 );
(b) vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion, as from 1 September 2012, of vehicles of category M 1 G 3 ;
(c) vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Vehicle designed to fulfil specific social need [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicles designed to fulfil specific social needs" means diesel vehicles of category M1 which are either:
(a) Special purpose vehicles with reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg (3);
(b) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 2 000 kg and designed to carry seven or more occupants including the driver with the exclusion of vehicles of category M1G (3);
(c) Vehicles with a reference mass exceeding 1 760 kg which are built specifically for commercial purposes to accommodate wheelchair use inside the vehicle.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Vehicle family [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Vehicle family Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle family" means a manufacturer's grouping of vehicles which, through their design, are expected to have similar exhaust emission and OBD system characteristics. Each vehicle of this family shall have complied with the requirements of this Regulation as defined in Appendix 2 to this Annex.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Vehicle floor contact surface [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Vehicle floor contact surface safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle floor contact surface" means the area which results from the intersection of the upper surface of the vehicle floor (incl. trim, carpet, foam, etc.) with the support leg foot assessment volume and is designed to withstand the support leg forces of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129;		 No.014 2015-08-19
vehicle front seats [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 vehicle front seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
vehicle in respect of its speedometer (Type of) [No.039 2004-03-31] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer's measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2004-03-31
vehicle in respect of its speedometer (Type of) [No.039 2010-05-13] 　 Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Type of vehicle in respect of its speedometer" means vehicles which do not among themselves display any essential differences, where those differences can apply, in particular, to the following:
2.2.1. the size designation of the tyres chosen from the range of tyres normally fitted;
2.2.2. the overall transmission ratio, including any reduction drives, to the speedometer;
2.2.3. the type of speedometer as characterised by:
2.2.3.1. the tolerances of the speedometer’s measuring mechanism;
2.2.3.2. the technical constant of the speedometer;
2.2.3.3. the range of speeds displayed.		 No.039 2010-05-13
vehicle in running order (Mass of the) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the vehicle unoccupied and unladen but complete with fuel, coolant, lubricant tools and spare wheel, if provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer, and RESS.		 No.012 2013-03-27
vehicle in running order (Mass of the) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2006-12-27
vehicle in running order (Mass of the) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
vehicle in running order (Mass of the) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Mass of the vehicle in running order Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Mass of the vehicle in running order" means the mass of the unladen vehicle with bodywork, and with coupling device in the case of a towing vehicle, in running order, or the mass of the chassis with cab if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including coolant, oils, 90 per cent fuel, 100 per cent other liquids except used waters, tools, spare wheel and driver (75 kg), and, for buses and coaches, the mass of the crew member (75 kg) if there is a crew seat in the vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
vehicle is considered bi fuel [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 A vehicle is considered bi-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.		 No.115 2014-11-07
vehicle is considered mono fuel [No.115 2014-11-07] 　 A vehicle is considered mono-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.		 No.115 2014-11-07
Vehicle is in normal operation [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle is in normal operation Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Vehicle is in normal operation" means that vehicle is in forward motion at the speed greater than 10 km/h.		 No.016 2011-09-09
Vehicle is in normal operation [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle is in normal operation Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle is in normal operation" means that vehicle is in forward motion at the speed greater than 10 km/h.		 No.016 2015-11-20
vehicle ISOFIX (Specific) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Specific vehicle ISOFIX Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" is a category of Child Restraint System connecting to specific vehicle types. All vehicle anchorages are to be approved according to Regulation No. 14. It is also an indication for Child Restraint Systems including dashboard as a vehicle contact zone.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels" being wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer;		 No.124 2006-12-27
vehicle mass (effective, Total) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Total effective vehicle mass (Mt) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (Mk) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (Mm), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2007-12-06
vehicle mass (effective, Total) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Mt (Total effective vehicle mass) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Total effective vehicle mass" (Mt ) means the unladen kerb mass of the vehicle (M k ) combined with the portion (k = 0,5), of the total occupant mass (M m ), considered to be rigidly attached to the vehicle.		 No.066 2011-03-30
vehicle mass (Gross) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Gross vehicle mass" or "maximum mass" means the technically permissible maximum laden mass as declared by the manufacturer.		 No.053 2013-06-18
vehicle mass (Unladen) [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Unladen vehicle mass Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Unladen vehicle mass" means the nominal mass of the vehicle as indicated by the manufacturer(s) including all factory fitted equipment for normal operation of that vehicle (e.g. fire extinguisher, tools, spare wheel), plus coolant, oils, 90 per cent of fuel and 100 per cent of other gas or liquids, as specified by the manufacturer.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.014 2007-12-06A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.014 2007-12-06
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.016 2007-11-30A15] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.017 2006-12-27
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.025 2010-08-14A3] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.025 2010-08-14
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.029 2010-11-20A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE ‘H’ POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.046 2010-07-10A8] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks inthe three-dimensional reference system.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Vehicle measuring attitude [No.080 2010-06-30A4] 　 Vehicle measuring attitude Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the ‘H’ point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.		 No.080 2010-06-30
vehicle OBD information [REG. No 692/2008] 　 vehicle OBD information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 26. "vehicle OBD information" means information relating to an on-board diagnostic system for any electronic system on the vehiclel REG. No 692/2008
Vehicle of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.4. "Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3" mean those defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), Annex 7 (documentTRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).		 No.046 2010-07-10
Vehicle of category L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.4."Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3" means those defined in the Consolida ted Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.2, para. 2).		 No.046 2014-08-08
vehicle of category M1 [REG. No 078/2009] 　 vehicles of category M1 protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 7. "vehicles of category M1" derived from N1" means those vehicles of M1 category which, forward of the A-pillars, have the same general structure and shape as a pre-existing N1 category vehicle. REG. No 078/2009
vehicle of category N1 [REG. No 078/2009] 　 vehicles of category N1 protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,		 6. "vehicles of category N1" derived from M1" means those vehicles of N1 category which, forward of the A-pillars, have the same general structure and shape as a pre-existing M1 category vehicle; REG. No 078/2009
vehicle or a separate technical unit (Approval of a) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 above with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.107 2015-06-18
vehicle rear seats [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 vehicle rear seats Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
vehicle repair and maintenance information [REG. No 595/2009] 　 vehicle repair and maintenance information emissions 11. "vehicle repair and maintenance information" means all information required for diagnosis, servicing, inspection, periodic monitoring, repair, re-programming or reinitialising or the remote diagnostic support of the vehicle and which the manufacturers provide for their authorised dealers and repairers, including all subsequent amendments and supplements to such information. This information includes all information required for fitting parts or equipment onto vehicles; REG. No 595/2009
Vehicle seat [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
2.20.5. "Isofix position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal Isofix forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal Isofix rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal Isofix lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle Isofix child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Vehicle seat [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
2.20.1. "group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons;
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
2.20.3. "vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them;
2.20.4. "vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats;
2.20.5. "ISOFIX position" means a system which allows to install:
(a) either an universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(b) or a semi-universal ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(c) or a semi-universal ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(d) or a semi-universal ISOFIX lateral facing position child restraint system as defined in this Regulation;
(e) or a specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system as defined in this Regulation.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Vehicle seat [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle seat Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
"Group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons.
"Vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person.
"Vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them.
"Vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Vehicle seat anchorage [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Vehicle seat anchorage [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Vehicle seat anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Vehicle seat fixture [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in figures 1 to 6 of annex 17 appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an Isofix child restraint system and the location of its Isofix attachments.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Vehicle seat fixture [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Annex 17 Appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX child restraint system and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.044 2011-09-09
Vehicle Seat Fixture [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 VSF (Vehicle Seat Fixture) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Vehicle Seat Fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes whose dimensions are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Appendix 2 to Annex 17 to Regulation No. 16, used by a Child Restraint System manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Vehicle Stability Function [No.013 2010-11-13] 　 Vehicle Stability Function Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following:
(a) directional control;
(b) roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll-over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2010-11-13
Vehicle Stability Function [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Vehicle Stability Function Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.		 No.013 2016-02-18
vehicle type (Approval of a) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
vehicle type (Approval of a) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
vehicle type (Approval of a) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;		 No.125 2010-07-31
vehicle type (Group of) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Group of vehicle types Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Group of vehicle types" means those vehicle types, proposed in future as well as existing now, which are covered by the approval of the worst case, in respect of this Regulation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Vehicle type [Directive 2009/064/EC] 　 Vehicle type Directive 2009/064/EC suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.11. "Vehicle type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means vehicles which do not differ essentially in suchrespects as:
2.1.11.1. the overall size and shape of the engine compartment;
2.1.11.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components and the general wiring arrangement;
2.1.11.3.
the primary material of which the body or shell (if applicable) of the vehicle is constructed (for example, a steel, aluminium or fibreglass body shell); the presence of panels of different material does not change the vehicle typeprovided the primary material of the body is unchanged; however, such variations must be notified.		 Directive 2009/064/EC
vehicle type [Directive 2009/067/EC] 　 vehicle type installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. vehicle type
with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
1.1.
the dimensions and outer shape of the vehicle;
1.2.
the number and positioning of the devices;
1.3. the following are, likewise, considered not to be "vehicles of a different type":
1.3.1. vehicles which differ within the meaning of points 1.1 and 1.2, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the type, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the vehicle type in question;
1.3.2. vehicles on which optional lamps component type-approved by virtue of a Directive are fitted or are absent;		 Directive 2009/067/EC
Vehicle type [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Vehicle type Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Vehicle type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility includes all vehicles, which do not differ essentially in such respects as:
2.9.1. the overall size and shape of the engine compartment;
2.9.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components and the general wiring arrangement;
2.9.3. the primary material of which the body or shell of the vehicle is constructed (for example, a steel, aluminium or fibreglass body shell). The presence of panels of different material does not change the vehicle type provided the primary material of the body is unchanged. However, such variations must be notified.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Vehicle type [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle type Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Vehicle type" in relation to electromagnetic compatibility includes all vehicles, which do not differ essentially in such respects as:
2.9.1. The overall size and shape of the engine compartment;
2.9.2. The general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components and the general wiring arrangement;
2.9.3. The primary material of which the body or shell of the vehicle is constructed (for example, a steel, aluminium or fibreglass body shell). The presence of panels of different material does not change the vehicle type provided the primary material of the body is unchanged. However, such variations must be notified.		 No.010 2012-09-20
Vehicle type [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Vehicle type door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. designation of the vehicle type by the manufacturer;
2.2.2. the type of latch;
2.2.3. the type of door retention component;
2.2.4. the way in which the latches and door retention components are fitted to and retained by the structure of the vehicle;
2.2.5. type of sliding doors.		 No.011 2010-05-13
vehicle type [No.012 2008-06-26] 　 vehicle type Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. Vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine:
2.2.1.1. the structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials of that part of the vehicle forward of the steering control;
2.2.1.2. the mass of vehicle in running order, as defined in paragraph 2.18 below;
2.2.2. Vehicle powered by an electric motor:
2.2.2.1. Dimensions, mass, structure of the vehicle, forms and constituent materials, place of the components of the propulsion system, place of the battery or of the parts of propulsion battery.
2.2.2.2. Mass of the vehicle in running order, as defined in paragraph 2.18 below.		 No.012 2008-06-26
Vehicle type [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Vehicle type protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. Vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine:
2.2.1.1. The structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials of that part of the vehicle forward of the steering control;
2.2.1.2. The mass of vehicle in running order, as defined in paragraph 2.18 below;
2.2.2. Vehicle powered by an electric engine
2.2.2.1. The structure, dimensions, lines and constituent materials of that part of the vehicle forward of the steering control.
2.2.2.2. The locations of the Rechargeable Energy Storage Systems (RESS), in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.2.3. Mass of the vehicle in running order, as defined in paragraph 2.18 below.		 No.012 2013-03-27
Vehicle type [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Vehicle type Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. in the case of power-driven vehicle,
2.2.1.1. the vehicle category, (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.1.2. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.1.3. the distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.1.4. the maximum design speed;
2.2.1.5. a different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer, or any presence of an electric regenerative braking system;
2.2.1.6. the number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.1.7. the engine type;
2.2.1.8. the number and ratios of gears;
2.2.1.9. the final drive ratios;
2.2.1.10. the tyre dimensions;
2.2.2. in the case of trailers,
2.2.2.1. the vehicle category (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.2.2. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.2.3. the distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.2.4. a different type of braking equipment;
2.2.2.5. the number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.2.6. the tyre dimensions;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Vehicle type [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Vehicle type Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. In the case of power-driven vehicle;
2.2.1.1. The vehicle category, (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.1.2. The maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.1.3. The distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.1.4. The maximum design speed;
2.2.1.5. A different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer, or any presence of an electric regenerative braking system;
2.2.1.6. The number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.1.7. The engine type;
2.2.1.8. The number and ratios of gears;
2.2.1.9. The final drive ratios;
2.2.1.10. The tyre dimensions;
2.2.2. In the case of trailers,
2.2.2.1. The vehicle category (see paragraph 1.1 above);
2.2.2.2. The maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.16 below;
2.2.2.3. The distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.2.4. A different type of braking equipment;
2.2.2.5. The number and arrangement of the axles;
2.2.2.6. The tyre dimensions;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Vehicle type [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Vehicle type Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.11 below;
2.2.2. the distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.3. the maximum design speed;
2.2.4. a different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer or any presence of electric braking system;
2.2.5. the engine type;
2.2.6. the number and ratios of gears;
2.2.7. the final drive ratios;
2.2.8. the tyre dimensions.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Vehicle type [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Vehicle type Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. The maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.11 below;
2.2.2. The distribution of mass among the axles;
2.2.3. The maximum design speed;
2.2.4. A different type of braking equipment, with more particular reference to the presence or otherwise of equipment for braking a trailer or any presence of electric braking system;
2.2.5. The engine type;
2.2.6. The number and ratios of gears;
2.2.7. The final drive ratios;
2.2.8. The tyre dimensions.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Vehicle type [No.014 2007-12-06] 　 Vehicle type Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles, which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the safety-belts anchorages and the Isofix anchorages systems and Isofix top tether anchorages if any are attached and, if the anchorages strength is tested according to the dynamic test, the characteristics of any component of the restraint system, especially the load limiter function, having an influence on the forces applying to the safety-belt anchorages.		 No.014 2007-12-06
vehicle type [No.014 2011-04-28] 　 vehicle type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles, which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the safety-belts anchorages and the Isofix anchorages systems and Isofix top- tether anchorages if any are attached and, if the anchorages strength is tested according to the dynamic test, the characteristics of any component of the restraint system, especially the load limiter function, having an influence on the forces applying to the safety-belt anchorages.p		 No.014 2011-04-28
Vehicle type [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Vehicle type safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles, which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the safety-belts anchorages and the ISOFIX anchorages systems and ISOFIX top tether anchorages if any are attached and, if the anchorages strength is tested according to the dynamic test, as well as the vehicle floor strength when tested according to the static test in case of i-Size seating positions, the characteristics of any component of the restraint system, especially the load limiter function, having an influence on the forces applying to the safety-belt anchorages;		 No.014 2015-08-19
Vehicle type [No.017 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle type Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions, materials and the mass of the seats, although the seats may differ in covering and colour; differences not exceeding 5 per cent in the mass of the approved seat type shall not be considered significant;
2.2.2. the type and dimensions of the adjustment, displacement and locking systems of the seat-back and seats and their parts;
2.2.3 the type and dimensions of the seat anchorages;
2.2.4. the dimensions, frame, materials and padding of head restraints, although they may differ in colour and covering;
2.2.5. the type and dimensions of the attachments of the head restraint and the characteristics of the part of the vehicle to which the head restraint is attached, in the case of a separate head restraint;		 No.017 2006-12-27
Vehicle type [No.017 2010-08-31] 　 Vehicle type seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions, materials and the mass of the seats, although the seats may differ in covering and colour; differences not exceeding 5 per cent in the mass of the approved seat type shall not be considered significant;
2.2.2. the type and dimensions of the adjustment, displacement and locking systems of the seat-back and seats and their parts;
2.2.3 the type and dimensions of the seat anchorages;
2.2.4. the dimensions, frame, materials and padding of head restraints, although they may differ in colour and covering;
2.2.5. the type and dimensions of the attachments of the head restraint and the characteristics of the part of the vehicle to which the head restraint is attached, in the case of a separate head restraint;		 No.017 2010-08-31
Vehicle type [No.018 2008-10-15] 　 Vehicle type Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles of categories M2, M3, N2 and N3 which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type;
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts;
2.2.3. the type of protective device		 No.018 2008-10-15
Vehicle type [No.018 2010-05-13] 　 Vehicle type protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles of categories M 2 , M 3 , N 2 and N 3 which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type;
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts;
2.2.3. the type of protective device;		 No.018 2010-05-13
vehicle type [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 vehicle type Interior fittings 2.2. "vehicle type" with regard to the interior fittings of the passenger compartment means vehicles of category M1 which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the lines of constituent materials of the bodywork of the passenger compartment;
2.2.2. the arrangement of the controls;
2.2.3. the performance of the protective system, if the reference zone within the head impact zone determined according to Annex VIII (dynamic evaluation) is chosen by the applicant.
2.2.3.1. Vehicles that differ only in the performance of the protective system(s) belong to the same vehicle type if they offer an equal or better protection for the occupants compared with the system or vehicle submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the approval tests.		 No.021 2008-07-16
Vehicle type [No.024 2006-11-2412] 　 Vehicle type Diesel smoke and power PART II . THE INSTALLATION ON ROAD VEHICLES OF TYPE-APPROVED C.I. ENGINES
12. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
12.2 "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics defined in Annex 1 to this Regulation,		 No.024 2006-11-24
Vehicle type [No.024 2006-11-2421] 　 Vehicle type Diesel smoke and power PART III . EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM A MOTOR VEHICLE WHOSE ENGINE HAS NOT BEEN SEPARATELY APPROVED
21. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of Part III of this Regulation:
21.2 "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics as defined in Annex 1 to the Regulation;		 No.024 2006-11-24
Vehicle type [No.025 2005-12-16] 　 Vehicle type Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the lines and internal dimensions of the bodywork constituting the passenger compartment,
2.1.2. the types and dimensions of the seats,
2.1.3. type and dimensions of head-restraint attachment and of the relevant parts of the vehicle structure in the case of head restraint directly anchored to the vehicle structure;		 No.025 2005-12-16
Vehicle type [No.025 2010-08-14] 　 Vehicle type head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the lines and internal dimensions of the bodywork constituting the passenger compartment,
2.1.2. the types and dimensions of the seats,
2.1.3. type and dimensions of head-restraint attachment and of the relevant parts of the vehicle structure in the case of head restraint directly anchored to the vehicle structure;		 No.025 2010-08-14
Vehicle type [No.026 2005-12-16] 　 Vehicle type External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as, shape or materials of the external surface.		 No.026 2005-12-16
Vehicle type [No.026 2010-08-14] 　 Vehicle type external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as, shape or materials of the external surface.		 No.026 2010-08-14
Vehicle type [No.028 2011-12-0611] 　 Vehicle type audible warning devices 11. DEFINITIONS
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.		 No.028 2011-12-06
vehicle type [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 vehicle type protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicle which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the dimensions, shapes and materials of the components of the vehicle cab; or
2.2.2. the manner of attachment of the cab to the chassis frame.		 No.029 2010-11-20
vehicle type [No.034 2008-07-23] 　 vehicle type Fire risks 7.2. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
7.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions and materials (metal/plastic) of the tank(s);
7.2.2. in vehicles of category M1 (1) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10;
7.2.3. the characteristics and siting of the fuel feed system (pump, filters, etc.); and
7.2.4. the characteristics and siting of the electrical installation in so far as they have an effect on the results of the collision tests prescribed in this Regulation;		 No.034 2008-07-23
vehicle type [No.034 2011-04-28] 　 vehicle type Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.2. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
4.2.1. the manufacturer’s type designation;
4.2.2. in vehicles of category M1 ( 1 ) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10;		 No.034 2011-04-28
Vehicle type [No.034 2011-04-2812] 　 Vehicle type Fire risks PART IV — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE INSTALLATION OF APPROVED FUEL TANK(S)
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
12.2.1. the manufacturer’s type designation;
12.2.2. in vehicles of category M1 ( 1 ) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10.		 No.034 2011-04-28
vehicle type [No.034 2011-04-287] 　 vehicle type Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.2. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
7.2.1. the structure, shape, dimensions and materials (metal/plastic) of the tank(s);
7.2.2. In vehicles of category M1 ( 1 ) the position of the tank(s) in the vehicle in so far as it has a negative effect on the requirements of paragraph 5.10;
7.2.3. the characteristics and siting of the fuel feed system (pump, filters, etc.); and
7.2.4. the characteristics and siting of the electrical installation in so far as they have an effect on the results of the collision tests prescribed in this Regulation;		 No.034 2011-04-28
vehicle type [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 vehicle type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics as specified in Annex 1 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2008-04-12
vehicle type [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 vehicle type Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the vehicle and engine characteristics as specified in Annex 1 of this Regulation;		 No.049 2010-08-31
Vehicle type [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Vehicle type Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the shape or materials of the bodywork (particularly the engine compartment and its soundproofing);
2.2.2. the length and width of the vehicle;
2.2.3. the type of engine (positive or compression ignition, two- or four-stroke, reciprocating or rotary piston), number and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection system, arrangement of valves, rated maximum power and corresponding engine speed(s), or the type of electric motor;
2.2.4. the transmission system, the number of gears and ratios;
2.2.5. the noise reduction system as defined in the following paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4.
2.2.6. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.4, vehicles other than those in categories M1 and N1 (1) having the same type of engine and/or different overall gear ratios, may be regarded as vehicles of the same type.
However, if the above differences provide for a different test method, these differences are to be considered as a change of type.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Vehicle type [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Vehicle type Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ from each other in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the dimensions and external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. the number and position of the devices;
2.2.3. the following shall likewise not be deemed to be ‘vehicles of a different type’:
2.2.3.1. vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 above but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, position and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the vehicle type in question; and
2.2.3.2. vehicles on which lamps approved under one of the Regulations annexed to the 1958 Agreement, or lamps allowed in the country in which the vehicles are registered, are fitted, or are absent where their fitting is optional;		 No.053 2013-06-18
Vehicle type [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle type Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.055 2006-12-27
Vehicle type [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Vehicle type mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer.		 No.055 2010-08-28
Vehicle type [No.059 2006-11-24] 　 Vehicle type Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ significantly in such respects as:
2.6.1. the lines and constituent materials of the body (more particularly the engine compartment and its soundproofing),
2.6.2. the length and width of the vehicle,
2.6.3. the type of engine (positive ignition, compression ignition, two stroke or four stroke, reciprocating or rotary), number and capacity of cylinders, number of carburetors, arrangement of
valves, maximum horse-power and corresponding engine speed (r.p.m.), etc.
2.6.4. number and ratios of gears, total ratio of the transmission,
2.6.5. the number, type and arrangement of the exhaust systems, and
2.6.6. the number, type and arrangement of the intake systems.		 No.059 2006-11-24
Vehicle type [No.060 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in respect of the arrangements which may affect the function or position of the driver-operated controls;		 No.060 2004-03-31
Vehicle type [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Vehicle type Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in respect of the arrangements which may affect the function or position of the driver-operated controls.		 No.060 2014-10-15
Vehicle type [No.061 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle type external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the ‘external surface’;		 No.061 2010-06-30
Vehicle type [No.062 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type,
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts,
2.2.3. the type of protective-device,		 No.062 2004-03-31
Vehicle type [No.062 2013-03-27] 　 Vehicle type Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the manufacturer's indications of the vehicle type,
2.2.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the protective device acts,
2.2.3. the type-of protective-device,		 No.062 2013-03-27
Vehicle type [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Vehicle type Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. "Vehicle type with regard to its temporary-use spare unit":
2.2.1.1. the maximum axle loads of the vehicle, as defined in paragraph 2.12,
2.2.1.2. the characteristics of the temporary-use spare wheel and tyre unit,
2.2.1.3. the method of drive (front wheel, rear wheel, four wheels),
2.2.1.4. the suspension,
2.2.1.5. the braking system,
2.2.1.6. the wheel size/tyre size;
2.2.1.7. the wheel offset.
2.2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its tyre pressure monitoring system":
2.2.2.1. the manufacturer’s trade name or mark,
2.2.2.2. vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the tyre pressure monitoring system,
2.2.2.3. the type and design of the tyre pressure monitoring system		 No.064 2010-11-26
Vehicle type [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles produced with the same design technical specification, main dimensions and constructional arrangement. The vehicle type shall be defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Vehicle type [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles produced with the same design technical specification, main dimensions and constructional arrangement. The vehicle type shall be defined by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Vehicle type [No.067 2008-03-14p2] 　 Vehicle type LPG equipment [PART II] 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.2. "Vehicle type" means a vehicle or a family of vehicles fitted with specific equipment for the use of LPG in its propulsion system, which do not differ with respect to the following conditions:
14.1.2.1. the manufacturer;
14.1.2.2. the type designation established by the manufacturer;
14.1.2.3. the essential aspects of design and construction;
14.1.2.3.1. chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences);
14.1.2.3.2. installation of the LPG equipment (obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.067 2008-03-14
Vehicle type [No.073 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ with respect to the essential points such as the width of the rear axle, the overall width, the dimensions, the shape and the materials of the whole side of the vehicle (including the cab if fitted), and the characteristics of the suspension in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 7 of this Regulation;		 No.073 2004-03-31
Vehicle type [No.073 2010-05-13] 　 Vehicle type lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ with respect to the essential points such as the width of the rear axle, the overall width, the dimensions, the shape and the materials of the whole side of the vehicle (including the cab if fitted), and the characteristics of the suspension in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 7 of this Regulation;		 No.073 2010-05-13
Vehicle type [No.073 2012-05-081] 　 Vehicle type LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions specific to Part I
2.2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of vehicle which does not differ with respect to the essential points such as the width of the rear axle, the overall width, the dimensions, the shape and the materials of the whole side of the vehicle (including the cab if fitted), and the characteristics of the suspension in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 12.		 No.073 2012-05-08
Vehicle type [No.073 2012-05-083] 　 Vehicle type LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definitions specific to Part III
2.4.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(a) the width of the rear axle;
(b) the structure, the dimensions, the shape and the height from the ground of the sides of the vehicle and the characteristics of the suspension, in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 15 of this Regulation;
(c) the approved LPD fitted to the vehicle.		 No.073 2012-05-08
Vehicle type [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Vehicle type Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ from each other in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the dimensions and external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. the number and position of the devices;
2.2.3. the following shall likewise not be deemed to be ‘vehicles of a different type’:
2.2.3.1. vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 above but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, position and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the vehicle type in question;
2.2.3.2. vehicles on which lamps approved under one of the Regulations annexed to the 1958 Agreement, or lamps allowed in the country in which the vehicles are registered, are fitted, or are absent where their fitting is optional;		 No.074 2013-06-18
Vehicle type [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the vehicle category, as defined in the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3),
2.2.2. the maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.14,
2.2.3. the distribution of mass between the axles,
2.2.4. the maximum design speed,
2.2.5. a different type of braking device,
2.2.6. the number and arrangement of the axles,
2.2.7. the engine type,
2.2.8. the number and ratios of gears,
2.2.9. the final drive ratios,
2.2.10. the tyre dimensions;		 No.078 2004-03-31
Vehicle type [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Vehicle type Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Vehicle type" means a sub-category of L-category vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The vehicle category, as defined in the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3);
(b) The gross vehicle mass, as defined in paragraph 2.12;
(c) The distribution of the mass between the axles;
(d) Vmax;
(e) A different type of braking device;
(f) The number and arrangement of the axles;
(g) The engine type;
(h) The number and ratios of gears;
(i) The final drive ratios;
(j) The tyre dimensions.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Vehicle type [No.079 2008-05-27] 　 Vehicle type Steering equipment 2.2. "Vehicle type" means a vehicle which does not differ with respect to the manufacturer"s designation of the vehicle type and in essential characteristics such as:
2.2.1. type of steering equipment, steering control, steering transmission, steered wheels, and energy source.		 No.079 2008-05-27
Vehicle type [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Vehicle type Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially in respect of:
2.4.1. the constructional features relevant to this Regulation; and,
2.4.2. the type or types of type approved seat(s) fitted to the vehicle, if any.		 No.080 2010-06-30
Vehicle type [No.080 2013-08-24] 　 Vehicle type strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially in respect of:
2.4.1. The constructional features relevant to this Regulation; and,
2.4.2. The type or types of type approved seat(s) fitted to the vehicle, if any.		 No.080 2013-08-24
Vehicle type [No.083 2008-05-06] 　 Vehicle type Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as prescribed in Annex 4, paragraph 5.1. and
2.1.2. the engine and vehicle characteristics as defined in Annex 1;		 No.083 2008-05-06
Vehicle type [No.083 2012-02-15] 　 Vehicle type Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a group of vehicles that do not differ in the following respects:
2.1.1. The equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as prescribed in Annex 4a, Table 3; and
2.1.2. The engine and vehicle characteristics as defined in Annex 1;		 No.083 2012-02-15
Vehicle type [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 Vehicle type Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential engine and OBD system characteristics.		 No.083 2012-02-15
Vehicle type [No.083 2015-07-03] 　 Vehicle type Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle type" means a group of vehicles that do not differ in the following respects:
2.1.1. The equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as prescribed in Table A4a/3 of Annex 4a to this Regulation; and
2.1.2. The engine and vehicle characteristics as defined in Annex 1 to this Regulation.		 No.083 2015-07-03
Vehicle type [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Vehicle type Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. For the purpose of Part I and Part II of this Regulation:
2.4.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.4.1.1. The make and type of the SLD, if any,
2.4.1.2. The range of speeds at which the limitation may be set within the range established for the tested vehicle;
2.4.1.3. The ratio of maximum engine power/unladen mass, less than or equal to that of the tested vehicle; and
2.4.1.4. The highest ratio of engine speed/vehicle speed in top gear, less than or equal to that of the tested vehicle.		 No.089 2007-06-19
vehicle type [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 vehicle type Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.8. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not essentially differ in such aspects as:
- the width of the foremost axle measured at the outermost part of the tyres excluding the bulging of the tyres close to the ground;
- the structure, the dimensions, the shape and materials of the front part of the vehicle in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements of the relevant Part of this Regulation;
- the approved FUPDs fitted to the vehicle, where the application is pursuant to satisfying Part II of this Regulation;
- the maximum mass of the vehicle type.		 No.093 2002-02-01
Vehicle type [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Vehicle type Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.8. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not essentially differ in such aspects as:
The width of the foremost axle measured at the outermost part of the tyres excluding the bulging of the tyres close to the ground.
The structure, the dimensions, the shape and materials of the front part of the vehicle in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements of the relevant Part of this Regulation.
The approved FUPDs fitted to the vehicle, where the application is pursuant to satisfying Part II of this Regulation.
The maximum mass of the vehicle type.		 No.093 2010-07-17
Vehicle type [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Vehicle type Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.6.1. The length and width of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.2. The structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the part of the vehicle forward of the transverse plane through the "R" point of the driver's seat, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.3. The lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective system, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.4. The siting (front, rear or centre) and the orientation (transversal or longitudinal) of the engine,
2.6.5. The unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,
2.6.6. The optional arrangements or fittings provided by the manufacturer, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation,		 No.094 2010-05-28
Vehicle type [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle type Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. ‘Vehicle type’ means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.6.1. The length and width of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.6.2. The structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the part of the vehicle forward of the transverse plane through the "R" point of the driver's seat, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.6.3. The lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective system, in so far as they have a negative effect on the results of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.6.4. The siting (front, rear or centre) and the orientation (transversal or longitudinal) of the engine, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test procedure as prescribed in this Regulation;
2.6.5. The unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.6.6. The optional arrangements or fittings provided by the manufacturer, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation;
2.6.7. The locations of the RESS, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation.		 No.094 2012-09-20
Vehicle type [No.095 2007-11-30] 　 Vehicle type Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. the length, width and ground clearance of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.2. the structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the side walls of the passenger compartment in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.3. the lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective systems, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.4. the siting of the engine (front, rear or centre);
2.2.5. the unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.6. the optional arrangements or interior fittings in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.7. the type of front seat(s) and position of the "R" point in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;		 No.095 2007-11-30
Vehicle type [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Vehicle type Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. The length, width and ground learance of the vehicle, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation; 2.2.2. The structure, dimensions, lines and materials of the side walls of the passenger compartment in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.3. The lines and inside dimensions of the passenger compartment and the type of protective systems, in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.4. The sitting of the engine (front, rear or centre) and the orientation (transversal or longitudinal) of the engine, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test of this Regulation;
2.2.5. The unladen mass, in so far as there is a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.6. The optional arrangements or interior fittings in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.7. The type of front seat(s) and position of the ‘R’ point in so far as they have a negative effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation;
2.2.8. The locations of the REESS, in so far as they have a negative effect on the result of the impact test prescribed in this Regulation.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Vehicle type [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Vehicle type Electric vehicle safety 2.2. "Vehicle type" means battery electric road vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
dimensions, structure, shape and nature of constituting materials;
installation of the power system components, battery or battery packs;
nature and type of electric and electronic components.		 No.100 2009-02-14
Vehicle type [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Vehicle type Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(a) installation of the electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage bus;
(b) nature and type of electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage components.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Vehicle type [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Vehicle type Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(a) Installation of the electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage bus;
(b) Nature and type of electric power train and the galvanically connected high voltage components.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Vehicle type [No.101 2007-06-19] 　 Vehicle type CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as body, power train, transmission, traction battery (if applicable), tyres and unladen mass;		 No.101 2007-06-19
Vehicle type [No.101 2012-05-26] 　 Vehicle type CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means a category of power driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as body, power train, transmission, traction battery (if applicable), tyres and unladen mass;		 No.101 2012-05-26
Vehicle type [No.102 2008-12-30] 　 Vehicle type Close coupling devices 2.1.4. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.4.1. The make and type of the close-coupling device;
2.1.4.2. The length and width of the vehicles;
2.1.4.3. The mass of the vehicles;
2.1.4.4. The points of attachment of the close-coupling device;
2.1.4.5. The vehicle description (e.g. truck, tractor, trailer, semi-trailer, centre-axle trailer);
2.1.4.6. Steering equipment (e.g. auxiliary steering equipment, steering equipment of the trailer).		 No.102 2008-12-30
Vehicle type [No.103 2007-06-19] 　 Vehicle type Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Vehicle type"
See paragraph 2.3 of Regulation No 83.		 No.103 2007-06-19
Vehicle type [No.105 2005-12-16] 　 Vehicle type Carriage of dangerous goods — construction of vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.105 2005-12-16
Vehicle type [No.105 2010-08-31] 　 Vehicle type carriage of dangerous goods - constructional features 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ essentially with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.		 No.105 2010-08-31
Vehicle type [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Vehicle type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) chassis manufacturer;
c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
d) bodywork concept (single / double deck, articulated, low-floor).
e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical
unit means a category of bodywork which do not essentially differ in the following aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
c) bodywork concept (single/ double deck, articulated, low-floor).
d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Vehicle type [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) chassis manufacturer;
(c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(d) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(c) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
(e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Vehicle type [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Vehicle type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
(a) Bodywork manufacturer;
(b) Chassis manufacturer;
(c) Vehicle concept (＞ 22 passengers or ≦ 22 passengers);
(d) Bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor);
(e) Bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Vehicle type [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Vehicle type burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as the manufacturer's type designation.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Vehicle type [No.110 2008-03-14P2] 　 Vehicle type Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) PART II
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles fitted with specific components for the use of CNG in their propulsion system which do not differ with respect to the following conditions:
14.1.2.1. the manufacturer;
14.1.2.2. the type designation established by the manufacturer,
14.1.2.3. the essential aspects of design and construction:
14.1.2.3.1. chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences);
14.1.2.3.2. the installation of the CNG equipment(obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.110 2008-03-14
Vehicle type [No.110 2011-05-07p2] 　 Vehicle type using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.2. "Vehicle type" means vehicles fitted with specific components for the use of CNG in their propulsion system which do not differ with respect to the following conditions:
14.1.2.1. the manufacturer;
14.1.2.2. the type designation established by the manufacturer,
14.1.2.3. the essential aspects of design and construction:
14.1.2.3.1. chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences);
14.1.2.3.2. the installation of the CNG equipment(obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.110 2011-05-07
Vehicle type [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Vehicle type using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.9. "Vehicle type" means vehicles fitted with specific components for the use of CNG and/or LNG in their propulsion system which does not differ with respect to the following conditions:
4.9.1. The manufacturer,
4.9.2. The type designation established by the manufacturer,
4.9.3. The essential aspects of design and construction:
4.9.3.1. Chassis/floor pan (obvious and fundamental differences),
4.9.3.2. The installation of the CNG and/or LNG equipment (obvious and fundamental differences).		 No.110 2015-06-30
vehicle type [No.111 2002-02-01] 　 vehicle type Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "vehicle type" means a category of vehicle which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.2.1. vehicle category, (see paragraph 1) and type (truck, full trailer, semi-trailer, centre-axle trailer) (4);
2.2.2. maximum mass, as defined in paragraph 2.4;
2.2.3. cross-section profile of the tank (circular, elliptical, maxi-volume);
2.2.4. maximum height of the centre of gravity of the laden vehicle;
2.2.5. distribution of mass among the axles (including fifth wheel);
2.2.6. number and arrangement of the axles (including axle spacing);
2.2.7. suspension arrangements in relation to roll characteristics;
2.2.8. tyre size and structure (radial ply, diagonal ply or bias belted);
2.2.9. track width;
2.2.10. wheel base;		 No.111 2002-02-01
Vehicle type [No.116 2010-06-30P1] 　 Vehicle type Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as:
5.1.1.1. the manufacturer's type designation;
5.1.1.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the device to prevent unauthorised use acts;
5.1.1.3. the type of device to prevent unauthorised use.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Vehicle type [No.116 2012-02-16P1] 　 Vehicle type Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means a category of motor vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
5.1.1.1. the manufacturer’s type designation,
5.1.1.2. the arrangement and design of the vehicle component or components on which the device to prevent unauthorised use acts,
5.1.1.3. the type of device to prevent unauthorised use.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Vehicle type [No.118 2010-07-10I] 　 Vehicle type Fire resistance of interior materials 5. PART I - APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE BURNING BEHAVIOUR OF THE INTERIOR COMPONENTS USED IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles that do not differ in such essential respects as the manufacturer's typedesignation.		 No.118 2010-07-10
Vehicle type [No.121 2010-07-10] 　 Vehicle type Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles, which do not differ in respect of the internal arrangements,which may affect the identification of symbols for controls, tell-tales, and indicators and operationof controls.		 No.121 2010-07-10
Vehicle type [No.121 2016-01-08] 　 Vehicle type Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles, which do not differ in respect of the internal arrangements, which may affect the identification of symbols for controls, tell-tales and indicators, and operation of controls.		 No.121 2016-01-08
vehicle type (Approval of a) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Approval of a vehicle type Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;		 No.130 2014-06-18
vehicle type (Family of) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Family of vehicle types Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Family of vehicle types" means those vehicle types, proposed in future as well as existing now, which are covered by the approval of the worst case, in respect of this Regulation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Vehicle type as regards safety belt and restraint system [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems [No.016 2007-11-30] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2007-11-30
Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.		 No.016 2011-09-09
vehicle type Part II [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 vehicle type RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 13.1.2. "vehicle type" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
- the width of the rear axle,
- the structure, the dimensions, the shape and the height from the ground of the rear part of the vehicle and the characteristics of the suspension, in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 19 of this Regulation,
- the approved RUPDs fitted to the vehicle.		 No.058 2008-08-30
vehicle type Part III [No.058 2008-08-30] 　 vehicle type RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 22.1.2. "vehicle type" means a category of vehicles which do not differ with respect to the essential points as the width of the rear axle, the structure, the dimensions, the shape and the materials of the rear part of the vehicle, the characteristics of the suspension in so far as they have a bearing on the requirements specified in paragraph 25 of this Regulation; No.058 2008-08-30
Vehicle type with regard to emission [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Vehicle type with regard to emissions Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.64. "Vehicle type with regard to emissions" means a group of vehicles which do not differ in essential engine and vehicle characteristics as set out in Annex 1;		 No.049 2013-06-24
vehicle type with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information [REG. No 692/2008] 　 vehicle type with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles		 1. "vehicle type with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information" means a group of vehicles which do not differ in the following respects:
(a) the equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as provided for in paragraph 5.1 of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 (2);
(b) the engine and vehicle characteristics as set out in Appendix 3 of Annex I;		 REG. No 692/2008
Vehicle type with regard to heating system [No.122 2010-06-30P1] 　 Vehicle type with regard to heating system Heating systems 5. PART I . APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE WITH REGARD TO ITS HEATING SYSTEM
5.1. Definition
5.1.1. "Vehicle type with regard to heating system" means vehicles which do not differ in essential respects such as the functioning principle(s) of the heating system.		 No.122 2010-06-30
Vehicle type with regard to its AEBS [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) Vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Advanced Emergency Braking System;
(c) The type and design of the Advanced Emergency Braking System.		 No.131 2014-07-19
Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system [No.097 2012-05-082] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer"s trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system [No.116 2010-06-30P3] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P3] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS,
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser [No.097 2012-05-083] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser;
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.097 2012-05-08
Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser [No.116 2010-06-30P4] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser;
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser [No.116 2012-02-16P4] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.10. "Vehicle type with regard to its immobiliser" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the immobiliser,
(c) the type and design of the immobiliser.		 No.116 2012-02-16
Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Lane Departure Warning System;
(c) the type and design of the Lane Departure Warning System;		 No.130 2014-06-18
Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Lane Departure Warning System;
(c) the type and design of the Lane Departure Warning System;		 No.130 2014-06-18
Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. the external and internal forms and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1 which may affect visibility; and
2.2.2. the shape and dimensions of the windscreen and its mounting;		 No.125 2010-07-31
Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices [No.048 2008-05-23] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means vehicles which do not differ in the essential respects mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1. to 2.2.4.
The following are likewise considered not to be "vehicles of a different type": vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1. to 2.2.4., but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps and the inclination of the dipped-beam prescribed for the vehicle type in question, and vehicles on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent:
2.2.1. the dimension and the external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. the number and positioning of the devices;
2.2.3. the headlamp-levelling system;
2.2.4. the suspension system.		 No.048 2008-05-23
Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices [No.048 2011-12-06] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices" means vehicles which do not differ in the essential respects mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4.
The following are likewise considered not to be "vehicles of a different type": vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps and the inclination of the dipped-beam prescribed for the vehicle type in question, and vehicles on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent:
2.2.1. The dimension and the external shape of the vehicle;
2.2.2. The number and positioning of the devices;
2.2.3. The headlamp-levelling system;
2.2.4. The suspension system.		 No.048 2011-12-06
Vehicle width [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Vehicle width Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle width" means the distance between two planes parallel to the longitudinal median plane (of the vehicle) and touching the vehicle on either side of the said plane but excluding the rear- view mirrors, side marker lamps, tyre pressure indicators, direction indicator lamps, position lamps, flexible mud-guards and the deflected part of the tyre side-walls immediately above the point of contact with the ground;		 No.094 2010-05-28
Vehicle width [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle width Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle width" means the distance between two planes parallel to the longitudinal median plane (of the vehicle) and touching the vehicle on either side of the said plane but excluding the rear- view mirrors, side marker lamps, tyre pressure indicators, direction indicator lamps, position lamps, flexible mud-guards and the deflected part of the tyre side-walls immediately above the point of contact with the ground;		 No.094 2012-09-20
Vehicle wiring harness [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Vehicle wiring harness Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle wiring harness" means supply voltage, bus system (e.g. CAN), signal or active antenna cables, which are installed by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.010 2010-05-08
Vehicle wiring harness [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle wiring harness Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle wiring harness" means supply voltage, bus system (e.g. CAN), signal or active antenna cables, which are installed by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.010 2012-09-20
vehicle with opening roof [No.021 2008-07-16] 　 vehicle with opening roof Interior fittings 2.8. "vehicle with opening roof" means a vehicle of which only the roof or part of it can be folded back or be opened, or may slide, leaving the existing structural elements of the vehicle above the belt line (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.5); No.021 2008-07-16
Vehicle without roof [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle without roof Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.9. "Vehicle without roof" ( 1 ) means a vehicle without roof over all or part of its deck. In the case of a double-decked vehicle this shall be the upper deck. Space for standing passengers shall not be provided on any deck without roof, independently of the class of vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Vehicle without roof [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Vehicle without roof Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.9. "Vehicle without roof" (1) means a vehicle without roof over all or part of its deck. In the case of a double-decked vehicle this shall be the upper deck. Space for standing passengers shall not be provided on any deck without roof, independently of the class of vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
veneer (Sidewall) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Sidewall veneer 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Sidewall veneer" is material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed.		 No.108 2006-07-04
veneer (Sidewall) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Sidewall veneer Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Sidewall veneer" is a material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed.		 No.109 2006-07-04
Venting [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Venting using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.45. "Venting" means the discharge of vapours out of the storage container/tank.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Venting system [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Venting system using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.46. "Venting system" means a system that controls the release of natural gas from the LNG storage system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Verification [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Verification Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.95. "Verification" means to evaluate whether or not a measurement system's outputs agree with a range of applied reference signals to within one or more predetermined thresholds for acceptance. Contrast with "calibration";		 No.096 2014-03-22
Vertical longitudinal central plane [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vertical longitudinal central plane (VLCP) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the midpoints of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Vertical longitudinal central plane [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 VLCP (Vertical longitudinal central plane) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the mid- points of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2011-03-30
vertical position (installed in a, Material) [No.108 2015-04-21] 　 Material installed in a vertical position burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.9. "Material installed in a vertical position" means materials installed in the interior compartment, the engine compartment and any separate heating compartment of the vehicle such that its slope exceeds 15 % from the horizontal when the vehicle is at its mass in running order and it is standing on a smooth and horizontal ground surface.		 No.108 2015-04-21
Very High Flexion Tyre [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Very High Flexion Tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.
2.20.1. "Improved Flexion Tyre" or "Very High Flexion Tyre" describe a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding standard tyre.		 No.106 2010-09-30
vessel [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 "Tank" (or vessel) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.14. "Tank" (or vessel) means any storage system used for liquefied natural gas.		 No.110 2015-06-30
vessel (Inner) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Inner vessel or inner tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.70. "Inner vessel or inner tank" means part of the fuel tank that contains LNG.		 No.110 2015-06-30
vessel (Outer) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Outer vessel or outer jacket using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.71. "Outer vessel or outer jacket" means part of the fuel tank that encases the inner vessel or inner tank(s) and its insulation system.		 No.110 2015-06-30
view mirror (Rear) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Rear-view mirror" means any device intended to give a clear view to the rear;		 No.081 2012-07-13
view mirror (rear, Class of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Class of rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Class of rear-view mirrors" means all devices having one or several features or functions in common.
The rear-view mirrors mentioned in this Regulation are grouped in Class "L".		 No.081 2012-07-13
view mirror (rear, constituent parts of the, Radius of curvature of the) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.		 No.081 2012-07-13
view mirror (rear, vehicle as regards, Type of) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 13. DEFINITIONS
13.2. "Type of vehicle as regards rear-view mirrors" means vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
13.2.1. The geometrical features of the vehicle, liable to influence the installation of rear-view mirrors,
13.2.2. The positions and types of rear-view mirror specified.		 No.081 2012-07-13
view mirror type (Rear) [No.081 2012-07-13] 　 Rear-view mirror type Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Rear-view mirror type" means devices which do not differ in respect of the following main characteristics:
2.2.1. The dimensions and radius of curvature of the rear-view mirror reflecting surface,
2.2.2. The design, shape or materials of the rear-view mirrors, including the connection with the vehicle;		 No.081 2012-07-13
Viewing axis on to the LED light source [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Viewing axis on to the LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. Viewing axis on to the LED light source: an axis through the light centre at defined polar and azimuthal angle used to characterise photometrical properties of the LED light source.		 No.128 2014-05-29
Viewing reference point [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Viewing reference point Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.11. "Viewing reference point" means the point linked to the vehicle to which the prescribed field ofvision is related. This point is the projection on the ground of the intersection of a vertical planepassing through the driver’s ocular points with a plane parallel to the median longitudinal planeof the vehicle situated 20 cm outside the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
visibility (driver, requisite for, glazing material, Safety) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.23.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.23.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward field of vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver's R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
visibility (driver, Safety glazing material requisite for) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Safety glazing material requisite for driver visibility"
2.18.1. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's forward field of vision" means all the glazing situated in front of a plane passing through the driver’s R point and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.
2.18.2. "Safety glazing material requisite for the driver's rearward vision" means all glazing situated behind a plane passing through the driver’s R point perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle through which the driver can view the road when driving or manoeuvring the vehicle.		 No.043 2010-08-31
visibility (geometric, Angle of) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp is visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 to this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;		 No.048 2011-12-06
visibility (geometric, Angle of) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;		 No.053 2013-06-18
visibility (geometric, Angle of) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal.		 No.074 2013-06-18
visibility (geometric, Angles of) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see explanatory figure below).[図]		 No.086 2010-09-30
Visible lane marking [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Visible lane marking Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Visible lane marking" means delineators intentionally placed on the borderline of the lane that are directly visible by the driver while driving (e.g. not covered by snow, etc.);		 No.130 2014-06-18
vision (Ambinocular) [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Ambinocular vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.2. "Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of themonocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below). [図]		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (Ambinocular) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Ambinocular vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2."Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of the mon ocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below).
Figure 3		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (Area of) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Area of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Area of vision" means that part of the field of vision which is delimited:
2.8.1. in an upward direction by a horizontal plane passing through the reference point,
2.8.2. on the plane of the road by the area, situated outside the semi-circle of vision, which extends the area of the semi-circle of vision, whose chord, 9,5 m in length, is perpendicular to and bisected by the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the driver's seat;		 No.071 2004-03-31
vision (Area of) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Area of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Area of vision" means that part of the field of vision which is delimited:
2.8.1. in an upward direction by a horizontal plane passing through the reference point;
2.8.2. on the plane of the road by the area, situated outside the semi-circle of vision, which extends the area of the semi-circle of vision, whose chord, 9,5 m in length, is perpendicular to and bisected by the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the driver’s seat.		 No.071 2010-07-31
vision (circle of, Semi-) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point
situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc — seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels — is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2);		 No.071 2004-03-31
vision (circle of, Semi-) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc – seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels – is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2).		 No.071 2010-07-31
vision (Critical field of) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Critical field of vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.10. "Critical field of vision" means the area in which a critical object has to be detected by means ofa device for indirect vision and that is defined by an angle and one or more detection distances.		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (Field of) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Field of vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.8. "Field of vision" means the section of the tri-dimensional space which is monitored with the helpof a device for indirect vision. Unless otherwise stated, this is based on the view on ground leveloffered by a device and/or devices other than mirrors. This may be limited by the relevant detection distance corresponding to the critical object..		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (Field of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Field of vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.8."Field of vision" means the section of the tri-dimensional space which is monitored with the help of a device for indirect vision. Unless otherwise stated, this is based on the view on ground level offered by a device and/or devices other than mirrors. This may be limited by the relevant detec tion distance corresponding to the critical object.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (Field of) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Field of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Field of vision" means the aggregate of forward and side directions in which the tractor driver can see;		 No.071 2004-03-31
vision (Field of) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Field of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Field of vision" means the aggregate of forward and side directions in which the tractor driver can see.		 No.071 2010-07-31
vision (field of, Vehicle type with regard to the) [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to the field of vision" means vehicles which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
2.2.1. the external and internal forms and arrangements within the area specified in paragraph 1 which may affect visibility; and
2.2.2. the shape and dimensions of the windscreen and its mounting;		 No.125 2010-07-31
vision (indirect, Camera-monitor device for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2.		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (indirect, Device for) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Devices for indirect vision" means devices to observe the traffic area adjacent to the vehicle which cannot be observed by direct vision. These can be conventional mirrors, camera-monitors or other devices able to present information about the indirect field of vision to the driver.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (indirect, device for, Other) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Other devices for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3."Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1 above, where the field of vision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indi rect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (indirect, device for, Type of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4."Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essential characteristics:
(a) Design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork;
(b) In case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mir ror’s reflecting surface;
(c) In case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (indirect, Devices for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Devices for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Devices for indirect vision" means devices to observe the traffic area adjacent to the vehicle which cannot be observed by direct vision. These can be conventional mirrors, camera-monitors or other devices able to present information about the indirect field of vision to the driver.		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (indirect, monitor device for, Camera) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Camera-monitor device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2."Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2 below.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (indirect, Other devices for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Other devices for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Other devices for indirect vision" means devices as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field ofvision is not obtained by means of a mirror or a camera-monitor type device for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (indirect, Type of device for) [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Type of device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Type of device for indirect vision" means devices that do not differ on the following essentialcharacteristics:
- design of the device inclusive, if pertinent, the attachment to the bodywork,
- in case of mirrors the class, the shape, the dimensions and radius of curvature of the mirror's reflecting surface,—
in case of camera-monitor devices the detection distance and the range of vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
vision (indirect, vehicle as regard, Type of) [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.3."Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respect of the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optional devi ces for indirect vision.		 No.046 2014-08-08
vision (indirect, vehicle as regards, Type of) [No.046 2010-07-10II] 　 Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.3. "Type of vehicle as regards indirect vision" means motor vehicles which are identical in respectof the following basic features:
12.3.1. Type of device for indirect vision;
12.3.2. The bodywork features which reduce the field of vision;
12.3.3. The coordinates of point R (where applicable);
12.3.4. The prescribed positions, and type-approval markings of compulsory and (if fitted) optionaldevices for indirect vision.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Vision support system [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Vision support system Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.4. "Vision support system" means a system to enable the driver to detect and/or see objects in thearea adjacent to the vehicle.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Vision support system [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Vision support system devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.4."Vision support system" means a system to enable the driver to detect and/or see objects in the area adjacent to the vehicle.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Visual spectrum [No.046 2010-07-10] 　 Visual spectrum Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.12. "Visual spectrum" means light with a wavelength within the range of the perceptual limits of thehuman eyes: 380-780 nm.		 No.046 2010-07-10
Visual spectrum [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Visual spectrum devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.12."Visual spectrum" means light with a wavelength within the range of the perceptual limits of the human eyes: 380-780 nm.		 No.046 2014-08-08
Visual warning [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Visual warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Visual warning" means a warning by visual signal (lighting, blinking or visual display of symbol or message).		 No.016 2011-09-09
Visual warning [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Visual warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Visual warning" means a warning by visual signal (lighting, blinking or visual display of symbol or message).		 No.016 2015-11-20
VLCP [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Vertical longitudinal central plane (VLCP) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the midpoints of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2007-12-06
VLCP [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 VLCP (Vertical longitudinal central plane) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the mid- points of the front axle track and the rear axle track.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Vmax (speed, Maximum) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Maximum speed Vmax Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Maximum speed Vmax" is the maximum speed reached by the vehicle in the first half period of the response curve as defined in the figure of Annex 5 (para. 1.1.4.2.4);		 No.089 2007-06-19
Void to fill ratio [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Void to fill ratio Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Void to fill ratio" means the ratio between the area of voids in a reference surface and the area of this reference surface calculated from the mould drawing.		 No.117 2011-11-23
voltage (High) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 High voltage protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "High voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is > 60 V and ≤ 1 500 V direct current (DC) or > 30 V and ≤ 1 000 V alternating current (AC) root-mean-square (rms);		 No.012 2013-03-27
Voltage (High) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 High Voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High Voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is > 60 V and ≤ 1 500 V direct current (DC) or > 30 V and ≤ 1 000 V alternating current (AC) root – mean – square (rms),		 No.094 2012-09-20
voltage (High) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 High voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is ＞ 60 V and ≦ 1 500 V direct current (DC) or ＞ 30 V and ≦ 1 000 V alternating current (AC) root-mean-square (rms).		 No.095 2015-07-10
Voltage (High) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 High Voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "High Voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is > 60 V and ≤ 1 500 V DC or > 30 V and ≤ 1 000 V AC root mean square (rms).		 No.100 2011-02-14
Voltage (High) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 High Voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "High Voltage" means the classification of an electric component or circuit, if its working voltage is ＞ 60 V and ≦ 1 500 V DC or ＞ 30 V and ≦ 1 000 V AC root mean square (rms).		 No.100 2015-03-31
voltage (Rated) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Rated voltage Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. "Rated voltage": voltage (in volts) marked on the filament lamp.		 No.037 2010-11-13
voltage (Rated) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Rated voltage Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.3. "Rated voltage": Input voltage marked on the ballast.		 No.099 2010-06-30
voltage (Rated) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Rated voltage Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.1. Rated voltage: voltage (in volts) marked on the LED light source;		 No.128 2014-05-29
voltage (Test) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Test voltage Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.3. "Test voltage": voltage, at the filament lamp terminals for which the electrical and photometric characteristics of the filament lamp are intended and are to be tested.		 No.037 2010-11-13
voltage (Test) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Test voltage Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. "Test voltage": Voltage, at the input terminals of the ballast for which the electrical and photometric characteristics of the gas-discharge light source are intended and are to be tested.		 No.099 2010-06-30
voltage (Test) [No.128 2014-05-29] 　 Test voltage(s) Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. Test voltage(s): voltage(s) or voltage range(s), at the LED light sources terminals for which the electrical and photometric characteristics of the LED light sources are intended and are to be tested.		 No.128 2014-05-29
voltage (Working) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Working voltage protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively;		 No.012 2013-03-27
voltage (Working) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Working voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.094 2012-09-20
voltage (Working) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Working voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.095 2015-07-10
voltage (Working) [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Working voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating condition. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.100 2011-02-14
voltage (Working) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Working voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating condition. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.100 2015-03-31
Voltage Bus (High) [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 High Voltage Bus protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Voltage Bus (High) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 High Voltage Bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage,		 No.094 2012-09-20
voltage bus (High) [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 High voltage bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on a high voltage.		 No.095 2015-07-10
voltage bus (High) [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on high voltage.
Where electrical circuits, that are galvanically connected to each other, are galvanically connected to the electrical chassis and the maximum voltage between any live part and the electrical chassis or any exposed conductive part is ≦ 30 V AC and ≦ 60 V DC, only the components or parts of the electric circuit that operate on high voltage are classified as a high voltage bus.		 No.100 2015-03-31
VOLTAGE MARKINGS [No.098 2010-06-30A08] 　 VOLTAGE MARKINGS gas-discharge light sources [ANNEX 7] VOLTAGE MARKINGS
[* * V]
This marking must be placed on the main body of each headlamp containing only gas discharge light sources and ballast, and on each external part of the ballast. The ballast(s) is(are) designed for a ** Volts network system.
【略】		 No.098 2010-06-30
volume (assessment, dimension, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg dimension assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
volume (assessment, foot, leg, Support) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Support leg foot assessment volume safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Support leg foot assessment volume" means the volume, as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of Annex 10 to this Regulation, in which the support leg foot of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129 will rest and therefore the vehicle floor has to intersect;		 No.014 2015-08-19
volume (assessment, foot, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Support-leg foot assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.129 2014-03-29
volume (assessment, installation, leg, support, i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.		 No.016 2015-11-20
Vset (speed, Set) [No.089 2007-06-19] 　 Set speed Vset Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Set speed Vset" means the intended mean vehicle speed when operating in a stabilised condition;		 No.089 2007-06-19
VSF [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in figures 1 to 6 of annex 17 appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an Isofix child restraint system and the location of its Isofix attachments.		 No.044 2007-11-23
VSF [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Vehicle seat fixture (VSF) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle seat fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 2.1.1.7 and whose dimension are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Annex 17 Appendix 2 of Regulation No 16, used by a child restraint manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX child restraint system and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.044 2011-09-09
VSF [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 VSF (Vehicle Seat Fixture) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Vehicle Seat Fixture (VSF)" means a fixture, according to ISOFIX size classes whose dimensions are given in Figures 1 to 6 of Appendix 2 to Annex 17 to Regulation No. 16, used by a Child Restraint System manufacturer to determine the appropriate dimensions of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System and the location of its ISOFIX attachments.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
w (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 w : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
W l [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
W=Hgas x Root (ρair/ρgas)		 No.049 2008-04-12
W l [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
[式 W=]		 No.049 2010-08-31
W l [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wl, Wu (Wobbe index : lower; or upper) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.66. "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
[式] W = H gas SQRT(ρ air / ρ gas)		 No.049 2013-06-24
W u [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
W=Hgas x Root (ρair/ρgas)		 No.049 2008-04-12
W u [No.049 2010-08-31] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
[式 W=]		 No.049 2010-08-31
W u [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wl, Wu (Wobbe index : lower; or upper) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.66. "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
[式] W = H gas SQRT(ρ air / ρ gas)		 No.049 2013-06-24
Waistrail [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Waistrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Waistrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork below the side windows. In the rollover test the waistrail may be the second area to contact the ground after initial deformation of the vehicle cross-section.		 No.066 2007-12-06
Waistrail [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Waistrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Waistrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork below the side windows. In the rollover test the waistrail (in the case of a double deck coach, the waistrail of the upper deck) may be the second area to contact the ground after initial deformation of the vehicle cross-section.		 No.066 2011-03-30
wall (Side) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Side wall Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Side wall" means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange.		 No.075 2011-03-30
Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.65. "Wall flow Diesel Particulate Filter" means a Diesel Particulate Filter ("DPF") in which all the exhaust gas is forced to flow through a wall which filters out the solid matter;		 No.049 2013-06-24
warm up cycle [No.083 2012-02-15A11] 　 warm-up cycle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. A "warm-up cycle" means sufficient vehicle operation such that the coolant temperature has risen by a least 22 K from engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 343 K (70 °C).		 No.083 2012-02-15
warm-up cycle [No.049 2008-04-12A9] 　 warm-up cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"warm-up cycle" means sufficient engine operation such that the coolant temperature has risen by at least 22 K from engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 343 K (70℃);		 No.049 2008-04-12
warning (Audible) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Audible warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Audible warning" means a warning by sound signal.		 No.016 2011-09-09
warning (Audible) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Audible warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Audible warning" means a warning by sound signal.		 No.016 2015-11-20
warning (First level) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 First level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "First level warning" means a visual warning activated when the ignition switch is engaged (engine running or not) and the driver’s safety-belt is not fastened. An audible warning can be added as an option.		 No.016 2011-09-09
warning (level, First) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 First level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "First level warning" means a visual warning activated when the ignition switch is engaged (engine running or not) and the driver's safety-belt is not fastened. An audible warning can be added as an option.		 No.016 2015-11-20
warning (level, Second) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Second level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Second level warning" means a visual and audible warning activated when a driver operates a vehicle without fastening the safety-belt.		 No.016 2015-11-20
warning (Second level) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Second level warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Second level warning" means a visual and audible warning activated when a driver operates a vehicle without fastening the safety-belt.		 No.016 2011-09-09
warning (Visual) [No.016 2011-09-09] 　 Visual warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Visual warning" means a warning by visual signal (lighting, blinking or visual display of symbol or message).		 No.016 2011-09-09
warning (Visual) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Visual warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.42. "Visual warning" means a warning by visual signal (lighting, blinking or visual display of symbol or message).		 No.016 2015-11-20
Warning device [No.097 2008-12-30] 　 Warning device Alarm systems 2.3. "Warning device" means a device indicating that intrusion into or interference has occurred; No.097 2008-12-30
Warning device [No.097 2012-05-08a] 　 Warning device alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Warning device" means a device indicating that intrusion into or interference has occurred;		 No.097 2012-05-08
Warning device [No.116 2010-06-30P2] 　 Warning device Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.4. "Warning device" means a device indicating that intrusion into or interference has occurred.		 No.116 2010-06-30
Warning device [No.116 2012-02-16P2] 　 Warning device Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.4. "Warning device" means a device indicating that intrusion into or interference has occurred.		 No.116 2012-02-16
warning device (Optical) [No.060 2014-10-15] 　 Optical warning device Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Optical warning device" means a headlamp where the beam can be flashed to give signals to the oncoming or preceding traffic, e.g., when a vehicle is about to overtake a slower preceding vehicle.		 No.060 2014-10-15
warning devices [No.028 2011-12-06] 　 AWD (warning devices) audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3 type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I);
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2011-12-06
warning devices (audible) [No.028 2005-12-16] 　 audible warning devices (AWD) Audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood
to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than ar equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2005-12-16
warning devices (audible) [No.028 2010-07-17] 　 audible warning devices (AWD) audible warning devices I. AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).		 No.028 2010-07-17
warning phase (Collision) [No.131 2014-07-19] 　 Collision warning phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Collision warning phase" means the phase directly preceding the emergency braking phase, during which the AEBS warns the driver of a potential forward collision.		 No.131 2014-07-19
warning signal (Hazard) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.18. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction- indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;		 No.048 2011-12-06
warning signal (Hazard) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Hazard warning signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.14. "Hazard warning signal" means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction-indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road users;		 No.053 2013-06-18
warning signal (Hazard-) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Stop lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.13. "Hazard-warning signal" means the device permitting the simultaneous operation of all of a tractor's direction indicator lamps to draw attention to the fact that the tractor temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;		 No.086 2010-09-30
warning symbol (speed, maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 maximum speed warning symbol Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 5. SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS
5.1. General
5.1.4. The temporary-use spare unit shall exhibit the following characteristics:
5.1.4.1. An 80 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 80km/h]
5.1.4.1.1. An 120 km/h maximum speed warning symbol arranged in accordance with the diagram below shall be permanently displayed on the outer face of the wheel in a prominent position. [図 : 50mmΦmin丸 に 120km/h]		 No.064 2010-11-26
warning system (closure, Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] 　 Door closure warning system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Door closure warning system" is a system that will activate a visual signal located where it can be clearly seen by the driver when a door latch system is not in its fully latched position and while the vehicle ignition is activated.		 No.011 2010-05-13
Warning System (Lane Departure) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" means a system to warn the driver of an unintentional drift of the vehicle out of its travel lane;		 No.130 2014-06-18
Warning System (Lane Departure, Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.130 2014-06-18] 　 Vehicle type with regard to its LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Lane Departure Warning System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Lane Departure Warning System;
(c) the type and design of the Lane Departure Warning System;		 No.130 2014-06-18
warning system (Run-flat) [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Run-flat warning system Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Run-flat warning system" describes a system which delivers information to the driver that a tyre is operating in the flat tyre running mode.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Waste-heat heating system [No.122 2010-06-30P2] 　 Waste-heat heating system Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.4. "Waste-heat heating system" means any type of device using the waste heat from the engine used for propulsion of the vehicle to increase the temperature of the interior of the vehicle, this may include water, oil or air as the transfer medium.		 No.122 2010-06-30
wattage (Rated) [No.037 2010-11-13] 　 Rated wattage Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. "Rated wattage": wattage (in watts) marked on the filament lamp which may be incorporated into the international designation of the relevant category.		 No.037 2010-11-13
wattage (Rated) [No.099 2010-06-30] 　 Rated wattage Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.4. "Rated wattage": Wattage marked on the gas-discharge light source and ballast.		 No.099 2010-06-30
wear indicators (Tread) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Tread wear indicators 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Tread wear indicators" means the projections within the tread grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degree of wear of the tread.		 No.108 2006-07-04
webbing guide (safety-belt, Adult) [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2007-11-23
webbing guide (safety-belt, Adult) [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.		 No.044 2011-09-09
wedges (Steering) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 Steering wedges Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling.		 No.055 2006-12-27
wedges (Steering) [No.055 2010-08-28] 　 Steering wedges mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling.		 No.055 2010-08-28
weight (maximum) [No.093 2002-02-01] 　 maximum weight Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "maximum weight" of the vehicle means the vertical force (in newtons) required to support the same vehicle loaded to its maximum mass;		 No.093 2002-02-01
weight (Maximum) [No.093 2010-07-17] 　 Maximum weight Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.2. "Maximum weight" of the vehicle means the vertical force (in newtons) required to support the same vehicle loaded to its maximum mass;		 No.093 2010-07-17
weighting factor (Gear ratio) [No.051 2007-05-30] 　 Gear ratio weighting factor k Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Gear ratio weighting factor k" means a dimensionless numerical quantity used to combine the test results of two gear ratios for the acceleration test and the constant speed test.		 No.051 2007-05-30
Wet brake [No.078 2004-03-31] 　 Wet brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Wet brake" means a brake or brakes which has or have been treated in accordance with paragraph 1.6 of annex 3 of this Regulation.		 No.078 2004-03-31
Wet grip index [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 "G" (Wet grip index) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.4. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the performance of the standard reference test tyre.		 No.117 2011-11-23
Wet grip index ("G") [No.117 2008-08-29] 　 Wet grip index ("G") Tyre noise and wet grip 2.15. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the erformance of the standard reference test tyre. No.117 2008-08-29
Wet Grip measurement [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Wet Grip measurement Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.1. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT).
2.17.2. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation.
2.17.3. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre – see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.17.4. "Wet grip index ("G")" means the ratio between the performance of the candidate tyre and the performance of the standard reference test tyre.
2.17.5. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up.
2.17.6. "Mean fully developed deceleration ("mfdd")" means the average deceleration calculated on the basis of the measured distance recorded when decelerating a vehicle between two specified speeds.
2.17.7. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer shall be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test.		 No.117 2011-11-23
wet surface (Adhesion on) [No.117 2011-11-23] 　 Adhesion on wet surfaces Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.1. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT).		 No.117 2011-11-23
Wheel [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Wheel Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Wheel" means a complete wheel consisting of a rim and a wheel disc;
2.3.1. "Wheel size designation" means a designation comprising at least the nominal rim diameter, the nominal rim width and the rim profile;
2.3.2. "Wheel offset" means the distance from the hub abutment face to the centre line of the rim.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Wheel [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Wheel" means a rotating load-carrying member between the tyre and the axle. It usually consists of two major parts:
(a) the rim;
(b) the wheel disc.
The rim and wheel disc may be integral, permanently attached, or detachable.
2.1.1. "Disc wheel" means a permanent combination of a rim and wheel disc.
2.1.2. "Wheel with demountable rim " means a wheel so constructed that the demountable rim is clamped to the wheel disc.
2.1.3. "Rim" means that part of the wheel on which the tyre is mounted and supported.
2.1.4. "Wheel disc" means that part of the wheel which is the supporting member between the axle and the rim.		 No.124 2006-12-27
wheel (front and rear, lockup of the, Simultaneous) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2016-02-18
Wheel calliper [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel calliper (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Wheel calliper" is the rotating profile shape, formed by the internal wheel contour (see Annex 10, figure 1).		 No.124 2006-12-27
Wheel load [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Wheel load [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
Wheel load [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Wheel load [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
wheel load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
wheel load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2016-02-18] ★ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2016-02-18
wheel load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
wheel load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Wheel lock [No.078 2015-01-30] 　 Wheel lock Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Wheel lock" means the condition that occurs when there is a slip ratio of 1,00.		 No.078 2015-01-30
Wheel size designation [No.064 2010-11-26] 　 Wheel size designation Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Wheel" means a complete wheel consisting of a rim and a wheel disc;
2.3.1. "Wheel size designation" means a designation comprising at least the nominal rim diameter, the nominal rim width and the rim profile;
2.3.2. "Wheel offset" means the distance from the hub abutment face to the centre line of the rim.		 No.064 2010-11-26
Wheel type [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Wheel type (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Wheel type" means a wheel which does not differ in the following essential characteristics:
the wheel manufacturer;
wheel or rim size designation (according to ISO 3911:1998);
1/ Categories M and O as defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of
Vehicles (R.E.3) (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).
2.2.3. construction materials;
2.2.4. wheel attachment holes;
2.2.5. maximum load capacity;
2.2.6. recommended maximum inflation pressure;
2.2.7. method of production (welded, forged, cast,…).		 No.124 2006-12-27
wheel tyre (Tractor-drive) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Tractor-drive wheel tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tractor-drive wheel tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to driven axles of agricultural tractors (vehicles in categories T) suitable for sustained high torque service. The tread pattern of the tyre consists of lugs or cleats.		 No.106 2010-09-30
wheel/axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;		 No.013 2010-09-30
Wheelchair user [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2006-12-27
Wheelchair user [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2010-09-29
Wheelchair user [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Wheelchair user Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Wheelchair user" means a person who due to infirmity or disability uses a wheelchair for mobility.		 No.107 2015-06-18
wheels (front and rear, lockup of the, Simultaneous) [No.013 2010-09-30] 　 Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Simultaneous lockup of the front and rear wheels" refers to the condition when the time interval between the first occurrence of lockup of the last (second) wheel on the rear axle and the first occurrence of lockup on the last (second) wheel on the front axle is less than 0,1 second.		 No.013 2010-09-30
wheels (OE-) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 OE-wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "OE-wheels" means wheels which are authorized to be fitted, to the vehicle model, by the vehicle manufacturer during the production of the vehicle.		 No.124 2006-12-27
Wheels (Replacement) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Replacement Wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Replacement Wheels" means wheels which are intended to replace the OE wheels during the service life of the vehicle. Replacement wheels may belong to one of the following category:
2.4.1. "Vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels" being wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer;
2.4.2. "Identical replacement wheels" being wheels which are manufactured using the same manufacturing equipment and material as that used for replacement wheels supplied by the vehicle manufacturer. They differ from vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels only by the absence of vehicle manufacturer’s trademarks and part number;
2.4.3. "Replica replacement wheels" being wheels which are replicas of vehicle manufacturer's replacement wheels but produced by a manufacturer who is not a supplier of the vehicle manufacturer with the specified wheel. With regard to the design (basic contour, dimensions, inset, material type and quality and so on) and service life they fully correspond to vehicle manufacturer’s replacement wheels;
2.4.4. "Pattern part replacement wheels" being wheels produced by a manufacturer who is not a supplier of the vehicle manufacturer with the specified wheel. With regard to the design, inset, rim designation wheel fixing PCD and spigot mounting diameter, correspond to that of an OE-wheel, but wheel contour, material and so on, may be different;		 No.124 2006-12-27
wheels (Special) [No.124 2006-12-27] 　 Special wheels (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Special wheels" means wheels which are not OE-wheels and which do not fulfil the criteria for wheels described in paragraph 2.4. (for example wheels with different rim width or diameter).		 No.124 2006-12-27
White [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 White Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, , ,W61		 No.048 2011-12-06
White (Daytime colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 White (Daytime colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
White (Night-time Colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 White (Night-time Colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] W12,W23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
WHITE LIGHT (COLOUR OF) [No.119A4 2014-03-25] 　 COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT Cornering lamps [ANNEX 4] COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT (Chromaticity coordinates)
1. For checking the colorimetric characteristics, a source of light at a colour temperature of 2 856 K, corresponding to illuminant A of the international commission (CIE), shall be used. For lamps equipped with non-replaceable light sources (filament lamps and other), or light sources (replaceable or non-replaceable) operated together with an electronic light source control gear, the colorimetric characteristics should be verified with the light sources present in the lamp, in accordance with paragraph 7 of this Regulation.
2. The replaceable light source shall be subjected to the intensity, which produces the same colour as the illuminant A of the CIE.		 No.119 2014-03-25
WHTC [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Wide angle exterior mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] 　 Wide-angle exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(c) Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.4 of this Regulation;		 No.046 2014-08-08
width (Over all) [No.053 2013-06-18] 　 Over-all width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Over-all width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.12 above;		 No.053 2013-06-18
width (Over all) [No.074 2013-06-18] 　 Over-all width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Over-all width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.12 above;		 No.074 2013-06-18
width (Overall) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 Overall width Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, including labelling (marking), decoration and protective bands or ribs; in the case of tyres where the tread is wider than the section width, the overall width corresponds to the tread width.		 No.075 2011-03-30
width (Overall) [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Overall width Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Overall width" means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.11 above.		 No.086 2010-09-30
width (Overall) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Overall width Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated tyre, including labelling (marking), decoration and protective bands or ribs;		 No.106 2010-09-30
width (Overall) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Overall width 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including		 No.108 2006-07-04
width (Overall) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Overall width Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Overall width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.109 2006-07-04
width (Section) [No.075 2011-03-30] 　 S (Section width) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the side walls of an inflated pneumatic tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.075 2011-03-30
width (Section) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Section width 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Section width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.108 2006-07-04
width (Section) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] 　 Section width Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Section width" means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.		 No.109 2006-07-04
width (Section) [No.106 2010-09-30] 　 Section width (S) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Section width (S)" means the linear distance between the outsides of the sidewalls of an inflated tyre, excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs;		 No.106 2010-09-30
width (Vehicle) [No.094 2010-05-28] 　 Vehicle width Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle width" means the distance between two planes parallel to the longitudinal median plane (of the vehicle) and touching the vehicle on either side of the said plane but excluding the rear- view mirrors, side marker lamps, tyre pressure indicators, direction indicator lamps, position lamps, flexible mud-guards and the deflected part of the tyre side-walls immediately above the point of contact with the ground;		 No.094 2010-05-28
width (Vehicle) [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle width Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Vehicle width" means the distance between two planes parallel to the longitudinal median plane (of the vehicle) and touching the vehicle on either side of the said plane but excluding the rear- view mirrors, side marker lamps, tyre pressure indicators, direction indicator lamps, position lamps, flexible mud-guards and the deflected part of the tyre side-walls immediately above the point of contact with the ground;		 No.094 2012-09-20
winding (tension, controlled) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 controlled tension winding Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.9. controlled tension winding: A process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.		 No.110 2008-03-14
winding (tension, Controlled) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Controlled tension winding using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.54. "Controlled tension winding" means a process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.		 No.110 2015-06-30
window (Double or multiple) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window;		 No.107 2006-12-27
window (Double or multiple) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window;		 No.107 2010-09-29
window (Double or multiple) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Double or multiple window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Double or multiple window" means an emergency window which, when divided into two or more parts by imaginary vertical line(s) (or plane(s)), exhibits two or more parts respectively, each of which complies as to dimensions and access with the requirements applicable to a normal emergency window.		 No.107 2015-06-18
window (Double) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Double window Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Double window" means an assembly of two glazing panes separately installed within the same opening of the vehicle;		 No.043 2010-08-31
window (Double) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Double window safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Double window" means an assembly of two panes separately installed within the same opening of the vehicle.		 No.043 2014-02-12
window (Emergency) [No.107 2006-12-27] 　 Emergency window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency window" means a window, not necessarily glazed, intended for use as an exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2006-12-27
window (Emergency) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Emergency window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency window" means a window, not necessarily glazed, intended for use as an exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2010-09-29
window (Emergency) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Emergency window Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency window" means a window, not necessarily glazed, intended for use as an exit by passengers in an emergency only.		 No.107 2015-06-18
windscreen (Inclination angle of a) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Inclination angle of a windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.12.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 ± 1 kg;
2.12.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer;		 No.043 2010-08-31
Windscreen [No.029 2010-11-20] 　 Windscreen protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Windscreen" means the frontal glazing of the vehicle situated between the A-pillars.		 No.029 2010-11-20
Windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Windscreen" means the glazing in front of the driver through which the driver views the road ahead.		 No.043 2014-02-12
windscreen (angle of a, Inclination) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Inclination angle of a windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.15.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 ± 1 kg;
2.15.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer.		 No.043 2014-02-12
windscreen (area of the, Transparent) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Transparent area of the windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Transparent area of the windscreen" means the glazing area contained within the design glass outline, excluding any allowed opaque obscuration (see Annex 18), but including any shade band.		 No.043 2014-02-12
windscreen (area of, Developed) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Developed area of windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured;		 No.043 2010-08-31
windscreen (area of, Developed) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Developed area of windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured.		 No.043 2014-02-12
windscreen (Group of) [No.043 2014-02-12] 　 Group of windscreens safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests.
2.16.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.16.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter.		 No.043 2014-02-12
Windscreen datum points [No.125 2010-07-31] 　 Windscreen datum points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Windscreen datum points" means points situated at the intersection with the windscreen of lines radiating forward from the V points to the outer surface of the windscreen.		 No.125 2010-07-31
windscreen wipers (area of the (Operating) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2010-07-31
windscreen wipers (Operating area of the) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2004-03-31
windscreens (Group of) [No.043 2010-08-31] 　 Group of windscreens Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests;
2.13.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre;
2.13.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre.		 No.043 2010-08-31
wipers (windscreen, area of the (Operating) [No.071 2010-07-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2010-07-31
wipers (windscreen, Operating area of the) [No.071 2004-03-31] 　 Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.		 No.071 2004-03-31
wiring harness (Vehicle) [No.010 2010-05-08] 　 Vehicle wiring harness Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle wiring harness" means supply voltage, bus system (e.g. CAN), signal or active antenna cables, which are installed by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.010 2010-05-08
wiring harness (Vehicle) [No.010 2012-09-20] 　 Vehicle wiring harness Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle wiring harness" means supply voltage, bus system (e.g. CAN), signal or active antenna cables, which are installed by the vehicle manufacturer.		 No.010 2012-09-20
without roof (Vehicle) [No.107 2010-09-29] 　 Vehicle without roof Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.9. "Vehicle without roof" ( 1 ) means a vehicle without roof over all or part of its deck. In the case of a double-decked vehicle this shall be the upper deck. Space for standing passengers shall not be provided on any deck without roof, independently of the class of vehicle.		 No.107 2010-09-29
without roof (Vehicle) [No.107 2015-06-18] 　 Vehicle without roof Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.9. "Vehicle without roof" (1) means a vehicle without roof over all or part of its deck. In the case of a double-decked vehicle this shall be the upper deck. Space for standing passengers shall not be provided on any deck without roof, independently of the class of vehicle.		 No.107 2015-06-18
Wobbe index [No.049 2008-04-12] 　 Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
W=Hgas x Root (ρair/ρgas)		 No.049 2008-04-12
Wobbe index (lower; or upper) [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 Wl, Wu (Wobbe index : lower; or upper) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.66. "Wobbe index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)" means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions:
[式] W = H gas SQRT(ρ air / ρ gas)		 No.049 2013-06-24
work (Body) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Body work Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Body work" means the complete structure of the vehicle in running order, including all the structural elements which form the passenger compartment, driver’s compartment, baggage compartment and spaces for the mechanical units and components.		 No.066 2007-12-06
work (Body) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Body work Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Body work" means the complete structure of the vehicle in running order, including all the structural elements which form the passenger compartment(s), driver’s compartment, baggage compartment and spaces for the mechanical units and components.		 No.066 2011-03-30
Work lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] 　 Work lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.21. Work lamp
"Work lamp" means a device for illuminating a working area or process.		 Directive 2009/061/EC
Work lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] 　 Work lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.21. "Work lamp" means a device for illuminating a working area or process;		 No.086 2010-09-30
Working pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] 　 Working pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.		 No.067 2008-03-14
Working pressure [No.110 2008-03-14] 　 Working pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected
to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.		 No.110 2008-03-14
working pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 working pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.24. working pressure: The settled pressure of 20 MPa at a uniform temperature of 15℃.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Working pressure [No.110 2011-05-07] 　 Working pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 °C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which a component is taken during acceptance testing.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration.
2.1.4. "Operating temperatures" means maximum values of the temperature ranges, indicated in Annex 5O, at which safe and good functioning of the specific component is ensured and for which it has been designed and approved.		 No.110 2011-05-07
Working pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Working pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.4. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which a component is designed to be subjected to and which is the basis for determining the strength of the component under consideration. For CNG cylinder, the settled pressure of 20 MPa at a uniform temperature of 15 °C. For LNG tank, the pressure of the LNG tank primary relief valve setting.		 No.110 2015-06-30
Working voltage [No.012 2013-03-27] 　 Working voltage protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively;		 No.012 2013-03-27
Working voltage [No.094 2012-09-20] 　 Working voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.094 2012-09-20
Working voltage [No.095 2015-07-10] 　 Working voltage Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.095 2015-07-10
Working voltage [No.100 2009-02-14] 　 Working voltage Electric vehicle safety 2.23. "Working voltage" means the highest root-mean-square (rms) value of an electrical circuit voltage, specified by the manufacturer, which may occur across any insulation, in open circuit conditions or under normal operating conditions. No.100 2009-02-14
Working voltage [No.100 2011-02-14] 　 Working voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating condition. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.100 2011-02-14
Working voltage [No.100 2015-03-31] 　 Working voltage Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Working voltage" means the highest value of an electrical circuit voltage root-mean-square (rms), specified by the manufacturer, which may occur between any conductive parts in open circuit conditions or under normal operating condition. If the electrical circuit is divided by galvanic isolation, the working voltage is defined for each divided circuit, respectively.		 No.100 2015-03-31
World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;		 No.049 2013-06-24
Worst case [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Worst case Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Worst case" means the vehicle type, among a group of vehicle types, least likely to withstand the requirements of this Regulation in respect of the strength of superstructure. The three parameters which define the worst case are: structural strength, reference energy and the residual space		 No.066 2007-12-06
Worst case [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 Worst case Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Worst case" means the vehicle type, among a group of vehicle types, least likely to withstand the requirements of this Regulation in respect of the strength of superstructure. The three parameters which define the worst case are: structural strength, reference energy and the residual space.		 No.066 2011-03-30
wound (Strip-) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] 　 Strip-wound 　 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.		 No.108 2006-07-04
wrap (full-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 full-wrap Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.12. full-wrap: An over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement both in the circumferential and axial direction of the cylinder.		 No.110 2008-03-14
wrap (Full) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Full-wrap using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.57. "Full-wrap" means an over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement both in the circumferential and axial direction of the cylinder.		 No.110 2015-06-30
wrap (hoop-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 hoop-wrap Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.14. hoop-wrap: An over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement in a substantially circumferential pattern over the cylindrical portion of the liner so that the filament does not carry any significant load in a direction parallel to the cylinder longitudinal axis.		 No.110 2008-03-14
wrap (Hoop) [No.110 2015-06-30] 　 Hoop-wrap using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.59. "Hoop-wrap" means an over-wrap having a filament wound reinforcement in a substantially circumferential pattern over the cylindrical portion of the liner so that the filament does not carry any significant load in a direction parallel to the cylinder longitudinal axis.		 No.110 2015-06-30
wrap (over-) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] 　 over-wrap Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.18. over-wrap: The reinforcement system of filament and resin applied over the liner.		 No.110 2008-03-14
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
X (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] 　 X : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force		 No.055 2006-12-27
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
Y shaped belt [No.044 2007-11-23] 　 Y-shaped belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.044 2007-11-23
Y shaped belt [No.044 2011-09-09] 　 Y-shaped belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child’s legs and a strap for each shoulder;		 No.044 2011-09-09
Y shaped belt [No.129 2014-03-29] 　 Y-shaped belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.		 No.129 2014-03-29
Yaw rate [No.013H 2010-08-31] 　 Yaw rate Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Yaw rate" means the rate of change of the vehicle’s heading angle measured in degrees/second of rotation about a vertical axis through the vehicle’s centre of gravity.		 No.013H 2010-08-31
Yaw rate [No.013H 2015-12-22] 　 Yaw rate Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Yaw rate" means the rate of change of the vehicle’s heading angle measured in degrees/second of rotation about a vertical axis through the vehicle’s centre of gravity.		 No.013H 2015-12-22
Yellow (Daytime colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Yellow (Daytime colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] Y12,T23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Yellow (Night-time Colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Yellow (Night-time Colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: Y12,Y23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
yellow (Selective) [No.048 2011-12-0602] 　 Selective-yellow Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.2. "Selective-yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [表] SY12,SY23, ,		 No.048 2011-12-06
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
zero (To) [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 To zero Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.96. "To zero" means to adjust an instrument so it gives a zero response to a zero calibration standard, such as purified nitrogen or purified air for measuring concentrations of emission constituents;		 No.096 2014-03-22
Zero gas [No.096 2014-03-22] 　 Zero gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.97. "Zero gas" means a gas that yields a zero response in an analyser. This may either be purified nitrogen, purified air, a combination of purified air and purified nitrogen.		 No.096 2014-03-22
Zero response [No.049 2013-06-24A4] 　 Zero response Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.21. "Zero response" means the mean response to a zero gas during a 30 s time interval.		 No.049 2013-06-24
zone (Plastic) [No.066 2007-12-06] 　 Plastic zone (PZ) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Plastic zone" (PZ) means a special geometrically limited part of the superstructure in which, as the result of dynamic, impact forces:
- large scale plastic deformations are concentrated,
- essential distortion of the original shape (cross section, length, or other geometry) occurs,
- loss of stability occurs, as a result of local buckling,
- kinetic energy is absorbed due to deformation.		 No.066 2007-12-06
zone (Plastic) [No.066 2011-03-30] 　 PZ (Plastic zone) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Plastic zone" (PZ) means a special geometrically limited part of the superstructure in which, as the result of dynamic, impact forces:
- large scale plastic deformations are concentrated;
- essential distortion of the original shape (cross section, length, or other geometry) occurs;
- loss of stability occurs, as a result of local buckling;
- kinetic energy is absorbed due to deformation.		 No.066 2011-03-30
zone (Reference) [No.014 2015-08-19] 　 Reference zone safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head form apparatus, as described in Regulation No 21, Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that Annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm;		 No.014 2015-08-19
zone (Reference) [No.016 2015-11-20] 　 Reference zone Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the head-form apparatus, described in Regulation No 21 Annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex to Regulation No 21 and set to the maximum length of 840 mm.		 No.016 2015-11-20
zone (Reference) [No.080 2010-06-30] 　 Reference zone Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Reference zone" means the space between two vertical longitudinal planes, 400 mm apart and symmetrical with respect to the H-point, and defined by rotation from vertical to horizontal of the headform apparatus, described in Regulation No 21, annex 1. The apparatus shall be positioned as described in that annex of Regulation No 21 and set to its maximum length of 840 mm and its minimum length of 736 mm for residual limitation of said space.		 No.080 2010-06-30
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source
α (Observation angle) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Observation angle (symbol α) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol α)", the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles. Maximum range: 0° ≤ α ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
α (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Observation angle (symbol α) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol α)" means the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles;		 No.104 2014-03-14
β (Entrance angle) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Entrance angle (symbol β) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol β)", the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90° but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0° ≤ β ≤ 180°. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, β 1 and β 2 .		 No.069 2010-07-31
β (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Entrance angle (symbol β) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol β)" means the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90° but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0° ＜ β ＜ 180°. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, β 1 and β 2 ;		 No.104 2014-03-14
β1 (entrance angle, First component of the) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.9. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1)", the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis. Range: – 180° < β 1 ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
β1 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 First component of the entrance angle (symbol β1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol β 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180° ＜ β1 ＜ 180°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
β2 (Second component of the entrance angle) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.10. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2)", the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis. Range: – 90° ≤ β 2 ≤ 90°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
β2 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol β 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90° ＜ β2 ＜ 90°;		 No.104 2014-03-14
ε (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Rotation angle (symbol ε) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.8. "Rotation angle (symbol ε)" means the angle indicating the orientation of the retro-reflecting material by an appropriate symbol with respect to rotation about the reference axis;		 No.104 2014-03-14
ε(Angle of rotation) [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Angle of rotation (ε) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.12. Angle of rotation ε
Angle through which the sample is turned about its vertical axis from any arbitrarily established position counterclockwise (+ ε) or clockwise (– ε) viewed in the direction of illumination. If retro- reflective materials or devices have a marking (e.g. TOP), this marking governs the starting position. The angle of rotation ε lies in the range – 180° < ε ≤ 180°.		 No.069 2010-07-31
η [No.069 2010-07-31] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (η) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (symbol η)", the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.		 No.069 2010-07-31
η1 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol η1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
η2 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] 　 Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol η2)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the receiver as seen from the reference centre (β1 = β2 = 0°);		 No.104 2014-03-14
λ-shift factor [No.049 2013-06-24] 　 S λ (λ-shift factor) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.67. "λ-shift factor (S λ )" means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ratio λ if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Appendix 5 to Annex 4 for the calculation of S λ ).		 No.049 2013-06-24
Top　Sort MK 用語 対象分野 定義 Source

Home FAQ EU関連情報 Top 質問l ご意見、ご要望、ご質問 はお気軽に

©2009-2016 H.Ishiguro